Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Thu, 01 Jun 2023 21:15:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.1.1 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ 32 32 The best travel drones for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-travel-drones/ Thu, 01 Jun 2023 21:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=545305
The best travel drones composited
Stan Horaczek

Bring a drone with you on your next trip to capture truly unique angles.

The post The best travel drones for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best travel drones composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Mavic Mini 3 drone DJI Mavic Mini 3 Pro
SEE IT

Despite its advanced camera, this drone only weighs 249 grams so it doesn’t require registration with the FAA.

Best for pros DJI Mavic 3 drone in a hand on an orange background DJI Mavic 3
SEE IT

A very robust camera system and advanced all-around object avoidance make this drone worthy of pro work.

Best for photos The Parrot Afani drone Parrot Anafi
SEE IT

A unique camera system captures 4K footage and provides a view unlike the rest of its competition.

Travel drones aren’t just for professional creatives anymore. In the last few years, these pint-sized crafts have become widely accessible thanks to compact and budget-friendly options hitting the market. A travel drone is a great way to capture photos and footage with unique perspectives while you are on the road. It’s a great tool for travel vloggers, filmmakers, or families looking for a way to keep kids entertained on vacation. While you can go seriously Hollywood with your purchase, we think the best drone options are either so compact that they don’t even need to be registered with the FAA or feature a foldable design that makes them easy to slide into a camera backpack. Price can vary widely depending on what types of advanced features that drone might include and the manufacturer. A higher-end consumer drone will typically cost about $2K, while budget options can be as low as $100. In this buying guide, you will find the best travel drones that fit various budgets and use cases.

How we chose the best travel drones 

When selecting the products in this buying guide, it was important to select a combination of compact travel drones (that don’t need to be registered with the FAA) and a few full-sized drones aimed at a professional user. We selected products that would fit a range of budgets and skill levels and represented different brands currently on the market. When selecting the drones in this buying guide, we also considered flight time, video capture capability, and advanced features that make specific models stand out in the field. Camera quality and functionality play a key role in our selections. The products that appear in this guide were selected through a combination of hands-on experience, editorial reviews, and user feedback.

The best travel drones: Reviews & Recommendations 

While we offer specific recommendations depending on your usage, many of the drones on this list will work for several kinds of pilots. Be sure to check out the entire list before making a purchase to make sure you’re getting what you need out of your new flying machine.

Best overall: DJI Mini 3 Pro

Mason Marsh

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: Under 249 grams
  • Flight Time: 38 minutes 
  • Video: 4K 

Pros

  • No need to register with FAA
  • Small and compact 
  • Vertical shooting capabilities
  • Dedicated controller
  • Wind resistant up to 38kph winds

Cons

  • Expensive for size 
  • Visibility in air could be improved 

The DJI Mini Pro 3 claims our spot as best overall travel drone due to its compact size, substantial flight time, and advanced features like 3-way obstacle avoidance. And because this particular drone is under 249 grams, there’s no need to register it with the FAA before you take to the skies. The impressive 38-minute battery life can be extended to 51 minutes when used with the Intelligent Flight Battery Plus—a flight time unheard of for most compact drones on the market. It can shoot 4K/60fps video and capture 48-megapixel RAW images; it also features vertical shooting—ideal for capturing social videos for TikTok or Instagram stories. A variety of QuickShot modes make it easy to capture panoramas and pre-programmed dynamic flight patterns. It has a fast F/1.7 lens, which means it will perform well at sunset or on overcast days, plus it features wind resistance up to 38kph so that it can withstand a bit of turbulence. The DJI Mini Pro 3’s all-in-one RC-N1 controller has a nicely sized 5-inch screen, eliminating the need to use your smartphone while flying. The DJI Mini Pro packs pro-level features into a super compact package that can easily fit into a camera backpack. Although it’s on the pricey side for its size, we think the advanced features make it a worthy investment for taking on your next adventure. 

Read our full review: DJI Mini Pro 3

Best value: Holy Stone HS110D FPV RC Drone

Holy Stone

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 149 grams
  • Flight Time: 20 minutes
  • Video: 1080p 

Pros

  • Affordable price point
  • Easy-to-use controller
  • Compact size 
  • No need to register with FAA
  • In air flip mode 

Cons

  • No wind resistance 
  • Limited flight time 

The Holy Stone HS110D FPV RC Drone is a great option if you are looking for a travel drone that won’t break the bank. At under $100, this is one of the most affordable compact drones on the market. Its compact size also means it doesn’t require registration with the FAA—making it a nice choice for care-free flying.  The Holy Stone has a 120-degree “first-person view” camera and can shoot 1080p video. Flight time is shorter than other compact drones, and this drone lacks wind resistance, but this is to be expected, given the super low price point. The Holy Stone does include fun pre-programmed flight patterns like in-air flips, and features like altitude hold and landing assists. Intuitive in-app features allow users to control the drone through gestures or draw a flight path for the drone to follow. This is a great travel drone if you aren’t looking to spend a fortune to capture your out-of-town adventures. 

Best for professionals: DJI Mavic 3

Dan Bracaglia

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 895 grams
  • Flight Time: 46 minutes
  • Video: 5.1K

Pros

  • 4/3 CMOS Hasselblad Camera 
  • Advanced Omnidirectional Object sensing 
  • 15-kilometer transmission range 
  • Smart return to home feature 
  • Folding design 

Cons

  • Expensive, over 2K 
  • Requires registration with FAA 

If you are looking for a travel drone with all the pro-level features, look no further. The DJI Mavic 3 is the priciest option on our list, and because of its larger size must be registered with the FAA, but its foldable design still makes it an excellent option for travel. The DJI Mavic 3 is equipped with a 4/3 CMOS Hasselblad camera and a sensor that provides 12.8 stops of dynamic range—making for footage that has a lot more detail in both the highlights and the shadows. It can shoot 5.1K video up to 50fps, 4K video up to 120fps, and capture 20-megapixel 12-bit RAW stills. It has an impressive flight time of 46 minutes, a 15-kilometer transmission range, and advanced features like omnidirectional object sensing, with improved range—giving users way more time to react and prevent crashing into a tree while flying. Other pro-level features include Advanced Return To Home, which will automatically bring your drone back to you using the most energy-efficient route. Although the DJI Mavic 3 is expensive, the top-level features and impressive camera make it well worth the price point. 

Read our full review: DJI Mavic 3

Best for beginners: Ryze Tech Tello Mini Drone

Ryze Tech

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 79.9 grams 
  • Flight Time: 13 minutes
  • Video: 720p 

Pros

  • Lightweight build 
  • DJI-powered flight controller 
  • Good for kids 
  • No need to register with FAA

Cons

  • Very short flight time 
  • No wind resistance 
  • Only capable of shooting 720p video

Ryze Tech Tello Mini Drone Quadcopter is a great choice for the novice drone pilot. Although its flight time is much shorter than some of the other drones in this buying guide and video is limited to 720p, it’s extremely easy to operate. It also happens to have a DJI-powered flight controller for performing in-air tricks. The drone’s mobile programming app supports Scratch, which allows users to program corresponding movements using coding blocks. It can shoot 5-megapixel photos, and pre-programmed modes like Circle-360 and Up & Away make it easy to capture short clips even if you don’t know how to fly. Overall, this is a great starter drone for kids and adults who want to capture an aerial perspective while traveling. 

Best for photos: Parrot Anafi

Parrot

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 707 grams
  • Flight Time: 25 minutes 
  • Video: 4K 

Pros

  • Capable of capturing 21-megapixel images 
  • Features timer and burst mode shooting options
  • Folding design 
  • Built around a Sony CMOS sensor

Cons

  • Limited flight time 
  • Not great in low light 
  • No wind resistance 

If you primarily want to capture photos with your drone, the Parrot Anafi is a great choice. It can shoot 4K video at 60fps, but it really shines as a tool for photographers. The Parrot Anafi is built around a Sony CMOS sensor with a unique camera that offers a vertical 180-degree field of view. It has a vertical folding design that makes it easy to slide into a backpack with other gear—making it an ideal choice for travel. The navigation app is intuitive and easy to use. The price point falls right in the middle of the pack, making this an appealing option for a wide variety of budgets. 

What to consider when choosing a travel drone

When shopping for a travel drone, you should consider your budget and how you will be using the drone first and foremost.

Camera

We live in a 4K world at the moment, but camera tech doesn’t necessarily stop there. Some higher-end drones can capture 5K and beyond, allowing oversampled 4K footage with more detail or simply a bigger frame so you can crop in later while maintaining a full-res picture. Ideally, you’ll get 4K footage at 60fps with a reasonable megapixel count for photos. Of course, you’ll want to think about how you will use that footage later on. You may not need 4K at a high framerate if you’re trying to make a simple travel blog. In fact, it may hinder your editing process. Find a balance between easy edibility and high quality, then stick with it.

Weight

You’re traveling with these machines, so you want them to be as light as possible. Most only weigh a few pounds at most. But be sure to note the 250g threshold. A drone weighing 250 grams or more requires registration with the FAA before you can fly. Conveniently, our top pick on this list weighs 249 grams for this exact reason.

Obstacle avoidance

While drones have gotten easier to fly in recent years, you still have to navigate the learning curve. Unfortunately, tons of trees, houses, and power lines are littering that learning curve. Higher-end drones offer dedicated object avoidance systems that automatically stop a craft from smacking into something it shouldn’t. Top-tier models offer object avoidance in almost every direction, but more consumer models typically only see in front of them and sometimes to the side. It’s a nice touch if you’re learning and want to minimize possible damage.

Range

Some high-end drones can go nearly 20 miles away from their pilots, but local regulations and practical considerations make that unlikely for most users. If you’re considering two drones and opting toward one because it has a longer range, just be sure you will need that range. If all you plan is to fly it up into your neighborhood or over the lake, you don’t need a massive flight area.

Flight time

Drone batteries are small, and the juice inside can fade fast if conditions are less than perfect. Every gust of wind or fancy maneuver requires more power to execute. Our top pick, the DJI Mini 3 Pro, promises “up to 34 minutes” of flight time, but that “up to” is doing a lot of work. Add wind or complex movements, and that will drop quickly. You also couldn’t stay fully airborne for 34 minutes unless you’re cool with the craft falling out of the sky once the battery is exhausted.

Should you buy the Fly More combo?

DJI typically offers its drones on their own or as part of a Fly More combo, which includes a carrying case, extra rotors, and (most importantly) extra batteries. The Fly More combos typically offer a better deal than buying all the products together. And since you’re definitely going to want extra batteries (and a dedicated charger that can handle more than one cell at once), we recommend you invest upfront.

FAQs

Q: What type of drone is best for long-distance flying?

Generally speaking, the more expensive a drone is, the longer it will be able to stay in the air and have a longer transmission signal. Consumer drones that are best for long-distance flying include the DJI Mavic 3, which has a 15-kilometer transmission range and an impressive flight time of 46 minutes. While toy drones have a much more limited transmission range and flight time. Regardless of how far you are flying a drone, it’s important to keep it within sight.

Q: What to avoid when flying a travel drone?

Even if you are flying a compact drone that doesn’t need to be registered with the FAA, there are a number of things that you should avoid. You should keep your drone at or below 400 feet and have it within sight while flying. Don’t fly drones near airports, in restricted airspace, near emergency response efforts, or over stadiums or sporting events. Although many drones feature wind resistance, it’s also best to avoid flying your drone in inclement weather. 

Q: Are travel drones worth it?

If you are looking for a fun way to capture images and video footage away from home, a compact travel drone is a great way to do it. Whether you are bringing along an ultra-compact drone that doesn’t need to be registered with the FAA, or a more advanced foldable drone—these flying machines offer a unique perspective. Yes, we absolutely think that travel drones are worth the investment. 

Final thoughts on the best travel drones 

A travel drone is a great way to capture unique aerial perspectives with ease and is a worthy investment for travel vloggers, filmmakers, or families looking for a fun way to document their vacation. The DJI Mini 3 Pro takes the cake for being the best overall travel drone thanks to its impressive flight time, compact size, and video and photo capabilities. Although it’s small enough that you don’t need to register it with the FAA before you fly, it still manages to pack many pro-level features into its tiny body. If you are interested in a travel drone to capture your adventures, we recommend checking out any of these top options.  

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best travel drones for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
A graduation gift guide for grads who love the outdoors: From practical tools to personalized accessories https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-gift-guide-for-grads-outdoor-gifts/ Tue, 25 May 2021 15:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=366540
A lineup of the best grad gifts for those who love the outdoors on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We’ve compiled a gift guide for grads who can’t wait to get off campus and lose themselves (figuratively) in the great outdoors.

The post A graduation gift guide for grads who love the outdoors: From practical tools to personalized accessories appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best grad gifts for those who love the outdoors on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for campers Graduation gift guide with the best camping hammock Wise Owl Outfitters Hammock
SEE IT

A durable option that doesn’t hurt the bank.

Best for hikers Two pair of socks in a grey color with written letters under them. Smartwool Hiking Crew Socks
SEE IT

These socks are made of Merino wool, which will keep your feet warm and dry.

Best solar generator Best Solar Generators Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 300
SEE IT

Power small appliances while camping.

It feels safe to assume that—after spending the better part of many years cooped up inside classrooms, libraries, cafeterias, and/or dorm rooms—any grad is ready for a change of scenery, especially grads who love the actual outdoors. Once all their schoolwork is done, grades have been entered, and degrees are in hand, these grads will surely feel it’s time some exploits braving the elements, and you can help by giving graduation gifts for outdoor lovers that travel well. Wherever their love for the outdoors takes them, we have you covered with the best graduation gift guide for well-accessorized adventurers.

Best for campers: Wise Owl Outfitters Hammock  

Wise Owl Outfitters

SEE IT

If your favorite grad is equipped with just about everything they need to make it through a backcountry trip, get them camping gifts to introduce even more relaxation and fun to their next outdoor escape. A camping hammock is a perfect way to sit back, take a nap, read a book, or drink a calming beverage outdoors. This is the best hammock from Wise Owl and weighs under 2 pounds, including the hanging straps, so it’s perfect for campers who prioritize portability. When packed down, it’s about the size of a grapefruit, so your grad should be able to easily carry it with them or keep it stashed away in their car. Each hammock comes with tree straps and carabiners for easy setup, with no need for any additional equipment. It comes in over 10 colors so that you can choose their favorite. It’s 9 feet long and 4.5 feet wide, with a 400-pound weight limit, which should be suitable for just about any user. You can even grab a two-person hammock (weighing only 5 ounces more) if they tend to go camping with a partner or friend.

Best for grad parties in the backyard or backcountry: Ultimate Ears WONDERBOOM 3

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

No graduation gift guide would be complete without some great speakers. If your recent grad is always on the go—heading out for day hikes, camping trips, beach hangouts, long bike rides, and more—you can’t go wrong gifting them a portable Bluetooth speaker. No matter where they are or what they are doing, a smartphone and a compact speaker will provide the perfect soundtrack for any outdoor activity. The Ultimate Ears WONDERBOOM 3 is an excellent option, weighing under 1 pound and equipped with a flexible handle that can easily attach to a backpack, bike basket, or belt loop. It’s only 4 inches tall, but the small, compact design doesn’t mean you sacrifice anything when it comes to sound. The portable speaker can reach up to 87 decibels (equivalent to standing next to a loud blender or vacuum) and produces full 360-degree sound coverage. This powerful Bluetooth speaker can also withstand the elements and is one of our favorite waterproof speakers for a good reason; it has an IP67 rating, which means it can survive being dropped into a body of water up to a meter deep for half an hour, plus it’s dirt/dust-resistant. In addition, the battery lasts a full 13 hours, so your grad can jam outside all day long. And, if they want to be a party-goer and a party-thrower, you can up the energy with a portable party speaker.

Best for hikers: Smartwool Hiking Crew Socks  

Smartwool

SEE IT

A hiker is only as good as their socks are strong, so give a grad who loves to ramble amongst the rocks a pair that will last. While socks may seem like a simple gift, a quality pair or two is one of those hiking gifts that can go a long way. You’ll be taking care of an essential need any avid hiker has and investing in their overall outdoor experiences. Take it from us: nothing ruins a hike faster than angry blisters and constant friction. Smartwool hiking socks come in various colors and sizes, both men’s and women’s. From a tried and true brand, these socks are designed for rugged day hikes and moderate backpacking. An elasticized arch brace provides extra support, medium cushioning absorbs impact, and a flat-toe seam keeps things comfortable. Made from Merino wool and nylon, these socks will keep their feet warm even during cold winter hikes. If your loved one likes to embark on a variety of adventures, you can check out Smartwool’s other socks specifically designed for activities like running, cycling, skiing, and more. There’s a reason we listed them as our favorite wool socks.

Best for interval training to interviews: Garmin epix Pro and Garmin fēnix 7 Pro

Garmin

SEE IT

Whether your grad is thinking more about the backcountry or the boardroom, they could use a smartwatch that helps them get where they need to be when they need to be there. And when it comes to multi-band GPS smartwatches, Garmin makes the best adventure accessories out there. Endurance athletes to purposeful wanderers can benefit from the rugged, sensor-embedded case, metrics-rich displays, and accurate navigation resources found in Garmin’s newest Pro editions of the company’s multisport timepieces—available in multiple sizes and colors with different types of scratch-resistant/solar-charging glass.

Best for your grad’s new apartment: Fuzzy Ink Wilderness Print

Fuzzy Ink

SEE IT

The perfect grad gifts for outdoor lovers aren’t always the ones they’ll bring on their adventures—they can be ones they’ll appreciate before and after an excursion. A woodsy print or poster is a great present for a graduate who needs a little help decorating their new apartment. At this point, they might have all the gear they need, but what they probably don’t have are elegant pieces that express their personality but also provide a sense of maturity for an adult abode. This print from Fuzzy Ink is an artistic way for your grad to stay inspired. It measures 18 inches by 24 inches and is printed on coated paper with a matte finish, so they won’t have any trouble finding a great spot to display it. This print quietly depicts the beauty and awe that many outdoor enthusiasts find so mesmerizing about being in nature. From the crackling campfire to the expansive display of fir trees, this piece will surely bring joy to a grad who longs to roam around the forest.

Best for outdoor athletes: CamelBak Octane Dart Hydration Pack

CamelBak

SEE IT

Any outdoor lover knows how important it is to stay hydrated. Whether hiking, cycling, or running, drinking water is key to preventing heat stroke, dehydration, fatigue, and other issues. Of course, a water bottle is the first thing we think of when it comes to H2O on the go; however, bottles can be bulky and cumbersome. So, if you want to get your grad a great outdoor gift that prioritizes function and efficiency, we recommend a CamelBak Hydration Pack. This multisport hydration backpack can hold 50 ounces of water and easily straps to your back with a long drinking tube and trap management to make hydrating hands-free. All they need to do is bite down and suck to get as much water as necessary—no need to stop during a long run or bike ride to grab a water bottle. The 3D vent mesh provides lightweight comfort and airflow, while front harness pockets can hold snacks, sunscreen, and other essentials. Reflectivity strips are added for extra safety during early morning or nighttime exercise. Your grad will be able to get a run in anytime, anywhere, and stay hydrated all the while. If you’re looking for more options, consider our list of the best hydration packs.

Best personalized gift: Engraved Compass

Etsy

SEE IT

A personalized gift is always a good idea, especially when you’re celebrating a significant achievement. Giving a gift designed specifically for them—something special that only they will have—will let your grad know how much you care for and support them. If you want to give a personalized gift suited for the outdoors, check out these engraved compasses. You can choose from existing mountainscapes or upload your own favorite photos and illustrations to be perfectly recreated on the compass’s cover. Practically any part of the compass can include etching, so you won’t have to choose between a picture or a message. You can even ask for your own handwriting to be impressed on the metal so your graduate can take a piece of you with them no matter where they travel.

A useful graduation gift for the outdoors: Victorinox Swiss Army One-Hand Trekker Knife

Victorinox

SEE IT

Outdoor enthusiasts know that it’s essential to prioritize gear that is lightweight, portable, and multipurpose. You will rarely find a seasoned camper lugging around a toolbox, though the need for various utensils and instruments is frequent. From quick repairs to food preparation, a survival tool or multipurpose knife is a helpful gift for anyone who spends a lot of time outside (they can also be pretty practical for indoor use). A Swiss Army knife is practical, classic, and cool. A household name when it comes to compact knives, the Trekker lives up to the hype. Its attached tools include a wood saw, large blade, 3-millimeter and 5-millimeter screwdrivers, wire stripper, can opener, tweezers, toothpick, and more. It’s one of those camping gifts that offer pretty much everything you need to make it through the trek without any issues. A knife like this is a thoughtful graduation gift that they are guaranteed to use for years to come.

Best thoughtful: Paddywax Candles Parks Collection

Paddywax Candles

SEE IT

A candle is a fantastic gift for any graduate, signifying new beginnings and ordaining their adult apartment, or childhood bedroom, with sophisticated, balanced scents to keep them calm as they figure out their next steps. We’re a fan of scented gifts in general. But if your recent grad pines for the outdoors but doesn’t have time to travel just yet, a candle that brings nature to them is even more highly recommended. Paddywax has created a National Park Service-inspired collection that features the complex aromas of our country’s natural wonders. “Yellowstone” has hints of sagebrush and fir, the “Great Smoky Mountains” features Maplewood and moss, “Acadia” has seagrass and driftwood, while the “Grand Canyon” smells like cactus flowers and fern. Each candle is 11 ounces and has a burn time between 50 and 60 hours. When they’ve used up every drop of wax the candle has to offer, grads can upcycle the jars and repurpose them as plant pots, beauty tool holders, catch-alls, and more. Best of all, Paddywax donates a minimum of $25,000 per year to the National Parks Foundation, so your gift will not only go to your graduate but support the beautiful natural landmarks they love so much.

Best for day trips: YETI Packable Lunch Bag

YETI

SEE IT

There is only one thing better than a day outdoors, and that is a day outdoors with snacks. Whether they plan on packing a lunch for a mountaintop picnic or bringing a few celebratory drinks to a grad party on the beach, beverages, and munchies are a must-have for your graduate’s next outside hang. A cooler is the best way to keep their tasty treats fresh all day long, so they never have to worry about their food heating up in the sun while they hike or swim. This YETI lunch bag is the perfect gift for grads to take food outside or pack a tasty lunch for their new job. Available in two sizes, a standard box or larger bag, and a variety of colorways, this pack uses Coldcell Flex insulation” technology and a “thermosnap” closure to keep food at the correct temperature, hot or cold. The adjustable grid means you can set the size by simply closing the top hook into any one of the available hoops. That way, the lunch bag can easily fit under a desk or be stuffed with snacks and drinks using all of its available 15.75 inches. This bag will pair well with just about any outdoor excursion, so your grad will be able to pack all the necessities and then some.

Best wearable: Outdoor Life Tee

540Brands

SEE IT

If you want to get sweet, versatile graduation gifts guaranteed to make them smile, go with cute graphic tees like this one from Outdoor Life. Available in both men’s and women’s sizes, the “Go Play Outside” slogan is a fun way for you to tell everyone you see where your priorities lie. Made from 100-percent cotton and available in five colorways, this T-shirt will complement any hunter, angler, hiker, camper, surfer, sailor—just about any outdoor enthusiast you could think of. The soft material makes these tees particularly great for lounging around a campfire, though we recommend sizing up for maximum coziness—your grad will thank you.

Best for dirty hiking clothes: STNKY Bag Pro Wash Bag

STNKY

SEE IT

STNKY’s Bag Pro Wash Bag is the simple gift our adventurous grad didn’t know they needed. The zip-up laundry bag can hold all of their dirty clothes during multi-day camping and hiking trips to prevent unwanted odors and bacteria from getting onto their clean ones. When it’s time to wash their clothes, the STNKY bag can be unzipped and turned inside out, at which point the clothes will fall into the washing machine without being touched. The bag itself is also machine washable, which is a nice bonus. Anyone who struggles to stay organized and sanitary during their next outdoor trip will love this gift.

Best portable firepit: Colsen Tabletop Portable Fire Pit

Colsen

SEE IT

Sometimes setting up a big outdoor fire pit isn’t feasible or reasonable, but that doesn’t mean giving up s’mores for the night. Colsen’s Tabletop Portable Fire Pit runs on the company’s odorless liquid fuel, can be set up and ignited within a few minutes, and produces flame up to one foot tall for roughly 45 minutes. This is the ideal gift for someone who’s into glamping or wants a fire pit they can use indoors and out at any point during the year. The fact that you don’t need firewood to ignite it is particularly important because rainy weather can make dry fuel hard to find. And if you happen to have a grad living somewhere with a sizeable backyard/patio, you can give them a tasteful taste of the campfire life at home with a Solo Stove Bonfire firepit.

Best firestarter: Pull Start Firestarter

Pull Start Fire

SEE IT

On the other hand, if you’re shopping for someone who spends days upon days out in the woods, they’re going to need Pull Start Firestarter. The fire starter is literally ignited by pulling a string built into its small box. Smoke will begin to billow from the box, indicating that the fire starter will be fully ignited within three seconds. It lasts up to 30 minutes once fully ignited. Beyond the convenience of not having to strike a match, keeping a pack of these around can be helpful during an emergency. It’s very difficult to light wet wood with a match, but prolonged exposure to a fire starter can do the trick. Whether they’re trying to save time or their own life, your grad will appreciate having a three-pack of Pull Start Firestarter in their pack.

Best hard cooler: RTIC Ultra-Light 55 Quart Hard Cooler

RTIC

SEE IT

No campsite or boat is complete without a cooler that can reliably keep foods and beverages cold for hours—or days—at a time. If you’re shopping for a grad who’s planning a big summer trip, there’s a good chance Ultra-Light 55 Quart Hard Cooler is the perfect gift. The high-capacity cooler has three inches of insulation to maintain a consistent temperature inside, but it was engineered to be nearly a third lighter than the competition. This means it’ll be easier to carry when filled with ice, food, and dozens of cans. A cooler is one of the few gifts that may actually last your grad a lifetime, so it’s important to make the right choice. If you know they tend to pack extra light, RTIC also offers a 32-Quart model of this same cooler. Want more options? Check out more of the best coolers for camping.

Best for post-trail drinks: Hydro Flask 25 oz Ceramic Reusable Wine Bottle

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Enjoying a bottle of wine on a mountain sounds like a dream—but wine bottles and hiking don’t exactly mix. Give your grad the gift of sneaky boozing with this ceramic reusable wine bottle from Hydro Flask, which fits one 750 mL bottle of wine. It’s dishwasher-safe for easy cleaning and BPA-free for peace of mind. TempShield double-wall vacuum insulation keeps whites chilled and reds at room temp, and a ceramic-lined interior prevents flavor transfer. Although it’s advertised for wine, we think it’s also perfect for any spirit: Our favorite nature-inspired aqua vitae is Tin Cup Whiskey, cut with water from the Rocky Mountains and named after the tin cups miners used to drink. Need a more traditionally shaped option? Check out our favorite insulated water bottles.

Best unbreakable glasses: Silipint Silicone Pint Glasses

Silipint

SEE IT

We’ve included the Silipint in our best camping gifts guide, but we think it makes a great gift especially for someone who may be too transient for real drinkware. These shatterproof “glasses” are made of 100% food-grade silicone, meaning you don’t have to deal with dangerous broken glass. Plus, they’re a fun, bright way to reduce the amount of plastic your grad may use between graduation and their very first job.

Best for ski lodge lounging: Chaco Ramble Puff Ankle Boot

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Chaco is known for its rugged and arch-supporting sandals, but we think their covered shoe offerings deserve some praise. The Ramble Puff Ankle Boot feels like a down parka for your feet, and they’re perfect for throwing on after a day of skiing or hiking. And, water-resistant rip-stop nylon means they’re not just indoor shoes—they can hold up in the great outdoors. If you’re looking for something that slips on, the Ramble Puff also comes in a clog style just as comfy and dreamy as its boot brethren. Our staff writer lives in both the clog and boot for women—don’t ask her to pick her favorite. Speaking of puffy stuff …

Best for camp comfort: Therm-a-Rest Honcho Poncho Down

ThermaRest

SEE IT

We all know the importance of having appropriate layers for hiking—but what if you want to stay warm without having to wear the same jacket you’ve worn all day. The Honcho Poncho from Therm-a-Rest (also makers of excellent sleeping pads) combines the lightweight, warm properties of 650-Fill Nikwax Hydrophobic Down with a water-resistant 100% recycled polyester shell for a wearable sleeping bag. You can wear it around the campsite or campfire or lay it out in your tent and use it as a blanket. Its front pocket doubles as a stuff sack to make it easy to stow away back into your pack (or to use it as a lite pillow).

Best for camp chefs: Opinel Nomad Camping Kitchen Utensil Kit

Opinel

SEE IT

These knives are great for a grad who trying to step up their outdoor cooking game. The kit comes with a serrated folding knife, a folding corkscrew knife, a pocket peeler, a beechwood cutting board, and a microfiber cleaning cloth that doubles as a travel pouch. A Virobloc safety ring is attached to all knives/peelers to make it safer to open and transport the kit. Your grad never has to struggle to cut a piece of campfire-cook beef or a hunk of crusty bread again.

Best hiking boot: Vasque Breeze Waterproof Hiking Boot

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Your grad deserves a new pair of hiking boots for successfully climbing the mountain that is college. This one from Vasque is comfortable—our assistant managing editor (his ankles and dog shown above) says, “Lightweight, breathable, and comfortable to … boot … the Vasque Breeze immediately impressed me by requiring zero break-in, then continued to impress me with its stability and traction.” This means grads can climb the highly-graded mountain of post-grad life and worry more about their rent than getting blisters. They’re waterproof and made of sustainable, durable materials for years and years of adventures.

Best headlamp: BioLite 800 Pro

BioLite

SEE IT

Grad gifts are all about shiny new things, and this new headlamp from BioLite should excite your night crawler. It packs 800 powerful, bright Lumens to illuminate any dark trails … or the way to the bathroom at night. Your grad will get 150 hours of power on low; seven hours on high; and 8 hours on reserve. It recharges using a micro USB port, and includes a Constant Mode for full illumination without auto-dimming. Plus, 3D SlimFit tech gives you bounceless, slipless, and near-weightless wear. Being comfortable and able to see where you’re stepping? Sounds like a win.

Best solar generator: Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 300

Jackery

SEE IT

Jackery topped our list of the best solar generators, and we love the company’s small-but-mighty portable power station that can be charged by a wall outlet, car outlet, and the sun (!!!). The solar panel isn’t included, but you can get this bundle that solves the lack of solar panel upon purchase. It’s easy to carry at 7.1 pounds and can charge up to six devices while your grad is on outdoor adventures. Your grad may go outdoors to unplug, but you’ll get peace of mind that their phone or other powered essentials won’t die out in the wilderness.

Things to consider when picking gifts for folks who love the outdoors

From lite hiking gifts to entertaining accessories to full-on camping gifts, you can help recent graduates prepare for whatever their next exploration entails. Or, for graduates moving to a new city or starting a new job and unsure they’ll get out much in those early post-grad days, give graduation gifts that remind them of what they love, from naturally scented candles to beautiful nature prints. The key is determining their favorite outdoor activities, skills, comfort level, and existing accouterments, allowing you to match the grad with the gift.

Final thoughts on the best graduation gifts for outdoors enthusiasts

We hope this graduation gift guide for grads who love the outdoors has filled you with ideas and inspiration for the perfect present. Whether you’re celebrating a trekking champion, kayaking aficionado, or dedicated camper, you’ll find grad gifts for outdoor lovers that fit their specific interests. After all, a graduation gift, whether it’s hiking gifts or camping gifts, or apartment decor, is about celebrating their accomplishments and encouraging them to follow their dreams while holding onto their passions. 


PopSci wants to help you find the most useful shopping recommendations for the best gifts regardless of occasion or preoccupation. Searching for more unique gifts? Check out our additional expert gift guides, including Best Gifts for Travelers, Sustainable Gifts, Gifts to Turn Any Kitchen Into a Café, New Gear for those New Year New You Resolutions, and Science Toys for Kids.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post A graduation gift guide for grads who love the outdoors: From practical tools to personalized accessories appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bone-conduction headphones in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-bone-conduction-headphones/ Mon, 23 Aug 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=389546
A lineup of bone conduction headphones
Amanda Reed

Bone-conduction headphones let you approach audio and activity with open ears and an open mind.

The post The best bone-conduction headphones in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of bone conduction headphones
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A pair of grey SHOKZ bone conduction headphones on a blue and white background. Shokz OpenRun
SEE IT

Impressive battery life, water resistance, and reliable connectivity make these the best pair of bone-conduction headphones around.

Best for kids A pair of pink bone conduction headphones with a unicorn pattern on a blue and white background N/0 Kids Bone Conduction Headphones
SEE IT

Give your kids a pair of headphones that will provide safe entertainment while they stay active.

Best waterproof A pair of blue bone conduction headphones on a blue and white background Shokz OpenSwim
SEE IT

A pair of open-ear headphones that’s waterproof, the OpenSwim suit doing laps in the pool swimmingly.

If you’ve got a bone to pick with the way traditional audio devices disconnect you from the world, there is another option: bone-conduction headphones. Headphones, in general, can play many valuable roles, no (or some) bones about it: they let you jam out to music, dive into podcasts, or dial into phone calls while blocking out environmental noise. This can help you concentrate on tasks, but there are some circumstances when being cut off from what’s around you isn’t optimal. The best bone-conduction headphones let you enjoy all your favorite listening experiences with your ear canal exposed so that you can drive, walk, run, bike, swim, etc.—all while remaining completely aware of your surroundings.

How we chose the best bone-conduction headphones

Bone-conduction headphones are still a relatively new product, but—after consulting academic articles, peer recommendations, real-world user impressions, and our own first-hand tests—we have identified certain models that stand out. Following extensive research, we selected pairs that address the specific needs of athletics, work environments, and age. We chose units that were easy to use, incorporated the features we love about traditional headphones, and prioritized sound quality.

The best bone-conduction headphones: Reviews & Recommendations

Sitting right outside the ear on the jaw, bone-conduction headphones are a different physical and acoustic experience than most people are used to. But different can be good. Here are our picks for the best bone-conduction headphones to help keep you in the hear and now.

Best overall: Shokz OpenRun

SHOKZ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Shokz is dedicated to producing top-tier bone-conducting headphones, and the OpenRun is the company’s most advanced model, employing eight-generation technology to boost sound quality.

Specs

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 2 hours
  • Water resistance: IP67
  • Microphone: Dual noise-canceling

Pros

  • Good sound quality
  • Impressive battery life
  • Sweat-resistant for intense exercise

Cons

  • Hard to replace charging cable
  • Audio quality can’t hold up against traditional headphones
  • Buttons are close together

Without a doubt, Shokz has cornered the bone-conduction headphone market. The company produces thoughtfully engineered, top-quality products, creating an audio experience to complement the activities you enjoy. The OpenRun (formerly the AfterShokz Aeropex) is an excellent pair of bone-conduction headphones overall. Available in four colors and two band sizes, the OpenRun fits gently, yet securely, around the back of the head, looping around the ears and resting against the temples. The headphones employ patented eight-generation bone-conduction technology, are equipped with Bluetooth 5.0 SBC, and feature PremiumPitch 2.0+ signal processing, which prevents bleed, minimizes distortion, and produces a more dynamic bass with minimal vibrations. The battery lasts eight hours, and each pair comes with two magnetic USB charging cables, which can provide a full charge in just two hours. A dual noise-canceling mic will let you make clear calls, and included earplugs can help you tune things out when the time is right. An IP67 rating means this pair can withstand dirt, dust, sweat, and rain, while a built-in moisture detector will let you know when it’s getting wet. However, while the OpenRun is water-resistant, it’s not designed to be fully submerged in the pool.

Best waterproof: Shokz OpenSwim

SHOKZ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The OpenSwim have an IP68 rating, which means they can be fully submerged in water for up to two hours; you can swim with them without making terrible sacrifices regarding audio quality.

Specs:

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz 
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 2 hours
  • Water resistance: IP68
  • Microphone: None

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Ample storage for songs and audiobooks
  • Comfortably fits under swim cap

Cons

  • Single-purpose headphones
  • No Bluetooth connection
  • Limited color options

The Shokz OpenSwim is specifically designed to deliver your favorite music, audiobooks, and podcasts while swimming. These headphones have an IP68 rating, fit comfortably under a swim cap, and can be submerged in 2 meters of water for up to two hours at a time. While these headphones are not Bluetooth compatible, they can store up to 1,200 songs (4 GB) of various file types, including MP3, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. The OpenSwim headphones feature the same command controls and PremiumPitch 2.0 technology as other Shokz open-ear headphones, so while you won’t be able to stream, you can listen to your favorites with solid, satisfying sound quality. They even come with a noseclip.

Best for calls: Shokz OpenComm

SHOKZ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A DSP noise-canceling microphone means the OpenComm headphones are able to isolate your voice while talking, drowning out any surrounding din but keeping you in tune with your environment.

Specs

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz
  • Battery life: 16 hours of talk time // 8 hours of listening
  • Charge time: 1 hour
  • Water resistance: IP55
  • Microphone: DSP noise-canceling boom microphone

Pros

  • Comfortable for long wear
  • Extended battery life for long phone calls
  • Boom microphone enhances call quality

Cons

  • Shape is hard to store
  • Some sound bleed might limit private conversations
  • IP55 rating could be better

The OpenComm headphones prioritize clear communication using an adjustable DSP boom microphone that suppresses background noise and highlights your voice when positioned near your mouth. Though the person on the other end of the line won’t pick up on your environment’s sounds, the open-ear headphones will ensure you can hear the person talking on the phone and the one right in front of you. The OpenComm system also lets you bypass your car’s choppy stereo if you have to make a call on the road, without cutting yourself off from the sound of traffic. You can also stay on the call when you’re at a job site or keep connected during a busy commute, all without losing situational awareness. You can get up to 16 hours of talk time or 8 hours of listening, and with Quick Charge, you’ll get a replenished two hours of battery life in just five minutes.

Best for multitasking: HAYLOU PurFree Bone Conduction Headphones

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These waterproof, sweatproof headphones will hold up as you pump iron or just rearrange your living room.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 10-minute quick charge
  • Water resistance: IP67
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • IP67 rated
  • High sound quality
  • Long battery life

Cons

  • Proprietary charger

Using your sweaty hands to remove your headphones because someone is asking to use the treadmill is common in the gym. So is taking your earbuds out or headphones off repeatedly while roommates/family/friends try to talk to you as you get chores done. Keep your headphones on while keeping your ears open with these sport-friendly HAYLOU PurFree Bone Conduction Headphones. They are IP67 rated, meaning sweat and water won’t get in the way of completing your reps—whether that’s lifting weights or emptying the washer. An eight-hour battery life gives you all-day tunes power, and 10-minute quick charging gives you two hours of power. The sound quality is superb compared to other bone-conduction headphones, with deep bass and a solid range of highs and lows thanks to a strong Bluetooth 5.2 connection. A noise-canceling microphone means you can take calls without the background bleeding into your conversation. However, a proprietary charger means you’ll be tuneless if you lose power on the go, so prep before you step.

Best for kids: N/0 Kids Bone Conduction Headphones

N/0

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These headphones include a volume limit of 85 decibels, and the open-ear design means your child will always be able to hear the world around them and when you call for them.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 1-hour quick charge
  • Water resistance: IP54
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Volume limiter keeps kids’ hearing safe
  • Adjustable band can grow with your child

Cons

  • Soundbeaming technology is difficult to grasp
  • Susceptible to water damage
  • No noise cancellation means they’re not great for travel

These open-ear headphones aren’t exactly the same as bone-conduction headphones, but the form factor and effect are similar. With soundbeaming speakers resting outside the ear on the cheekbones, these headphones ensure your active child can stay alert to their surroundings even when listening to their favorite songs. With an adjustable band suitable for children ages 4 to 15 and a volume limit of 85 decibels, these headphones go above and beyond to address any concerns you might have for their awareness or hearing. They are equipped with Bluetooth 5.0, 8 hours of battery, and an automatic sensor to control playback. An IP54 rating means you won’t have to worry about a few spills or drops in the dirt. Whether they’re skateboarding, biking, or just running around the backyard, your kids can enjoy music and mobility safely.

Best budget: Guudsound Bone Conduction Headphones

Guudsound

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If bone conduction is new to you, you might not be ready to shell out $100 or more. The Guudsound headphones produce satisfying sound quality and suitable specs in a great intro pair.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 6-10 hours
  • Charge time: 2 hours
  • Water resistance: IP54
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Useful, responsive multifunction button
  • Sound quality is good for the price point

Cons

  • Flimsy build
  • Sound quality could be improved
  • Battery life is just okay

If you want to try out bone conduction but are not ready to invest in a high-end pair, this cheap model from Guudsound might be right for you. Available for less than $40, they are equipped with Bluetooth 5.0, a built-in microphone, multifunction buttons, and an adjustable band for comfort. The battery can last up to 10 hours, and a 15-minute quick charge provides one hour of playback. Each pair comes with a USB charging cable and a pair of earplugs so you can create custom noise cancellation.

What to consider when buying the best bone-conduction headphones

If your mom always warns you not to listen to your headphones while walking home at night, or you need to hear the traffic behind you as you pedal to work, try out the best bone-conduction headphones. To determine which pair will work best for your needs, you’ll want to consider where and when you’ll be using them the most. You’ll also want to make sure you understand how they work, especially if this is your first pair of bone-conduction headphones.

First of all, what is bone conduction, and how does it work?

Bone-conduction headphones allow you to experience audio sans any direct interaction with your ear canal or eardrum. While this may sound like some new-fangled, tech-heavy sorcery, there is evidence that bone conduction has been around for centuries. It is rumored that Beethoven relied on bone conduction to compose music after losing his hearing by attaching a metal rod to his piano and biting down on it as he played. But how does it work? 

Typically, sound waves travel through the air and are funneled through the ear canal to the eardrums, where they are then decoded into vibrations and sent to the inner ear (or cochlea), which is connected to the auditory nerve. When the vibrations hit the inner ear fluid, tiny hair cells start to convulse, creating electrical pulses that travel up the auditory nerve to the brain. This process is called air conduction. Bone conduction completely avoids the eardrum and relies on a transducer—like headphones, or a metal conductor’s rod in Beethoven’s case—to convert sound waves into vibrations and send those through the facial bones to be received by the inner ear. Essentially, the vibrations received by the cochlea are the same no matter which way you receive them; they are simply sent via a different pathway. 

This concept has even been used in reverse. The Sony WF-1000XM4 earphones include a bone-conduction sensor that picks up the vibrations from your voice during calls to help enable clearer speech without picking up ambient sound.

Who should use bone-conduction headphones?

Medically, the best bone-conduction headphones benefit those experiencing conductive hearing loss, a condition that directly affects the transmission of sound through the eardrums. Conductive hearing loss is just one way the auditory system can be disrupted, so bone-conduction headphones won’t work for everyone with hearing difficulties. 

Bone-conduction headphones are also helpful for those who need to maintain situational awareness while they enjoy their music. These headphones provide an additional layer of safety for bikers, hikers, drivers—essentially anyone who needs to be aware of their surroundings. Active in dense urban environments? Bone conduction makes for great running headphones. Bone-conduction headphones are also particularly great for swimmers. Air conduction is heavily suppressed when we are underwater, but the vibrations created by bone conduction can still be transmitted, which means a pair of bone-conduction headphones with an Ingress Protection rating of IP68 (a.k.a. waterproof) can keep you connected to your workout playlist lap after lap. 

Now, bone conduction won’t make your entire face shake, rattle, and roll, so you don’t need to worry about experiencing discomfort while you listen. In fact, many report that these headphones are secure, comfortable, and easy to wear. However, if you are sensitive to pressure, there is a chance that you may experience dizziness or headaches after a long stretch of listening.

How’s the sound quality?

If you’re an audiophile searching for your next pair of headphones, chances are bone conduction isn’t going to be what you’re looking for. That being said, the overall audio quality of these headsets can certainly get you through a tough training session or walk to work. At high volumes, audio can start to distort or get crunchy and an expansive mix isn’t really possible. However, with a quality model, you will still get to experience impactful bass; you’ll feel the vibrations instead of highly pressurized waves from over-ear cans. 

Just remember that even the best bone-conduction headphones aren’t meant to fit or even necessarily sound like traditional headphones or earbuds. If you haven’t used bone-conduction headphones before, you might feel inclined to turn up the volume as loud as it can go in an attempt to recreate that natural, passive noise cancellation that every other type of headphone relies on. Remember that nothing is blocking your ear canal, which means that you will purposefully be able to hear your surroundings clearly; maxing out the volume won’t affect that, but it could lead to hearing loss down the road.

Can bone-conduction headphones use Bluetooth?

Yes, there are wireless bone-conduction headphones that use Bluetooth 4.2 and higher to connect to smart devices such as cellphones and computers. Set up and pairing is no different with Bluetooth bone-conduction headphones than connecting any other type of Bluetooth headphones, and some may even have onboard controls like play, pause, and skip for your streaming services. Other models are more like a portable MP3 player, with the ability to store hours of songs internally that you can then play through without any wires involved. Remember the iPod shuffle? That’s what you’ll be getting—an excellent option for folks who want to jam out to a curated playlist while they focus on working out or a walk about the town.

Can you take phone calls with bone-conduction headphones?

Yes, some bone-conduction headphones are equipped with a microphone so you can answer calls on the go. While the headphones themselves can’t employ any passive or active noise cancellation to enhance your listening experience, some models can use technology to make calls crisp and clear. The headphones with mic use various means to minimize outside sound—like wind, traffic, etc.—ensuring that the person you’re talking to can hear you without interruption. Just remember that bone-conduction headphones are subject to more sound bleed than traditional units, so you’ll want to be conscientious about volume when it comes to private calls.

FAQs

Q: How much do bone-conduction headphones cost?

Generally, the best bone-conduction headphones cost between $80 and $150. It’s important to go with a quality pair to ensure you’re investing in a safe and well-designed model. Though the history of bone-conduction technology is long, its application to commercial headphones is relatively new, which means you’ll have the most success with an established brand, like Shokz.

Q: Can bone-conduction headphones cause hearing loss?

Any long-term exposure to loud noise can cause damage potentially leading to hearing loss; this includes listening to music at loud volumes with any headphones. At this time, there is no evidence to support the claim that bone-conduction headphones put you at significantly more risk for hearing loss than any other headphone type, including earbuds and over-the-ear models. It’s important to remember that bone-conduction headphones will not block out surrounding noise, so you should not try to block out additional sound by turning the volume up too loud.

Q: Can you wear glasses with AfterShokz?

Yes, you can wear your glasses while using Shokz headphones. The company recommends putting the headphones on first and then sliding your glasses into place for a more secure fit. They can also be worn underneath a helmet, and the waterproof model can be worn with a swim cap covering the tips of your ears.

Q: Do bone-conduction headphones sound good?

They say beauty is in the eye of the beholder, and the same goes for bone-conduction headphones. Imagine you’re holding a phone speaker up to your ear—that’s what it’s like to wear a pair of bone-conduction headphones. Will they perform the same as headphones with active noise cancellation? No. If hearing street sounds and skipping ANC earbuds is music to your ears, however, you’ll be happy going with bone conduction.

Final thoughts on the best bone-conduction headphones

Chances are you’re either an experienced bone-conduction headphones user or a novice looking to see if these air-conduction alternatives are right for you. Regardless of your familiarity, finding the right pair means homing in on when and where you’ll use them most. Think about your surroundings and consider your priorities regarding sound quality, microphone use, and waterproof rating, then shop accordingly. If you’re accustomed to traditional earphones or over-ear models, get ready to be surprised by the best bone-conduction headphones.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bone-conduction headphones in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Power post-Memorial Day savings with $100 off a Jackery solar generator https://www.popsci.com/gear/post-memorial-day-amazon-deals/ Wed, 31 May 2023 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=544801
Jackery Explorer 300
The Jackery Explorer 300 offers lots of power in a little, easy-to-lug package. Stan Horaczek

Plus, post-Memorial Day deals from Roomba, Samsung, and more, all on Amazon.

The post Power post-Memorial Day savings with $100 off a Jackery solar generator appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery Explorer 300
The Jackery Explorer 300 offers lots of power in a little, easy-to-lug package. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Memorial Day is over, but you most likely have leftover burgers, snacks, and beers in the fridge from your celebrations. The Memorial Day deals also linger with $100 off a Jackery solar generator, among other savings.

Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 300 $239.99 (Was $349.99)

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

The Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 300 is an excellent starter portable power station if you want to power smaller appliances before moving on to a larger, more powerful solar generator. It weights less than 10 pounds and can be charged with an outlet, car charger, and via solar power (although you’ll have to purchase solar panels separately). It can charge up to six devices, including laptops, drones, and cameras. It may not be able to power a refrigerator, but it can keep your WiFi running (important so no one gets bored in a power outage after all the board games are exhausted).

We’re also fans of Bluetti—another brand included in our best solar generators round-up—and the company’s EB3A, 268Wh portable power station (another excellent starter portable power station) is on sale for 40% off, down to $209 (from $349).

Like the meat in your fridge during a blackout, this deal will expire if you don’t act. Although it won’t smell as bad, you’ll still feel sorry that you didn’t act sooner and avoid the situation altogether.

Here are more post-Memorial Day deals for continued savings all week long:

The post Power post-Memorial Day savings with $100 off a Jackery solar generator appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garden tools of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-garden-tools/ Sat, 24 Apr 2021 17:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=283688
The Best Gardening Tools
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

The best garden tools will make your job faster and easier so you can spend more time enjoying what you’ve grown.

The post The best garden tools of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Gardening Tools
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best gardening gloves Pine Tree Tools Bamboo Gardening Gloves Pine Tree Tools Bamboo Gardening Gloves
SEE IT

This pair of gardening gloves are comfortable and will keep your hands free from small nicks and exposure to poison ivy.

Best gardening knife Fiskars Garden Hori Knife with Sheath Fiskars Garden Hori Knife with Sheath
SEE IT

This knife is perfect for pruning, cutting, and weeding. The attractive sheath makes it easy to safely store, too.

Best garden hose Aqua Joe iberJacket Non-Expanding Kink-Free Garden Hose Aqua Joe iberJacket Non-Expanding Kink-Free Garden Hose
SEE IT

A garden hose that’s easy to move around and won’t get kinked or cut is an absolute gardening essential.

With the weather turning warmer, it’s only natural to want to spend time outdoors, which means polishing off your green thumb and grabbing some garden tools. Whether planting tomatoes in a stand-up planter or squash in a raised garden bed, there’s little as satisfying as watching your efforts pay off in the form of fresh, tasty food you can pick right in time for dinner. Seasoned pros already have a shed or basement full of equipment, but if you’re new to gardening it can feel overwhelming to get started. The wrong gear can lead to frustration and wasted efforts, whereas the best gardening tools can help you to get your garden planted, weeded, watered, pruned, and harvested with ease.

Best garden hose reel: Giraffe Retractable Hose Reel

Giraffe Tools

SEE IT

If you’ve ever used a vacuum with a retractable cord, you know that it’s hard to go back to winding long cords up yourself. The Giraffe is the best garden hose reel because it’s self-winding and can lock at any length you need. It’s 100 feet of ½-inch hose, wall-mountable with just four screws and anchors, and it’s a sturdy unit that retracts slowly so you won’t hurt yourself.

Best pruning shears: KOTTO Four-Pack Kit with Storage Bag

KOTTO

SEE IT

When it comes to garden clippers, you’re likely going to want more than one type. For delicate work, like cutting herbs, you need something precise and narrow, whereas you’ll need something more heavy-duty with thicker branches and stems. The best pruning shears depend on your job, but versatile bypass pruning shears that make sharp, clean cuts are generally a must-have for any garden, and clippers or scissors are easier to work with when you need precision so you don’t wind up cutting things you don’t mean to cut. So the best choice is … all of the above, which you get in this convenient gardening kit.

Best wheelbarrow: Gorilla Carts Heavy-Duty Poly Yard Dump Cart

Gorilla Carts

SEE IT

The best wheelbarrow for your garden is one that can easily and efficiently haul what you need it to, and this Gorilla cart fits the bill: It has a padded handle that can be pulled by hand or converted to hook up to a tractor or ATV. The difference between a traditional wheelbarrow and a dump cart is that the latter has a simple mechanism to release the tub vertically to easily dump out whatever you’re carrying—rocks, logs, dirt, what have you. This dump cart is versatile and easy to maneuver.

Best shovel: Hooyman Short Handle Digging Shovel

Hooyman

SEE IT

A good shovel is essential when digging flower beds or planting vegetables, and the no-slip handle on this one from Hooyman makes all the difference. Both the handle and shaft grips are textured, which makes them easy to grab even when your hands are sweaty or you’re working in rain. The shovel’s carbon blade is serrated, which Hooyman says makes it easier to break up rocks, too.

Best gardening knife: Fiskars Garden Hori Knife with Sheath

Fiskars

SEE IT

Slicing a small branch or pruning vegetables? A gardening knife is the best tool for the job, and we like the Hori Knife from Fiskars because of its two-sided construction and built-in ruler. One side of this knife is a standard blade, while the other is serrated, which means it’s ready for both slicing and cutting. Its forked tip was specifically designed for cutting through the thin stems of small weeds. The knife’s hilt has raised edges, which give you a safe place to rest your index finger and thumb while cutting things, and the included sheath is perfect for storage.

Best hand rake: Fiskars Cultivator

Fiskars

SEE IT

Some digging jobs don’t require a shovel, which is where Fiskars’ Cultivator comes in clutch. The hand rake has cast-aluminum prongs, a grippy handle, and circular hole for easy storage on a pegboard. This tool is deceptively simple, but can be used for loosening or aerating soil, and removing weeds. You could also use it to dig smaller holes for vegetable or fruit planting, or to help excavate potatoes when they’re ready to be harvested.

Best pots for seedling: DSUWAZU Peat Pots for Seedlings

DSUWAZU

SEE IT

If you want to kickstart your gardening indoors before your area gets warm enough to keep plants outside, you’ll want a set of seeding pots. This 100-piece from DSUWAZU may seem excessive, but the pint-sized pots will last several years, and even come with plant labels. We like these seedling pots because they’re made of a biodegradable material, which will break down in soil over time. The pots will stay in tact before you use them, though, so picking up a big set now means you’ll be ready for several planting seasons.

Best garden hose: Aqua Joe iberJacket Non-Expanding Kink-Free Garden Hose

Aqua Joe

SEE IT

Carrying a garden hose can be cumbersome, but this one from Aqua Joe makes it a lot easier. The 50-foot hose’s outer jacket is made from marine-grade fiber that’s abrasion resistant and won’t get kinked or twisted. Additionally, the materials Aqua Joe used are free from BPA, lead, and phthalates The company says its host is roughly half the weight as a traditional one, which makes a big difference when you’re hauling it around your backyard. The thin hose can also be easily stored in a shed or garage once gardening season is over, though Aqua Joe says it can be used in temperatures as low as 0 degrees Fahrenheit.

Best rain gauge: AcuRite Magnifying Rain Gauge

AcuRite

SEE IT

Water is essential to all life, but too much can end up killing your plants, which is why AcuRite’s Magnifying Rain Gauge is a gardening essential. It can measure up to five inches of rain, and the larger numbers are easy to read from a distance. A stake at the bottom of the rain gauge will keep it in the ground during inclement weather, but its holes allow you to screw it into the side of your home if you’d prefer to keep it elevated. In either case, its acrylic coating will prevent it from getting damaged.

Best potting bench: Yaheetech Outdoor Garden Potting Bench

Yaheetech

SEE IT

If you have enough space, a potting bench will allow you to keep all of your most-used tools in one place, and give you a solid surface to pot your plants before they go outside. This one from Yaheetech has a 44.1-inch tabletop, and stands 49.2-inches tall. This is enough space for you to spread out your tools and work for hour-long stretches without getting a backache. We like this potting bench because it’s loaded with storage, including a top shelf, pull-out drawer, bottom shelf and side cabinet. The cabinet comes with a latch, so its contents can be kept secure. Our favorite touch is the three hooks on the right side for hanging handheld tools. Most of the potting bench is wood, but its tabletop is made out of metal, which is more durable and won’t stain when soil gets spilled on it.

Best gardening gloves: Pine Tree Tools Bamboo Gardening Gloves

Pine Tree

SEE IT

A pair of gardening gloves is the most fundamental item we’re recommending, and they should be worn at all times. This is to avoid minor cuts and scrapes, but more importantly exposure to poison ivy and ticks. This pair from Pine Tree Tools are available in multiple sizes, are easy to spot because of their green color, and are thin enough to give you complete control over all your fingers. They’re even touchscreen friendly in case you need to use your phone. A textured grip on the palm-side of the gloves will make handheld tools even easier to hold, while their cuff makes them easy on your wrist and simple to remove.

FAQs

Q: Who makes the best garden tools?

There’s no single answer to the question of who makes the best garden tools because there are different brands known best for different types of gardening tools. For instance, Fiskars is known for its shovels and spades, while Gorilla is known for the best wheelbarrows and garden carts.

Q: How do you keep garden tools in good condition?

The key to keeping garden tools in good condition is to keep them away from moisture. And the problem isn’t only rain; leaving them in the dirt, or on grass that gets damp with morning dew, will likely cause your metal tools to rust and degrade, and for wooden handles to split, crack, warp, rot, or dry out. It’s important to clean your tools off after each use (and dry them) and then store them away from the elements—in a shed, garage, or storage box. Ideally, you’ll hang any tools such as full-size shovels or rakes on a wall, as concrete floors can retain moisture. You may also want to rub wooden handles with linseed oil from time to time to keep them in good condition.

Q: Which set of tools are used in preparing a garden plot?

When you’re preparing a plot in the ground for backyard gardening, you’ll need a soil test kit to check whether your soil is ready for gardening. Then you’ll need to cut down any existing unwanted plants with a chainsaw or pruners. If you have grass growing in the area, you can kill it off by spreading newspapers over the area and putting mulch on top to hold it down. If there’s anything deeply rooted in the area, you may need to use a root-killing tool. You’ll need a good tiller once you’re ready to prep the soil—go for an electric one if you possibly can, as it’ll save you a lot of strain. You’ll also need a rake to even out the soil, and a shovel or spade for digging and planting.

Q: How much do garden tools cost?

This depends on the type of tool and whether they’re electronic or not. Most of our recommendations cost under $50 and cover a majority of everyday gardening usecases.

Final thoughts on the best garden tools

If you’re going to put the time and effort into growing your own plants, investing in the best garden tools you can afford can make your job easier and help you achieve better results. Once you have the right garden equipment for the job, you may find that your hobby becomes a better stress-buster and your harvest becomes more abundant. Happy gardening!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garden tools of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Garmin’s newest smartwatches are even more adventure-ready https://www.popsci.com/gear/garmin-epix-pro-fenix-7-pro-news/ Wed, 31 May 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=544842
Garmin fēnix 7 Pro on a wrist with the flashlight illuminated
Garmin

The new epix Pro and fēnix 7 Pro high-performance GPS adventure watches offer more advanced features for serious endurance athletes and outdoor enthusiasts.

The post Garmin’s newest smartwatches are even more adventure-ready appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Garmin fēnix 7 Pro on a wrist with the flashlight illuminated
Garmin

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Garmin is well known for its expansive list of rugged fitness watches, with multiple lines specifically tailored to different activity types. And now, the options for adventurers and serious endurance athletes are even more extensive with the announcement of updated Pro versions of the epix and fēnix 7 watches. 

Most of the updates to these premium next-gen. multisport watches are incremental software changes, such as more activity types and new fitness measurement tools. But there are also a few notable hardware and build upgrades, including a new size option and AMOLED display for the epix Pro and an LED flashlight in all three sizes of both the epix Pro and fēnix 7 Pro. Both watches will also benefit from trickle-down features from the new Forerunners.

Garmin epix Pro details

Garmin just debuted its epix 2 line of watches last year. Despite how new the series is, the company is rolling out some worthwhile updates to make it even better in a new Pro version. With vibrant metrics-rich watch faces and extensive sensors/navigation features in a sleek body, the epix Pro remains a great choice for boardroom-to-backcountry adventures and weekend warriors, from climbers and mountaineers to ultra-marathon trail runners. 

Garmin

SEE IT

epix Pro and build changes

The epix came in two sizes—42mm and 47mm—while the Pro version adds a 52mm option for those who really want a statement piece on their wrist. The larger size offers more than just a dramatic look, however. Garmin packed extra battery into the 52mm version, which promises up to 31 days of battery life in smartwatch mode. The 42mm and 47mm both should provide 10 and 16 days of battery life, respectively. 

Like the epix Gen. 2, the Garmin epix Pro will be available in Standard Edition, which features Corning Gorilla Glass and stainless steel case, or the Sapphire Edition, which uses a more durable Sapphire lens and titanium case. And all three sizes get an even brighter upgraded AMOLED display for a colorful, detail-packed watch face. 

All three sizes will offer an LED flashlight, which can vary in intensity and features a strobe mode. We were glad to see the flashlight included even on the smallest watch since it is a potentially game-changing feature. It can illuminate your path while trail running or hiking in the dark and help others see you, which is invaluable if exercising near a road. 

The epix Pro also gets an updated and optimized heart rate sensor. Garmin didn’t provide any information on what exactly that means, but it says these changes will provide “enhanced multisport performance tracking.”

Fitness tracking features

Garmin watches are already robust in their fitness tracking abilities, but the company is not one to just let things be. The epix Pro will offer new activities, which include team sports such as soccer, basketball, and racquet sports, as well as horseback riding and more.

Beyond new tracking modes, Garmin also created new training features. Hill Score gives you a better idea of how your training impacts your ability to run uphill. Uphill segments are automatically detected and analyzed, and that information is combined with other physiological metrics to provide a score from one to 100. It even breaks the score down into Hill Endurance and Hill Strength, which reflect short, fast efforts versus long, sustained climbs. And it offers feedback to improve your training over time. 

The second new feature—Endurance score—looks beyond your VO2 Max, giving a more personalized look at your fitness. It analyzes both short-term and long-term endurance training and takes into account all types of activity, not just running or cycling. And, like Hill Score, it provides training feedback to help you understand your score.

Three new display types on the Garmin epix Pro smartwatch
The epix Pro will offer new terrain maps, a Red Shift Mode for night use, and weather overlays. Garmin

Additional new features

The Garmin epix Pro will provide a unique Red Shift Mode, which changes the display to shares of red. This lessens the impact on your vision when looking at your watch in the dark and reduces any sleep cycle disturbance you might get from the standard display. You can manually turn on this display mode or schedule it to automatically turn on and off based on sunset and sunrise time. And you can even select certain activities that automatically use Red Shift Mode.

Up Ahead mode will allow you to view running points of interest, such as checkpoints and aid stations, right on the map. This allows you to better understand what’s in front of you and plan accordingly on your race or activity. 

The last feature those navigating the backcountry will especially appreciate is the new weather map overlays and relief shading on topographic maps. The weather overlays can display temperature, precipitation, and cloud cover, to help you make more informed decisions on the go. And relief shading will assist in navigation. You can also opt into Outdoor Maps+ for even more map content, including satellite imagery and more detailed maps.  

Garmin epix Pro pricing & availability

The epix Pro is available for purchase as of today, starting at $899.99.

Garmin

SEE IT

Garmin fēnix 7 Pro details

Like the epix Pro, most changes to the fēnix 7 Pro are smaller software additions. The fēnix 7 Pro still comes in 42mm, 47mm, or 51mm sizes, though you no longer have the option of a version without solar charging. You can, however, choose between Standard Solar or Sapphire Solar, depending on how robust you want your watch face. 

Like many of Garmin’s new watches lately, including the Instinct 2X, the fēnix 7 Pro will feature an LED flashlight in all sizes. It offers a broad pattern, variable intensities, red safety light, and strobe mode. 

New training features

The fēnix 7 Pro also gets a new heart rate sensor. Garmin says this next-gen sensor utilizes “more spatially diverse optical sensors and sport-specific algorithms.” It should provide even better performance tracking for more activities, giving you even more accurate insight into your training. 

Like the epix Pro, the fēnix 7 Pro will also get the new Endurance Score and Hill Score for better endurance training insight. It also gets its share of new activities, including white water rafting, motocross, overlanding, and dozens more. And the watch will provide access to the weather map overlays, new relief shading, and Up Ahead mode.

Garmin fēnix 7 Pro pricing and availability

All versions of the fēnix 7 Pro are available for purchase at a starting price of $799.99.

The post Garmin’s newest smartwatches are even more adventure-ready appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Upgrade your summer with a deeply discounted outdoor hot tub or ice bath https://www.popsci.com/gear/inflatable-hot-tub-ice-bath-amazon-deal/ Tue, 30 May 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=544368
Inflatable hot tubs and ice baths arranged in a pattern
Stan Horaczek

Improve your yard by a mile with up to 30% off a relaxing (or invigorating) inflatable on Amazon.

The post Upgrade your summer with a deeply discounted outdoor hot tub or ice bath appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Inflatable hot tubs and ice baths arranged in a pattern
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Hopefully, you spent some time relaxing over the long Memorial Day weekend. But imagine how much more relaxing it would have been if you were chilling in an inflatable hot tub. Currently, Amazon has some popular inflatable hot tubs on sale for the lowest prices we have seen in a while. You’ll also find some cold plunges with discounts, so whether you want to sit in warm or cool water, these deals have you covered. Personally, I prefer warm every time because I don’t have the same warrior spirit all my CrossFit friends seem to have when it comes to dipping themselves in a big bucket of ice. I’m OK with that. You might feel differently, and there’s no better time to find out than during a sale.

Bestway SaluSpa Miami Inflatable Hot Tub, 4-Person AirJet Spa $371 (Was $529)

Saluspa

SEE IT

This 177-gallon tub can accommodate up to four people depending on how comfortable you are with your pals. It heats water to 104 degrees and blasts your battered body with 120 jets in an effort to turn you into a relaxed jelly. Setup doesn’t require any tools, and it’s easy to store when the cold weather comes around because you can deflate it. These aren’t going to get any cheaper as we get further into summer, so now’s the time if you want to spend your evenings soaking.

Explore Fitness Large Ice Bath $100 (Was $140)

Explore Ice

SEE IT

If you prefer ice cubes over massage jets, this inflatable ice bath fits one person and a heap of ice cubes for at-home cold plunges. It sets up without tools and comes with a cover so it won’t get filled with bugs and debris when not in use. It even comes with an inflatable headrest if you want to pretend to be relaxed while cold water assaults your muscles. Honestly, the science is mixed about how effective ice baths really are in terms of muscle recovery, but some people swear by them. And if you’re looking for a solid way to wake yourself up, a dip in frigid water hits harder than any coffee I’ve ever had. Plus, if you get sick of it, you can fill it with margaritas for your upcoming Fourth of July block party. (Don’t really do that; it’s not food safe).

More inflatable hot tub deals

More ice bath deals

The post Upgrade your summer with a deeply discounted outdoor hot tub or ice bath appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best telescopes for kids in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/best-telescopes-for-kids/ Thu, 15 Aug 2019 14:29:11 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-telescopes-for-kids/
Celestron and Gsyker make some of the best telescopes for kids.

Help kids of all ages get excited about seeing the stars and planets up close.

The post The best telescopes for kids in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Celestron and Gsyker make some of the best telescopes for kids.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Celstron Inspire AZ100 is one of the best telescopes for kids. Celestron Inspire 100AZ
SEE IT

This lightweight telescope is also easy to assemble and comes with a carrying case.

Best for travel Gskyer is one of the best telescopes for kids. Gskyer 70mm Aperture 400mm AZ Mount Astronomical Refractor Telescope
SEE IT

This telescope lets kids take pictures with their phones and is great for camping.

Best budget MaxUSee Kids Telescope 400x40mm with Tripod & Finder Scope MaxUSee Kids Telescope 400x40mm with Tripod & Finder Scope
SEE IT

Comes with a moon filter and maps of the moon and stars—at a wallet-friendly price.

While trips to the Moon may not be commonplace yet, you can foster curiosity about the universe by letting kids see the lunar surface and the rings of Saturn up close with a telescope for kids. It’s one thing to learn about the Moon in school, and it’s another thing to see it up close. The best telescopes for kids are designed for amateur astronomers, and can provide night after night of out-of-this-world entertainment.

How we chose the best telescopes for kids

Popular Science covers the latest developments in astronomy, from stunning images from the James Webb Space Telescope’s discovery of its first exoplanet to meteor showers you can see from your backyard. Telescopes are a great way to help kids explore the galaxy and see the planets up close. But they can also be complicated instruments with many moving parts for the uninitiated.

In compiling our list of recommendations for the best telescopes for kids, we considered models from trusted brands like Celestron, optical quality and magnification, ease of set up and use, supplemental educational tools that explain what to look for in the night sky, durability, and portability. We also weighed user reviews, what kids look for at different ages, and prices.

The best telescopes for kids: Reviews & Recommendations

Looking for a telescope for the first time can be a daunting experience. Many of the considerations are the same finding telescopes for adults. Figuring out what type of telescope is best for your needs, what aperture you should look for, and the relationship between focal length and magnification are all important factors to consider. The best telescopes for kids should also be durable and easy to use. We break down what you should look for and our picks so you can compare telescopes and find the best option for your family.

Best overall: Celestron Inspire 100AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 12.4 pounds
  • Eyepieces: 10mm and 20mm
  • Aperture: 100mm
  • Type: Refractor

Pros

  • Good for both stargazing and birdwatching
  • Wide aperture for better focus
  • Comes with smartphone adapter
  • Plenty of training resources

Cons

  • Some users say the build quality is not great

Celestron has been making telescopes for nearly 60 years. Its Inspire AZ100 is a great tool for older kids (and adults) to start stargazing at night and observing objects on Earth during the day. 

This short refractor telescope is a good telescope for beginners as it’s easy to set up and doesn’t require any special tools. Its short optical tube of 436mm provides a wide field of view, while its higher 100mm aperture allows aspiring astronomers to focus on the planets, moons, and stars. At 12.4 pounds, this telescope is relatively lightweight, and it comes with a tripod that’s easy to adjust. The AZ1000’s alt-az mount allows users to move the telescope up and down and pan left and right. 

The 10mm and 20mm eyepieces increase magnification by 33 times and 66 times, respectively. A finderscope makes it easier for beginning astronomers to spot the surface of the Moon. And your purchase also gives you access to Celestron’s Starry Night software, which teaches kids about what they see in the night sky. This telescope is also equipped with a smartphone adapter that allows kids to capture images of both the planets and wildlife.

Best for young kids: Celestron FirstScope

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Eyepieces: 4mm and 20mm
  • Aperture: 76mm
  • Type: Dobsonian/Newtonian

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Portable
  • Less expensive

Cons

  • Small aperture

Designed for kids from ages 4 to 8, Celestron’s FirstScope is an ideal introductory telescope. Inspired by Galileo, this telescope features the names of he and other esteemed astronomers through the ages on its optical tube. This telescope comes with 20mm and 4mm eyepieces that result in magnification of 15 times and 75 times, respectively. The FirstScope is also light and easy to transport at 4.5 pounds. Its tabletop design makes it simple to set up on level surfaces outdoors. It’s a good telescope for a 5-year-old kid, and when the child is done stargazing, it looks great on a bookshelf.

Best for older kids: Celestron Astro Fi 102 WiFi Maksutov Wireless Reflecting Telescope

Celestron

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 16.8 pounds
  • Eyepieces: 25mm, 10mm
  • Aperture: 125mm
  • Type: Schmidt-Cassegrain

Pros

  • Works with smartphones and iPads
  • WiFi-enabled
  • Lens cap doubles as a smartphone adapter

Cons

  • Challenging to use if WiFi connection is spotty
  • Some users report difficulty focusing

To get kids who are always on their devices interested in the Andromeda Galaxy, consider the Celestron Astro Fi 102 WiFi Maksutov Wireless Reflecting Telescope. Kids can control the WiFi-enabled telescope using an iPhone, iPad, or Android device and Celestron’s SkyPortal app, making this a good teen telescope. Instead of searching the night sky for planets, teens can use this telescope’s interactive sky map to tap the object they want to see on their screen. Then the telescope will move to find the object and focus upon it.

Set up is easy, and at 16 pounds with an adjustable tripod, this telescope is quite portable. Its two eyepieces (25mm and 10mm) provide magnification of 50 times and 125 times, respectively. That power will help kids locate the rings of Saturn, the red spot on Jupiter, the craters on the Moon at night, and wildlife and birds during the day. And the lens cap doubles as a smartphone adapter so that kids can show off images of their cosmic and terrestrial explorations.

Best for travel: Gskyer 70mm Aperture 400mm AZ Mount Astronomical Refractor Telescope

Gskyer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 5.73 pounds
  • Magnification: 25mm, 10mm
  • Aperture: 70mm
  • Type: Refractor

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Strong magnification
  • Comes with smartphone adapter

Cons

  • Some users say its poorly made
  • May not locate celestial objects as well as other telescopes

This beginner’s telescope from Gskyer is designed for portability. This compact model weighs just under 6 pounds and comes with a travel case and an adjustable tripod so kids can take it on the go. The magnification power of the two eyepieces (25mm and 10mm) increase magnification by 16 times and 40 times, respectively, which can then be tripled using the included 3x Barlow lens. The Gskyer also comes with a smartphone eyepiece adapter so your kids can take photos of their discoveries, making it a solid telescope for 10-year-olds and other kids around that age.

EDITOR’S NOTEPopular Science has teamed up with Celestron on a line of products. The decision to include this model in our recommendations was made by our reviewer independently of that relationship, but we do earn a commission on its sales—all of which helps power Popular Science.

Specs

  • Weight: 10 pounds 
  • Magnification: 20mm and 10mm
  • Aperture: 70mm
  • Type: Refractor

Pros

  • High-quality optics
  • Can operate it remotely
  • Comes with educational software

Cons

  • Some users said components arrived broken

If your kid is a budding photographer who’s looking to capture images of the planets, the AstroMaster 80mm is a great option.  A collaboration between Celestron and Popular Science, this telescope combines high-quality optics, including an 80mm objective lens, with a smartphone adapter that allows users to take photos and videos of the Moon, planets, and birds through the eyepiece. This refractor model comes with two eyepieces (20mm and 10mm) and a Barlow lens that doubles its magnification power. It also features an erect image diagonal that allows you to use it to spot wildlife and other terrestrial objects during the day. 

This telescope allows you to connect via Bluetooth and control the shutter release remotely on both iOS and Android phones. It’s also easy to assemble and super portable at 10 pounds. And kids can get a primer on the night sky with Celestron’s Starry Night Astronomy software, which provides sky maps and details about thousands of celestial objects.

Best budget: MaxUSee Kids Telescope 400x40mm with Tripod & Finder Scope

MaxUSee

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.9 pounds
  • Eyepieces: 20mm, 12.5mm, 6mm
  • Aperture: 40mm
  • Type: Refractor

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Inexpensive
  • Comes with viewfinder scope

Cons

  • Lenses not powerful 
  • No connectivity

The maps of the moon and stars are a big hit with kids, and adults will love the price of these budget-friendly telescopes. With easy assembly and included moon filter, the MaxUSee telescope is a good tool to get your child stargazing. That said, its eyepieces are not very powerful and it doesn’t come with a lot of features, so if having a good quality telescope that you can use for years is important, this may not be the best option.

Things to consider before purchasing a telescope for kids

If you’ve purchased cameras before, some terminology around lenses and light will be familiar. While telescopes can be incredibly intricate, when it comes to finding the best telescopes for kids, look for options that are easy to set up and use, durability, and lightweight for easy portability.

Type of telescope

There are three main types of telescope: refracting, reflecting, and catadioptric.

Refractor: These telescopes use both an objective lens and an eyepiece to display an image. Light enters the telescope and is bent or refracted as it travels through the optical tube. The eyepiece then magnifies the light and straightens out the image for the viewer.

Reflector: Reflecting telescopes use mirrors to bring an image into focus. These telescopes typically have a primary mirror opposite the aperture, where light comes into the telescope, and a secondary mirror. The light is reflected from the second mirror toward the eyepiece for the viewer to see the image. 

Catadioptric: These telescopes are designed with both lenses and mirrors to show an image, combining refraction and reflection. One of the categories of this type of telescope is known as Schmidt-Cassegrain.

Focal length, magnification, and aperture

The focal length of a telescope is the distance between where the telescope’s main lens or mirror and where light enters the telescope. It can range between 300 and 4,000 millimeters. The shorter the focal length, the wider the field of view. Conversely, higher focal lengths provide greater magnification to focus on a specific object.

To find out the magnification of a telescope using a specific eyepiece, divide the focal length of the optical tube by the eyepiece.  

Aperture: A telescope’s aperture indicates the diameter of the objective lens or mirror in millimeters. The larger the aperture, the more light the telescope can let in, making images brighter and easier to see.

Mounts

The three categories of mounts of telescopes are Altazimuth, Dobsonian, and Equatorial. Alt-az mounts, as they are also known, refer to the horizontal and vertical axes. They allow users to move the telescopes left and right and up and down on a tripod. Dobsonian mounts are a type of alt-az mount that are designed to support heavy telescopes with large apertures. 

Equatorial mounts are used with more sophisticated telescopes. One of their axes aligns with Earth’s rotation axis. These mounts are designed for long-term observation and astrophotography.

Ease of use

When considering what telescope to buy, look for options that will be easy for them to operate. Keep an eye out for models that are easy to set up and come with tripods. Many options are also lightweight and come with a carrying case or backpack for easy portability, such as the Gskyer 70mm Aperture 400mm AZ Mount Astronomical Refractor Telescope.

Age of your child

Kids age 4 to 8 starting stargazing will do well with a tabletop model with simple controls, such as the Celestron FirstScope. Meanwhile, older kids with some experience will appreciate the flexibility of telescopes with smartphone adapters that let them take photos and images of their cosmic finds, or they can use to take photos with their smartphone and the Celestron Astro Fi 102 WiFi Maksutov Wireless Reflecting Telescope, which they can operate remotely using their smartphone or an iPad.

FAQs

Q: What type of telescope is best for kids?

The best type of telescope for kids depends on their age. For younger children, simple, tabletop telescopes with easy-to-use controls are great for new stargazers. As kids age, they can use models with more advanced features, such as several eyepieces, accompanying educational software, and smartphone adapters.

Q: How much does a telescope for kids cost?

Telescopes for kids can range from around $20 for budget-friendly models with limited features to more than $350 for telescopes for older children that have high-quality optics, lots of supporting educational material, and are made from durable materials.

Q: Can a kid’s telescope be used to see planets?

Yes, a kid’s telescope can be used to see planets. At a basic level, most kids’ telescopes will allow them to see the surface of the Moon. More sophisticated models with more magnification power and locating tools can help kids see Jupiter and Saturn.

Q: Are kids’ telescopes OK for amateur astronomy?

Kids’ telescopes are great for amateur astronomy. However, when selecting a kids ‘ telescope, just be mindful of the child’s age and capabilities. And be sure to take advantage of the finderscopes and any accompanying educational materials that will help your child learn more about thousands of objects in the night sky.

Final thoughts on the best telescopes for kids

If you’re looking to give your children an appreciation for the galaxy, these telescopes for kids can help them see the stars and the planets close up. These models are easy to assemble and are designed with features that kids will appreciate, such as the ability to take photos with their phones. You’ll be glad you have one of the best telescopes on hand for the next cosmic event.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes for kids in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Memorial Day generator deals: Solar, electric, and gas-powered models https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-memorial-day-amazon-generator-deals-2023/ Fri, 26 May 2023 12:04:08 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=543237
A lineup of solar generators on a blue gradient background
Amanda Reed

Generate some more money in your pocket with these Memorial Day power station deals on Amazon.

The post The best Memorial Day generator deals: Solar, electric, and gas-powered models appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of solar generators on a blue gradient background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

A generator is a must-have if you’re RV-ing, camping, or just spending time away from an outlet. A portable power station helps you stay charged, which is incredibly important if your phone is the only thing connecting you to modern society. Plus, they’re incredibly handy in a power outage. We found plenty of generators on sale for Memorial Day, from tried-and-true gas generators to newfangled solar generators.

Jackery Solar Generator 1000, 1002Wh Capacity with 2 SolarSaga 100W Solar Panels $1,299 w/ coupon (Was $1,649)

Jackery

SEE IT

This Jackery solar generator-panel combo package has everything you need to get started on sustainably powering burners, laptops, drones, and cell phones when you’re not near a wall outlet. In fact, it can power up to eight devices at a time. And, the included solar panels can bring it up to full charge within 6 hours—if you’d rather charge it beforehand via AC outlet, that process is shortened to 5.5. hours. Talk about timely.

If you decide to get a beefier Jackery generator, like the Jackery Solar Generator 2000 PRO, you’ll get a free Jackery dual-sided 80W solar panel when you spend over $2,000 on Jackery products. That’s a $249 value right there, and your savings only get bigger when you combine it with the $150-$350 coupons Jackery is offering on Amazon.

Here are more generator deals to shop this Memorial Day:

Solar generators

Gas generators

Dual-fuel generators

Inverter generators

The post The best Memorial Day generator deals: Solar, electric, and gas-powered models appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Memorial Day fitness deals let you jump into summer activities and save https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-memorial-day-amazon-fitness-deals-2023/ Fri, 26 May 2023 12:19:03 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=543181
Save big on gear with these Memorial Day fitness deals.

Break a sweat without breaking the bank with these deals, like 20% on an inflatable kayak.

The post The best Memorial Day fitness deals let you jump into summer activities and save appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Save big on gear with these Memorial Day fitness deals.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The unofficial kickoff to summer is a great time to get active, indoors or out. The warmer weather invites barbecues and relaxation. So whether you’re training for a race, looking to get out on the water for the first time, or improving your putt, these Memorial Day fitness deals will help you prepare, have fun, and save money while you’re doing it.

Aquaglide Deschutes Inflatable Kayak $543.89 (was $679.99)

Inflatable kayaks are appealing because they’re generally much easier to transport than traditional models. But you shouldn’t have to sacrifice performance for portability. Aquaglide’s Deschutes Inflatable Kayak provides a solution: It’s both a cinch to toss into your car and includes features that paddlers are looking for. Plus, it’s currently available at its lowest price in months—just in time for the weather and waters to warm up.

This single-person kayak weighs just 18 pounds and fits into an included duffle bag. You’ll need a 12-volt air pump to inflate the three chambers of this open cockpit model, which is not included. Once inflated, this 11-foot kayak is designed with handles for carrying, a cushioned, quick-release seat, and adjustable footrests for a comfortable ride. The package also includes a quick-release fin, cockpit drain, and repair kit should you encounter rough waters. 

More outdoor fitness deals

Best home gym equipment deals

Best smartwatch and wearable deals

Best fitness accessories

The post The best Memorial Day fitness deals let you jump into summer activities and save appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Memorial Day grill deals are sizzling https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-memorial-day-amazon-grill-deals-2023/ Fri, 26 May 2023 12:05:11 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=542659
The best memorial day grill deals composited
Stan Horaczek

If your long weekend barbecue is suffering from an old grill, get yourself a new outdoor cooking rig.

The post The best Memorial Day grill deals are sizzling appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best memorial day grill deals composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Memorial Day Weekend is the official kickoff to summer grilling season, which means it’s time to invest in shiny new equipment to ensure your burgers, dogs, and vegetables come out perfectly every single time. The tools you use can impact not only the flavor of your food but how easy it is to flip, season, and even transfer to and from a plate. The good news is that getting the good stuff means you won’t have to replace any of it for a long time.

Weber Genesis E-325s Gas Grill $899 (was $1,049)

Weber

SEE IT

if you’re looking for a rock-solid, propane-powered grill with tons of useful features, you’ll have difficulty finding a better option than the Weber Genesis E-325s, especially now that it’s now at the lowest price it’s been in months. It relies on Weber’s patented burner tech, which provides consistent, clean flame to char your grub. Plus, a Sear Station part of the grill gets exceptionally hot for searing steaks or other cuts of meat that thrive under high temps. Plus, it offers several features that facilitate easier cleaning, like easily accessible grease management. That means you can spend more time eating burgers and a lot less time scrubbing old sludge out of your grill.

If you’d prefer the natural gas version, that’s also on sale for $1,219 (down from $1,319).

Everdure CUBE Portable Charcoal Grill $156.99 (Was $199)

Everdure

SEE IT

The Everdure Cube is the portable charcoal grill every camper, apartment dweller, tail gator, or beach bum could use to cook up a storm on the go. The steel grill comes with a food storage tray and cutting board, which latch onto the top of it to make carrying and prepping your food easier. Similarly, metal handles make the grill simple to carry to and from a car, or indoors to outdoors. Despite its compact size, the Everdure Cube offers 115 square inches of grilling space. Everdure says this is enough room for three medium steaks or six small burgers at once.

Once your grilling is done, you can remove the Cube’s grates, empty out its chamber, wash the storage tray and board, and store. The Everdure offers the cube in five colors, and while the Khaki colorway is marked down to $150 we prefer the pop of the orange option seen above. If you’ve given up grilling due to the lack of space or high cost, don’t skip this deal.

Pellet grill deals

The best gas grill deals

The best charcoal grill deals

The best grilling accessory deals

The best Solo Stove fire pit deals (for marshmallow grilling, roasting … whatever)

The post The best Memorial Day grill deals are sizzling appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Memorial Day audio deals let you blast bops all summer long https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-memorial-day-amazon-audio-deals-2023/ Fri, 26 May 2023 12:00:39 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=543136
A lineup of the best audio deals on a blue and white background
Amanda Reed

Enjoy the song of the summer and have money left over to stock the cooler when you pick up these party speakers and more on sale.

The post The best Memorial Day audio deals let you blast bops all summer long appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best audio deals on a blue and white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

If upbeat anthems and sunny savings make your heart go padam padam, you’ll want to free yourself long enough to scroll through this post. We’ve collected the best Memorial Day Weekend discounts on speakers, headphones, earbuds, and more to help you celebrate the unofficial start of pool season and beach vacations with more tunes in your ears and money in your pocket.

JBL Boombox 3 $399.95 (Was $499.95)

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Live sound specialists JBL makes several of our favorite portable party speakers, and the 13-pound 160W Bluetooth 5.3 Boombox 3 is the one you want to soundtrack your summer—from patio parties to friendly pick-up games. With its three-way speaker configuration, which includes a subwoofer that extends to 40 Hz, you can get any party started. And with 24 hours of battery life on a single charge, a sturdy molded handle, and IP67 (surf and sand protection), you can keep those parties going—wherever they occur. Act now and you can get all that for $100 off, so your favorite tracks slam, but your wallet isn’t hit as hard. If that’s too much body or budget for you at this time, however, there are other JBL party speakers and soundbars on sale:

Need a speaker that’s purse-, pack-, and pool-friendly? The Ultimate Ears WONDERBOOM 3 is our favorite pint-sized Bluetooth party to take from the bathtub to the backcountry or on a bike, and this IP67 360-degree audio orb is available for $85 (down from $99).

Want to wire something more permanent on the back deck? The fully sealed Definitive Technology AW6500 outdoor speaker—featuring a 6.5″ mid-woofer, a 1″ tweeter, and a 5″ x 10″ oval pressure-driven low bass radiator, and available in black or white—is on sale for $249 (down from $299). And the smaller AW5500 is only $199 (down from $249).

Want to go wireless in the living room instead? Save $500 when you bundle the KEF LS50 Wireless II speakers and KC62 subwoofer together for $3,799.98 (down from $4,299.98). Just add both to your cart, and you can cut cords and cost on one of our favorite powered bookshelf (or standmount) speakers, plus a compact unit that provides muscular musical bass. Or save $250 when you buy both the smaller, desktop-friendly KEF LSX II speakers and KUBE 8b subwoofer for $1,749.98.

See more sweet-sounding audio deals hear and now:

The post The best Memorial Day audio deals let you blast bops all summer long appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best above-ground pools in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-above-ground-pool/ Thu, 12 Aug 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=387936
The best above-ground pools composited
Stan Horaczek

You don’t need to dig up the lawn to transform your yard into a private resort or kid-friendly water park.

The post The best above-ground pools in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best above-ground pools composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for serious swimmers The Intex Above-Ground 32-Foot by 16-Foot by 52-Inch Pool is the best above-ground pool for lap swimmers. Intex Above-Ground 32-Foot by 16-Foot x 52-Inch Pool
SEE IT

Spacious pool for real swimming.

Best overall The Bestway Power Above-Ground Pool Set is the best for small parties. Bestway Power Steel Above-Ground Pool Set
SEE IT

Perfect pool for family parties.

Best for babies and pets The YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool is the best above-ground pool for babies and pets. YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool
SEE IT

The whole family can enjoy this easy-to-store pool.

Taking a dip in your own pool is the dream of many homeowners, and thanks to affordable, easy-to-install above-ground pools, it’s never been easier to attain. In-ground pools require industrial construction equipment and cost more than some cars. However, an above-ground pool is a simple way to add fun to just about any backyard. Today’s above-ground models come in a wide variety of styles, materials, and sizes. A large rectangular above-ground pool is great for summer parties. Smaller, inflatable, oval above-ground pools are perfect for young children. If you’re looking for an inexpensive way to stay cool, the best above-ground pool turns your property into an at-home vacation destination.

How we chose the best above-ground pool

Our splashy selections are based on personal testing, research, recommendations, reviews, and user impressions. We culled through specs and perspectives until we narrowed down the choices to ones that fit every yard and need.

The best above-ground pools: Reviews & Recommendations

Ordering a pool online may sound like trying to get a haircut via email. But today’s pools are user-friendly and the product descriptions clearly state the sizes and dimensions to give you a good idea of what the final product looks like. So use our guide to help you find the swimming pool that fits your backyard, can fit your pool float of choice, looks great next to your inflatable hot tub, and has the style and features you want in a warm-weather oasis.

Best overall: Bestway Power Above-Ground Pool Set

Bestway

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mid-priced, mid-sized pool fits in smaller backyards and is easy to set up.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1000 gallons
  • Dimensions: 168 x 98 x 39.5 inches
  • Water depth: 31 inches

Pros

  • Good for smaller backyards

Cons

  • Included pump is weak

This 14-foot-by-8-foot-by-39-inch Bestway Power Above-Ground Pool Set is a small, yet comfortable way to add warm-weather fun to the lawn. Four adults will have plenty of room to take a dip in the pool. Set up is relatively easy, but you will need two people to get the job done. The walls and supports are strong. The biggest drawback is the inadequate pump. But you can always upgrade the pump and get a more efficient and effective filtration system. For a mid-sized, mid-priced pool, this is a solid solution.

Best for serious swimmers: Intex Above-Ground 32-Foot by 16-Foot by 52-Inch Pool

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This saltwater above-ground pool brings the water workouts to your backyard.

Specs

  • Capacity: 14,364 gallons
  • Dimensions: 384 x 192 x 52 inches
  • Water depth: 45 inches

Pros

  • 90-minute set up
  • Feel of an in-ground pool

Cons

  • Must supply own salt

As above-ground saltwater pools go, the Intex pool is a backyard beast, measuring 36 feet in length and just over four feet deep. That’s long enough to accomplish a genuine swimming workout in your own private lap pool. The steel frame safely holds 14,364 gallons of saltwater. You will need to supply your own salt, though. The included sand filter pumps out 2,650 gallons an hour and makes maintenance simple. If you have the space and want an above-ground model with the feel of an in-ground one, the Intex saltwater pool is your best bet.  

Best for families: Intex 28211EH 12-Foot by 30-Inch Above-Ground Pool

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fun for the entire family is less than an hour away with this above-ground pool.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1,718 gallons
  • Dimensions: 144 x 144 x 30 inches
  • Water depth: 24 inches

Pros

  • Set up takes less than an hour
  • Included filter

Cons

  • Small for adults
  • Lasts less than five years

The circular Intex 28211EH 12-Foot by 30-Inch Above-Ground Pool holds 1,718 gallons of water. That makes this a great choice for kids who want a fun, safe place to splash. You can set it up in less than an hour, and the included filter pump works well enough to keep the pool clean. The lining and walls feel strong, and the supports are tough enough to handle a kid’s birthday party. That said, this pool may not hold up after five years of heavy use. Luckily, the price point is low enough so even if you get a few seasons of swimming in, it’s worth the money. This model is a bit undersized for adults, but your kids and their friends will have a blast in this simple Intex pool.

Best for babies and pets: YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool

YAHEETECH

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Sturdiness and durability make this small above-ground pool baby- and dog-proof.

Specs

  • Capacity: 106 gallons for XXL
  • Dimensions: 63 x 63 x 12 inches
  • Water depth: 12 inches

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Versatile

Cons

  • Side panels will cave in if not on a flat surface

You can’t get an Olympic workout in the YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool. In fact, it’s less of a pool than a very large puddle. But for toddlers and dogs, this affordable pool is a lot of fun. The material is strong enough to handle a rowdy Schnauzer and soft enough for your young kids to bump into. The shallow one-foot depth is safe for wobbly kids just learning to walk, though parent supervision is ALWAYS required. As an added bonus, you can use the pool as a sandbox or ball pit. (Or to soak your weary feet.) If you’re looking for the cheapest and easiest way to add summer fun to your outdoor space, this dog pool/baby pool is a fantastic and versatile option. 

Best budget: Intex Swimming Pool, Easy Set, 8 Feet by 30 Inches

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fast set up with minimal tools required makes this above-ground pool perfect in a pinch.

Specs

  • Capacity: 639 gallons
  • Dimensions: 96.06 x 96.06 x 29.9 inches
  • Water depth: 23 inches

Pros

  • No chemicals
  • Inflatable

Cons

  • Small

Inflatable pools are the easiest to set up and maintain. As far as small above-ground pools go, this Intex swimming pool is the best of the blow-ups. The small, eight-foot diameter pool holds 639 gallons of water—not enough for a pool party, but plenty of room for one or two people. This pool is great for impromptu soaks after a hard day. There are no chemicals to change or filters to clean. You don’t need to snap support rods together or unfold pool covers. When you want to take a dip, inflate and go. There are holes for optional pumps, but this pool is best enjoyed as simply as possible. No need to add electricity and filtration to this solo backyard pool party. (For best results, use it in conjunction with a cocktail and ukulele.) 

What to consider when shopping for the best above-ground pool

Choosing an above-ground pool is easier than you may think. These swimming pools are designed for simple installation and minimal maintenance. Your biggest decision will be size and style. But before taking the plunge, know the do’s and don’ts of choosing an above-ground pool.

Picking the right pool size

Above-ground pool sizes are the first thing to look at when shopping for the best pool. Small, inflatable above-ground pools that hold less than 1,000 gallons of water are the easiest to use. Just inflate it when it’s time to swim and drain it when the party’s over. You don’t have to worry about any filters or chemicals. It’s basically a backyard bathtub, which is ideal for small kids. 

Large above-ground pools that hold more than 1,000 gallons of water will require more maintenance. These pools remain filled with water all season, so a filter and chemicals are needed to keep the water crystal clear and algae-free. There is more upkeep involved with the larger models than the inflatable swimming pools. However, with that said, the daily and weekly maintenance of these large above-ground models is very easy. And compared with the upkeep of a costly in-ground pool, above-ground pool maintenance is a breeze. Large above-ground pools can hold anywhere from 8,000 to 15,000 gallons of water, and they may stretch over 30 feet long. 

Reminder: Don’t forget to check the depth. While above-ground models are typically shallower than in-ground pools, they can still be too deep for small children or unsure swimmers. (Children can drown in as little as 1 inch of water.) The larger swimming pools can reach depths of about 4.5 feet. Smaller pools can be a mere three inches deep. 

Type of above-ground swimming pool

After you decide on a size, it’s time to think about what kind of above-ground pool you want: Inflatable, steel frame, resin frame, aluminum frame, hybrid, or semi-inground. Don’t worry—it’s not as complicated as it sounds. 

Inflatable pools are self-explanatory: Blow it up, fill it with water, and you’re good to go. 

Steel frame above-ground models are held together with vertical steel supports. The walls and floor of the pool can be plastic, vinyl, or resin. These swimming pools are strong, but they’re also heavy and may rust. Steel also gets hot in the sun. Aluminum-frame pools are lighter than steel frame pools, but to prevent oxidation, the aluminum needs some love and care—and a protective coating. 

Resin above-ground pools are made of strong plastic. They are lighter than steel frame pools, and they won’t rust. They can also take a heavy beating without getting a dent, but they do cost more.

Hybrid pools use multiple materials to create a strong pool that will last. Resin is used to keep things light and cool. Steel supports keep everything in place. These hybrid models offer the best of both worlds, and they are less expensive than resin pools. 

Semi-inground pools are a more permanent solution. Also known as radiant pools, these pools are built with a strong wall of stone or vinyl that matches the outdoor decor. They are designed to fit your specific home, so you have customizable options you don’t get with off-the-shelf pools. However, they are expensive and permanent. The upside: Radiant pools look like stylish in-ground swimming pools.

Pool placement

While above-ground pools are versatile, they can’t be placed just anywhere. Inclines are a no-no, as even the slightest hill can push water against the walls of the pool, causing uneven pressure on the sides and liner. Spreading a few bags of sand across the area can help even things out. 

When installing an above-ground model, you must comply with local building codes and regulations. This usually means you can’t place a pool near power lines or too close to property lines. 

You will also need to factor in two to three feet of perimeter space for unobstructed access to the pool. You want a large, flat, open area of grass, sand, or dirt. Don’t put it on concrete or brick. Stay away from trees. And only install it on a deck if the deck is pool-ready and designed for the job.

Saltwater pool vs. chlorine

Most above-ground pools use harsh chemicals like chlorine to keep the water clear. But a saltwater above-ground pool is the safer alternative. While saltwater pools still need cleaning chemicals, they don’t use nearly as much of the stuff. Saltwater pools are becoming popular for those who want to use fewer chemicals and don’t want to be burdened with maintenance. Swimming in saltwater also feels better. The lower chemical content means the water is not as harsh on your eyes and skin. 

Saltwater above-ground pools are just as easy to set up as other types of pools. And you can also buy a conversion kit that turns standard chlorine pools into saltwater pools.

Installation

Once again, inflatable above-ground pools are the easiest to install. Use a pump to fill the pool with air, then add water. The installation is a bit more involved when using a pool made of vertical supports. While each pool will have its own set of instructions, they can usually be set up within an afternoon and don’t require extra power tools if everything snaps in place snugly. But you will need a helping hand or two to avoid frustration. Make sure the spot is level, lay out the various parts, and understand how the liner attaches to the swimming pool. Take your time, and you should have no trouble installing the pool. 

FAQs

Q: What’s the deepest above-ground pool available?

The deepest above-ground pool available is the Intex 36-Foot by 16-Foot by 52-Inch Above-Ground Pool. The four-foot depth may not seem like a lot, but in the world of above-ground pools, it’s tough to find deeper floors. You can buy specially made above-ground pools with a depth up to six feet, but these are only available from pool-installation companies. And when you go that deep, you must make sure the walls, liner, and supports can handle the water pressure. Even for standard above-ground pools, manufacturers will recommend you only fill the pool to 90-percent capacity. This gives you enough room to get in and swim without dumping gallons of water off the sides.

Q: Are above-ground pools expensive to maintain?

Above-ground pools are not too expensive to maintain. The biggest cost is cleaning chemicals and filter replacements. There are also a few up-front costs you must think about, such as getting a ladder, a pool cover, pool skimmer and net, and other essential pool accessories. You will also need an inflatable hot dog raft because swimming without one causes chronic summer sadness. Saltwater pools are cheaper to maintain, but you’ll still need to pay for salt. And some above-ground models come with filter pumps that are underpowered, so upgrading to a more efficient pump is recommended. All said, it’s still cheaper than an in-ground pool or country club membership.  

Q: How long do above-ground pools last?

Above-ground pools do not last forever. They are temporary warm-weather fun. The liners of even the best above-ground pool will not last much longer than five years. The liners can be replaced, but the pool structure itself—the supports and walls—are only meant to last 15 years at the most. That’s a good reason to keep a close eye on your budget. If a $700 pool lasts 15 years, that’s still only $50 a year. You can get more life out of the permanent, radiant above-ground pools that have a strong wall built around the perimeter, but these pools are costly to install. 

Final thoughts on the best above-ground pools

With the best above-ground pool, your backyard becomes a fun zone. From large rectangle above-ground pools for swimming laps to small oval above-ground pools for parties, you can find a great new way to stay cool this season. With an eye on size and shape, zoom in on the model that fits your needs. Whatever style you choose, swim safe and always supervise children. Also, consider making the jump to a saltwater above-ground pool for a more natural, soothing swim. Whatever you choose, one of these pools will transform your home into a neighborhood oasis.

The post The best above-ground pools in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get a flavorful $200 discount on the Kamado Joe Jr. charcoal grill at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/kamado-joe-grill-amazon-deal/ Thu, 25 May 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=543568
Kamado Joe KJ13RH
Kamado Joe

Upgrade you grill in time for summer cookout season with 40% off on a portable charcoal grill.

The post Get a flavorful $200 discount on the Kamado Joe Jr. charcoal grill at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Kamado Joe KJ13RH
Kamado Joe

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Summer cookout season is almost here, and the centerpiece of the action is, well, a grill. Kamado Joe has slashed the price of its 13.5-inch portable Joe Jr. charcoal grill down to $299—a $200 savings and its lowest price ever. This grill has all the features of Kamado Joe’s larger grills in a more compact form, making it ideal for weekend car campers and apartment dwellers with small backyards alike. Plus, its big, orange body perched on a cast iron stand is an aesthetically pleasing conversation starter if the sweet smells of your cooking aren’t enough to get people to come to ask what’s good.

Kamado Joe KJ13RH Joe Jr. $299 (Was $499)

Kamado Joe

SEE IT

A big part of the appeal of Kamado Joe’s grills is the materials the company uses. Lifting the Joe Jr. grill’s lid reveals ceramic plates that insulate heat around the stainless steel grill grates. The grates can be lifted and replaced with different accessories like a sear plate for different types of cooking. If you plan on keeping the KJ13RH outside all the time, we recommend getting a bundle with a cover, which adds roughly $20 to the price but is well worth the extra couple of bucks.

The grill’s air vent allows you to monitor and adjust its heat and how much smoke is inside without opening it. An analog thermostat on the KJ13RH’s front side makes it easy to keep track of the grill’s temperature, too. Charcoal grills impart more flavor than their gas counterparts, and while they take a little extra time to get going, clean, and maintain, your effort will be rewarded with great-tasting meat and vegetables. If you thought you didn’t have enough space for a grill, or your current one is getting long in the tooth, don’t miss this deal on a compact cookout essential.

Other great deals for super summer grilling:

The post Get a flavorful $200 discount on the Kamado Joe Jr. charcoal grill at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best walking shoes for men in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-walking-shoes-for-men/ Thu, 29 Apr 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284453
best walking shoes for men
Raphael Renter, Unsplash

We’ve done the legwork and selected the best walking shoes for men that go the distance, even if it’s just around the block.

The post The best walking shoes for men in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best walking shoes for men
Raphael Renter, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for flat feet Blue and gray walking shoes for men for flat feet with hook-and-loop straps for laces OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe
SEE IT

Flat footers of the world will feel like they are walking on a straight, supportive cloud with these shoes.

Best for high arches Black Skechers walking shoes for men Skechers Men’s GOwalk Arch Fit Idyllic Sneaker
SEE IT

These lightweight men’s Skechers shoes hold up on long walks or long workdays

Best budget Black walking shoes for men with laces Saucony Men's VERSAFOAM Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe
SEE IT

These shoes do excellent, affordable double duty for walkers and casual runners.

Equipping your feet with the best shoes for walking is the first step to enjoyable, pain-free activities. Though it may sound obvious, taking a walk each day is one of the most beneficial things you can do, yet many don’t because of discomfort. When it comes to these aches, everything from knee soreness to back stiffness can often be traced to improper walking shoes. All muscles and nerves point to your feet during a walk and a lack of arch or ankle support will lead to pains. The best walking shoes for men address this by being well-constructed, high-quality footgear designed for their namesake activity. Shopping for them, however, can sometimes be so frustrating you want to sprint away.

In the shoe emporiums of olden days, polite salespeople accurately measured feet and offered sage advice. These days, many shoe stores at the mall lack helpful experts, and customers are left to their own devices to find the right fit. As for online shopping, trying to buy the most comfortable sneakers through the mail can lead to too many returns and much hassle. How can you tell what fits and what shoe will work best for walking? What types of shoes should you avoid for walking? What type of insole do you need? And what do you call those cold, metal measuring devices? (Answer: Those are called Brannock Devices.) All these considerations can seem intimidating, but consider the following tips and carefully curated suggestions when it comes to shopping time and you’ll find the best walking shoes for men. 

The best walking shoes for men: Reviews & Recommendations 

Best for flat feet: OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe

OrthoFeet

SEE IT

The lightweight, comfortable material of the OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe makes it one of the best walking shoes for flat feet. Many stability and orthopedic shoes can feel heavy and clunky, but the Sprint is airy, yet still supportive. It is a great walking shoe for anyone with mild pronation. The included orthotic insole is a real arch-saver and the adjustable heel grip can be loosened and tightened as needed to give you a snug fit. And, as an added bonus, you only need to tie the walking shoe once thanks to a handy slip-on and go laces. Flat footers of the world will feel like they are walking on a straight, supportive cloud.

Best for standing and working all day: Brooks Addiction Suede Walker

Brooks

SEE IT

Brooks is an industry leader in walking shoes and Brooks walking shoes do for casual outdoor strolls what Nike shoes have done for basketball. Plus, they are the best walking shoes for standing at work all day. The high-quality material laughs in the face of everyday wear and tear. The non-slip tread keeps you upright, even on ice. And the insole offers the arch support that makes these the best comfortable work shoes needed by many hard-working walkers. Waiters, teachers, nurses—you can appreciate the complete and utter joy of finding good walking shoes, and Brooks shoes will become your new favorite coworker.

Best for high arches: Skechers Men’s GOwalk Arch Fit Idyllic Sneaker

Skechers

SEE IT

The GOwalk Arch Fit evens out the weight placed on your heel and ankle, making it one of the best Skechers shoes, or shoes in general, with arch support. It’s also great for any type of foot. The Skechers shoes’ heel is raised enough to take the force of a step and spread it out to the entire foot. It also has great cushioning across the entire shoe and there is plenty of room for toes to move. The lightweight men’s Skechers shoes hold up on long walks or long workdays and the mesh knit fabric keeps your foot cool and comfortable through any workout. 

Best for wide feet: New Balance Men’s 847 V4 Walking Shoe

New Balance

SEE IT

Shopping for the best walking shoe is a multistep process. Measuring your foot is the easy part; now you have to actually find a pair of shoes wide enough to match. New Balance has been providing customers with a nice variety of widths to help get the best fit. And the 847 Walking Shoe is a wonderful, versatile walking shoe that can slip on just about any sized foot. New Balance widths are measured in Wide and X-Wide. According to their size chart, Wide is equivalent to a EE, X-Wide is 4E, and XX-Wide is 6E. The 847 is a stylish and comfortable shoe for walking and offers the benefits of durable, comfortable cushioning from toe to heel. 

Best budget: Saucony Men’s VERSAFOAM Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe

Saucony

SEE IT

A walking shoe is just a running shoe that takes its time. While there are significant differences between most running shoes and walking shoes (namely heel drop, weight, and ankle support), the Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe does excellent, affordable double duty for walkers and casual runners. The cloud-like heel is comfortable for high arches and the arch support adds some support for flat-footed walkers. While it won’t help much with overpronation, if you need a simple walking shoe that can handle most terrains and conditions, the Saucony Cohesion is one of the best men’s walking shoes you can find at that price.

What to consider when shopping for the best walking shoes for men

When shopping for the best walking shoes for men, you can get lost in options and materials. Some athletic shoe companies make bold claims about pressure points and their shoes with arch support. Others boast of high-tech gels and space-age toebox construction. But which of these things, you might wonder, actually makes for the most comfortable sneakers for men.

The answer is different for everyone. Some walking shoes are designed for those with high arches. Others are made for walkers with stability concerns. Therefore, the first step to buying any walking shoe is to take a long, hard look at your feet. 

Feet change as you age. What you thought was a narrow foot in your teens may have shifted to a wider foot in your 30s. Examine not only the length and width of your foot but also the arch. Place your wet foot on a paper bag or piece of cardboard and look at the footprint. If you see one long print, you have flat feet and may benefit from a walking shoe with stabilization. If you see only your toes and your heel, you have a high arch and you’ll need more cushion in the heel and toes to absorb impact.

Your arch can show signs of pronation and supination. These terms refer to how your foot “leans” when walking. Those with low arches often have pronation (leaning inwards), meaning the big toe and inside of the foot are doing most of the work when walking. Supination (leaning outwards) usually affects those with high arches and puts extra strain on the little toes and outside of the foot. Depending on the severity of pronation and supination, a specially made orthotic may be needed for walking. 

But there are over-the-counter walking shoes specifically designed to help moderate overpronation and supination. Stability shoes and motion control shoes can help those with overpronation. Walking shoes with greater flexibility can help those suffering from supination. Walk-in a straight line and take notice of how your foot, ankle, and shin line up. An inward bend is an overpronation. An outward bend is pronation. Armed with this knowledge, you can now begin the quest for your best shoes for walking.   

Related: These are athletic shoes that will give the best and the rest a run for their money.

Flat feet need significant arch support in a comfortable walking shoe

If you have flat feet, the shoe for walking is one that offers great arch support to compensate for overpronation. A stability walking shoe is designed to keep your foot facing front and center instead of rolling inwards. This is accomplished thanks to heavy-duty arch support that positions the foot and keeps it from bending off course. 

Stability shoes may be heavier than other walking shoes due to the beefy arch support and lack of flexibility, but there are still lightweight walking shoes that won’t tire you out. When trying on a stability shoe, pay attention to the arch: it should feel solid, not squishy. While extra soft walking shoes may be comfortable at the shoe store, they won’t help your flat feet and legs feel better after long walks. You want the extra rigidity, not a pillow. 

Motion-control shoes offer even more rigid support than stability shoes. These specialized shoes are used for severe overpronation. They will be heavy but greatly improve the quality of walking. Motion-control shoes will be specially made with insoles designed by your podiatrist. 

Keep in mind that mild pronation is common and many neutral walking shoes that don’t advertise explicit overpronation support will still have some level of arch support built-in.

Get great traction with comfortable shoes

Walking shoes, unlike hiking shoes, are made for the road most traveled. The tire-like tread of a great walking shoe prevents slipping on asphalt, concert, and even wet surfaces. And for active workers on their feet all day, a non-slip tread can be a literal lifesaver. 

A great walking shoe is also a great standing shoe. For standing and walking all day long, you want a shoe you won’t even notice. Heel pain, toe cramps, and more can be avoided by ditching flimsy, ultralight running shoes, and wearing a more supportive walking shoe. The bit of added weight from a walking shoe won’t exhaust feet; the right pair will make those feet happier. The best walking shoes for men are more than footwear: they are tools of the trade. 

For those on the clock, or those who need to get in their recommended 10,000 daily steps, a walking shoe must be durable and comfortable. Who cares if they look a little chunky? If they provide solid support and the feeling of walking in bedroom slippers, appearances can take a backseat. Still, you should be able to find great non-slip walking shoes that look better than two black boxes with string. 

Find soft, comfortable shoes for high arches

Many of the walking shoes on the market are aimed at those with flat feet who need a strong, stable shoe with significant arch support. But for those with high arches, the best walking shoes for men should have a few special features to keep you and your feet comfortable. 

High arches mean the weight and force of every step are concentrated at the heel, ankle, and toes. You may not feel pain in the arch of your foot, but after a walk or day of work, your feet and ankles will feel tired and sore all over. 

Because less of your foot is making contact with the ground, the walking shoe for high arches should have a high heel to strategically position your foot and help evenly distribute the weight. On any shoe, the angle of heel to toe is called the drop. Zero-drop walking shoes are flat, and not ideal for high arches. If the walking shoe doesn’t have a high enough heel, a heel insert can help give you the angle you need. 

You also want a roomy, comfortable toe box—the part of the shoe housing your toes, which needs to be spacious enough to let you move and flex. Crowded toes will make a short walk feel like an entity. And to keep your ankle happy, look for soft and strong support in the back of the shoe. Pinch the ankle of the shoe. If it folds easily and feels like a sock puppet, it won’t have the support high-arched walkers need. 

Why it’s so hard to measure the width of men’s walking shoes

The best walking shoe for men must have the best fit. But if you tried to decipher online width charts or read labels on shoe boxes, you know it’s not as easy as it seems to size. Part of the reason is that there’s no official, set-in-stone, absolute way all shoes are measured. Not only do women’s and men’s sizes not line up, but men’s widths can mean different things depending on the country and the shoe company. 

In America, a medium-width shoe will be labeled as D, M, or R…if it’s labeled at all. This is the shoe width you’ll most likely see on the shelves. Narrow shoes are harder to find and may be labeled S, A, B, N, or C.  A shoe with a 3A width will be narrower than a shoe with a 2A width. Confused? Hang in there. Wider shoe widths are easier to identify; they start at E for slightly wider feet: 2E is wider than E, 3E is wider than 2E, and so on. But some companies don’t use Es and will label wide shoes with a W, for wide, or XW, for extra-wide, just to add to the confusion. And this doesn’t include European shoes, which often don’t display width measurements at all. 

You can measure the width of your foot at home, even without a fancy Brannock Device. Simply trace your barefoot on a piece of paper and measure the distance across at the widest point. Then use an online chart to find your size and width encoded in the mysterious shoe size letter system. For best results, consult the specific brand’s website for sizing information. 

Here are the best men’s walking shoes you can get for less than $50

You don’t need to spend a lot to find a comfortable walking shoe. Even the big names in sneakers have affordable options. You can find a good pair of Nike walking shoes for around $60. And Asics sneakers can drop below the $40 mark. There are plenty of affordable options if you’re willing to sacrifice a few features: Namely style. 

Budget-priced walking shoes will look like a basic, plain shoe. There will be no bright flashes or fun accent colors. You may also be giving up some comfort. Lower-priced men’s walking shoes will be heavier and a little clunkier, without high-tech materials and streamlined edges. If they are on your feet all day, you will notice the added ounces of thick walking shoes.

Of course, cost-effective men’s walking shoes can also lean the other way and be as light as a feather. Except that’s not a good thing. These lightweight shoes are made of practically nothing—a few strands of mesh fabric over the thinnest sole imaginable. The ultra-lightweight sneakers are better for runners who aren’t looking for an all-day shoe. The flimsy materials won’t offer enough support and alignment for flat-footed walkers or enough heel cushion for high-arched walkers. 

You never want to go too cheap with your walking shoes. Anything below $40 can be made out of brittle rubber and fake leather that will crack after a few trips around the neighborhood (if the material is real leather, it will be labeled as such). And avoid any and all footwear sold at the grocery store.

FAQs

Q: How do I choose a good walking shoe?

Choose good walking shoes by giving them two quick endurance tests: First, try to twist the walking shoe like wringing out a towel. It should be stiff. If it twists easily, it’s too flimsy and not good for walking. Then bend the toe up. If the bend on the bottom occurs where your toes would bend, that’s good. If it bends back in the arch area of the sole, that’s bad. Shoes should bend where toes bend. Try the shoes on at the end of the day because your feet change sizes as you walk. Don’t assume the shoes will “feel good” once you break them in. If they hurt now, they’ll hurt later. While leather shoes stretch a bit, synthetic materials won’t. And remember: Most people have feet that are two different sizes, so always try on both shoes before buying.

Q: What are the best lightweight walking shoes?

The best lightweight walking shoes have enough support to still be effective. Running shoes are much lighter than walking shoes because they lack the ankle support and arch support of walking shoes. It can be tempting to go for the lightest shoe available, but make sure it still keeps your feet in place. Stability shoes that help overpronation will need enough material and rigidity to keep the foot in place, so flimsy running shoes won’t help. If you want something lightweight, that still provides arch and ankle support, many of the best Brooks walking shoes can be running shoes that are strong yet nimble. 

Q: What is the best shoe for walking all day?

For walking all day, you want a walking shoe that’s able to tackle every condition. Sightseers and travelers need a durable walking shoe with a strong sole. It’s a good idea to pay for a higher-end shoe if you plan to use it constantly. The 1400 V1 Walking Shoe from New Balance is a hearty hightop that can take paved surfaces and rocky roads equally.

Related: Need versatile storage for specialized kicks? Check out these superb shoe racks.

The final word on choosing the best walking shoes for men

The best walking shoes for men, or any athletic shoe, will be designed for your specific feet. Flat feet need more shoes with arch support than those with high arches. Some with high arches will need soft, impact-absorbent heels. If you don’t know how your foot bends and twists, ask a professional. You may need a specialized orthotic insole or custom-made option to achieve the most comfortable sneakers. Don’t take your feet for granted; they’re the foundation for your entire life. 

The post The best walking shoes for men in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best storage sheds in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-storage-sheds/ Fri, 26 Mar 2021 12:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=279043
Best storage sheds sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

These space savers range in price and size, but they all add valuable nooks and looks to your yard.

The post The best storage sheds in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best storage sheds sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A product photo of the Lifetime 8 x 12.5 ft. Outdoor Steel and Plastic Storage Shed Lifetime 8 x 12.5 ft. Outdoor Steel and Plastic Storage Shed
SEE IT

This storage shed provides versatile storage options that are durable and secure, thanks to the steel-reinforced dual wall panels.

Best for pool equipment Suncast makes one of the best storage sheds for pool equipment. Suncast Modernist 10' x 7' Outdoor Storage Shed
SEE IT

Stow your floaties and your pool vacuum in this ultra-durable shed.

Best budget gray garage storage container Oakmont Waterproof Patio Deck Box
SEE IT

You don’t need tools to assemble this small, budget-friendly storage shed.

Your backyard can and should be your oasis, and a great storage shed adds to your sanctuary’s aesthetics. Whether you have large rolling fields or only a tiny patio space, being able to relax in privacy on a nice afternoon really is a privilege and shouldn’t be disrupted by haphazard tools or a ramshackle structure in your line of sight. Maintaining your space doesn’t have to be a major financial investment either. Whether you want a purely functional storehouse or a larger arrangement with windows, organizing systems, and multiple doors, there are an amazing variety of outdoor storage sheds on the market. Below, we’ve selected some of the best storage sheds on the market to help you easily get a sturdy, durable, and attractive solution into place. 

How we chose the best storage sheds

Searching for the best storage sheds is like “The Three Little Pigs”—you have to look for those made of straws and sticks before finding the holy grail made of bricks. We looked at reviews, recommendations, user impressions, and choices from our own backyards to find the ones that will protect your gardening gear from a wolf with incredible lung capacity.

The best storage sheds: Reviews & Recommendations

If you’re on the hunt for storage shed ideas, you should be careful to select the right size and look for the property you have. Thoughtfully selected storage sheds can increase curb appeal and even drive up the value of your home. First and foremost, however, a storage shed must be functional, so consider features like doors and windows for security and convenience. You want it to be as easy as possible to put away that leaf vacuum and bring out the pool vacuum and propane grill.

Best overall: Lifetime 8 x 12.5 ft. Outdoor Steel and Plastic Storage Shed

Lifetime

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The steel-reinforced dual-wall panels and high-density polyethylene construction mean less shed maintenance and more gardening time.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 146 x 92 x 96 inches
  • Material: Plastic, steel
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: Yes

Pros

  • Adjustable shelving
  • Pitched roof
  • UV-protected panels

Cons

  • Anchoring hardware sold separately

This 12.5-foot-wide Lifetime outdoor storage shed is designed with steel-reinforced construction and easy-to-maintain dual-wall high-density polyethylene. A wooden cottage look with a high-pitched roof allows for quick drainage, and two double doors allow easy access to storage items. This plastic storage shed also offers steel-reinforced lockable doors and an interior shelving system for added organization (who doesn’t like to admire a well-oiled chainsaw). Five small skylights and two shatter-proof polycarbonate windows give more than enough light to grab the right screwdriver, and a slip-resistant high-density polyethylene floor protects against oil, solvents, and stains. Heavy-duty steel trusses strengthen the roof enough to withstand gusts, gales, and everything in between. The entire shed is UV-protected to prevent weather damage. This durable shed has only one downside: anchoring hardware is sold separately, a valuable purchase if the shed won’t have heavy lawn equipment like mowers to weigh it down.

Best for bikes: KETER Manor 4×6 Resin Outdoor Storage Shed

KETER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This stylish, compact storage shed has room for a push mower, electric bike, and more.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 51.2 x 75.6 x 78 inches
  • Material: Resin, steel
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: No

Pros

  • Skylight and window for air circulation
  • Lockable
  • Wood-look sans-maintenance

Cons

  • No built-in storage organization

The KETER is an attractive, durable, all-weather shed that requires no maintenance, thanks to its polypropylene resin plastic material. Extra features include a skylight, window, and vent for lighting and air circulation. Advertised as easy to build, this KETER shed includes a floor panel, though it will require a level ground surface like all sheds. One of several resin storage sheds on our list, it’s lockable for security, although you must add your own padlock. This storage shed doesn’t have built-in storage but can fit a shelving system of your choosing. Steel reinforcements add an extra layer of strength and durability. Its dove-grey coloring is easy on the eyes and won’t get you in trouble with the HOA, and the wood-like texture makes it look extra classy and luxurious.

Best compact: MCombo Outdoor Storage Cabinet

Mcombo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This quaint, stylish wood storage shed can be painted to create ethereal garden vibes.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 25.6 x 18.1 x 70.5 inches
  • Material: Fir wood
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: Yes

Pros

  • Paintable
  • Weather-resistant
  • Waterproof roof

Cons

  • Might be too short for brooms and rakes

A great choice for small gardens, this storage shed features solid wood construction in a natural light wood finish. Don’t let the wood construction fool you: it’s made of fir and is weather-resistant. The combination of open storage and shelving makes this storage shed easy to keep organized—three shelves for small items and one space for long tools. It even includes an upper space to keep sharp out-of-reach items away from small, curious grabby child hands. In case you’re turned off by grey plastic exteriors, you can stain or paint this storage shed to fulfill your cottagecore fairy garden fantasy. A sloping, waterproof asphalt roof prevents water accumulation and helps its longevity. Four metal brackets keep the shed anchored, and a raised bottom prevents the floor from getting wet through contact with the ground. Reviewers note that tall gardening supplies, like rakes, brooms, and garden hoes, might be too tall to fit into the storage shed.

Best extra-large: Majestic Do-It-Yourself 8 ft. x 12 ft. Outdoor Wood Storage Shed

Handy Home Products

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 108 x 96  x 144 inches
  • Material: Wood
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: Yes

Pros

  • Provides 786 square feet of storage
  • Attractive, customizable design
  • Loft and shelves built in for extra storage

Cons

  • Some assembly required
  • Expensive

Items like riding lawnmowers, snow blowers, bikes, grills, and tools can occupy lots of space. If you’ve got that kind of equipment and more, an extra-large storage shed may be in order. Handy Home Products’ Majestic Do-It-Yourself Outdoor Wood Storage Shed provides plenty of storage space while still looking good in the backyard. 

The wooden shed measures 8 feet by 12 feet, providing 768 square feet of storage. This shed comes with a kit to install shingles on the peak roof and allows you to customize the paint color. It’s available in two versions: with or without a floor. Wide, 64-inch double doors open out, while a transom of small windows over the doors lets light in. The shed also comes with a wraparound loft and shelves for additional storage. And the lockable doors will help keep your equipment secure.

Best for pool equipment: Suncast Modernist 10′ x 7′ Outdoor Storage Shed

Suncast

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 129.5 x 87.5 x 89.5 inches
  • Material: Resin
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: Yes

Pros

  • Provides 438 cubic feet of storage 
  • Modern design
  • Durable

Cons

  • Heavy 
  • Expensive
  • Padlock for door purchased separately

If you’ve got a pool in the backyard, the equipment you need to maintain it and the floats you buy to enjoy it can quickly accumulate. The Suncast Modernist Outdoor Storage Shed may provide a tidy solution. At 129 inches long by 87.5 inches wide and 89.5 inches high, this shed offers 438 cubic feet of storage space—providing plenty of room for a pool vacuum with plenty of space left over for patio furniture.

Made of resin, this storage shed is waterproof and durable and can support up to 40 pounds of snow in the off-season. The sleek gray design looks modern, and the barn door is steel-reinforced for extra durability. This shed also has five transom windows that let in light to help you find what you’re looking for and vents to keep air circulating and resist rot. That said, this shed is an investment and, at 490 pounds, won’t be easy to move.

Best for organization: Rubbermaid Storage Shed

Rubbermaid

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This weather-resistant outdoor shed features a pegboard interior to hang tools and mount shelves or baskets.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 89.75 x 45 x 20.25 inches
  • Material: Resin
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: Yes (sold separately)

Pros

  • Impact immune flooring
  • Double-wall construction
  • Can attach shelving and utility hooks to wall

Cons

  • Assembly takes time

With 332 cubic feet of storage, your lawn and garden tools can be easily assessed with this Rubbermaid storage shed’s wall-mounted organization system, like a shelf and wire basket/tool organizer sold separately. Double doors allow you to store a push mower or wide patio furniture. Double-wall resin construction and an impact-resistant floor help it withstand the elements, dents, leaks, and seasonal wear and tear. The ability to attach pegboards, shelving, and utility hooks takes organization to another level. However, assembly takes time—reviewers note it takes between five to seven hours, depending on how closely you follow directions and personal handiness.

Best steel: Arrow Classic Charcoal Steel Storage Shed

Arrow

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This shed is made out of galvanized steel and coated in Valspar polyester paint to prevent rust and corrosion.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 71.25 x 99.75 x 72.88 inches
  • Material: Galvanized steel
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: No

Pros

  • Lockable sliding doors
  • 12-year limited warranty
  • Low gable roof

Cons

  • Floor and foundation not included

For those in the market for metal storage sheds, this heavy-duty pick from Arrow is built for ultimate protection from the elements. It’s made of galvanized steel and is finished with Valspar polyester paint to seal the steel from rust and corrosion. It’s also easy on the eyes, thanks to traditional vertical wall panels and classic lines for a timeless look. The sliding doors sit on large glides that prevent sticking and derailing—add a padlock to ensure your lawn equipment stays in your backyard. There’s a 12-year limited warranty that gives you peace of mind in case of a defect. A low gable roof prevents water from pooling. You’ll have to build your own floor or foundation, as they are not included. However, the instructions give foundation guidelines, like recommended concrete slab thickness.

Best budget: Oakmont Waterproof Patio Deck Box

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t need a large backyard to store gardening tools and cushions thanks to this chest, which fits on your patio or back porch.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 47.3 x 24.0 x 24.8 inches
  • Material: Polyethylene
  • Assembly required: Yes
  • Storage options: No

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Durable
  • Easy to assemble

Cons

  • Hard to disassemble if not put together correctly

Opening from the top like a luggage chest, this patio deck box offers water-resistant storage for backyard items like cushions and gardening tools thanks to its 120-gallon storage capacity. Its affordable and durable discoloration-resistant polyethylene material comes in an on-trend neutral grey with a rattan texture for visual interest. It’s lockable in case you want to protect what’s inside. You can assemble it without tools, but follow the steps closely—it’s hard to take apart if incorrectly assembled. Reviews also say it’s not sit-proof—save the sitting for your patio furniture or a portable chair. With its smaller footprints, it’s the most portable storage shed on our list.

What to consider when buying the best storage sheds

The best storage sheds look good in your space and help you keep your garden tools, bikes, and outdoor equipment clean, safe, dry, and organized. You don’t want anything happening to the solar generator you keep topped off in case of emergencies. Storage sheds can be a go-to for all your outdoor equipment if your home doesn’t have a garage, or they can boost your overall storage if you do.

Most storage sheds are constructed using plastics, metal, wood, or a combination, and many come as storage shed kits. Wood tends to be the most attractive, expensive material and requires the most maintenance; high-end wood sheds can cost thousands of dollars and might require a contractor to build if you aren’t handy. Metals and plastics may not be quite as charming. Still, they are typically very durable and more affordable, and many imitate the look of wood sheds with faux planking, natural colors, and cottage-style windows. Metal sheds are the most economical option, but they can sometimes rust over time, especially if used in wet locations.

Be sure to select doors that open easily for more oversized items but that also lock securely. Overall, height is also an important factor; larger sheds often require the owner to enter the shed, and being able to stand comfortably is nice. While typically only higher-end sheds have operational windows, allowing natural light into the shed is also practical. Finally, consider how you will organize your stuff once you have the shed. Some shed manufacturers offer corresponding organizational systems to help you hang hooks, shelves, and bins. 

Access

If you’ve ever had the “good” fortune of managing storage in a tiny crawl space, then you realize having easy access is very important. Consider how you can lift, drag, or roll your stuff into the storage shed. Whether you will be putting items into storage for the off-season, have bulky, heavy lawn equipment, or plan to store bikes or motorcycles—door width, type, and quantity are important. In addition, look for sheds incorporating natural light and organizers to make overall access easier and more efficient.

For easier navigation, consider a storage shed that offers multiple doors. For example, if you live in a climate where you need to store many bulky items in the off-season, dragging those out is a waste of time just to dig up other tools and supplies. More than one door means you can decide to keep certain items stationary for long periods while being able to access other areas inside the shed. Door hinges also vary, with some doors opening out, sliding, lifting up, or folding down. The best storage sheds will allow for easy access to your stored items.

Bike storage

Whether storing one bike or your whole family’s collection, it’s essential to have secure, dry storage sized just right. The best bike storage shed will be at least 6 feet in either width or length because a typical adult bike is 3 inches shy of that 6-foot mark. So be sure to double-check the manufacturer’s specifications that the interior dimension of the shed is over 69 inches, as interior and exterior dimensions differ. 

Look for easily maintained and waterproof shed materials, like plastics. Look for sheds that offer a lockable door latch to keep bikes safe from theft. Even when shopping for smaller, space-saving sheds, look for a skylight or window features. Less expensive sheds may skimp on this feature (inexpensive metal sheds often offer no windows), but this added natural light feature would make retrieving your bicycle or whatever else you have in there much easier.

Yard size

While it would be nice to have a large yard, many people don’t, especially if you live in or near major cities. If you are pressed for space, selecting each addition with care becomes even more important. Luckily, there are a lot of well-made, attractive storage sheds sized for smaller spaces. 

The best small shed will be designed to hold your garden essentials. Some small storage sheds look more like rectangular chests and can also work as a coffee table or bench. These lower units can easily hold hoses, gardening equipment, outdoor cushions, and/or pillows. Taller storage sheds take advantage of height and can fit full-sized rakes, shovels, as well as offer shelves for smaller items. The best small storage sheds come in various materials and, due to the smaller footprint, will usually be pretty reasonably priced. 

Organization

Available storage is almost every homeowner’s dream. Even when you start without much and are a fan of minimal living, stuff accumulates. While it can be tempting to get the largest shed you can and fill it to the brim with all your extra stuff, you aren’t really solving problems with this method. Cluttered sheds are bound to be filled with items you forget about or may find too hard to unbury. The longer things stay tucked in a corner, the more likely a family of spiders has moved in.

The best storage sheds with tool organizers will help keep your home and garden orderly. While it’s possible to purchase shed storage systems independently, some manufacturers offer systems tailored specifically to their shed model and design. For example, some sheds offer built-in pegs or grids that work easily with coordinating shelves, hooks, bins, and racks. The benefit to purchasing a shed that coordinates with a planned storage system is that you know it will work to maximize your space, and usually it can be customized and arranged to your specific needs. The more organized your shed, the quicker, easier, and more efficient your jobs become.

Budget

The best storage sheds on a small budget may not be as large or modern-looking as some more expensive options, but they’ll still get your garden in gear and keep your tools neat. Metal sheds, while not always the cutting edge of style, tend to be very affordable. However, they usually don’t come with a floor, so a level foundation is required, ideally one slightly lifted off the ground. And maybe it’s only some accessories and smaller tools you need to stow. A bargain-priced patio box could be your best choice if you’re looking for the most compact solution in a social space.

FAQs

Q: Are plastic or metal sheds better?

Both plastic and metal sheds have pros and cons that make it hard to say which is a better choice. If you are looking for the most cost-effective option, you may want to consider a metal shed. Plastic and metal share some characteristics: both are durable, rot and insect resistant, and difficult to customize. Plastic sheds outperform metal sheds in two areas: they hold up better to water (rarely springing any leaks) and do not rust. A plastic shed will be the better choice if you live in a wet climate.

Q: What to consider when buying a storage shed?

When buying a storage shed for your home, consider the size, shape, design, and material you want the shed to be constructed from. Typically sheds are offered in metal, plastic, or wood. Consider the pros and cons of each material and the overall cost and maintenance. Before making your purchase, check for any zoning laws, permits, or homeowner association rules. Finally, consider the foundation and flooring. Keeping a shed elevated and off the wet ground will help prevent rotting and/or corrosion. Not all sheds come with the shed floor; this may have to be purchased separately.

Q: What is a good size for a storage shed?

A good size for a storage shed depends on several factors. Consider the overall size of your yard, the amount of storage you need (not only now but also down the line), and how you will use the shed. Some people strictly want a shed to hold their landscaping equipment, while others want to be able to store out-of-season furniture, grills, bikes, motorcycles, and even have designated areas for use as a workbench. For larger yards and larger storage demands, a good size is 12 feet by 12 feet. Space-saving sizes are available at 4 feet by 6 feet or 4 feet by 8 feet. The best size for a storage shed depends on your needs and outdoor space. Storage sheds that are tall enough to stand in are a good idea for comfort and ease of use.

Final thoughts on the best storage sheds

The best storage sheds will keep you organized, look attractive in your outdoor space, and be built to last. With options in various materials (solid wood and high-tech waterproof plastics, to name a couple), these structures shelter your items from the weather and will also be designed with customizable organizing systems for easy access to your garden tools and recreational equipment.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best storage sheds in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Solo Stove’s lit Memorial Day deals include 45% off and a free mini fire pit https://www.popsci.com/gear/solo-stove-memorial-day-deals/ Fri, 19 May 2023 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=542179
Solo Stove Memorial Day Weekend Sale
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Get these hot deals before they flame out.

The post Solo Stove’s lit Memorial Day deals include 45% off and a free mini fire pit appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Solo Stove Memorial Day Weekend Sale
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Solo Stove is responsible for making our favorite smokeless outdoor fire pits—with the Bonfire 2.0 being a particular favorite after our tests. And right now, Solo offers that model and others at up to 45% off during its Memorial Day Weekend sale. On top of that, much of its collection also comes with a free Solo Stove Mesa, the company’s $119.99 tabletop fire pit, with the promo code FREEMESA. These are some of the deepest discounts we’ve ever seen on these outdoor essentials, and we’re surprised to see Solo Stove launch them so early.

Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 $249.99 (Was $399.99)

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

The Bonfire 2.0 is Solo Stove’s mid-sized smokeless fire pit, and it’s the perfect choice for most outdoor patios and backyards. The circular barrel can hold several pieces of wood, while the wide lip directs flames upward instead of outward. Ash from the burning wood falls into an ash pan, where it sits rather than getting burned up. A lot of smoke from fire pits comes as a result of burning ash. Solo Stove updated the Bonfire’s design to make this chamber easily accessible so that you can remove and empty it after every use with relative ease.

Our tests found that the Bonfire 2.0 burned wood more efficiently than a traditional fire pit, was easy to move around, and that its claim to be “smokeless” was mostly accurate. All fire pits will produce some smoke—you’re burning wood, after all—but Solo Stove’s patented design reduced it significantly. A ring of holes at the bottom sucks air in, the air rises through the fire pit (there’s a gap between the fire pit’s barrel and outer edge), and it exits through another ring of holes up at the top.

If you plan on hosting parties this summer or want to extend the time you can use your backyard from spring through autumn, don’t miss this deal. It’s straight fire.

Get these other great outdoor deals:

The post Solo Stove’s lit Memorial Day deals include 45% off and a free mini fire pit appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best coolers for camping in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-coolers-for-camping/ Wed, 15 Mar 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=519056
The Best Coolers For Camping
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Bring these coolers on your next camping trip to keep your food (and beverages) cool and fresh.

The post The best coolers for camping in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Coolers For Camping
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler
SEE IT

RTIC’s Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler its the sweet spot between performance, aesthetics, extra features, and price.

Best electric GOsun Chill Cooler GOSun Chill Cooler
SEE IT

GOSUN Chill Cooler can keep your perishables cold without ice—and it can even run on solar power.

Best budget Coleman Xtreme Portable Cooler Coleman Xtreme Portable Cooler
SEE IT

If cost is your concern, Coleman’s Xtreme Portable Cooler is the cream of the crop.

A well-built, long-lasting cooler for camping will keep your food and drinks cold for hours when you’re away from a power outlet, convenience store, or other modern luxuries. It needs to be rugged enough to get taken in and out of the back of a car, trekked to a campsite, and exposed to rain, snow, sunshine, bugs, and anything else you’ll find out in the wilderness. If your current camping cooler is looking a little long in the tooth, isn’t big enough for the length of your trip, it’s time for an upgrade. Here are some of the best coolers for camping in a wide range of styles for every budget.

How we chose the best coolers for camping

There are a glut of coolers available on the Internet, but the starting point for the recommendations below started with some of our other stories. The commerce team Popular Science has already covered the best coolers and cooler bags available for all uses. Many of the metrics—size, capacity, price—that went into determining the top picks in those stories were also important here. We paid attention to options from the top brands, and were able to conduct some in-person testing to supplement our research.

Coolers can get expensive very fast—we feel the price is worthwhile since this is a piece of gear that should literally last you decades—but we made sure our selections were relatively affordable. This mentality was a through-line throughout this entire story, not just something we cared about when choosing our budget pick. Overall, you’ll find camping coolers that provide the right mix of performance and value without sacrificing either.

The best coolers for camping: Reviews & Recommendations

Camping has experienced a mainstream renaissance lately, driven in part by the continuing effects of the COVID-19 pandemic and our collective desire to be out in the world but away from crowds. When outdoor trips were seen one of the few safe summertime activities, people began investing in camping gear, especially tents and water filters. People are still discovering (or rediscovering) the benefits of spending time outdoors, known in some circles as “nature therapy.” There are a lot of fancy camping gadgets, but a camping cooler is deliberately low tech—at least in most cases. Companies have put a lot of effort into creating materials that insulate your food and drinks for longer periods of time without adding too much weight or bulk. There’s always going to be a tradeoff between size and capacity vs. portability, so it’s important to strike the right balance for your specific needs. Many of the camping coolers you’ll see below are available in multiple sizes, which was done by design. We want to make sure everyone’s needs are met regardless of their situation.

Best overall: RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler

RTIC

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27.01 x 17.28 x 16.54 inches
  • Weight: 13.4 pounds
  • Capacity: 54 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Closed-cell foam
  • Price: $219.99

Pros

  • Excellent weight to capacity ratio
  • Three inches of insulation
  • Price

Cons

  • No separate built-in compartments

If we could only recommend one camping cooler to suit everyone’s needs, RTIC’s Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler is far and away the best choice. The company considered every angle of this cooler, and engineered one of the best pieces of outdoor gear we’ve ever seen regardless of the category.

The cooler’s 52 quart capacity allows it to hold up to 60 pounds of ice or 70 cans with no ice according to RTIC, which is more than enough space to hold everything you’d need for a two day camping trip. This is one of the biggest camping coolers we’re recommending, but thanks to RTIC’s engineering, it’s also one of the lightest. Despite its three inches of closed-cell foam insulation, it weighs roughly half as much as its competition. This will make a huge difference when transporting the cooler to and from your house.

Little touches, like the T-latches that keep it securely closed, non-skid rubber feet, marine-grade nylon rope handles, and the ability to slip in an optional divider to separate food and drink make it even more appealing. We’re even happy to see RTIC offers this camping cooler in six colorways, so you’re not stuck with a plain white one. We wish RTIC included their divider with this cooler—it’s only $7 on their site—but beyond that we couldn’t find much fault with the Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler.

If you’re looking for a big, light, relatively inexpensive cooler for camping, boating, tailgating, or other all-day outdoor activities, don’t hesitate to pick one up.

Best electric: GOSun Chill Cooler

GOsun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 23.5 x 16 x 19 inches
  • Weight: 30 pounds
  • Capacity: 42 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Close cell polyurethane foam
  • Price: $649

Pros

  • Built-in compressor keeps items cool without ice
  • Can be run off solar power
  • Separate compartments for fridge and freezer items

Cons

  • You have to remember to charge it
  • Price

GOsun’s Chill Cooler is the most high-tech option we’re recommending, and while its price is high, it’s arguably the most efficient choice. That’s because it has a built-in refrigeration system, which continually keeps its chamber at a pre-set temperature between -4 and 68 degrees Fahrenheit. This means you won’t have to dedicate any space to ice to keep its contents cool. The cooler’s temperature is managed by a touch panel on top, which is flanked by USB-A ports and a DC cigarette lighter, so you can charge your phone and other devices on-the-go.

The Chill Cooler’s greatest strength is the ability to keep its contents cool, but its high-tech design comes with one downside: the need to keep it charged. Yes, you’ll need to plug in your cooler, which would make the Chill Cooler a no-go for camping if not for GOsun’s ingenuity. You can connect this cooler to an external battery pack or go fully off the grid by plugging it into GOsun’s Outdoor Solar Table. If you’re camping during sunny summer days, and don’t use the Chill Cooler’s cooling features continuously, you shouldn’t have too many issues with it running out of juice.

There aren’t very many electric coolers available, but GOsun’s Chill Cooler stands out in this category because of its innovative design.

Best with wheels: YETI Roadie 60

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 23.7 x 19.9 x 20.5 inches
  • Weight: 29 pounds
  • Capacity: 63 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Polyurethane
  • Price: $500

Pros

  • Ultra-durable
  • Highly portable given its size
  • Periscoping handle for easy manuverability

Cons

  • Price
  • Weight

YETI is arguably the best-known premium cooler brand, and it’s brought all the design chops that make its sedentary gear popular into a wheeled version. The $500 60 Quart cooler is one of the biggest—by capacity—camping coolers we’re recommending, and it’s the most expensive non-electric model, but you’re getting what you pay for.

The biggest benefit to getting a YETI cooler is its durability—they’re literally bear proof thanks to their insulation and well-made latches. If you make the investment, you should be able to keep this cooler for life. One of the biggest potential pain points for a wheeled cooler is, well, their wheels, which are going to come into contact with tough terrain very often. YETI says it uses single-piece tires, which should be able to handle prolonged exposure rocks and dirt just fine.

Portability is the main reason to get a wheeled cooler, and the Roadie 60 excels in this area. Its squat-but-deep design offers the same capacity as a traditional cooler in a more compact form. The Roadie 60’s telescoping handle will reach high enough at its maximum height to be comfortable to roll around, but will contract to the point where it’s out of sight when it’s not needed.

Yes, the YETI Roadie 60 is expensive, but if you want the highest quality rolling camping cooler around and are able to stretch your budget, you won’t find a better option.

Best large: Driftsun 75 Quart Insulated Cooler

Driftsun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 33.5 x 18.5 x 18 inches
  • Weight: 32 pounds
  • Capacity: 75 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Rotomolded thermoplastic
  • Price: $249.99

Pros

  • Excellent ice retention
  • High capacity
  • Built-in bottle opener

Cons

  • Large size comes with added weight

If a high-capacity camping cooler is what you crave, Driftsun has you covered with its ultra-large-but-relatively-inexpensive Insulated Cooler. Its 75 quart capacity will comfortably hold dozens of cans with room to spare ice. Driftsun is also confident in this cooler’s insulation, and says it can keep ice solid for up to 10 days—more than enough time for a week-long camping trip if you’re strategic about how long you keep it open. This level of performance is also possible because of the cooler’s locking latches, which will keep it firmly shut.

This may be the largest camping cooler we recommend, but it’s not the heaviest—even amongst non-electric models. We considered portability very strongly when selecting a camping cooler in this category because nobody want to carry it around if it’s too heavy. Many of the coolers in this guide have a capacity of between 50 and 60 quarts, and while a 75 quart option may not seem like a big difference, the ability to carry around the same number of cans with ice is a big deal for long trips. Some of Driftsun’s little extras, like a built-in bottle opener make it a little nicer to use, too.

If you need a big cooler for longer trips—or ones with a larger party—Driftsun’s 75 Quart Insulated Cooler is the way to go. There’s enough space to satisfy the thirst of a big crowd without being too unwieldy to use. This camping cooler’s affordable price is just icing on the cake.

Best soft cooler: Hydro Flask 26L Day Escape Soft Cooler

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 14.5 x 14.5 x 10.3 inches
  • Weight: 3.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 27 Qt.
  • Style: Softshell
  • Materials: Polyester
  • Price: $179.95

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Relatively high capacity
  • Features straps and handles

Cons

  • Can’t hold as much stuff as hard shell coolers

If your idea of a camping trip is a one night stay at a campsite for two or three people, there isn’t much of a reason to pack a big hardshell cooler—Hydro Flask’s 26L Day Escape Soft Cooler will more than satisfy your needs. The soft cooler is ultra light, but the insulation Hyrdro Flask uses can keep its contents cold for up to 27 hours according to the company.

Because of the cooler’s relatively small size, you’re likely going to fill it to the brim, and Hydro Flask has accounted for this by offering side handles in addition to a strap, which can make it easier to carry for two people. This seems like a little touch, but it can make a big difference. Additionally, the Day Escape’s strap can be removed and reattached in such a way that you can carry it as a cross-body strap.

We’ve tried some of Hydro Flask’s soft coolers in the past, and one of the features that’s always struck us is the quality of their zipper. This is essential for a soft cooler, because a faulty zipper will let warm air inside, or let liquid leak out. We’re happy to say this has never been an issue for us. If you’re confident that your next camping trips will be short and sweet, and you’d like to be as unencumbered as possible while you’re exploring nature, Hydro Flask 26L Day Escape is the ideal cooler.

Best budget: Coleman Xtreme Portable Cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 28.25 x 15.75 x 18.25 inches
  • Weight: 12.3 pounds
  • Capacity: 70 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Plastic (with Xtreme® technology)
  • Price: $79.99

Pros

  • High capacity
  • Cup holders and seating
  • Price

Cons

  • No latches to keep the lid closed

Coleman’s Xtreme Portable Cooler doesn’t have a lot of bells and whistles, but it makes up for its simplicity by offering the best value we’ve ever seen in a full-sized hard cooler. The Xtreme has a capacity of 70 quarts, yet it’s the lightest camping cooler we’re recommending at just under 12.5 pounds. The camping cooler’s favorable capacity-to-weight ratio is complemented by its sun-$100 price tag and overall performance. Coleman says this cooler can keep its contents cold for up to five days, but we’re skeptical given its lid, which has extra insulation around the rim, but no latches to keep it closed.

Coleman touts the Xtreme Portable Cooler’s extra features, like four cup holders on top, and its ability to be used as a seat or work surface with a 250 pound weight limit. These are genuinely useful auxiliary uses, though the cup holders do reduce the insulation on top of the cooler at four points. Still, these nitpicks are immediately forgivable due to the Xtreme Portable Cooler’s price, which makes it the perfect pick for newer campers who aren’t sure they’ll go out enough times to justify getting a more luxe option.

What to consider when shopping for the best coolers for camping

Size

A cooler’s physical size—including weight—is the first factor to think about when picking the right camping cooler. This isn’t a piece of gear you’re going to want to upgrade on a regular basis. Our recommendations run the gamut, but most of them are roughly two feet wise, and a food and a half wide and deep. A cooler in that size range will weigh roughly 15 pounds when empty. Also consider the amount of space you have in your car, which will likely be packed with a lot of other gear, and on the campsite.

Capacity

A camping cooler’s capacity is measured in quarts, and determines how much space there is inside for your food and drinks. Many companies illustrate the capacity of their cooler by saying how much ice and how many cans it can hold. These rough metrics can be a big help in figuring out which cooler is right for you, so don’t disregard them even if you plan on packing liquid in bottles and dedicating part of its space to food.

Style

Camping coolers come in all shapes and sizes, but we’ve broken them down into two styles: hardshell and softshell. We’ve elected to primarily focus on hardshell coolers in large part because this is the most traditional type. We also have an entire guide to insulated cooler bags—the official name for softshell coolers—so you’re covered if you prefer this style. Softshell coolers look like a tote bag and are a lot more portable, but they can’t hold as much stuff. The solution for multi-day camping trips with a lot of hiking to and from a central camping spot may be to get one of both.

Materials

When possible, we’ve called out the materials companies have used to make their coolers. This has the biggest impact on their ability to keep your perishables cold for extended periods of time. Naturally, coolers with thick insulation will be larger and weigh more, so keep that in mind if portability is your priority.

Price

You can spend a lot of money on a camping cooler, but we’ve made sure most of our recommendations fall under $300, so they’re accessible to the highest number of people. That said, we didn’t shy away from more expensive models if they had a differentiating feature that justified the higher cost.

FAQs

Q: How much does a cooler for camping cost?

This will depend on its size and extra features, but you should expect to pay under $300 for most camping coolers we recommend.

Q: How do I know what size cooler I need?

You can use the cooler’s size and capacity guide to help determine the size of cooler that works best for you. If you’re a frequent camper who plans on taking more people with you, opt for a larger option than you need today.

Q: Are soft or hard coolers better for camping?

This depends on the length of your trip. If you’re a single or two-person team going on a day trip, a soft cooler may work best for you thanks to its portability. If you’re part of a larger multi-person party who’s going to be away for several days, a hard cooler is the way to go.

Q: How long do camping coolers stay cold?

This depends on its materials, the amount of insulation used, and how much ice is inside. If you use a lot of ice, there’s no reason the cooler shouldn’t keep your food and drinks cool for a couple of days.

Q: Will a cooler keep things cold without ice?

This depends on the temperature of the perishables you put inside of it. The cooler’s insulation will reduce the amount of hot air that reaches your perishables, but it won’t be as effective as it would be with ice inside.

Q: Are camping coolers worth it?

Yes. If you’re going on a long outdoor trip, a camping cooler is essential for keeping beverages and perishable food from reaching unsafe temperatures.

Final thoughts on the best coolers for camping

The right camping cooler should last a lifetime, which is more than we can say for most gear produced these days regardless of the category. Advancements in materials and manufacturing, driven by demand, has allowed companies to make big investments in this space. Outdoor activities never go out of style, and the upside is you can use your camping cooler in your backyard, at a tailgate, or even extra fridge space if you’re hosting a party. These auxiliary purposes can help make larger, more expensive camping coolers a little easier to justify, especially if you live in a place where the climate is moderate or warm year-round.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers for camping in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best family tents in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-family-tent/ Fri, 06 Aug 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=386903
A lineup of the best family tents on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keep everyone in your family comfortable and safe from the elements inside a solid family tent.

The post The best family tents in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best family tents on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Best overall tent core 11 person family tent Core 11 Person Family Cabin Tent
SEE IT

Fit the whole family (and more) is this spacious 11-person tent.

Best for packing light The MSR Habitude 6 Person Tent is the best tent for packing light. MSR Habitude 6-Person Tent
SEE IT

With durable materials and lightweight design, you can carry this pick far on any adventure.

Best all-weather The Teton Sports Mesa Canvas Tent is the best all-weather tent Teton Sports Mesa Canvas Tent
SEE IT

No need to limit your camping trips to the warmer months—this pick will protect you from outdoor conditions year-round.

Few things offer a much-needed change of scenery like hitting the great outdoors, and sharing the experience in a family tent can make it even more special. Every successful camping trip requires adequate preparation to ensure it goes down smoothly, and traveling with a larger group comes with additional unique challenges. Finding the best places to go camping is just the start. Among the most critical considerations for a family camping trip is selecting a proper shelter for your group’s size and camping environment. It’s important for the entire group dynamic that each of your loved ones stays cozy and comfortable without getting cramped or being left out in the elements. Whether you’re going away for a casual weekend, packing light for a strenuous hike, or hunkering down in the rain and snow, here are a few of the best family tents to accommodate the whole gang no matter where your next camping adventure takes you.

How we chose the best family tents

One kind of family tent won’t work for every kind of family. In order to find the best family tents for you and your loved ones, we looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research on choices for the beach to the backcountry.

The best family tents: Reviews & Recommendations

Now that you know some things to remember when shopping for the best family tent for your next camping trip, it’s time to roll out our list of top contenders. Remember to be specific about your choice of material for the climate as well as the type of campsite, and consider sizing up if you want to ensure that everyone has enough space.

Best overall: Core 11-Person Family Cabin Tent

This cabin tent from Core is one of the best family tents for the money, boasting a center height of 86 inches and enough floor space to fit three queen mattresses. It’s built from water-resistant 68D polyester and consists of the main chamber connected to a screened-off entry room that can be used as sleeping quarters or a staging and storage area for bags and shoes. Gear storage pockets line the interior, which is outfitted with an adjustable ventilation system, an extension cord access port, and a lantern hook—no more rooting around for your headlamp.

Best for large groups: Tahoe Gear Ozark 3-Season Tent

If you’re looking for the best family tent to accommodate upwards of a dozen people, there are few better options than this three-season tent from Tahoe Gear. The interior boasts a height clearance of seven feet, consists of two separate rooms divided by a zip-up door, and features mesh ventilation for comfort on warm nights. Assembly is accomplished with an industry-standard pin-and-ring system and shock-corded poles, and the included fly canopy extends beyond the doorway to keep the rain out of the screens.

Best for packing light: MSR Habitude 6-Person Tent

The Habitude from MSR is one of the best family tents for packing light, weighing just over 13 pounds and packing down to an incredibly small 23 x 10 x 10 inches. Once assembled, the interior space features vertical walls and a height of six feet for ease of movement, and the included water-resistant rainfly drapes down into a zip-up vestibule that’s perfect for storing bags and shoes. Despite its unassuming weight, this lightweight family tent includes durable aluminum poles, stakes, guylines, and storage bags all in an easy-to-maneuver package.

Best for a quick setup: Coleman Cabin Tent

Traveling with family often means juggling a lot of responsibilities, and this easy-to-assemble cabin tent from Coleman can offload some of the efforts. This family tent features pre-assembled poles and an integrated rainfly, so the setup is as simple as unpacking, flexing the poles, and staking the tent into the ground. This family-friendly tent features welded seams and thick 150D polyester fabric to keep out water, and the interior is outfitted with storage pockets and enough space for two queen-size mattresses.

Best all-weather: Teton Sports Mesa Canvas Tent

The Mesa canvas tent from Teton Sports is a thoughtfully designed and flexible family tent that’s built to last. Constructed from treated waterproof canvas for enduring protection in all weather conditions, the tent features high ceilings, mesh ventilation screens, two extension cord ports, and six storage organizers for convenience and comfort. Assembly is relatively quick and easy thanks to a simple top-bar design and the included carbon steel stakes. For both sunny and rainy conditions, a large roll-up awning keeps occupants safe and comfortable, and the tent’s two large doors make loading in and out a snap.

Best splurge: Whiteduck Alpha Canvas Wall Tent

If you’re traveling with family or a large group that wants the absolute most out of a camping experience, this canvas tent from Whiteduck will deliver in spades. It boasts a generous 320 square feet of floor space and features creature comforts like adjustable three-layer windows, mesh ventilation, and a stove jack for keeping warm in the winter. Wind and wet weather don’t stand a chance against it, either, thanks to a buckle fastening system on the doors and its sturdy aluminum frame. While this is certainly not a lightweight or portable tent by any means, its high-quality construction and durability make it a great investment if you plan on family camping for years to come.

What to consider when buying the best family tents

Every family has different needs, and not all camping trips are alike. There are some obvious things to keep in mind—for example, you’ll need a different camping tent for six people than you will for twelve—but there are also more subtle factors, too. Some of the best camping tents are geared toward long-distance hiking, while others are best suited for below-freezing conditions. From materials and size to weight and cost, here are a few things to keep in mind when whittling down your selection.

Do you prefer a quick setup?

Setting up a tent can be one of the most time-consuming and physically demanding parts of settling into a campsite. If you’re running behind schedule, racing against inclement weather, or just want to get set up fast e, having a quick-setup tent makes the process easier. Unlike other family tents, which typically require a decent amount of assembly, quick-setup tents include pre-attached poles for speedy assembly and fold up quickly for easy storage. One important thing to keep in mind is that there’s no separation of tent parts when storing a quick-setup tent, so your family tent’s longevity and durability may take an early hit if you use it often.

Are you traveling with more than 10 people?

It’s easy to underestimate the amount of tent space you’ll need when traveling in a group, and it doesn’t make it any easier that manufacturers tend to label their tents with the absolute maximum possible number of occupants. No matter the size of your party, a crowded tent is never comfortable, and the last thing you want to do is skimp on space with the family. For larger groups, consider upgrading to a family tent that’s rated at an occupancy higher than needed. You’ll enjoy just enough extra space for everyone to stretch out, and may l even have room to set up extra camping furniture like cots, lanterns, and heaters if desired.

Do you want to pack light?

In the event that you’ll be walking or hiking to your campsite, it’s important to minimize the weight of what you’re carrying to avoid overexerting yourself. While higher-capacity family tents aren’t exactly known for their portability, there are still a handful of good options on the market if you’re aiming to travel light and provide shelter to a group. When shopping for a lightweight family tent, a model that uses aluminum and polyester will get the best results, but keep in mind these lightweight materials may not perform well in more demanding conditions like wind or extreme cold. Also, lighter tents tend to be on the smaller side.

Do you need all-weather protection?

If you want a tent that you can use in every season and weather, it’s hard to beat a canvas family tent. Especially when treated with a waterproof coating, canvas is an incredibly breathable and durable material that can last a lifetime if cared for properly. Thanks to its extra thickness, canvas is great for insulation and a good option for keeping out strong wind gusts as well. The only downside to canvas tents is that they’re incredibly heavy when compared to traditional polyester tents, so they’re not the best choice if you intend to hike to your campsite.

Do you prefer lots of amenities?

If you’re interested in giving your group the most comfortable and versatile camping experience possible, choosing a canvas tent with lots of extra features is the way to go. From zip-up windows and storage pouches to heavy-duty metal frames and wood stove compatibility, the best family tents for flexibility and staying power provide a nice home-away-from-home feel. These full-featured tents may not exactly be the cheapest or most portable choices, but they’ll definitely keep everyone happy once they’re set up.

FAQs

Q: Are expensive tents worth it?

Since durability and longevity go hand-in-hand with price in the camping gear category, it’s generally better to spend more on a family tent if you can. Designs made from canvas tend to be suitable for camping in every season and are incredibly durable, which can save you money in the long run.

Q: What is the best tent for a family of 4?

Many of the camping tents on our list come in smaller sizes, so if you’re scaling down, you might try the four-person varieties of the MSR Habitude or the Coleman Cabin Tent. Bear in mind that tents are usually labeled by their absolute maximum occupancy, so unless you’re going for a minimalist camping style, sizing up to a “six-person” tent can provide a much more comfortable experience for everyone.

Q: Which company makes the best tents?

Finding the best family tent depends on your specific needs and situation. For longevity and all-season protection, Teton Sports manufactures a great line of tough and versatile canvas tents. Backpackers and families camping at walk-up sites will probably prefer a lightweight tent-like those from MSR.

Final thoughts on the best family tents

If you’ve got a big family camping trip on the calendar, finding the right tent to accommodate everyone is one of the most important first steps to take. Keep in mind that sizing up can ensure that everyone sleeps comfortably and has room to move around, and quick-setup tents can save lots of time and effort if you have a lot on your plate. Material-wise, canvas is ideal for long-term and year-round use, but its weight and bulk make it prohibitive for walk-up camping. With just a little bit of time and research, it’s easy to pick the best family tent that matches your group’s size, the campsite’s climate, and the nature of your activities.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best family tents in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best beach wagons in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-beach-wagon/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 11:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=380273
Your next trip to the ocean will be a breeze with the best beach wagon.
Joël de Vriend, Unsplash

For a full day of sun, surf, and sand, grab a beach wagon to help you transport all your summer beach essentials.

The post The best beach wagons in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Your next trip to the ocean will be a breeze with the best beach wagon.
Joël de Vriend, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall MacSports Heavy Duty is our pick for best all-terrain beach wagon. MacSports Heavy Duty All-Terrain Beach Wagon
SEE IT

Roll over any type of terrain with this heavy-duty and durable pick—designed with wide wheels and 600D fabric to prevent tears.

Best for kids The Radio Flyer Beach and Boardwalk Wagon is the best kids beach wagon. Radio Flyer Beach and Boardwalk Wagon
SEE IT

Safely tote your little ones to the park or beach with this pick, designed with a UV protective roof, seatbelts, and a linked steering mechanism for easy maneuvering.

Best budget The Seina Folding Wagon is our pick for best budget beach wagon. Seina Folding Wagon
SEE IT

This foldable and steel-framed pick can hold up to 150 pounds, so you can easily tote your goods over any terrain.

A beach wagon helps you schlep all your oceanside essentials. While we would love to say you can enjoy the beach with just a bottle of sunscreen and a pair of shades, sometimes that just doesn’t cut it. A truly luxurious day at the beach involves fluffy towels, cool beverages, your favorite snacks, a good book, a change of clothes, sweet treats, a beach umbrella, and the list goes on. Sure, you may not need all of those things, but it doesn’t hurt to be prepared with the best beach wagon and a few extra beach accessories to make your seaside day more enjoyable. 

Instead of juggling all these things in your hands or weighing your bag down, a great beach wagon can make transporting all your belongings hassle-free. We’ve gathered some reliable sand-traversing options, as well as a compilation of helpful questions, so you can snag the best beach wagon for your next trip. 

How we chose the best beach wagons

Our beach wagon picks are stalwart across the sand, in the parking lot, and while loading into the car. Besides, what’s the point of a beach wagon if it’s going to get stuck in the sand, leading you to say words that rhyme with “beach” and “stuck”? We looked at reviews and recommendations, researched heavily, and scoured reviews to ensure we found the best and prevent a curse-word-related verbal scuffle with beachgoers.

The best beach wagon: Reviews & Recommendations

The best beach wagon offers convenient portability and space for you to transport everything on your list, even your kids. As long as you consider what you’ll be bringing with you and where you want to go, you shouldn’t have any problem finding a great option for your next aquatic adventure. 

Best overall: MacSports Heavy Duty All-Terrain Beach Wagon

MacSports

SEE IT

This bright blue wagon from MacSports will help you make a statement while you claim the best lounge spot on the beach. It’s super easy to set up and even easier to collapse. Folded together, it’s only 9.7 inches thick. It even comes with a carrying case you can slide over the top for simple handling and storage. When fully expanded, the outdoor wagon measures 31.8 by 21.5 inches, which is certainly enough room to hold a few beach chairs, towels, a cooler, and more. Extra-large wheels help tackle many terrain types, while adjustable handles and mesh cup holders keep you comfortable and your beverages secure. 

Runner-up: Rio Deluxe Wonder Wheeler 

Rio Brands

SEE IT

The Wonder Wheeler from Rio is chock full of special features and helpful tools to make your trip to the beach as smooth as possible. This vertical cart can be pushed or pulled through the sand with two 10-inch wheels to help wade through softer sand. It can hold up to 100 pounds, support a 48-quart cooler, and fits four beach chairs. This wagon also features an extra rear storage compartment, dedicated umbrella holder, removable tote bag, and storage compartment for a bodyboard. It’s collapsible, too, with a steel frame and mesh fabric well-suited for wet environments. 

Best double-decker: MacSports Double Decker Utility Cart

MacSports

SEE IT

Another great wagon from MacSports, the double-decker cart does the most when it comes to storage. It’s a little bigger than other models, measuring roughly 40 by 28 inches, though it can still fold for easy, ergonomic storage. The extended bottom shelf forgoes side rails, so you can transport big and small objects, including beach umbrellas, hammocks, tents, and more. This cart can hold 150 pounds and includes the same adjustable handle and mesh cup holders found in the abovementioned all-terrain model. Available in five colors, this wagon will help you set up camp for a full day of fun. However, it should be noted that this utility cart is designed for a multitude of terrains and does not feature the large wheels that are great for deep, soft sand. It is better suited for rockier beaches, wet sand, and natural gravel.

Best for soft sand: Big Kahuna Beach Wagon 

Alumacart, Inc.

SEE IT

The Big Kahuna Beach Wagon only weighs in at 75 pounds, but with its 12-inch-wide wheels specifically designed for use on sand, it’s capable of carrying up to 350 pounds of fishing equipment, beach gear, even a Yeti Tundra. At 33.5 inches wide, this wagon fits easily through standard doors. Plus, its ergonomic design and pull handle allow for easy maneuverability. It’s perfect for families or a day of fishing and can perform double-duty transporting equipment when it’s not a beach day. 

Best for kids: Radio Flyer Beach and Boardwalk Wagon 

Radio Flyer

SEE IT

This beach wagon from Radio Flyer is specifically designed to support your little ones while carrying your beach gear. It features child safety belts, a removable canopy, and two-rider seating that can easily be converted to a bench seat by unzipping one wagon panel. A rear storage bar can hold up to two beach chairs, and built-in cup holders can keep sippy cups out of the sand. Extra-wide beach tires help you navigate with ease, and one-hand folding makes storage a snap. This wagon can hold 150 pounds and is suitable for children 18 months and older. 

Best budget: Seina Folding Wagon

Seina

SEE IT

While this Seina Wagon is listed for garden use, it has many of the same features found in the beach wagons above, with all-terrain rubber wheels to boot. As long as you don’t overload it, you should be able to pull this wagon through the sand without too much trouble. The Seina cart features a foldable steel frame, two cup holders, and durable polyester fabric. It can hold up to 150 pounds and measures 40 by 39 by 27.5 inches. 

If you’re looking for a cheaper beach wagon, we recommend setting your sights on a smaller folding cart, like this one from Gorilla. It may not be able to carry as much, and you might have a little more trouble pulling it through the sand. But as long as you’re not going far, you should still be able to bring all the basic necessities. 

Things to consider when shopping for the best beach wagons

The trick to purchasing the best beach wagon is carefully considering what you intend to bring, where you’re going, and who is coming with you. You don’t want to gather a bunch of beach accessories only to realize they won’t all fit. Nor do you want to make it all the way to the sand before realizing the wheels are going to get stuck. And you certainly don’t want to traverse the shoreline with hot, cranky kids trailing behind you when you could seat them comfortably in the right wagon. So, before buying, go over your beach checklist and consider which cart has the features you need for a successful day of seaside relaxation. 

How much weight do you need to carry? 

While some may be satisfied with a few towels and a small selection of drinks, others need to bring much more to the beach. Do you need to carry enough clean towels for the whole family? Will you be bringing lounge chairs? Aquatic equipment? A cooler that’s full to the brim? It’s important to check out the specs on any wagon you’re considering in order to make sure it can bear the load of your beachy belongings. While most wagons are equipped to handle upwards of 150 pounds, it doesn’t hurt to double-check. You should also keep in mind that the heavier your cargo, the harder it will be to pull your beach wagon through the sand. 

Do you need any special features?

Not all beach wagons come with additional features, like cup holders or compartments, but there are plenty of specialized models suited to your needs if you know what you’re looking for. Do you need a particular container to store fishing poles? Do you want an extra shelf underneath the main cabin for boogie boards? Take the time to think about what your dream beach wagon would include. Once you begin your real-world search, you might be surprised by what you find. 

Would you rather have a push cart? 

Typically, a beach wagon will need to be pulled along by a handle, an action that is comfortable for some but challenging for others, especially if you’re carrying a heavy load. Pulled wagons are often rectangular and low to the ground, which can also present a challenge if you need to move long items like beach umbrellas. If pulling a wagon like this might be difficult for you, consider looking for a vertical beach utility cart. These models are designed to be pushed, which may be a more comfortable way for you to make your way across the sand.

Where will you be pulling your beach wagon? 

Not every beach features the same sandy terrain, and not every beach wagon can smoothly glide over any surface. It’s easier to navigate super-soft sand with a smaller wagon that has large, hollow wheels (and carries a light load). A denser, rocky shore might necessitate more traction carved into the tires. You can even investigate a garden wagon for ultimate versatility on dirt and gravel.

Do you need to pull your little ones along, too? 

If your most crucial beach accessory is your tiny tots, look at a beach wagon that can comfortably accommodate them. Whether you need to transport a sleepy toddler or protect their little feet from super-hot sand, a wagon made for kids with built-in seats or bench support and some extra room for additional belongings can save you a lot of grief during your trip to the beach. You can even find a wagon with a canopy overhead to keep your kids out of the sun while you stake out the perfect spot. 

FAQs

Q: What is the best beach cart wheel size for sand?

Generally speaking, the bigger, the better when it comes to wheel size for sand. If you’re heading for a more gravelly, rocky, or dense area, you should be fine with small tires, as long as they provide some traction. If you can find a wheel that measures close to 10 inches in diameter, you should have much more success traversing sand. 

Q: What are the best beach wagons for soft sand?

The best beach wagons for soft sand will have wide wheels that can gather traction while gliding over the malleable surface. Perhaps the title of “best” belongs to the Big Kahuna Beach Wagon, which features balloon tires almost 12 inches in diameter. However, you may be better off with the less expensive MacSports Heavy Duty All-Terrain Beach Wagon or Rio Deluxe Wonder Wheeler models.

Q: Can I carry my kids in a beach cart?

Yes, you can definitely carry your kids on a beach wagon, so long as it’s specifically designed to support little ones. Make sure you check the specs to ensure the cart is safe before plopping them in. Look for built-in seats, a reinforced bottom, safety belts, and locks on foldable frames. And, of course, pay attention to weight limits and additional restrictions before trying to pile everyone in at once. 

Q: How much does the best beach tent cost?

Many of the best beach wagons retail between $80 and $100, which can initially seem a bit pricey. But once you consider the detail and design that goes into navigating various types of terrain, the cost starts to make a little more sense. Luckily, there are a few budget-friendly options out there that will get you where you need to go without emptying your wallet. While you may sacrifice some special features like kids’ seats or a canopy, you’ll still be getting the best bang for your buck. 

Final thoughts on finding the best beach wagons

Whether you’re fixing to throw a beach party, ready for a day of tanning, or looking to ride the waves, the best beach wagon will keep you supplied with all your seaside needs. Simply gather a list of everything you want to have by your side and look for a wagon that can accommodate your belongings. From kids to surfboards, coolers to umbrellas, beach chairs to towels, there is a beach wagon out there, ready and waiting to carry all your beach essentials through the sand. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best beach wagons in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best beach tents of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-beach-tent/ Mon, 22 Nov 2021 20:58:24 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=361647
best beach tent
Vidar Nordli-Mathisen, Unsplash

When it comes to investing in a happy, healthy good time, beach tents are a shore bet.

The post The best beach tents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best beach tent
Vidar Nordli-Mathisen, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best cabana Sailor stripes Cabana beach tent Qipi Beach Cabana
SEE IT

A cabana-style beach tent with clever extra features.

Best for babies Grey, blue, yellow, and white baby beach tent Fisher-Price On-the-Go Baby Dome
SEE IT

This stylish napping spot is a great choice for the beach.

Best budget Green and beige beach tent Coleman Beach Shade
SEE IT

An affordable tent with little assembly required.

They say life’s a beach, and it can be … until you get a sunburn. Then life can be pure misery and the beach the most painful, last place you want to be. Sure, beach towels and beach chairs are great for a while but if you truly want to maximize your day, you’ll need to have a little more shelter from the sun’s draining, potentially harmful rays (maybe even a place to safely catch a few Z’s). A tent can provide shelter from the sun and a comfy place to lounge—you just need to take into consideration the size of your beach crew, how much set-up time you need, and your favorite beach activities when deciding what type of sun shelter or shade canopy you’ll need. With that firmly in mind, here are our suggestions for the best beach tent.

How we chose the best beach tents

The best beach tents are more easily transportable than umbrellas, with many types able to fold up into a small backpack or carrying bag. For people with young children, beach tents provide consistent and reliable beach shade—you won’t have to keep moving your umbrella like a sundial throughout the day to keep everyone covered. They can be anchored securely into the sand to withstand windy days. And, finally, they provide quick and easy privacy should someone need to address a bathing suit issue or perhaps change a swimming diaper. They’re practical and can extend your beach comfort by hours—and who doesn’t want that?

The best beach tents: Reviews & Recommendations

You don’t want a beautiful day cut short by sun fatigue or sunburn, and that’s where a great beach tent comes in. Here are the beach tents that provide you with some additional protection from UVA/UVB rays. Of course, make sure always to apply sunscreen—bonus points for using reef-safe sunscreen.

Best canopy: Neso Tents Gigante Beach Tent

Neso

SEE IT

This large beach canopy (8-feet tall, with 11 feet by 11 feet coverage) can shelter a big family (beach chairs included), and has a casual open-air look. Fully collapsible and transportable, this UPF 50+ tent weighs 9.5 pounds and folds down to 19.5 inches. It holds up well to the wind, though it doesn’t provide any privacy.

Best beach cabana tent: Qipi Beach Cabana

Qipi

SEE IT

This on-the-go shelter (measuring 6 feet by 6 feet) comes with a carrying bag, as well as sandbags and stakes for protection from wind. Fun prints and shapes bring a luxurious beach club vibe to your day on the beach. There’s an attachable sidewall, plus pockets at all four corners, perfect for water bottles, sunscreen, or books. Most importantly, this beach cabana tent is waterproof, and UPF 50+. 

Best baby beach tent: Fisher-Price On-the-Go Baby Dome

Fisher-Price

SEE IT

Fear not a long day at the beach with your baby with this futuristic-sounding baby dome. This canopy playspace (with removable toys) offers UPF 20 protection from the sun, and mesh panels ensure ventilation and protection from bugs. It also folds flat and has handles to make it easy to tote around.

Best easy set-up beach tent: Pacific Breeze Beach Tent

Pacific Breeze Products

SEE IT

This tent offers a hub system, which allows for fast set-up without confusing directions and parts, as well as five sand pockets and four stakes for security in windy conditions. The XL deluxe version is UPF 50+ and can fit three to four people, even larger adults, making it perfect for a small family. Internal pockets and hooks for hanging can handle all your beach accessories. When it comes time to transport it, it quickly folds to a manageable size and fits in an included carrying case.

Best budget beach tent: Coleman Beach Shade

Coleman

SEE IT

Coleman, a trusted name in camping gear, offers this durable UV 50+ Protection pop-up that doesn’t require much setup (think five minutes). The easy tent uses four ground stakes to keep the tent in place. It features extended front floor zips for privacy and the back window unzips for ventilation. Integrated storage pockets and a dry line to hang wet clothing add to the convenience. The size is perfect for a family of three (two adults and a child). And it’s not restricted to the sand; this is a perfect shelter to keep in the car for impromptu picnics or long days at the soccer field, etc.

What to consider when buying the best beach tents

Investing in beach shade is all about making days at the beach more enjoyable and safer. Sunblock alone isn’t enough to guard you against harmful UV rays if you’re exposed to the sun for hours and hours at a time. Harvard Medical School Assistant Professor of Dermatology Dr. Jennifer Lin suggests that the false sense of total protection provided by sunscreen can lead to more problems. “Many studies have demonstrated that individuals who use sunscreen tend to stay out in the sun for a longer period of time, and thus may actually increase their risk of skin cancer,” says Dr. Lin

Beach umbrellas are an option to provide sunshade, but wrangling them can prove frustrating. They’re often difficult to mount to the sand, and don’t provide consistent and reliable shade. Plus, heavy winds can send umbrellas flying. Beach tents are sort of like an upgraded version of beach umbrellas and could be your new beach essentials. 

Want a beach tent that can hold up well to the wind?

Windy days are tricky, even dangerous for beachgoers if their beach umbrellas or beach tents should lose their anchoring and hurtle across the sand. You don’t want your tent to soar while you snore. That’s one of the reasons the best sun shelters for windy conditions are canopy-style tents. These more open-style tents have the ability to flex with the wind, which allows them to stay put; think about how a palm tree sways but never snaps. Be sure to look for beach canopy tents that offer multiple levels of securing—like stakes, anchors, and sandbags. Also, note that we’re talking breezy, maybe blustery days; extreme wind is not suggested with any type of tent. 

Beach canopy-style tents offer a larger roof of sunshade and open walls. While this might be an issue for privacy, the style can be a good choice for larger groups. Look for stylish designs and bright fun colors or prints that use UV protection. For easy transportation, make sure the beach shade comes with a travel bag with a comfortable strap for carrying on your back or shoulders.

Want a little beach club vibe to go?

Cabana-style tents are stylish and chic, which is partly why you’ll find them lined up around the pool or on the beach at upscale resorts. Also, they’re super practical. The traditional rectangular shape offers a structured sun shelter that you can pull your favorite beach chair or beach recliner underneath. And it provides you with a little more of a sense of security (and privacy) when you don’t have your back constantly exposed to passersby. While you might not think this style would make sense for bringing out for a day at the beach, the best beach cabana tents can be set up quickly, collapsed, and easily transported.  

Beach cabana tents often have an umbrella-style roof, with four added poles (often fabric covered) which provide the room-like structure. Some will allow you to zip on one or more fabric panels for additional sun or wind protection. As with all beach tents, you want to look for multiple levels of grounding to protect from winds—some offer screw-in poles or stakes, as well as sandbags that can be filled on the spot. 

Want to take your baby for safe a day at the beach?

The beach can be a perfect family trip, even for those with very young children. But there are lots of elements that a baby can’t cope with, from the sun to sand to wind—aka, anywhere near the shore. Luckily, you can find tents specifically made to solve this problem. The best baby beach tents will provide a safe and comfortable place to rest or nap. Look for lightweight, collapsible playpens with attached, fully zipped sun shades that sport adequate ventilation. You want a place where the baby can beat the heat, not feel trapped in it!

For slightly older kids, you can find beach tents with bonuses to keep them occupied yet safe. Look around, and you’ll find beach tents that include a shallow baby pool that can be filled in with seawater, or mesh zip pouches to easily carry your child’s favorite sand toys.

Looking for a beach tent that’s easy to set up?

Some outdoor canopies and beach tents are very complicated and have to be built with more than one person. The reward for all this work is an extra-sturdy bit of shade, but that kind of involved construction isn’t ideal for every situation. Luckily, there are plenty of sun shelters that are easy to set up. After all, you don’t want to feel like you’re sweltering trying not to sweat, or that you might pass out before you set up some relief.

Another consideration: how to carry your shelter. You’ll want to look for tents that either come with their own carrying case or can fold down small enough to be easily stored and carried. Juggling chairs, snacks, and kids are enough without having to add more to your beach accessories load.

Looking for a beach tent that won’t cost you a lot of money?

With most products made for outdoor use, you have to expect a certain amount of wear and tear. While that’s a reason, perhaps, to invest in a more expensive option made of stronger, more durable material, it’s also an argument for buying something less expensive with the understanding that it’s going to get trashed regardless. 

Fortunately, there are lower-priced options that don’t skimp on protection or convenience and will provide many beach fun-filled beach days that you’ll likely enjoy even more knowing you saved a little money. It’s just important to check for ease of set-up, materials, and safety functions when deciding which one is right for you. 

FAQs

Q: Do tents protect from sun?

Yes, tents protect from sun—if you mean beach tents. Most beach tents do provide UV protection, but most camping tents do not. So if you are looking for something to use on the beach specifically, invest in a specialized beach tent. 

Q: Are beach tents waterproof?

Most beach tents do have a water-resistant coating that’s good for occasional splashes or light showers, but they won’t hold up under torrential rain or massive waves. Hopefully, your beach day isn’t ruined by a thunderstorm!

Q: How do I keep sand out of a beach tent?

To keep sand out of a beach tent, you can place an oversized towel or sheet under your tent so that people have a space to kick off flip-flops or shake off excess sand. One common option is to use a bucket of water for a quick wash, but here’s a secret: sand is actually easier to shake off when your skin is completely dry. If you take a minute to dry off, you can simply rub sand off your body with a dry towel.

Final thoughts on the best beach tents

Sunscreen is definitely one of those beach essentials, but especially for those of us with more delicate skin, it may not be enough on its own. Investing in the best beach tent ensures longer days at the beach, additional UV protection, privacy, and the ability to create a portable “home base” that can make the entire beach experience more enjoyable for everyone involved. Just consider the size of your family or beach crew, how much portability you’ll need, and how often you’ll think you’ll need it before honing in on the right beach accessories. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best beach tents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best kids’ bikes of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-kids-bikes/ Sun, 25 Jul 2021 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=380776
The best kids bikes composited
Stan Horaczek

Help your budding cyclist tackle any terrain and every adventure with the best kids’ bike for their size and skill level.

The post The best kids’ bikes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best kids bikes composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best with training wheels The RoyalBaby Freestyle is the best kids' bike with training wheels. RoyalBaby Kids' Bike
SEE IT

This tricycle has removable training wheels perfect for giving your little one plenty of stability before they test out their balance.

Best overall Woom kids bike Woom Original
SEE IT

It’s easy to assemble, built tough, and full of unique touches that make it stand out.

Best mountain bike Co-op Cycles REV DRT Bike is the best kids bikes for the trails Co-op Cycles’ REV DRT Bike
SEE IT

This lightweight eight-speed with hydraulic disc brakes allows your kid to tag along on any outdoor adventure with the tool they need to keep in stride.

When you’re a kid, getting a brand-new bike is the epitome of excitement and the ultimate sign of freedom. From riding around the block with friends to going for a quick family pedal on the weekends, a bike is a great marker for growing up and getting more independent. Whether your kids are starting on their first balance bike or getting ready to tackle tough terrain on a mountain bike, you’ll need to purchase a model that suits their size and experience. With so many options, it can be difficult to discern where to start. To help get you started, we’ve compiled a list of questions to consider, as well as some of our favorite picks, so that you can find the best kids’ bikes for your youngster. 

How we chose the best kids’ bikes

While this might come as a surprise, we were all once kids … and we’re still a kid at heart when we get back on a bicycle. Using our lifetimes of insight, as well as more recent experience with our own children, we looked for good bikes for all ages of kids, from 18 months through the teenage years. We considered bikes from the best bicycle brands. And we looked for youth bikes that could grow with kids for a few years and serve a variety of needs and budgets.

The best kids’ bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

Learning to ride a bike is a rite of passage for kids. From their first wobbly rides on training wheels to shredding trails in the mountains, the right bike can provide adventure, exercise, and independence for your kids as they grow older.

Best overall: Woom Original

Mahesh Nair

SEE IT

Specs

  • Ages: 3.5 up to 14 (depending on the size)
  • Height: 31″ to 66″
  • Wheel size: 12″, 14″, 16″, 20″, 24″, and 26″
  • Gears: Single-speed or multi-gear, depending on size

Pros

  • Ergonomically designed for kids’ frames
  • Lightweight at 13 pounds
  • Steering limiter makes riding safer
  • Enclosed drivetrain keeps chain from dropping on smaller sizes
  • Designed specifically for kids, not just retrofitted from bigger parts

Cons

  • Pricy

Woom builds its bikes for kids from the ground up. These aren’t just shrunken-down versions of larger rides. We tested size 2, which is designed for kids between three and 4.5 years old. It can accommodate riders between 37″ and 43″ tall. The bike ships in a typical box and comes mostly assembled. Attaching the handlebars to the stem requires a simple hex wrench. Once that’s done, you simply attach the pedals, check all the bolts, and you’re basically ready to ride.

Everything on the bike is designed specifically to fit smaller riders. The anti-slip pedals are grippy but small, so they don’t stick out too far and gouge little legs. The grips employ an ergonomic shape that’s both comfortable and easier to hold onto when things get zesty. Even the brake levers are scaled down and shaped so they’re easy to reach and pull for little hands.

The Woom bike brake lever and grip close-up
Here’s a closer look at the ergonomic grip and the compact brake lever. Mahesh Nair

The single-speed drivetrain (bigger models for older kids employ a multi-gear system with a derailleur) is fully enclosed by a guard. This setup helps keep little fingers and lets away from the chain and sprockets. At the same time, it also drastically reduces the chances the bike will drop the chain while riding. That’s annoying and can be dangerous if the little rider doesn’t know how to handle it.

In terms of safety, the Woom 3 comes equipped with a steering delimiter that helps protect against oversteering. Lots of kid accidents come from overcorrecting and that’s not an issue here. The bikes are also very light, thanks in part to their aluminum frames. Many kids’ bikes rely on steel because it’s cheaper, but it’s heavy and prone to rusting.

Woom bike drivetrain close-up
The enclosed drivetrain prevents pinching and also keeps the chain from dropping off during a ride. Mahesh Nair

These bikes are slightly pricy considering each size is only recommended for roughly two-year span. But they’re light, durable, and very well-made, so they should retain resale value or make great hand-me-downs if you have more kids to learn down the line.

Best with training wheels: RoyalBaby Kids’ Bike

Specs

  • Ages: 4 to 7 years old
  • Height: 33 to 37 inches
  • Wheel size: 12, 14, and 16 inches 
  • Gears: Single speed

Pros

  • Coaster brakes are easy to operate
  • Training wheels are removable
  • Adjustable seat

Cons

  • Heavy

If you’re looking for a bike with training wheels, the RoyalBaby Kids’ Bike is an excellent option for kids learning how to ride a bike. The bike has a steel frame and weighs roughly 25 pounds. It comes with removable training wheels as kids learn how to ride, a hand brake, and back-pedal coaster brakes that make it easy for them to stop. The seat is adjustable and the 12-inch wheels are just right for beginning riders. Plus, it comes with a water bottle, a holder, a kickstand, and a bell. This bike also comes in seven colors and arrives mostly assembled.

Best hybrid bike: Guardian Bikes Ethos

Guardian Bikes

SEE IT

Specs

  • Ages: 6 to 9
  • Height: 43 to 53 inches
  • Wheel size: 20 inches
  • Gears: Six

Pros

  • Designed to be ridden on range of terrains
  • Six gears allow for more speed control
  • Brakes designed with safety technology

Cons

  • Some Amazon reviewers had issues with build quality

The Guardian Bikes Ethos is a bike that will do well for kids ready to ride on their own over various terrain types. Certainly a departure from the training wheel days of yore, the Guardian Ethos has six gears and a lightweight steel frame that provides extra stability. Designed for boys and girls from 45 to 53 inches tall, from ages 6 to 9, this bike has a sizing chart and video to make sure you get the perfect fit. It comes with a Surestop braking technology that controls both wheels with one brake lever for additional safety. 

Best balance bike: Strider 12 Sport Balance Bike

Strider

SEE IT

Specs

  • Ages: 18 months to 5 years
  • Height: 12 to 20 inches
  • Wheel size: 11 inches
  • Gears: Single speed

Pros

  • Seat and handlebar adjust easily
  • Lightweight
  • Tires are puncture-proof

Cons

  • No written instructions for assembly included

The Strider 12 Sport is a great way to introduce biking fundamentals to your little one. Suitable for kids as young as 18 months, this is one bike that will safely grow with your child. The seat and handlebars are adjustable to accommodate an inseam that measures anywhere between 12 and 20 inches. The bike itself weighs under seven pounds which is manageable for small children, and mini-grips will help them keep control. The steel frame is durable, and the tires are puncture-proof; all you need is a helmet, and your child will be ready for a super-safe spin. Available in 10 fun colors, the 12 Sport will introduce your child to the freedom, power, and responsibility that comes with riding their first bike. 

Best mountain bike: Co-op Cycles’ REV DRT Bike 

Co-op Cycles

SEE IT

Specs

  • Ages: Tweens and teens
  • Height: N/A
  • Wheel size: 24 inches
  • Gears: 8

Pros

  • Suspension fork minimizes jolting on rough terrain
  • Comes with hydraulic disc brakes
  • Extra-wide tires

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

If you’re looking for a specialized kids’ bike, the REV DRT Bike tops the chart when it comes to kids’ mountain bikes. The lightweight aluminum frame, extra-wide tires, hydraulic disc brakes, and suspension fork with 80 millimeters of travel will ensure your child can navigate rocky trails with ease. This bike is equipped with eight gears to give your kid plenty of options for climbing steep passages or coasting downhill. Weighing in at 31 pounds with 24-inch wheels, this bike is undoubtedly meant for older, more experienced riders. If the 24-inch wheels are a bit too big for your kids, you can check these bikes from Prevolo, which are designed to help kids of any size on any terrain. For more fun, check out the best dirt bikes for kids.

Best electric: Woom Up 5

Woom

SEE IT

Specs

  • Ages: 7 to 11
  • Height: 50 to 57 inches
  • Wheel size: 24 inches
  • Gears: 11

Pros

  • Pedal assist up to 12 miles per hour
  • Allows for 11 speeds
  • Rugged tires
  • Electric blue color

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Potential danger of battery

Got a kid who’s already tearing up the gravel? An electric bike would be a significant upgrade. The Woom Up 5 is designed for both mountain trails and commuting to school and can kick in just when your child is getting tired. With its lightweight aluminum frame, this bike has a range of 11 speeds. The 250-watt Fazua motor allows for three levels of pedal assist up to 12 miles per hour, but you can also remove the motor and battery when kids want to ride solely on their own steam. The associated app allows your child to track mileage, speed, and battery charge. And the removable lithium ion battery has a capacity of 250 watt-hours, the allowable limit.

The frame and saddle are ergonomically designed to fit kids’ frames and the hydraulic air suspension fork provides cushion against bumps in the road. The durable tires are designed for mountain biking, with strong grip and shock absorption. The Woom Up 5 also comes with Promax hydraulic disc brakes and handlebar grips designed for kids’ hands. Along with the bike, you’ll also receive tools to assemble it and a battery charger. For more motorized fun, check out the best kids’ ATVs.

Best budget: Schwinn Elm

Schwinn

SEE IT

Specs

  • Ages: 7 to 13
  • Height: 48 to 62 inches
  • Wheel size: 20 inches
  • Gears: Single speed

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Comes with a basket
  • Available in wheel sizes from 12 to 20 inches

Cons

  • Only one speed
  • May be too basic for older kids

Finding a safe, sturdy, budget-friendly kid’s bike can be a bit of a challenge, and of course, the bigger the bike, the bigger the price tag. The Schwinn Elm is available in multiple wheel sizes, including 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 inches. Though not every size is available for under $150, each model is certainly on the inexpensive side of the kids’ bike spectrum. Each Schwinn Elm is designed with a light frame, coaster brakes, and one front-hand (or caliper brake) to help ease the transition to a full-size model. The seats are adjustable, with a forward, narrow pedal position to fit their bodies. The Elm comes in three different colors, featuring pink, purple, and light blue floral patterns and a basket on the front. For a more rugged aesthetic but almost identical specs, check out the Schwinn Koen

Things to consider before buying the best kids’ bike

The best kids’ bikes will vary depending on your child’s height, weight, and skill level. Generally speaking, you’ll be looking for bikes by seat height or wheel size between 12 and 24 inches, which will correlate to your kid’s age, height, and inseam. Beyond size, the next thing to consider is your kid’s skill level: Do they need training wheels, fixed gear, or a mountain bike? While all these components are simple enough, take the time to make sure your measurements are correct, and whether a classic pick of one of the specialized children bikes is appropriate. 

Size

The easiest way to determine what size bike your kid needs is to measure their inseam (from where their feet touch the ground to the top of their crotch). Once you determine this number, you want to look for a bike with a seat height that is, at minimum, this number. For example, if your little one’s inseam measurement is 19 inches, then 19 inches should be the minimum seat height on their bike. As a child is learning to ride, they should be able to place their feet on the floor securely, so the correct seat height will keep them in control as they learn to manipulate hand breaks, etc. From there, you can consider wheel size and frame weight. 

Wheel size

Aside from seat height, there are a few other measurements you can take into account to determine the proper wheel size for your kid’s new bike. Here is a rough guide you can use to narrow your search: 

A child ages 2-4 between 30-39 inches tall with a 12-17-inch inseam will need a bike with 12-inch wheels. Children ages 3-5 between 37-44 inches tall with a 16-20-inch inseam will need a bike with 14-inch wheels. Next, a little one aged 5-8 between 42-52 inches tall with an 18-22-inch inseam will need a bike with 20-inch wheels. Finally, a kid who is 8-12 years old, 50-58 inches tall with a 24-28-inch inseam will probably do best on a 24-inch wheeled bike. 

Before purchasing, make sure you double-check the seat height, and before you know it, your little cyclist will be ready to roll on one of the best bikes for kids. 

Child’s weight 

It’s important to consider your child’s weight in relation to the weight of the bike. Kids’ bikes typically weigh between 25 and 45 percent of their body weight, which is a lot when you consider that most adult bikes weigh around 20 percent or less of their rider’s total body weight. If the frame is too heavy, your child will have trouble controlling their bike; they won’t be able to pedal properly, and steering may become a challenge. If possible, try to select a bike that weighs at or below 30 percent of their body weight, so they can get stronger while riding without struggling through the process. 

Experience  

If you have a young child under four, consider trying out a balance bike before going straight for the pedals. As your child learns more about their center of gravity, a balance bike can help familiarize them with the concept of coordination, steering, and stopping. Instead of a traditional break and chain, they’ll use their feet to break as well as to propel themselves forward. A balance bike will help prepare them to pedal, and as soon as they are old enough, you can transition them to training wheels or skip them altogether. Many kids who start on a balance bike can transition straight to a two-wheel model. 

Durability

Supplying your child with everything they need can be expensive, especially when they’re constantly outgrowing clothes, toys, car seats, and more. Depending on size, kids’ bikes can run you between $175 and $400, a pretty penny when it comes to something they will eventually be too big to use. While it can certainly be tempting to buy a bike that your kid will be able to grow into, a bike that’s too big can be dangerous, not to mention hard to use. It will be hard for them to reach the handlebars or touch the ground with their feet during a stop. What’s more, the extra weight will make it hard to pedal and they may get into more accidents. Instead, consider looking for a budget-friendly kids’ bike, or go to a reliable reseller. Well-maintained, used bikes work well, and your child will have an easier time riding, gaining confidence and strength on a bike that suits their proportions. 

Single speed v. multiple gears 

Single-speed bikes are less complicated than a bike with multiple gears. They’re great for those who have just taken off the training wheels and are focused on flat ground. A single-speed bike will let your kid get used to hand brakes, which are typically introduced with 20-inch models. Of course, single-speed models can definitely present a challenge for navigating tricky terrain or getting up hills. If your child has had the training wheels off for a while, they may be ready to try a bike with multiple gears.

If you’re training a little mountain biker, learning how to use gears properly will be especially important. Mountain bikes are generally wider, with larger, deeply treaded tires and front shocks to absorb the impact of rough terrain. They have more low gears to help your off-road adventurer climb steep hills. 

If you want a multi-gear bike, but you aren’t necessarily heading into the mountains, you can go for a hybrid bike, which features an array of gears suitable for roads, hilly bike paths, low-impact groomed trails, and more. 

FAQs

Q: How tall should a child be to ride a 20-inch bike?

Generally, a child should be between 42 and 52 inches tall to ride a 20-inch bike. However, you need to calculate their inseam and compare that to the bike’s seat height before settling on a 20-inch model. You also want to make sure they can easily reach the handlebars; at 20 inches, hand brakes are introduced to the bike design. 

Q: What age can a child ride a bike without stabilizers? 

Stabilizers, or training wheels, help children get comfortable on a bike, preventing them from falling over and letting them focus on braking, steering, and speed. Statistically, kids will learn to ride a bike without any extra stabilization anywhere between 4 and 9 years old. There’s no set age at which training wheels should be removed, so you’ll want to monitor your child’s confidence on their stabilized bike and look for signs they may be ready to remove the supports.  

Q: What age is an 18-inch bike for? 

An 18-inch bike can be suitable for many ages depending on height and leg size. An inseam between 20-24 inches and a height slightly under four feet is usually suitable for an 18-inch bike. These measurements are traditionally attributed to kids ages 5 or 6, though any child this size can be comfortable riding an 18-inch bike. 

Final thoughts on buying the best kids’ bike 

Giving a kid their first bike is a fantastic rite of passage for all parties involved, a gift that represents fun, freedom, and future adventures. So whether they’re starting to toddle around on balance bikes or racing you down the trail on a mountain bike, pay particular attention to their height and inseam measurements before purchasing. As long as the bike fits their body and skill level, you can have as much fun as you want choosing the color, bike bell, and any other gear they may need—just make sure you include a helmet. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best kids’ bikes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor projectors in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-projectors/ Thu, 28 Apr 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=439531
The best outdoor projectors composited
Stan Horaczek

Screen blockbusters at your neighborhood block party with these great projectors.

The post The best outdoor projectors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor projectors composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall BenQ TK850 is the best outdoor projector overall. BenQ TK850
SEE IT

A top-tier true UHD DLP 4K cinema experience.

Best HD Epson Home Cinema 3800 is the best HD outdoor projector. Epson Home Cinema 3800
SEE IT

A 3LCD HD projector that competes with 4K.

Best portable Anker Nebula Solar is the best outdoor portable projector. Anker Nebula Solar
SEE IT

Ultra-portable and battery-powered for taking the show(s) on the road.

As the weather warms up, outside activities heat up, and outdoor projectors transform the natural world into open-air movie theaters. They feature powerful lamps for use even when the sun hasn’t fully set or the streetlights are on, and they’re light enough to make moving them from your media room to your deck easy on your back. Many projectors suited for outdoor use include features like rechargeable batteries, smart TV operating systems, and robust speakers to help streamline set-up. Most importantly, just like any projector you’d buy for indoor use, they don’t skimp on important image specs, such as color, contrast, and resolution. When you don’t want your cul-de-sac drive-in to become a giant car wreck of a viewing experience, turn to the best outdoor projectors. 

How we chose the best outdoor projector

When considering the best outdoor projectors for our recommendations, we relied on our experience with home-theater projectors. Also, we reached out to professionals in the TV and AV worlds to discuss their favorite projector brands and the types of specs they care about when shopping. We read trade journals and websites, sifting through reviews to get the impressions of typical users. We narrowed our selection of projectors down to 10, focusing on image quality. Color, contrast, and resolution were all taken into account. Balanced against these specs were features making the projector most suited to outdoor use, including brightness, portability, and versatility. Price was an important factor, especially regarding “bang for your buck,” though it wasn’t of primary concern when judging the higher-end categories of projectors. 

The best outdoor projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

Shopping for outdoor projectors can be tricky, filled with jargon, numbers, and an endless parade of acronyms. If you want the most out of your home-theater experience, there’s much to learn, especially when hosting backyard movie night. So read on for guidance in choosing the best outdoor projectors to watch the stars under the stars.

Best overall: BenQ TK850

BenQ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: True 4K resolution, excellent picture quality, and a relatively lightweight build make this projector our top choice despite a higher price tag.  

Specs

  • Brightness: 3,000 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 30,000:1
  • Weight: 9.8 pounds

Pros

  • Native 4K resolution
  • Lightweight design that’s easy to carry outdoors
  • 10-bit HDR processing

Cons

  • Expensive

The TK850 continues BenQ’s reputation for making excellent home theater projectors with a true UHD DLP unit that’s bright enough for outdoor use even under higher ambient light levels. The 30,000:1 contrast ratio isn’t the highest we’ve seen. However, it still delivers detailed blacks and lush colors (covering the DCI-P3 color space), thanks in no small part to the high-end 10-bit HDR (High Dynamic Range) processor and 12-bit imaging processor, plus a dynamic iris. The high-lumen projector’s lens array features 10 individual elements—the glass inside the lens—that work to increase color, brightness, and sharpness. The image size can be a nice, theatrical-feeling 300 inches. 

Lots of projectors in the TK850’s price range have great specs, but BenQ’s 4K projector hits above its weight class—literally. At only 9.8 pounds, it’s a cinch to move movie night from the living room out to the deck. Vertical lens shift and keystone correction work alongside the 1.3x zoom lens to make positioning the projector easier. The built-in 10-watt CinemaMaster Audio+2 speakers are good enough that, at least with smaller events, you won’t need to run external speakers. Connect your media—whether a Blu-ray player, computer, Fire or Roku TV stick, or set-top streaming box—via two HDMI ports or a USB 3.0 data input (so don’t forget those HDMI cables). Or pay an extra $100 for a model with built-in Android TV. If you’re looking for the best outdoor projector for gaming, consider the BenQ X1300i.

Best HD: Epson Home Cinema 3800

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This ultra-bright HD projector delivers a cinema-like picture with brilliant colors and deep blacks even when it’s not completely dark. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 3,000 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 100,000:1
  • Weight: 15.2 pounds

Pros

  • Accurate color
  • Can display 4K content using pixel shifting
  • Easy-to-adjust settings
  • Wide variety of inputs

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Somewhat heavy

The Epson 3800 projector is an excellent outdoor choice for anyone who doesn’t need native 4K resolution but still wants a large, movie-theater-quality picture. And with a contrast ratio of 100,000:1 and 10-bit HDR color processing, this 3LCD projector will give you deep blacks and bold colors (100% of the RGB color signal) on a screen up to 300 inches from corner to corner. 

What’s more, the 3800 can still deliver a 4K image—sort of. While its native resolution is 1920 x 1080, it uses a technology called pixel shifting to interpolate the missing pixels and fill out a full UHD frame. Is it perfect? No, and at the maximum screen size some loss of sharpness has been reported. But at, say, 150-200 inches, issues become much less noticeable. 

At 14.1 pounds, the projector isn’t as heavy as units meant to live permanently in a media room, but it’s also not a complete lightweight. The same could be said for this smart projector’s $1,700 price tag, which is a bit high for an HD unit. On the other hand, the superb picture quality and ability to play 4K movies without having to down-res them to HD are worth the extra bucks for this high-quality projector. The Epson also features dual HDMI 2.0 ports, dual USB ports, dual 10-watt speakers, and Bluetooth connectivity for easy integration into any media environment.

Best portable: Anker Nebula Solar

NEBULA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Lightweight, battery-powered, and featuring built-in Android TV, this projector travels easily and delivers a strong picture despite a relatively low brightness rating. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 400 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 1,000:1
  • Weight: 3.1 pounds

Pros

  • Very lightweight
  • Up to three hours of battery life
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Native HD resolution but can accept 4K inputs

Cons

  • Picture suffers in ambient light
  • Color accuracy could be better

This 3.1-pound, battery-powered projector is built for on-the-go use. Fully charged, it runs for 1 1/2 hours in Standard mode and 3 hours in Battery mode—albeit with a dip in brightness. That’s usually enough for a couple of episodes of your favorite series or one movie. And don’t worry about carrying media around with you because the built-in Android TV includes apps to connect to all the major streaming services (though you’ll need access to a WiFi network and a Google account). Built-in dual 3-watt speakers can handle Dolby Digital Plus encoded audio and are loud enough for a decent-sized screening out on the lawn, though the sound quality could be better. 

The Solar Portable accepts 4K signals and down-converts them to its native 1080p resolution. In HD mode, colors were nuanced (if just a bit off), and shadows maintained a lot of detail, even in dark scenes. However, 4K content requires some contrast adjustment and never improves on the 1080p image. Also, while the projector is bright enough to deliver a nice 180-inch image, don’t expect to go much larger without the picture starting to go soft. 

When considering a projector like the Solar Portable, it’s all about weighing priorities. You might be giving up a larger image and a bit of color accuracy, but you’ll gain the portability that could have you watching movies in unique places like a treehouse, the middle of a field, or on a hill where you first proposed to your spouse. A combination of factors makes this outdoor movie projector one of our favorite portable projectors.

Best for daylight: Anker Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector

Anker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This 4K UHD laser projector provides images you can watch in daylight with built-in Android TV, two 10-watt speakers, and a handle that lets you easily transport it.

Specs

  • Brightness: 1,840 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 1,500,000:1 dynamic 
  • Weight: 10.7 pounds

Pros

  • Impressive brightness
  • 3840 x 2160 display resolution 
  • 4K laser system
  • Built-in Android TV

Cons

  • Expensive

For those looking to create a cinematic experience in all kinds of light, the Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector can help you do it. The 4K UHD laser projector comes equipped with 1,840 ANSI Lumens and 3840 x 2160 display resolution for a bright and vivid picture even on a sunny day. Outdoor projector setup is easy for this model, which is available in 1080p and 4K versions. The Nebula Cosmos is also designed with intelligent technology that allows it to adapt to the environment for a display of up to 150 inches. This daylight projector also has two 10-watt speakers and two 5-watt tweeters, creating an immersive sound experience. 

The built-in Android 10 TV provides access to more than 400,000 movies and 7,000 apps and streaming services. And it’s designed with an ergonomic handle that lets you easily move it from the living room to the backyard. That said, the lack of battery and corded electric power will be a factor in the settings in which you can use this projector.

Best for rooftops: Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small and light projector is easy to lug up a few flights of stairs but comes in heavy with its picture quality and built-in Android TV. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 1,000 ANSI Lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 200,000:1
  • Weight: 4.7 pounds

Pros

  • Native 1080p resolution
  • Supports 4K media (down-converted to HD)
  • 3-chip LCD avoids rainbow artifacts
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Excellent speakers

Cons

  • No 3D support
  • Could be brighter

Movies on the rooftop in the summer—what could be more fun? The EpiqVision Mini EF12 is small and light enough to perch on even the highest roof and delivers a gorgeous 1080p picture once you’re there. The integrated Android TV means you don’t have to go back downstairs to grab a Blu-ray player, and the built-in 5-watt Yamaha stereo speakers save you a trip for extra audio. The 1,000-lumen MicroLaser light source is bright enough for a 140-inch outdoor projector screen if it’s really dark out. Still, it’s more reasonable to expect 80 inches on most neighborhood rooftops awash in light pollution. Thanks to the projector’s 200,000:1 contrast ratio, colors are nicely saturated, and shadow details pop. Three-chip LCD technology displays 100 percent of the RGB color range. Besides the built-in streaming functions, the EpiqVision Mini also has two HDMI inputs for external players. 

Best for streaming: XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro Mini Projector

XGIMI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight mini projector is Full HD (1080p), has Android TV 11 built-in, and can work with Netflix.

Specs

  • Brightness: 400 ISO lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: Not available
  • Weight: 4.6 pounds

Pros

  • Full HD (1080p)
  • Android TV 11 built-in
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide as much brightness as other models

The XGIMI MoGo 2 Pro Mini Projector makes it easy to stream your favorites. This mini projector comes internet-ready with Android TV 11 built-in, providing quick access to over 5,000 apps, including Paramount+ and HBO Max (and you can use a streaming device or contact customer service to watch Netflix.) At 4.6 pounds, this wireless projector is designed for portability and just requires two AAA batteries to operate. 

The MoGo Pro 2 supports HDR 10 and features intelligent screen adaption technology that automatically adjust to the viewing space. It’s also 3D-ready. And its two 8-watt speakers work with Dolby Audio for quality sound. That said, it’s not as bright as some other models.

Best budget: GooDee Video Projector 2022

GooDee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Despite some flaws, this projector impressed with its 1080p native resolution and a wide variety of inputs—all for about a 10th of the cost of our top picks.

Specs

  • Brightness: 300 ANSI lumens
  • Contrast Ratio: 3,000:1
  • Weight: 5 pounds

Pros

  • True HD resolution
  • Dual 3-watt speakers
  • Incredibly inexpensive

Cons

  • No control for display size
  • Hard to adjust the unit height
  • No wireless connectivity

The most recent upgrade to the GooDee projector raises the native resolution from 1280 x 768 to full 1080p, a welcome upgrade that improves picture sharpness. A 300-lumen LED doesn’t provide the most light, but the projector can still create a 200-inch picture with respectable color and contrast—thanks in part to a 3,000:1 contrast ratio. It won’t win any awards for the picture quality, but considering that all this is delivered for less than $200, it’s an impressive device.

Expect some compromises at this price when purchasing a budget-friendly projector, however. For one thing, the projector doesn’t perform well with ambient light; wait until the sun is truly down before starting your movie. It also suffers from a dearth of adjustment controls. For instance, you’ll need to move the projector closer or farther from the screen to make the picture bigger or smaller. But the wealth of connectivity and dual 3-watt speakers add to the convenience and value.

Things to consider before buying the best outdoor projector

Projectors shine light on a surface that reflects the light back to our eyes. That means using a projector with a plain, white wall isn’t going to deliver the best picture because too much light gets absorbed by the paint. For the optimal viewing experience, you need to buy a screen—which can run from around $25 to a little over $100, depending on sizes, stands, and accessories. These have reflective surfaces that increase perceived brightness, contrast, and color saturation—all of which our top picks for best outdoor projectors deliver. 

Luminosity

Brightness, measured in ANSI lumens, is one of the most important specs for an outdoor projector. This describes how much light the projector creates. The more light, the bigger and brighter the picture. It also determines how dark a space needs to be for the best projector performance. Since outdoor projectors can’t take advantage of blackout curtains to fight ambient light from a full moon or from inside your neighbor’s home, putting out as much light as possible has distinct benefits. High-end projectors have brightness ratings of 2400 lumens or more, while less-expensive machines deliver somewhat less. While manufacturer claims don’t always match independent testing, the numbers are useful for making general comparisons—a 3,000-lumen projector will be about three times brighter than a 1000-lumen one. Remember, you can’t ever go wrong with more light but brightness isn’t the only specification that matters when selecting a projector. 

Let there be light

Images are created by focusing a light source onto a chip, and that image is then sent through a lens to your screen. Light sources come in three varieties: Lasers, LEDs, and Ultra High Pressure (UHP) lamps. UHPs are most common in mid-range and higher-end projectors and are essentially high-end light bulbs. Yes, they’re bright, but they also generate a lot of heat and, over time, can burn out. Replacements aren’t cheap, though you won’t have to swap out UHPs anywhere near as often as you might have replaced the old incandescent bulbs in your hallway. LEDs and lasers are far more efficient than UHPs, but there’s a significant increase in cost vs. performance, and they’re usually built into high-end models. 

Chips

As mentioned above, projectors use imaging chips to create a picture, and there are three types: Digital Light Processing (DLP), Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), and Liquid Crystal on Silicon (LCoS). DLP chips find a home in units at all different price points and deliver average contrast and nice color. Sometimes units will use one DLP chip, while sometimes they use three: one each for the Red, Green, or Blue colors that make up an image. LCD chips can be found on budget to mid-range projectors and often have better color than DLP projectors, but contrast ratios sometimes suffer. Lastly, LCoS chips are used in mid- to high-end projectors; they tend to deliver the best picture quality overall, but cost more.

Single-DLP projectors sometimes suffer from what’s known as “the rainbow effect,” where bright objects on the screen leave very quick, multicolored pixel trails behind them. Many people don’t even notice these artifacts, which is why thousands of single-DLP projectors have been sold and continue to sell. Some people simply aren’t bothered by them. If you have an opportunity to test a single-DLP projector at a store, consider doing so in order to gauge how you feel about the rainbow effect should you encounter it. 

Contrast ratio

Another aspect of picture quality is contrast ratio, or the difference between the black and white output. This is usually expressed as a number representing black followed by a number representing white, with each separated by a colon. So, for instance, something like 15,000:1. 

The greater the difference between black and white, the more color variation the projector displays. An image from a projector with an 18,000:1 contrast ratio will, in most cases, look better than one with a 3,500:1 contrast ratio, with bolder, more true-to-life colors, subtler gradients, and richer blacks. Remember, though, contrast isn’t the only factor in determining picture quality, so always look at the number in the context of all the unit’s specs.  

Resolution

Resolution describes the number of pixels that make up a digital image. A high-definition image is 1920 pixels wide by 1080 pixels high—we often simply call this 1080p. A 4K image (also called Ultra High Definition, or UHD) is twice as large, at 3840 pixels wide (close enough to 4000 to earn the name 4K). The higher the resolution, the sharper the image at large sizes.

A projector that can display a 4K image is wonderful and, since these units also play HD media, you’re covered for whether you’re streaming the latest Marvel movie in ultra high def or you’ve dug out an older Blu-ray. At the same time, many HD projectors use a technology called pixel-shifting to double the 1920 resolution. It’s not perfect, but many people won’t notice the difference, and these projectors cost less money. Also, the resolution isn’t the only factor determining picture quality; many movies look fantastic in HD, especially if you’re not blowing up the picture to monumental proportions. 

FAQs

Q: How much does the best outdoor projector cost?

The best outdoor projectors cost roughly $900 to $1,900, depending on features and specs. Generally, with projectors, you get what you pay for. But that doesn’t mean you can’t find excellent units at many different budget levels.  

Q: How many lumens do you need for an outdoor projector?

Outdoor projectors can project an image with a brightness as low as 500 lumens. However, you won’t get as large a picture size at that brightness, and any ambient light will cause the image quality to suffer. For the best outdoor use, look for units with a brightness of more than 2,000 lumens. 

Q: Is it worth getting a 4K projector?

It’s worth getting a 4K projector if you watch a lot of 4K media and want as big a picture size as possible without losing detail. Otherwise, some HD projectors will use pixel-switching technology to create a nice 4K image, while others will accept a 4K signal but down-convert it to HD. 

Q: Can I watch Netflix on a projector?

You can watch Netflix on a projector, along with any other streaming service. Projectors have a variety of inputs, including HDMI and, sometimes wireless, making it easy to connect to a set-top box like a Roku. Some also have USB inputs for Fire TV sticks or similar. Finally, newer projectors, like smart TVs, sometimes have certain pre-installed apps ready to play back media from your favorite streamer right out of the box.

Q: Do outdoor projectors work in daylight?

Outdoor projectors do work in daylight—sometimes. The trick is to find one with a high enough brightness rating for the light you’re dealing with, such as the Anker Nebula Cosmos Laser 4K Projector. However, projectors often suffer at their brightest settings from color and contrast issues that might be bothersome when watching a movie. On the other hand, if you’re gathering with friends for a World Series party, and cinematography isn’t a priority, these shortcomings are much less of a concern. Generally speaking, projectors always perform best in darker environments. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor projectors

Choosing the best outdoor projector isn’t too different than choosing the best projector for your home. To capture that cinema experience, you want one that delivers a large picture with bold colors and rich blacks. On top of that, it needs to be bright enough to overpower ambient light and mobile enough to move in and out of the house easily. A tall order, but one we think the BenQ TK850 accomplishes with ease. We also really like Epson’s Home Cinema 3800 and EpiqVision Mini EF12, but the 3800 costs nearly as much as the BenQ while pixel-shifting to achieve a 4K picture. Meanwhile, the EpiqVision Mini EF12—though lighter and cheaper—also uses pixel shifting and is much less bright than the other two. All three have strengths to recommend them, though, depending on your needs and viewing habits.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor projectors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This Bluetti portable power station is the cheapest it’s ever been on Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/bluetti-portable-power-station-amazon-deal/ Mon, 01 May 2023 18:15:26 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=538068
Bluetti EB3A portable power station
Stan Horaczek

Take up to 40% off a portable power station that you'll want in your emergency kit during a power outage.

The post This Bluetti portable power station is the cheapest it’s ever been on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Bluetti EB3A portable power station
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Whether you’re riding out a power outage or trying to keep yourself (and your tripmates) entertained off the grid, a reliable portable power station can be a lifesaver. Right now, Amazon has the excellent Bluetti EB3A portable power station for just $209, which is $140 off its regular price and the cheapest price we’ve ever seen. It’s just one of several Bluetti solar generators at unbeatable prices right now, and one belongs in your emergency kit.

Bluetti EB3A portable power station $209 (Was $349)

Bluetti

SEE IT

This isn’t a massive power station, but it does hold considerably more juice than a typical battery pack. The EB3A offers a 268Wh capacity, which can fully charge a smartphone up to 20 times or run bigger appliances for several hours. It’ll keep a WiFi router on for up to 10 hours or power a CPAP machine for up to five hours.

The battery inside is a LiFePo system, which promises excellent durability and longevity. It won’t degrade as quickly as some of its competition. The front of the device offers a pair of 120v standard outlets, two 120V CD sockets, a pair of USB-A connectors, and a USB-C for faster charging. You’ll also find an LCD display to keep track of the device’s performance and a handy flashlight so you can actually find your phone to charge it. It will even accept up to 200W solar panels if you want to turn it into a makeshift solar generator.

Even with all that juice inside, this box only measures 10″ x 7.1″ x 7.2″ and weighs just 10 pounds. The integrated handle makes it very easy to chuck in and drag out of a car or grab on your way out the door. You may not need this right now, but you’ll absolutely be glad you have it when the need arises.

More portable power stations that are great in a pinch but won’t put the pinch on your budget:

If the Bluetti doesn’t fit your specific needs or budget, you might find something interesting in these other portable power station deals going on right now. Note: Some listings may require you to apply a coupon to get the price listed; check the box underneath the price on the Amazon item page to add the coupon.

The post This Bluetti portable power station is the cheapest it’s ever been on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best beach chairs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-beach-chairs/ Mon, 10 May 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=363408
best beach chairs
Şahin Sezer Dinçer, Unsplash

Chillout, wherever you are, with the best beach chairs on the market.

The post The best beach chairs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best beach chairs
Şahin Sezer Dinçer, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best backpack chair Blue floral backpack beach chair Tommy Bahama Backpack Cooler Beach Chair
SEE IT

A built-in cooler and flip-over pillow let you fully relax at the beach.

Best beach hammock Desert stripes beach hammock with steel stand and carrying bad Best Choice Brazilian-Style Hammock
SEE IT

This hammock easily folds for even easier transportation.

Best budget Yellow light weighted beach and camping chair Coleman Camping Chair
SEE IT

Keep it simple with this lightweight, cheap beach chair

We’ve all done it: We go to the beach, bringing only a towel. “I can shape the sand into a sort of ground chair,” we tell ourselves, but it never really works out that way. So, instead of sinking into disappointment, grab a chair. The best beach chairs will allow you to enjoy the scenery, while also being durable and portable. Whether you’re on the best beach in the Pacific or in your yard next to the baby pool, take time to find the right size, style, and type of chair to best suit your needs.

How we chose the best beach chairs

When you’re shopping for the best beach chair, you want to be sure to snag a chair that will bring you hours of comfort, be durable enough to last at least through the summer, and be lightweight and collapsible for easy transport. Finding the best beach gear means asking yourself how and where you will be spending your time. If you plan on camping in a rustic, wooded coastal area, it may make sense to bring a portable beach hammock or easy-to-carry camping beach chair. If you have a smaller car or will be traveling on public transportation to your beach destination, you’ll want to opt for a smaller, low-profile beach chair—all the better if it has backpack straps.

The best beach chairs: Reviews & Recommendations

Best backpack chair: Tommy Bahama Backpack Cooler Beach Chair

Tommy Bahama

SEE IT

This Tommy Bahama beach chair is a folding chair that allows for five reclining positions, as well as a pillow for sneaky naps. The backpack beach chair’s insulated cooler bag keeps snacks cool and free of sand.

Best zero-gravity chair: Amazon Basics Outdoor Zero-Gravity Lounge Folding Chair

Amazon Basics

SEE IT

This sturdy zero-gravity folding chair will work at the beach, thanks to rust- and weather-resistant materials. Unlike some others, this option also includes padded armrests and a pillow to support your neck.

Best beach hammock: Best Choice Brazilian-Style Hammock

Best Choice Products

SEE IT

This beach hammock comes with a stand, as well as a carrying case; the stand disassembles with no tools needed, so you can pack up and move it around if necessary. It comes in several colors, too, if you want to coordinate with your bathing suit.

Best camping chair: Helinox Sunset Chair

Helinox

SEE IT

This camping chair packs all kinds of beach-friendly features, including UV-resistant ripstop fabric and a zippered carrying case. But it’s also only 3.5 pounds in weight, which, as for all the best camping chairs, makes it perfect for carrying around.

Best budget: Coleman Camping Chair

Coleman

SEE IT

This highly rated, powder-coated, steel, low-profile Coleman chair weighs in at only 5.3 pounds. This folding chair comes with its own carrying bag for easy transportation and includes some storage options (a mesh pocket in the back, and a cup holder on the seat) as well.

Things to consider when buying the best beach chair

There are also some extra features to beach chairs that might make your day all the more relaxing, from cooler packs to cup holders and cellphone pouches. For ultimate comfort, there are even zero-gravity-style chairs, which allow you to recline and raise your feet.

Related: Grab the best beach umbrella to shade yourself from the sun’s harsh rays.

Looking for a chair and backpack combo?

A day at the beach will include, at minimum, a comfortable chair, a few snacks and drinks, and your towel. The easier it is to carry all of this, the more easy and carefree your day will be. The best backpack beach chairs include straps that make carrying your beach haul incredibly easy. Look for backpack chairs that are adjustable, allowing for reclining flat for naps, or sitting upright for eating and watching the waves. The best backpack beach chairs—these will be folding chairs—will have some fun extras built in to help you relax and minimize the overall amount of beach day packing you need to do. Look for built-in pillows, cup holders, and more; our recommendation even includes a foldable towel rack.

Looking for a chair that will be comfortable for your back?

The best beach chairs will be comfortable for all-day lounging and relaxing. So-called zero-gravity chairs distribute weight evenly and allow you to recline so that your legs are above the height of your heart. These are just about the comfiest patio chairs out there, and some of them will work just as well on the sand. In order for a zero-gravity chair to work as a folding beach chair, it must be fully collapsible and be made from durable, UV-resistant materials. Be sure to check with the manufacturer for size guides and weight limits. Some zero-gravity beach chairs even have extra features like padding, cup holders, and canopies to shade you from the sun.

Get a jealousy-inducing nap with a beach hammock

Few images conjure up quintessential relaxation more than stretching out in a hammock. While it may seem silly to bring a hammock to a crowded public beach, you’d be surprised how often you can use one on vacation: wooded beach areas, parks, lakes, and forests are all ideal for hammocks. The best beach hammock will be lightweight and easily packed, with a device that makes it easy to construct. Most portable hammocks are designed to hang between two trees, but if that doesn’t seem likely, you can find one with a stand, too. In that case, look for a stand that’s designed to be taken apart and transported. Often these stands even come with a travel bag with a shoulder strap to make carrying and moving easier. With their flexible fabric design, hammocks are a great choice if you think you might want to catch a nap. 

Looking for a chair that’s easy to carry?

For most of us, going to the beach involves lugging. You’re going to have to carry stuff—a lot of stuff—down to the sand. The best camping chairs are designed with this obstacle in mind. These have to be lightweight, because they’re going to be carried, sometimes over long distances. Nobody has to know that you’re actually reading a book on the beach, not trekking through the wilderness, in a camping beach chair. Look for camping beach chairs with tall backs; not all have this, and you’ll want to rest your head. Consider materials that are both washable and ventilated for warm summer days. 

Looking for beach chairs on a budget? 

Fortunately, there are plenty of budget folding beach chairs on the market. You’ll have to give up some features and styles; don’t bank on grabbing a zero-gravity chair or one with a high-tech folding camping frame for under $50. But there are still great options. Make sure to look for UV-resistant materials, which will keep the fabric from stretching and becoming brittle in the sun. These chairs may be affordable, but that doesn’t mean you want to replace them too often.

FAQs

Q: Are zero-gravity chairs good for the beach?

Zero-gravity chairs are good for the beach, but not all of them. These chairs are typically made of tough, weather- and water-resistant materials, and, of course, they’re super comfortable. But some of these chairs can be exceedingly heavy, which really reduces their utility as beach chairs. Look for UV-resistant fabrics, a lightweight (ideally 12 pounds or less), and rust-proof coating on any metal bits.

Q: Why are beach chairs so low to the ground?

Beach chairs are low to the ground to allow for more stability and comfort. When seated on top of the sand, the surface is soft and sometimes uneven, which can make things a bit…tippy. When low to the ground, your center of gravity also moves lower, making it harder to topple over. Plus, lower chairs have less material, which makes them more portable.

Q: Are camping chairs good for the beach?

The best camping chairs are a great choice for the beach because they are designed to be lightweight, foldable, and easy to carry. But make sure you really look at them: some camping chairs are too minimal, more like stools, and your use case is less about minimizing the weight of a camping pack and more about comfort and relaxation.

Related: Don’t forget the sunscreen!

Final thoughts on the best beach chairs

The best beach chairs will allow you to kick back, relax, and enjoy a full day at the beach. Whether you want to indulge in a zero-gravity chair to feel like a vacationing astronaut, set up a portable hammock, or just grab something lightweight for a long walk to the shore, you’ll find something here to make your beach day great.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best beach chairs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best inflatable pools in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-inflatable-pool/ Wed, 13 Oct 2021 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=368169
Best inflatable pools roundup sliced header
Tony Ware

Warm sunny days get even better when you can float to your heart’s desire in an easy to set up inflatable pool.

The post The best inflatable pools in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best inflatable pools roundup sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Intex 28405E PureSpa4 Person Inflatable Hot Tub Spa is the best inflatable pool overall. Intex 28405E PureSpa 4-Person Inflatable Hot Tub Spa
SEE IT

Kick back and relax with headrests, heated water, and bubbles.

Best budget The Airso Inflatable Swimming Pool is the best value. Tukuos Inflatable Swimming Pool
SEE IT
This pool sticks to the basics and provides space for floating or splashing all day long. 
Best kiddie The Bountech Inflatable Double Slide Bounce is the best inflatable pool with slide. BOUNTECH Inflatable Double Slide Bounce House
SEE IT

Two slides and a climbing wall equal hours of pool time fun.

In the past, inflatable pools have been perceived as inferior to their in-ground cousins. That’s no longer true. These easy-to-use options provide the benefits of an in-ground pool without the expense and year-round maintenance. Depending on the size and features, these pools can even travel with you or remain a backyard fixture until the weather gets cold. Our recommendations for the best inflatable pools can provide fun for the whole family.

How we chose the best inflatable pools

To narrow down the field of blow-up pools, I started with durability, then looked at setup, capacity, and accessories to find inflatable pools that would offer the best performance. 

Durability: Thick wall materials that resist punctures but are still repairable offer the best bang for your buck. 

Setup: How long does it take to set up the pool? Complex setups may make you avoid setting it up at all. We also prioritized options that are easy to clean so you can spend more time in the pool.

Capacity: The pool has to fit the number of people who want to use it. A pool that fits four adults will fit more kids than that because of their smaller bodies.

Accessories: Ground covers, insulated covers, filters, pool floats, and toys are all extras worth paying for upfront. Buying them separately can get pricey. 

The best inflatable pools: Reviews & Recommendations

The best inflatable pools have the size, features, and capacity for your family. Above-ground inflatable pools that are easy to clean and store can ensure you spend time relaxing instead of maintaining the pool. 

Best overall: Intex 28405E PureSpa 4-Person Inflatable Hot Tub Spa

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Simple setup, portability, and a long list of comfort features make this inflatable pool a standout for adults. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 28 x 58 x 28 inches
  • Capacity: Four people
  • Gallons: 210

Pros

  • Fast, easy setup
  • A hard water filtration system
  • Comfortable seating that includes headrests

Cons 

  • Online directions are better than those included with the pool

This Intex inflatable pool includes everything you need to get it set up and bubbling from the minute it arrives: from a cover with child locks to keep out leaves and hold in heat to a heating system to heat the water before your first dip. Extra accessories include a 10-watt hard water system; two-filter filtration; floating chlorine dispenser; inflation hose; ground cloth; carrying bag; and headrests.

The setup process for this inflatable hot tub usually takes less than an hour. Once you’ve got everything hooked up and ready to go, it can hold four adults. One thing to note is that the online directions are better than those that arrive with the pool. 

Best kiddie: BOUNTECH Inflatable Double Slide Bounce House

Bountech

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Bountech’s climbing wall and two slides make it fun on the way up and down, propelling it to the top of the “pools with slides” list. 

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 178 x 144 x 92 inches
  • Capacity: Three to four children
  • Gallons: NA

Pros

  • Climbing wall instead of a ladder
  • Two slides and a water cannon
  • Easy setup

Cons 

  • Sometimes arrives with a defective blower

The Bountech lets kids splash, shoot, climb, and slide. You can secure this kiddie pool with eight ground stakes and a protective net to keep sliders on the slide. Despite its large size, this kids’ inflatable pool is easy to assemble. With the included blower, one parent can get it set up on their own. At 750 watts, the blower can keep the slides inflated as long as the total bodies onboard don’t exceed the 350-pound weight limit. We also like that it comes with a repair kit and several patches. 

A word of caution: The large inflatable pool works well most of the time, but a few units have underperformed and have not kept the slide fully inflated.

Best for families: Intex Swim Center Family Lounge Inflatable Pool

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Ample seating, lots of splash room, and a simple setup make this inflatable pool one of the best for those who like a built-in lounge seat.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 88 x 85 x 30 inches
  • Capacity: Four adults
  • Gallons: 261.5 

Pros

  • Simple set up
  • Two drink holders
  • Comes with a repair patch

Cons 

  • Does not come with an air pump

Intex knows inflatable pools. This inflatable family pool offers a simple inflation setup and enough seats for four. It doesn’t come with an air pump, so you must buy one separately. However, the pool can fully inflate with an electric pump within 15 minutes. Two built-in drink holders let kids sip without getting drinks in the pool. We like that this inflatable pool with pump also comes with a repair patch just in case there’s a puncture. 

Best for adults: Bestway Fast Set Paradise Palms 15×33 Inflatable Pool Set

Bestway

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This tropically inspired backyard pool provides plenty of room for adults to cool off and take part in the fun with palm trees that spray water.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 15 feet by 33 inches
  • Capacity: Seven people
  • Gallons: 2,566

Pros

  • Large
  • Palm trees spray water
  • Comes with filter

Cons

  • Doesn’t come with a pump
  • No ladder to get in and out

So you don’t have a tropical vacation planned. That doesn’t mean you can’t go swimming among some palm trees. The Bestway Fast Set Paradise Palms 15×33 Inflatable Pool Set brings the spirit of an adult vacation to your backyard. At fifteen feet around, this big inflatable pool is large enough to fit 2,566 gallons of water and seven people. Just hook up your garden hose and the palm trees will spray water. There’s also room for lounging on one of the best float tubes.

This pool comes in seven sizes, and you can choose between a tropical or a more dignified rattan print or blue exterior (minus the palm trees). The liner is three-ply for puncture resistance, and this pool also comes with a repair kit. The included 530-gallon filter will help you keep it clean, while a built-in control valve allows you to drain the water when you’re done.

Best with filter: Summer Waves Quick Set Inflatable Above Ground Pool

Summer Waves

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Summer Waves pool mimics an in-ground model, including a cartridge filter pump for safer, cleaner swimming making it our top pick for an inflatable pool with a filter. 

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 144 x 144 x 36 inches
  • Capacity: Approximately five people
  • Gallons: 1,815

Pros

  • Easy-to-replace filter cartridge
  • Simple setup
  • Provides a lot of swimming/floating space

Cons 

  • Takes a long time to fill with water
  • Doesn’t include a patch kit

The Summer Waves pool provides size and volume above the norm for an above-ground pool. It is 12 feet across and 36 inches tall and holds a sizable amount of water even if it’s only filled to 80-percent capacity. It’s made of triple-layer PVC that resists punctures fairly well. However, having a patch kit with a pool this size is still a good idea. 

Setup takes less than 15 minutes, and the filter easily connects to the pool. A smart design makes filter replacement a simple process. Besides the lack of a patch kit, the only downside is that it’s so large that it takes a long time to fill with water.

Best budget: Tukuos Inflatable Swimming Pool

Tukuos

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Three air chambers create a simple pool that holds a surprising amount of water for the price. 

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 118 x 72 x 22 inches
  • Capacity: Six people
  • Gallons: NA

Pros

  • Fast inflation with an electric air pump (sold separately)
  • Strong walls hold lots of water
  • Easy to access drain plug

Cons 

  • In some cases, it develops holes fairly quickly

This pool by Tukuos keeps things simple but provides a lot of square footage for backyard splashing. It features three separate inflatable rings that fill within 10 to 15 minutes with an electric air pump (not included). A strong, UV-resistant material resists punctures even with rambunctious play. For the price, you get a good-sized inflatable pool that’s simple to fill and easy to empty with the drain plug. However, a small number of units have punctures upon arrival. It doesn’t come with a repair kit, but it’s worth having one on hand.  

What to consider when buying the best inflatable pool

Inflatable pools may be easier to set up than some of their above-ground counterparts, but that doesn’t mean any old pool will do. Here is what you should consider before purchasing the best inflatable pool.

Setup and location

The complexity of the pool setup varies from model to model. Some models take a few minutes with the help of an air pump. Others may require some construction and setup time before the water can flow. 

Inflatable pools require a flat, sturdy location like level ground, a patio, or a deck. However, if the pool is on a structure, that structure needs to be able to handle the weight. One gallon of water weighs about 8.3 pounds. These pools can get heavy very quickly and can collapse a porch or deck that’s not reinforced. If there’s no level ground available, an inflatable pool isn’t a great option. They need even support around the entire base to successfully hold water without breaking. 

Air pumps

Many inflatable pools come with an electric air pump. You may need to invest in an air pump or air compressor to blow up the pool if the model you choose doesn’t include this accessory. 

Capacity

How many people will use the pool at once? A couple of kids can play in a pretty small pool and be happy for hours. However, several kids and a few adults will need more square footage and water volume to relax comfortably. Make sure to measure the space where the pool will be placed. You don’t want to buy a pool that’s big enough for the family and learn after the fact that it’s too big for the yard. 

Drainage

Most inflatable pools have drainage plugs. However, you need to think about drainage when setting up the pool. Make sure it’s not in a place where all that water can cause damage. Even small pools can hold 100 gallons or more. That much water needs somewhere to safely drain.

FAQs

Q: How much does an inflatable pool cost?

Inflatable pools are generally budget-friendly compared to the cost of in-ground pools. They start at under $25 for small-capacity kiddie pools. They can range up to more than $700 for premium versions that include jets for a spa-like experience, water treatment, and filters, like the Intex 28405E PureSpa 4-Person Inflatable Hot Tub Spa. It’s also worth checking to see if the inflatable pool you’re considering comes with a pump, filter, or ladder, and if not, figuring those costs in, if necessary.

Q: How long can you leave water in an inflatable pool?

How long you can leave water in an inflatable pool depends on the tools you have to keep it clean. For sanitary reasons, replacing the water after each use is best. If you leave the water in the pool for a couple of days, cover the pool to prevent debris and animals from wandering in. Some pools come with a filter or chlorine tablets. However, ensure the pool’s material can withstand any chemicals you use.

Q: How do you inflate an inflatable pool?

There are a range of ways to inflate an inflatable pool. Some inflatable pools come with an electric pump, and electric pumps are definitely the easiest way to inflate them. You may have to buy a pump separately if one isn’t included with the pool. Your other options are a manual pump, like a bike bump, or good old-fashioned blowing, which we don’t recommend.

Q: How do you find a leak in an inflatable pool?

To find a leak in an inflatable pool, create a soap (dish soap) and water mixture, and spray it onto the area where you suspect a leak. If there is one, you’ll see bubbles start to form over the puncture.

Final thoughts on the best inflatable pools

For adults who like to soak, the Intex 28405E PureSpa 4-Person Inflatable Hot Tub Spa is easy to set up, relaxing to use, and offers filters and water treatment. It doesn’t hurt that it includes headrests, too. However, for keeping kids entertained, it’s hard to beat the slides and climbing wall of the BOUNTECH Inflatable Double Slide Bounce House. Whatever floats your boat (and your body), there’s an inflatable pool to fit your yard and lifestyle.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best inflatable pools in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf mulchers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-leaf-mulcher/ Tue, 23 Mar 2021 17:13:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278407
boots standing on grass with leaves around them
Melanie Kreutz via Unsplash

We'll help you find the best leaf mulcher to tackle your fall cleanup.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
boots standing on grass with leaves around them
Melanie Kreutz via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best electric worx electric leaf mulcher and bag WORX 12 Amp 3-in-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum
SEE IT
Best gas landworks gas powered leaf mulcher Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher
SEE IT
Best heavy duty black heavy duty leaf mulcher on wheels Patriot Products 14 Amp Electric Wood Chipper/Leaf Shredder
SEE IT

Fall is a gorgeous time of year, but it’s also a grueling period for yard work. As that stunning foliage falls from the trees, homeowners are faced with the Sisyphean task of clearing their yard of endlessly dropping debris. This step of lawn maintenance, important in preventing disease from hijacking your grass under the cover of wet leaves during the winter months, will be much easier if you have appropriate outdoor power equipment like a cordless leaf blower for the job. We’re here to help you identify the best leaf mulchers to clear your lawn and dispose of autumn debris.

What can the best leaf mulcher do?

Once you find the best leaf mulcher for your lawn care, disposing of leaves is a breeze. Depending on your location, leaf disposal can be tricky. Some towns have a service for leaf pickup, but it often comes with a fee attached and the responsibility of tracking down a specific type of leaf bag. Other towns have a set location for residents to drop off their bagged leaves, which can be difficult if you don’t have a pickup truck to transport the hefty bags. 

A better option? Make leaf mulching a part of your yard maintenance. The process simply involves loading the leaves into a leaf shredder that cuts them up into tiny pieces, greatly reducing the heft of the load. Once shredded, leaves can be mulched around your plants and trees to retain moisture, protect from frost, and suppress weeds. 

Like any piece of outdoor power equipment, an overwhelming number of options with different features are available for purchase. A little bit of research can ensure that your machine is tailored to your specific lawn care needs. Here we’ll lay out things to consider before purchasing a leaf mulcher and name six of the best leaf mulchers on the market.

Related: How to create a perfectly imperfect lawn

Best leaf mulchers: Reviews & Recommendations

Best electric: WORX 12 Amp 3-in-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

Worx

SEE IT

This corded electric three-in-one model is lightweight but powerful. A simple switch quickly flips from blower to vacuum to mulching mode, and two speeds are available to accommodate different functions. It boasts an 18:1 mulching ratio, consolidating 18 bags of leaves into just one. As an electric device, this model is muted and environmentally friendly. 

Best gas: Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher

Amazon

SEE IT

This Landworks machine has a mulching ratio of 15:1, and is able to tackle branches of up to 3 inches in diameter. You can adjust the discharge chute anywhere between 90 to 145 degrees for easy and efficient disposal. The 7HP engine takes 87 octane gas with no ethanol. 

Best stand-alone: SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher

Amazon

SEE IT

The SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher is a smaller version of the SuperHandy Wood Chipper. While the mulcher can’t handle the sizable branches that the Wood Chipper can, it comes at a fraction of the price and is perfect for yearly leaf maintenance. It has a high 17:1 mulching ratio, and its electric belt-driven motor is quiet and eco-friendly. 

Best heavy duty: Patriot Products 14 Amp Electric Wood Chipper/Leaf Shredder

Amazon

SEE IT

This Patriot Products wood chipper/leaf shredder offers versatile performance for various levels of yard maintenance. A larger piece of outdoor power equipment, this electric mulcher remains smooth and quiet as it shreds leaves and chips branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter. Simply slide your debris into the top of the feeder and the mulch spits out the side.

Best budget: Black + Decker 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower

Amazon

SEE IT

This blower has options for more attachments, but even the bare bones model is a blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. The corded, electric blower is lightweight and easy to use, and it shreds ten bags of leaves into one. This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher. 

Things to consider when choosing a mulching machine

With so many variations of leaf mulchers available, first narrow your options down by deciding what style mulching machine you’re looking for: handheld or stand-alone? Stand-alone mulchers are stationary machines into which you feed collected leaves for shredding. You can carry a handheld machine around the yard and vacuum leaves straight into the machine. Handheld mulchers usually function as a leaf blower as well.

Also think about what power source is best for you. A gas-powered mulcher is an excellent choice if you want more power and want to avoid plugging in the device or charging batteries, but that comes at the cost of a heavier machine. An electric or battery-powered mulcher leaves you at the mercy of your power source—but can be significantly lighter and easier to maneuver. 

Lastly, pay attention to the mulching ratio of your leaf shredder. The mulch ratio basically tells you how much the shredder will cut down your leaves: the highest ratio of 18:1 will reduce 18 bags of leaves to fit into 1 bag. When choosing the best leaf mulchers for your needs, consider how many bags of leaves you typically have in the fall and what you plan to do with them after they’re shredded—larger shreds are fine for mulching around your trees, while smaller shreds are better for composting.

Electric leaf mulchers are easy to handle

A handheld mulching machine gives you the benefit of turning the two steps of gathering the leaves and then mulching them into one step. Most models can blow, vacuum, and shred, so one swift trip around the yard completes the entire clean up. 

Electric leaf mulchers are significantly lighter than their gas-powered counterparts. Collecting leaves is done with relative ease, and while you’ll need a battery or connection to a power source, you can use a long extension cord or keep an extra battery charging.

Gas powered leaf mulchers provide extended use

For extended use without a power cord or having to stop and recharge batteries, gas powered mulchers keep going for a lot longer than an electric model. Gas powered models tend to be more expensive than electric, but you get what you pay for with more power and faster clean up—just remember to keep extra gas in the shed so you can start with a full tank. 

Stand-alone leaf mulchers can manage heavier loads

The majority of the best leaf mulchers are handheld and come with blower and vacuum functions, but a stand-alone leaf mulcher has only one function—to shred leaves. This is perfect for handling heavier loads, and if you go for a higher-end model, you’re ultimately purchasing a wood chipper that can even deal with small tree limbs. We found a smaller model as well as a heavy-duty model for more extreme yard work. 

A heavy-duty leaf mulcher can act as a wood chipper as well

If you’re willing to fork over some more green for a more versatile machine, a heavier-duty leaf shredder can reduce twigs, branches, and acorns. This is optimal for cleaning up debris after storms and heavy winds knock limbs into your yard. These powerful devices can make yard maintenance quick and efficient and leave you with aesthetically pleasing mulch for your landscaping.

The best leaf mulcher on a budget

If your fall yard maintenance tends to be a small and simple job, the best leaf mulcher for you shouldn’t have to break the bank. While cheap mulchers often coincide with smaller capacity for collection and a less powerful engine, we’ve found inexpensive models on the market that are still strong and efficient. 

FAQs

Q: What leaves are not good for compost?

The leaves that won’t compost well are higher in lignin, a polymer that makes them feel rigid, almost wooden. High-lignin leaves include those found on beech trees, oaks, and sweet cherry trees. Also avoid black walnut, eucalyptus, and poison ivy leaves, as they can be toxic. The best leaves for mulching have high levels of calcium and nitrogen and are low in lignin, like poplar, maple, and ash leaves.

Q: What is the best way to shred leaves?

If you don’t have many trees around the yard and your fall blanket is minimal, a lawn mower could work as a leaf shredder in a pinch—simply mow over the leaves and collect them in the mower’s bag attachment. However, with several price-friendly options on the market, it’s better to take the easier route and buy a leaf mulcher. A specialized leaf vacuum and mulcher does a more thorough job picking up the leaves and shreds smaller than a mower can. 

Q: What is the best 3-in-1 blower, vacuum, and mulcher?

DeWalt and Husqvarna are both popular outdoor equipment brands and each have excellent 3 in 1 leaf machines, but our favorite is the WORX WG518, a 12-amp 2-speed leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher. This is a corded model, so you’ll need a power source, but in return it’s lightweight and easy to carry. Its mulch ratio is on the higher end at 16:1, so if you have a large amount of leaves to consolidate, this machine does the trick. 

Related: Hate raking leaves? There’s an easier method.

Some final thoughts before you choose the best leaf mulchers

Finding the best leaf mulcher to clean up your lawn this fall will take a lot of heavy lifting, and raking, off your shoulders. The 3-in-1 models are especially efficient with the capability to operate as a leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. Removing the bed of leaves from your yard is an essential part of your yard maintenance schedule, as it keeps the leaves from molding and suffocating your lawn or becoming a breeding ground for debris. Find yourself the best leaf mulcher for your needs and in no time you’ll have your yard cleaned up and ready for next spring.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best portable fans of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-portable-fan/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 21:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=380827
Best Portable Fans
Stan Horaczek

You can stay cool without sacrificing your outdoor fun with the best portable fans.

The post The best portable fans of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Portable Fans
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Best Portable Fans Milwaukee M18 Jobsite Fan
SEE IT

The Milwaukee M18 makes it easy to stay cool.

Best handheld The Handfan Misting fan is our pick for best portable misting fan. HandFan Misting Fan
SEE IT

HandFan’s Misting Fan is a great option for every use around town.

Best budget The Comlife Portable Neck Fan is our pick for the best wearable fan. Comlife Portable Neck Fan
SEE IT

Portable neck fans are so hot right now.

The cooling breeze of a portable fan is a cheap and easy way to combat scorching temperatures. With the press of a button, you get an instant breeze to keep the heat at bay. Best of all, they don’t rely on outlet power and are (mostly) small enough to transport in a purse, pocket, or backpack. Some are even made to attach to strollers. The next time you leave the comfort of your AC, the best portable fans will make sure you stay cool.

How we chose the best portable fans

The temperature and humidity can get unbearable during where I live, which makes doing anything outdoors uncomfortable. That’s why I’ve made it my mission to find the best portable fans, so I can stay cool wherever I am.

Outside of my pursuit to keep cool, I write about gadgets and gear and have been doing so for over 10 years. My byline has appeared on sites like XDA Developers, Gear Patrol, and CNN Underscored. To find the best portable fans, I researched and tested everything I could get my hands on. I also looked at editorial reviews and customer feedback to give me an idea of what people value most in a portable fan.

Popular Science has been writing about the best fans for years, so I also drew on previous knowledge and recommendations from colleagues.

The best portable fans: Reviews & Recommendations

To find the best portable fan, you want to think about when you’ll be using it and where. Are you looking for something small to toss in your beach bag? Do you need something that stands on its own to cool you down at your desk? Or are you looking for a stroller fan that can cool your little one? Answering these questions will help you find the fan that fits your needs. We picked these fans for some of the most common scenarios where you need a light cooling breeze on the go.

Best overall: Milwaukee M18 Jobsite Fan

Milwaukee

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Milwaukee’s M18 Jobsite Fan provides several hours of operation and a 120-degree adjustable head.

Specs

  • Height: 10.29 inches
  • Weight: 5.2 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • 120-degree adjustable head
  • Long-lasting battery
  • 18mph max air velocity

Cons

  • Expensive

Milwaukee is well known for making some of the best tools available, so it’s no surprise it also makes a great portable fan. Made of durable plastic and capable of circulating air over 40 feet, the cordless fan features a rechargeable battery that provides up to 17 hours of runtime on the lowest setting. If you’re on a job site or a camping trip, a single charge can keep you cool all day long.

In addition to a long-lasting battery, Milwaukee’s M18 features a 120-degree adjustable head with nine stopping positions, so you can angle it almost any way you like. It also offers three-speed settings, with the highest options capable of 18mph max velocity. And if the M18’s battery does run out, the fan comes with an AC adapter to keep the breeze flowing.

Want to up the refreshment even more? If you’re looking for an industrial misting fan that’s easily transportable, try out the RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan Kit, which sits on top of a bucket (sold separately) filled with water—and ice, if you like—and provides hours of revitalizing fog.

Best for stroller: Amacool Stroller Fan

AMACOOL

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Amacool Stroller Fan is easy to use and features flexible tripod legs that can attach to almost anything, particularly strollers.

Specs

  • Height: 12 inches
  • Weight: 0.43 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Flexible tripod legs
  • Also includes adjustable LED light
  • 360-degree adjustable head

Cons

  • Small battery means poor battery life

This stroller fan comes in three cute colors with a protective fan cover and flexible tripod legs that are easy for you to attach, but hard for your baby to remove. It can easily adhere to the sides, tray, or hood of your stroller as well as your little one’s car seat, playpen, or baby gym. The fan head is adjustable vertically and horizontally with 360 degrees of rotation. It even has three fan speeds so you can customize the breeze your baby needs. The fan lasts between 2.5 and 10 hours, depending on wind speed, and can be easily recharged via USB. While this fan is safe for babies and toddlers, always make sure to have an adult on the lookout whenever it’s switched on.

Best handheld: HandFan Misting Fan

HandFan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The HandFan Misting Fan gives you a breeze and a cool spritz of water for extra relief in your personal paradise.

Specs

  • Height: 8.9 inches
  • Weight: 0.41 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Misting capabilities
  • Three speed options
  • Foldable design

Cons

  • One button design can be confusing

This rechargeable handheld misting fan from HandFan is one of the best ways to stay refreshed during a hot summer day. It can easily fit in the pocket of a purse or backpack, with a handle that can be adjusted from 0-180 degrees for handheld or standalone use. Choose from three different fan speeds to cool you down no matter the weather. You can even trigger night mode, which includes a delightful array of colored lights. 

Best of all, the HandFan comes with a built-in mister and 17-millimeter water reservoir, which can produce a steady stream of gentle mist for 10 minutes at a time. All of these functions can be controlled with just one button for ultimate ease. This mini-fan weighs just 6.6 ounces and measures 4.1 by 8.9 inches, the perfect size to keep handy in your car, back pocket, or travel bag.

Best for camping: Fxexblin Camping Fan

Fxexblin

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a battery that can last up to 25 hours and a lantern with three brightness levels, the Fxexblin Camping Fan is the perfect companion for the Great Outdoors.

Specs

  • Height: 6.8 inches
  • Weight: 0.7 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Adjustable light
  • Durable design
  • Battery can last up to 25 hours

Cons

  • No place to store remote

This Fxexblin camping fan is an excellent choice for anyone who likes to spend time outdoors. It features three fan speeds and a battery that can last up to 25 hours on slow speeds, and a full six hours at maximum speed. The lantern also has three brightness levels, and each facet can be adjusted using an included remote control. You can even plug in your mobile phone or computer and use the fan’s USB-C port to charge your device in case of an emergency. The unit itself can be charged via USB cable, power bank, car charger, laptop, and more. It also includes four battery-indicator lights which help you anticipate charging time and battery life. The hook design means you can suspend the fan above you or simply fold the handle down to have it stand upright. At just 11.2 ounces and 6.8 by 5.4 inches, this powerful fan will be easy to transport for on-the-go use.

Best for desk: Honeywell Turbo on the Go  

Honeywell

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Honeywell Turbo is lightweight, provides a powerful breeze, and includes a convenient handle for carrying.

Specs

  • Height: 5 inches (12 inches with handle flipped open)
  • Weight: 0.49 pounds
  • Battery-powered: AA x 4

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Handle doubles as a stand
  • Battery-powered and USB-powered

Cons

  • Needs four AA batteries

While the Turbo On the Go fan won’t replace traditional AC, it’s a fantastic way to stay cool during a hectic workday and a great small personal fan for a desk. It measures roughly 5 by 12 inches and weighs under one ounce, so you don’t need to worry about it taking up too much space or dragging you down if you’re on the move. This fan produces a breeze you can feel from up to three feet away with several set-up options, including standalone, hanging, or carrying. It can be powered with four AA batteries for outdoor use or via a USB-A cable, which can plug directly into your work computer.

Best budget: Comlife Portable Neck Fan  

COMLIFE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Comlife’s Portable Neck Fan can be worn like a necklace and also used on a desk.

Specs

  • Height: N/A
  • Weight: 0.43 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Also USB-powered
  • Can be worn like a necklace
  • Two fans offer double the breeze

Cons

  • Can get in the way while worn

You shouldn’t have to pause all your favorite pastimes just to dab sweat away or take a break in the shade. A wearable fan, like this one from Comlife, is a magnificent way to keep moving even when the heat starts to rise. This double-headed small portable fan hangs comfortably on the neck and is 360-degree adjustable so you can stay cool without anything getting in your way. It features six fan speeds, battery life between two and nine hours depending on use, and an included USB cable for simple charging. This mini portable fan weighs just 0.4 pounds, so you won’t be under any strain while wearing it, even during exercise. From cooking to hiking, cycling to traveling, you’ll have no trouble keeping comfortable, even during a vigorous workout.

What to consider when buying the best portable fans

We look for the same things in a portable fan that we would in any other cooling device. Aside from strong airflow, a portable fan shouldn’t produce much noise. It should, on the other hand, be durable enough to throw in a bag and be easy to clean. Here’s everything to look out for in your search.

Size and weight

Portability is an essential part of a good personal handheld fan. When researching our picks, we paid special attention to things like size and weight. Portable fans come in all shapes and sizes, and different options work better for different situations. Before making your pick, you should take a moment to figure out how and where you plan to use your fan, whether you’re traveling, sitting at your desk, or working on an engine in your garage.

Remember that the bigger the fan, the stronger the airflow. A handheld pocket fan will only generate enough wind to cool down one person. There are also larger portable fans big enough to cool down a small space, like a tent. 

Power

Portable fans use a couple of different battery types. Usually, they’ll either use built-in rechargeable batteries or require disposable cells, like AAs. Some models with built-in rechargeable batteries can also plug directly into the wall, so you can recharge the battery and use the fan simultaneously. Often, the whole point of a portable fan is to get away from outlets, but it’s still a nice perk.

A traditional battery is the most straightforward option. Just install a few AA batteries and feel the temperature drop. While single-use batteries are convenient, we generally avoid them whenever possible to minimize generating e-waste. (Of course, you always pop in some rechargeable batteries to sidestep the issue.)

A built-in rechargeable battery means you don’t need to buy batteries from the store. However, there’s always the risk of forgetting to recharge a rechargeable battery each night, which could render a portable fan useless.

Noise

No fan is competently silent, but nobody wants to use one that sounds like a buzzing insect. No matter what size portable fan you choose, you don’t want the whirring to be a distraction, especially if you’re using it as a travel fan. We focused on finding options that produce minimal noise, even on their highest setting. A quiet fan is particularly important if you plan to have it pointed at you from close range.

Cleaning

Keeping your fan clean is not only the sanitary thing to do, but it ensures everything works effectively and efficiently. A good fan should be relatively easy to disassemble (and reassemble) so that you can access the fan blades and remove dust and hair collected on moving parts.

Extras

For outdoor summer days, you can’t go wrong with a mini fan that can give you a cooling spritz. If you don’t want to miss out on enjoying beach trips, summer barbecues, or picnics, then reach for a small, handheld fan you can easily slip into your bag or pocket—major bonus points for a model that has a small reservoir for water. With the push of a button, you’ll feel a steady spray that refreshes and cools.

There are also portable options you can wear around your neck. These portable fans sit comfortably around your neck so you can keep your hands on the steering wheel, tongs, walking stick, oar, etc. These battery-powered fans are a great way to get a breeze without taking a break from your favorite activities.

Finally, some options include flexible tripods that can attach to strollers and car seats, ensuring your little one stays cool on a warm day. Kids love to grasp and grab at just about everything, so make sure your stroller fan is sturdily attached yet adjustable, so you can angle airflow without worrying your baby will get a hold of the mini fan.

FAQs

Q: How much does a portable fan cost?

Depending on its features and functions, a portable fan starts at $20 and goes into the hundreds. The most expensive portable fan on our list is around $120.

Q: Is there a fan that blows cold air?

Some fans blow colder air but keep in mind that they can be a bit pricier than the portable models listed above. Unlike energy-efficient air conditioners that use freon, or regular fans which circulate the ambient air, cold-air fans need to use more advanced technology to create highly concentrated, controlled pressure and super-high speeds that actively cycle and slightly chill the air. Top-notch models like the Dyson Pure Hot Cool can do more to chill the air around you. If you want actively cooled air and live in the right climate, you might be interested in trying an evaporative cooler that cycles recently evaporated, chilled water from a reservoir to cool a room.

Q: What is the quietest portable fan for the bedroom?

There are several options out there for super-quiet fans you’re sure to sleep through, and many others include a sleep or night mode to further quell sound or lights. Honeywell, Vornado, and Lasko make small portable fans that are practically noiseless. It will be a bit more challenging to find a compact, pocket-portable fan that can provide the same options when it comes to quiet modes, but that shouldn’t be as much of an issue when you’re using them on the road.   

Q: How long do portable fan batteries last?

Battery life depends on a few factors, like fan size and what setting is used. If you use lower power, most portable fans will last for several hours. Crank it up to the highest setting and the battery may only last for a couple of hours.

Q: What type of portable fan is best for the beach?

Any fan that’s designed for outdoor use would work well at the beach, as long as you’re not taking it into the water or burying it in sand. No portable fan will be completely resistant to the elements, so it pays to be cautious when using electronics outside.

Final thoughts on the best portable fans

While the summer heat can undoubtedly feel oppressive at times, there’s no reason why you can’t grab one of the best portable fans out there to make things more bearable, especially if you know which factors to prioritize. If you want to stay especially active, go for a mini wearable or personal handheld model. If you need some extra chill indoors, a compact desk fan or lightweight tower fan will do the trick. And for special situations, make sure you look for a fan that proudly boasts its strengths, like stroller or camping fans. Beating the heat won’t be so hard with a great portable fan in hand.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable fans of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best mini projectors of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-mini-projectors/ Thu, 12 May 2022 16:00:03 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=439520
A lineup of the best projectors on a white background
Amanda Reed

Screen movies, share photos, and deliver presentations with these pint-size projectors.

The post The best mini projectors of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best projectors on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall AAXA P7 Mini AAXA P7 Mini Projector
SEE IT

A light, bright, mini streaming machine.

Best for movies Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12 Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12
SEE IT

Advanced imaging offers a cinema-like experience.

Best for travel Anker Nebula Solar Anker Nebula Solar
SEE IT

A projector that’s road-worthy and feature-rich.

Mini projectors strike a balance between size, features, price, and image quality. Is it easy to pack big entertainment in a small package? Nope, so when purchasing a mini projector, it’s important to manage your expectations. These units will never match the brightness, resolution, color saturation, contrast, or picture size you get from a full-size projector. On the other hand, try slipping one of those 20-pound monsters into your carry-on bag or using it in a small office or a dorm room. Ideally, the best mini projectors weigh a few pounds or less—sometimes much less—but are bright enough for presentations and to display photos, spec sheets, or whatever else you’d like. 

These small entertainment units often include built-in batteries for truly portable play, and some have Android TV functionality for easy streaming. Integrated speakers are common, and there are often HDMI and USB ports for external media like Blu-ray players, set-top streaming boxes, or USB streaming sticks. Finding the best mini projector that meets your priorities isn’t always easy, so we’ve gathered six of the best mini projectors while also providing some insight into what to look for when you’re shopping.

How we chose the best mini projectors

When selecting the best mini projectors to include in our recommendations, we relied on our experience with home projectors and we reached out to professionals in the TV and AV worlds to discuss their favorites—as well as the types of specs they care about when shopping. We read trade journals and websites and sifted through online reviews and comments to get the impressions of typical users. We narrowed our selection of projectors down to 10, focusing first and foremost on how the unit balanced image quality against its small, portable size. Color, contrast, and resolution were considered, as were size and weight. Price was an important factor, especially in terms of “bang for your buck,” and additional features—like built-in streaming apps, batteries, and speakers—were evaluated as well.

The best mini projectors: Reviews & Recommendations

A little more compact than some portable projectors, while not as limited in features as a pico projector, the best mini projectors are all-in-one entertainment.

Best overall: AAXA P7 Mini Projector

AAXA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small, light projector ticks all our boxes with a native 1080p picture, reasonably bright lamp, built-in battery, and an on-board speaker. 

Specs 

  • Brightness: 600 lumens
  • Size: ‎1.85″ x 1.73″ x 1.06″
  • Weight: 1.48 pounds

Pros

  • Native 1080p picture
  • Included rechargeable battery
  • Lots of ports

Cons

  • Not 4K

There’s a reason the AAXA P7 Mini Projector is part of our projector coverage. This projector’s DLP lamp delivers a full 1920 x 1080 picture, and its high contrast level produces deep blacks and colors with nice saturation. HDMI and USB-A ports connect the unit to external media players (so don’t forget those HDMI cables).

Its internal battery lasts for 1.5 hours. The internal speaker sounds good, despite being light in the low end. With a brightness of 600 lumens, you get a 120-inch picture before noticing any significant loss of quality.

There are few cons with this mini projector: To watch content from streamers, you’ll need to either connect an HDMI cable or plug in a Google Chromecast. It also doesn’t support 4K. It’s frustrating but not a deal-breaker, given how many other excellent features are present. 

Best for movies: Epson EpiqVision Mini EF12

Epson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Superior contrast, a relatively bright lamp, and advanced imaging technology work to deliver what’s by far the best-looking movies you’ll see from any other projector on this list.  

Specs

  • Brightness: 1000 ANSI Lumens
  • Size: 6.9” x 6.9” x 5”
  • Weight: 4.7 pounds

Pros

  • Native 1080p resolution
  • Supports 4K media (down-converted to HD)
  • 200,000:1 contrast ratio
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Excellent speakers

Cons

  • A bit heavy by mini standards
  • Expensive

The EpiqVision Mini EF12 is more expensive than most other mini projectors, but that’s the trade-off for a positively cinematic movie-watching experience. With a native Full HD 1080p resolution and 1,000-ANSI lumen MicroLaser light source, the unit projects a sharp 140-inch picture. Three-chip LCD technology displays 100 percent of the RGB color range, while high contrast and adaptive color correction deliver shadows full of detail and saturated colors that positively pop. 

Built-in Android TV provides access to a full suite of streaming apps, and the EpiqVision Mini has two HDMI inputs for external players. A 5-watt Yamaha speaker delivers robust and clear audio. 

Unfortunately, this Android projector doesn’t have an internal battery, so don’t expect to use it without having access to AC power. It’s also a chunkier piece of gear than many mini projectors on this list—this isn’t dropping into anyone’s pocket. And, again, the price—close to $1,000, compared to all our other sub-$500 choices—might make it a tough buy for anyone watching their budget. But if you prioritize your movies above all else, there’s a reason this is one of our favorite home theater projectors.

Best for gaming: XGIMI Elfin Mini Projector

XGIMI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The XGIMI Elfin mini projector enhances gaming by providing a crisp picture, a 3D mode, superior audio quality, and low latency.

Specs

  • Brightness: 800 ANSI lumens
  • Size: 7.56” x 7.63” x 1.89”
  • Weight: 4.41 lbs.

Pros

  • 1920 x 1080 resolution
  • Features a 3D mode
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Comes with two Harman Kardon speakers with DTS and Dolby Atmos sound

Cons

  • Doesn’t work with iOS
  • Some users experienced difficulties with WiFi connection

The XGIMI Elfin Mini Projector is designed for both cinephiles and gamers. Its native Full HD 1080p resolution and 800-ANSI lumen light combine for a crisp 150-inch picture. This pick also comes with built-in Android TV, giving users access to over 5,000 apps, including Google Play, Prime Video, and Disney+.

What sets the Elfin apart is that it comes with a 3D mode that can enhance the gaming experience. This mini projector also features two 3-watt Harman Kardon speakers that work with DTS and Dolby to provide atmospheric sound. The Elfin is also equipped with an autofocus mode, and the low latency of 26.5 milliseconds is another selling point for gamers.

For those looking for a projector with wireless audio, the Elfin connects via Bluetooth 5.0, as well as WiFi, USB, HDMI, and headphones. With its slim profile and at just 4.5 pounds, it’s also easy to tuck this projector into a backpack for travel. And it’s priced lower than some other options. If you’re looking for a larger model, check out our guide to the best projectors for gaming.

Best pocket-sized: Kodak Luma 450

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With native 1080p resolution, this pint-size player delivers a much better picture than you usually get from such small projectors. 

Specs

  • Lumens: 200 ANSI lumens
  • Size: 4.9” x 4.9” 1.26”
  • Weight: 9 ounces

Pros

  • 1920 x 1080 resolution
  • 4K compatible (down-converted)
  • Keystoning 
  • 3-hour battery life

Cons

  • Not very bright
  • Tinny audio

Kodak’s tiny Luma 450 delivers full 1080p resolution with the ability to accept 4K signals (down-converted to HD). The DLP projector’s 200 lumens aren’t high-performance, but good color management and a 3,500:1 contrast ratio help to achieve a decent picture up to about 100 inches. It’s important, however, to make sure the room is nice and dark, as too much ambient light leads to washed-out colors and a loss of details in the shadows.

The Android Smart OS is included, and streaming apps can be downloaded directly to the projector. You can also cast from this wireless projector directly from your smart device or computer, or plug a media player into the projector via HDMI. It also accepts USB streaming sticks and is a great mini projector for iPhone.

The Luma 450’s battery is reported to last three hours and most users seem to get about 2 1/2 hours of life before plugging in—impressive! Less impressive is the small 1-watt speaker system; the audio lacks any sort of body and clarity sometimes suffers during chaotic scenes (luckily, there’s a 3.5mm jack so you can connect to a beefier sound system). 

Best for travel: Anker Nebula Solar

NEBULA

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Lightweight and featuring built-in Android TV, this battery-powered projector travels easily. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 400 ANSI Lumens
  • Size: 7.56” x 7.57” x 2.15”
  • Weight: 2.8 pounds

Pros

  • Up to three hours of battery life
  • Built-in Android TV
  • Native HD resolution but can accept 4K inputs

Cons

  • Picture suffers in ambient light
  • Color accuracy could be better

This 3.1-pound, rechargeable, battery-powered DLP projector loves life on the road. You’ll get 1 1/2 hours in Standard mode and an excellent 3 hours in Battery mode—albeit with a dip in brightness. The built-in Android TV includes apps to connect to all the major streaming services, so no external media is necessary (you will, however, need access to a Wi-Fi network and a Google account). Built-in dual 3-watt speakers can handle Dolby Digital Plus encoded audio, though the sound quality could be better. 

The Solar Portable accepts 4K signals and down-converts them to the projector’s native 1080p resolution. In HD mode, colors exhibited a subtle nuance—though they were sometimes a bit off—and shadows maintained their detail even in darker scenes. While this 4K mini projector is bright enough to deliver a nice 180-inch image, don’t expect to go much larger without the picture softening. 

Again, it’s about striking a balance. Other projectors deliver a nicer picture but don’t have as much functionality when traveling. For more options, explore our guide to the best outdoor projectors.

Best budget: Kodak Luma 150

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This inexpensive and ultra-small projector is a great way to share presentations, photos, or videos. 

Specs

  • Brightness: 60 ANSI lumens
  • Size: 3.1” x 3.1” x 0.87”
  • Weight: 7.8 ounces 

Pros

  • Small and light
  • Full-size HDMI input
  • microSD card slot

Cons

  • Not very bright
  • Not full HD

Kodak’s Luma 150 is a fun, budget-friendly way to share content from your smartphone. Send video over a full-size HDMI cable, or cast your content from connected devices. The projector also accepts microSD cards

At first blush, the 60-lumen DLP projector doesn’t seem very bright. And its 854 x 480 resolution isn’t the stuff of blockbusters. But this mini movie projector isn’t meant to be your primary choice. The Luma 150 instead makes a convenient, very inexpensive tool for sharing photos at get-togethers, watching movies in the backseat of the car, or delivering presentations at a conference on a screen that’s significantly bigger than the one on your phone, tablet, or laptop.

The battery lasts about two hours and the unit can also be plugged in, making it a good option for a bedroom projector. This cheap projector has a speaker, but you’re better off using headphones or a small, portable speaker if watching videos with other people. 

Things to consider before buying a mini projector

It’s not easy for something that potentially fits in your palm (or at least can be easily carried with one hand) to throw a picture that’s around 100-200 inches from corner to corner, in 720p or 1080p, with accurate colors and decent shadow detail. Here are the specs to watch for as you shop:

Brightness

ANSI lumens describe how much light a projector creates, which determines how bright and large your picture will be—especially in less-than-ideal situations where you can’t achieve a completely dark room. Brightness levels of around 200 to 500 ANSI lumens are common, with picture sizes of around 80-120 inches. That said, there are some mini projectors that can achieve much brighter pictures than that. 

Chip

Projectors use imaging chips to create a picture, and there are three types of them: DLP, LCD, and LCoS. DLP chips find a home in units at all different price points and deliver average contrast and nice color. LCD chips can be found on budget to mid-range projectors and often have better color than DLP projectors, but contrast ratios sometimes suffer. Lastly, LCoS chips are used in mid-range to high-end projectors; they tend to deliver the best picture quality overall but, not surprisingly, cost more and don’t show up in budget units. 

One last thing to know about chips: Single-DLP projectors, which comprise most budget-priced units, sometimes suffer from “the rainbow effect.” This is when bright objects on the screen leave very quick, multicolored pixel trails behind them. With thousands upon thousands of single-DLP projectors sold, it’s obvious that most people don’t even notice them—or aren’t bothered. But if you have an opportunity to test out a single-DLP projector at a store, consider doing so in order to gauge how you feel about the rainbow effect.

Pico and palmtops

There’s mini, and there’s mini. Pico projectors, also sometimes called pocket projectors, are about the size of a smartphone. They’re extremely portable, of course, but their pictures rarely match the brightness or quality found on bigger machines. Palmtop projectors are larger and brighter than pico projectors, with more connections, but still light enough to drop into a bag for travel or presentations. Many models also connect with smartphones, making them ideal cell phone projectors.

Power

Many mini projectors run on internal batteries for at least a couple of hours, making them even more portable. That said, it’s not enough juice to binge an entire series or watch some of the longer Marvel movies. Luckily, mini projectors also come with AC cords so when you’re at home, in an office, or at a friend’s place, you can just plug them in.

Screens

Projectors shine light on a surface that reflects the light back to our eyes. That means using a projector with a plain, white wall isn’t going to deliver the best picture because too much light gets absorbed by the paint. For the optimal viewing experience, you need to buy a screen—which can run from around $25 to a little over $100, depending on sizes, stands, and accessories. These have reflective surfaces that increase perceived brightness, contrast, and color saturation—all of which are especially important when using a mini projector, which is likely already hobbled by a dimmer light source.

Audio

Because they’re built for portability, mini projectors often include speakers. Three or more watts can generally fill a small space, but volume isn’t everything. Ensure the speakers produce clear audio to separate voices from background noise or music in busy scenes. Decent bass response will contribute to the sound’s fullness, too. Many mini projectors also include an audio-out jack for using external speakers. 

FAQs

Q: Are mini projectors worth buying?

Mini projectors are worth buying if you put a premium on size and portability. They’re small, lightweight, and often include features like battery power, built-in Android TV, and speakers. However, they sacrifice picture quality and brightness to achieve those other ends. If you want something you can keep set up in your personal media room, a mini projector isn’t the best choice.

Q: Can you watch Netflix on a mini projector?

You can watch Netflix on a mini projector by connecting a set-top streaming box, like an Apple TV or Roku, via HDMI, or some other streaming stick/media folder through the USB port. Some mini projectors have internal Android TV, but the Netflix app isn’t always compatible. It’s important to confirm compatibility ahead of time.


Q: How much does a mini projector cost?

Mini projectors can range in price depending on the number of features, brightness, and quality of the image. Expect to pay around $200 at the very low end for basic units and as much as $800 for projectors with high-quality, cinematic visuals.

Q: Is a projector better than a TV?

Sometimes a projector is better than a TV, but sometimes it’s not. It depends on what sort of viewing experience you want to have, and where you plan on having it. Projectors are usually capable of much bigger pictures—imagine a full-size unit delivering 300 inches of Marvel movie mayhem! But if you don’t need that big a screen, or you simply don’t have room for it, maybe a large, flat-screen TV will suit you better. Projectors can often offer much better contrast than TVs, but that’s only if they’re in a dark room. If the ambient light is an issue, projectors might run into trouble. Projectors need enough space to “throw” their image in order for it to achieve its maximum size—is your room deep enough to allow that? On the other hand, projectors capable of displaying a 100-inch picture are much easier to take on the road with you than a 100-inch TV! In the end, deciding which is best comes down to your own lifestyle and movie-watching interests. 

Q: How much do mini projectors cost?

The cost of mini projectors can range from under $50 for budget options to more than $1,000 for premium versions with high picture quality, superior audio, and built-in access to Android TV and more than 5,000 apps. You can find versions that work easily with your iPhone or more sophisticated models that feature a 3D mode.

Final thoughts on the best mini projectors

Mini projectors almost never live up to the specs of larger, more permanent units—but they cost less and travel easily. Anyone looking to purchase a mini projector needs to first accept that reality before deciding which unit suits them best. After that, it comes down to priorities. If you want a great picture and don’t care about much else, Epson’s EpiqVision Mini EF12 delivers a cinema-like picture. On the other hand, the AAXA P7 Mini Projector trades off some brightness, and a bit of image quality, for portability. It features a battery and costs much less. In striking that balance, in embracing what’s great about mini projectors, the AAXA P7 edged out the Epson for our top pick.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best mini projectors of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best projectors under $200 for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-projectors-under-200/ Thu, 14 Apr 2022 19:00:02 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=433292
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

Turn any wall into a window to other worlds with a portable projector.

The post The best projectors under $200 for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

best overall WiFi Bluetooth Projector, DBPOWER is the best overall projector under 200. DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector
SEE IT

Excellent all-around performance with HD video and a good warranty.

Best bright image Projector, GooDee 2022 is the best projector under 200. GooDee 2023 Projector
SEE IT

With an extra bright image, this is a solid outdoor movie night option.

Best portable Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector is the best portable projector under 200. Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector
SEE IT

Palm-sized but still potent, this tiny pocket projector offers big entertainment.

Projectors do wonders at making any room—even minuscule city apartments—feel like a home theater. And not all projectors require a big investment to open up a huge new window of immersive entertainment. If you’re ready to expand your laptop binges and smartphone scrolling to the size of your wall, you can explore the world of streaming content at a surprisingly affordable price. You shouldn’t expect top-tier performance at this price point, but the best projectors under $200 can still provide a satisfying experience if you choose the right model and do a little prep work. 

How we chose the best projectors under $200

Having spent countless nights watching YouTube with my girlfriend’s cat at the foot of the bed purring and curled up around the projector’s exhaust fan, I know the joys of a simple-to-use home projector. For this best-of list, I evaluated leading projectors from numerous manufacturers, looking for the magic combination of a few factors that add up to make some truly great picks. We narrowed down this list from dozens based on intensive research, editorial reviews, and spec comparisons. 

The best projectors under $200: Reviews & Recommendations

These projectors offer surprisingly capable combinations of tech features that capitalize on crisp definition, Apollonian illumination, dynamic sound, and the connectivity you need for nightly use. Most hook into your laptop using an HDMI cable, while some pair wirelessly through a WiFi network. For audio, many pair with powered speakers (or an AV receiver) via aux connections and sometimes support Bluetooth. At the $200 price point, few projectors may be completely cord-free or the perfect pairing for your premium sound systems, but they could be a great partner to that new portable party speaker. Still, today’s budget projectors offer versatility and delivery that would have been unthinkable at this price a decade ago.

Best overall: DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector

DBPOWER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With native HD, 9,000 lumens, and WiFi connectivity, this is a versatile and powerful projector, but it’s the customer support that makes it the best overall.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,000 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, WiFi, Bluetooth (sound), TV stick, USB, AV port, 3.5mm audio

Pros

  • Really nice picture with good definition and bright luminance
  • Solid connectivity options
  • Allows viewers to screen cast from their phones

Cons

  • Bluetooth connection is only sound, advertising is misleading
  • Some high-end sound systems won’t connect

This projector hits all the basics with aplomb: It offers 1080p definition without much warping along the edges, delivers 9,000 lumens to be visible in half-light conditions, and features impressive connectivity options. That connectivity lets you pair your devices to the projector via WiFi to screencast from a phone, or connect a sound system via Bluetooth. However, it will not deliver video via Bluetooth. That’s typical, but the product listings make it slightly confusing. 

The projector also delivers a few special features, such as a zoom function that allows you to shrink the image to 75% via the remote. Built-in speakers create a modicum of surround sound illusion. However, we think you’ll be best served by connecting to a separate Bluetooth speaker device.  

Best bright image: GooDee 2022 Projector

GooDee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With 1080p native resolution, 9,500 lumens, and two speakers to create a modicum of surround sound, this projector is more than capable of achieving most of what most users want.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: 2 HDMI, VGA, 2 USB, AV, TF card

Pros

  • Two speakers for true stereo sound
  • Extra bright LED luminance
  • Decent connections

Cons

  • Build quality is a bit cheap
  • Edges get somewhat fuzzy

At the sub-$200 price point, it can be hard to find a projector with really excellent brightness. The GooDee 2022 distinguishes itself here. Offering 9,500 lumens with a 3,000:1 contrast ratio and a max screen size of 230 inches, this budget projector emphasizes going big. A pretty perfect option for backyard movie nights, this might be the best outdoor projector under $200, hitting a nice sweet spot of big image and lightweight build. 

The GooDee does have a little trouble with warping and fuzziness around the image corners. However, that’s nothing rare at this price point. The device also suffers from a somewhat cheap-feeling build. It doesn’t feel super solid and primed for longevity. Still, the brightness and resolution may compensate for this for most users.

All in all, GooDee delivers a projector that yields a pretty bright, crisp image, with good contrast and resolution. It’s especially suited for backyard movie parties.

Best portable: Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With support for 1080p signal and a two-hour battery charge, this super-petite projector fits in a pocket and makes for a perfect companion for campers with kids or travel.

Specs

  • Luminance: 25 ANSI lumen
  • Definition: 640 x 320 (capable of displaying images meant for 1080p)
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, MicroSD

Pros

  • Ultra-portable
  • Makes a great camping projector

Cons

  • Battery often dies in under two hours

Ready to bring your projector camping? The Kodak Ultra Mini projector does some amazing things considering its size. At about 3 inches square and only 150 grams, the Kodak lives up to its title as a true “ultra-mini” projector housed in that tiny body is a decent projector that hooks up to most smartphones and portable devices.

With such a tiny size and low price, the Ultra-Mini will require you to make some sacrifices. While it can receive a 1080p signal, it only outputs at 640 x 320, meaning the 1080p video entering the projector will be downscaled to a much lower native resolution. It’s quite a drop from HD, so don’t expect crisp, beautiful video that perfectly represents contemporary cinema. Additionally, the brightness isn’t anything to write home about. Still, it’s nothing to sneer at on a dark tent wall. One other issue with the device is its short battery life. It generally won’t make it past two hours, so don’t expect any Lord Of The Rings marathon binges here.

If a miniature portable projector is something you’re after and you decide you can afford the bells and whistles, Kodak’s more expensive Luma 350 could be worth exploring. For its small price and equally tiny size, however, the Kodak Ultra Mini is the best mini projector under $200. It’s worth a look, even if it could be a good idea to get your expectations in order before you spring for it.

Best for home theater: Wsky HD Projector (Refurbished)

Wsky

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a native 1080p HD resolution and a significantly higher-than-average 5,000:1 contrast, this projector puts its double-dense LED tech to work.

Specs

  • Luminance: 7,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, audio port, USB, MHL

Pros

  • 84 LEDs double the standard LED count in a projector and achieve greater detail, contrast, and less fuzziness on the exterior of the image
  • Value priced

Cons

  • Sound quality isn’t great

For a sub-$200 cinephiles projector, look no further than the Wsky HD Projector. This projector puts the work in on image quality using a higher-than-average LED count. The 5,000:1 contrast is noticeably better than much of the competition, and the 1080p HD coverage looks great, even with new movies. With better-than-average corner coverage achieved via the keystone wheel, Wsky also doesn’t suffer from as much of the edge blurriness that might make subtitles illegible on some projectors.

The Wsky’s sound won’t rack up any bonus points, however. While it advertises Dolby sound, the two speakers aren’t powerful enough. However, plugging speakers into the audio jack can mitigate this sound deficiency. Sadly, no Bluetooth audio connection is available. However, those who stump for Bluetooth speakers may be able to pair them to a device that’s sourcing video (such as your laptop, though there might be sync issues). 

With its impressive video capabilities, the Wsky HD Projector is worth consideration for anyone who wants a projector that yields a great picture.

Best with DVD player: BIGASUO Upgrade HD Bluetooth Projector

BIGASUO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For folks with a legacy DVD collection who might want to skip all the wires, this projector has a built-in DVD player and does a decent job at all the rest.

Specs

  • Luminance: 5,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, AV, USB, Bluetooth (sound), TF SD card

Pros

  • DVD player built in
  • Decent connectivity, including Bluetooth for sound

Cons

  • Resolution and brightness are both somewhat low
  • Sound is nothing to write home about

Are you itching to tuck into the entire Lassie television series on DVD box set? The BIGASUO Upgrade HD projector with a built-in DVD player might be your best bet. The BIGASUO projector is remarkable for its connections and legacy media opportunities. 

The Bluetooth connection for sound is particularly useful in concert with the built-in DVD player. Often with contemporary laptops, Bluetooth sound on a projector is redundant since most laptops can pair to a Bluetooth speaker while casting video through HDMI. However, since this device acts as its own DVD player, the Bluetooth connection can be important for those skipping the laptop entirely. This means you can natively watch DVDs from the device while simultaneously paired with a Bluetooth speaker for sound.

Outside of its DVD player, this is an unremarkable projector. It downscales HD video to its native 720p definition, which falls short of similarly priced native HD projectors. Its brightness similarly lags the competition somewhat.

If you’re looking for a capable all-in-one DVD player/projector hybrid, the BIGASUO Upgrade HD is a good pick. Otherwise, you may want to move on.

Best with screen: YABER WiFi 9000L

Yaber

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Yaber boasts an impressive 10,000:1 contrast, supplemented by an included SCT screen that improves the image.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, VGA, AV, audio, TF card

Pros

  • Includes projection screen, which is primed for contrast
  • Decently bright
  • Lightweight and portable at just over two pounds

Cons

  • Resolution could be better

Pay for a projector, get the whole shebang? You’ll get just that with the YABER WiFi 9000L, which features a projection screen included in the box. While lots of folks use their projectors on a blank wall, you can demonstrably get a better image with a specially designed projection screen.

The rest of the YABER’s specs are average. It features a 1080p native resolution, and its brightness is better than average but not outstanding. It uses two speakers for decent sound. The WiFi connectivity is a nice touch that may sway some buyers. That, coupled with the 10,000:1 high definition, makes for a good all-around projector that’s a perfect addition to some households.

Best for gaming: WiMiUS P28 4K Projector

Wimius

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This HD projector isn’t actually true 4K, but it does deliver 1080p video at gaming speeds, extra bright 400 ANSI lumens (about 9500 lumens), 10,000:1 contrast ratio, and extra nice keystone correction. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 400 ANSI lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: 2 HDMI, 2 USB, 1 VGA, 1 AV, 1 audio output

Pros

  • Great video quality with very bright and detailed image
  • Relatively low lag makes it worthy of games
  • With a wider-than-average keystone correction capability, you’ll get a more balanced picture

Cons

  • “4K” claim refers to 4K video input which is standard and downgraded to HD
  • Edges of the picture remain fuzzy

Available for a solid sale price more often than not, the WiMiUS P28 fits within the $200 mark for our purposes. While the false 4K advertising is certainly a turn-off, the projector is still a good enough deal to highlight on this list. 

This projector has a classic HD 1920×1080 resolution, make no mistake. The 4K claim simply refers to the projector’s ability to accept 4K video and downscale it to HD, which is common. Still, this projector throws a nice-looking image: It has the highest contrast ratio of any projector on this list, with about 9,500 lumens (rated at 400 ANSI lumens) and claims of a 60Hz refresh rate that should appeal to gamers. That said, the image has some issues; its edges tend to blur, with the middle properly focusing and the corners getting fuzzy.

In the end, this is a pretty capable extra bright projector. But don’t be fooled by the advertising … this isn’t a magical unicorn 4K projector for under $200.

Best budget: Vamvo Mini Movie Projector

Vavmo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its two built-in speakers, 720p resolution, and under 1-pound weight, Vamvo dishes up a budget projector that does a really decent job. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 3,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, SD/TF, AV, USB and RC

Pros

  • Better sound delivery than most at this price
  • Lightweight build makes it a great choice for a portable option
  • Decently bright

Cons

  • Non-HD picture is a bit blurry

For a truly low price for its capabilities, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector is the value pick for budget projectors. This 720p projector still delivers a decent enough high-contrast picture that’s adequately bright in dark rooms at 3,500 lumens, so that it’s effective in moderately dark to very dark spaces. While it advertises its support for 1080p HD, the 720p resolution will mean that high-end pictures do downgrade and lose detail. If you’re just watching the occasional movie in a dark backyard on a DIY screen or sheet, that may not matter very much.

The projector’s speakers certainly fall short of outstanding. Still, you can’t knock the performance here for the price point. It does a better job than most at this level. Overall, Vamvo is a true budget projector. While none of its components outpace the best equipped of the competition, if a low price is your most important metric, then it’s worth real consideration for its decent treatment of all the basics. At about just under a pound, this Vamvo is portable, reliable, and very cheap.

Things to consider when shopping for the best projectors under $200

You won’t get a chance to try out these projectors before you take the leap and buy one, but you can get a good idea of what you’re getting by comparing the specs. Here are some essential features to look for when trying to pick the best model for you. 

Do you need 4K?

4K is all the rage (until 8K finally established itself), and while I type this article on a laptop with a 4K screen, the resolution difference between 1080p and 4K at that scale is subtle. However, a projector is arguably one of the best applications of 4K resolution. Since projectors often cast their image onto large surfaces, the more pixels the projector displays, the better it looks at visual detail. That said, true 4K resolution is currently prohibitively expensive for an “under $200” list.

The difference between 1080p and a resolution like 720p is quite drastic. With a difference of 1080 lines of pixel dots versus 720 lines of pixel dots, you will notice the difference, especially if you’re projecting large. Generally, a substantive price difference separates the standard resolution brackets. So unless you are dedicated to getting the most portable projector out there, the choice should generally come down to budget vs. resolution. Go for the 1080p model unless image quality really isn’t important to you.

Read the fine print

Yeah, you want to believe that companies are being transparent about their products, but there’s a lot of bluster in the budget projector market. Often companies will claim their product supports HD in a header, then reveal that it has a native resolution of 720p, accepting HD video and downscaling it. It’s important to fully examine the specs of the projector you’re considering purchasing to ensure that it’s really the right one for you.

Keystone effect

Keystone correction refers to the illusion that’s created when your projector casts a square image onto a wall at an angle, creating a trapezoid. The shape created looks like the crowning keystone a mason would use to construct an arch. 

Today’s projectors compensate for the keystone effect by including a control that skews the image. This control usually takes the shape of a ring or nob by the focus control. Keystone correction can also be added digitally. 

Some projectors are better at keystone correction than others. But all projectors can benefit from supplementing keystone compensation with proper alignment of the projector against the wall. For permanent installation, getting the projector alignment right the first time is usually a good idea. Whether your projector will be installed permanently, or be moved around the house (or beyond), it’s worth understanding Keystone controls before you make a final decision.

Screen or wall?

Screens can make a huge difference in the image quality you get from your projector. Painted walls often contain more bumps and crevasses than you would expect. Not only do projector screens deliver a flat uniform surface, but they also often come primed with materials that help your projector do its work. Some projectors ship with a screen in the package. Many others would benefit from one. It’s worth considering whether you want to invest in a projector screen.

Luminance

Most of the time, projectors with the highest luminance are better than others for most users. Since projectors work by casting light onto a wall, higher luminance equals a brighter, more visible image, that will show up in half-light settings and on surfaces that aren’t primed for contrast. Usually, companies describe luminance in terms of lumens, which is the International System of Units standard for measuring total light emission over a unit of time. Sometimes, projectors advertise their brightness using the term “ANSI lumens,” a (generally) more accurate metric created by the American National Standards Institute for measuring total light emitted from a projector. While ANSI lumens aren’t directly convertible to lumens without accounting for a few additional factors (such as room temperature and surface color), 400 ANSI lumens roughly translates to a little under 1000 lumens. For this article, we prioritized higher luminance in most cases.

Picture quality and definition 

We’re in the era of 4K, and while a 4K resolution projector is rarely achievable for less than $200 (though we’ve got some great choices starting at $500), HD has become the bottom line in most cases. Many projectors still offer less than 1080p resolutions, and some are still worth considering, especially if you’re stumping for ultra-portability (or ultra-cheap prices). Still, most of the time, 1080p HD is the baseline we look for in a model designed for watching content. It creates a detailed image that does justice to your Criterion Collection binges. Definition isn’t the whole story, though: some projectors warp or blur image edges, skewing the picture. Other factors like contrast and color reproduction can also affect quality. This list prioritizes projectors that achieve image quality that displays the worlds you escape in how the director (or game designer) envisioned them.

Connectivity

At the sub-$200 price point, most projectors use HDMI cables for video connection. A few offer WiFi connections to supplement this. A few even offer Bluetooth connectivity. I factored in a projector’s connection offerings when I evaluated it and highlighted any that stand out from the crowd.

FAQs

Q: Which brand is best for projectors?

At the sub-$200 price point, DBPOWER is the most all-around capable projector. You also get solid support along with your purchase. 

Q: What should I look for in a good projector?

Great projectors under $200 offer solid brightness, which usually delivers 5,000 lumens and up, HD video, good connectivity, and reliable customer service. 

Q: How many lumens do I need for outdoor projector?

No projector can keep up with the luminance of the sun. Projectors that deliver the maximum possible lumens do the best outdoors; in the under $200 category, look for projectors that deliver 7,000 lumens and up, and 9,000-9,500 would be best.

Q: How many lumens is a good projector?

Certain mini portable projectors that emphasize small size can justify low brightness and still qualify as good quality. However, generally, 5,000 lumens and up makes a good projector brightness.

Q: What are the best projectors under $100?

The Vamvo Mini Movie Projector dishes up lean, mean video for under $100. With HD video, 3,5005-lumen brightness, and good connectivity, it’s a steal.

Q: What projectors under $200 work well with PS4?

The WiMiUS P28 is a powerful gamer-ready projector. Its impressive video does justice to the PS4’s graphics and readily keeps up with 60Hz video without lagging. At just under $200, it’s a great choice. If you’re moving up to the PS5, though, you might want to consider larger, albeit more expensive projectors or you’re just wasting all that next-gen game engine.

Q: How long does a projector last?

While so many components factor into the lifespan of your tech. Companies often advertise the lifespan of the LEDs or other light sources that power their projectors. Some are primed to last for 10 years, while others may only deliver about a year.

Final thoughts on the best projectors under $200

The best projectors under $200 offer tuned combinations of value and performance. You’ll find HD video, bright high-lumen LEDs, and solid connectivity at the price point. You can also find ultra-mini projectors capable of projecting from a phone or tablet and easily fit into a shirt pocket. For one of the best value projectors around, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector delivers good video and brightness at a super-budget price. The Wsky HD Projector, with its impressive LED tech, is our favorite for home theater, though you might want to pair it with external speakers. DBPOWER, on the other hand, was the clear choice for the overall best projector under 200 for its HD video, good brightness, connectivity, and a customer service plan and warranty that goes far beyond most on this list. Whatever you pick, enjoy the new dimensions of video and picture quality that your projector will bring to your home media. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best projectors under $200 for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best raised garden beds in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-raised-garden-bed/ Tue, 08 Jun 2021 20:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=368035
The best raised garden beds will help you start growing whether you have a big backyard or apartment balcony.

Put your green thumb to good use and elevate your gardening game in these raised beds.

The post The best raised garden beds in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best raised garden beds will help you start growing whether you have a big backyard or apartment balcony.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Greenes makes some of the best raised beds for gardening. Greenes Fence Original Cedar Raised Garden Bed
SEE IT

This raw, premium cedar planter is built to last, expandable, and is easy to assemble.

Best metal A grey garden structure and it is full of green flowers in it. Galvanized Raised Garden Beds
SEE IT

Grow herbs, vegetables, flowers, and plants in this stable metal garden bed, outfitted with an anti-rust coating and an open bottom for drainage.

Best tiered A wooden garden bed structure in the shape of three steps and it is full of green flowers in it. YAHEETECH Three-tier Raised Garden Bed
SEE IT

This stable and low-maintenance pick allows you to create three separate garden beds to suit different plants and herbs.

Whether or not you’ve already joined in on the grand tradition of gardening, there’s no time like the present to startand a raised garden bed can help. Buying produce at the grocery store is all well and good, but if you’ve had the chance to grow your own, you know there’s nothing quite like the taste of fresh, well-cared-for veggies. It doesn’t get much more farm-to-table than that. Now, with a little time, elbow grease, and some garden tools, here’s how to create the best raised garden beds for your own harvest.

How we chose the best raised garden beds

American food culture is very much devoted to its meat and dairy consumption, but for the past decade or so, the farm-to-table food movement, maybe even the rise of plant-based “meat,” has made major strides in putting vegetables back in the spotlight. While the majority of Americans don’t have the capacity or expertise to become fully self-sufficient, building raised garden beds is within reach for most. Thus, one of the most accessible and rewarding hobbies can enable people to grow their own food, nurture new life, and spend more time outside feeling productive and purposeful.

This is the true gift of gardening: Even if you only harvest a few carrots in your backyard garden, or your flowers don’t all bloom, you still get to witness and partake in the most literal—and rewarding—version of reaping what you sow. In making our recommendations for the best raised garden beds, we considered material quality, durability, customizability, variety of sizes, and price. So whether you’re a novice gardener or an old farm hand looking to learn some new tricks, we’ve compiled this elevated guide to raised planter boxes to help you grow your skillset—along with a tasty bounty. Get started with one of the best garden hoses.

The best raised garden beds: Reviews & Recommendations

It’s no secret that gardening has made a serious comeback. It presents the perfect, practical excuse to get outside—even if only to the backyard. You can grew veggies, nurture green thumbs, and experience the catharsis that comes with getting your hands dirty during planting season. So if you’re looking for raised bed garden ideas, here are our recommendations to get you growing.

Best overall: Greenes Fence Original Cedar Raised Garden Bed

Greenes

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cedar wood
  • Dimensions: 4 feet W x 8 feet L x 7 inches H or 10.5 inches H.
  • Colors: Unfinished

Pros

  • Made from long-lasting cedar
  • Easy to set up
  • Can stack or expand to customize size

Cons

  • Some users were disappointed with the quality of the wood
  • Doesn’t provide much protection from animals

Planting a garden is a way of getting back to nature, so it makes sense that you’d want one of the elevated garden beds free from chemicals and made from sustainable materials. Greenes Fence Original Cedar Raised Garden Bed fits the bill. Made from unsanded 11/16-inch boards of cedar, these raised beds are safe to grow vegetables and herbs in. You can stain them, or they will fade to gray over time.

The boards are also designed for easy, tool-free assembly, with joints that interlock—though you can top off the corners with decorative tops that do require a screwdriver to install. You can pick from options 4-feet wide by 8-feet long by either 7- or 10.5-inches high. And the interlocking design allows you to either stack or expand the open-bottomed frames to create a range of sizes and heights for your garden. You can get a head start on growing with one of the best seedling starter trays.

Best wood: Boldly Growing Cedar Raised Garden Bed Kit

Boldly Growing

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cedar wood, metal
  • Dimensions: 4 feet L x 4 feet W x 1 foot H or 8 inches L x 4 inches W x 1 foot H
  • Colors: Unfinished, will fade to gray

Pros

  • Made from sustainable wood
  • Available in two sizes: square and rectangular sizes
  • Easy to assemble

Cons

  • Little protection against animals
  • Not customizable

This cedar raised garden bed kit has everything you need to kick start your vegetable garden—no tools required. The raw, premium cedar comes in 1.5-inch thick boards that are rot-resistant. You can pick from two sizes: square (4 feet by 4 feet) or rectangular (8 feet by 4 feet). The corner joints make assembly easy, but if you’re not happy with your purchase, the kit comes with a one-year guarantee of satisfaction. Then water your new garden with one of the best garden hoses.

Best plastic: The Lakeside Collection Raised Garden Bed Set

The Lakeside Collection

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Polypropylene (plastic)
  • Dimensions: 45.38 inches D x 45.38 inches W x 5.63 inches H
  • Colors: Brown

Pros

  • Durable
  • Customizable into four shapes
  • Easy to assemble

Cons

  • Not made from sustainable materials
  • Doesn’t provide protection from animals

Convenience is king with this garden bed from the Lakeside Collection. The kit comes with eight polypropylene (plastic) panels that you can assemble into one of four shapes: square, rectangular, octagon, or double height. It’s easy to assemble, and the material is durable enough to last through the seasons. It will work well for growing veggies and as a flower bed. The set is also collapsible and easy to store should you decide to take it down during the winter.

Best metal: Galvanized Raised Garden Beds

FOYUEE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Steel and metal 
  • Dimensions: 8 feet (96 inches) L x 4 feet (48 inches) W x 1 foot (12 inches) H
  • Colors: Gray

Pros

  • Made of weather-resistant, durable material
  • Comes in two sizes
  • Easy to assemble

Cons

  • Only comes in rectangular shape
  • Not customizable

When it comes to garden beds, use an eco-friendly material or risk damaging your plants. Galvanized raised beds provide a good solution, and this galvanized steel and metal garden bed fits the bill. Available in two rectangular sizes (8 feet by 4 feet or 6 feet by 3 feet), this rust-resistant, durable pick will protect your plants without poisoning your crop with chemicals.

Best small: Raised Metal Garden Planter Box

Progard

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Steel
  • Dimensions: 24 inches (2 feet) L x18 inches H x11 inches W or 40 inches L x 32 inches H x 11 inches W
  • Colors: Gray

Pros

  • Made of sleek steel
  • Ideal for small spaces
  • Lightweight and easy to assemble

Cons

  • Small capacity
  • Can’t grow plants with deep roots

If you’re in the market for metal raised garden beds, this galvanized, rust-resistant steel puts this planter box on par with our previous choice of raised metal garden bed, but with a twist: it’s tiny enough to fit in a limited space. With a built-in drainage system and weather-resistant steel, this bed is one of the planter boxes that could easily become home to a thriving bunch of herbs, veggies, or flowers.

Best large: Outdoor Living Today Raised 8×12 Foot Garden Bed

Outdoor Living Today

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cedar wood
  • Dimensions: 141 inches L x 92 inches W x 67 inches H
  • Colors: Brown

Pros

  • Provides growing space for tall plants
  • Self-contained unit
  • Has fence to keep critters out

Cons

  • Involved assembly process
  • Expensive

If you’re looking to grow a bountiful harvest for a family, Outdoor Living Today’s Raised 8×12 Foot Garden Bed can help. At 141-inches long by 92-inches wide by 67-inches high, this wooden structure is a self-contained mini farm with large planter boxes, a walkway, and a door that latches. It’s made of rot-resistant cedar wood, and its height provides the space for you to grow large plants such as tomatoes and beans while also keeping dogs and other small animals out. This raised bed set also comes with a fence to keep critters out. That said, you should consider that assembly is estimated to take four to six hours.

Best tiered: YAHEETECH Three-tier Raised Garden Bed

YAHEETECH

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Fir
  • Dimensions: 47.2 inches L x 47.2 inches W x 22 inches H
  • Colors: Unfinished

Pros

  • Provides three levels of growing space
  • Saves space
  • Unit can also be assembled into three separate beds

Cons

  • Not weatherproof

Ready to launch your micro-farm? Connect each garden bed tier using the built-in plugs, and you’re ready. Added bonus: Each bed is made of 100-percent fir planks, ensuring its durability and quality. The tiered structure allows you to grow different types of plants that might not thrive next to each other. And while you can stack the beds for a tiered setup, you can also easily separate them and have three stand-alone beds instead. If you’re interested in hydroponics, you may want to also consider one of the best indoor herb gardens.

Best with self-watering system: Keter Urban Bloomer 12.7 Gallon Raised Garden Bed

Keter Urban Bloomer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Resin
  • Dimensions: 32 inches L x 14 inches W x 30 inches H
  • Colors: Dark gray

Pros

  • Provides self-watering system
  • Sleek, display-worthy design
  • Good capacity for a unit this size

Cons

  • Not made of sustainable materials
  • Not designed for large yield

If you’re in the market for a sleeker look for your garden that you can maintain even when you’re out of town, consider the Keter Urban Bloomer. This raised garden bed looks modern and works both indoors and out on a balcony. 

The main selling point of this unit is its self-watering system. The unit comes equipped with seedling trays to get your seeds started. The watering system is smart, ensuring plants don’t get drenched (which encourages root rot). There’s also an easy-to-read water gauge that displays in red or green whether you should water or not and a manual drainage cap that lets you release excess water. 

While the resin material isn’t sustainable, the unit is ergonomically designed for easy planting. With a capacity of 12 cubic feet of soil, this raised bed won’t necessarily provide you with a big harvest, but the depth will allow you to grow some taller plants. This unit is also easy to assemble and great for small apartment dwellers getting started with gardening.

Best budget: Apipi Two-pack Raised Garden Planter Fabric Bed

Apipi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Polypropylene (plastic)
  • Dimensions: 11.8 inches L x 11.8 inches W x 9.8 inches H
  • Colors: Green

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Provides depth for taller plants
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide much shelter
  • Wide open for animals to partake

On the hunt for cheap raised garden beds? The award for most lightweight and most affordable garden bed clearly goes to this two-pack of beds from Apipi. All you need to do with this two-pack is unfold each foursome, fill each square with dirt, and start planting. It’s also got impressive depth that will allow you to grow root vegetables like carrots. Easy as pie. That said, this option is also made of plastic and isn’t sustainable. It also doesn’t provide any shelter to protect your plants and won’t ward off animals intent on nibbling your lettuce. But it’s a very affordable way to get you (or your kids) growing.

Things to consider before purchasing a raised garden bed

People have been growing food for thousands of years, so it might seem easy. But in practice, ensuring you have the right setup—including good soil, healthy seedlings, and a protective structure that gives your plants room to grow—is essential to reaping a harvest of herbs or plum tomatoes. Keeping these factors in mind will help you select the best raised bed option for your space and gardening aspirations.

Materials

Wooden garden beds are probably the most classic style you can buy, and they’ve stood the test of time for good reason: They look great, blend in with the natural environment, and you can trust that they won’t poison or otherwise damage your crops. It’s important, however, to choose the right kind of wood when building a garden bed because wood is, obviously, vulnerable to rot. While pine is one of the cheapest options available, depending on where you live, it may not last you more than a handful of years before starting to crumble. A cedar raised garden bed, then, is the best, albeit most expensive, option for a wood garden bed.

If wood is the most permanent option for raised garden beds, plastic is the most temporary. For folks renting, moving soon, or just generally indecisive about where to plant their gardens, plastic wins: It’s lightweight, easy to move around, and super affordable, especially compared to wood.

Plastic has its downsides, of course. It won’t keep its shape as well as wood and might bend or snap under pressure. But it’s cheap to replace broken boxes, and if you have hesitations about where or when to move your garden beds, plastic may be the right material for your elevated garden bed.

Metal garden boxes are by far the most durable: Galvanized raised beds are nearly unbreakable, unlike plastic, and they won’t rot, unlike wood. It’s not a flawless material, though; metal can obviously rust, and it’s both heavy and fairly expensive. That said, if you live in a place that requires extra protection from the elements or prefer an extra-sturdy material, metal is a great option for your raised garden bed.

Fabric might not be the first thing that comes to mind when hunting for a durable, long-lasting garden box. But, contrary to popular belief, certain types of fabric are plenty sturdy to protect your plants and thus serve as adequate garden beds. Obviously, you’re not going to get the years-long guarantee that you might get from some other materials, but what this option lacks in longevity, it certainly makes up for in price.

Shape and size

If you don’t have much in the way of outdoor space, building a raised garden bed is a great alternative. Garden boxes come in all shapes and sizes, and there’s no harm in keeping things small. Maybe you don’t have a backyard, per se, but do you have a balcony, fire escape, front porch, windowsill, or rooftop? Take a look around and search for a creative substitute space. Then, simply find a garden bed that works with what you’ve got. A little ingenuity can go a long way.

Your space

This one’s for the folks who can’t resist doing things just a little bit differently. If you have the space—and a love of smart design—consider veering off course and opting for a tiered garden bed. Unlike the classic one-level beds, these babies can house two or three times the amount of vegetables without expanding their footprint. Also, they are often easy to separate in case you want individual beds. It should come as no surprise that they cost more, but it might be worth the investment if you’re an ambitious gardener with a long veggie wish list.

Assembly

While some raised garden beds can be unfolded and let you start planting within minutes, others may involve hours of assembly. Check what assembly will require, and if it’s not a task you or someone you know can take on, be prepared to figure in the extra cost of hiring a pro to help you put your raised beds together.

FAQs

Q: How much does a raised garden bed cost?

The cost of a raised garden bed ranges from just over $20 for a plastic model that you can just unfold and start filling with soil up to thousands of dollars for a self-contained mini-farm with a door and walkway. Fortunately, there are many options for beginning and experienced gardeners at various price points.

Q: How deep should an elevated garden bed be?

When asking this question, the ground underneath your garden bed is the most important factor to consider. Is it soil or grass, where roots can take hold? Or is it less hospitable to growth? The former doesn’t require much more than tilling and fresh soil, but the latter likely needs around three feet of depth to give your plants enough room to grow fully. 

Q: How to choose a raised garden bed?

Choosing the right raised garden bed for you means considering several factors: for example, the environment in which you live, the money you’re willing to spend, and how many seasons you expect to use the garden box once it’s built. You might find it helpful to start by deciding which material you prefer and go from there.

Q: What is the best size for a raised vegetable bed?

There’s a simple correlation between size and harvest here: The bigger the vegetable garden, the more vegetables you can grow. Before you build your garden bed, start with your wishlist of veggies. Then, research how much space each type needs, and size your beds accordingly so that everything has plenty of room to grow. 

Final thoughts on the best raised garden beds

Nurturing new life in a vegetable garden or flower box is a true delight. Reconnect with the great outdoors, discover a newfound appreciation for food and flowers, and get your hands dirty with the best raised garden beds. You might surprise yourself—and your tastebuds, too.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best raised garden beds in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-telescopes-under-500/ Mon, 27 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451591
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

Looking to stargaze on a budget? We’ve got the goods on the best affordable telescopes.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ is the best overall telescope under $500. Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ
SEE IT

A solid build and specs, paired with smartphone-guided sky recognition technology, makes this telescope perfect for starry-eyed explorers.

Best for viewing planets Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope is the best for viewing planets. Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope
SEE IT

This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for checking out neighboring orbs.

Best for kids Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit is the best for kids. Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit
SEE IT

The entire package is designed to inspire kids during the window where they stare curiously out of the windows.

Telescopes under $500 can provide a passport to the universe without emptying your wallet. In their basic function, telescopes are our connection to the stars. For millennia, humankind has gazed skyward with wonder into the infinite reaches of outer space. And as humans are a curious bunch, our ancestors devised patterns in the movements of celestial bodies and gave them names and built stories around them. The ancient Egyptians, Babylonians, and Greeks indulged in star worship. But you don’t have to follow those lines to geek out over the vastness of the night sky. It’s just so cool. Fortunately, whatever your motivation for getting under the stars, there is an affordable option for you on our list of the best telescopes under $500.

How we chose the best telescopes under $500

The under-$500 telescope market is crowded with worthy brands and models, so we looked at offerings in that price range from several well-known manufacturers in the space. After narrowing our focus based on personal experience, peer suggestions, critical reviews, and user impressions, we considered aperture, focal length, magnification, build quality, and value to select these five models.

The best telescopes under $500: Reviews & Recommendations

To get the best views of the stars, planets, and other phenomena of outer space, not just any old telescope will get the job done. There are levels of quality and a wide range of price points and features to sort through before you can be sure you’re making the right purchase for what you want out of your telescope, whether it’s multi-thousands or one of the best telescopes for under $1,000, or one of our top picks under $500.

Best overall: Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Solid build and specs, paired with the remarkable StarSense Explorer app, make this telescope a perfect introduction to celestial observation.

Specs

  • Focal length: 650mm
  • Aperture: 130mm, f/5
  • Magnification: 65x, 26x

Pros

  • App aids in finding stars
  • Easy to operate
  • Steady altazimuth mount

Cons

  • Eyepieces are both low power

Newbies to astronomy today can have a decidedly different experience than beginners who started stargazing before smartphones were a thing. Instead of carting out maps of the night sky to find constellations, the StarSense Explorer series from Celestron, including the DX 130AZ refractor, makes ample use of your device to bring you closer to the stars. 

With your smartphone resting in the telescope’s built-in dock, the StarSense Explorer app will find your location using the device’s GPS and serve up a detailed list of celestial objects viewable in real time. Looking for the Pleiades cluster? This app will tell you how far away it is from you and then lead you there with on-screen navigation. The app also includes descriptions of those objects, tips for observing them, and other useful info. 

The StarSense Explorer ships with an altazimuth mount equipped with slow-moving fine-tuning controls for both axes so you can find your target smoothly. And for those times you want to explore the night sky without tethering a smartphone, the scope’s red dot finder will help you zero in on your targets. The two eyepieces, measuring 25mm and 10mm, are powerful enough to snag stellar views of the planets but not quite enough to see the details a high-powered eyepiece would deliver.

Best for viewing planets: Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for viewing planets.

Specs

  • Focal length: 1300mm
  • Aperture: 102mm, f/12.7
  • Magnification: 130x, 52x

Pros

  • Great for viewing planets and galaxies
  • Sharp focus and contrast
  • Powerful

Cons

  • Not ideal for deep-space viewing

Let’s be real—most consumers in the market for a moderately priced telescope are in it to gain spectacular views of the planets and galaxies, but probably not much else. And it’s easy to see why. Nothing makes celestial bodies come alive like viewing them in real time, in all their colorful glory.

If that sounds like you, allow us to direct you to the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, a refracting telescope specializing in crisp views of objects like planets and galaxies with ample contrast to make them pop against the dark night sky. The Skymax 102 is based on a Maksutov-Cassegrains design that uses both mirrors and lenses, resulting in a heavy-hitting scope in a very compact and portable unit. A generous 102mm aperture pulls in plenty of light to illuminate the details in objects, and the 1300mm focal length results in intense magnification.

Two included wide-angle eyepieces measuring 25mm and 10mm deliver 130x and 52x magnification, respectively. The package also includes a red-dot finder, V-rail for mounting, 1.25-inch diagonal viewing piece, and a case for transport and storage. Look no further if you’re looking for pure colors across a perfectly flat field in a take-anywhere form factor.

Best for astrophotography: William Optics GuideStar 61 

William Optics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Top-notch specs and an enviable lens setup make this telescope ideal for astrophotography.

Specs

  • Focal length: 360mm
  • Aperture: f/5.9
  • Magnification: 7x (with 2-inch eyepiece)

Pros

  • Well-appointed specs
  • Sturdy, durable construction
  • Carrying case included

Cons

  • Flattener is an extra purchase

Sometimes you want to share more than descriptions of what you see in the night sky, and that’s where this guidescope comes in, helping you to focus on the best full-frame image. You can go as deep into the details (not to mention debt) as your line of credit will allow in your quest to capture the most impressive images of space. Luckily, though, this is a worthy option at a reasonable price. 

The Williams Optics Guide Star 61 telescope is a refracting-type scope with a 360mm focal length, f/5.9 aperture, and 61mm diameter well-suited to capturing sharp images of planets, moon, and bright deep-sky objects. The GS61 shares many specs with the now-discontinued Zenith Star 61, including focal length, aperture, and diameter, as well as the FPL53 ED doublet lens for high-contrast images.

The scope’s optical tube is about 13 inches long and weighs just 3 lbs.—great for traveling with the included carrying case—with a draw-tube (push-pull) focuser for coarse focusing and a rotating lens assembly for fine focus. Attaching a DSLR camera to the Guide Star 61 is a fairly easy job, but note that the flattener for making that connection is a separate purchase.

Best for kids: Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit

Orion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The entire package is designed to get kids exploring space right out of the box.

Specs

  • Focal length: 700mm
  • Aperture: 60mm, f/11.7
  • Magnification: 70x, 28x

Pros

  • Capable of detailed views of moon and planets
  • Lightweight construction
  • Lots of handy accessories

Cons

  • Not enough optical power to reach deep space

Parents have a limited window of time to recognize and develop their kids’ interests. That’s what makes the Orion Observer II such a great buy. Seeing the craters on the moon or the rings of Saturn for the first time can affirm your kids’ curiosity about space and expand their concept of the universe—and they can get those goosebumps while learning through this altazimuth refractor telescope.

The Orion Observer II is built to impressive specifications, with a 700mm focal length that provides 71x magnification for viewing the vivid details of planets in our solar system. True glass lenses (not plastic) are a bonus at this price point, and combined with either included Kellner eyepieces (25mm and 10mm), the telescope delivers crisp views of some of space’s most dazzling objects. 

Kids and parents can locate celestial objects with the included red-dot finder. The kit also includes MoonMap 260, a fold-out map that directs viewers to 260 lunar features, such as craters, valleys, ancient lava flows, mountain ranges, and every U.S. and Soviet lunar mission landing site. An included copy of Exploring the Cosmos: An Introduction to the Night Sky gives a solid background before they go stargazing. And with its aluminum tube and tripod, the entire rig is very portable, even for young ones, with a total weight of 4.3 pounds.

Celestron

SEE IT

EDITOR’S NOTE: Popular Science has teamed up with Celestron on a line of products. The decision to include this model in our recommendations was made by our reviewer independently of that relationship, but we do earn a commission on its sales—all of which helps power Popular Science.

Why it made the cut: With its feature set, portability, and nice price point, this scope is ready for some serious stargazing without a serious investment.

Specs

  • Focal length: 400mm
  • Aperture: 70mm, f/5.7
  • Magnification: 168x

Pros

  • Bluetooth remote shutter release
  • Ships with two eyepieces
  • Pack included

Cons

  • Lacks optical power for deep space

Getting out of town, whether you’re camping in the wilderness or taking a drive in the countryside, is one of the attractions of stargazing. Out in the great wide open, far away from streetlights, the stars explode even to the naked eye. Add a handy telescope like the Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope—our pick for the best portable telescope under $500—and you’ll see much farther into space. The fact that it’s as affordable as it is moveable just adds to the value.

The Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope is a well-equipped refractor telescope built for backpacking and adventuring but without skimping on cool gadgets. Whether you’re gazing at celestial or terrestrial objects, the smartphone adapter will aid you in capturing images with your personal device, with an included Bluetooth remote shutter release.

Designed with portability and weight in mind, the entire package fits into an included pack with a total of 3.3 pounds—that includes the telescope, tripod stand, 20mm and 10mm eyepieces, 3x Barlow lens, and more. Download Celestron’s Starry Night software to help you get the most from your astronomy experience. 

Here are some other options from the Celestron and Popular Science collaboration:

What to consider when buying the best telescopes under $500

Optics

There are three types of optics available on consumer telescopes, and they will help you achieve three different goals. Refractor telescopes use a series of glass lenses to bring celestial bodies like the moon and near planets into focus easily. Reflector telescopes—also known as Newtonian scopes for their inventor, Sir Isaac Newton—swap lenses for mirrors and allow stargazers to see deeper into space. Versatile compound telescopes combine these two methods in a smaller, more portable form factor, with results that land right in the middle of the pack. 

Aperture

Photographers will recognize this: The aperture controls the amount of light entering the telescope, like on a manual camera. Aperture is the diameter of the lens or the primary mirror, so a telescope with a large aperture draws more light than a small aperture, resulting in views into deeper space. F-ratio is the spec to watch here. Low f-ratios, such as f/4 or f/5, are usually best for wide-field observation and photography, while high f-ratios like f/15 can make deep-space nebulae and other bodies easier to see and capture. Midpoint f-ratios can get the job done for both.

Mounts

All the lens and mirror power in the world won’t mean much if you attach your telescope to a subpar mount. In general, the more lightweight and portable the tripod mount, the more movement you’ll likely get while gazing or photographing the stars. Investing in a stable mount will improve the viewing experience. The two common mount types are alt-az (altitude-azimuth) and equatorial. Altazimuth mounts operate in the same way as a camera tripod, allowing you to adjust both axes (left-right, up-down), while equatorial mounts also tilt to make it easier to follow celestial objects.

FAQs

Q: What is the most powerful telescope for home use?

The most powerful telescope for home use from this list is the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, which tops out at 130x magnification with its included eyepieces.

Q: Is a 90mm telescope good?

Yes, a 90mm telescope is good for viewing planetary features like the rings of Saturn and the Great Red Spot on Jupiter.

Q: How much does a telescope cost?

The cost of a telescope varies depending on the brand, model, and construction but there are plenty of affordable options—like the ones on this list.

Q: How powerful does a telescope have to be to see planets?

A telescope with a minimum 60mm aperture has enough power to see planets.

Q: What size telescope do I need to see the rings of Saturn?

You can see the rings of Saturn with as low as a 60mm aperture. 

Q: What size telescope do I need? 

The telescope size you need depends on what you want out of it. This list of best telescopes under $500 gives a good rundown on telescope types, sizes, and uses.

Final thoughts on the best telescopes under $500

Although this group of sub-$500 scopes is fairly diverse, the Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ stands out in our best telescopes under $500 as the best place to start your interstellar journey due to its versatility and sky recognition app, which make for a fun evening of guided tours through the star patterns, no experience necessary. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor misting fans in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-misting-fans/ Wed, 05 May 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=362369
The best outdoor misting fans will help keep you cool.

Escape your air-conditioned cave and enjoy the outdoors, even in peak heat, with these cooling devices.

The post The best outdoor misting fans in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor misting fans will help keep you cool.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best portable Black portable outdoor misting fan Lasko 7050 Misto Outdoor Misting Fan
SEE IT

Take a cool breeze with you wherever you go. This pick can reduce air temperature by up to 25 degrees for camping trips, picnics, or any other outdoor activities.

Best overall Geek Aire makes the best outdoor misting fan overall. Geek Aire Battery Operated Misting Fan
SEE IT

This powerful outdoor misting fan can work both on your back porch and easily travel to a campsite or jobsite.

Best battery-operated Yellow and black battery powered outdoor misting fan RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan Kit
SEE IT

No plug or electricity? No problem. This battery-operated portable mister has an adjustable fan, misting control, and a quiet pump for a cool that can go with you anywhere.

When the mercury soars, you still enjoy the outdoors with some assistance from an outdoor misting fan. Decking out your patio with an outdoor fan can help relieve the heat of spring into summer, particularly when paired with an umbrella or patio cover for an outdoor cooling system. Whether you prefer a wall-mounted option or a portable pick, here are the best misting fans on the market.

How we chose the best outdoor misting fans 

The hotter months can be brutal. They’re uncomfortable, and high temperatures can also be dangerous for plants, pets, and people. It starts with inconvenient sweating that can lead to dehydration. If you stay in the heat without relief, next comes heat stroke and heat exhaustion—both conditions are serious and require medical attention. Keeping cool during spring and through summer isn’t just pleasant; it’s also essential, and an outdoor misting fan can help. 

Sure, just a standard outdoor fan, strategically placed and oscillating, can move air, making a breeze. And, paired with shade, that might cool down your outdoor space. But once summer has settled in with high temps in the 90s, a fine mist added to the moving air will provide more cooling effects. And the best part, depending on your humidity level, is that you usually won’t feel wet from the fine mist blowing in your direction. We considered options from various brands making mister fans to serve a range in compiling our list of recommendations.

The best outdoor misting fans: Reviews & Recommendations

When it comes to cooling off, not everyone can afford an above-ground pool (and they’re not very portable, anyway). Luckily, there’s an outdoor misting fan for every occasion. Depending on your budget and needs, options like a budget-friendly misting fan conversion kit or a cordless misting fan are perfect for a camping trip. For more consistent use, misting fans that use a garden hose and electrical cord are the play. And for high-end outdoor entertainment areas that look like a Caribbean all-inclusive, you can have professionally installed outdoor oscillating fans, just like restaurants use. 

Best overall: Geek Aire Battery Operated Misting Fan

Geek Aire

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.5 inches D x 19.3 inches W x 29.5 inches H 
  • Weight: 23.4 pounds
  • Power: One lithium-ion battery
  • Water supply: Tank

Pros

  • Self-contained unit with tank
  • Powerful
  • Portable

Cons

  • Some users say the battery doesn’t work well

Looking for an all-around cooling solution that you can use on the back porch and take camping? Consider the Geek Aire Battery Operated Misting Fan. This water mister provides an impressive 1500CFM (cubic feet of airflow per minute). Plus, you can rotate the fan up to 74 degrees for maximum cooling. It’s also equipped with two nozzles and a self-contained water tank that can spray mist up to 11.5 feet away. 

Powered by a detachable lithium-ion battery, this fan can provide continuous airflow for 3 to 23 hours, depending on whether you bring backup batteries. The included battery can also charge your other devices. This outside fan also comes with four casters that make it easy to move around your patio or job site but also locks to stay in place. Made of durable metal, this option is also a waterproof outdoor fan and can also be easily disassembled.

Best portable: Lasko 7050 Misto Outdoor Misting Fan

Lasko

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.3 inches D x 16.25 inches W x 14.85 inches H
  • Weight: 23.4 pounds
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Water supply: Hose

Pros

  • Easy to set up
  • Three speeds
  • Pivots 90 degrees

Cons

  • Doesn’t oscillate
  • No stand

The Lasko 7050 Misto Outdoor Misting Fan features overall ease of use with a simple set-up straight out of the box. This outdoor fan offers three airflow speeds in a utilitarian unit (weather, UV, and rust-resistant). The misting fan connects to a standard garden hose (not included) attached to your home’s hose bib. It utilizes an inline GFCI power supply with a three-prong ground plug used in standard outdoor outlets. The GFCI (a ground-fault circuit interrupter to prevent shock) will cut off the unit if a fault is detected, like water getting into the electric wiring of the fan, an important feature to look for when researching misting fans. The Lasko 7050 Misto Outdoor Misting Fan sits directly on the deck or patio and features a 90-degree pivot to adjust air direction. This unit isn’t mounted on a stand or oscillating. However, for those wanting an outdoor mister to complement their patio, this outdoor deck fan may look utilitarian, so decide if cool mist or a cool look is your priority.   

Best battery-operated: RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan Kit

RYOBI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 15.75 inches H x 13 inches W x 10.4 inches D
  • Weight: 5 pounds
  • Power: Battery
  • Water supply: Hose or bucket (not included)

Pros

  • Provides two separate speeds and misting levels
  • Quiet
  • Backed by a 3-year warranty

Cons

  • Battery and charger sold separately

The RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan can be attached to a standard five-gallon bucket (not included) and powered with a rechargeable 18V battery (included). This portable misting fan offers an adjustable fan head with two separate high/low switches to adjust both the fan speed and the water flow. Use it on a full water bucket, or with a garden hose sitting on a level, hard surface for more flexibility (garden hose adapter included), and enjoy up to three hours of refreshment. The 1.3-amp 18V lithium-ion battery is included along with its six-hour charger.

Best oscillating: NewAir AF-600 Outdoor Misting Fan 

NewAir

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 16.54 inches D x 20.28 inches W x 55.91 inches H
  • Weight: 21.6 pounds
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Water supply: Garden hose

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Three speeds
  • Easily portable 
  • Comes with safety features

Cons

  • Some users say some of the components arrived damaged
  • Power cord is short

With three fan speeds (the highest being 2,800 CFM, or cubic feet per minute), the NewAir AF-600 Outdoor Misting Fan cools 600 feet of outdoor space—that’s a patio that’s around 24 feet by 25 feet. This outdoor cooling fan can be used with or without the misting feature, adding more flexibility; this is especially helpful in outdoor dining areas where mist can cool down the food too. The all-metal design adds season-long durability, and the brown finish blends with outdoor furnishings. The wide-angle oscillation movement and an adjustable fan head allow for more cooling coverage. This large outdoor fan is 56 inches high and includes a garden hose connection. Finally, this outdoor mister features an inline GFCI electrical supply for added safety. 

Best handheld: HandFan Portable Handheld Misting Fan

HandFan

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 1.57 inches D x 4.13 inches W x 8.07 inches H
  • Weight: 6.7 ounces
  • Power: Battery 
  • Water supply: Internal tank

Pros

  • Provides three speeds
  • Doubles as a facial steamer
  • Lightweight and ideal for travel

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide lots of cooling power
  • Only covers a small space

When it’s hot outside, but you’ve got things to do and don’t have time to relax on the porch, HandFan’s Portable HandHeld Misting Fan can be handy. At 6.7 ounces, the plastic fan is lightweight but still provides three fan speeds. It’s foldable, so you can easily set it up on your desk or in a fitness class to provide some respite from the heat. The HandFan also comes with a clip so that you can attach it to a stroller or golf cart on a hot day.

This device is also designed with a 17-milliliter (.57-ounce) tank that you can fill with water, turning the device into a mister, personal humidifier, or facial steamer. The HandFan also comes with a USB cable that allows you to recharge it with a USB plug, PC, power bank, or car charger. And its compact size makes it easy to tuck into a carry-on bag when you’re traveling somewhere tropical.

Best wall-mounted: HydroMist 18-inch Shrouded Oscillating Fan

HydroMist

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 17 inches D x 20 inches W x 25 inches H
  • Weight: 27.8 pounds
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Water supply: Hose and pump

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Five misting nozzles to adjust flow
  • Made from durable metal

Cons

  • Pump and water supply line must be purchased separately
  • May need professional to assemble

The HydroMist 18-inch Shrouded Oscillating Fan is a smaller version of its 24-inch misting fan preferred by restaurants. With several metal finishes, it complements your backyard oasis. This outdoor hanging fan features three settings to move air: 3500, 4200, and 5100 CFM. You’ll feel it, but your hair shouldn’t move. In addition to airflow settings, this unit includes five misting nozzles creating the finest mist on the market. The mounted fan requires a 3/8-inch high-pressure water supply line and a 1000 psi (pounds per square inch) water pump, both purchased separately. It can be installed by an experienced DIYer, though you might prefer to hire this job out.

Best budget: HOMENOTE Fan Misting Kit for a Cool Patio Breeze

HOMENOTE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7.2 inches D x 1.77 inches W x 7 inches H
  • Weight: 8.8 ounces
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Water supply: Outdoor faucet or garden hose and tube

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Works with a variety of fans
  • Good for cooling pets

Cons

  • Temporary solution
  • Misting power determined by water flow

The Homenote Fan Misting Kit attaches to an existing stand fan with zip ties (included) and an outdoor water faucet (not included) to make a misting fan for under $20. The outdoor misting system features a preassembled unit with five removable misting nozzles in a ring that attaches to your existing fan with zip ties. The ring is connected to a black 16-foot-long tube that connects directly to an outdoor water faucet or another garden hose, and the flow of the water is controlled by the faucet’s pressure (with no way to adjust the flow at the fan). This is an excellent option for those needing an outdoor patio fan for occasional use, like during a temporary heat wave, or to cool off pets briefly during the summer.

Things to consider about the best outdoor misting fans

The basic concept of the science of cooling starts with an electric fan and a water supply (most likely a water hose). Outdoor misting fans take tiny water droplets and emit them through nozzles directly into the fan’s airflow. Using the thermal concepts of convection, conduction, and evaporation (remember those from your high school science class), a fan with water mist creates a cooler outdoor environment. 

When water droplets move through the air, each removes heat; this is called convection. The opposite is felt when hot air blows in your convection oven, producing even baking. Of course, people don’t like to bake, evenly or not, while sitting on the patio. Thankfully, the water from your hose is cooler than the temperature of your skin (about 98 degrees ). So when it hits your skin, it feels cooler; this is conduction. Finally, the fine water mist evaporates off your skin, giving you a cooling effect; this is evaporation.

Portability

Not that long ago, misting fans were only for commercial installations, like restaurants with outdoor dining areas. Now backyard BBQ kings can find a full range of outdoor misting fans on the market to extend the comfortable cookout season. For those needing a portable misting fan, consider one that needs only an outdoor water supply and an electrical outlet. Ideally, portable fans are used on your deck, patio, or in your yard for temporary cooling relief from the heat.

Charging

Sometimes you end up somewhere quite hot away from home, like at a tailgating party. That’s when a battery-operated portable misting fan might fit your needs. It utilizes a rechargeable battery pack, cutting the cords. The fan unit is designed to sit on top of a five-gallon bucket, which you can fill with water before you leave home if it has a tight enough top. In addition, many support a garden hose as an alternate water source. 

Oscillation

Outdoor oscillating fans bring that circulating pleasure you’ve come to know indoors and transport it to the wider areas of your yard that need relief. A fan head moves from side to side in a sweeping motion, offering more cooling coverage. These types of units can be attached to a stand or mounted to the wall.

Your space

If your home features a well-defined outdoor area, like an outdoor kitchen or covered patio, a wall-mounted misting fan might be your go-to product. Ideally, use this type of fan in an area with a roof to protect the fan unit, which is mounted to the wall and will require both a water and electrical supply line to operate. Also needed will be a water pump to increase the water pressure, producing the finest water mist. There’s more involved, but this is a big step-up from the portable units. 

Price

For those who don’t plan on spending much time outdoors, consider a DIY conversion kit to transform any outdoor-friendly fan into a misting one. These kits are easy to test drive if you’re not ready to dive deep into the misting lifestyle. And this might be the best option for pet owners during the summer, as dogs need a cool place to hide out from the heat, but you might not want to spend hundreds. Just add a cooling mist to an area with shade and a concrete patio, and you can keep your best buddy happier outdoors if you’re away. 

FAQs

Q: Do misters work in high humidity?

Outdoor misting fans work best in dry and arid environments, like the desert. In areas with less than 40 percent humidity, ambient air temperatures can feel up to 30 degrees Fahrenheit cooler. In an area with average relative humidity (40 and 80 percent), air temperatures can feel about 20 degrees Fahrenheit cooler. In high humidity (more than 80 percent), the cooling effect is about 10 degrees Fahrenheit.

Q: Do misters keep mosquitoes away?

Mist can keep flying insects away since they don’t like the added moisture along wind currents. Who likes flying in a rainstorm (bugs included)? Though the water mist doesn’t kill bugs since there’s no insecticide. 

Q: Do misters use a lot of water?

No, most patio misters use one to two gallons of water an hour, depending on the water setting and if your unit uses a water pump.

Q: Can I use an outdoor misting fan inside?

Yes, many outdoor misting fans are also designed for indoor use and can cool the air better than a fan. If it’s a corded electric model, have an outlet nearby. That said, indoor use may not be appropriate for models that get their water supply from a garden hose or outdoor faucet.

Final thoughts on choosing the best outdoor misting fans

If you want to extend your outdoor enjoyment this summer, consider the best outdoor misting fan for your needs and your budget. With options ranging from using an existing outdoor cooling fan and a $20 conversion kit to professional units requiring a water pump, you can cool your outdoor environment this summer for you and your guests by tens of degrees. Don’t forget, your pets and plants will also benefit from a cooler outdoor environment. Who knows, your orchid plant might bloom again. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor misting fans in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric mountain bikes in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-electric-mountain-bikes/ Wed, 27 Jul 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458178
Best electric mountain bikes sliced header
Stan Horaczek

Race you to the top!

The post The best electric mountain bikes in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best electric mountain bikes sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay Carbon 90 has a motor that will pull you up the steepest inclines. Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay Carbon 90
SEE IT

The Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay Carbon 90 has a motor that will pull you up the steepest inclines.

Best fat tire The Juiced RipRacer is made for bumpy rides on level paths. Juiced RipRacer
SEE IT

The Juiced RipRacer is made for bumpy rides on level paths.

Best step-through The Rad Power Bikes RadRover 6 is a bit small, but offers solid power and range in step-through form factor Rad Power Bikes RadRover 6 Plus Step-Through
SEE IT

The Rad Power Bikes RadRover 6 is a bit small, but offers solid power and range in step-through form factor

There are many reasons to take a closer look at electric mountain bikes. Maybe you’re into mountain biking, but you’ve never had much love for the uphill battle that comes before the rush of bombing down a trail. Maybe you simply want an electric that will handle an off-road scramble. Or maybe you’re just a real ebike head and want to try some of the latest tech-laden bikes coming out right now. Whatever box you fit into, the best electric mountain bikes offer cyclists state-of-the-art features and unrivaled all-terrain capability.

How we chose the best electric mountain bikes

As a die-hard outdoorsman and general bike enthusiast, I’ve provided a wide range of gear and tech coverage across a wide array of publications, including Popular Science, the Daily Beast, Runner’s World, Thrillist, The Manual, Popular Mechanics, and more. Electric bikes have become a key part of that coverage in the past few years.

As a result, I’ve spent months riding dozens of electric bicycles and mountain bikes, spanning every specialization and price point, and I’ve come to recognize true greatness from hype. In some cases, those tests were bolstered with additional research and observations drawn from expert and customer reviews.

The best electric mountain bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

Our favorite electric mountain bikes are made to handle a wide range of experiences. Some are made for serious mountain trails. Others are for more moderate off-road endeavors. There are options on this list for every kind of rider.

Best overall: Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay Carbon 90

bikes

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay really ups the torque to amp up its climbing ability.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 720Wh
  • Motor power/torque: 700W peak/108Nm
  • Suspension travel: 150mm front, 140mm rear
  • Weight: 46.6 lbs.

Pros

  • Outstanding motor
  • Great descent handling
  • Responsive suspension

Cons

  • High center of gravity for taller riders
  • Complicated setting navigation

Based out of Vancouver, British Columbia, Rocky Mountain has quietly churned out amazing bikes for years. One of its latest ebikes, the Instinct Powerplay Carbon 90, packs a noteworthy punch thanks to the company’s powerful Dyname 4.0 motor.

With a peak output of 700W and an impressive 108Nm of torque, it exponentially increases your pedaling power when in its top setting. That’s more than enough oomph to get you over the top of even the most severe incline. At the same time, its suspension and transmission provide a smooth, responsive riding experience. It also has above-average battery capacity, allowing for a full day of riding.

What’s more, the Instinct Powerplay delivers outstanding performance over fast-flow trails and through moderately technical trails. I did find that its low-slung stance results in a somewhat high center of gravity for taller riders, and the digital settings can be a bit tricky to navigate if you want to make any adjustments or calibrations. Even with a few hang-ups, though, the Rocky Mountain Instinct Powerplay is a downright thrilling ride.

Best fat tire: Juiced RipRacer

juicedbikes

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The surefooted and powerful Juiced RipRacer is plenty of fun for scrambling over off-road terrain.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 520Wh
  • Motor power/torque: 750W, 80Nm
  • Suspension travel: None
  • Weight: 66 lbs.

Pros

  • Outstanding surface grip
  • Outstanding power
  • Twist throttle
  • Integrated head and tail lights

Cons

  • No suspension
  • Heavy
  • Too small for some riders

If you’re looking for a powerful fat tire ebike for bombing around off-road, the Juiced RipRacer is surefooted, fast, and flat-out fun. While it isn’t built for technical mountain trails, you can have a blast zipping over gravel, dirt, or easy-flow trails with surefooted confidence.

The RipRacer stands apart thanks to a 750W motor that delivers plenty of get-up-and-go and a motorcycle-style twist throttle to let you zip up to speed fast. With an admirable 520Wh battery, you’ve got the power for a full day of off-road fun.

It’s worth noting that, unlike our top picks, the RipRacer doesn’t have suspension, so you shouldn’t take it out on actual mountain trails. It isn’t for extreme ground variations or overly technical trail features. And although its small stature makes it easy to throw it in the back of your vehicle, it’s still a fairly heavy bike.

For fat tire off-roading over uncertain surfaces like gravel, dirt, sand, or even snow, however, the RipRacer is as dependable as they come.

Best step-through: Rad Power Bikes RadRover 6 Plus Step-Through

radpowerbikes

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Powerful and capable, the Rad Power Bikes RadRover 6 Plus Step-Through delivers hyper-customizable performance.

Specs

  • Battery: 672Wh
  • Motor power/torque: 750W/80Nm
  • Suspension travel: 60mm
  • Weight: 73 lbs.

Pros

  • Outstanding power
  • Solid range
  • Twist throttle
  • Some suspension travel

Cons

  • Limited suspension
  • Too small for some riders

Rad Power Bikes has exploded onto the ebike scene with an expansive range of highly capable, highly customizable ebikes. The latest version of its RadRover fat tire ebike perfectly represents why the brand has garnered so much acclaim. With outstanding power and off-road capability, the RadRover 6 delivers an all-around fun riding experience.

With well-balanced performance, the RadRover 6 Plus is fast, especially when you rev it up with the throttle, and offers a solid range. It even has light suspension, making it a bit more capable on uncertain surface conditions. That said, at 73 pounds, it is the heaviest bike on our list, so it isn’t made for steep climbs. In fact, it may be too heavy to fit on your car’s bike rack.

Like all of Rad’s bikes, the RadRover 6 Plus is extremely customizable. You can add front and rear baskets or cargo carriers, bags, center consoles, water bottles, integrated locks, mirrors, passenger seating, fenders, and a whole lot more. You can even upgrade the tires with Tannus Armour for more off-road reliability. You can build the perfect bike for your needs.

Best hybrid: Ride1Up Prodigy XC

ride1up

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for an around-town commuter that can handle the occasional off-road excursion, the Ride1Up Prodigy XC delivers.

Specs

  • Battery: 504Wh
  • Motor power/torque: 250W, 90Nm
  • Suspension travel: 120mm
  • Weight: 50 lbs

Pros

  • Solid performance
  • Surprisingly good suspension
  • Ergonomic stance
  • Relatively affordable

Cons

  • No throttle
  • No rack or taillights
  • Slow charging

The only “cross-country” bike among Ride1Up’s relatively affordable selection, the Prodigy XC is a daily commuter bike that delivers a surprising level of off-road capability thanks to its front fork suspension. It also delivers admirable performance, with a motor that provides plenty of uphill propulsion.

If you’ll use the Prodigy XC as a commuter (hence our “hybrid” designation) you’ll appreciate its ergonomic, comfortable design. However, it could benefit from the addition of taillights and a throttle. This is the sort of bike that you ride to work all week, then pedal over mild-to-moderate off-road trails for some weekend fun.

Arguably the biggest downside to the Prodigy is its relatively lazy recharging time. At five hours, it’s the slowest recharge on our list. Barring that, however, this is a nicely versatile ride.

Best budget: Cannondale Monterra Neo 5

cannondale

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Cannondale Monterra Neo 5 is a competitively equipped electric mountain bike you can get for a competitive price.

Specs

  • Battery: 504Wh
  • Motor power/torque: 250W, 85Nm
  • Suspension travel: 150mm
  • Weight: 53 lbs

Pros

  • Solid handling
  • Decent range
  • Strong motor
  • Relatively affordable

Cons

  • Slow charging time
  • Somewhat heavy

Sticker shock is a common reaction while shopping for an electric mountain bike. Many of our picks, and many others that we tested, cost upwards of $10,000. Mountain bikes are very expensive. Electric bikes are very expensive. Put those things together and you have an incredibly pricey bike. The Cannondale Monterra Neo 5 is not “cheap,” but delivers most of the specs and features you’d want from a modern electric mountain bike at around half the price you expect to pay for a top-of-the-line model. 

Electrically speaking, its motor offers admirable strength while its battery capacity is large enough for a solid afternoon of charging up (and then down) hill. It corners well, has a great suspension, and delivers an all-around enjoyable riding experience. 

Of course, with a much lower price, you can expect there to be a few flaws. The Neo 5 is heavier than our top picks and requires a very long 7 hours to fully recharge. For its price, however, these are easy flaws to overlook. 

What to consider when picking an electric mountain bike

There are a number of core concerns that you should consider when shopping for any electric bike, but certain elements are especially important in electric mountain bikes. You aren’t just looking for an ebike, after all. To provide superior off-road performance, a great electric mountain bike needs superior suspension, a strong motor, and a crazy durable yet lightweight frame, all of which tend to make them more expensive than your typical ebike.

Motor

More than anything, an electric mountain bike needs a strong motor. To literally power up steep mountain trails, you will need a motor that delivers unwavering propulsion, as well as plenty of torque, or rotational force, to pull your bike uphill over obstacles.

To make sure your bike can push you up really steep hills, we recommend a motor that churns out at least 500 watts (W) of power and 60 Newton-meters (Nm) of torque. That’s about double what we look for in a standard electric touring bike.

Range

One thing you absolutely want to avoid is having your battery give out on you halfway up a big hill. That means finding an electric mountain bike with a larger-than-average battery, capable of tackling long uphill and downhill rides that require more energy than the average ebike.

Keep in mind that while you would use a formula for a normal commuter ebike to determine how a specific model’s battery would translate into travel range, you can’t really measure how an electric mountain bike will perform off-road. There are a lot of factors that impact range—rider weight, ground conditions, and “elevation climb,” to name a few—that determining range is already a ballpark estimate that may change from ride to ride. Add in the unpredictable nature of trail riding and pinning down even a rough idea of the range becomes next to impossible.

That said, there is a direct correlation between the size of your battery and how long your ebike will be able to assist you. Bigger is better if you want a bike that will keep you on the trails all day long.

Suspension

Quality suspension, which absorbs the force of your bike hitting the ground after bumping over uneven terrain, is essential to any mountain bike, electric or otherwise. Solid suspension can make even a rocky uphill climb feel safe and relatively comfortable. Without it, any bump could jolt you off your bike.

Suspension is noted in millimeters of “travel,” which measures how far the suspension components allow the frame to move and absorb shock upon impact. We recommend looking for at least 140mm for hard riding.

Please remember that not all the bikes on our list include suspension, as some of our picks are intended for more moderate, off-road riding rather than rugged trails.

Transmission

Your electric mountain bike might be powered, but you still need a quality transmission with a wide gearing range to make it up steep inclines. Simply put, the more gears you have, the more you can reduce the force necessary to pedal up an incline. If you expect to be hitting the trails hard, you want at least eight gears if you’ll be doing any serious climbing.

Weight

Having a lightweight bike is key for trail riding. It makes it easier to pedal the bike uphill and provides more control when you’re zipping back down. For hill-climbers, you’ll want to shoot for a frame that weighs under 50 pounds. We have included a couple of heavier options here, but they’re oriented toward off-roading on level ground rather than steep inclines.

FAQs

Q: Do you need a helmet for your electric bike?

It’s always a smart idea to wear a helmet while cycling, and it’s especially important when you’re mountain biking. In fact, you should make sure to get a special helmet for off-road or extreme biking, as a typical bike helmet doesn’t necessarily provide enough protection for falling off your biking uphill, off-road, at motor-powered speeds. Always look for a helmet with MIPS (Multi-directional Impact Protection), and preferably with some form of face/eye protection like a visor or even a full face guard. Smith, POC, and Fox all make some outstanding electric mountain bike helmets.

Q: Are electric bikes good for hills?

With the right motor and transmission, electric bikes are outstanding for climbing hills. In fact, extra torque power, which allows for better climbing, is the best reason to spend the extra money on an electric mountain bike.

Q: How far can you ride an ebike?

There are formulas for calculating the approximate range of an individual electric bike, but they are just approximations. Even one specific bike’s range can vary from ride to ride based on the rider, terrain, and even the weather. This is particularly true with electric mountain bikes as you’ll usually be riding them through extremely diverse, unpredictable conditions.

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

The biggest hurdle to buying an electric bike is the price. Even so-so ebikes cost around $1,000. As you can see from our top picks, the best of the best feature price tags well over $10,000. There’s a lot of tech that goes into an ebike and that tech tends to be expensive. 

Once you own the bike, the most common downside is potentially running out of power. Electric bikes tend to be very heavy. If your ebike runs out of juice mid-ride, it can be extremely difficult to pedal under your own strength.

Final thoughts on the best electric mountain bikes

Personally, I think riding the trails on an electric mountain bike is significantly more pleasurable than going sans power. Pedal assist practically eliminates the uphill struggle, allowing you to focus all of your energy and enjoyment on negotiating technical features and taking in the trail’s natural beauty. So whether you’re looking for a serious bike for extreme trail riding, or simply want to flow over easy gravel or dirt paths, powering up with one of the best electric mountain bikes is worth your consideration. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric mountain bikes in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garden hoses of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-garden-hose/ Tue, 27 Apr 2021 12:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284433
Keep your flowers happy with one of the best garden hoses.

Keep your yard thriving with the help of these essential tools.

The post The best garden hoses of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Keep your flowers happy with one of the best garden hoses.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Flexzilla makes one of the best garden hoses. Flexzilla HFZG5100YW Garden Lead-in Hose
SEE IT

The durable, kink-free design of this garden hose makes it ideal for washing the car, watering the garden, or setting up a sprinkler for the grass.

Best heavy-duty Bionic Steel makes the best garden hose that's heavy-duty. Bionic Steel 100 Foot Garden Hose
SEE IT

Users needn’t worry about rust, kinks, or even temperature extremes with this impressive stainless steel garden hose.

Best budget Melnor makes one of the best garden hoses at a budget-friendly price. Melnor 86050-AMZ Flat Soaker Hose
SEE IT

Delicate plants won’t suffer damage thanks to this vinyl soaker hose that releases water gradually.

Having the right lawn equipment is crucial when you want to foster a healthy yard, and one of the first tools you should consider purchasing is a garden hose. The options run from lightweight, coiled options designed for smaller yards to heavy-duty models with layers of insulation that are ideal for commercial use. Whether you need something to water window boxes or wash the car, we’ve rounded up the features to look for and our recommendations for the best garden hoses available today.

How we chose the best garden hoses

We conducted extensive product research into more than 40 different garden hoses. We drew on our significant experience from years of yard and garden maintenance when compiling this selection of the best garden hoses. The primary criteria we considered when looking at each type of hose included length, material, and any extra features, like a no-kink design or an included spray nozzle.

Length is a key consideration since a too-short hose might not allow you to water the entire yard; therefore, were prioritized options available in multiple hose lengths over similar ones that come in one size only. We looked for hoses with special features that made watering easier and also factored in the hose’s material and couplings. We then selected products with more durable construction over cheaply made versions. After all, you don’t want your outdoor misting fan’s lifeline to fail you on a sweltering day.

The best garden hoses: Reviews & Recommendations

Shopping for a garden hose isn’t difficult, but buying the wrong length or opting for a heavy-duty model that’s cumbersome to use in a large backyard can easily make you regret a purchase. We’ve rounded up the best options for a variety of situations and price points below so you can make the best decision going in and don’t get soaked.

Best overall: Flexzilla HFZG5100YW Garden Lead-in Hose

Flexzilla

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard garden hose
  • Material: Hybrid polymer
  • Length: 3-, 5-, 10-, 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths available

Pros

  • Lightweight and easy to maneuver
  • Kink-free hybrid polymer material
  • Drinking-water safe

Cons

  • Larger sizes take up a lot of storage space
  • Can be heavy

Home gardeners who keep up with watering are likely to appreciate the kink-free design of the Flexzilla Garden Hose. It’s available in convenient sizes for garden use, including 25, 50, 75, and 100 feet. Its flexible hybrid polymer is drinking-water safe, so users can take a refreshing sip while tackling outdoor chores.

This standard garden hose is lightweight and easy to maneuver, with corrosion-resistant aluminum couplings for a secure, leak-free fit. The only shortcoming is that larger sizes take up much space when fully coiled. But as long as one has room to store it, the Flexzilla is a versatile, dependable, and durable choice.

Best expandable: TheFitLife Flexible and Expandable Garden Hose

TheFitLife

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Expandable hose
  • Material: Latex, fabric, brass
  • Length: 25, 50, 75, 100 feet

Pros

  • Available in four lengths
  • Expands and folds up easily
  • Easily transported

Cons

  • Fabric exterior can pick up dirt

One of the hottest trends in the past few years has been the invention of the expandable garden hose that doesn’t kink. Patios, driveways, or manicured lawns are all prime locations for this style of hose. These fabric-wrapped, rubberized coils shrink to an easily transported size when the water pressure is turned off and extend to full length when pressure is applied. Some of them come with hangable sacks or can be thrown into an unused pot for easy storage, making for the most convenient option if you don’t enjoy the ritual of a neatly coiled water hose. Because the outer sheathing of an expandable hose is absorbent fabric, these are best used around areas that don’t have a lot of dirt or mulch, as the fabric will pick up pieces of debris when dragged across your yard.

Best permanent coil: Water Right PCH-025-EP-6PKRS 300 Series 25-Foot Coil Hose

Water Right

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Coiled hose
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Length: 25, 50, and 75 feet available

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Fun to use
  • Less expensive

Cons

  • Can’t handle a large volume of water
  • Advertised lengths shorter because of coiling

If your gardening needs are simple and don’t require a large volume of water—and you like the aesthetics of a spring-loaded, lightweight garden hose—the Slinky-type coil hose is right for you. These coils resemble the vintage toy that could magically walk downstairs on its own and, if you stay within the 25-foot length, are a dream to manage. Just getting started? Check out our guide to the best raised beds.

Best hybrid rubber: Giraffe Garden Hose 25 feet Lightweight Hybrid 5/8 inch

Giraffe Tools

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Hybrid hose
  • Material: Polymer 
  • Length: 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 feet

Pros

  • Available  in 7 lengths
  • Extremely durable
  • Designed with inner insulation that keeps it flexible in cold weather
  • Strong water pressure of 150 psi

Cons

  • More expensive
  • Heavy

Made of strong, modern materials that can take temperature swings, sun exposure and rough abuse, these hybrid rubber garden hoses are designed for commercial use and can take a beating. Perfect for connecting to a sprinkler and moving over mulch, dirt, and around trees, the classic hose is the most commonly used for residential applications. For other classic garden hoses, try this 50’ option or this 100’ garden hose.

Best for drinking: Camco 25-Ft TastePURE Drinking Water Hose

Camco

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard hose
  • Material: PVC
  • Length: 25 feet

Pros

  • Lead-free, BPA-free, and phthalate-free
  • Resists kinking
  • Comes with UV protection

Cons

  • Only available in one size
  • Material may degrade over time

If you’ve ever taken a long slurp from the end of a hose, you’ll know that they are not meant to transfer drinking water and commonly leave a plastic, rubbery aftertaste in your mouth. There have been advances in technology in the last few years that eliminate this chemical effect. While the prices are higher and the longevity of the hose can be compromised by the PVC materials that don’t stand up to temperature fluctuations with the strength of traditional rubber, if you’re intent on drinking water from your hose—or need an RV water hose for your camper rig—you’ll want to purchase a BPA-free version like this hose.

Best heavy-duty: Bionic Steel 100 Foot Garden Hose

Bionic Steel

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standard garden hose
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Length: 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths available

Pros

  • Impressive weather resistance
  • Crush-resistant aluminum couplings
  • Kink-free and rust-proof

Cons

  • Reduced flexibility

Durability in all sorts of conditions is the main benefit of the Bionic Steel Garden Hose. It’s made of interwoven stainless steel to resist the effects of such extreme weather as sub-zero temperatures and hot, sunny days. The hose also features rugged, crush-resistant aluminum couplings that can be trampled without damage.

This workhorse of a hose is available in 25-, 50-, 75- and 100-foot lengths, and it’s easy to coil for storage. The stainless steel material is rust-proof and resistant to kinks, though this benefit may reduce flexibility.

Best commercial: Gilmour Pro Commercial Hose 3/4 Inch

Gilmour

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Commercial garden hose
  • Material: Rubber and vinyl
  • Length: 25, 50, 100 feet

Pros

  • Incredibly durable
  • Double reinforced
  • Powerful water pressure of 500 psi
  • Available in three lengths

Cons

  • Can become stiff
  • Must be hand-coiled

You’ll likely use a commercial-style hose for a permanent installation instead of casual daily use, but these hoses are built for toughness instead of flexibility. Often extremely stiff due to their double-walled manufacturing, these are typically not suited for roll-up hose keepers and, instead, must be coiled by hand.

Best budget: Melnor 86050-AMZ Flat Soaker Hose

Melnor

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Soaker hose
  • Material: Vinyl
  • Length: 25-, 50- and 75-foot lengths available

Pros

  • Water seeps through the entire length of the hose
  • Gentle water release won’t damage plants
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Plastic coupling is vulnerable to cracking and leaking

Safely hydrate delicate plants with the Melnor Soaker Hose. It’s capped at the end to create the necessary internal pressure for water to seep through its porous vinyl sides. Whereas powerful bursts of water from a standard hose can damage plants, this soaker option gently gives flowerbeds, vegetables, fruits, and other plants the water they need to thrive.

This lightweight garden hose is available in 25-, 50- and 75-foot lengths, and when not in use, it lays completely flat, making it easy to fold and store. The only issue with this Melnor model is that its two couplings are plastic, which may be susceptible to cracking and leaking.

Things to consider when choosing the best garden hose

In addition to length and material, it’s important to understand the various types of garden hoses available. Keep all the following factors and features in mind while shopping for the best garden hose for your needs.

Type

The most common garden hoses include standard, soaker, sprinkler, flat, coiled, and expandable. Different garden hoses may be uniquely suited to specific outdoor duties.

Standard garden hoses run straight, which makes them vulnerable to kinking. They are round in shape and typically use metal or plastic couplings at each end to connect to a faucet or spray nozzle. Soaker garden hoses slowly release water into the garden, thanks to thousands of pinholes along the length of the hose. Sprinkler garden hoses may seem like soakers at first glance, but they have fewer holes, allowing them to function more like a horizontal sprinkler system. Flat garden hoses are intended to reduce kinking. They lay flat when empty but will take on a rounded shape when filled with water. The flat shape also makes them easier to roll and store. Coiled garden hoses have a design that allows them to rapidly return to a more compact, coiled shape after use. This makes it easier to prep the hose for storage. Expandable garden hoses combine the compact storage capabilities of a coiled option with the length and kink-free design of a flat model. It can expand up to three times its length when filled with water and, after use, shrink to its original size for compact storage. The expandable material won’t kink but, over time, may lose flexibility and become unable to expand fully.

Length

While the most common garden hose length is 50 feet, some hoses range from just 10 feet to 150 feet. Take some basic measurements from your outdoor faucet to the perimeter of your yard to determine the best length for the hose.

Keep in mind that the longer the hose, the less water pressure it will have due to friction and drag caused by water flowing through it. So balance the length with optimal water pressure and, if necessary, consider a hose with a larger diameter, which may help you achieve the desired length without losing substantial water pressure.

Material

Garden hoses are made from a range of different materials intended to allow for flexibility while protecting the hose from damage. Common materials include vinyl, latex, rubber, plastic, and various metals.

Vinyl is commonly used for the hose itself. It’s a lightweight, flexible material, though not as durable as other options. These products may also be labeled polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Latex is regularly used to make expandable hoses. It may have a polyester fabric exterior to improve durability and protect the hose from punctures. Rubber is a tough, durable, temperature-resistant material ideal for standard, coiled, and flat garden hoses. However, it is typically more expensive than vinyl. Plastic, commonly used for hose couplings, is more vulnerable to cracking and breaking than metal couplings. Metals like brass, aluminum, and stainless steel, are regularly used to make strong, reliable hose couplings. Stainless steel may also be used to form the exterior of heavy-duty hoses.

FAQs

Q: What is the standard garden hose size?

The standard garden hose sizes are 25, 50 or 100 feet in length—however, longer is not always better. Once you move into the 50-foot or even 100-foot garden hose length, it becomes frighteningly easy to turn the whole thing into a tangled mass of frustration, so keep this in mind if you do decide to purchase a permanent coil hose that’s longer than 25 feet.

Q: How long should a garden hose last?

The best garden hoses should last 10 years or more, but that’s dependent on how well you take care of your garden tools. For example, leaving a hose out in the sun or exposed to other weather elements can cause rapid deterioration and dramatically decrease your hose’s shelf life. If you fully drain your hose after use every time and coil it neatly—kinking can lead to tears and holes—before storing it in a safe place, you’ll get many more years out of it.

Q: What is the best kink-free garden hose?

The best kink-free garden hoses are, hands down, expandable hoses. The design makes it impossible to pinch the flow of water off while you’re using them. 

Q: Does garden hose length affect water pressure?

Yes, hose length does affect water pressure. In general, the longer the garden hose, the lower the water pressure, because as water passes through the interior of the hose, the contact causes resistance, reducing water pressure.

Q: What’s the best way to store an expandable hose?

To properly store an expandable hose, turn off the water, disconnect the hose, and allow it to shrink and dry fully. Then simply roll the hose up and place it in a garden box or a shed, to protect it from direct sunlight and, to a degree, extreme temperature changes. Some products come with a storage bag or hook to keep the hose neat when not in use.

Q: Do I need a garden hose nozzle for my hose?

A garden hose nozzle isn’t necessary when it comes to watering the lawn. Users can simply position a thumb partially over the hose opening to direct water over a broad area. However, a nozzle makes watering much easier to control, a benefit when it comes to fragile plants that could be damaged by anything more than a light misting.

Final thoughts on the best garden hoses

A good garden hose is a backyard essential. Even if you’re not much of a gardener, you’ll likely rely on it for a host of tasks, from washing patio furniture to filling the kids’ blow-up  Made with drinking water-safe materials, the Flexzilla Garden Hose is lightweight and available in multiple lengths so that you can choose the right size for your yard. If you haven’t the space to store a long hose, TheFitLife Expandable Garden Hose is an excellent and affordable option.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garden hoses of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf vacuums of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-leaf-vacuum/ Tue, 25 Jan 2022 15:10:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=279082
A lineup of the best leaf vacuums on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keeping your property clean doesn’t have to be time-consuming or difficult with these handy tools.

The post The best leaf vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best leaf vacuums on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall worx electric leaf mulcher and bag WORX WG509 TRIVAC 12 Amp 3-In-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum
SEE IT

This all-in-one yard tool can vacuum, leaf blow, and mulch, and is less than nine pounds for easy maneuvering and lifting.

Best cordless greenworks leaf blower vacuum with accessories Greenworks 40V 185 MPH Variable Speed Cordless Leaf Blower/Vacuum
SEE IT

This pick offers up to 21 minutes of cordless leaf cleanup time and six speed selections for a customized user experience.

Best for pools Poolmaster Big Sucker Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum Poolmaster 28316 Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum
SEE IT

Keep your outdoor swimming space sparkling clean with this waterproof-equipped leaf vacuum.

When the weather is warm, you won’t think you need a leaf vacuum. There’s just something sublime about long summer evenings, lying in the green grass under a lush canopy, listening to bugs chirp, leaf vacuum safe and sound in the shed. That glory, however, is short-lived. Come fall, you’ll be screaming, leaf me alone, as nature’s debris accumulates and deteriorates over flowerbeds, streets, and neighbors’ yards if left unchecked. Grab that dependable leaf vacuum, however, and you can mitigate an unsightly mess and provide easy yard clean-up. Combining the best features of traditional leaf blowers with a convenient bag system, the best leaf vacuums on the market will save you a ton of effort on your next yard waste removal job and you’ll enjoy a tidy lawn again in no time.

How we chose the best leaf vacuums

We’ve previously compiled a list of the best leaf blowers and best leaf mulchers. We took our knowledge and research from those subjects and applied them here. We also looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research to narrow down our list of the best leaf vacuums. After all, you want something that sucks—in a good way.

The best leaf vacuums: Reviews & Recommendations

When shopping for a yard vacuum, consider the size of the area you’ll be cleaning, as well as the volume of leaves that accumulate annually, to help determine the level of power and capacity required. Many electric leaf blower vacuums and cordless electric models are suited to medium-duty jobs, while a commercial model may be better for sustained professional or high-volume use in larger yards. From leaves in the driveway to debris in the pool, the best leaf vacuums can handle every scenario.

Best overall: WORX WG509 TRIVAC 12 Amp 3-In-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

WORX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An ergonomic design, different modes, and swappable bags allow for easy leaf disposal.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 20 x 15 x 9 inches
  • Weight: 8.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 75-210 mph
  • Power source: Electric, corded

Pros

  • Ergonomic
  • Easy to switch between modes
  • Expandable capacity

Cons

  • Additional bags sold separately
  • Not best for heavy jobs

This electric corded leaf blower vacuum is capable of collecting and distributing leaves and other debris with an airspeed of 75 to 210 miles per hour. This WORX leaf vacuum quickly changes modes at the flip of a switch, and the integrated dual-stage metal impeller allows for an 18-to-1 reduction in leaf volume, making this a fantastic all-around choice for light- to medium-duty jobs. Its ergonomic design weighs in at 8.6-pounds, and it comes standard with a small bag, as well as the option to expand capacity with vacuum tubes and additional bags (sold separately).

Best cordless: Greenworks 40V 185 MPH Variable Speed Cordless Leaf Blower/Vacuum

Greenworks

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Collecting leaves isn’t a struggle, thanks to this leaf vacuum’s easy-to-control design and comfortable grip.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 32.5 x 8.5 x 11 inches
  • Weight: 5.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 185 mph
  • Power source: Rechargeable battery

Pros

  • Easy to control
  • Interchangeable battery
  • Comfortable to use

Cons

  • Two-hour run time might not be long enough to clean larger yards

This 40V cordless leaf vacuum combines powerful blower action and high-performance mulching in an easy-to-control design. A six-speed dial with top airspeed of 185 miles per hour offers plenty of flexibility, and the cushioned over mold grip brings users ample comfort during extended use. It’s designed with a durable brushless motor and includes a 4Ah battery with a charge time of 120 minutes.

Best gas-powered: Husqvarna 2-Cycle Gas Handheld Leaf Blower/Vacuum

Husqvarna

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: 170 mph blowing speeds and a 16:1 mulching ratio means you can decimate your backyard leaves.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 38.5 x 9 x 14 inches
  • Weight: 9.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 170 mph
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Creates fine mulch
  • Easy to start
  • Cruise control

Cons

  • On the heavy side

The combo Husqvarna 2-cycle gas leaf blower/vacuum is incredibly powerful, with blowing speeds of up to 170 miles per hour. When in vacuum mode, it also mulches leaves at a 16:1 mulching ratio, so you can suck up more without worrying about overfilling the bag too fast. Plus, it’s built with smart start technology to start the leaf vacuum with minimal effort. For easier handling, set the variable speed throttle with cruise control.

Best for pools: Poolmaster 28316 Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum

Poolmaster

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Say goodbye to those pesky post-storm leaves with this easy-to-use manual pool vacuum.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.58 x 3.29 x 3.29 inches
  • Weight: 1.82 lbs.
  • Air speed: N/A
  • Power source: Garden hose

Pros

  • Durable
  • Easy to maneuver
  • Won’t scratch your pool

Cons

  • Bag might need changed frequently if dealing with lots of leaves

This Poolmaster swimming pool leaf vacuum is crafted from durable ABS plastic and features eight high-pressure jets that use a standard garden hose water supply to trap debris within a secure mesh bag. It’s easy to maneuver thanks to its four multidirectional swiveling wheels on the underside and has replaceable brushes along its perimeter for dislodging leaves. Because it’s finished with a rubber bumper, you’ll never have to worry about accidentally scratching your pool. If you’d like to find more pool vacuums, check out our pool vacuums round-up.

Best budget: Vpment Corded Electric Leaf Blower

Vpment

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t need to break the bank to do some basic leaf vacuuming.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 14.96 x 6.69 x 7.87 inches
  • Weight: 2.8 lbs.
  • Air speed: 20 mph
  • Power source: Electric, corded

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Powerful motor
  • Small and stowable

Cons

  • Not for large areas

This corded electric leaf vacuum from Vpment has a 400W motor, a durable ABS shell, and a low weight of 2.8 pounds, making this one of the best cheap leaf vacuums on the market. It’s perfect for storing in a utility closet or tool shed and reserving for quick sweeping and cleanup of leaves and dirt in small, confined areas, and it has a wide exhaust area that allows for quick heat dissipation. This design is also suited for indoor work like cleaning up sawdust and other debris from work areas.

What to consider when buying the best leaf vacuums

The best leaf vacuum available generally provides the standard features of a leaf blower while offering the ability to invert airflow to collect leaves in an attached bag for storage and removal. This dual functionality can be helpful when performing yard maintenance, as blowers require leaves and debris to be collected in piles before accumulation or disposal. And it comes in a familiar, ergonomic form for easy maneuvering without excessive bulk. Many blower/vacuum combos provide the added benefit of an integrated impeller to trap and chop debris into smaller, more manageable sizes. Not only does this feature save bag space and allow for more leaves to be vacuumed, it also prepares organic material to be redistributed and recycled as mulch and compost without requiring you to manually collect and break down debris. This feature is highly beneficial for anyone with a home garden or other plants requiring nutrients.

The best leaf blower vacuum is a cost-effective, flexible yard waste removal tool

The best leaf vacuum is a versatile lawn tool, effectively an all-in-one solution for managing leaves and debris, while saving storage space and task time. For example, combination blower-mulcher leaf vacuums use an air duct where a bag or hose can be attached for expeditious processing and collection of leaves (bags are the more portable option, but a hose to a bag or bucket is better suited to high-volume collection). The best blower/vacuum requires much less effort than a traditional rake or standard blower to complete the same amount of work. This makes collecting wet leaves after heavy rainfall—typically laborious and rage-inducing—a walk in the park.

When shopping for a blower/vacuum for yard work, look for a design that offers compatibility with both bags and hoses to assure the best results. This user-customizable feature maximizes the situations in which the blower-and-vacuum combo is useful. A built-in mulcher is also a must regardless of whether you’ll be using leaves in your flower beds, etc., as it drastically cuts down on the volume of leaves and maximizes storage space.

The best cordless leaf vacuum takes the hangups out of yard cleanup

Cordless leaf vacuum designs are championed for most yard maintenance and leaf removal jobs thanks to their portable, lightweight designs. Battery power frees users from the encumberment of cables and bulky gas tanks, while still packing ample power for most medium-duty jobs. Lighter weights also translate to better maneuverability, which is key when you’ll be gathering leaves over and around landscaping, lawn ornaments, wraparound porches, gazebos, and other obstacles. Some cordless models can even be worn like a backpack.

One thing to keep in mind is that the added convenience of cordless models does come at a price premium compared to corded models, and cordless designs also require somewhat frequent recharging. Still, investing in a cordless model can prove to be worthwhile when factoring in the greater mobility and lack of entanglement hazard.

When shopping for the best cordless vacuum, battery life is a critical consideration that can make or break this tool’s usefulness. Variable speeds are also a key feature to look for, as they allow users to conserve battery and only use the amount of power required for the moment at hand.

Got a bigger yard? Go beyond standard with a gas-powered model

A gas-powered leaf vacuum will require more maintenance than an electric model, but it makes quick work of large, leafy lawns. Most gas-powered models on the market are actually leaf blowers with the ability to convert into vacuums by attaching a suctioning tube and large vac bag. They are typically powered by two-cycle gas engines, which should be filled with a pre-mixed combination of gas and oil. 

It’s important to keep in mind that gas-powered leaf vacuums are much noisier than their electric counterparts and that two-stroke engines emit hazardous levels of hydrocarbons. In fact, to reduce environmental damage (and noise complaints), some cities have an outright ban on gas-powered machines.

For leaf removal from water, a dedicated pool leaf vacuum works swimmingly

Pool leaf vacuums are their own class of product, but they perform the same debris removal duties of traditional models … just in water. The collection of wet, submerged leaves and organic debris comes with its own unique set of challenges, so it’s crucial to use equipment designed for this specific task when cleaning out your pool or pond.

The best pool leaf vacuums are designed to function using a standard garden hose and pool pole, creating vortexes of water around a central net to divert and capture leaves and other debris. When considering which pool model is best for your needs, go with a manually operated unit for the greatest degree of control and cost-effectiveness. Many designs include bumpers to protect the bottom and side surfaces of pool interiors from scratching as well, which can save money and prevent unsightly damage.

On a budget? For small, isolated jobs, a cheap leaf vacuum is great

Because these machines are specialized pieces of lawn equipment, it’s generally difficult to find a cheaper model that performs at an acceptable level for most yards. Portability and power along with capacity add to the costs of these units, so most budget models suffer a high drop in these areas and are simply not suited to the demands of most yard work. However, users may still encounter situations in which a less expensive model performs acceptably, such as in the cleaning of an enclosed porch or the removal of leaves from a deck or courtyard.

Be aware that the best model for less is usually corded designs, which cuts down on the bulk and weight of the unit while limiting mobility somewhat. Mulching options are also not found in budget units, so leaves will pile up quicker in the bag and require more frequent emptying. Still, a cheap vacuum may be all you need for small jobs and infrequent use.

FAQs

Q: How powerful does a leaf blower need to be?

Any standard leaf blower needs to be powerful enough to dislodge and move wet leaves and other heavy debris, so a model capable of winds between 80 and 250 miles per hour is usually a good place to start.

Q: Are leaf vacuums worth it?

Having a dedicated leaf vacuum is worth it because it’s a great way to make an easy, quick, and fun task out of the typically time-consuming process of raking. Models that transform leaves directly into mulch are doubly worth it.

Q: Should I get a leaf blower or vacuum?

Leaf blowers only take care of half of the problem and don’t actually aid in the collection, mulching, or disposal process, while a dedicated leaf vacuum provides all those perks. Leaf blowers are great for moving leaves from one place to another but go with a vacuum if you’re looking to dispose of the problem altogether.

Final thoughts on the best leaf vacuums

The best leaf vacuums on the market are unparalleled in their abilities to transform unsightly debris into a mass of usable mulch. A cordless model is more of an investment than a standard leaf vacuum, but is maneuverable and tends to be lighter. If you’re looking for a long-term solution to large-scale yard clean-up, a commercial lawn vacuum might be more suited to your needs. And pool cleaner models are entirely different beasts but serve a very important function if your property has water features. So when trees shed their coat, shed your yard maintenance frustrations with the best leaf vacuum you can find. 

The post The best leaf vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor TVs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-tv/ Thu, 11 Mar 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-outdoor-tv/
man in a hoodie sitting in an old armchair outside watching an outdoor tv
Jordan Koons via Unsplash

Entertain guests with fresh entertainment in the fresh air with a fresh new outdoor TV.

The post The best outdoor TVs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
man in a hoodie sitting in an old armchair outside watching an outdoor tv
Jordan Koons via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall The Samsung Terrace TV Samsung 55-inch Class QLED The Terrace Outdoor TV
SEE IT

This television is IP55 rated and features 4K QLED for excellent picture quality.

Best budget Sunbrite Veranda is the best 55-inch outdoor TV. SunBriteTV 43-inch Outdoor Television for Shade
SEE IT

Its picture quality is high despite its low price.

Best for partial sun Furrion Partial Sun Outdoor TV product image Furrion Aurora Partial Sun Series Outdoor TV
SEE IT

A self-adjusting screen means more time watching TV and less time fiddling with settings.

Whether you’re looking to throw a socially distanced outdoor Grammys watch party, or you just want to watch the latest episode of The Bachelor or RHOBH with a breeze on your face, a TV on the patio is a great way to entertain and get some fresh air at the same time. Most standard TVs can’t withstand the elements, and not all outdoor TVs offer the same level of protection and versatility. Some work on covered patios and decks, while others can handle full exposure to rain and snow. Sunlight makes a difference, and most TVs will fall under one of three categories: shade, partial sun, and those that will offer great picture quality no matter what the conditions are. Other factors to consider when shopping for an outdoor TV are size, sound quality, and price. With so many options out there, choosing the right one can be a little confusing, but we’re here to help you find the best outdoor TV for all your viewing needs.

How we chose the best outdoor TVs

As pool lovers, grill geeks, and float fanatics, we’re excited about everything outdoorsy. We looked at critical reviews and consumer impressions, along with important features like weatherproofing and anti-glare technology, to narrow down the best outdoor TVs. We then took that list, culled through pages of specs and opinions from the most trusted sources, and selected the top six options we’re presenting to you.

The best outdoor TVs: Reviews & Recommendations

From enjoying America’s pastime in prime time to movie nights under the stars, the best outdoor TVs can handle it all. After plenty of research, here are our outdoor television picks. All you’ll need is some popcorn and a cooler full of drinks and you’ll be entertaining in no time.

Best overall: Samsung 55-inch Class QLED The Terrace Outdoor TV

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An IP55 rating and 4K QLED ensure durability and excellent screen quality.

Specs

  • Sizes: 55″, 65″ 75″
  • Resolution: 4K, 8K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Excellent screen quality
  • Intuitive

Cons

  • Decrease in quality at outer angles

With a 55-inch screen utilizing QLED technology, this Samsung TV is our pick for best outdoor TV overall. Equipped with smart TV technology, this TV lets you easily stream your favorite sports and movies without having to buy a separate device. Although its anti-glare technology and exceptional brightness levels mean that it works well on sunny days, you may notice a decrease in quality at the outer angles if you have very wide seating. Overall though, it’s no surprise that Oprah named The Terrace one of her favorite things in 2020.

Best with soundbar: Furrion FDUP55CSA 55″ Aurora Partial Sun Outdoor TV Bundle with 2.1-Channel Soundbar

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This outdoor television combines excellent sound quality with clear audio.

Specs

  • Sizes: 55″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Included soundbar
  • Works in a wide temperature range
  • Daytime and nighttime viewing settings

Cons

  • Pricey

While picture is important for consuming quality content, audio also plays a similarly huge role. This 55-inch outdoor TV offers all the features you’d expect out of a high-end model, including 4K, HDR, and a display that’s rated against weather, temperatures, and even impacts. It also, however, comes with a relatively powerful 75W Bluetooth soundbar that mounts directly with the TV itself. It’s easy to connect and adds serious audio oomph that will really make a difference when you’re trying to watch the latest James Bond movie and birds won’t stop screaming in your yard. Even if you’re not going to use the TV, you can hook up your phone to the soundbar and use it as an outdoor speaker for playing music.

Best for shaded areas: SunBriteTV Weatherproof Outdoor 55-inch Veranda

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A backlit 4K HDR screen and an aluminum case make it a welcome addition to your covered patio.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 55″, 65″, 75″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: No

Pros

  • Durable
  • Multiple sizes
  • Built-in speakers

Cons

  • Is not a smart TV

This model from SunBriteTV is durable enough to live in a shaded area like a covered porch but won’t get damaged by wind, rain, dust, and stray insects. The 55-inch screen is up to 50-percent brighter than your typical indoor TV and comes with excellent built-in speakers. Unlike some of its more expensive rivals, this outdoor screen isn’t a smart TV, but it’s easy to connect multiple media sources to it through its three HDMI ports and single USB port.

Best for partial sun: Furrion Aurora Partial Sun Series 43-inch 4K UHD LED Outdoor TV

Furrion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A self-adjusting screen means less time fiddling with settings and more time enjoying the sun.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 50″, 55″, 65″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Built-in fans
  • Self-adjusting screen
  • Waterproof remote
  • Streaming ready

Cons

  • Not the loudest speakers

This Furrion HDR10 LED outdoor TV is a terrific choice if you’re watching in an area that gets partial sun. In fact, the 400 nits screen will even adjust itself according to how much light it’s getting, so there’s no need to constantly fiddle with the brightness settings. It’s IP54 rated for when it does rain and has built-in cooling fans for when it’s hot. And if your weather gets a bit intense, you’ll be happy to know the screen comes equipped with enhanced protection against scratches and impacts thanks to XtremeShield IK08-rated tempered glass.

Best budget: SunBriteTV 43-inch Outdoor Television for Shade

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This television is hard on the elements but easy on your wallet.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 55″, 65″, 75″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Weatherproof media bay included
  • Powder-coated rust-proof aluminum exterior
  • Easy cable hookups

Cons

  • Sound doesn’t travel as far compared to others

The smallest and least expensive option in the SunBriteTV Veranda line, this unit is designed to be enjoyed in the shade but can withstand rain, snow, dust, insects, and whatever else Mother Nature decides to throw at it. The Ultra 4K HDR LED screen delivers a crisp picture that’s 50-percent brighter than a standard TV and is perfect for patios, screened-in porches, and covered decks. This SunBrite TV comes with a large weatherproof media bay so whatever you plug into it will be protected as well.

What to consider when buying the best outdoor TVs

Before you bust out the snacks at your next shindig, there are a couple of things you’ll need to think about when choosing the best outdoor TV for your space. For example, if you plan on watching your new set under your porch, you probably won’t need a model that offers the same level of waterproofing and anti-glare technology as a full sun option.

Placement

Sun exposure is a major consideration when choosing an outdoor TV. Partial sun models might have some glare, and some will only deliver a great picture if they’re in the shade.

However, the picture might not be the only thing that suffers if you aren’t choosy about your new TV. Models designed to be enjoyed under a covered porch may not be as resilient to extreme weather conditions as ones that are meant to live in a backyard. In some cases, it may be wise to invest in a cover, just as you would for your grill or ping pong table.

TV size

If you want to keep everyone from invading each other’s personal bubble, but don’t want your guests squinting to see the game, a huge outdoor TV will keep everyone entertained and safe at the same time. Plus, if you’re a movie buff, a large TV is terrific for simulating the fun of a drive-in without leaving your home. Just remember, the bigger the TV, the bigger the price tag.

Audio quality

When you’re shopping, make sure you pay attention to audio quality. Some models don’t come with built-in speakers, meaning you’ll have to connect them to something else unless you just plan on watching old, silent movies. Other models come with speakers but deliver less quality.

One way to make sure that you don’t end up straining your ears is to find an outdoor TV that comes equipped with a soundbar. A soundbar (also known as a media bar), is a speaker that is wider than it is tall and delivers superior audio quality when mounted above or below the TV. In a pinch, you could also pair waterproof Bluetooth party speakers with your TV, and then be ready when the party migrates to the pool.

Amount of shade and sun

If you plan on enjoying your TV on a screened-in porch or in a covered gazebo, there may not be a reason to shell out extra money on the latest anti-glare technology. The best outdoor TV is suited for where you’re watching it—there are great options that work in the shade while still offering protection from temperature shifts, rain, insects, and dust.

If you have a covered porch that receives some amount of light but isn’t directly exposed to the sun, consider a partial shade TV. These models will have brighter screens compared to shade-friendly TVs and will offer more protection against glare.

Price

Although outdoor TVs have come down in price considerably over the past couple of years, they’re still relatively expensive compared to standard models. The cheapest outdoor designs are not designed to truly live outside. In fact, some won’t work at all if they aren’t in the shade because the glare from the sun will make it impossible to see what’s on the screen.

If you’re just looking for a TV to watch on your covered deck or screened-in porch, look for options that are durable enough to be (partially) exposed to the elements. And expect to pay between $1,500 and $5,500, depending on brand, size, and features.

FAQs

Q: What is the best outdoor television?

The best outdoor television depends on where you’re going to watch it. The most important thing to consider is how much sun the television will be exposed to because glare can be a major issue if the TV is designed to only work in the shade.

Q: What is the best outdoor TV for a large viewing party?

The best outdoor TV for a viewing party depends on where and how many people are watching it. The most important consideration is sunlight, but if you’re trying to keep your friends and family socially distant, then you’ll need to consider the size of the screen. Another thing to keep in mind is what angle people will be watching it from, as some outdoor models lose quality if they’re not watched head-on.

Q: Do I need an outdoor TV enclosure?

Outdoor TV enclosures are usually designed to keep an indoor model safe when it’s used outside. Most outdoor TVs are built to be weatherproof and can withstand extreme temperatures. That being said, investing in a cover for your TV is still a good idea.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor TVs

Enjoying your television in the great outdoors can be a wonderful change of pace, especially after a year of being cooped up inside. The most important thing to consider when shopping for the best outdoor TV is where you’re going to watch it because different models can handle different conditions. A TV built for shade is not recommended for sun exposure. Likewise, one that is meant to be watched in the sun will probably be wasted sitting under a covered porch.

More TV roundups to help you find the perfect set

The post The best outdoor TVs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best patio furniture in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-patio-furniture/ Tue, 20 Jul 2021 11:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=279756
best patio furniture for dining
Arcwind, Unsplash

The best patio furniture complements your aesthetic, lifestyle, and surroundings.

The post The best patio furniture in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best patio furniture for dining
Arcwind, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best wicker wicker patio furniture set with blue cushions Tangkula Patio Furniture Set 3 Piece
SEE IT

Wicker patio furniture is a timeless, weather-enduring, and aesthetically pleasing pick to complete your outdoor space—this cushioned and sleek set certainly fits the bill.

Best metal cushioned rocking chairs SOLAURA 3-Piece Outdoor Rocking Chairs Bistro Set
SEE IT

Ergonomically-designed for support and comfort, this modern set will endure any outdoor conditions without fading or weathering.

Best budget Outdoor Gear photo Grand Patio Premium Steel Bistro Set
SEE IT

Stylish patio furniture doesn’t need to break the bank—this simplistic and rust-resistant pick is durable, yet affordable.

There’s nothing quite like spending time on the patio. Not only is breathing in fresh air good for your health, but relaxing outside, or laughing with friends and family while you dine under the stars really rejuvenates your being. To be able to do it all in your own backyard is just the icing on the cake. Your particular parameters—from size to climate to your aesthetic—will determine which outdoor furniture suits your space best. The best patio furniture will enhance your outdoor space and your experience.

How we chose the best patio furniture

Shopping for the best patio furniture is an exciting time. Think of your outdoor space as an extension of your indoor space, decor-wise. Once you’ve set it up to your liking, though, be warned: Neighbors, friends, and family won’t be able to stay away. Whether you want patio dining furniture or patio lounge furniture, prefer vintage wicker patio furniture or rustic wrought iron furniture, there are plenty of options. If you like a more mix-and-match vibe, shopping for individual pieces will help execute that vision. On the other hand, if you want a one-stop-shop, there are beautiful outdoor furniture sets to give you a cohesive look. If this area is going to be a focal point in your home and you want to be able to enjoy it season after season, invest in more durable materials. With that said, if you’re on a budget, you don’t need to break the bank. Always buy what you can afford. 

The best patio furniture: Reviews & Recommendations

Best wicker patio furniture: Tangkula Patio Furniture Set 3 Piece

Amazon

SEE IT

Natural wicker patio furniture can be very difficult to care for, and plenty expensive. And the all-weather, synthetic stuff has come a long way. Imagine having your morning coffee, reading the paper or having lunch at this dreamy set made from eco-friendly rattan—a.k.a. synthetic polyethylene wicker. It has the look of the natural stuff but is hardy enough for outdoors—has a pretty weave that can also stand up to any kind of precipitation. So can the all-weather cushions, which are detachable and machine-washable. 

Best metal patio rocking chairs: SOLAURA 3-Piece Outdoor Rocking Chairs Bistro Set

Amazon

SEE IT

This high-quality metal patio furniture set is perfect for your patio, the porch, or poolside. Sure to last, the frame is made of rust-resistant painted iron, the table top is made of tempered glass, and the cushions are quick-drying. The ergonomically designed rocking chairs provide comfort and support, and the sponge cushions—offered in brown, gray, and red—are waterproof and fade-resistant. Additionally, there’s a fixed button clip to attach the cushions to the chair so there will be no sliding off of these bad boys, nor will the wind come and take them away. 

Best plastic patio furniture: Keter Furniture Patio Chairs

Amazon

SEE IT

If you’re a fan of mixing and matching furniture, this plastic patio furniture may work well for you. The chairs come in turquoise, gray, and white, and at 24 pounds each, they’re light enough to move around from your patio to your porch to your fire pit. The maintenance-free resin used to make these chairs is rustproof and weatherproof, so you can enjoy them year after year. As a bonus, there’s a built-in cup holder. Score! 

Best aluminum outdoor set: GDF Studio Nealie Patio 4 Piece Outdoor Aluminum Chat Set

Amazon

SEE IT

This gorgeous patio furniture set is perfect for lounging around with a good book or hosting happy hour with friends. It includes four pieces: a loveseat, two armchairs, and a table. The frame of the chairs is made of powder-coated aluminum, which resists rust and UV light; and the table is constructed from sturdy faux wood. Not only are the thick polyester cushions comfortable and cozy, they’re easy to clean, should one of those cocktails from happy hour spill.

The best cheap patio set: Grand Patio Premium Steel Bistro Set

Amazon

SEE IT

This inexpensive patio set is the epitome of shabby chic. The frame is made from powder-coated steel, making it durable and rust-resistant. While the bars on the seat and back of the chairs are wide to offer some comfort, they won’t be as cushy as the more expensive sets. However, if a cheap patio furniture set that will last for multiple seasons is what you’re after, this is a great option. It’s offered in black, blue, red, mint, peacock blue, and yellow. 

Things to consider when shopping for the best patio furniture

When shopping for the best patio furniture, you’ll want to take a few things into consideration.  You want pieces that fit your space. There is so much available that you can absolutely find something that enhances your yard but doesn’t take over. Ask yourself what you’ll be doing more of: lounging or dining. This will determine whether lounge chairs, a three-piece set, a patio umbrella, or a dining set is the best option. If your indoor furniture is modern, consider extending that to your outdoor domain to create a cohesive style throughout. Lastly, your climate should determine what types of materials you pick, which will then give you an idea of pricing. 

The more weatherproof and durable your furniture is, the more expensive it will be; on the upside, it will last longer. The finer materials withstand climate changes and keep pests away. Similar to your indoor furniture, outdoor furniture can be an investment, and knowing you’re buying quality that will last year after year should ease your mind (if not your wallet).

Fabric and metal

Regardless of whether you plan to put your outdoor furniture in storage during the colder months, you’ll want all-weather patio furniture to withstand all the elements. The three best materials for outdoor furniture are wood, synthetic, and metal. What you choose will be based on your style preferences and lifestyle, as some require more care than others. For something low maintenance, teak wood is your best bet, as it can withstand even the harshest environments. (To maintain its color, just apply a teak protector.) Synthetics, a.k.a. plastic furniture, are the cheapest option. All-weather wicker looks nice and is easy to clean, and metal furniture, especially aluminum, resists rust and moisture damage. An additional way to protect your outdoor furniture is to use waterproof covers when it’s not in use. 

FAQs

Q: Why is patio furniture so expensive? 

Patio furniture is so expensive because of the quality of the materials used. Since the furniture sits outside, it needs to be able to withstand changes in weather; everything down to the screws should be rust-resistant and weatherproof. While it may seem like you’re dropping a pretty penny, your patio setup will last longer if it’s made of iron, aluminum, or teak. 

Q: What type of outdoor furniture is most durable? 

Metal outdoor furniture is more durable than wood or plastics. Wrought iron is the most durable and long-lasting type of outdoor furniture you can buy. It is also the heaviest. It’s been known to last decades, so it’s a great investment that you’ll be able to enjoy summer after summer. A close second is aluminum, which is extremely durable, lighter in weight, and more affordable. Natural wicker patio furniture tends to get degraded by weather the most quickly.

Q: How long should patio furniture last? 

Depending on the maintenance, materials, and climate, patio furniture can last more than 15 years. There’s no exact timeline because there are so many types of outdoor furniture, but you’ll know when it’s time for a replacement:  when the materials start to break down. If you live in a colder climate and don’t have storage space, look into purchasing covers to keep your outdoor pieces protected. 

A final word on shopping for the best patio furniture 

Shopping for the best patio furniture brings you one step closer to realizing your outdoor oasis dreams. Consider what you can afford, but know that this is an investment that could potentially last for nearly two decades! Material is key, but your aesthetic is just as important, so as long as you find something that fits your vibe and is also durable, rust-resistant, and weatherproof, you can’t go wrong. Just be sure to purchase enough seating for your friends and family, because your house is going to become the one where everyone wants to be. All that’s missing is to get one of the best patio heaters, so you can enjoy your outdoor space even when it’s colder.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best patio furniture in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best pool vacuums for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-pool-vacuum/ Mon, 22 Nov 2021 21:20:39 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-pool-vacuum/
Appliances photo

Ready for warm weather but need to restock on pool-cleaning gear? Check out our selection of effective pool vacuums.

The post The best pool vacuums for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Appliances photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Aiper Seagull Pro is the best pool vacuum overall. Aiper Seagull Pro Cordless Robot Vacuum
SEE IT

This cordless, battery-powered robot can clean your pool for up to three hours on a single charge.

Best robotic Dolphin Nautilus CC Plus Robotic Pool Vacuum Cleaner Dolphin Nautilus CC Plus Robotic Pool Vacuum Cleaner
SEE IT

Customize this mostly hands-off machine to clean your pool on your preferred schedule.

Best budget POOLWHALE Portable Pool Vacuum POOLWHALE Portable Pool Vacuum
SEE IT

This lightweight, ultra-affordable pick is easy to assemble and works well in hot tubs.

When you’re picturing long days spent poolside, vacuuming the pool is probably not top of mind. If you have a pool, you likely spend all winter dreaming of the day you can take a dip. But, along with the benefits (and there are so many benefits) of owning a pool, come the responsibilities of upkeep, which can get out of hand if you don’t have the right tools with which to keep your pool in tip-top shape. Case in point? The pool vacuum cleaner, that all-important piece of equipment that keeps the debris out and the good times rolling, all summer long. So get a head start on summer with our picks for the best pool vacuums.

How we chose the best pool vacuums

When it comes to pools, we’d rather spend more time swimming in them than cleaning them. To find the best pool vacuums, we considered the latest models from top brands, including Aiper and Zodiac. We dove into the specs to find a selection of great products. We then considered our hands-on testing, critical reviews, and peer recommendations to narrow down the options to the best pool vacuums.

The best pool vacuums: Reviews & Recommendations

Our choices for the best pool vacuums are workhorses that can cannonball debris out of your backyard oasis. Here are our recommendations for in-ground, above-ground, manual and robotic options, and more.

Best overall: Aiper Seagull Pro Cordless Robot Vacuum

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight, high-tech pool vacuum does all the work for you.

Specs

  • Weight: 30 lbs.
  • Item dimensions: ‎19.6 x 18.43 x 14.5 inches
  • Style: Automatic pool robot

Pros

  • Comes with four motors for extra power
  • Internal gyroscope helps it map your pool
  • Rechargeable

Cons

  • May need a manual nudge in some parts of the pool
  • Some users say it doesn’t charge well

This rechargeable pool vacuum is so decked out in high-tech features that it barely requires your help to get the job done. Equipped with four motors and a gyroscope, the Aiper Seagull Pro cleans up to 3,200 square feet in the three hours of battery power it gets from each charge. This cordless model’s internal gyroscope provides smart navigation that allows the Seagull Pro to map the floor and walls of a pool. The powerful motors offer 130GPM (gallons per minute) of suction while bottom brushes sweep out leaves, dirt, and other debris. The Seagull Pro also cleans walls and the waterline and it’s programmed to stop near a pool wall when the battery starts to drain. Plus, it only 1.5 hours to charge up. Essentially, all you have to do is drop it in the pool, and watch it do all the work.

Best in-ground: Zodiac MX6 In-Ground Suction Side Pool Cleaner

Zodiac

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Leaves and debris are no match for this vacuum’s suction, easy maneuverability, and side cleaning capabilities.

Specs

  • Weight: 6.54 pounds
  • Item dimensions: 40.38 x 8.88 x 14.75 inches
  • Style: Automatic cleaning robot

Pros

  • Automatic
  • Cyclonic suction
  • Can clean floors, walls, and waterline

Cons

  • Can get stuck if the suction isn’t high enough

This small pool robot has the power of a much bigger vacuum, and will quickly traverse the walls and floor of your pool for a flawless clean. Swiveling hoses make for an easy hook-up and assembly, and “cyclonic” suction gives this Zodiac MX6 some serious chops. It easily maneuvers your pool floor using a grooved track design and it can also be used for above-ground pools. Here are some more above-ground pool vacuums options.

Best robotic: Dolphin Nautilus CC Plus Robotic Pool Vacuum Cleaner

Dolphin Nautilus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This automatic pool vacuum has a scheduling timer, meaning it will run automatically when you want it to.

Specs

  • Weight: 19 lbs.
  • Item dimensions: 16 x 10 x 16 inches
  • Style: Automatic pool robot

Pros

  • Scheduling capabilities
  • 60-foot cable
  • Great at cleaning walls

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

Want the best robotic pool vacuum? The Dolphin Nautilus CC Plus is what pool cleaning dreams are made of. Essentially independent, you can program this robot to a weekly schedule, and you’re all set. It’s not completely hands-off, though—you still need to take it out of the pool regularly, if not daily, to empty it and clean out the filters. Also, it weighs 19 pounds, which is quite heavy, and has a 60-foot cable, so it’s not cordless.

Best manual: POOL BLASTER Water Tech Catfish Pool Cleaner

POOL BLASTER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small pool vacuum works with above-ground and inground pools.

Specs

  • Weight: 6 lbs.
  • Item dimensions: 8 x 8 x 18 inches
  • Style: Manual pool vacuum

Pros

  • 45-minute battery life
  • Affordable
  • Rechargeable

Cons

  • Not for deep in-ground pools

Searching for a pool vacuum that can do it all? This small pool vacuum is the ideal piece of equipment if you’re looking for a no-frills, easy cleaning system. Suck up all debris and then recharge for its next use (the battery is designed to run for up to 45 minutes). This model comes with the vacuum head, wall charger, one all-purpose filter bag, and two disposable micro-filter bags. At less than three pounds, it’s also easily transportable. You won’t get the depth of a deep in-ground pool vacuum, or the thoroughness, but you will get a simple, affordable cleaner.

Best for debris: Poolmaster Big Sucker Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum

Poolmaster

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This manual pool vacuum is specifically designed to capture pesky leaves.

Specs

  • Weight: 1.82 lbs.
  • Item dimensions: 15 x 15 x 2.64 inches
  • Style: Manual pool robot

Pros

  • No batteries required
  • Smooth maneuverability
  • Durable

Cons

  • Hose and pool pole sold separately

It’s back to basics with the Poolmaster vacuum; simply attach this cleaner to your garden hose, assemble the vacuum, and get to work. It should be able to pick up large debris, but smaller leaves or dirt might get left behind. The plus side? No batteries mean no time limit, and no recharging when you’re done.

Best budget: POOLWHALE Portable Pool Vacuum

POOLWHALE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Inexpensive and easy to assemble, this handheld vacuum is perfect for above-ground pools, spas, ponds, and fountains.

Specs

  • Weight: 1.2 lbs.
  • Item dimensions: 4.72 x 10.43 x 47.24 inches
  • Style: Manual

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Portable
  • Easy to assemble

Cons

  • Handle feels flimsy

Weighing in at a mere 1.2 pounds, the Poolwhale pool vacuum is probably the most portable vacuum on our list. Because it’s so tiny, it works best with spas and hot tubs, and less well in deep inground pools. It’s easy to assemble, attached to a standard garden hose, and comes with a 6 sections pole of 56.5-inches, making it perfect for collecting stains, leaves, and stones from the bottom of a shallow pool.

Things to consider before buying a pool vacuum

Buying and maintaining a pool is a significant expense. So before you buy a pool vacuum, take into consideration these factors to ensure you make the best choice for your needs.

Type and size of pool

There are pool vacuums that are designed for both above-ground and in-ground pools, and some models will work for both. Look for options designed for your type of pool. Also, make sure you know the size of your pool before you make a purchase. An above-ground pool that’s just 8 feet in diameter and 4 feet deep all around won’t take hours to clean. But if you’ve got a 16-foot by 32-foot lap pool that’s eight feet down in the deep end, you may want to consider a robotic model that can map the surfaces of your pool and that you can program to clean for hours.

Corded or cordless

If you decide to go with a corded option, keep the size of the pool in mind and make sure the pool vacuum comes with a hose that’s long enough. Battery-powered units tend to be lighter, but they might not clean as well as those that plug into an outlet.

You want a balance between a cleaner heavy enough to fight off buoyancy to clean the bottom of the pool but light enough for you to easily lift it from the water. And with cordless models, you’ll also want to figure in how long they clean on a single charge and how long it takes them to recharge.

Suction power

Suction strength is another important measure to consider when purchasing a pool vacuum. Suction power is typically measured in GPM (gallons per minute) or LPM (liters per minute). Look for higher suction strength if your pool collects a lot of debris. Seek out pool cleaners that are easy to clean with a lift-off debris container that won’t drip or drop leaves and other crud back into the water.

Smart features

Do you like to clean your pool manually or do you prefer a unit that allows you to program cleaning times? How about the ability to control it with your smartphone? The ideal pool vacuum will not only clean your pool but fit seamlessly into your life as well so you’ll rarely think about it.

FAQs

Q: How much does a pool vacuum cost?

Pool vacuums can range in cost from less than $25 for a manual version that attaches to a garden hose to more than $1,500 for robotic vacuums that incorporate several motors, sophisticated mapping technology, and long run times. The best option for you depends on the pool you have, the amount of time you want to spend cleaning it, your comfort (or lack thereof) with technology, and your budget.

Q: How long does a pool vacuum last?

How long a pool vacuum lasts depends on the quality of your vacuum; a more expensive model could last five years, while a cheaper one will only make it through a couple of seasons. Your caretaking skills will also play a part—if you treat your vacuum poorly, for example, it’s almost inevitable that it won’t max out its potential lifespan.

Q: Are robotic pool cleaners worth the money?

For those perfectionists among us, a robotic pool cleaner may be worth the money. Here’s why: they’ll nab every last piece of debris in your pool, scrub the tiles, filter the water, and could last up to five or even eight years, so you won’t have to pay for a replacement anytime soon.

Q: Do you really need a pool vacuum?

If you’re reading this article (and have made it this far), chances are you already believe in the effectiveness—and, thus, necessity—of a pool vacuum. If you’re on the fence, though, the answer to this question really comes down to your standards. Do you want your pool to be spotless? Or can you turn a blind eye to the occasional floating debris? Where you live and what you use your pool for can help you answer these questions, and figure out if you really need a pool vacuum.

Final thoughts on the best pool vacuums

Long, loungy days spent by the pool are arguably the best way to experience summer, and a pool vacuum will only make those days that much more enjoyable. Find the best pool vacuum for you by figuring out your priorities—price, efficiency, or technological innovation—and your pool care will be set for years to come.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best pool vacuums for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best tennis balls in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-tennis-balls/ Tue, 14 Sep 2021 20:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=395996
best tennis balls
Billy Cadden

Find a tennis ball that you love for your specific skills and needs.

The post The best tennis balls in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best tennis balls
Billy Cadden

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall All-arounder for training or competition Wilson Prime All Court Tennis Balls
SEE IT

A do-it-all ball with great feel

Best for competition A Wimbledon-worthy ball for neighborhood contenders Slazenger Wimbledon Official Tennis Balls
SEE IT

A world-class ball for high-speed play

Best for practice A super-value option for practice or newbies Gamma Bag-o-Balls Pressureless Balls
SEE IT

Durable balls that will last

Whether you’re a serious player or just starting out, your choice of tennis ball can profoundly affect your game. Modern balls have evolved a ton since the 1870s when players switched to rubber balls instead of leather or cloth balls stuffed with horsehair or rags. 

For speed, the bouncy orbs were made from vulcanized rubber, an innovative material of the time invented by self-taught chemist Charles Goodyear in the 1850s. Soon after, the all-rubber tennis ball was covered with flannel to improve play, followed by a few more adjustments in the design, including moving from a clover leaf construction to two half shells. Now what you have are ingenious spheres for volleying at your best and mastering the art of spin.

How we selected the best tennis balls

Different tennis balls serve different purposes, one of which may be sharpening up your serve. For this roundup, we’ve focused on pressurized tennis balls, which provide superior performance for matches and serious play, as well as one budget-minded pick for pressureless tennis balls since they’re a good choice for beginners, practice, or tennis ball machines. 

But, keep in mind, there is a big difference between popping open a fresh can of three balls and a net bag of practice balls, both in performance and price. When choosing the best tennis balls, we considered value, versatility, and function, as well as the enduring quality of certain brands. While most tennis balls stick primarily to the classic yellow, you’ll find a few options in fun colors for practicing or tossing around the dog park. We considered a wealth of information and reviews from around the web to hone in on the best tennis balls for any player.

The best tennis balls: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: Wilson Prime All Court Tennis Balls

Wilson Sporting Goods

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A classic ball has a well-earned reputation for consistency, durability, and overall feel.

Specs: 

  • 3 to a package
  • Pressurized
  • All-court
Pros:Cons:
  • Durable
  • Lose bounce over time
  • Versatile
  • Not as tailored to hard court play
  • Moderately priced
  • As sports equipment companies go, Wilson is a multi-sport athlete and a utility player. In tennis, they have stood out for their hard-court tennis ball performance. So much so, that when the U.S. Open switched to hard courts in 1978, they became a top pick among the pros. In fact, they’re the official ball of the U.S. Open and Australian Open Grand Slam Championships, as well as the NCAA Tennis.

    Adding to that, these Wilson tennis balls, which are USTA and ITF approved, shows their versatility. It is designed for all-court performance and has added durability thanks to their signature Duraweave felt. You can use these balls for a heated match or a sweaty practice.

    These pressurized balls come in a pressurized canister to keep them fresh and provide that satisfying pop. Wilson actually invented this type of packaging. Once the balls are out of the package, however, eventually pressurized tennis balls lose their oomph and their bounce. Then it’s time to toss it to the dog or use them as dryer balls.

    Best for practice: Gamma Bag-o-Balls Pressureless Balls

    Gamma

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Durable construction and a low price make these excellent for practice or low-stakes matches. 

    Specs:

    • 12 or 18 to a pack
    • Pressureless
    • Suitable for all courts
    Pros:Cons:
  • Inexpensive
  • Lesser performance
  • Long-lasting
  • Lacks new-ball feel
  • Reusable bag
  • You can’t beat the price on these bulk balls—our pick for the best tennis balls for practice. These pressureless tennis balls come in their own handy mesh bag ready to be tossed in the trunk of a car or your garage. While these are definitely a solid, pressureless pick, they are designed for playing when the pressure is off. They’re ideal for beginner’s lessons, a junior league, general practice, or a tennis ball machine. You won’t find these on any championship courts, or even a fast-paced match at the country club for that matter.

    The nice thing about pressureless balls is they last much longer compared to the shorter lifespan of pressurized balls. The pressureless spheres even get bouncier over time. They won’t ever wow you the way a fresh can of pressurized balls does, but they also won’t let you down and go flat. They also channel the “just for fun” vibes into cheery colors like blue, orange, and pink, along with the standard yellow.

    They’re available in packages of 12 or 18, but you can also get a 48-ball bucket if you’re looking to fill a practice machine or a basket. 

    If you’re wondering, why yellow? In 1972, the International Tennis Federation (ITF) chose yellow balls based on research suggesting it was the most visible to TV viewers. (Wimbledon stood its ground on traditional white-colored balls until 1986 when it also switched to yellow.)

    Best for competitions: Slazenger Wimbledon Official Tennis Balls

    Slazenger

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: These high-end balls are worthy of tournament championship play, which makes them more than ready for the local club. Making these balls the best tennis balls for competition

    Specs:

    • 4 balls to a package
    • Pressurized
    • Suitable for soft courts
    Pros:Cons:
  • Superior performance
  • Pricey
  • Meticulous details
  • Degrades over time
  • Four balls per tin
  • This is the tallboy of pressurized ball cans and comes with four balls per pop instead of the typical three. While this brand has the prestige of having been used at Wimbledon since 1902, they haven’t rested on their laurels. (It may even be the longest-lasting sports brand partnership in history.)

    From interior to exterior, these Slazenger tennis balls have improved on their winning design over the decades, including the Tour Core, or a center engineered for maximizing kinetic energy. The outside features a finely woven wool cloth—let’s just call it the cashmere of felt coverings—for increased durability and responsiveness. The tightly woven cloth also features patented Hydroguard technology to repel up to 70% more water than a standard ball for great performance under wet conditions.

    To make sure it’s super eye-catching for players and spectators, the ball gets its perfect yellow hue from an exclusive Ultra Vis dye with a special patented application process. Just playing with these balls will make you feel like a champ.

    Best for hard courts: Penn Championship Tennis Balls

    Why it made the cut: These pressurized balls offer great bounce, but have enough durability to endure fast-paced play on hard surfaces.

    Specs:

    • 3 balls per can
    • Pressurized
    • Suitable for hard courts
    Pros:Cons:
  • Consistent feel
  • Go flat eventually
  • Long wear felt
  • Work better on hard courts
  • Durable
  • Penn holds bragging rights to being “America’s #1 Selling Tennis Ball” (or at least their canister boldly reinforces this claim). They have what it takes to win a popularity contest and be USTA and ITF approved. They’re also the Official Ball of USTA Leagues.

    What sets these Penn tennis balls apart is consistency: They have controlled fiber release for a consistent nap and natural rubber for a consistent feel and reduced shock. The interlocked wool fiber also offers longer wear. While they perform best on hard courts, they’re designed for all-court play, including clay.

    Even if you aren’t aiming to enter the Grand Slam arena, these pressurized balls allow you to try and figure out the tricks for putting a spin on every shot. 

    Best for high altitude: Wilson Sporting Goods Championship High Altitude Tennis Balls

    WILSON

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Regular pressurized balls bounce out of control at high altitudes, but these won’t. 

    Specs:

    • 3 balls per can
    • Pressurized
    • Suitable for all courts
    Pros:Cons:
  • Pressurized for 3,500 feet or higher
  • Only for high altitudes
  • Durable felt
  • Moderate quality
  • Decent value
  • If your ears have ever popped during takeoff or landing, it’s caused by the air pressure in your middle ear and the cabin pressure being out of whack. So, what does this have to do with tennis balls? When you open a can of pressurized Wilson tennis balls, there’s a pop for the same reason. The can is pressurized to maintain the balls’ psi and elongate their shelf life.

    Now, when you go up to a higher altitude, the air pressure drops, which means if you’re hitting the courts in Denver, you’re going to need tennis balls pressurized for being above 3,500 feet—otherwise it could be hard to control the ball since they’ll be bouncing higher and moving faster. When you’re used to playing at high altitudes some players say you need less power but need more control.

    The all-court balls off the same quality as their lower-altitude counterparts, including premium woven felt, they just bounce better when you live at the top of a mountain.

    Things to consider when looking for the best tennis balls

    Pressurized versus Pressureless

    There are two main differentiators between tennis balls, pressurized and pressureless. Pressurized balls are hollow and filled with gas, and they also come in a pressurized canister to maintain optimal psi. In contrast, pressureless balls have a solid core and don’t require special packaging.

    Altitude

    Since altitude can affect pressure, high-altitude tennis balls are pressurized for use in areas above 3,500 feet.

    Type of Surface

    We mostly looked at the best general use tennis balls. However, if you prefer playing on a specific surface, such as grass, clay, or hard courts, this is another factor to consider. The best tennis balls for clay courts are different from those you would want to play on grass or hard courts. Playing a regular ball on a hard court will wear it out quickly. Tougher extra-duty balls have a more durable outer coating to prevent them from deteriorating too quickly.

    FAQs

    Q: What is the longest lasting tennis ball?

    If you’re looking for maximum durability, opt for a practice ball that’s unpressurized. They’re typically made of harder rubber and have tough outer layers to make them last almost indefinitely. If you’re looking for more competitive play, look for a ball with extra-duty felt. The tougher weave will stand up better to hard courts over a longer period of time.

    Q: What is a high-altitude tennis ball?

    These balls are still pressurized, but the manufacturer has adjusted the pressure inside according to the atmosphere. Use a regular pressurized ball at a high altitude and the gas inside will expand too much, making the ball unusually bouncy and hard to control. Using a high-altitude ball in lower regions will feel flat and dead.

    Q: Does the quality of tennis balls matter?

    Higher-quality balls offer better feel and more control, which matters more to advanced players than to beginners. Most players are likely best-suited by something in the middle rather than always playing on unpressurized practice balls or learning on pricy tournament versions. 

    A final word about the best tennis balls

    Tennis balls may all look vaguely the same (apart from rainbow-colored pressureless balls for practicing and the odd one supporting a cause), they’re pretty much all yellow, made of rubber and covered in fuzzy felt. Wading through the sea of tennis balls to find the perfect one depends on your skill level, budget, and where you live. And, if you live above 3,500 feet tennis balls really will bounce differently. Eventually though, all pressurized tennis balls—amateur or pro—go flat, so be prepared to restock. Alternatively, pressureless balls will last until you lose them, but they lack the competitive edge and pizzazz of a pressurized tennis ball. Even people shopping for tennis balls to play fetch with their dog or use in the dryer have favorites, according to user reviews. As a simple rule though, when the pressure is on, always pop a fresh canister. When you’re just a casual player bouncing balls in a park, pressureless ones will do.

    Read Next: Naomi Osaka put her mental health first—and that needs to be normalized

    The post The best tennis balls in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best folding picnic tables of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-folding-picnic-table/ Mon, 10 May 2021 09:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=363398
    best folding picnic table
    Denisse Leon, Unsplash

    The best folding picnic tables let you present outdoor feasts, whether you’re camping, in your own backyard, or running a business—and without taking up permanent space.

    The post The best folding picnic tables of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    best folding picnic table
    Denisse Leon, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best wooden Rectangular, wood folding picnic table with steel frame HAPPYGRILL 3PCS Outdoor Folding Picnic Table Bench Set
    SEE IT

    This table brings the dining table-feel anywhere you go.

    Best metal Metal folding picnic table with double handle and bench set ALPHA CAMP 3-Piece Folding Camping Table with Bench Set
    SEE IT

    This pick is lightweight and stylish.

    Best budget Rectangular, wood folding picnic table with bench 2x4basics Flip Top BenchTable
    SEE IT

    A permanent solution that’s less than $100.

    A folding picnic table is extraordinarily versatile. You can use it as a permanent fixture on your patio or deck, add one as needed during parties or backyard get-togethers, bring it along with you on camping trips, or use it for outdoor businesses such as delicatessens or ice cream shops. There are even kid-sized ones that you can use outdoors or indoors as perfect crafting tables: they’re typically easy to clean, so it’s not a big deal if they get crayons or Elmer’s glue or—gasp!—glitter stuck on them. The best folding picnic tables can fit all your delicious picnic recipes.

    How we chose the best folding picnic tables

    With many folding picnic table options to choose from, though, you’ll want to decide on a few things: material, size, design, and whether or not it has a hole for an umbrella. You’ll also want to look into manufacturers’ warranties and how easy it is (or isn’t!) to assemble, break down, and store when it’s not in use. The best folding picnic table for you will be one that fits your budget, your style, and your desire for portability.

    Being foldable doesn’t always mean an easily portable table. Some so-called portable picnic tables and picnic benches are very heavy! If you need something that you can move frequently, make sure it’s light enough for you to carry (with or without help, depending on whether or not you have someone who will reliably help you) and not too cumbersome. Some foldable picnic tables fold lengthwise as well as at the legs, and some have handles or other features to make them easier to carry. To narrow down our list, we took all of the above into consideration, conducted heavy research, and carried out plenty of user testing.

    The best folding picnic tables: Reviews & Recommendations

    Best wooden: HAPPYGRILL 3PCS Outdoor Folding Picnic Table Bench Set

    HAPPYGRILL

    SEE IT

    As the best folding wooden picnic table you don’t have to worry about assembly with this one; this portable table comes fully assembled. It has fir wood tops on the table and benches, and the legs are made of steel. The benches are separate from the picnic table, and the dimensions of the table are 70 inches in length by 18 inches in width by 29.5 inches in height. 

    Best for a crowd: Office Star Resin 3-Piece Folding Bench and Table Set

    Rectangular, white folding picnic table with benches set

    Office Star

    SEE IT

    With a heavy-duty blow mold top, this 6-foot folding table doesn’t just fold down at the legs; it also folds in half on top so you won’t have to figure out how to store a 6-foot folding table. The folding picnic table benches, too, fold in half, and have legs at the center to stabilize weight, and locking rings to keep the legs steady. This is a very sturdy pick that can fit six average-sized adults comfortably. 

    Best metal: ALPHA CAMP 3-Piece Folding Camping Table with Bench Set

    ALPHA CAMP

    SEE IT

    Aluminum is so lightweight that this whole metal picnic table set weighs just 20 pounds, and can fold up simply like a briefcase with double handles for on-the-go use. There’s a waterproof high-density fiberboard top to both the table and benches for ease of cleaning and to prevent it from being too hot to sit on or use in the heat. The height on this folding picnic table is adjustable from 20 inches to 28 inches, and the manufacturer recommends the set for two adults and two children at maximum. 

    Best without benches: Best Choice Products 8-Foot Heavy-Duty Folding Plastic Dining Table

    Best Choice Products

    SEE IT

    Already have the benches or chairs covered? If all you need is the table, then this 8-foot folding dining table may be just what you need. It’s simple to clean, and it assembles and breaks down easily, with a carrying handle built-in for ease of transport. The 8-foot version is just over 44 pounds (there are smaller sizes available, too) and has a weight capacity of 300 pounds.

    Best budget: 2x4basics Flip Top BenchTable

    2x4basics

    SEE IT

    If you’re even slightly handy, you might want to go for this versatile wood folding picnic table: It’s a kit that includes heavy-gauge resin brackets and you’ll need to add two-by-four pieces of lumber (not included) to assemble the kit. One of the coolest parts is that you can choose the size—you can cut lumber up to 9 feet, depending on how wide you want the bench and table to be. It converts from a bench to a small foldable table using a slide lock, and you can put two together for a larger table that seats up to eight people. 

    What to consider when buying the best folding picnic tables

    Picnic tables have some advantages over traditional patio dining sets. In general, they need less maintenance: fabric seats and cushions from traditional sets wear out over time and can be magnets for mold and mildew, glass tops can shatter and show dirt easily, and metal frames can lose their paint, rust, and degrade to the point of being dangerous to use. In windy conditions, chairs may fall over or become projectiles, and it can be impossible to store a traditional patio dining set in a shed or garage for the winter or when not in use. 

    With picnic tables, there are generally fewer parts to maintain. And when you’re looking for the best folding picnic table, that likely means you’re looking for something you can store when not in use, or take along with you in a car. The ability to store your picnic set will protect it from weathering and degradation for a longer period of time.

    The one main downside of picnic tables, be they portable picnic tables or not, is the lack of back support or cushioning. They may not be the best option for those with back or neck problems, or those who are unsteady. But for most people, picnic seating works fine for sitting down for outdoor meals and socializing. A portable table can be a great investment for your spring, summer, and fall adventures, and if you’re a brick-and-mortar business owner who has the ability to provide outdoor seating, it can be a good addition to your business.

    Related: The best supplies and gear for a picnic, outside of a table.

    Choosing a portable picnic table with (or without) an umbrella hole

    While none of our portable picnic tables picks support an umbrella, it’s worth noting that a table with a hole in the middle can be an option, so read the product descriptions closely. Keep in mind that if you buy an umbrella, you’ll also need a base for it, and those should be fairly heavy—so they’re not the easiest things to carry around. Umbrella bases are often made of cast iron or concrete, or they may be plastic with an opening to fill with sand or water. If you’re looking for a camping option, a water-filled base is likely the best pick for portability: just empty it out when you’re ready to pack up, and the base won’t be hard to lift in or out of a vehicle.

    Patio umbrellas are helpful for several reasons: They protect people from the sun and from light rain, and they can also help to protect your food from spoiling or melting too quickly in direct sunlight. They can also shield your table from bird droppings. And if you use a tablecloth, there are many made with a hole built-in for just this purpose. But an umbrella may be more trouble than it’s worth on a picnic table if you’re doing short stints and breaking down the table regularly. It may also be unnecessary if you have a covered patio or another type of awning or a separate cantilever umbrella. So, without further ado, let’s unfold the best options for folding picnic tables.

    Need some extra space? Look for a 6-foot folding picnic table

    One of the great benefits of a foldable design is that you can afford to get something big, something that doesn’t seem like it would be portable—and simply fold it in half. A 6-foot folding table is an ideal size, giving you enough space to comfortably seat three people on each bench.

    Should I go with aluminum or plastic?

    Plastic and aluminum both have their pros and cons when you’re talking about folding picnic tables. Plastic is sturdy, easily cleaned, and won’t rust. Aluminum is exceedingly light, making it ideal for carrying around. 

    What if I don’t need seating, just a table?

    Already have chairs, benches, or some other seating? No problem—there’s no need to buy a full set that’s just going to clutter up your house. You can also save a few bucks by opting out of the seating element of a folding picnic table setup.

    Are there options for under $50?

    If you’re on a budget, one way to keep costs down is to go for a DIY option. That enables you to create something sturdier and more solid than a cheapie premade kit and can be a fun activity for families.

    FAQs

    Q: What is the best material for a picnic table?

    There are three main types of materials used for picnic tables: wood, resin, and metal. None of the three are inherently the “best,” as they each have different strengths and weaknesses. Wood is the traditional look for picnic tables and can be stained to match other outdoor furnishings, but it also tends to get weathered more easily and need maintenance. Resin is simple to clean and should stay in good shape for many years. Metal picnic tables are generally made of aluminum, which is lightweight but maybe less comfortable to sit on and cause a glare in the sun.

    Q: How much can a folding table hold?

    There’s a wide variation of answers to the question of how much a folding table can hold. It depends on the material of the table and legs, the dimensions of the table, how many supports there are, the thickness of the table, and other factors. The weight capacity should always be available in the product description and packaging.

    Q: How long do picnic tables last?

    uncovered in harsh weather conditions. You can check each manufacturer’s warranty to find out their guaranteed lifespan. In general, wood will weather quicker than aluminum or resin. If you store your picnic table indoors when it’s not in use, you’ll maximize its longevity. If you can’t do that, consider investing in a waterproof cover or shrink-wrapping your picnic table over the winter. 

    Related: Don’t forget a cooler to keep your beverages and food cold.

    Finals thoughts on the best folding picnic tables

    The best folding picnic table can help you to enjoy warm weather days even more, as it allows you to stay outside and eat comfortably, and then pack it up and store the set after you’re done. Whether you choose wood, resin, or metal picnic tables, you have some great portable table options for summertime fun.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best folding picnic tables of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best electric bikes of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-electric-bikes/ Thu, 31 Mar 2022 15:32:16 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=401436
    Best Electric Bikes
    Stan Horaczek

    Power up your bike ride!

    The post The best electric bikes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best Electric Bikes
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Ride1UP Electric Bicycle Ride1UP Rift
    SEE IT

    The Ride1UP Rift is an outstanding electric bicycle bike whether you’re headed to work or joyriding around town.

    Best budget Ancheer Blue Spark Ancheer Blue Spark
    SEE IT

    Offering all the basic ebike elements at a lower cost, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great budget ebike.

    Fastest Best Electric Bikes Priority Current
    SEE IT

    The Priority Current gets up to max speed quickly and maintains that speed once it gets there.

    While electric bikes have existed in some form or another for more than a century, the modern version was properly introduced in the 1990s—to little fanfare. At the time, they were considered something of a novelty and failed to generate much interest. That changed in the 2000s, when ebikes took off in China. In the last 10 years, the rest of us have come around: There are countless ebikes now, which come in configurations to suit every rider’s needs. But with so many to choose from, how do you pick the one that will put you out in front of the pack? The best electric bikes deliver power (duh), comfort, style, and smart features, whether you’re riding for sport, for work, or simply as a way to get around.

    How we selected the best electric bikes

    As a lifelong outdoor and fitness enthusiast, bicycling has always been a part of my recreational repertoire. From daily commuting to work via road bike to mountain biking through the rurals of my native state of Washington, I’ve spent more than my fair share of time perched upon the pedals. When it came to electric bikes in particular, I took the testing very seriously—by which I mean I had a lot of fun riding around! At this point, I’ve ridden ebikes from an expansive range of brands both renowned and up-and-coming, have discussed the pros and cons of different options with industry experts, and have even built several of them piece by piece straight out of the box.

    I’ve written about outdoor and fitness gear, including electric bikes, for publications like Popular Mechanics, Runner’s World, the Manual, Thrillist, the Daily Beast, and the Los Angeles Times. All that testing has made me an expert at recognizing genuine quality over hype. In categories where my judgment was a tie, I looked to impressions from real-world owners to verify which ebikes deliver a truly electrifying experience.

    The best electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

    Our selections for the best electric bikes span a spectrum of budgets, from several hundred dollars to several thousand. We’ve included ebikes from a variety of categories that include a fairly wide range of features, so while which is right for you is determined largely by your specific needs, we think the options below cover the bases for most new and veteran riders.

    Best overall: Ride1Up Rift

    Brandt Ranj

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Ride1UP’s Rift is easy to assemble and feels smooth to ride.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 52V 20 Ah
    • Range: 45-60 miles
    • Motor: Hub
    • Class: 2-3

    Pros

    • Easy to assemble
    • Solid frame and overall construction
    • Comfortable to ride
    • Cost

    Cons

    • Weight

    After a few rides I began to see Ride1UP’s Rift as wish fulfillment for anyone who’s been curious about electric bicycles. The Rift was almost fully assembled when it arrived, which is very helpful if you’ve never put together an electric bicycle. We recommend following Ride1Up’s video instructions for a step-by-step guide on what’s required to put it together. It’s possible to assemble this bicycle by yourself, but it’s far easier for two people since one can keep the Rift steady, or lift up its frame while the other attaches its front wheel. The one accessory you’ll need when assembling any eBike—beyond the correct tools—is an air compressor to fill its tires.

    Once the bicycle was set up, and a helmet was firmly strapped to my head, it was time to take the Rift for a ride on the suburban streets of Long Island. The area I rode on was paved but hilly, and it gave me the chance to put this electric bicycle’s motor to the test. I started by riding around without any “pedal assistance,” to get a feel for how the Rift handled. It’s a heavy electric bicycle, but after a couple of minutes I had a good handle on how to take wide and sharper turns, or how its fat tires would handle bumps in the road, hoses, or smaller potholes.

    None of these smaller obstacles posed a problem thanks to the Rift’s fat tires, though we wouldn’t recommend going over huge bumps just for fun. Ride1UP recommends checking the bicycle’s brakes several times before taking it for a ride to make sure they’re fully operational, and these small test rides gave me the opportunity to do so—though I also checked them before getting on the Rift for the first time.

    All of the Rift’s pedal assistance features are accessible via a 2.2-inch color screen mounted on the left handlebar. It’s easy to check your trip time, power consumption, and pedal assistance level (between one and five) at a glance. You shouldn’t be spending a lot of time looking at the screen while riding, so we appreciate how cleanly this information is arranged. As its name suggests, pedal assistance will only kick in when you’re pedaling. The electric bicycle’s motor will kick on after a few seconds, which gives you time to adjust to the increase in speed. Settings one and two feel like a nice little push while you’re going up hills—enough of a boost to make them easier to climb while still requiring effort.

    Cranking the Rift’s pedal assistance up to four or five will turn pedaling into a performative act. We were able to get up steep hills with ease, but always felt completely in control of the bicycle. Yes, the Rift can up to 28 miles per hour with pedal assistance cranked up to five, but we never felt like we were going too quickly. If you’ve never used an electric bicycle before we recommend sticking to the lower power levels to start and working your way up.

    Overall, the Ride1UP Rift is a stupendously smooth ride whether you’re upgrading from a different electric bicycle or have always ridden an analog bike. It strikes the right balance between easy assembly, ease of use, comfort, and overall design.

    Best fat tire: Juiced RipCurrent S

    Juiced Bikes

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: TheJuiced RipCurrent S is powerful, comfortable, and stylish.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 52V 19.2 Ah
    • Range: 40-120 miles
    • Motor: Hub
    • Class: 3

    Pros

    • Better than average range
    • Super comfortable seating and handlebars
    • Awesome throttle
    • Rack, fenders, and powerful headlight included

    Cons

    • Very heavy

    Before you even start riding, the Juiced RipCurrent S delivers a favorable impression. It looks amazing, boasting an aesthetic that fuses classic road-bike elements with a modern tech edge. The seat is highly comfortable, the handlebars ergonomic, and the overall build quality is immediately evident.

    Once you’ve started down the road, you’ll quickly realize why the RipCurrent S excels to the head of the pack. Its thumb-controlled throttle is smooth and powerful, capable of propelling you up to 28 MPH with minimal pedaling exertion. The 9-speed cassette gears shift crisply, and as you’re charging ahead you’ll enjoy a supremely smooth ride.

    All of that is great, but perhaps most important is the RipCurrent S’s outstanding electrical performance. With a range that spans 40 to 120 miles depending on how hard you push it, I tested the RipCurrent while riding alongside several other ebikes and this one accelerated faster than most and outlasted them all.

    What’s more, with its sturdy, integrated carrying rack, an uber-bright headlight, and fenders, bell, and tail light included, the RipCurrent S has pretty much all the features any typical rider would need.

    All in all, the Juiced RipCurrent S is a truly superior ebike. It’s ideal for daily commutes, and thanks to its front air suspension and fat tires it’s even fairly off-road capable.

    Best cargo: RadPower RadWagon 4

    RadPower

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: RadPower’s ebikes are all solid, but their RadWagon 4 is an unparalleled cargo hauler.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 48V 14Ah
    • Range: 25-50
    • Motor: Hub
    • Class 2

    Pros

    • Massive cargo carrier
    • Twist-grip, motorcycle-style throttle
    • Surprisingly good acceleration
    • Highly adjustable seating and handlebars

    Cons

    • All that cargo capacity does reduce the range

    Generally speaking, RadPower’s electric bikes all offer the utmost in durability, comfort, adjustability, and customization options. Our favorite design, the RadWagon 4, takes things a step further by tacking on a massive cargo carrier and powerful motor. I’ve seen people carry everything from a week’s worth of groceries to musical gear to multiple child safety seats on this thing.

    At the same time, the RadWagon delivers an all-around comfortable, downright fun riding experience. Its seating and handlebars are comfortable and are highly adjustable to suit your preferences, and it’s got a slew of slick customization options. I’m particularly enamored by their front-end basket and the twist-grip throttle, which provides ample acceleration.

    As with other cargo bikes, the extra power needed to carry its cargo translates to a shorter range than other models, but its battery life is still very solid.

    Best off-road: QuietKat Jeep

    QuietKat

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The QuietKat Jeep delivers true go-anywhere capability.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 48V 14.5Ah
    • Range: Up to 58 miles
    • Motor: Mid-drive
    • Class: Configurable as both 1 and 2

    Pros

    • Superior off-road ability
    • Outstanding suspension
    • Removable thumb throttle
    • Ultra-durable

    Cons

    • Somewhat limited range

    It should come as no surprise that one of the most capable (if not the most capable) off-roading ebike was inspired and cosigned by Jeep. With its high-grip fat tires, advanced torque sensor motor system, powerful brakes, outstanding suspension, and peak power output of 1,500 watts, the QuietKat Jeep is genuinely capable of going just about anywhere. That includes everything from hardpacked trails, to soft sand, and even snow.

    The QuietKat Jeep is all about performance and capability. The company’s four-bar link, Fire-Link suspension system optimizes ground contact, the motor is designed to provide bursts of power and torque when pushed to overcome obstacles, and the whole thing is designed to carry plenty of weight—both human and cargo.

    Speaking of cargo, one of the coolest and most unique things offered by the Jeep is its various cargo kits. The Angler’s Kit includes a gear trailer, premium suspension seat post, and Gore cargo cooler. The Overland Kit boasts a Tannus Armour Tire Liner, portable ebike solar charging system, and a bike rack tailored to fat-tire bikes. And the Ultimate Hunter Kit fuses the town, offering the tire liner, premium suspension seat post, fat tire bike rack, and a cargo trailer.

    Best for speed: Priority Current

    Priority Bicycles

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Priority Current seems sparse at a glance, but the more you put in, the more it puts out.

    Specs

    • Battery Capacity: 48V 10.4 Ah
    • Range: 20-50 miles (in Class 1 setting)
    • Motor: Mid-drive
    • Class: 1 or 3

    Pros

    • Great looks
    • Class 3 capability
    • Integrated USB charger for devices
    • Enviolo CVT shifter option

    Cons

    • Limited range
    • LCD screen looks big but does little
    • No throttle

    I’ll start out by saying that the use of the word “fastest” can be a little misleading with electric bikes, as the fastest any of them can go under motor power—legally—is 28 MPH. The Priority Current earns the distinction for getting up to max speed very quickly and maintaining that speed once it gets there. While the Current has no throttle, its pedal assistance is undeniably powerful. The more you put into pedaling it, the more it will put out.

    The Current comes in Class 1 out of the box, but you can easily change the settings and upgrade to Class 3 via an onboard digital display. When choosing your Current you can go with either a classic Shimano 5-gear shifter or pay a bit more for the Enviolo CVT—a super-smooth transmission system that is in gear no matter how you shift it and can be easily adjusted to suit your terrain via a little gauge indicating flatness vs. hilliness. It also has a super-durable belt drive and an integrated USB outlet for charging devices on the go.

    The Current doesn’t have a top-tier range, which may be an issue for long-distance riders. Without Priority’s battery extender, it realistically tops out at around 30 miles. But the Current shines in regards to the overall design, offering an attractive, classically minimalist vibe, and a durable build quality that can go a long way with little to no maintenance.

    Best commuter: VanMoof S3

    VanMoof

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for a slick, smooth, all-around cool ebike for your daily commute, the VanMoof S3 delivers.  

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 504 Wh
    • Range: 37-93 miles (up to 150 with optional Power bank)
    • Motor: Front Hub
    • Class 3

    Pros

    • Integrated security system
    • Ultra-smooth auto-shifter
    • Fast, smooth ride
    • All the tech

    Cons

    • App interface takes some getting used to

    I’ll admit it—I was a little skeptical of all the flashy tech-enabled features in the VanMoof 3 when I first started testing it. When a company representative first showed me the bike, which features a proprietary smartphone app, they called it the “iPhone of ebikes.” I felt a little overwhelmed by how much there was to learn about it. 

    Once I got the hang of things, though, I was sold.

    The VanMoof S3 delivers the smoothest ride I’ve experienced thanks to its automatic gear shifter, silky motor, and a “boost button” throttle that adds some oomph to your acceleration. It also might be the most secure electric bike on the road thanks to its integrated locking, alarm, and tracking system. You can lock and unlock the bike via the app, or with a kick of a peg in the rear wheel. And if someone does steal the bike, you can track it with the Find My app (no Android alternative yet, though the VanMoof app itself is available for Android), or if that doesn’t work the company’s Bike Hunters will track it down for you.

    On top of all that, the S3 boasts a lot of cool details that add up to greatness. The design is sleek and modern. The integrated light is super bright and you can choose from three different bell sounds. Optional front and rear cargo carriers look and work great. And the removable PowerBank adds considerable range. All in all, this is the kind of bike that will make your coworkers jealous when you pedal to the office.

    Best budget: Ancheer Blue Spark

    Ancheer

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Offering all the basic ebike elements at a lower cost, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great budget ebike.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 48V 10Ah
    • Range: Up to 38 miles (in pedal-assist mode)
    • Motor: Hub
    • Class: 2

    Pros

    • Solid motor power
    • Throttle-capable
    • Smooth transmission

    Cons

    • Limited range
    • Slower charging time

    If you’re looking for a solid electric bike that delivers all the standard features without paying thousands of dollars, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great pick. While there are technically ebikes out there for half its just-shy-of-$1,000 price tag, they simply don’t offer enough features to make you feel like you’re getting a quality battery-assisted ride. The Blue Spark gives you the true electric bike experience and it does so for $1,000 or $2,000 less than similarly equipped models.

    Generally speaking, the Blue Spark offers the performance you need for daily commuting or casual off-roading. Whether in pedal-assist or throttling mode it will provide plenty of speed and adequate hill-climbing ability, and its riding experience is smooth. 

    The lower price comes with caveats, as it always does: The Blue Spark suffers from a rather limited range, but its 20-38 miles capability is pretty typical for its price. And while it certainly is a fine bike for taking over light off-road trails, just be aware that it isn’t meant for anything too extreme.

    Blue Spark owners who have ridden it over the long run report that it’s very durable, though, requiring less maintenance than you would expect considering its lower cost. When all is said and done, this is a great bike if you’re looking for a quality ebike but can’t fork over several grand.

    Things to consider before choosing from the best electric bikes

    With electric bikes available in a seemingly endless variety and wide range of price points, it can be difficult to know where to begin. Many people assume that spending more money guarantees you get a better product: While there is an element of truth there, I’ve found that the best ebikes can excel in a few key ways without rocketing into the upper stratosphere of bike prices. Here are a few things to consider if you’re looking to ride one of the best electric bikes:

    What is its riding range?

    Few things make an electric bike less fun and functional than finding yourself out of juice with a long ride still ahead of you. Ebikes boast a lot of tech, which makes them heavy … and makes them a genuine pain in the keister to pedal sans power. Suddenly peddling your slick, cool tech-infused bike feels more akin to pushing an aircraft carrier through the mud.

    To avoid this, make sure to get an ebike with a large battery. Look for the electric bikes that boast the highest watt-hour (Wh) capacity. Ebikes are rated in volts and amp-hours, so to determine battery life in watt-hours you should be multiplying its volts and amps specs. Our best overall pick, for example, has a 52 volt 19.2 amp-hour battery which results in nearly 1,000 Wh. Generally speaking, I’ve found that most bikes offer between 500-800 watt-hours, so anything near the high end of that range is great.

    To determine the range from here, you would theoretically just divide the total watt-hours by the average miles per hour. So let’s say you’re averaging 20 MPH on that 1000 Wh bike, then you’d have a range of 50 miles. If you’re looking to go on a really long ride, some companies support external battery packs that can recharge their bikes on the go.

    The truth, however, is a bit more complicated. The harder your bike’s motor works—due to bike weight, load weight, speed, hilly terrain, etc.—the more power it uses. The reverse is also true. Lighter weight, flatter terrain, more laidback speed equals less power usage. So essentially the real-world range is determined by the rider, what they’re doing, and where they’re going.

    What class of electric bike do you need?

    In the United States, electric bikes are divided into three classes depending on the degree of motor assistance they provide to augment your pedaling.

    Class 1 electric bikes are solely pedal assist: They provide oomph to your pedaling up to 20 miles per hour. These are the most basic ebikes and they can be used everywhere traditional bikes can go.

    Class 2 electric bikes feature a throttle that, at the flick of a switch, can propel you up to 20 miles per hour on their own and maintain that speed even if you aren’t pedaling. Depending on where you live, Class 2 ebikes may not be allowed on certain bike lanes and trails. The European Union, for example, has a total ban on throttled bikes.

    Class 3 electric bikes usually drop the throttle in favor of pedal assist and have stronger motors capable of reaching 28 miles per hour. Regulations for Class 3 bikes vary from place to place, but they tend to be allowed on roads and bike lanes, but may be restricted from mountain bike trails and multi-use paths.

    Speaking broadly, commuters and professionals tend to gravitate toward Class 2 bikes, which require the least effort, or Class 3 bikes, which are faster and tend to be better equipped for carrying heavy loads.

    Type of motor

    Electric bikes almost always feature one of two motor types: mid-drive or hub-drive.

    Mid-drive motors are positioned on the bottom bracket and their primary benefit involves the fact that they have a greater gear range, making them easier and more efficient to pedal uphill. The downside, however, is that they’re harder on the bike and can exact a heavy maintenance toll. 

    Hub-drive motors, on the other hand, are usually attached on the rear hub and require little-to-no maintenance. That said, hub-drive motors do usually make it a bit more challenging to change a flat tire. 

    To make a broad generalization, hub-drive motors make for better commuter bikes while mid-drive motors are geared more toward performance riding on trails or up hills. The latter tends to be somewhat more energy-efficient, but you won’t necessarily feel the difference unless you’re riding up a lot of hills. 

    Durability and build quality

    It can be hard to determine unless you buy a bike and spend many years with it, but you want to make sure you aren’t buying a bike that’s going to need repairs all the time. When trying out different bikes, pay attention to whether the parts all feel firmly in place, or if some of them seem brittle or poorly fitted in any way. Check that the motor and chain system doesn’t rattle to any undue degree. Lastly, get on the bike and make sure that the design feels comfortable.

    Lights, carriers, and other extras

    One final thing to look for in an electric bike involves safety, convenience, and other add-on features. Many ebikes include high-quality lighting systems, integrated locks, and other safety/protective elements. Some, like the VanMoof S3, even have tracking and remote locking systems, alarms, and other tech-enabled security. 

    Several brands also boast the option to trick out your ride with super-sleek integrated rear cargo carriers, front-end baskets, water bottle holders, bells, and other fun/functional accessories. Just as with a traditional bike, you can always tack on third-party products, but the best companies offer some really cool options to build out your bike from the get-go. How much do electric bicycles cost?

    FAQs

    Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

    You might be wondering if traditional bikes have advantages over electric bikes, and the answer is yes.

    Electric bikes are more expensive, heavier, and can be costly to maintain. Riding range can be limited, and all that extra weight can be a real pain if you run out of juice. While most of those on this list can be completely charged within 3-5 hours, some models can take a lot longer.

    Q: Are electric bikes worth the money?

    Now that we’ve looked at a few disadvantages, you might be wondering whether ebikes are worth the money. That really depends on how you expect to use them.

    For commuting to work every day, an electric bike means considerably less exertion than a traditional bike, and they require zero gas versus a vehicle. If you plan on using an ebike off-road, they can transform your experience, allowing you to enjoy the ride rather than suffer under the effort.

    And they’re a lot of fun, so even if you are a more casual cyclist, they can add a lot of enjoyment to the experience. Whether or not that is worth the price is up to you.

    Q: How long will electric bikes last?

    An electric bike’s lifespan depends entirely on factors like a particular brand’s build quality, how often and hard you expect to use it, and how well you maintain it. That being said, many experts say that an electric bike should last around 10 years, with individual elements lasting:

    Battery: 3-5 years before charge capacity begins to decline.
    Motor: Approximately 10,000 miles, depending on brand and maintenance.
    Brakes: 3,000-6,000 miles, depending on riding style and road conditions.
    Chain: 2,000-3,000 miles, depending on brand.
    Tires: 1,000-3,000 miles, depending on road conditions.

    Simply put, if you take care of your bike and replace components as necessary, you can expect to get a lot of life out of it.

    Q: How much do electric bicycles cost?

    This depends on their range, size, battery capacity, and additional features. Most electric bicycles will cost between $1,500 and $3,000, although you can get one that costs a lot less or a lot more.

    Final thoughts on the best electric bikes

    Picking the right electric bike comes down to how you expect to use it. I spent an entire day testing out different ebikes with my brother and nephew and, while we all agreed on which were the best, each of us preferred different models based on our individual riding styles.

    Knowing that, my final piece of advice is to test out a variety of ebikes before you buy one. Reading descriptions online can be useful, but digital hype versus on-road reality can make a big difference. I had somewhat low expectations for the Juiced RipCurrent S, for example, based on the fact that it was a lesser-known brand getting comparatively less attention online. Then, when we actually tried it out, my testing trio unanimously agreed that it was the best.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best electric bikes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Give Mom the gift of fresh herbs with 60% off an AeroGarden on Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/aerogarden-mothers-day-amazon-sale/ Tue, 02 May 2023 16:29:03 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=538365
    Two AeroGarden HydroPonic growers on a green gradient background
    Amanda Reed

    She'll love having fresh herbs on hand—and you'll love all the savings from this AeroGarden deal on Amazon.

    The post Give Mom the gift of fresh herbs with 60% off an AeroGarden on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Two AeroGarden HydroPonic growers on a green gradient background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Mother’s Day is right around the corner. We have plenty of recommendations, but if your mom has a green thumb—or needs something easy to take care of—we think she’d love AeroGarden’s variety of indoor gardens, and they’re up to 60% off on Amazon.

    AeroGarden Harvest with Gourmet Herb Seed Pod Kit $69.99 (Was $164.95)

    AeroGarden

    SEE IT

    The AeroGarden Harvest lets you easily grow herbs thanks to the power of hydroponics, where plants are grown in water instead of soil. This particular model comes with Genovese basil, curly parsley, dill, thyme, Thai basil, and mint seed pods—although there are other pods for meadow flowers, cherry tomatoes, and more that you can buy separately. It’s a mess-free way to take care of plants without killing them, thanks to 20-watt LED lights that automatically turn on and off.

    If counter space is a consideration, consider the AeroGarden Sprout, which packs the hydroponic power into a pint-sized pack just as potent as its larger pals.

    Don’t be the offspring known for getting every gift at the last minute—take advantage of this deal before it withers away.

    Here are more garden & patio deals that have us seeing (and saving) green:

    The post Give Mom the gift of fresh herbs with 60% off an AeroGarden on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best FPV drones for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-fpv-drones/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 14:05:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517892
    The best FPV drones composited
    Stan Horaczek

    Get a truly unique point of view from the best first-person view drones.

    The post The best FPV drones for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best FPV drones composited
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall DJI FPV drone is one of the best FPV drones. Here it's shown on a plain background. DJI FPV drone
    SEE IT

    It flies fast and far with DJI’s proven technologies.

    Best for video The DJI avata drone by itself with the camera facing forward on a plain background DJI Avata
    SEE IT

    The 4K camera offers exceptional stabilization for stunning shots.

    Best budget The Tello FPV drone facing forward on a plain background Ryze Tello
    SEE IT

    Get up in the air without spending a sky high amount of cash.

    If you’ve seen incredible aerobatic video footage lately, there’s a good chance it was created with an FPV drone. Short for “first-person view,” FPV drones stream a live video feed back to a pilot’s headset, so it looks like they’re actually in a tiny cockpit. This view offers unprecedented control and enables high-performance feats like drone racing or truly harrowing video capture. In doing so, these FPV drones allow you to experience the world around you in ways you may never have thought possible, except perhaps in a video game. While the drone world has grown significantly in recent years, we’ve narrowed down this list of the best FPV drones to get you airborne with minimal fuss.

    How we chose the best FPV drone

    Although one of the key brands in the drone market has been DJI, which is also true of FPV drones as well, we just didn’t limit our search to DJI FPV drones. We studied models from other brands as well. One characteristic we looked for from all models was if the drone was easy to use. We also tried to select models that were relatively durable. However, for some, like those racing FPV drones, there might not be many models that can last a long time in that environment. But by and large, we looked for models that could survive a few crashes. Another factor in selecting the models was considering the drone’s overall design, including its structural design and ergonomics and how it operated with its mobile app and other accessories. 

    The best FPV drones: Reviews & Recommendations

    Drones have a rather large price range. Some more toy-like FPV drones can cost less than $100, while others can cost well over $1,000. That means you’ll want to find out not only how much money you want to spend but also what features are important to you and how you intend to be using the FPV drone. 

    Best overall: DJI FPV combo

    DJI

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Its mix of advanced features and ease of use make it the best pick for those who don’t mind spending some money upfront.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 12.2 x 10 x 5 inches
    • Weight: 1.8 lbs. 
    • Video Recording Modes: 1080p resolution at 120/fps; 4K resolution at 60/fps
    • Camera Resolution: 12 megapixels
    • Maximum Flying Time: 20 minutes 

    Pros

    • Fast: Can fly as fast as 87 mph 
    • Fun, easy to use, and versatile
    • Shoots good quality video and photos
    • Nice selection of safety features

    Cons

    • For the price, battery life could be better
    • Not as durably constructed as some other models 

    The first thing some drone races look for when buying a racing drone is its top speed. And this model clearly stands out among FPV drones as it can fly as fast as 87 mph. But the DJI FPV stands out in other ways, too. For instance, take the price: This new kit from DJI provides everything you need to start flying in truly FPV fashion: In addition to the drone, you also get the DJI FPV goggles V2 (which are comfortable to wear and use), a remote control and the new motion controller, and more. That offers you a lot of value for the money. In addition, it can fly in three different flight modes, depending on your skill level, and also comes with a number of useful safety features, including the emergency “brake and hover” mode. Simply press a button on the controller. The drone will stop and hover stably within a few seconds.

    The imaging and video specs are also quite good: You can shoot video with 4K resolution (at 60 fps) or 1080 resolution (at 120 fps, which can be useful for slow-motion video) at a very wide 150° field of view. You can also shoot 12-megapixel resolution photos. Plus, the done system includes collision technology to prevent it from crashing. Overall, this DJI combo kit provides a powerful immersive experience. 

    Best for beginners: BetaFPV Cetus Pro 

    Why it made the cut: This is a great model to learn the basics of flying an FPV drone.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 4.6 x 4.6 x 1.3 inches
    • Weight: 0.1 lbs. 
    • Video Recording Modes: N/A 
    • Camera Resolution: N/A
    • Maximum Flying Time: 4-5 minutes 

    Pros

    • A great FPV drone to learn on
    • Easy to use
    • It has a sturdy design yet is lightweight
    • Comes with clever features to keep you flying 

    Cons

    • The included VR02 FPV goggles do not support video record function. 

    Although this model is meant for beginners, it includes all the necessary elements for learning how to use an FPV drone: The Cetus Pro FPV kit includes the brushless quadcopter and a LiteRadio2 SE transmitter and VR02 FPV goggles. It’s lightweight but sturdy, and it also has an emergency battery and low-battery feature to avoid crashing the drone. Plus, there’s an altitude hold function, which lets that drone auto-hover. It even has a “turtle mode.” If the FPV drone has fallen to the ground and is now upside down, you can activate the “turtle mode” via the LiteRadio2 SE transmitter, and it will flip the Cetus Pro FPV back over to allow you to resume flying. Comes with three flight modes and flies at three different speeds.

    One downside is that included VR02 FPV goggles do not support video record function. However, if you want to pay more, you can buy the VR03 FPV goggles, which do support video record function. Both the resolution for VR02 and VR03 FPV goggles are 480p.

    Best for kids: DEERC D20 Mini Drone for Kids 

    Deerc

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: A very inexpensive and fun FPV drone.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 7 x 4.7 x 1.7 inches
    • Weight: 0.1 lbs. 
    • Video Recording Modes: 720p 
    • Camera Resolution: 1 megapixel
    • Maximum Flying Time: 10 minutes 

    Pros

    • Very inexpensive 
    • Includes gesture control and voice commands

    Cons

    • Low-resolution video and photos
    • Doesn’t connect with a pair of goggles 

    If you’re looking for an inexpensive drone for an older child or teenager, consider this model. This mini drone comes with some useful features to help kids learn how to fly drones: It can auto-hover with its altitude hold system, and it’s easy to use with its one-key start/stop function. It also comes with 3-speed modes.  

    However, some of the imaging features aren’t incredibly robust. Nevertheless, your kids might find them fun to play with. For instance, the onboard camera (which connects wirelessly to your smartphone and is where you see the streaming video) has only 720p HD video resolution. The photos are only 1280 x 720 resolution images, which is barely a 1-megapixel photo. But what is fun is that you can take photos and video clips via gesture control—if you make a victory or “V” sign with your fingers, the drone will capture a photo or video. It also has voice control: You can say “take off” or “landing” and the drone will respond accordingly.

    Best for video: DJI Avata

    DJI

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: When you’re looking for a FPV drone that will take better quality videos and photos 

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 7.1 x 7.1 x 3.1 inches
    • Weight: 0.9 lbs. 
    • Video Recording Modes: 2.7K resolution at 120/fps; 4K resolution at 60/fps
    • Camera Resolution: 48 megapixels
    • Maximum Flying Time: 18 minutes 

    Pros

    • Sturdy, compact construction 
    • A larger sensor and more megapixels for better quality video and photos
    • Includes image stabilization
    • Nice selection of safety features

    Cons

    • Can’t fly as fast as the DJI FPV

    An important question you’ll need to answer before you buy an FPV drone is what are you buying a drone for? If it’s to buy the fastest consumer FPV drone, then you’ll want to buy the DJI FPV drone. The Avata’s top speed is 60 mph, which is fast but not quite as fast as the DJI FPV, which can fly up to 87 mph. But if you’re looking to buy a drone that shoots much better video quality as well as photo quality, then the DJI Avata is the model you’ll want to consider: The Avata comes with a large, 48-megapixel 1/1.7-inch sensor, which is one of the reasons you get better quality photos and video. The lens has an f/2.8 aperture and shoots with a wide 155-degree field of view. The Avata also captures 4K video at up to 60fps or 2.7k video at up to 120fps if you want slow-motion video. 

    Best budget: Ryze Tello

    Tello

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: For an easy-to-use, inexpensive FPV drone that’s less than $100 

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 3.7 x 3.7 x 1.6 inches 
    • Weight: 0.2 lbs. 
    • Video Recording Modes: 720p resolution video
    • Camera Resolution: 5 megapixels
    • Maximum Flying Time: 13 minutes 

    Pros

    • Very inexpensive
    • Easy to use
    • Compatible with VR headsets
    • Uses hand gestures

    Cons

    • Controller costs extra
    • Imaging resolution is a bit on the low side

    For those on a budget, this model might fit the bill. It’s powered with technology by DJI, so it’s still pretty full-featured for such a low-priced drone. However, it doesn’t come with a controller, which is one reason it’s so inexpensive. But you can connect it to your phone using the mobile app or a supported Bluetooth remote controller (connected to the mobile app). It’s also compatible with VR headsets. Also, if you’re interested in learning how to code, or if you’d like to have your kids learn how to code, this drone can be programmed using Scratch–MIT’s coding system for kids to learn on. However, it would be nice if it had slightly high video and still photo resolution. 

    Things to consider when shopping for the best FPV drones

    There are many features to consider when buying an FPV drone. But you may find it helpful to start by asking yourself some questions: Are you experienced in flying drones or FPV drones? Are you buying this drone for a beginner or a teenager? Will you use them for racing, or are you more interested in shooting video or photos? 

    Controls

    One key area to consider when comparing drones is figuring out how easy it is to use the controls and the drone system. Some work by connecting to your smartphone, while others come with dedicated controllers. Do some research to see which one might be the best for you. If you’re doing serious flying, a dedicated controller is an absolute must. Higher-end models allow for controller customization to fit your specific flight style.

    Camera

    There are also big differences in how they record and capture video or photos. Some, like the BetaFPV Cetus Pro FPV drone, are meant for you to learn how to fly these drones. In other words, it doesn’t include the capability of recording video or capturing photos, since it was designed for beginners to learn on. But other pricier models give you the ability to capture 4K resolution video and 48mm still photos. Some custom models allow for swappable camera systems so that you can attach your own GoPro or another action camera to it.

    FAQs

    Q: Do you have to register a drone in the US? 

    According to the Federal Aviation Administration’s website, “All drones must be registered, except those that weigh 0.55 pounds or less (less than 250 grams) and are flown exclusively under the Exception for Recreational Flyers.” The fee for registering is $5 and is valid for three years.  For more on registering your drone, go to the FAA website.

    Q: How high can I fly my drone? 

    The maximum allowable altitude is 400 feet above the ground, higher if your drone remains within 400 feet of a structure (according to the FAA).

    Q: What’s the fastest I can fly my drone?

    The maximum speed is 100 mph (87 knots) (according to the FAA).

    Q: What times of the day can I fly my drone?

    You can fly during daylight or in twilight (30 minutes before official sunrise to 30 minutes after official sunset, local time) with appropriate anti-collision lighting. 

    Final thoughts when buying the best FPV drones

    Have you ever wondered if you could get motion sickness, which could make you feel lightheaded or even nauseous, from using goggles with an FPV drone? The answer to this question is “Yes!” The effect is similar to what you might experience when watching a VR experience through a VR headset. One of the theories about this sickness is that it’s a fairly common side effect caused by the brain’s struggle to square what you see with what you feel—your brain might think you’re flying like Superman over a building. Still, you’re just standing in the middle of your living room. If you experience motion sickness when using an FPV drone, consider taking a break from using the goggles for 15 or 20 minutes before you try using them again.  

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best FPV drones for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best budget electric bikes for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-budget-electric-bikes/ Wed, 14 Dec 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=496637
    Get started with the best budget electric bikes.

    Got some speed and savings at the same time.

    The post The best budget electric bikes for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Get started with the best budget electric bikes.

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Ride1Up Roadster V2 Ride1Up Roadster
    SEE IT

    The Ride1Up Roadster V2 is an all-around great ebike that won’t break the bank.

    Best mountain Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26” Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26”
    SEE IT

    Most electric mountain bikes cost thousands of dollars. This one’s highly capable and costs less than $700.

    Best folding Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike
    SEE IT

    The Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike feels especially solid for a folding ebike.

    Is the term budget electric bike an oxymoron? Two things are certain about ebikes: They’re really cool, and they are very expensive. They often cost upwards of $2,000, so getting one is no small investment. There are plenty of people who can’t afford one. That said, it is possible to get a decent ebike for less than $1,000. A few brands have designed relatively affordable ebikes that deliver admirable functionality at the low end of the price range. They tend to be foldable or compact versions for commuters, so they’re made for relatively light use, but there are options for trail bikers, too. Let’s examine the benefits and limitations of the best budget electric bikes.

    How we chose the best budget electric bikes

    I’ve been an avid outdoorsman enthusiast for my entire life, which has resulted in several years of providing gear and tech coverage for outlets like Popular Science, the Daily Beast, Runner’s World, Thrillist, the Manual, and more. My love of cycling has been a recurring theme throughout all of it.

    Over the past several months, I’ve ridden dozens of electric bikes at all different price points and categories. I have come to learn what to look for when separating genuine quality from flashy marketing. In certain cases, those tests were supplemented with research collating reviews from experts and impressions from customers alike.

    The best budget electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

    The best budget ebikes span several different riding purposes and considerations. While most low-cost ebikes are often very similar, our picks offer distinctive riding experiences. They got our attention, and maybe you’ll see something in them, too.

    Best overall: Ride1Up Roadster V2

    ride1up

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Ride1Up Roadster V2 is an all-around great ebike that won’t break the bank.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 36V 7Ah (252Wh)
    • Range: Approximately 12-20 miles (and maybe even more)
    • Motor: 350W (500W peak)

    Pros

    • Solid all-purpose bike
    • Relatively good range and power
    • Classic looks
    • Smooth ride

    Cons

    • Not for short riders
    • No lights

    For just $1,000, the Ride1up Roadster V2 is a remarkably well-rounded and polished bike. High-powered for its price with a 350W motor, the Roadster V2 provides strong acceleration and propulsion, making it capable of reaching 24 miles per hour with pedal assist. It also has a range of 12-20 miles on average, with several riders suggesting they’ve gone 25 miles on a single charge. That’s a great range for an around-town cruiser.

    It’s lightweight—only 33 pounds—and durably built. Plus, it looks very slick, with a classic aesthetic that almost doesn’t look like an ebike.

    The Roadster V2 isn’t perfect, though. It’s a very tall bike, best suited for riders 5’8” and over. It also doesn’t have much in the way of accessories; there’s not even a headlight, which is pretty standard at this point.

    Still, with all the core features working at or above our expectations, you’ll be hard-pressed to find an ebike that works so well for this price.

    Best for urban adventures (and apartments): Lectric Bikes XP Lite

    Tony Ware

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Small but spry, the Lectric Bikes XP Lite lets you zip through crowds and doesn’t require much storage space.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 48V 7.8 Ah (374 Wh)
    • Range: 15-40 miles
    • Motor: 300W nominal, 720W peak

    Pros

    • Good range and power
    • Solid build quality
    • Class 1 or 2

    Cons

    • Lack of suspension is noticeable on rough roads

    Started in 2019 from a garage in Phoenix, Ariz., Lectric Bikes expanded quickly because of the company’s restless spirit. Not only are the company’s ebikes intended for the intrepid—for gaining the experience points, XP, in the bike names—but the founders are continually listening to user feedback to refine the product line while maintaining affordability.

    Foldable yet offroad-friendly, the core Lectric XP 3.0 model can comfortably accompany RVers and van-lifers. The less-expensive XP Lite, meanwhile, was developed as the optimal option for city dwellers needing a lighter-weight ebike that could go from closet to commute. It even shows up quickly in a surprisingly compact box. At 46 pounds, and 36- x 16- x 26-inch folded dimensions, the XP Lite is easy to tuck and transport via elevator, as shown above—or even stairs in a pinch, as shown below—while packing in a lot of features for its $799 price point.

    Class 1 and 2, the XP Lite features a twist-grip throttle plus five levels of pedal assist, with slimmer tires that assist the maneuverability needed in active urban environments. The 48V lithium-ion battery can get up to 40 miles on a charge (assuming you’re using no more than intermittent pedal assist level 1). Or you can use the throttle to scoot to/from work, the store, etc., quickly with the least effort and sweat (the single-speed drivetrain makes it easy—just twist and go—but you’ll get max 15 miles in this mode).

    The base XL Lite includes front & rear safety lights, and a backlit heads-up LCD screen offers trip and battery info (electrical components are IP65-rated in case you get caught in incremental weather, but don’t leave the bike out in the rain). You’ll absorb some shocks if navigating uneven asphalt, and acceleration—while appropriately fast for street navigation—isn’t always the smoothest in transition. But you can buy an optional seat with a suspension post, and you’ll appreciate the nimble nature of the bike whether you’re zipping through downtown or kicking up some dust on more developed trails. — Tony Ware

    Lectric XP Lite ebike folded in a stairwell
    Tony Ware

    Best mountain bike: Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26”

    ANCHEER

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Most electric mountain bikes cost thousands of dollars. This one’s highly capable and costs less than $700. 

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 36V 10.4Ah (374.4Wh)
    • Range: 20+ miles
    • Motor: 350W

    Pros

    • Good range and power
    • Solid build quality
    • Shock-absorbing fork
    • 21-speed shifter w/ throttle

    Cons

    • No built-in light
    • Poor customer service from the manufacturer

    It’s not uncommon for electric mountain bike prices to steer closer toward $10,000 than $1,000, making them a very hard sell. Luckily, Ancheer makes a highly capable alternative that costs less than $700.

    With a 350W motor capable of cruising at 20 miles per hour, the Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike has no problem charging up inclines. It also has a substantial range, with many users reporting that it will go well over 20 miles if you’re using the throttle economically. 

    Its design is also surprisingly solid for a budget electric mountain bike, inspiring several buyers to leave shining reviews after several months of hitting the trails. Shock absorbers in the fork deliver a smooth, capable riding experience. And its overall aesthetic is clean and sporty. 

    Best folding: Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike

    Vivi

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike feels especially solid for a folding ebike.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 36V 8Ah (288Wh)
    • Range: Approximately 14 miles
    • Motor: 350W

    Pros

    • Solid all-purpose bike
    • Relatively good range and power
    • Shock absorbers
    • 21-speed shifter w/ throttle

    Cons

    • Slow charging
    • Poor customer service from the manufacturer

    Most folding electric bikes feel somewhat rickety, thanks to their signature hinges. Budget bike-maker Vivi somehow made a folding design that minimizes that wiggle in its 26-inch Electric Mountain Bike, and does so without charging an arm and a leg.

    Its strong 350W motor will zip you up to 20 miles per hour using either throttle or pedal assist. Its 14-mile range can’t compete with high-level ebikes, but is acceptable for an $800 bike and should be more than enough for local commuters to ride their daily route on a single charge. What’s more, its Shimano 21-speed transmission makes taking on hills effortless. 

    When you’re done for the day, folding the bike up to store is easy, as is reassembling it to ride. More importantly, the bike feels sturdy despite the movable points on the frame and provides a comfortable riding experience. And it has a built-in headlight that can be switched on via the handlebar control pad, which is also used to shift between three riding modes: normal bike mode, pedal-assist, and pure electric power.

    While Vivi has a solid bike on its hands here, the company has earned a reputation for poor customer service when issues have cropped up. This may impact the bike’s long-term viability, but it is also a common issue with companies targeting budget products.

    Best compact: Sailnovo 14-Inch Electric Bike

    Sailnovo

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Salinovo 14-inch Electric Bike offers supreme portability and solid performance.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 36V 10.4Ah (374.4Wh)
    • Range: Approximately 18 miles
    • Motor: 450W

    Pros

    • Strong motor
    • Relatively good range
    • Waterproof
    • Throttle and pedal assist

    Cons

    • Could be more ergonomic
    • Some customers have had customer service issues

    The Salinovo 14-inch Electric Bike is surprisingly powerful for a compact electric bike. Its 450W motor can quickly reach just shy of 20 miles per hour via either the throttle or pedal assist. (Salinovo claims the range goes much further, but some reviewers reported that it falls short of those claims.) Round that out with a surprisingly solid range and little flourishes like integrated head and tail lights, plus a central shock absorber, and you’ve got a pretty solid bike for around $500 bucks.

    Some serious cyclists might find that compact, foldable ebikes at these prices don’t deliver the structural solidity they expect from a bike. Generally, they can feel a bit more rickety than their non-folding counterparts. With a bike like the Sailnovo, it’s important to remember that you are making a compromise, favoring affordability and portability over feel and stability. All in all, though, it’s a great little commuter or a fun way to explore a neighborhood.

    Best for beginners: Propella Mini

    Propella

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: If you’re looking to learn the ebike ropes, the Propella Mini is a great place to start.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 36V 7Ah (252Wh)
    • Range: 20+ miles
    • Motor: 250W

    Pros

    • Good range and power
    • Lightweight
    • Fast charging time
    • Straightforward operation

    Cons

    • No light
    • Not for tall riders

    The Propella Mini is a great ebike for beginners, offering decent performance without overwhelming you with features. It offers decent range and power, and it’s not overpowered, which allows you something of a learning curve before stepping up to higher-performance bikes. 

    It’s also extremely lightweight, making it easy to lift in and out of a vehicle or carry up stairs. While it is pretty limited in features (there’s only a single gear to help with hills, for example), that might be exactly what you’re looking for. After all, fewer features mean less to manage. We think a headlight would complete the package, but you can always find a third-party light.

    Best under $500: ENGWE Electric Bike

    ENGWE

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With surprisingly solid performance for such a low price, the Engwe Electric Bike is as capable as it is cheap.

    Specs

    • Battery capacity: 36V 8Ah (288Wh)
    • Range: Approximately 18 miles 
    • Motor: 250W

    Pros

    • Solid all-purpose bike
    • Relatively good range and power
    • Shocks and Shimano shifter
    • Handles hills well

    Cons

    • Not for tall riders
    • Poor customer service

    When you’re shopping for an electric bike with less than $500 to spend, you’ll look at a lot of undersized folding bikes. The Engwe Electric Bike is a rare exception, allowing you to buy a traditional bike frame at an incredibly low price.

    The Engwe features a 250W motor capable of throttling or pedal assisting up to 20 miles per hour, an admirable range of roughly 18 miles, front fork shocks, and hill-conquering Shimano 21-speed shifters. Its no-frills, the traditional design also looks better than pretty much any ebike you’ll find in its price range. It delivers a surprisingly great riding experience without breaking the bank.

    As with many of our picks, Engwe’s Achilles’ heel is customer service. It’s also worth noting that it’s a smaller bike, which means riders taller than an inch or two past six feet will likely fit it a bit too petite. However, if the size is right for you, the price will be too. You may also want to consider it as one of the best kids’ bikes.

    Things to consider before choosing a budget electric bike

    If you’ve come looking for the best budget electric bikes, rather than simply the best electric bikes, then we know the price is on your mind. Even cheap bikes cost a few hundred dollars, though, so you want to make sure you’re putting that money into something worth riding. There are several specific factors you should keep in mind, so you can figure out whether a budget ebike is a bargain or, for lack of a better word, junk. The best budget electric bikes will deliver in these specific ways.

    Price

    First and foremost, you’re here because you’re looking for an electric bike that won’t cost as much as a used car—all of the bikes on this list cost under $1,000. We also included a few compact bicycles that cost around $500. These offer somewhat limited functionality and durability compared to full-size ebikes, but they’re still great for the price.

    Riding range

    An electric bike that runs out of juice after a few miles isn’t worth buying, no matter the price. What good is a motor if it can’t get you from point A to point B? A large battery will ensure you get a boost from your ebike, rather than pushing it home.

    Most ebikes rate their batteries in a combination of volts (V) and amp-hours (Ah), which you can combine to calculate a bike battery’s actual capacity in watt-hours (Wh). Watt-hours are the more useful specification, as they allow you to approximate how long the battery will last at a given speed.

    Converting volts and amp-hours into watt-hours is easy. Simply multiply the two numbers together. A number of our picks, for example, boast 36V 8Ah batteries. 36 x 8 = 288, so we know that battery lasts for 288Wh. With this number, we can calculate how far the battery will take us by dividing the number of watt-hours by your speed to see how far you’ll go. So, at 20 miles per hour, a 288Wh bike should carry you about 14.5 miles.

    “About” is an important word here. In the real world, your actual range will be affected by things like rider weight, road surface, flat vs. hilly terrain, and other factors that can demand more or less power. So, while you can’t measure and determine the minimum amount of juice you’ll need on spec, you can probably figure out if a bike can get you where you need to go.

    If nothing else, remember that a bigger battery is always better.

    Motor

    There’s no point in having an ebike if the motor isn’t powerful enough to take the edge off your pedaling effort. Power is one of the biggest differences between less expensive ebikes and the cream of the crop. Many are so weak that you’ll barely notice the pedal assistance. However, all of the bikes on this list deliver at least 250 watts, meaning they’re capable of delivering solid pedal assistance or even propelling themselves at 20 miles per hour or higher.

    Keep in mind that your actual speed will vary based on factors like payload, road conditions, stops and starts, and so on, but a high-watt motor is important, especially when looking to spend less money.

    Durability

    Whenever you’re going with a budget-tier version of a product, you need to pay extra attention to its overall construction. You aren’t saving money if you buy something cheap, but it breaks down after several uses. To verify the durability of our recommendations, we’ve scoured reviews from owners who can attest to the longevity of each bike.

    When you’re checking out a specific bike in the real world, check over its various parts to find out if anything rattles to a worrisome degree. Some budget picks may feel more rickety than their more expensive brethren, but they should still be sturdy and comfortable to ride.

    Accessories

    Ebikes can come with an extremely wide range of accessories, including lights, bells, cargo carriers, and so on. While you don’t need accessories like these, they can make your riding experience safer, more fun, and more versatile.

    FAQs

    Q: Are electric bikes worth the money?

    Electric bikes are absolutely worth the money for commuters if it allows you to cut down on expenses like gas, parking, and vehicle maintenance. They’re also incredibly fun to ride, especially when they let you blow past traffic jams. That said, they are very expensive, so we’d only recommend them for people who ride a lot. You don’t necessarily need to be a commuter, but they aren’t a worthwhile investment for people who only bike once in a while.

    Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

    As we’ve discussed here, money is a major hurdle for most people considering whether or not to buy an ebike. Electric bikes usually cost more than traditional bikes, and they feature more complicated machinery, which translates into more maintenance and repair costs. The range can also be an issue. Electric bikes tend to be very heavy. When they run out of juice, they can be difficult to ride without power assistance.

    Q: Do you pedal an electric bike?

    You can, but you don’t always need to. On Class 2 and 3 electric bikes with throttles, you can propel the ebike with zero effort. On class 1 bikes with pedal assist, you have to pedal, but the motor speeds you up and does most of the work. Technically, some companies also sell “electric bikes” without pedals. These tend to be cheaper and work similarly to using the throttle on a class 2 or 3 bike. By removing the pedals, these companies are playing with the line between an electric bike and an electric scooter or moped, so we’re not sure they fit what we think of when we talk about ebikes.

    Q: How fast do electric bikes go?

    Your ebike’s top speed comes down to the motor of its motor, plus several other factors, including rider weight, flat vs. hilly terrain, road surface conditions, bike weight, cargo weight, and so on. They are not so powerful that they can push their limits under any conditions. That said, we generally expect budget ebikes capable of average top speeds between 15-20 miles per hour. A top-of-the-line model should be able to go a bit faster, up to about 28 miles per hour.

    Final thoughts about the best budget electric bikes

    Electric bikes are an environmentally friendly, fun way to get around town, whether commuting, running errands, or simply going for a ride. While they often come with a hefty price tag, there is a price range, and you can get one that won’t cost too much. If $500-$1,000 is still too much, looking for a used or refurbished model may help you cut costs.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best budget electric bikes for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best cornhole boards of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-games-cornhole/ Mon, 12 Jul 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=373511
    Some mans playing in outdoor with cornhole in outdoor yard with green grass.
    Austin Distel, Unsplash

    Backyard games for kids often bore adults, but the best cornhole games entertain all ages.

    The post The best cornhole boards of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Some mans playing in outdoor with cornhole in outdoor yard with green grass.
    Austin Distel, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best cornhole set overall Two square wooden shapes with a blue and red stripe each of them and with a circular hole in their upper part, as well as a big black bag and some small square shapes red and blue in the shape of pillows. GoSports Classic Cornhole Set
    SEE IT

    With a range of designs and sizes, these high-quality cornhole sets can suit any space and come fully equipped with all-weather  beanbags.

    Best cornhole set for all-weather Two square wooden shapes with blur color on them and with the brand name written on them and some small square shapes of yellow and gray color in the form of pillows. Triumph All-Weather Aluminum 2×3 Cornhole Set
    SEE IT

    Endure any weather with this waterproof and welded steel set that comes with a carrying bag and eight bags to help you score.

    Best portable cornhole set Two portable Cornhole toss games, one red and the other blue and a blue bag underneath. GoSports Portable PVC Framed Toss Game Set
    SEE IT

    Whether you want to play beachside or  on the next camping trip, this lightweight set allows you to bring the game with you just about anywhere.

    You might be thinking: What is cornhole? The simple answer is that it’s a lawn game that entails two teams or individuals competing to see who can throw a bean bag into a hole. You may have grown up calling it “bean bag toss,” “bag toss,” “tailgate toss,” or something similar. Members of the American Cornhole League, whose games are broadcast on ESPN (yes, really), would no doubt describe it in greater detail, but that’s the gist. That said, not all cornhole sets are created equal. The best cornhole boards for you might not be the right one for your neighbor. For example, if you like to play cornhole at night but don’t have a particularly well-lit yard, perhaps an LED board is in order.

    Or, if you like to bring the fun with you wherever you go, you’ll want a lightweight portable set to always be the life of the party, whether on the beach, in a park, or at a friend’s backyard barbecue. Maybe you’re so dedicated to your cornhole craft that you play come rain or shine—in that case, a weatherproof cornhole set has your name written all over it. Perhaps you or someone you love is so particular that custom cornhole boards are desired, possibly even one that you can get monogrammed. Fancy! Well, there are a lot of great outdoor yard games on the market, but if you’re looking for the best cornhole boards, you’re in the right place. Follow our guide to one of the best backyard games for adults and kids alike, and get ready to get corny!

    The best cornhole boards and sets: Reviews & Recommendations

    Close your eyes and envision yourself at play, kicking back with your friends and family, and playing some of the most fun outdoor games imaginable. What does that look like, exactly? Are you in your own yard, or somewhere else? Is it daytime or after supper? Consider just what you want your cornhole experience to look and feel like, then it’s time to go shopping.

    Best overall: GoSports Classic Cornhole Set

    GoSports

    SEE IT

    This set screams “Americana.” These rustic cornhole boards come in two different sizes—regulation 4 feet by 2 feet, and tailgate-friendly 3 feet by 2 feet. These are what you picture when you imagine cornhole during summer camp and barbecues of yore. You get eight regulation 16-ounce cornhole bags (four red, four blue) and a board in a range of designs from chevron to football to striped. It’s also UV- and water-resistant.

    Best for all-weather: Triumph All-Weather Aluminum 2×3 Cornhole Set

    Triumph Sports

    SEE IT

    Rust isn’t a worry with this 36-inch by 24-inch bonded, power-coated, and welded option (to prevent wear and tear). Locking leg hinges keep these aluminum-surfaced, steel-frame boards in place when in use, and they fold up easily when it’s time to pack up. You also get six professional-grade, 6-inch by 6-inch cloth bean bags and a carrying case. 

    Best with lights: Triumph LED Lighted Cornhole Set

    Triumph Sports

    SEE IT

    The LED lights require batteries (not included), so you don’t have to depend on an outlet for fun. The glowsticks are exactly what you’d expect: the kind you crack in half to activate, which you can then use to illuminate your bag. LED-lit cornhole boards are few and far between, so if you can’t find something you like, buy whatever set speaks to you and instead invest in light-up accessories.

    Best portable set: GoSports Portable PVC Framed Toss Game Set

    GoSports

    SEE IT

    A PVC frame is responsible for the lightweight nature of these boards, which measure 3 feet by 2 feet and are covered in tearproof fabric. The tradeoff in a portable model is that you could find yourself chasing your board down the beach on a gusty day, but it’s worth it if you plan to take it loads of different places (and want to save your back from the strain).

    Best budget: EastPoint Sports Bean Bag Toss

    EastPoint Sports

    SEE IT

    Though it’s not a particularly high-tech function, this set (two boards, eight bags, and a convenient carry pack) does include a helpful bean bag return (i.e., a sloped extension from the board hole) that allows for continuous play. Two team colors—red and yellow—make it easy to keep track of who’s winning, even if you’re just down for a nice, non-competitive afternoon. 

    What to consider when shopping for the best cornhole boards

    First, the great news about buying the best cornhole boards: It’s a can’t-lose proposition. No matter what kind you end up with, good times are afoot, because cornhole is straight-up one of the best outdoor games around. This is due to the fact that it can be played by those with no particular athletic skill—who, perhaps, like to balance a hot dog or slushy drink in their non-throwing hand—as well as those who lack the capacity to treat any game (lawn or otherwise) as anything less than a cutthroat competition. The most important factors to consider before you select a particular cornhole set are your basic preferences in order to maximize the fun—and the likelihood you’ll crush the competition.

    Are there regulation specs for a cornhole board?

    Yes, there are regulation specs for a cornhole board—if you’re a professional cornhole player. The American Cornhole League requires that boards be 4 feet by 2 feet, made by an ACL-approved manufacturer, and that cornhole bags “are within the ACL general bag parameters and…go through a proprietary coefficient of friction and flexibility testing process.” What this means for you is that your board will likely be around the same size, and your cornhole bags will have a similar feel. But unless you’re competing for real, there’s no need to get hung up on the particulars. At the end of the day, you need two movable boards with holes in them, plus some bean bags that will fit through the holes.

    Is cornhole portable, or does it just live permanently in your backyard?

    The answers are yes and yes. If portability is a priority, you want to look for an option that packs up and stores easily, comes with a carrying case, and isn’t so heavy that it’s hard to tote. If you want cornhole to be a permanent fixture in the wonderland of your yard, you can opt for something sturdier and heavier—that way there’s no danger of it getting knocked about in the wind. If you’re planning to plant your cornhole and leave it there in perpetuity, make sure to choose a model that’s weatherproof.

    Is design important to you?

    If beauty is important in every aspect of your life, including your backyard shenanigans, guess what: There’s a cornhole set for that! If you’re willing to spend a few hundred bucks, you can get a custom design cornhole set—monogram and everything—made of spiffy driftwood and with durable cornhole bags in a range of colors, so there’s sure to be something that coordinates with your overall lawn lewk.

    Are you a cornhole night owl?

    If you come alive when the sun goes down, you need all of the lights! You can purchase boards that come with lights or separately buy LEDs—for the hole, the board border, the bags, or all of the above—then affix them yourself. It’s a simple upgrade that changes the game, literally, because you can keep playing way into the wee hours of the night. 

    Related: Playing outside on a sunny summer day? Purchase a parasol to help protect your skin.

    FAQs

    Q:

    Why is it called cornhole?

    Legend has it that the game is called cornhole simply because the bags were originally filled with corn: hefty and ponderous enough to throw at holes, but safer than, say, pebbles.

    Q:

    How far apart are cornhole boards?

    The answer to this question depends on how seriously you take your outdoor yard games. If the answer is “not so seriously,” then put them wherever you want (and if you’re playing with younger aficionados, consider moving them closer together). If you’re playing among corn-stars, official regulation rules per the American Cornhole League say boards should be “27 feet apart from front edge to front edge.” It also recommends “decreasing the distance in three-foot increments to find a comfortable beginning playing distance,” then work your way up.

    Q:

    Who invented cornhole?

    There’s no definitive answer, but many believe the honor goes to 14th-century Bavarian cabinet maker Matthias Kuepermann. Others credit Illinois’ Blackhawk tribe, while some say we have Kentucky farmer Jebediah McGillicuddy to thank for the best outdoor game. The origins of cornhole may never be officially established, but what seems to be beyond dispute is that its surge in popularity is due to the Midwestern U.S. states embracing the game wholeheartedly to this day. 

    The final word on shopping for the best cornhole boards

    The most important things to consider when investing in a cornhole set are: Will you be traveling with it? Will you want to play in all sorts of weather? How much do you want to spend? Do you need a nighttime option? Beyond that, you’re golden, because what you’re basically investing in are some beanbags and a couple of boards with holes drilled out of them. Sometimes the simplest things are the most fun, and when it comes to the best outdoor games, there’s nothing more fun than grabbing a drink and pummeling your friends and family in a few highly competitive rounds of tossing cornhole bags at a board.

    The post The best cornhole boards of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best swing sets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-swing-sets/ Thu, 15 Apr 2021 12:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=282889
    The best swing sets let your kids have fun without leaving home.

    Here are the best swing sets to make your backyard into your kid’s dream playground.

    The post The best swing sets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best swing sets let your kids have fun without leaving home.

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall A swing set with three belt swings, one trapeze bar with gym rings, wavy slide, fireman's pole, and monkey bars into it. Lifetime Monkey Bar Adventure Swing Set
    SEE IT
    Best wooden A wooden playset swing set with two standard belt swing set swings and a yellow and green swing trapeze bar into it. Backyard Discovery Lakewood Playset
    SEE IT
    Best for large yard A full set of swing for kids with a wooden roof, trimmed windows, a covered upper porch, unique bay windows and a sun deck, also two belt swings and a two-person glider provides swinging fun for up to 4 kids at once. Backyard Discovery Skyfort II
    SEE IT

    A swing set can be lots of fun for kids and also provide parents with recreation right in the backyard. When the weather is nice, nothing beats letting little kids run around outside to expend energy. But if you’re buried in the demands of work and parenthood, you may not always have time to take the little ones to the playground or the park. We’ve rounded up our recommendations of the best swing sets will have them sliding and climbing for hours, right in the safety of your own backyard.

    How we chose the best swing sets

    Swing sets can provide years of fun for your kids right in the backyard, but as they’re typically a big purchase that often comes with additional costs, like delivery, assembly, and add-ons, choosing can be a daunting task. Of course, safety considerations are paramount, as are size, durability, and price. Depending on its complexity, building a swing set can also be a challenge, so we took into account the ease of assembly. We considered options from trusted brands such as Backyard Discovery, Little Tikes, and KidKraft in making our recommendations. We also looked for kids’ swing sets that will provide new challenges and opportunities for fun for children as they get older.

    The best swing sets: Reviews & Recommendations

    Kids are notorious for getting bored easily, so any swing set you purchase should have enough features to hold their attention. Our recommendations will help you find the right playground sets for backyards for the age of your children, the size of your yard, the features you want, and your budget.

    Best overall: Lifetime Monkey Bar Adventure Swing Set

    Lifetime

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 175 inches D x 178 inches W x 128 inches H
    • Materials: Polyethylene (plastic), steel 
    • Weight: 505 pounds
    • Age suitability: 3 to 12 years old

    Pros

    • Serves a range of ages
    • Comes with swings, slide, clubhouse, climbing ladder, storefront, and more
    • Available in three colors

    Cons

    • Some users say it’s not easy to assemble

    An outdoor swing set is a major purchase that will likely spend years in your backyard. That’s why it’s smart to pick one that will keep your kids entertained from when they are toddlers to pre-teens. The Lifetime Monkey Bar Adventure Swing Set fits the bill. Designed for ages 3 through 12, this comprehensive unit comes with two swings and a wavy slide for younger kids. As your children get older, the climbing ladder and the rope ladder present new physical challenges. This swing set with slide also features a clubhouse with a blackboard so kids can have an outdoor classroom. 

    Keep in mind that at 178 inches across (roughly 14 feet) and 505 pounds, this set will require substantial space in the backyard. It does come in three colors (green, brown, and tan) that will blend in better with the surroundings than many other swing sets. And the Lifetime Monkey Bar Adventure Swing Set also comes with a 5-year limited warranty.

    Best wooden: Backyard Discovery Lakewood Playset

    Backyard Discovery

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 135 inches D x 168.5 inches W x 103 inches H
    • Materials: Cedar
    • Weight: 227 pounds
    • Age suitability: 3 to 6 years old

    Pros

    • Good for small backyards
    • Comes with sandbox, rock-climbing wall, and built-in bench
    • Instructions are easy to follow

    Cons

    • Some users say the wood is low quality

    Backyard Discovery’s Lakewood Playset is a relatively basic set that comes with a few extra features, like a sandbox, rock climbing wall, and a snack stand with a built-in bench. Like most modern swing sets, it comes unassembled and you’ll have to put it together yourself, but the instructions are clear and the finished product is a safe and sturdy cedar swing set that you can feel confident letting your kids monkey around on. Then take a breather and watch from your porch swing.

    Best for small yard: Backyard Discovery Bay Pointe Wooden Swing Set

    Backyard Discovery

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 107 inches D x 123 inches W x 92 inches H
    • Materials: Cedar, plastic, metal
    • Weight: 118 pounds
    • Age suitability: 3 to 6 years old

    Pros

    • Smaller footprint
    • Less expensive
    • Made of cedar

    Cons

    • Only suits a small range of kids
    • Looks somewhat unfinished

    Even if your backyard isn’t spacious, your kids can still have plenty of fun. The Backyard Discovery Bay Pointe Wooden Swing Set measures 10 feet wide, which is small enough to fit in a range of yards. Should you need to move it, this swing set for small yard is also comparably lightweight at 118 pounds. This small swing set with slide also features a rock climber and a fort with a blackboard. Less expensive than many other options, it’s a great starter swing set for kids ages 3 to 6 years old. And it comes with a 5-year warranty.

    Best for large yard: Backyard Discovery Skyfort II

    Backyard Discovery

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 12 feet 4 inches H x 21 feet 11 inches W x 16 feet 9 inches D
    • Materials: Cedar, plastic
    • Weight: 709 pounds
    • Age suitability: 3 to 10 years old

    Pros

    • Comprehensive entertainment system
    • Made of rot-resistant cedar
    • Comes with easy-to-follow instructions

    Cons

    • Expensive 
    • May be too big for many yards

    This model from Backyard Discovery is almost 22 feet long and spans from monkey bars, to a play fort and slide, to a pair of swings and a two-person glider. The play fort has windows, a covered porch, and a sun deck, making it a great swing set for big kids. The swing set with rock wall is made from 100 percent cedar, which has a natural resistance to rot and decay and with basic upkeep can last for over twenty years. While it’s a big assembly job, Backyard Discovery offers a 3D interactive assembly app that makes it super easy to follow. And when you’re done, take a well-deserved break in one of the best hammocks.

    Best toddler swing: Little Tikes 2-in-1 Snug ‘n Secure Swing

    Little Tikes

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 16 inches D x 16.3 inches W x 17 inches H
    • Materials: Plastic
    • Weight: 3 pounds
    • Age suitability: 9 months to 4 years old

    Pros

    • Classic product
    • Adjusts as toddler ages
    • Can use in a variety of settings (indoor and outdoor)

    Cons

    • Just one swing
    • Not connected to a swing set

    The ubiquitous Little Tikes toddler swing is easily recognizable due to its popularity, and that popularity is earned. The item is made from lightweight plastic and is fitted with a T-bar and straps to keep your tot safely secured while they swing and is able to bear up to 50 pounds. While it’s not a toddler swing set, the swing has hooks to hang, or you can purchase an additional adaptor to hang it from a tree or other sturdy structure. 

    Best budget: KidKraft Appleton Play Set

    KidKraft

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 108 inches D x 123 inches W x 95 inches H
    • Materials: Cedar, plastic, hardware
    • Weight: 137.7 pounds
    • Age suitability: 3 to 10 years old

    Pros

    • Comes with lots of features
    • Less expensive
    • Good for smaller yards

    Cons

    • Not as substantial as other models

    This play set from KidKraft comes in under $500 and is made of high-quality cedar wood. It boasts two swings, a slide, a rock-climbing wall, a sandbox, and a vinyl chalk wall at the top of its play deck for creative fun. The weight limit is slightly less than more expensive models (about 770 pounds, while others generally hold about 1,000 pounds) but it’s plenty steady enough.

    Things to consider before purchasing a swing set

    Swing sets can be expensive, so you’ll want to make sure you weigh a range of factors before making the investment.

    Safety

    The number-one thing to think about when buying the best swing sets for kids is safety. Confirm that the structure is sturdy and stable, and stay away from anything that feels lightweight. Something that’s too light could run the risk of tipping over when your child climbs on it. 

    Expandability

    Because a kids’ swing set is such a big purchase, and because kids grow so quickly, you may want to splurge on an expandable design model that can grow as the kids grow. These types are modular and allow you to build onto the mainframe as your child’s wants and abilities expand. On the other hand, you may prefer a less expensive, non-expandable model with the understanding that your kids may be interested in something entirely different in a couple years.

    Materials

    Then decide what material you’re interested in. Decades ago, metal was the most widely available material for backyard swing sets, but now wood or plastic are more popular. Wooden swing sets are the most durable of the three, which comes at a higher price, and many would argue that it’s the nicest looking option. Metal and plastic are less costly, but that comes at the expense of a low weight capacity and susceptibility to bend and break.

    Metal swing sets can run the risk of rusting and bending, but one made from durable, quality materials should be long lasting. A galvanized steel model with powder coating will be strong and carry protection from natural elements that tend to rust and deteriorate metals. Keep an eye out for a model that comes with rubber or plastic caps on the end pieces to protect kids from sharp edges.

    Wood is the most durable material for an outdoor swing set. Quality materials come at a higher price, but the splurge may be worth it for a structure that will last all through the childhood years, and possibly beyond. Backyard Discovery swing sets are one of the most popular brands for wooden models and come in a variety of different frames.

    Size

    A larger swing set offers extended play. Kids love forts and secret hideouts, and many playsets now come equipped with hideouts, porches, and sun decks. A larger extended playset has all this and more, and in many instances will come in modular versions so that you can add on to the set as your kids grow and require more challenges in their play.

    If you have a toddler and aren’t quite ready to throw down money for an entire swing set that they aren’t old enough to use yet, a single toddler swing is an inexpensive option for outdoor swinging. These individual swings are easily adapted to hang from different secure locations.

    Price

    Swing sets are by nature a big purchase, so in this instance, “on a budget” means roughly under $500. Here’s a tip for the frugal: even the best swing sets are often sold at a discount during the off-season, especially if you live in a climate with cold winters. A wide assortment of plastic and metal options are available in that price range, but we also found some wooden swing sets that are inexpensive and reliable.

    FAQs


    Q: How much does a swing set cost?

    Depending on the material, size, and number of features, swing sets can range from less than $100 for models that are bare bones to thousands of dollars for mini-playgrounds that feature rock climbing walls and forts in addition to the typical swings and slides.

    Q: Are metal or wood swing sets better?

    While this is a loaded question and depends somewhat on a person’s individual needs, overall we would say that wood is better than metal for your backyard swing set. A quality wood model is durable enough that, with proper care and maintenance, it can withstand years of use and weather. A metal swing set could potentially bend and break after sustained use, and you may find yourself dealing with rust.

    Q: How long do wooden swing sets last?

    In general, you can expect about twenty years of life from a wooden swing set—possibly longer depending on the kind of wood. Pressure treated pine, a preserved wood, is the most durable and long lasting, and it requires the least amount of maintenance and upkeep. Cedar, another popular option, is not preserved and needs to be stained or painted periodically.

    Q: How much weight can a swing set hold?

    You should check the specifications of each model you’re considering to find out how much weight it can hold. As long as you’re not going with the absolute cheapest model, you shouldn’t have any need to worry about the weight limits. Most wooden swing sets list at least 1,000 pounds as a conservative limit, but you want to be safe and check the specs.

    Some final thoughts on the best swing sets

    The best swing sets for your backyard will offer your kids years of outdoor play and get them off electronics like tablets. Swinging, sliding, and climbing are great ways to get exercise and keep the kids happy—and keep the parents happy when the little ones are sleeping soundly through the night after a busy day of play. Adding a swing set to your yard is a big decision, but one that pays back tenfold in the end. You’ll love watching your kids play for years.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best swing sets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best kids water bottles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-kids-water-bottles/ Fri, 15 Jul 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=455955
    Best kids water bottles sliced header
    Stan Horaczek

    H2-Oh kids, and parents, will love these water bottles.

    The post The best kids water bottles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best kids water bottles sliced header
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Hydro Flask’s stainless steel water bottle offers great durability for little adventurers. Hydro Flask 12-ounce Kids Wide Mouth
    SEE IT

    Hydro Flask’s stainless steel water bottle offers great durability for little adventurers.

    Best stainless steel The Yeti Rambler Jr. will quench your thirst in the great outdoors. Yeti Rambler Jr.
    SEE IT

    The Yeti Rambler Jr. will quench your thirst in the great outdoors.

    Best insulated The vacuum insulation of the CamelBak Eddy+ will keep your water icy cold for hours and hours. CamelBak Eddy+ Kids 12-ounce Bottle
    SEE IT

    The vacuum insulation of the CamelBak Eddy+ will keep your water icy cold for hours and hours.

    Drinking water is a cornerstone to healthy living, so a kids water bottle is an essential piece of every child’s day bag. The tricky part is finding one that kids will actually want to use. While we can’t guarantee our picks will get them excited to drink water, per se, they’ll help reinforce positive lifelong habits as we push our kids to stay active, get plenty of rest, eat a well-balanced diet, and stay hydrated. These are the best kids water bottles we’ve found to date.

    How we chose the best kids water bottles

    I’ve been writing about gear and gadgets for over 10 years and, during that time, my byline has appeared on CNN Underscored, Gear Patrol, and TechnoBuffalo. At Popular Science, I’ve covered everything from the best 55-inch TVs to the best carbon monoxide detectors, so I write about a wide range of products. 

    To make our selections, I researched dozens of water bottles for kids and spoke to parents I know with young kids. I also did hours of general research on water bottles and their construction. Lastly, I considered recommendations for water bottles from parenting-focused publications. As a new dad, I took a particular interest in this topic because I’ll eventually need a good water bottle for my child.

    The best kids water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

    Water bottles for kids are a dime a dozen but there’s a lot of nuance in their designs if you look closely. Once you find something that meets the proper criteria, one final thing to remember: Make sure your kid likes what you buy.

    Best overall: Hydro Flask 12-ounce Kids Wide Mouth

    Hydro Flask

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Hydro Flask 12 oz. Kids Wide Mouth features tough stainless steel construction and double-wall vacuum insulation to keep drinks icy cold all day long.

    Specs

    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Capacity: 12 oz
    • Height: 6.8 inches
    • Weight: 0.6 pounds
    • Dishwasher safe: Yes
    • BPA Free: Yes

    Pros

    • Solid construction
    • Double-wall insulation
    • Perforated flex boot for extra protection

    Cons

    • Expensive

    Hydro Flask’s 12-ounce Kids Wide Mouth bottle is made of durable stainless steel and features double-wall vacuum insulation, so drinks stay icy cold for up to 24 hours. This is particularly great during the hot summer when dehydration is particularly dangerous.

    The Hydro Flask bottle features a straw lid that’s easy for kids of all ages to use. It’s made of solid plastic that curious kids won’t be able to chew through. Like all straw lids, it can be tough to keep clean without a small brush handy, but it’s also the easiest drinking apparatus for small kids. It also features a convenient loop handle and a perforated flex boot, adding extra protection and grip when placed on a surface.

    Best of all, the Hydro Flask is dishwasher safe, so you can throw it in with the rest of your dishes and get on with your day. Plus, it comes in many colors and is highly customizable with alternate lids and a name tag so your kid doesn’t lose it at school. 

    The Hydro Flask is a bit pricier than our other picks but its durable construction should withstand regular bumps and bruises while keeping water cold.

    Best stainless steel: Yeti Rambler Jr.

    YETI

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With a durable design and easy-to-use straw cap, the Rambler Jr. from Yeti is a great option for adventurous kids.

    Specs

    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Capacity: 12 oz
    • Height: 8.4 inches
    • Weight: 1 pound
    • Dishwasher safe: Yes
    • BPA Free: Yes

    Pros

    • Customizable
    • Durable for the outdoors
    • Vacuum insulated

    Cons

    • Taller and heavier than our other picks

    The Yeti Rambler Jr. is a heavy-duty kids water bottle. It comes with a leak-resistant straw cap and features a double-wall vacuum insulated design. We like straw caps because they’re easy for kids to use and give them more control over the flow of water into their mouths. The straw cap with the Rambler Jr. is also ultra-durable to withstand a few bumps and bruises on the trail. Yeti’s setup is dishwasher-safe and is available in various bright colors. For adventurous kids, the Rambler Jr. can be customized with premade graphics and text. You can also upload a custom design on Yeti’s website for a truly personalized water bottle.

    Best insulated: CamelBak Eddy+ Kids 12-ounce Bottle

    CamelBak

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With a durable design and vacuum insulation, the CamelBak Eddy+ is a great option for long days away from home.

    Specs

    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Capacity: 12 oz
    • Height: 6.8 inches
    • Weight: 0.6 pounds
    • Dishwasher safe: Yes
    • BPA Free: Yes

    Pros

    • Vacuum insulation keeps water icy cold for hours
    • Fun, playful designs
    • Soft bite valve helps prevent leaks

    Cons

    • Straw can be tough to clean

    Featuring a variety of adorable designs and durable stainless steel construction, the CamelBak Eddy+ 12oz bottle reimagines the company’s unique bottle design for kids. Vacuum insulation keeps water cold for several hours to keep kids hydrated during a busy day of school, a day at the playground, or little league practice. (There’s also a carry handle for easy transportation.) The bottle features a powder coat finish, giving it a grippy texture that doesn’t wash out in the dishwasher. 

    The lid features Camelbak’s signature bite valve where kids bite softly on the plastic straw to make water come out. It’s intuitive and fun for kids, plus it makes the bottle spillproof and leakproof. The valve may be a slight annoyance for parents, as it’s a separate, removable piece, that takes a little extra effort to clean thoroughly. It’s definitely worth the extra effort if the valve gets your kid drinking, though.

    The 12oz Eddy+ is also available in plastic if you want something lighter and more affordable.

    Best leakproof: Thermos Funtainer Stainless Steel Water Bottle

    Thermos

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Thermos Funtainer is available in a variety of fun designs and features a simple leakproof, spillproof design.

    Specs

    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Capacity: 12 oz
    • Height: 7 inches
    • Weight: 0.4 pounds
    • Dishwasher safe: Yes
    • BPA Free: Yes

    Pros

    • Lid covers straw from dirt and grime
    • Insulation keeps drinks cold
    • Lid handle makes it easy to carry

    Cons

    • Flip-top lid might be complicated for young kids
    • Features multiple pieces

    The Thermos Funtainer features a simple design and is available in various colors and graphics (including Batman). We love the Funtainer’s spillproof, leakproof design. Instead of a flip-up straw, it features a flip-top lid with a silicone straw underneath. The design helps prevent spills and leaks and keeps the straw protected from dirt and grime, making this option a more hygienic choice. 

    While the design helps protect against germs and leaks, it might be more complicated for younger kids because you have to press a button to open the lid. The lid also features a handle that makes the Funtainer easy to carry and the insulated design keeps drinks cold for up to 12 hours. Like other picks on our list, this bottle is dishwasher safe, though Thermos recommends handwashing.

    Best travel: Takeya Kids Insulated Water Bottle

    Takeya

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Takeya Kids Insulated Water Bottle can carry more liquid than our other picks, comes in a variety of fun colors, and offers a convenient loop handle for easy carrying.

    Specs

    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Capacity: 14 oz
    • Height: 8.11 inches
    • Weight: 0.61 pounds
    • Dishwasher safe: Yes
    • BPA Free: Yes

    Pros

    • Loop handle for carrying
    • Insulation keeps drinks cold
    • Flip-up straw

    Cons

    • Larger size might be heavy for younger kids

    Featuring a 14 oz vessel and flip-up straw lid, Takeya’s insulated water bottle for kids is a great companion for travel. It holds slightly more water than other options on our list and its double-wall vacuum insulation keeps liquids cool for up to 24 hours. Meanwhile, the lid features a loop handle for carrying or attaching to a backpack, so it’s easy to take to school, practice, and wherever else. Takeya’s kids water bottle is available in a variety of cool colors and comes with a soft-touch boot for improved durability. If you want to carry even more water, Takeya’s insulated water bottle for kids is also available in 16 oz.

    Best budget: Nalgene Kids Grip-N-Gulp

    Nalgene

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Nalgene’s Grip-N-Gulp features delightful designs and a sippy cup lid, making it a great option for little kids.

    Specs

    • Material: Plastic
    • Capacity: 12 oz
    • Height: 7.25 inches
    • Weight: 0.2 pounds
    • Dishwasher safe: Yes
    • BPA Free: Yes

    Pros

    • Affordable
    • Fun, colorful designs
    • Lightweight

    Cons

    • Not insulated

    The Kids Grip-N-Gulp from Nalgene features a spill-proof sippy cup lid and is available in various colors. Each color offers a fun graphic, from sea turtles to space to a volcano. They’re quirky and fun, making the Grip-N-Gulp an excellent choice for toddlers. Nalgene claims its bottle is 100 percent leak-proof and supports different lids, including a wide-mouth loop top for older kids. The plastic design is robust, dishwasher safe, and BPA and BPS-free. This option isn’t insulated, so it won’t keep water cold for very long, but its straightforward, durable design and support for multiple lids make it an excellent budget pick.

    What to look for when picking the best kids water bottle

    Choosing the right water bottle isn’t as straightforward as you think. In 2022, they’re made from many different materials, come in different shapes and sizes, and some feature accessories like different lids and slings for easier carrying. With a water bottle for a child, you should also pay close attention to how it works and how it breaks down when you need to clean it. A kid’s water bottle should be very durable, easy to fill, easy to clean, and preferably come in a size and shape that appeals to your child.

    Material

    Water bottles are generally made from either thick, durable plastic or stainless steel. Occasionally, you may find water bottles made with shatter-resistant glass but they are rare and realistically too fragile for children.

    Stainless steel water bottles are our preferred choice. They are very durable, and often feature vacuum insulation, which features a small air gap between two layers of metal in the bottle walls to reduce conduction to keep liquids hot or cold for several hours.

    The best stainless steel water bottles we researched were all made from 18/8 stainless steel. The numbers “18/8” represent its composition—18% Chromium and 8% Nickel. It’s a food-grade material that’s resistant to corrosion and oxidation. 

    Plastic water bottles are more affordable but don’t generally offer much insulation, especially in kids’ sizes. However, we like them for kids because they are light so they are easy to carry. The best plastic water bottles are made from a plastic called Tritan, which is incredibly durable and also BPA-free. BPA, or bisphenol A, is an industrial chemical that has been used to make plastics since the 1950s. Studies have shown that, when used in food or drink containers, BPA can seep into liquids, and may be harmful. Though the FDA deemed BPA safe for food-grade use in 2014, manufacturers generally avoid using it, and we recommend avoiding manufacturers that do.

    Easy to use

    Small children won’t drink out of a water bottle with an obtuse design. We looked for options that are intuitive and easy to understand, so kids can easily use them without an adult’s help. We also looked for bottles that are very light and compact: No kid wants to slog around a water bottle that’s big, bulky, and heavy. Finally, we considered bottles that support multiple lid types, from straw spouts to sports caps. Each kid will have their preference, so it’s nice to be able to switch things up without buying multiple bottles.

    Easy to clean

    Parents are busy, so the easier a water bottle is to clean, the better. Most of the water bottles we considered are rated dishwasher safe, including our stainless steel picks. This allows parents to throw their water bottles into the dishwasher and focus on other things. That said, we also looked for water bottles with comparatively few pieces and no tricky crevices to scrub, in case you wind up having to wash them by hand.

    Durability

    Kids aren’t delicate with their stuff. Above all else, any water bottle you buy for a child has to be able to withstand getting dropped, scuffed, scraped, thrown, sat on, rolled, and banged against tables all day, every day. Premium plastic bottles resist cosmetic dents and scratches better than stainless steel but erode quicker over the long term. That said, both kinds should last for many years if properly cleaned and cared for. And if they aren’t, many water bottles for kids offer replacement parts when something gets damaged.

    Design

    In addition to searching for water bottles that are easy to use and clean, we also wanted options in various sizes and colors that support a wide range of accessories. Kids can be picky, so giving them options will allow them to choose the water bottle they love. You want your kids to be excited about the bottle they’re carrying around like it’s part of their ensemble. 

    Of course, we also made sure the water bottles we researched don’t have parts that could become a choking hazard.

    FAQs

    Q: How much does a kids water bottle cost?

    A kids water bottle—depending on size and material—will run you between $16-$30.

    Q: Are glass water bottles safe for kids?

    Glass is considered one of the safest materials to avoid chemical buildup but it’s hard to argue that giving a glass water bottle to a small child is a good idea. Many manufacturers make shatter-resistant glass bottles but they can still crack and break, which can get dangerous very quickly. Realistically, the very real fear of a kid smashing a glass bottle and cutting themselves outweighs the hypothetical possibility of non-toxic materials getting into their water over time.

    Q: How often should kids’ water bottles be cleaned?

    Kids can play hard and attract all kinds of germs and grime, so you should clean their (and yours) water bottle at least once a day. Cleaning it this often might seem like a lot of work for busy parents, but reusable water bottles can harbor bacteria that can grow if not cleaned regularly. A simple rinse with soap and warm water will do in a pinch but for a more thorough cleaning, you will need a bottle brush, straw brush, and looped detail-cleaning brush, like this kit from OXO. Using the right tools will ensure you get into all the nooks and crannies and clean off any buildup.

    Q: How big should a kids’ water bottle be?

    A kids’ water bottle should be a comfortable size for them to carry all day. Most reusable water bottles for kids are 12 ounces. It’s a good size for kids to hold on their own, even at full capacity. Some companies offer 20 oz. options for older children but at that size you may be better off buying a standard water bottle for adults. These sizes should be manageable at full capacity and shouldn’t become burdensome over extended periods.

    Q: Can you put other drinks in a kid’s water bottle?

    Most manufacturers advise against putting liquids other than water in a kids’ water bottle. Hydro Flask, for example, says not to put carbonated or pulpy beverages in its stainless steel water bottles because the acidity of certain sodas and juices can erode the inner wall over extended periods. The same rules apply to plastic water bottles. None of our picks is 100% leakproof, so we strongly advise against hot liquids in your kid’s water bottles to avoid accidents.

    Final thoughts on the best kids water bottles

    Between school, sports, and other extracurriculars, kids these days are busier than ever. They have enough to worry about, but drinking water shouldn’t be one of them. As you send them off to tackle their day, equipping them with a reusable water bottle is an excellent way to ensure they stay hydrated. And while you’re at it, grab one of the best gallon water bottles for yourself and stay refreshed running them from activity to activity.

    The post The best kids water bottles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best packable rain jackets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-packable-rain-jackets/ Sat, 30 Jul 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458659
    The best packable rain jackets
    Stan Horaczek

    Because weather is never 100 percent predictable, no matter what the forecast says.

    The post The best packable rain jackets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best packable rain jackets
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best Overall Showers Pass Refuge Jacket is the best overall packable rain jacket. Showers Pass Refuge Jacket
    SEE IT

    The Showers Pass Refuge keeps you dry under the worst conditions.

    Best for hiking Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for hiking. Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket
    SEE IT

    The Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket is elastic enough to give you full freedom of movement.

    Best for Travel Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for travel. Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket
    SEE IT

    You never know where you might end up, but the Patagonia Torrentshell 3L is ready for anything.

    As an all-weather bike commuter, mountain lover, and frequent traveler who rarely allows the elements to deter me from my plans, I always carry around a packable rain jacket. Whether I’m on the road for work or off on an outdoor adventure, it never hurts to have rain gear that is effective, breathable, and light enough to carry around all day. The best packable rain jackets compress down to about the size of a large wallet, folding into a pocket or the corner of your bag.

    Though I see it ideally as a very dynamic piece of clothing, there are absolutely certain rain jackets better suited specifically for various activities. Depending on your budget, you can find expensive, high-tech jackets loaded with features, and basic, reasonably priced ones. A full list of great packable rain jackets would be very long, so I’ve narrowed and selected the best packable rain jackets.

    How we picked the best packable rain jackets

    As a person who rides a bicycle everywhere, I’ve been on a perpetual quest for the best packable rain jacket for years now. While I think I’ve pretty much found it, there’s always new technology and updated features to try out. You only know if they do what they say they’ll do after you’ve weathered a storm or three wearing them. As it happens, I work in film and television production, so I spend a lot of time working out in the elements, putting my jackets to the test.

    The jackets that made our list provided sustained rain and wind protection, while being lightweight enough to pack easily into a pocket or bag. I also considered fit and comfort, especially in the chin guard and hood. Lastly, I looked for special features like a fold-down tail and zippered pockets, which often make a particular jacket stand out from similar designs from other companies.

    The best packable rain jackets: Reviews & Recommendations

    I have a few favorite packable rain jackets that I use regularly depending on what I’m doing and where I’m going. I found them through working and traveling, using them in all kinds of situations. Many of those jackets made their way onto this list, along with some specialty shells for traveling, cycling, hiking, and other adventures.

    Best overall: Showers Pass Refuge Jacket – (Men’s Version)

    Showers Pass

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Showers Pass Refuge jacket possesses all the features we want for almost any adventure we dream up.

    Specs 

    • Weight: 19 oz (size M)
    • Material: 3-layer Elite waterproof hardshell
    • Price: $295

    Pros

    • Fully seam taped
    • Removable hood that fits over a helmet
    • Multiple zippered pockets
    • All outward-facing zippers are waterproof

    Cons 

    • Expensive
    • No stuff sack

    The Showers Pass Refuge jacket is my go-to for stormy bike commutes, long-distance hiking trips, and wandering around cities in the rain. I seem to find myself caught in unpredictable adverse weather on a pretty regular basis, so I look for rain jackets with special features that make walking around in a storm almost feel enjoyable. 

    Most rain jackets, no matter what they’re made from, will eventually allow water through if submitted to a relentless heavy rain that lasts for more than a few hours. The Refuge jacket is effective for all-day light or moderate rain or about three hours of a heavy downpour. When I say downpour, I mean the kind of rain that makes it difficult to see what is right in front of you; the kind that if possible you might want to take shelter from until it’s passed. 

    Its enormous zippered side pockets easily accommodate my Galaxy S21, the reinforced shoulder area is suited for backpack straps, and the hood fits comfortably over a helmet—and stays there while cycling thanks to a drawstring cincher. The Refuge also has a dropdown tail, which comes in handy while biking, or scoping a place to sit during or after a storm. Add in reflective details, core vents, and secure wrist cinchers to keep the wind out and it’s pretty much the best packable rain jacket. 

    The purchase of a Showers Pass Refuge jacket even supports their “enjoy all the elements” campaign, an initiative dedicated to providing programs and education to get more people outside. 

    Best for hiking: Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket – (Women’s Version)

    Rab

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: Rab’s Kinetic Alpine 2.0 is the only fully waterproof jacket we’ve found that, because of the stretchiness in the fabric, doesn’t hinder your movement at all, no matter what you may be climbing.

    Specs

    • Weight: 13.8 oz (Size L)
    • Material: Recycled polyester with 3-layer membrane
    • Price: $280

    Pros

    • 2-way front zipper
    • Zippered inner chest pocket
    • Stretch woven Proflex panels in hips, arms, shoulders, & hood

    Cons 

    • Expensive

    True to its name, the Rab Kinetic Alpine jacket has been designed thoughtfully and specifically for climbing mountains. Described by the company as a “breakthrough in technology,” the softshell jacket is made from a proprietary material called “Proflex”—a stretchy and breathable waterproof fabric that’s perfect for propelling yourself up the side of a rocky and/or snowy cliff. It’s also engineered to handle scrapes against rough surfaces, like stone or bark, without ripping. I’m rather clumsy and routinely utilize sturdy trees and rock faces to steady myself on both inclines and descents. Despite this, my Kinetic Alpine 2 has yet to suffer any significant damage. 

    At the same time, it’s also one of the few rain jackets I’ve worn where I’ve actually forgotten that I had it on. There’s no restriction to movement, even when stretching to reach the next tree root on the way up a muddy embankment. Its hood is also among the most comfortable I’ve ever worn, with a wide chin guard.

    All the pockets are equipped with waterproof zippers; the inner chest one being the perfect place to stash small valuables like a credit card, ID, and lip balm (Chapstick definitely classifies as valuable in dry mountain environments). Last, but not least, it comes with a stuff sack for easy stowing in your pack.  

    Best for travel: Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket – (Men’s version)

    Patagonia

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Patagonia Torrentshell 3L packs neatly into its own pocket and can withstand a wide variety of adverse weather situations.

    Specs 

    • Weight: 12.5 oz. (Size M)
    • Material: Ripstop nylon with 3-layer H2No Performance shell
    • Price: $149

    Pros

    • Pit zip ventilation
    • Self-stuffs into hand warmer pocket
    • Fair Trade Certified
    • Contains recyclable materials

    Cons 

    • The recycled nylon fabric gets noisy
    • Small hood may not fit over helmets

    For travel, especially across several destinations, Patagonia’s Torrentshell 3L rain jacket has everything you need. It packs into one of the two hand warmer pockets, has pit zips and a comfortable roomy chin guard, and stands up well to rain, wind, and snow. It comes in a variety of stylish colors if you want to deviate from basic black, grey, or white. 

    The Torrentshell 3L is also both Fair Trade Certified and made from recycled materials that meet the bluesign criteria. Bluesign technologies, based in Switzerland, focuses on sustainability in the entire textile manufacturing chain to guide brands in creating products with as little negative environmental impact as possible.

    One thing to keep in mind: The recyclable nylon fabric of this jacket can be weirdly noisy. It isn’t excessive, but you may not be able to quietly slip on your rain gear to slip out for an early morning hike. 

    Best for cycling: Gore Wear C5 Gore-Tex Shakedry 1985

    GORE WEAR

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Gore Wear C5 Gore-Tex Shakedry 1985 jacket is the lightest and most packable jacket we found, making it perfect for weight and watt-obsessed cyclists (while also leaving room for more snacks in your back pockets).

    Specs 

    • Weight: 3.4 oz. (Size L)
    • Material: Gore-Tex
    • Price: $250 – $300

    Pros

    Cons 

    • Expensive
    • Really just for cycling

    While I don’t consider myself a full-on “roadie” when it comes to cycling, I do my fair share of cycling club road rides around New York City. There are tons of cyclists in the city, many of whom embark on lengthy rides around the New York Tri-State area on weekends. When the rain comes out, so does the Gore-Tex Shakedry.

    At a mere 3.4 ounces, its ultralight weight and form-fitting, which is very important for competitive cyclists looking who don’t want drag from their clothes. The Gore-Tex “Shakedry” material is so thin that it’s almost transparent, but is also somehow waterproof and windproof. The Shakedry fabric repels water beads that land on the fabric surface without letting any moisture through. When the rain stops, you can simply shake it dry with a sharp flap and put it back in your cycling jersey pocket.

    This jacket is not recommended for use with a backpack, as the straps could damage the fabric. If you prefer your cycle with a motor (and don’t need to worry so much about weight), take a look at some rain gear for motorcycle riders which is sturdier and heavier.

    Best lightweight: Outdoor Research Helium Rain Jacket – (Women’s version)

    Outdoor Research

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: At only 6.3 ounces, the Outdoor Research jacket is half the weight of most all comparable competitors, but still delivers top-of-the-line wind and rain protection.

    Specs 

    • Weight: 6.3 oz. (Size L)
    • Material: Nylon with 2.5 layer Pertex Shield
    • Price: $159

    Pros

    • Very light
    • Breathable
    • Current version has updated fabric that is 7x more tear resistant than previously

    Cons 

    • Only one pocket (chest)
    • May not withstand heavy rain

    If you very specifically want the lightest everyday rain jacket possible, consider the Helium by Outdoor Research. It’s much lighter than most of the jackets on our list but still performs well against light rain and wind. Because of the low weight, it’s a popular jacket amongst thru-hikers and long-distance backpackers who count ounces as fastidiously as enthusiast road cyclists.

    Between its weight and the fact that it packs into its chest pocket, the Helium is a great everyday carry jacket. On the other hand, that chest pocket is its only pocket, so it offers limited storage.

    Best budget: Marmot Precip Eco Jacket – (Men’s version)

    MARMOT

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: For around $100, the Marmot Precip Eco is one of the most popular (and effective) jackets we see out on the trail.

    Specs 

    • Weight: 9 oz. (Size M)
    • Material: Recycled nylon with 2.5-layer Nanopro
    • Price: $100

    Pros

    • Pit zips
    • Stuffs into own pocket
    • Good quality for price

    Cons 

    • Runs small

    Marmot consistently manufactures quality outdoor gear and sells it for reasonable prices. The Precip Eco jacket may lack some of the advanced bells and whistles found in our top picks, but it performs well and costs less than our top picks. A lightweight jacket that packs easily into one of the pockets, the Precip Eco feels roomy in the shoulders to give you a full range of movement while hoisting your pack on and off. The hood also packs into the collar, which is useful for climbers and cyclists.

    While it runs a bit small and has a hood with a narrow chin guard, you’re getting a garment that feels very close to the best of the best, without spending quite so much money.

    Things to consider when buying the best packable rain jackets

    There’s a surprising amount of technical jargon you should know before picking out a rain jacket. While shopping for one, you’ve likely seen terms like “hardshell,” “softshell,” “taped seams,” and “packable” thrown around a bit, along with claims about how waterproof and breathable a particular garment may be. This isn’t just marketing-driven jargon added to impress. They do really impact how well your jacket can protect you.

    If you’re unsure exactly what some of these mean, you’re not alone. Here’s a breakdown of what to look for when looking for the best packable rain jackets:

    Hardshell or softshell

    As with many things in the apparel and gear industries, there is no universal, absolute definition of “softshell” and “hardshell” jackets, but there are common guidelines that most companies follow. Traditionally, softshell jackets are more breathable, while hardshells offer more prolonged water protection, pack down smaller, and weigh less. 

    Hardshell jackets have a stiffer, more rigid feel than softshells, and feature a thicker, 3-layer fabric with a waterproof, breathable membrane sandwiched between its inner lining and a “hard” exterior layer. 

    Softshell jackets are made from softer, more pliable material. They’re usually stretchier and more breathable than a standard hardshell, which makes them better for moving around.

    At this point, many companies have developed new fabrics that blur these lines, providing the best properties of both in a single jacket. For example, Rab’s Proflex fabric offers the weather protection of a hardshell, with the comfort, stretchiness, and feel of a softshell. 

    Nearly all of the jackets on this list are hardshell jackets, as they tend to weigh less and pack into smaller sizes.

    Waterproof/breathable fabrics

    Most modern rain jackets are constructed with fabric made from two or three different layers of material that are fused together, maximizing protection while keeping them light and breathable. For instance, the 3-layer Elite fabric used by Showers Pass consists of an outward-facing fabric with a durable water repellent (DWR) finish, backed with a waterproof-breathable membrane laminate. This membrane is covered with microscopic pores that prevent rain-sized water droplets to pass, while allowing moisture from your body through. On the backside of that membrane, a laminate tricot liner to make sure the jacket feels dry against your skin while adding protection for the membrane layer.

    Most 2-layer (or 2.5-layer) materials use a charcoal or cellulose raised print directly on the membrane instead of a liner layer which allows for a more compact and lightweight jacket (by eliminating one layer.) 

    Taped seams, including zippers

    Stitching garments together creates hundreds of tiny needle holes in the seams—there’s no way around this when sewing. A well-made rain jacket requires the seams to be taped in order to keep water from getting through these minuscule holes. After sewing, manufacturers fuse thermoplastic tape with heat and pressure over the seams to prevent this. These are called taped seams. Without them, water can easily penetrate the seams.

    Fit, including hood

    When trying on a rain jacket, look for a Goldilocks fit—not too loose, but not too tight. If it’s snug, the jacket won’t make for an effective top layer over other outerwear like a hoodie or another, not-so-waterproof jacket. If it’s too loose and bulky, the jacket could hinder your mobility. 

    For most of us, a just-right fit is slightly larger than that of an average jacket. It won’t ride up over your waist when you raise your arms. You also want the sleeves to be long enough to come well over your wrists so they don’t pull up too high when you reach to grab something.

    We prefer a rain jacket with a hood because in cold, inclement weather, keeping your head warm and dry goes a long way in keeping you from feeling like a drowned rat. And a hood keeps the water from getting under your neck and trickling down your back. A well-designed hood has a small visor built in to keep rain out of your eyes and a way to cinch it so that it fits closely to your head. You don’t want to just see the side of the hood every time you turn your head (plus it can be dangerous). If you regularly partake in an activity like climbing or cycling where a helmet is a good idea, make sure the hood will fit over it.

    Packability

    By definition, the best packable rain jackets should fold or roll up into a very small size that makes it easy to carry around. Many of the jackets on this list stuff into their own chest or hand pocket, though that isn’t a requirement. As long as you can shove it into the last, small, available space in your backpack, that counts as packable. If your jacket doesn’t crumple into its own pocket, you can buy a lightweight “stuff sack” just for that purpose.

    FAQs

    Q: What does a packable rain jacket mean?

    Packable rain jackets are defined by the ability to fold or roll down into a very small size and stuffed into either their own pockets or small carrying sacks. They tend to be lightweight jackets made to protect you from wind and rain when you plan to go out in less-than-ideal weather.

    Q: Can you repair rain jackets?

    You can repair a rain jacket with tenacious tape, a one-sided vinyl tape made for patching waterproof fabrics, including jackets and tents. Available by the roll, or in pre-cut patches, you simply cut a piece to cover the tear plus an inch on all sides. For added strength apply a patch on both the inside and outside of the jacket over the tear. Press down from the center out and wait 24 hours if possible before wearing.
    Many camping and outdoor-focused jacket manufacturers, including Patagonia and Showers Pass, also offer repair services for their products.

    Q: How much does a packable rain jacket cost?

    A good packable rain jacket can cost anywhere from $60 to $800, all depending on how many features you want. Keep in mind that the most expensive gear on the spectrum is made for scaling mountains and other extremely harsh conditions. A well-made, technically minded jacket should suffice for most people, and that usually costs between $100-$300

    Q: Where do I recycle my rain jacket?

    The best and easiest way to recycle your rain jacket is to give it away or donate it to an organization that resells or donates used clothing. Many waterproof jackets have coatings or have undergone treatments that make them impossible to recycle through conventional means. That said, some manufacturers, such as Patagonia, accept all their products for recycling.

    Final thoughts on the best packable rain jackets

    All of these jackets are solid, quality garments that will keep you dry when the skies open up. Finding the best packable rain jackets that are waterproof, comfortable, lightweight, and breathable makes every kind of outdoor activity more fun and comfortable in bad weather, from cycling and climbing to a leisurely walk around the neighborhood.

    The post The best packable rain jackets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best zero-turn mowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-zero-turn-mower/ Fri, 05 Feb 2021 21:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=380865
    A man riding a mower in the middle of a green grass field with sunlight falling on it.
    Carnaby Gilany, Unsplash

    Take the best zero-turn lawn mower for a spin and never miss an inch of grass.

    The post The best zero-turn mowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A man riding a mower in the middle of a green grass field with sunlight falling on it.
    Carnaby Gilany, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall A product photo of the Husqvarna Z246 46 20HP Briggs and Stratton Zero Turn Lawn Mower Husqvarna MZ61 61 in. 27 HP Briggs & Stratton Hydrostatic Zero Turn Riding Mower
    SEE IT

    A comfortable way to cut the grass.

    Best budget A product photo of the Husqvarna Z242F 42 in. 18 HP Kawasaki Hydrostatic Zero Turn Riding Mower Husqvarna Z242F Zero-Turn Riding Mower
    SEE IT

    The best budget mower for big suburban yards.

    Best for first-timers A product photo of the Ariens APEX 48" Zero Turn Mower 23hp Kohler 7000 Series lawn mower Ariens APEX Zero-Turn Mower
    SEE IT

    A perfect entry-level riding mower.

    For large yards with tight corners and obstacles, nothing beats a zero-turn lawn mower. These agile mowers are powerful lawn-maintenance machines designed for maneuverability. The unique lever steering allows for complete 360-degree cutting, meaning no blade of grass is safe from the wide and nimble cutting deck. Today’s zero-turn lawn mowers are fuel-efficient and comfortable, with options and features to tackle just about any size yard. Residential zero-turn mowers are ideal for the suburbs. Larger commercial models are great for fields, golf courses, and hills. The best zero-turn lawn mowers run literal circles around the competition.

    How we chose the best zero-turn mowers

    Previously, we’ve searched for the top push mowers, the best riding lawn mowers, and some great cordless lawn mowers. That experience gave us very important background knowledge, which allowed us to have a little more nuance when finding excellent zero-turn mowers. We used personal testing, research, recommendations, reviews, and user impressions to find the best zero-turn mowers for all kinds of yards and users.

    The best zero-turn mowers: Reviews & Recommendations

    Which mower is best for you depends on your type of lawn. Any of these mowers will work wonders on a flat lawn. But if you have hills or big areas to cover, you’ll need a more specialized yard tool. Look for the size and features that work for your yard and your budget.

    Best overall: Husqvarna MZ61 61 in. 27 HP Briggs & Stratton Hydrostatic Zero Turn Riding Mower

    Husqvarna

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This mower easily transitions from mowing your own yard to commercial lawn work.

    Specs

    • Engine: 27 HP Briggs Endurance engine
    • Cutting deck: 61″
    • Weight: 770 lbs.

    Pros

    • Best-in-class cutting deck
    • Optional mulching kit and bagger attachment
    • Comfortable to handle

    Cons

    • No gas gauge

    Big yards need big power and the 27HP Husqvarna mower straddles the line between residential and commercial zero-turn lawn mowers. The wide 61-inch cutting deck gobbles up a big area of grass quickly. It handles great, even on small inclines, thanks to its commercial-rated hydraulic system. But be careful—there’s more oomph in this lawn mower than you might think. If you’re not paying attention, this powerful riding mower will get away from you. Practice first in a nice wide-open area so you get the feel of the controls, speed, and steering. A high-back seat with armrests, foam-padded handgrips, and vibration dampeners allows you to mow comfortably all day. If you have a yard larger than three acres and want a powerful lawn-cutting machine, the Husqvarna riding mower is a powerful option.

    Best for first-timers: Ariens APEX Zero-Turn Mower

    Ariens

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Step up your mowing game sans learning curve with this easy-to-use zero-turn mower.

    Specs

    • Engine: 23HP Kohler 7000 series engine
    • Cutting deck: 48″
    • Weight: 770 lbs.

    Pros

    • Good for smaller yards
    • Durable
    • East-to-use

    Cons

    • Reviewers note problems with warranty

    If you’re looking to replace your traditional lawn tractor or push mower, the Ariens zero-turn lawn mower is a fantastic upgrade. The 23HP Kohler 7000 series engine is strong and consistent. Great for yards smaller than three acres, the Ariens riding mower has a 48-inch cutting deck in its sturdy frame. It’s a residential zero-turn mower that’s as durable as some of the commercial mowers. Yet it’s not an overpowered, overpriced, over-complicated lawn tool. If you’re new to the world of zero-turn mowers, this is the perfect machine to give you comfortable, confident handling. 

    Best for comfort: Craftsman Z5200 20-HP V-Twin Dual Hydrostatic 42-in Zero-Turn Lawn Mower

    Craftsman

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This mower has built-in features to mow your entire lawn in comfort.

    Specs

    • Engine: 20 HP Kohler 7,000 twin-cylinder engine
    • Cutting deck: 42″
    • Weight: 600 lbs.

    Pros

    • Comfortable
    • Good for mowing flat surfaces with obstacles
    • Maneuverable

    Cons

    • No hour meter

    Riding mowers have come a long way in regards to comfort, and the Craftsman zero-turn riding mower is one of the most body-friendly yard tools out there. The high-back seat gives you much-needed support, especially if you’re cutting big areas. And the 20HP engine and 42-inch cutting deck give you enough power to chomp through up to three acres of grass. Cutting big yards can take time and that can take a toll on back muscles, so never overlook ergonomics. The rubber foot pad of this riding mower helps reduce the vibrations that can cause foot and leg pain. The steering bars feel great without being over-sensitive. This is not only a solid zero-turn lawn mower, it’s a comfortable outdoor throne. 

    Best for the pros: Swisher B&S Zero Turn Rider

    Swisher

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This professional-grade zero-turn lawn mower is a landscaper’s dream thanks to its safety, durability, and power.

    Specs

    • Engine: 24HP Briggs & Stratton engine
    • Cutting deck: 66″
    • Weight: 855 lbs.

    Pros

    • Eight-gallon fuel capacity
    • Safe handling
    • Good on inclines and embankments

    Cons

    • Expensive

    This is not the riding mower for everyone, but the Swisher zero turn tractor is one of the best commercial mowers you can get. If you’re starting a lawn care business or need to equip a lawn maintenance crew, this is a solid investment. The Swisher mower has a 24HP Briggs & Stratton engine. The zero-turn tractor can handle inclines and embankments. It’s dependable. It’s safe. And as big as it is, it handles great. You always feel in control of the 855-pound monster. The bad news? It’s not cheap. With a price tag soaring past $10,000 and another $3,000 for the cutting deck, this is not a typical piece of lawn equipment. This is a commercial-grade lawn mower with enough horsepower to mow an entire neighborhood, thanks to its 8-gallon fuel capacity.

    Best budget: Husqvarna Z242F Zero-Turn Riding Mower

    Husqvarna

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The cheapest zero-turn mower on our list features high-quality mechanics for well-manicured lawns.

    Specs

    • Engine: 18 HP Kawasaki engine
    • Cutting deck: 42″
    • Weight: 770 lbs.

    Pros

    • Great quality for the price
    • Reliable
    • Good for homeowners

    Cons

    • Not for larger yards

    Residential zero-turn lawn mowers are typically all in the same economic ballpark. You can expect to spend between $3,000 and $5,000 for a reliable riding mower. This Husqvarna is one of the cheapest zero-turn mowers, hovering around the low end of that spectrum, and is a great mower for the money. Husqvarna mowers are known for their quality, so even a lower-priced Husqvarna riding mower is a trusted, dependable machine. This zero-turn mower has a wide 42-inch cutting deck and a 18HP engine, putting it right in the middle of not being too weak and not being overpowered. If you have an acre of land to mow, there’s no need to spend money for extra size and power you’ll never need.

    What to consider when shopping for the best zero-turn mowers

    Are all riding mowers with lever steering the same? Not at all. Size, weight, horsepower, and fuel source are just a few of the things to look for when shopping for a zero-turn mower. Before opening up the wallet, understand how these mowers operate, how much they cost, and how much they can accomplish.

    The two types of zero-turn mowers: commercial and residential

    For years, zero-turn lawn mowers were only available as commercial yard equipment. Landscaping companies and groundskeeping crews who needed to tame and maintain large areas of grass used the big industrial lawn mowers. But, recently, residential zero-turn lawn mowers have given suburban homeowners the power and agility of lever steering. 

    The big difference between commercial and residential zero-turn mowers is power (and price). Commercial models are designed for big areas and constant use. They’re heavier, have wider cutting decks, and pack more horsepower. Residential zero-turn lawn mowers are smaller, easier to handle, and are better at once-a-week cutting. These lawn tools are less powerful, so hills can be challenging. But they still provide incredible maneuverability and handling at a much more affordable price. 

    What size zero-turn mower do I need for my yard size?

    For yards smaller than three acres, a residential zero-turn mower is the efficient, user-friendly way to go. If your lawn is larger, or you plan on using the mower on a daily basis, a commercial mower may be the best option.

    How much horsepower do you need?

    The best zero-turn mowers offer between 10HP and 25HP. But 10HP is only good for yards smaller than half an acre. And those mowers can’t handle inclines. For residential lawns up to three acres, 20HP to 25HP is perfect. In addition, zero-turn mowers tend to work well on hills up to a 15-degree incline. That said, any zero-turn lawn mower offering 25HP or more may be overpowered and overpriced for a typical suburban yard.

    Gas vs. electric lawn mowers

    Yes, there are electric, battery-operated zero-turn mowers on the market. And they do a pretty good job, especially for yards smaller than an acre. Battery-powered riding mowers are more than just noisy, angry golf carts. They have real cutting power and the technology is only getting better. 

    Electric riding mowers cost about the same as gas-powered models. You’re not saving money, but you are saving the planet while performing yard care. Electric mowers are more environmentally friendly since they don’t emit any exhaust fumes. But they do need batteries and that’s the biggest drawback. The battery on even the most energy-efficient electric mower can die quickly and recharging time will eat up your Saturday. If you don’t mind the limited battery life, or you plan on stocking up on backup batteries, electric mowers are just as good as gas-powered mowers. 

    Gas-powered mowers will be more powerful, but not by much. Gas mowers are also heartier machines that are better for riding over rough terrain and (mild) hills. Electric mowers aren’t good for commercial use, where horsepower and repeated use are a big concern. However, for flat lawns no bigger than an acre,  don’t overlook the electric machines as your best zero-turn riding mower.

    What size cutting deck do you need?

    The cutting deck houses the blades. But bigger isn’t always better. Zero-turn riding mowers start out with cutting decks measuring 32 inches and can go as large as 61 inches. The extra size is really only good if you’re cutting more than three acres of grass. While zero-turn mowers are made for tight turns and precise handling, a big mower is still a big mower and will be cumbersome in small yards. 

    If your yard has a lot of obstacles, such as trees and sheds, make sure the lawn mower is small enough to fit between the tight space. For suburban homes with about an acre of land, opt for a smaller mower with a cutting deck between 32 and 40 inches.

    Understand the steering and stopping

    The distinguishing feature of any zero-turn mower is the lever steering. There’s no steering wheel, and you don’t drive a zero-turn mower like a car. Instead, the two levers control the pivot point of the mower. Pull the right lever back and push the left lever forward to make a sharp right turn. 

    Due to the pivot steering, it’s usually best to mow the lawn in a Y pattern instead of making drastic turns that could dig the wheel into the lawn and create divots. And watch out: Most zero-turn mowers don’t have brakes. You hold the steering levers in a neutral position to brake. 

    If you’ve never used a zero-turn riding mower, give yourself some practice time before attempting tricky spins. The best zero-turn mowers are intuitive, and you’ll pick up the steering mechanism quickly. But your first time using this piece of yard equipment should not be along the edge of a beloved flower garden. While you often see professional lawn crews zipping around on these mowers, it’s best to go slow. The machine has more pickup than you may anticipate and it’s easy to overcorrect and make a wrong turn.  

    FAQs

    Q: How much do zero-turn lawn mowers cost?

    Pricing for residential zero-turn lawn mowers typically ranges from $3,000 to $5,000. However, commercial zero-turn lawn mowers can go for upwards of $10,000. Be conscious of your yard size and landscaper dreams. You might want to stray away from expensive zero-turn mowers if you don’t fantasize about mowing three acres of land.

    Q: How often should you mow your lawn?

    It depends on how fast your grass grows and how high you want your grass to be. Mowing once a week during the growing season—typically late spring and early summer—is recommended to keep your lawn healthy. During the rest of the year, you can get away with mowing every other week.  

    Q: How do I operate a zero-turn mower?

    To operate a zero-turn mower, you use the steering levers. These levers typically rest over your lap. In the neutral position, the mower stands still. Push both levers forward, and the mower moves forward in a straight line. Push both levers back, and the mower travels in reverse in a straight line. The real fun begins when you push one lever and pull the other, thus creating a pivot point. The zero-turn mowers are designed to make sharp turns and pivot 360 degrees. This makes it easier to steer around obstacles. It feels very different than using a steering wheel. Give yourself time (and room) to practice and you’ll get the hang of it.  

    Final thoughts on the best zero-turn riding mowers

    A zero-turn riding mower is ideal for navigating around sharp curves, obstacles, and landscaping beds. They are also the best type of riding mower for covering big areas quickly. Residential zero-turn riding mowers give you nearly all the power of the commercial-grade behemoths, but at a more manageable size and price. These nimble mowers are the perfect yard tool for lawns ranging between one and three acres. Find a comfortable seat, an adequately sized cutting deck, and a brand name known for quality. Discover today’s best zero-turn lawn mowers to effectively and efficiently maintain your yard.

    The post The best zero-turn mowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best log splitters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-log-splitter/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 21:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=371925
    A lineup of the best log splitters on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    The must-have machinery for any woodshed includes log splitters that cut wood clean and fast.

    The post The best log splitters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of the best log splitters on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The Champion Power Equipment Compact Log Splitter is the best overall log splitter. Champion Power Equipment 7-Ton Compact Horizontal Gas Log Splitter
    SEE IT

    With fewer moving parts, flat-free tires, and a compact frame, this splitter offers power for a full workday with less maintenance and cost.

    Best manual The Fiskars IsoCore 36-Inch Maul is the best manual log splitter. Fiskars IsoCore Maul
    SEE IT

    A wedge-shaped splitting maul is still the simplest, most reliable, most portable tool for splitting firewood.

    Best budget The Southland Outdoor Power Equipment SELS60 is the best budget log splitter. Southland Outdoor Power Equipment 6 Ton Electric Log Splitter
    SEE IT

    This splitter offers power and performance similar to its competitors, but at a value price.

    Maintaining a steady supply of firewood takes a lot of work—that’s where a log splitter comes in handy. These powerful machines are capable of turning sections of trees into perfectly sized pieces of firewood with the pull of a lever. If you have a wood-burning fireplace or wood stove, you know that nothing beats a cozy fire on a cold day or evening—even in the summer, depending on where you are. Instead of buying ready firewood by the bundle or truckload, save some time, energy, and money doing it yourself—the easy way—with one of the best log splitters on the market now.

    How we chose the best log splitters

    There are two important measurements to watch for when shopping for log-cutting tools. Hydraulic log splitters are rated in tons for the amount of pressure they apply to the log, with the smallest machines applying about 5 tons and the largest more than 30 tons. The other measurement is maximum log size. Often only a length is provided in the literature, although some manufacturers specify both length and diameter. We’ve written about other outdoor lawn equipment, like wood chippers, so we applied that knowledge here. We also conducted heavy research, looked at in-depth reviews, and even channeled our inner lumberjack into finding the best log splitters—flannel shirts and all.

    The best log splitters: Reviews & Recommendations

    There’s no way around it: Cutting your own firewood is a big job for one person. Even with the help of heavy-duty log-cutting tools, it’s more work, not less. The benefit of adding a commercial log splitter to the equation is that it makes the work faster, more efficient, and more productive, and you can do it independently. That’s what a hydraulic model does, for example. Without one, a woodcutter positions the log then uses a maul to chop it (often requiring multiple swings and repositioning the wood), then puts the maul down to position a new one. The process is tiring and time-consuming. Any one of our picks will save your back and give you back some precious hours previously spent outside in the woodshed.

    Best overall: Champion Power Equipment Compact Log Splitter

    Champion Power Equipment

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Weight: 148 lbs.
    • Maximum log size diameter: 19.3 inches
    • Splitting force: 7 tons
    • Cycle time: 20 seconds

    Pros

    • Can fit in truck beds or towed
    • Low-profile frame
    • Offset wedge for efficiency

    Cons

    • Reviews note that hydraulic fluid leaks from the control valve

    This 7-ton gas log splitter conveniently fits into most pickup truck beds and includes a 2-inch ball hitch for easy towing. A 20-second automatic return cycle, low-profile frame with integrated log cradle, and durable offset wedge increase work efficiency. Maximum log size is 19.3 inches.

    Best gas: NorthStar Horizontal/Vertical Log Splitter

    NorthStar

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Weight: 600 lbs.
    • Maximum log size diameter: 25 inches
    • Splitting force: 30 tons
    • Cycle time: 14 seconds

    Pros

    • Built from premium parts
    • Auto throttle control to save fuel, reduce noise, and prolong engine life
    • Engine guard for safety

    Cons

    • Expensive compared to other selections on our list

    This heavy-duty gas log splitter is built from the ground up with premium parts—commercial GX200 Honda engine, NorthStar hydraulic cylinder with Hallite seals, and two-stage concentric pump—for many years of hard work. Thirty tons of force ensures this item will push through the toughest trees with the hardest, gnarliest grain with ease. Innovative design elements—such as a patented log stripper, heavy-duty log tables, auto throttle control, and engine guard—help you work more efficiently and safely. The 2-inch ball coupler, high-speed tires, and fenders make transportation a cinch. Maximum log size is 25 inches.

    Best electric: Boss Industrial EC5T20

    Boss Industrial

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Weight: 104 lbs.
    • Maximum log size diameter: 10 inches
    • Splitting force: 5 tons
    • Cycle time: 14 seconds

    Pros

    • 2-year residential warranty, 180-day commercial warranty
    • One-handed, two-way operation
    • Easy to store

    Cons

    • Has a hard time splitting damp wood

    This compact and powerful electric log splitter, with innovative two-way operation, weighs only 104 pounds and requires less than 15 cubic feet of storage space in the garage or tool shed. The 1.8 HP motor, providing 5 tons of force, operates on a standard household electrical outlet, produces no emissions, and it’s safe to use indoors. Maximum log size is 10 inches.

    Best manual: Fiskars IsoCore 36-Inch Maul

    Fiskars

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Weight: 7.43 lbs.
    • Maximum log size diameter: N/A
    • Splitting force: N/A
    • Cycle time: N/A

    Pros

    • Rust-resistant
    • Less shock, more comfortable to hold compared to other manual splitters
    • Riveted head prevents sliding or snapping

    Cons

    • Only good for small pieces of wood

    This manual log splitter is built to last with a forged, heat-treated steel head with a rust-resistant coating. Plus, the sculpted, soft-grip handle fits the contour of your hand and promises to transfer 2X less shock and vibration than wood handles. The wedge-shaped maul head is specifically designed for, and highly efficient at, splitting—significantly better than the thin, relatively lightweight head of an axe. At only 7.43 pounds and requiring almost no storage space, this tool punches well above its weight.

    Best budget: Southland Outdoor Power Equipment SELS60

    Southland Outdoor Power Equipment

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Weight: 103 lbs.
    • Maximum log size diameter: 10 inches
    • Splitting force: 6 tons
    • Cycle time: 18 seconds

    Pros

    • Easy to store
    • Light
    • Works through tough jobs quickly and efficiently

    Cons

    • Some reviews note a low level of hydraulic oil upon arrival

    With 6 tons of ram force and an adjustable 15-second cycle time, this electric log splitter is built for quick, efficient work. Weighing in at just over 100 pounds, it is the lightest machine on our list, and the ability to park in an upright position makes it easy to stow away when not in use. Maximum log size is 20.5 inches.

    What to consider when buying the best log splitters

    Adding one of the best wood splitters to the equation saves at least half the time. The operator simply positions the log and pulls a lever. It takes about 14 seconds for a hydraulic piston to drive the log into a fixed wedge and return to the ready position. And with between 12,000 pounds and 70,000 pounds of force, these machines don’t often get stuck. They can split logs with twisted or springy grain, which would be impossible with hand tools. In the end, they allow you to work faster and harder, plus they utilize wood that would otherwise be wasted. Here’s what you should know when shopping for the best log splitters:

    Gas-powered or electric

    Hydraulic log splitters are powered either by gasoline or electricity. The best depends on several factors, including log size and weight, where and how often it is used, available storage space, and more. If chopping wood out in the forest is your normal routine, a gas log splitter would be the logical choice since they carry their own power supply. These machines tend to be significantly larger and more powerful than their electric counterparts, so they are also better for larger, heavier logs with a diameter greater than about 16 inches. Many have the ability to work either horizontally or vertically. In the vertical position giant, heavy logs can be chopped with no lifting. 

    Due to its relatively smaller size, an electric model is an excellent choice if storage space is limited. They typically feature lightweight construction, which makes positioning them for work or storage easier. Plus, they can be used inside a barn or workshop if you’d like to cut wood when the weather is cold or rainy. Electric log splitters operate more quietly than their gas-powered counterparts, which makes the work more enjoyable—and you a better neighbor. Electric power also eliminates much of the maintenance of the machine.

    If you appreciate the exercise and relative quiet of working with hand tools, consider a maul

    A splitting maul is basically a heavy steel wedge on a wood, fiberglass, or metal handle. A manual splitter requires no engine or fuel, just human power. Those who only do a few at a time may find it more convenient to use this simple hand tool rather than setting up a much larger electric or gas-powered machine. The maul takes up almost no storage space and requires no maintenance. After you chop the wood, it’s time to cut the grass with the best lawn mower.

    FAQs

    Q: How much do log splitters cost?

    With a cheap log splitter—around the $300 range—you get the basic functionality to process a large pile of wood rather quickly. However, in exchange for the bargain price, some capability is lost. Low-cost splitters offer less ram force, as little as 5 tons of pressure, which limits the log diameter the machine can effectively handle. For instance, a model with 5 tons of pressure maxes out on logs that are 8 to 10 inches in diameter, while a 20-ton product can handle logs up to 24 inches in diameter. A good, inexpensive one should offer at least 5 tons of pressure and should be easy to transport with a lightweight frame on sturdy wheels. Otherwise, expect to pay $500-$2,000 for a log splitter.

    Q: What type of log splitter should I buy?

    The best log splitter for you is the one that can handle the cutting jobs you regularly encounter and won’t be in the way when not in use. If you only split a few small logs each season for occasional fireplace use, then a compact electric log splitter may be perfect. If you use wood as a primary heat source in your home, a powerful gas log splitter is probably a good investment.

    Q: What size log can a log splitter chop?

    Log size and splitter tonnage rating are closely related. The more pressure applied, the thicker (or wider) the log it can split. A few commonly used benchmarks are as follows: 4 tons will split a 6-inch log, 16 tons will split a 12-inch log, 30 tons will split a 24-inch log. This is just a general guide. Different species of wood split more or less easily, and seasoned wood often splits more easily than green wood.

    Q: How long should logs dry before splitting?

    An old rule of thumb for splitting wood with a maul is to split hardwoods like oak, maple, and beech when they are still green and to let softwoods like pine, fir, and spruce dry out for 6 to 12 months before splitting to make the work as easy as possible. But, if you have the benefit of splitting wood with a hydraulic log splitter, you can do it at whatever stage you choose. The benefit of allowing the wood to dry out is that it becomes lighter and easier to load on the splitter.

    Final thoughts on the best log splitters

    Whether you need a simple wood-splitting maul, a quiet electric machine, or a powerful gas model, finding the right tool is key to work satisfaction. An oversized machine is as inconvenient as an undersized one is frustrating. The best log splitter will get you out of the woods fast, saving you time, money, and stress.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best log splitters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best trekking poles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-trekking-poles/ Tue, 13 Sep 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=469199
    best trekking poles sliced header
    Tony Ware

    The best tools for keeping you upright on all manner of hikes, treks, and scrambles.

    The post The best trekking poles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    best trekking poles sliced header
    Tony Ware

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole. Black Diamond Alpine FLZ
    SEE IT

    The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole.

    Best carbon fiber These MSR poles feature a “Dynalock” mechanism that shores up their durability.
MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon
    SEE IT

    The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles.

    Best aluminum Leki Makalu Lite Leki Makalu Lite
    SEE IT

    The Leki Makalu Lite will hold up through months-long treks over all sorts of terrain.

    Many dedicated backpackers consider a quality pair of trekking poles essential gear for hiking. They help you hike and keep your balance over steep hills, rocky paths, and slippery snow-covered trails. Like their predecessor, the humble walking stick, a quality pair of hiking poles are sturdy enough to put your entire weight on them, yet light enough that they do not feel like a burden after a long day on the trail. They ease the strain on your knees and back, especially if you’re carrying a heavy pack. There are a dizzying number of poles to choose from. They’re made from different materials, feature different designs, and, of course, some are more expensive than others. We’ve tried a whole bunch of popular options, taking them on runs, hikes, climbs, and scrambles to find the best trekking poles for all your outdoor adventures.

    How we picked the best trekking poles 

    I’ve been writing about outdoor gear and my often dubious adventure travel for decades at publications like Hearst, HuffPost, BBC Travel, Fodor’s, Adventure Cycling, Input, and many others. My criteria for experiencing new places usually include how many people visit (the fewer the better), and if it has a reputation as a “challenging” journey. Over the years, I’ve traveled across all kinds of terrain and environments, many of which required a good set of trekking poles to navigate.

    I’ve spent a good deal of time testing trekking poles—walking, running, climbing, scrambling, and sometimes falling—all over the world. Over the years, I’ve found a few favorites. I’ve also compared notes and talked for hours with trekkers, hikers, and adventurers about gear around countless campfires and well-worn tables in questionable bars.

    The best trekking poles: Reviews & Recommendations

    Like most outdoor gear, trekking pole preference can vary from person to person. Given that, our recommendations span a variety of options made from different materials and covering a wide range of prices. All of them, however, have a clear edge over similar poles in important qualities like durability and weight.

    Best overall: Black Diamond Alpine FLZ

    Black Diamond

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a highly versatile pole that packs down small, making it a prime choice for all kinds of activities.

    Specs

    • Weight: 18 ounces
    • Maximum length: 43, 49, or 55 inches
    • Collapsed length: 14, 15, or 16 inches
    • Shaft material: Aluminum
    • Grip material: Cork
    • Pole design: Foldable
    • Tips: Carbide tips, trail baskets, snow baskets, rubber tips (sold separately)

    Pros

    • Versatile
    • Comfortable handles
    • Packable

    Cons

    • Heavy

    The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is an incredibly versatile trekking pole. The small packable size and durable aluminum construction make it an optimal pole for most everything including rugged trekking, multi-day backpacking, steep hiking, and even backcountry skiing. The cork handles become increasingly more comfortable over time as well as a secondary foam grip.

    While a telescoping pole is inherently stronger than a foldable one, I’ve found the Alpine FLZ holds up extremely well in a variety of precarious situations including nefarious water crossings and muddy sheer drop-offs. They feature Black Diamond’s patented Flicklock pro locking mechanism, which uses a lever to secure the pole length with an inner adjustable tension dial that requires a small Allen key to adjust.

    The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is far from the fanciest pair of trekking poles out there but has proven that it can get the job done in difficult situations, and feels comfortable on easy trail hikes.

    Best carbon fiber: MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon

    MSR

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles that work for a wide variety of adventures.

    Specs

    • Weight: 17 ounces
    • Maximum length: 47 inches or 55 inches
    • Collapsed length: 14.25 inches or 17.5 inches
    • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
    • Grip material: EVA foam
    • Pole design: Collapsible
    • Tips: Winter and summer baskets

    Pros

    • Comfortable grip
    • Versatile
    • Small pack size

    Cons

    • Expensive
    • Heavy for a carbon pole

    My friend Ben has been almost everywhere on the globe and he always travels with his MSR Dynalock Ascent carbon poles, which he considers an extension of himself and one of the best gear spurges he’s ever made (it may also be the only one).

    The Dynalock Ascent poles have comfortable, contoured foam grip handles and padded straps. Each one folds down to a very packable 14.25-17 inches, depending on which size you get. Unlike most other poles where most of the tips are sold separately, these come with both winter and summer basket tips. 

    They also feature MSR’s signature Dynalock mechanism, which consists of a thick aluminum lever and an inner metal dial that allows you to tighten or loosen with ease as well as providing exceptional sturdiness. It also locks each section into place with metal buttons on the sides. As someone who often has “Final Destination”-type scenarios running through my brain, I appreciate both of these components. 

    Best aluminum: Leki Makalu Lite

    REI

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Leki Makalu Lite is one of the most durable poles I’ve tried.

    Specs

    • Weight: 17.3 ounces
    • Maximum length: 54 inches
    • Collapsed length: 26 inches
    • Shaft material: Aluminum
    • Grip material: Cork
    • Pole design: Collapsible
    • Tips: Carbide tips, summer basket

    Pros

    • Comfortable
    • Extremely durable
    • Moderate price

    Cons

    • Large packed size

    If you’re planning to use your trekking poles on a weeks-long adventure, Leki’s Makalu Lite poles are among the most durable we’ve found. Despite the name, they’re slightly thicker than most other poles, making them tremendously strong, as well as fairly heavy.

    The Makalu Lite features Leki’s very comfortable “Aergon Air” grip—a cork design with a hollow core and wide support at a lightly tilted ergonomic angle. Like all Leki poles, these use the company’s durable “Speed Lock” system, which combines a lever lock with a small dial to tighten spring tension by hand.

    A pair of Makalu Lites is overkill for your average day hike, but their durability is worth the extra weight on a long trip where you’ll traverse mountains or glacial ice for weeks or months.

    Best for hiking: Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork

    Black Diamond

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork is an incredibly sturdy carbon pole with a very comfortable grip.

    Specs

    • Weight: 17 ounces
    • Maximum length: 51 inches
    • Collapsed length: 24 inches
    • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
    • Grip material: Cork
    • Pole design: Collapsible
    • Tips: Carbide tips and trail baskets included; snow baskets sold separately

    Pros

    • Comfortable
    • Excellent locking mechanism
    • Durable

    Cons

    • Not as packable as other options
    • Expensive

    I prefer cork handles over rubber and foam because they mold to your hands over time so, eventually, feel like a seamless extension of your body. The cork handles on Black Diamond’s Alpine carbon poles are quite comfortable right out of the box and improve exponentially over time. Like most trekking poles, they have a secondary foam grip beneath the handles, which gives you a comfortable place to grab when you need to lower your grip, as well as wide wrist straps.

    They are amazingly durable and sturdy for a carbon pole, thanks to their thicker shafts and Black Diamond’s patented “Flicklock” mechanism, which flips into place with a robust snap. The “Flicklock” system has its disadvantages: The locking mechanism requires a tiny Allen key to adjust, which isn’t ideal since it’s easily misplaced. Not being the most graceful person, (especially when hiking) I routinely get my poles stuck between boulders requiring intense back-and-forth movement to dislodge. Despite this, I have yet to break them.

    The collapsed length of these poles means they’re not well-suited to be stowed in a backpack during a technical climb but for most activities, including trekking over rock and snow in remote regions of the world, these poles are a solid choice that will last for years.

    Best for backpacking: Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork

    Black Diamond

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork is a solid, affordable option that’s durable enough to handle most backpacking trips.

    Specs

    • Weight: 18 ounces
    • Maximum length: 55 inches
    • Collapsed length: 27 inches
    • Shaft material: Aluminum
    • Grip material: Cork
    • Pole design: Collapsible
    • Tips: Carbide tips, trekking baskets, and snow baskets

    Pros

    • Comfortable
    • Versatile
    • Reasonable mid-range price

    Cons

    • Doesn’t pack down as small as other options

    Black Diamond’s Trail Ergo Cork trekking poles are a great pick for new hikers. They’re sturdy, comfortable, and reliable—a great fit for most backpacking and thru-hiking. Plus, at less than $150, they don’t cost a fortune.

     The cork handles are tilted forward slightly for a more natural, ergonomic wrist alignment. They also have padded straps and a foam secondary grip, making them easy to hold. Like the other Black Diamond hiking poles on our list, these feature the company’s patented “Flicklock” system, ensuring they don’t come loose while you’re walking.

    Collapsing to a fairly large 27 inches, they are longer than the majority of other poles when packed away. Unless you’re taking them on a plane, though, that probably shouldn’t be too much of an issue.

    Best ultralight: Gossamer Gear LT5 Three Piece Carbon

    gossamer gear

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Gossamer Gear LT5 is one of the lightest trekking poles available.

    Specs

    • Weight: 10.6 ounces
    • Maximum length: 51 inches
    • Collapsed length: 23.5 inches
    • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
    • Grip material: EVA foam
    • Pole design: Collapsible
    • Tips: Carbide tips

    Pros

    • Comfortable
    • Ultralight
    • Extremely durable for their weight

    Cons

    • Expensive

    For situations where every ounce (or even gram) counts, the ultralight Gossamer Gear LT5 carbon trekking poles streamline your experience better than any other poles. Despite weighing less than 11 ounces, they’re incredibly durable. I used them on a multi-week thru-hike over mixed terrain through a good portion of northern Spain one summer where I was intent on carrying as little weight as possible, both emotionally and physically, and they didn’t let me down.

    The twist-lock mechanism is easy to set; you simply rotate the sections for a secure lock. The wrist straps sport comfortable padding and the EVA foam handles have proven to be comfortable enough (though I am partial to cork handles).

    The LT5s also serve as great support for ultralight tents that use trekking poles as part of the structure, thus providing a super lightweight sleep system.

    Best budget: Trekology Trek-Z

    TREKOLOGY

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Trekology Trek-Z is an incredibly inexpensive pole that doesn’t sacrifice comfort or durability.

    Specs

    • Weight: 26 ounces
    • Maximum length: 51 inches
    • Collapsed length: 15 inches
    • Shaft material: Aluminum
    • Grip material: Cork
    • Pole design: Foldable
    • Tips: Carbide, rubber, snow baskets, mud stops, rubber feet

    Pros

    • Inexpensive
    • Durable
    • Folds down small

    Cons

    • Heavy

    Made from aerospace-grade 7075 aluminum alloy, the Trekology Trek-Z is an inexpensive pair of poles that come complete with carbide tips, rubber tips, snow baskets, mud stops, and rubber feet, making them highly adaptable and a huge bargain. They feature a metal flip-lock mechanism that’s easy to operate, though you may not use it often since they offer a very limited 7-inch range. They do collapse into a very compact 15-inch package, though.

    For less than $50, the Trek-Z is one of the most affordable poles we’ve seen. Unsurprisingly, they’re also among the heaviest. We wouldn’t recommend them for alpine climbing, mountain running, or speed hiking, where you want to be quick and nimble. For those sticking to the trail and not too concerned about their performance, they’re an excellent option for not a lot of money.

    One thing to keep in mind: Trekology makes a new “Trek-Z 2.0” with EVA foam grips instead of cork. In general, I prefer cork grips because of the material’s moldable properties, so we’re sticking with the original. Just keep in mind that it may become harder to find in the coming months.

    What to consider when buying trekking poles

    Finding the perfect trekking pole can be a daunting task. As with all outdoor gear, there are a variety of options to consider. More often than not, finding the “best” choice requires you to balance different strengths and weaknesses based on your personal needs and taste. The lightest trekking poles will rarely be the absolute sturdiest. The strongest poles will likely not be the most packable. To help you figure out what you need, let’s talk about the most important elements of any trekking pole set.

    Sizing up your poles

    Trekking poles come in different lengths so that any person can find a pair that feels right. At standing position, the grip of the pole should line up with your elbow or, more precisely, with your hands when your elbows are bent at a 90-degree angle. If you’re shopping at home, look for poles that are adjustable to within 20-24 inches shorter than you. For example, I’m 5 feet 6 inches, or 66 inches, so I want poles that you can set to a height between 42-46 inches.

    Most modern trekking poles are adjustable to some degree, so there’s a lot of wiggle room if you aren’t sure about what will feel right. Some companies also make fixed-height poles, as they are technically stronger. All of our recommendations are adjustable, though, as we find them to be much more versatile than fixed-length poles. In general, I usually shorten my poles when ascending a steep incline and lengthen them when descending. Collapsible and foldable trekking poles allow the user to change the overall length of the pole as the terrain and situation merit.

    Collapsible poles feature a telescoping design, where increasingly narrow sections slide and fit inside each other. Foldable poles have a reinforced cord running through them that holds the sections together when pulled apart while allowing them to fold—like the pole technology used in most lightweight tents. 

    Telescoping poles will be stronger than their foldable counterparts because, in most cases, the pole overlaps and slides into itself at a greater distance than foldable ones. A fixed-length pole will be the most durable option, though, as there are no weak points or breaks in the shaft. Many poles now feature one telescoping section coupled with two folding sections to offer more precise adjustment options.

    Pole material

    Most trekking poles are made from either high-grade aluminum or carbon fiber. Carbon fiber produces a lighter pole, while sacrificing a bit of durability. Under intense stress, a carbon fiber pole will likely snap. Aluminum poles, by contrast, will usually bend before they break, giving you a bit of a warning that you should navigate out of that particular situation right away if at all possible. 

    If you’re looking for speed and/or the ability to go long distances, a carbon pole is probably your best choice. If you’re okay with a slightly heavier pole (and we’re usually talking ounces here, not pounds), an aluminum pole may be a better fit for difficult terrain and will last a bit longer.

    Check the grip

    You’re going to spend a long time holding your trekking poles’ grips, so you want to make sure that they’re comfortable. You should take a look at the grip and, ideally, give it a squeeze to see how it feels in your hand.

    Most pole grips are made from cork, foam, or rubber. I prefer cork because the material molds to the shape of your hand over time. Grips made with EVA foam are also often quite comfortable and weigh a bit less than cork. Rubber grips absorb shock exceptionally well, but can get sticky and cause blisters when it’s hot and humid out.

    Tips

    Trekking poles come with different kinds of tips on the end, which can help you move across different kinds of terrain. Many poles, including our recommendations, either come with multiple sets of pole tips or give you the opportunity to buy alternate tips or replacements when you need them. (You should replace your tips every 1,500-2,000 miles.) Most pole tips have a screw-on mechanism, so it’s easy to change them on the fly, so it’s nice to have multiple options on your trip. Here are some of the most common choices:

    Rubber tips provide extra grip on wet surfaces, as well as shock absorption on paved surfaces. Since they’re softer and less pointy, rubber tips don’t tear up trails as much as carbide tips, but also don’t provide as much traction.

    Carbide tips are extremely durable. They don’t wear down as quickly as rubber versions. With a sharper point, they grip well on rock, dirt, and ice, allowing you to really dig into surfaces. They’ll also rip up soft dirt, so they may damage hiking trails.

    Rubber feet have a shape that resembles a small foot. With a wider footprint, they allow you to move faster without losing your balance.

    Mud baskets attach a few inches above the tip of your poles and prevent your poles from sinking down too far into soft, muddy earth. They can also prevent some of the mud from splattering onto your calves. Like carbide tips, though, they can damage plant life on trails, so you should reserve them for appropriate terrain.

    Snow baskets are a wider version of mud baskets made for snow. They function like snowshoes, keeping your poles near the surface of deep snow.

    Locking mechanism

    If you follow my lead and go with adjustable poles, you should take a closer look at how it opens and closes. Most adjustable trekking poles feature a locking mechanism with a lever that opens or closes to slide the pole length up or down, coupled with a push button lock or spring-loaded twist lock. Many also include an inner dial in the lever to increase or decrease tension. When considering a pole, check to make sure it’s easy to adjust the poles and operate the lock with or without gloves. If you buy poles that require special tools to change spring tension, make sure those are included. You want a pole that you can easily adjust when out on the trail but also locks securely.

    FAQs

    Q: How much do the best trekking poles cost?

    Most trekking poles cost $50-$250, depending on what they’re made from, versatility, comfort, durability, and weight. Generally speaking, the lighter the pole, the higher the price tag. When choosing hiking poles, remember that they need to be light enough to lift and carry all day without tiring you out on a hike, but strong enough to support your body weight.

    Q: Where do I recycle my trekking poles?

    If they are in good working condition without structural damage, you can often recycle a pair of trekking poles through a gear trade-in program like the one offered by REI. If they aren’t reusable, you can put aluminum poles out with your household metal recycling.

    Carbon fiber trekking poles aren’t recyclable. There are companies who are developing ways to recycle it, but it’s not a process that is easy or currently available to the general public.

    Q: Are trekking poles bad for trails?

    Trekking poles can be bad for trails as they have the potential to tear up soft soil and damage plants growing along the trailside. Pay close attention to where you place your poles, and stick to hiking best practices, including the following:

    Don’t use your poles when you don’t need them. Use rubber tips as much as possible. In an area with tense vegetation, avoid using baskets that will rip up plant life. And finally, make sure to leave no trace.

    Q: Do carbon fiber trekking poles break?

    Carbon trekking poles can break, though it’s usually a result of extreme pressure. It doesn’t happen often enough for them to be considered unsafe. 

    Originally developed for the aerospace industry, carbon fiber is lightweight, strong, and stiff made from woven fibers held together with resin. It is stronger than even steel of the same thickness while also being much lighter which is why it’s used to make things like trekking poles and bicycles.

    Final thoughts on the best trekking poles

    Outdoor gear companies are always finding ways to build sturdier, lighter trekking poles, but I find that you don’t need to get too worried about the particulars. As long as you get a pair that’s sturdy, comfortable to hold, and light enough to use all day, you shouldn’t worry too much about optimizing for the “best” experience. More than anything, you want something reliable. All of the poles included here are durable and comfortable with the potential to be that favorite piece of gear you don’t leave for an adventure without.

    The post The best trekking poles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Power hangouts without hangups with 30% off this EcoFlow portable generator on Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/ecoflow-portable-generator-amazon-sale/ Wed, 26 Apr 2023 18:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=536890
    An Ecoflow generator on a gradient background
    Amanda Reed

    Don't let dead electronics sunset your outdoor fun—snag this on-sale portable power station on Amazon.

    The post Power hangouts without hangups with 30% off this EcoFlow portable generator on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    An Ecoflow generator on a gradient background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Picnics are all fun and games until someone’s Bluetooth party speaker dies, your phones are on their last leg, and you can’t even charge your eReader to read a book in the sun. Do not fret: a portable power station gives you enough power to charge everyone’s speakers and phones and still has some in reserve to maintain good-time vibes. You can also keep some cash in reserve because this EcoFlow portable power station is on sale on Amazon for 30% off—and that’s not even including the $10 coupon.

    EcoFlow River 2 Portable Power Station, $189 w/ $10 coupon (Was $289)

    Ecoflow

    SEE IT

    The River 2’s powerful, larger sibling, the EcoFlow Delta Pro, is our pick for the best solar generator for homes. With this in mind, we feel confident recommending the River 2 for weekend camping trips or ensuring no one has to leave the outdoor hang early because their phone is dead. You can power six essential appliances simultaneously thanks to a bevy of ports (including two AC outlets, two USB-A ports, and a USB-C port) and a 600W output. When plugged into an AC outlet, this portable generator charges in an hour, and you can even charge it with a separate solar panel. Although it takes three hours to charge via solar, you’ll feel good about using renewable energy to power your device. And, the portable power station is built to last up to 10 years—that’s less time being in a landfill and more time fueling your adventures.

    Another portable generator favorite, the Anker 521 Portable Power Station, is on sale for $186.99—25% down from its $249.99 standard price. This particular one includes a temperature control system to prevent overheating and is impact resistant.

    Don’t wait until the sun sets to take advantage of this deal—it will be over before you know it.

    Here are some great deals so you can take advantage of the great outdoors:

    The post Power hangouts without hangups with 30% off this EcoFlow portable generator on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best camping tents of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-camping-tent/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 12:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=281984
    A lineup of the best camping tents on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    Choose the best camping tent for your next expedition with our guide to outdoor shelters for every group, size, and season.

    The post The best camping tents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of the best camping tents on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best 2 person NEMO 2 person camping tent NEMO Aurora 2 Person Backpacking Tent
    SEE IT

    This lightweight and simply-designed two person tent has breathable fabrics and streamlined setup to make your next camping trip breezy.

    Best 6 person Outdoor Gear photo REI Co-op Base Camp 6 Tent
    SEE IT

    For those that want to adventure with the whole family, this spacious six-person tent offers plenty of head room so you don’t need to worry about cramped quarters.

    Best 4 person Marmot tents for camping Marmot Limestone 4p Tent
    SEE IT

    This three-season tent comfortably houses four, with mesh designs for improved ventilation and a waterproofed rain shield to weather any storm.

    When you’re spending the night outdoors, your camping tent is so much more than a shelter from rain and wind. The best camping tent is your home away from home; it’s what turns the vast wilderness into your own little haven. The right tent is also a critical part of your camping gear—a tent that rips, leaks, or requires a degree in engineering to set up will sink your trip, fast. There’s a wide variety of tents on the market, coming in all kinds of shapes, designs, weights, and materials. Here’s how to sift through them all to find the best camping tent for you. 

    How we chose the best camping tents

    A tent has just a few jobs, but it needs to do them well: protect you from rain, wind, and bugs; stay standing; provide a place to stash your camping gear. It’s also nice if it sets up easily and packs up efficiently, and doesn’t douse you with drips from condensation or weigh a ton, either. The best camping tent will do all of those things. To narrow our search, we looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research.

    Best camping tents: Reviews & Recommendations

    The best camping tents will keep you warm and dry from your backyard to a mountainside. Here’s what we found

    Best 2-person: NEMO Firefly 2 Person Backpacking Tent

    NEMO

    SEE IT

    Weighing just under 5 pounds, the NEMO Aurora still offers ample space for changing clothes or packing up gear. Two vestibules provide extra coverage for boots and backpacks, and color-coded poles make pitching it simple. This NEMO tent also has thoughtful touches, like pockets made with light-diffusing fabric and a stuff sack that makes it easy to split up the tent load between two people.

    Best 4-person: Marmot Limestone 4p Tent

    Amazon

    SEE IT

    With a 60-square-foot floor, the Limestone offers plenty of room for four—and its peak is 63 inches high, eliminating claustrophobia. The freestanding design is easy to set up, and large vestibule shelters camping gear. You also get several interior pockets for organizing camping equipment, including a special pocket for holding a headlamp. 

    Best 6-person: REI Co-op Base Camp 6 Tent

    REI

    SEE IT

    A longtime favorite for group camping, the REI Co-op Base Camp 6 features easy-access double doors, strategic ventilation, two vestibules and interior pockets and hang loops for organizing everyone’s gear. The whole package weighs just under 21 pounds. Eco bonus: Solution-dyed mesh reduces the tent’s water and energy footprint.

    Best for Winter: Cabela’s Instinct Alaskan Guide 6-person Tent

    Cabela’s

    SEE IT

    With near-vertical walls and a peak height of 75 inches, this winter camping tent is a big step up from a snow cave. Highly durable poles, fly, and floor are built for high winds, snow, and rain. There’s also a spacious vestibule, ventilation windows, and included guy lines with tensioners so you can adjust the pitch easily as conditions change.

    Best budget: Kelty Late Start 2-Person Tent

    Cabela’s

    SEE IT

    The Late Start’s two aluminum poles are set up in a flash, and the mostly-mesh body allows plenty of breezes. The freestanding design includes a single door with a vestibule, and a polyester rainfly keeps you dry. 

    What to consider when buying the best camping tents

    Different models are best suited to different locations and groups. So how do you choose the best camping tent?

    First, consider how many people—or how much gear—you need to fit in the tent. Tents range in capacity from solo shelters to behemoths that can shelter six people or more. If only two people are sleeping in it, a 2-person tent might be ideal; but if those two people have a lot of camping supplies and a couple of dogs, too, they might be better off with a 3-person tent. Likewise, one family of four might find a 4-person tent to be a perfect size, while another with very young kids could be fine with a 3-person tent. These distinctions matter because the larger the tent, generally the more you’ll pay, and the heavier it will be. Weight is particularly important for backpacking tents because you’ll need to carry them into your campsite on your back. It’s less crucial for car camping tents that can be hauled in a car (but you still have to make sure they fit well in your trunk). 

    Also, consider the tent’s shape. If you’re tall, a shelter with a generous peak height will be more comfortable than one that’s low to the ground. Then again, a low-profile tent will be more stable in high winds, so your intended camping location and weather conditions also come into play. Durability is a related concern: Someone in the market for a winter camping tent will need the toughest materials and most stable design, while fair-weather campers can get away with lighter, less durable (and more affordable) options. 

    A tent’s features also matter. Need to store a bunch of backpacks, boots, and other camping gear out of the elements? You’ll want a tent with at least one vestibule. Love to keep hats, phones, and flashlights close at hand? Look for a tent with pockets. Tents with lots of mesh panels are great for hot weather and provide excellent ventilation, but they won’t keep you warm when the temperature dips. Some tents offer a freestanding design—you can pitch them without having to stake them down first—which makes them easier to set up and move around a campsite. Also, check how many doors the tent has. More doors equal easier access for everyone but will add some weight to the tent. 

    Are you looking for a 2-person tent?

    Two-person tents are a popular choice for couples, camping friends, and solo campers who like to stretch out. They’re small enough to remain lightweight (many weigh just a few pounds) and easy to carry in a backpack, making them particularly great for backpacking excursions. And while they typically don’t provide palatial space, many designs still allow for plenty of elbow room. 

    When shopping for a 2-person tent, consider whether you want one door or two. A single door saves a bit of weight, but it means that the person sleeping on the other side will have to climb over the other to get in and out of the tent. Also, look at the number and size of the vestibules and make sure they cover enough space to fit all your gear and camping accessories.

    Are you looking for a 4-person tent for camping?

    Need shelter for the whole family? Love camping with three of your best buddies? Looking for space for your Bernese Mountain Dog, too? A 4-person tent is just the ticket. Besides providing lots more sleeping space, this size tent typically offers more headroom and elbowroom. Naturally, a 4-person tent will also weigh more than a 2-person tent, but many are still quite lightweight for the amount of interior space they provide. 

    When shopping, look at the number and size of doors for ease of entry and exit. A taller peak height will allow for space to play games and change squirming kids. And as with smaller shelters, a tent with lots of mesh will prevent condensation from building up on the interior and provide the best ventilation.

    Do you want a 6-person tent for larger groups?

    When it’s really time to party, you’ll need a 6-person tent. These ultra-large tents are perfect for groups of friends or larger families, providing expansive floor space for lining up sleeping bags and taller peaks that often allow for standing all the way up. Fairly heavy and stable, they’re ideal for setting up a basecamp for a long weekend or more. 

    When considering your options, look for durable materials and especially, good ventilation features to prevent condensation from so many people breathing into the same space. Also, check for an easy-to-pitch design, as tents this big can be unwieldy to set up.

    Do you need a winter camping tent?

    Winter camping is for the brave: Who else would voluntarily sleep outdoors when temperatures dip and snow flies? So their tents have to be hardy, too. A winter camping tent must be stable enough to handle high winds and snow loads, so look for tough materials and sturdy shapes. Vestibule space becomes even more important, as cold-weather campers and hunters have lots more bulky gear to store and need a safe shelter to cook on a camp stove. 

    Other winter-camp-friendly features include plentiful camping gear storage lofts and pockets inside the tent, mesh panels for ventilation, and included guy lines for increasing stability.

    Are you in the market for the best camping tent on a bargain?

    Some tent price tags approach the rent you’d pay to live in an actual house. And while those models tend to be premium tents with innovative designs, ultralightweight, and/or made from bombproof construction, many campers will do just fine with a more affordable choice. There are quality tents on the market that will set you back less than $200 while still performing well in the field.

    Keep in mind that a bargain-priced tent will have some tradeoffs. Durability is often a big one (cheaper tents use cheaper materials and often have less-carefully designed structures). They probably won’t stand up to terrible weather, either, so consider most of them summer shelters. Bargain tents tend to weigh more, too, as ultralight materials go for premium prices. But for lower-stakes camping in campgrounds or even the backyard, why pay for a Himalayas-worthy tent?

    FAQs

    Q: What is the best camping tent brand?

    There’s no single best camping tent brand: Plenty of brands on the market make excellent tents, and different brands make tents best suited to different types of campers. Generally, the best brands invest a lot of time and money in creating innovative new shapes, materials, and features. Their tents will be made from quality, durable materials and tested to make sure they hold up in high winds and rain. The best camping tent brands aren’t necessarily making the most expensive tents, either: Some top-shelf shelters at bargain price points perform very well. That said, some of the most respected and time-tested camping tent brands include Big Agnes, NEMO, Mountain Hardwear, REI, and Kelty

    Q: What is the best waterproof camping tent?

    Similarly, there’s no one best waterproof camping tent. In fact, any tent worth buying, from bargain shelters on up to the most expensive models, should be waterproof. Most tents achieve this by including a waterproof rainfly that pitches over the tent body. All rain flies should advertise taped seams, as water can seep in through the tiny holes left by stitches on untaped seams. A tent with a rain fly is called a double-wall design; single-wall designs, in which the tent body itself is waterproof, are also available. Those are lighter to carry but less breathable, so condensation can be an issue.

    Q: Are expensive tents worth it?

    Generally, yes—if you need what they offer. Expensive tents cost a lot for a reason. Maybe that’s because they use ultralight-yet-strong materials, or because they’re exceptionally weatherproof. They might use a cutting-edge design that makes them more comfortable or livable. If you’re the kind of camper who’d benefit from these features—a long-distance backpacker, an ultralight hiker, or a mountaineer, for example—a pricier camping tent is well worth it. If you’re a more casual car camper, on the other hand, there’s no need to shell out for the top-of-the-line models. 

    Final thoughts on the best camping tents

    Whether you’re planning an overnight at a local campground, a long weekend base camping with friends, or a true expedition, you’ll need the right tent. The best tent for camping will fit your intended use and weather conditions. Think about how many people (and camping gear, and even pets) need to fit inside, what season or climate you want to use it in, and your budget. Then go through the variables, such as the number and size of vestibules and doors, pockets, and accessories like guy lines, to choose the best camping tent for you.

    The post The best camping tents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best camping cots of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/shop/best-camping-cot/ Fri, 18 Jun 2021 17:12:11 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=373113
    A grey and red tents in a large green field up into the mountains.
    Stay comfortable in the great outdoors. Dino Reichmuth, Unsplash

    Elevate your outdoor sleeping experience.

    The post The best camping cots of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A grey and red tents in a large green field up into the mountains.
    Stay comfortable in the great outdoors. Dino Reichmuth, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Part of the appeal of leaving your cozy bed behind to rough it on the trail is feeling more connected to nature. Camping cots allow you the luxury of a good snooze while breathing in all that fresh air, but being so one with nature that the rocky ground pokes into your ribs all night. When you pop your sleeping bag or mattress pad on top of one of these clever camp beds, insects will pass below you, instead of inside your bedding. Wake up refreshed and ready to go after considering these factors to find the perfect camping cot to fit your needs.

    • Comfort. If your campsite is just off the road or you’re pitching a tent in the backyard, consider a cot that comes with foam or an air mattress. The extra weight of this design can be a more-than-acceptable tradeoff for a softer and more supportive surface. Camping cots can also make a comfy guest bed for indoor sleepovers. The best models should still only take up minimal space in your closet or trunk.
    • Ease. Outdoor enthusiasts should consider durability and ease of assembly when choosing a camping cot. If you’re on a road trip, the ability to quickly set up and strike your campsite will provide you with more time for telling stories around the campfire. If you tend to feel cramped, look for extra-long and wide cots.
    • Weight. It’s true you feel every extra pound on the trail when you’re hauling them on your back. Prioritize gear that’s light and compact so you can still relax in less-than-optimal conditions. For example, cots made with aluminum alloy are much lighter than steel, without sacrificing strength. 

    The best camping cots: Reviews & Recommendations

    Best overall: Coleman ComfortSmart Cot

    Coleman

    SEE IT

    This steel-frame camp bed features a foam mattress for extra cushioning and folds up easily for storage. Best for people of medium height.

    Runner up: TETON Camp Cot

    TETON Sports

    SEE IT

    Generous sleeping surface made from Oxford canvas, with steel legs that can support up to 400 pounds. Features a pivot arm with a lever for easy setup.

    Best for hiking: Helinox Camping Cot

    Helinox

    SEE IT

    At just over five pounds and 21.5 inches long when packed, this high-end bed made from aluminum alloy is ideal for hikers. Features a unique bungee cord mechanism for fast assembly.

    Best budget: Araer Foldable Outdoor Bed

    ARAER

    SEE IT

    This budget option fits in your trunk and is designed to double as patio or pool furniture.

    Popular Science is here to help you choose among the most popular products on Amazon, and hidden gems our experts think are worth checking out.

    The post The best camping cots of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best beach umbrellas of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-beach-umbrella/ Fri, 23 Apr 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=283887
    People lying down on the beach under their blue and green umbrella during daytime
    John McArthur, Unsplash

    The best beach umbrella helps you keep your cool all summer long.

    The post The best beach umbrellas of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    People lying down on the beach under their blue and green umbrella during daytime
    John McArthur, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best heavy-duty Blue and white striped beach umbrella OutdoorMaster Beach Umbrella
    SEE IT

    The fiberglass pole is corrosion-resistant, so you can relax under this umbrella summer after summer.

    Best for wind Sky blue beach umbrella with carry bag Abba Patio Beach Umbrella with Sand Anchor
    SEE IT

    A built-in sand anchor prevents your umbrella from running away with the wind.

    Best budget Striped blue beach umbrella with tint and carry bag AMMSUN Outdoor Patio Beach Umbrella 
    SEE IT

    Get a high-quality beach umbrella for less than $40.

    Picture this: you’re relaxing on the beach with your feet in the warm sand and a cold drink in your hand, nary a care in the world. Is it because you have your own private beach? No, it’s something far more affordable: a beach umbrella. With one purchase you can establish your own personal oasis, sheltered from oppressive heat and potential harm. The best beach umbrella provides you an epic sunshade that’s easy to unfurl and that won’t blow away on windy beach days. Whether you’re riding solo or bringing family or friends to enjoy a day at the shore, we’ve selected the best beach umbrellas that will soon become part of your fun-in-the-sun essentials.

    The best beach umbrellas: Reviews & Recommendations

    Best heavy-duty: OutdoorMaster Beach Umbrella

    OutdoorMaster

    SEE IT

    The OutdoorMaster Beach heavy-duty umbrella is easy to carry, set up, break down, and adjust with the two-way rotation tilt mechanism. The pole base includes a twist anchor and a small metal crossbar to hold as you dig it into the sand. If needed, you can attach the sandbag with metal hooks to create an extra sturdy base. The umbrella is made with 160g polyester that contains a layer of PU silver coating, which offers better UV protection, while the fiberglass pole is corrosion-resistant, so you can relax under this umbrella summer after summer. 

    Best chair umbrella: Sport-Brella Versa-Brella Adjustable Umbrella

    Sport-Brella

    SEE IT

    Offered in two sizes, this chair umbrella’s UPF 50+ UV protection blocks 99.5 percent of the sun’s harsh UVA and UVB rays. Available in eight fun prints and colors, this umbrella uses a universal clamp that can attach to both square and tubular surfaces so you can carry and attach it to your seat no matter where you go! With two push-button hinges, you can easily adjust the umbrella to any angle to block out the sun. There is a carrying case included for easy transport and storage. 

    Best for wind: Abba Patio Beach Umbrella with Sand Anchor

    Abba Patio

    SEE IT

    This beach umbrella with sand anchor was thoughtfully designed with beach-goers in mind. Eight ribs made with flexible fiberglass move with the wind, making this umbrella durable enough to withstand windy days. To ensure an easy and comfortable set-up, the telescoping steel pole, powder-coated for rust resistance, and integrated sand anchor allows you to twist the pole into the sand at any height you please. You can even adjust the umbrella as the sun moves with the push-button tilt. With the 7-foot canopy, made from outdoor-rated oxford polyester UPF 50+ fabric, you can be sure your beach crew will stay cool and protected during the hottest hours of the day thanks to the best beach umbrella for wind. 

    Best tent: Leedor Beach Tent

    Leedor

    SEE IT

    The Leedor Beach Tent’s patented automatic open-hub structure allows for easy setup and comes with four stakes and four sandbags for extra stability against wind. The UPF 50+ UV-resistant fabric of this beach umbrella tent protects you and your loved ones from harsh rays while the three adjustable gauze windows allow the breeze to flow through. And should the bottom of the tent get wet or dirty, don’t worry—it’s waterproof and easy to clean. This beach tent comes with a carrying case and a one-year limited warranty should it not be up to your standards.

    Best budget: AMMSUN Outdoor Patio Beach Umbrella

    AMMSUN

    SEE IT

    With six bright prints to choose from, you’ll never lose your umbrella on the beach again. Not only is this a cute umbrella, but it’s also super high-quality. Designed for the beach or backyard, this umbrella is stable and durable with its fiberglass ribs and steel pole. The umbrella position can be easily adjusted with the push button so you can enjoy shade and sun protection throughout the day. With vents in the 6.5-foot canopy to prevent it from being blown over in the wind, this affordable umbrella is a win all around.

    The best beach umbrellas offer shade, stability, and fun designs 

    Let’s face it—the summer sun is strong and can be pretty unforgiving. Whether you’re beaching in South Beach, Tulum, or Coney Island, you need to protect yourself from those harsh rays. Nothing replaces the importance of applying sunscreen and wearing a sunhat, but the best beach umbrella gives you added protection from sunburn and heat exhaustion, offering you a place to cool down after, say, a competitive game of Kadima. And if you’re shopping for a heavy-duty umbrella to last you many summers, you might as well make it the best beach umbrella while you’re at it. When you do invest in a great beach umbrella, you’ll be able to enjoy it summer after summer. 

    When looking to add an umbrella to your beach essentials, one thing to consider is the size of your beach crew. How many people you will have sitting under the umbrella will determine the dimensions you should look for; in general, however, a diameter that’s typically anywhere between 70 inches and 95 inches (and a height that’s similarly 6 feet to 7 feet) should be perfect. And if you’ve got kids and critters to wrangle, you might want to consider the best beach umbrella tent.

    Another thing to consider is how portable your beach umbrella is. You’ll want it to be light enough to carry, yet have enough weight to be durable and stable during windier days. Typically, the best beach umbrellas will come with a carrying case to make the trip to and from the beach, as well as seasonal storage, simple and easy. 

    Related: You’ve conquered the sun, now take on the sand with the best beach towels. 

    What to consider when selecting beach gear

    So, what features make up the best beach umbrella? Well, firstly, in order to protect against the sun, you’ll want a UV umbrella. Typically, a UV umbrella will have a UPF rating of 50+, meaning it will protect against 98 percent of harsh UV rays. Secondly, to ensure you have the best beach umbrella for wind and it won’t blow away while you’re lounging under it, you’ll want a durable, stable, anchorable umbrella because no one wants to be that person running after a rogue umbrella careening down the beach. Thirdly, you’ll want a heavy-duty umbrella but one that’s an easy set up. Lastly, a fun and unique printed umbrella is like a festival pole, keeping you from getting lost on those packed beach days because truth be told, it’s easier than you think.

    A chair umbrella will have you sitting pretty 

    Whether you’re taking a solo trip to the beach, use a wheelchair, or want to cover your toddler in their stroller, a lightweight chair umbrella will keep you shady without needing to lug a larger umbrella to the dunes.

    Resist the wind, not this excellent umbrella option

    If you’re going to be out on a blustery day, a beach umbrella with vents will facilitate airflow, lowering the chance of a strong gust collecting enough force underneath the canopy and carrying it off.   

    A pop-up sun shelter offers a cool space for the whole family 

    A beach tent is perfect for family outings to the beach, lake, park, or backyard, as it fits up to four adults, as well as children and pets. It’s a great way to be communal—and keep those little ones in a semi-enclosed space—while relaxing in heavily populated areas.

    Can I get full coverage for a fractional price?

    You don’t have to spend a ton to get beach essentials that have all the bases—and faces—covered. Find the best beach umbrella even when you’re on a budget!

    FAQs

    Q: What is a good size beach umbrella?

    A good-sized beach umbrella will depend on how many people you have in your beach crew. Typically, anywhere from 6 feet to 7 feet of canopy will provide shade for two to four people, and possibly more if your group includes little ones or four-legged friends. If you need protection for one, you might consider a smaller chair umbrella or if you have a larger group, a beach umbrella tent will do the trick. No matter the size, you want to be sure it is lightweight and compact enough to transport to and from the beach. 

    Q: What is the difference between a beach umbrella and a patio umbrella?

    While beach umbrellas and patio umbrellas may look and act similarly, they are two very different umbrellas. Patio umbrellas tend to be way heavier as you aren’t moving them around as much and their poles fit into a table hole and floor base. Beach umbrellas don’t need a base and often feature a pointed bottom to dig into the sand while patio umbrellas have a flat bottom, which would make digging difficult. It may be tempting to use one umbrella for your backyard and beach outings but, unfortunately, they don’t work the same. 

    Q: What type of umbrella is best for sun protection?

    The best type of umbrella for sun protection is one that specifically says it has a UV protection rating of UPF 50+, as it will block 98 to 99 percent of the sun’s harshest UVA and UVB rays. UV umbrellas that don’t have aluminum undercoating will only have an SPF rating, so be sure to read all of the small details!

    Related: Here are the best sunglasses for all occasions.

    The final word on the best beach umbrellas

    Once you find the best beach umbrella for your summer needs, your days will be cooler, shadier (in a good way), and more health conscious. You already have enough to deal with packing lunch, towels, sunscreen, and toys for your beach trip, so your beach umbrella should be easy to transport, set up, and store, yet sturdy and durable enough to withstand strong winds. Once you find your beach essentials, your summer will get a whole lot brighter and your stress a whole lot lighter. 

    The post The best beach umbrellas of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best full-face snorkel masks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-full-face-snorkel-mask/ Mon, 26 Jul 2021 18:39:30 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=383774
    The best full face snorkel mask for you.
    Jakob Owens/Unsplash

    Dive deep and explore what the ocean has to offer with the help of this mask.

    The post The best full-face snorkel masks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best full face snorkel mask for you.
    Jakob Owens/Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The Tribord Subea Easybreath is the best overall full-face snorkeling mask. Tribord Subea Easybreath
    SEE IT

    This all-purpose mask has won accolades for design.

    Best for photographers The WildHorn Outfitters Seaview is the best full-face snorkel mask with a camera mount. WildHorn Outfitters Seaview
    SEE IT

    Capture your underwater adventures with the camera mount.

    Best for kids Zipoute makes the best full-face snorkel mask for kids. Zipoute Kids Full-Face Snorkel Mask
    SEE IT

    Shaped like a shark’s head, allows for easy breathing.

    Whether you’re about to explore the depths for the very first time or you’re a frequent ocean adventurer, a great full face snorkel mask can make the difference between an exciting dive or foundering. If you’ve tried a traditional mask and it makes you slightly uncomfortable, consider grabbing the best full face snorkel mask. They can provide extra coverage, eliminate the mouthpiece, and encourage a relaxing swim through the sea. So gear up for some wonderful aquatic adventures with the best full-face snorkel mask. 

    The best full-face snorkel masks: Reviews & Recommendations

    Best overall: Tribord Subea Easybreath

    DRY FREAK

    SEE IT

    This Easybreath full-face snorkeling mask is the winner of the Oxylane Innovation Award, and for good reason. A double chamber air vent valve provides continuous, clean fog-free airflow with a hypoallergenic silicone facial lining to prevent leaks. A dry top, secure lock snorkel tube prevents salty water from entering from the top, and an additional spare ring keeps the snorkel head from detaching. A removable camera mount can handle your GoPro and the 180-degree panoramic view lens means you won’t miss a thing. This mask is available in four colors and three sizes, including an option for kids under ten. 

    Best for people who wear glasses: Ocean Reef Aria Classic

    OCEAN REEF

    SEE IT

    The Aria Class, from Ocean Reef, is great for those who need to install prescription lenses. While the mask itself doesn’t come with prescription options, the company has partnered with See the Sea, which is dedicated to improving visibility for underwater explorers. The company will install needed lenses inside the mask, without impeding the mask’s fit or the seal that keeps out water. The Aria Classic comes in three sizes and two colorways with a full 180-degree panoramic view, updated air circulation including vents in the top portion of the mask, and a reinforced seal around your nose and mouth to prevent fogging.

    Best for photographers: WildHorn Outfitters Seaview

    WildHorn Outfitters

    SEE IT

    The Seaview 180º V2 utilizes FlowTech technology that supports natural breathing with four intake valves that draw in and circulate fresh air. Anti-leak silicone creates a tight yet comfortable seal around the face, and an auto-drain system gets rid of any occasional water from the mask without needing to take it off. A removable camera mount is situated near the chin/cheek area instead of the top of the head, which helps it stay securely underwater even as you float along the surface. The mount fits all GoPro cameras and swivels, so you’ll never miss a shot. It’s available in three sizes and four colors with an adjustable elastic strap to secure the perfect fit. 

    Best for kids: Zipoute Kids Full-Face Snorkel Mask

    ZIPOUTE

    SEE IT

    This Zipoute full-face snorkel is explicitly designed for small swimmers. This mask has separate channels for inhalation and exhalation to increase healthy airflow and prevent any build-up of CO2. Fresh air shoots straight to the nose and mouth via the large intake tube while exhaled air shoots out through the side. The flat, anti-fogging lens provides a panoramic view without any distortion, and the breathing tube has a floating ball that prevents water from entering the mask if submerged. The mask is one size fits all with adjustable straps to help fit your child’s features. It’s sized for kids whose eyebrow-to-the-bottom of-the-chin measurement sits between 3.45 and 3.94 inches). Our favorite part of this mask is the shark design, which is entirely removable should your child not be as enthusiastic about it as we are.  

    Best budget: Zipoute Full-Face Snorkel Mask

    ZIPOUTE

    SEE IT

    Just like the kids’ version, the adult mask from Zipoute is a budget-friendly way to breathe easily and comfortably underwater. There are separate air flow channels for inhaling and exhaling, preventing fogging bolstered by a 180-degree lens with an anti-fog coating. A silicone seal and floating ball prevent leaks supported by a drain valve and dry-top design. A camera mount will allow you to capture memories and the foldable breathing tube makes it easy to store in your beach bag. Each mask comes with a mesh bag, earplugs, screw, and an O ring for easy assembly. Available in three colors and two sizes, each mask has adjustable straps so you can customize a comfortable fit. 

    Things to consider before buying a full-face snorkel masks

    If you’ve never used a full-face snorkel before, you may not know what to look for or how to prioritize the fit and features you’ll need to have the best experience possible in the water. With that in mind, we’ve created this helpful guide to introduce you to some important points to consider. First, you’ll want to make sure you understand the difference between a traditional mask and a full-face mask. Then you can think about your ideal underwater adventure, skill level, and any additional gear you want to bring with you. 

    What exactly is a full-face snorkel mask?

    Unlike a traditional snorkel mask, which covers only the eyes and nose, a full face mask surrounds your entire face from your hairline to your chin. Separated into two sections, the top gives you panoramic views of undersea life, while the bottom encases your mouth and nose, connecting you effortlessly to the snorkel tube at the very top of the mask. With a full-face mask, you won’t have to suppress any gag reflexes, nor will you need to focus on clamping your jaw down on a rubber tube insert in order to breathe. A well-made mask means you’ll be able to breathe through your nose and mouth without fogging up your views. Wide straps hold the mask in place, and a water-tight seal around the perimeter of your face means little to no leakage, no matter what. 

    Who should try a full-face snorkel mask? 

    Full-face snorkel masks are best for swimmers who are looking for some leisurely fun and like to stick close to the surface. They’re not meant for freediving because of the restricted access to your nose to equalize pressure. You also want to stay away from a full-face mask if you’re planning on exerting yourself in the water, either by swimming hard or treading water for a long time. As your heart rate rises, the pace of your breathing increases, as does the likelihood of taking short, shallow breaths, which can leave you feeling overheated, dizzy, or light-headed. However, if you’re perfectly happy to float along the surface, looking down on the sea life below, then a full-face snorkel might be the best way to increase your comfort, expand your view, and help you breathe easy. 

    Do you wear prescription glasses? 

    It’s never a good idea to cram your everyday glasses inside a snorkel mask. And you certainly don’t want to size up to accommodate them; this could lead to leaks or injuries. However, if you can’t make the jump to contacts but still want to experience awe-inspiring ocean life, you may need to consider grabbing a custom snorkel mask. While most snorkel masks won’t automatically come with custom lenses, a few companies make models designed to be altered. Once you pick out the size and style you want, you’ll be able to send your mask to an outside organization that will install prescription lenses so you can see clearly underwater.

    Are you trying to document your aquatic excursion?

    While underwater photography certainly exists, a hands-free option for filming will give you more flexibility, as well as more security while collecting underwater memories. If you’ve already invested in a GoPro, make sure you look for a full-face snorkel mask that comes with a camera mount. A built-in mount in your beach gear means you won’t need to worry about dropping the camera deep into the water or watching it float away. 

    Related: Best underwater scooter for safe and fun aquatic adventures

    FAQs

    Q: Why are full-face snorkel masks dangerous?

    A cursory Google search will bring up several fear-inducing articles that discuss the dangers of full-face snorkels, and they all relate to CO2. If a full face mask doesn’t fit well, forming a tight seal around the nose and mouth with exit vents for exhalation, you risk breathing potentially dangerous levels of CO2 back into the mask, which you could then inhale with your next breath. Inhaling CO2 can lead to dizziness and even losing consciousness, making poorly made or inappropriately used full-face masks dangerous.  

    Luckily, there are a few things you can do to make sure your mask is safe. Don’t buy the cheapest mask you can find; when it comes to your safety, it’s worth spending a few extra dollars to ensure the model you use was made thoughtfully and follows regulations and guidelines. Try on the mask before jumping into the water, making sure the seals are tight to your face. Stay on the surface, don’t dive deep underwater, and try to avoid submerging the mask at all. Don’t engage in strenuous swimming while wearing your mask: leisurely drift, or float through the water.

    Q: Can you go underwater with a full-face snorkel?

    While many masks are protected from water rushing in through the snorkel tube, they are not designed to be submerged underwater. Expelling any water that comes in can be difficult, and the quick breathing that comes after holding your breath can increase the chance of CO2 being trapped in the second chamber. Full-face snorkels are meant to be used on the surface, looking down at marine life below. 

    Q: How long can you breathe underwater with a snorkel mask?

    While no snorkel will let you breathe while fully submerged underwater (you need to be scuba diving for that), you can bob along the water’s surface, remaining face down, for as long as you are comfortable and breathing easily. As long as you aren’t over-exerting yourself or feeling any sort of distress, you can spend as much time in the ocean as you want. 

    Final thoughts on the best full-face snorkel masks 

    Whether you’re going on a tropical vacation or hitting up a nearby beach, bringing a full-face snorkel along for the journey can only add adventure and excitement to your trip. The most important thing to consider before jumping into the water with your new beach accessory is safety. Take the time to go over any safety guidelines, make sure your mask fits securely, and that you have a plan in place should you experience any trouble breathing. Beyond that, you can think about any additional features you may require, like prescription lenses or a camera mount. The best full-face snorkel will make breathing easy and comfortable, giving you the perfect view of aquatic life. 

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best full-face snorkel masks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best charcoal grills of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-charcoal-grill/ Sat, 31 Jul 2021 13:35:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=385340
    A lineup of the best charcoal grills on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    Give food the unbeatable, smokey outdoor flavor by cooking with the best charcoal grill.

    The post The best charcoal grills of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of the best charcoal grills on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The Weber Original Kettle Premium Charcoal Grill is the best for traditionalists. Weber Original Kettle Premium Charcoal Grill
    SEE IT

    The familiar face of the best backyard burgers.

    Best budget The Fire Sense Black Notebook Charcoal Grill is the best budget pick. Fire Sense Black Notebook Charcoal Grill
    SEE IT

    A cheap, portable camping grill that works anywhere.

    Best for large parties The Royal Gourmet CD2030AN Charcoal Grill and BBQ Smoker is the best for big families. Royal Gourmet CD2030X Deluxe Charcoal Grill and BBQ Smoker
    SEE IT

    A perfect large charcoal grill and smoker.

    The grill is an icon of the American backyard and it’s more popular than ever. The best charcoal grill is an affordable way to cook mouth-watering meat and veggies. With better temperature controls and smoking options, charcoal grills are becoming the cooking device of choice for serious outdoor eaters. The smokey flavor of charcoal briquettes or hardwood lump charcoal infuses burgers and chicken with distinct summer magic. These grills are easy to use, so even if you are a terrible chef, you can still cook up impressive food. Vegetables, hotdogs, pork chops, ribs, and more will all taste better when you cook them with these dependable, high-quality charcoal cookers.

    How we chose the best charcoal grills

    We grilled the best charcoal grill contenders based on reviews, recommendations, personal testing, research, and user impressions. We also looked at material, size, weight, and built-in features like thermometers to narrow down the list.

    The best charcoal grills: Reviews & Recommendations

    While there are small differences between various models, the basic science and design remain the same. More robust temperature controls and smoking options can bump up the price, but these can be well worth it for serious outdoor chefs. With a budget in mind, look for the options that will make your grilling experience easier and the food tastier.  

    Best overall: Weber Original Kettle Premium Charcoal Grill

    Weber

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With a 70-year legacy behind it, this charcoal grill is proof that good design is timeless and durable.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 22.5 x 22.5 x 27 inches
    • Weight: 32.3 lbs.
    • Material: Porcelain
    • Built-in temperature gauge: Yes

    Pros

    • One-touch cleaning system
    • Durable
    • Heat shield on handle

    Cons

    • Instructions unclear

    For over 70 years, the Weber kettle charcoal grill has cooked perfect burgers and deliciously smokey chicken. If it ain’t broke, don’t fix it. The Weber charcoal grill is an easy-to-use, basic grill that can comfortably cook 13 burger patties on its 363 square inches of grilling space. The handle on the lid doesn’t get too hot thanks to the shield, so you won’t fling the lid into the pool in anger. And ashes collected in the bottom bin are easy to remove. This is a great grill for cooking dinner every day. It’s consistent. It’s dependable. And it will last a long time.

    Best for experienced grillers: Char-Griller E56720 AKORN Kamado Charcoal Grill

    Char-Griller

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: An insulated design brings—and seals—the heat for juicy meats and smoky vegetables.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 45 x 31 x 47 inches
    • Weight: 97 lbs.
    • Material: Alloy steel
    • Built-in temperature gauge: Yes

    Pros

    • Temperature control
    • Fuel-efficient
    • Large grill space

    Cons

    • Expensive

    The Char-Griller charcoal grill is a powerful backyard beast. The 447-square-inch cooking surface makes this one of the best large charcoal grills. It’s more expensive than a basic charcoal model, but you’re paying for temperature control and even cooking. The grill can reach temperatures of 700 degrees to sear big steaks, but can just as easily maintain a cool, smokey 200 degrees for ribs. The adjustable top and bottom dampers give you more control over the heat and smoke. The folding side shelves offer a helping hand when moving food to a serving tray. This large model is designed for those who want absolute power over the heat and smoke, to fine-tune the flavor profile of any grilled food.   

    Best for large parties: Royal Gourmet CD2030X Deluxe Charcoal Grill and BBQ Smoker

    Royal Gourmet

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Two build-in side tables and large cooking racks mean there’s enough room to grill and serve everything at once for a backyard party.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 58.66 x 28.74 x 50.39 inches
    • Weight: 70.3 lbs.
    • Material: Porcelain-enamel
    • Built-in temperature gauge: Yes

    Pros

    • Built-in paper towel holder
    • Ample grilling space
    • Height-adjustable charcoal pan

    Cons

    • Large

    It looks like a gas grill, but the Royal Gourmet cart grill uses charcoal to cook anything on its spacious 764-square-inch surface (511 square inches of cooking space and a 253-square-inch warming rack). A side crank raises and lowers the coals for better temperature control. The smokestack makes it easy to keep air circulating without smoking out the chef. Even though it’s bigger than others, it’s easy to move and maneuver around a backyard. And a charcoal cart grill has more storage options with shelves and side tables ready to support the grill master’s tools.

    Best for gas grill lovers: Weber 15501001 Performer Deluxe Charcoal Grill

    Weber

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The touch-and-go propane-powered ignition system gives you the feel of a gas grill with the smokiness of charcoal.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 8 x 48 x 43.5 inches
    • Weight: 91 lbs.
    • Material: Porcelain-coated steel
    • Built-in temperature gauge: Yes

    Pros

    • Removable LCD cook timer
    • Extra space compared to base model
    • Touch ignition

    Cons

    • Screws for lid holder can interfere with grate removal and replacement

    If you want the power and ease of a gas grill but the flavor of a charcoal grill, the Weber Deluxe Charcoal Grill is the best of both worlds. The touch ignition uses gas to get coals cooking instantly. The deluxe version also comes with a handy side table that doubles as a charcoal bin for easy access and storage. The shelf underneath adds even more storage space. Plus, it’s a fantastic Weber grill made of high-quality materials. Is it worth the extra money to opt for the deluxe model over the basic? If you want easy ignition and extra space, it’s money well spent. 

    Best budget: Fire Sense Black Notebook Charcoal Grill

    Fire Sense

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This portable tabletop grill is ready for tailgates, camping, and small backyard get-togethers.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 17.53 x 11.82 x 14.18 inches
    • Weight: 8 lbs.
    • Material: Alloy steel
    • Built-in temperature gauge: No

    Pros

    • Portable
    • Carrying case included

    Cons

    • Not for large cookouts

    What can you get for $30? You can get a pretty great tabletop charcoal grill. The Fire Sense is the best budget charcoal grill, perfect for camping or setting up in a stadium parking lot. The 18-inch by 13-inch by 13-inch portable grill folds up and is easy to carry or stuff in a camping bag. This is a small charcoal grill, so don’t expect to feed 50 guests unless they don’t mind taking turns. But you can fit four burgers on the grill with room left over for veggies and hotdogs. Plus, this mini grill is easy to set up, fill, and light. For being a budget model, the Fire Sense is the best grill for the money.

    Think the concept of a portable BBQ grill/fire pit is … lit? If you’re looking for a step-up, check out the Front Runner, a more durable/aesthetically oriented option than the Fire Sense thanks to its rust/corrosion-resistant stainless steel design. It packs flat for easy transport and after a quick 30-second setup can be filled with charcoal and/or wood for cooking or keeping warm post-grilling on a chilly night.

    What to consider when buying the best charcoal grills

    If you’re still using an old grill that’s more rust than a cooking appliance, it’s time for an upgrade. Today’s modern charcoal grills are as stylish as they are useful. And with the right grilling know-how, you’ll be hosting gourmet backyard parties and family dinners all season long. 

    Gas grill vs. charcoal

    Gas grills are easier to use, easier to clean, and cook food faster. So why would you ever want to ditch the gas grill and opt for a charcoal cooker? Simple answer: The best charcoal grills are cheaper and the food tastes better. But there’s more to these grills than just an attractive price point. 

    Yes, the charcoal grill creates ash that must be cleaned. And yes, it can take a few minutes to get the charcoal hot and ready for cooking. But the flavor is unmistakable and delicious. The smokey charcoal penetrates burgers, chicken, and steak with a taste that screams hot-weather fun. And charcoal grills are also more affordable. For a reasonable price, you can have a great backyard grill that will last for years. Setting up a charcoal grill is simple since the device itself is simple: Three or four metal legs, a pit for hot coals, a metal grill for the food, and a dome lid to contain the heat and smoke.  

    And best of all, there’s something to be said for the ritual of charcoal. Everything takes a little longer but feels more important and sacred. From starting the coals to dumping the ashes, it’s a time-honored tradition and a quasi-religious experience. (Or maybe it’s just a cheap way to make burgers taste yummy.)

    Cart vs. kettle charcoal grill

    When you think of charcoal grills, you probably imagine a kettle grill. These charcoal grills have the classic design of a circular surface with a rounded dome lid. They’ve been around for nearly 100 years, so clearly the design works. They are smaller than gas grills, but that’s a good thing for getting the right temperature without wasting heat and space. They are also easy to assemble and easy to store in a garage or shed during the off-season. 

    A charcoal cart grill looks more like today’s gas grills, with a rectangular grilling surface and boxy shape. They may also come with a handy side tray and storage shelf underneath. Cart grills are typically bigger than kettle grills, and that means you’ll need more charcoal to heat up the large area. Getting up to the right heat is critical for charcoal, so a bigger model can be more hassle if you’re only cooking a couple of cheeseburgers. But for big parties and big families, a large charcoal cart grill does an amazingly efficient job. 

    Direct vs. indirect charcoal grilling

    There are two ways to cook on a charcoal grill: With direct heat or indirect heat. For burgers and hotdogs, you want the heat directly under the food to give it a blast of cooking power and sear the surface of the meat. Chicken should be cooked with indirect heat, meaning the hot coals are pushed to one side of the grill and the meat rests on the other side. This lets the chicken heat up to the right temperature slowly and evenly without drying out. 

    Charcoal grills can also be used to smoke meat over a long period of time. With strategic placement of the charcoal, you can smoke a rack of ribs in an afternoon. Simply shifting the charcoal position provides a whole new cooking option.

    Temperature control

    The biggest drawback to charcoal grills is cooking time. Unlike a gas or electric grill that is ready to start cooking at the touch of a button, charcoal grills need extra love and support to get the coals hot enough. 

    The best grill accessory for a charcoal grill is a charcoal starter or charcoal chimney. These metal tubes ensure all the briquettes are red hot. Put newspaper at the bottom and load your bricks to the top. Light the bottom and the charcoal will start working together to get each brick hot enough. When you start to see flames at the top of the chimney, the coals are ready. Carefully remove the chimney and spread out the coals. (A charcoal rake is another great accessory to have on hand.) The whole process shouldn’t take more than 15 minutes. Yes, that’s a lot longer than clicking a gas grill starter. But good things come to those who wait. Patience is part of the process. 

    If you don’t have a charcoal chimney, you can still stack the bricks in a pyramid formation and hit it with the lighter fluid to get things burning. But the chimney really does make things easier and more consistent.

    Speaking of the best charcoal grill accessories: Temperature control is a big part of any grilling process. Many come with built-in thermometers, but these are notoriously inaccurate. It’s always best to use a trusted meat thermometer to make sure the food is properly cooked.

    Types of charcoal

    Charcoal is basically wood that’s been through a rough couple of years. But there are two types of charcoal to pick from. Charcoal briquettes are the trusted old friend of traditional suburban backyard grills. These evenly shaped bricks are usually made of sawdust plus a binding agent to keep everything in the right shape. They are cheap. They are consistent. They are available in any grocery store or hardware store. The downside is flavor and heat. Because they are not 100-percent wood, they lack the smokey depth of lump charcoal. And they can struggle to get up to the proper temperature quickly. However, they are fantastic for slow and low cooking, such as smoking a rack of ribs for several hours. 

    Hardwood lump charcoal is exactly as the name says: 100 percent hardwood. They are not in a uniform shape and size, so they can’t cook food evenly. But they do get very hot, very fast. The biggest benefit: They give burgers, hot dogs, and any meat you’re cooking a deliciously distinct seared flavor. Hardwood lump charcoal will be more expensive, and they aren’t ideal for long, multi-hour cook times. That said, for foodies and backyard chefs who demand top-quality cooking materials, hardwood lump charcoal can’t be beaten.

    And you can always go for the best of both worlds by throwing a handful of hardwood lump charcoal on your traditional briquettes. 

    FAQs

    Q: Are charcoal grills easy to use?

    Yes, charcoal grills are easy to use. They are even easier than setting up and using gas grills. They may take longer to heat up, and you will need to clean out the ashes, but charcoal models are very user-friendly. Add charcoal. Add fire. Add meat. And that’s it. Even the smoking options on some are simple to use, with instructions on how to maintain good airflow and smoke over long periods of time. Plus, the best are smaller and lighter than gas grills. They are easier to move and store. The only easier way to cook food outside is over an open wood fire, but that results in lost hotdogs and burnt marshmallows. Charcoal is the easiest way to safely cook food outdoors. Just make sure you’re cleaning your grill regularly, and this easy-to-use grill will serve you for years.

    Q: How do I choose a charcoal grill?

    To choose a charcoal grill, consider how big you want it. Some portable grills are small, and can only accommodate two or three chicken breasts. A grill with over 300 square inches of cooking space should be more than enough for a family of four. You also want to make sure the grill is easy to clean. Digging out the ashes of a poorly designed grill can be a real pain. Temperature control is a plus, but for fine-tuning heat, you may need to spend more for a grill with more features. And watch your wallet. It’s always a good idea to start with a budget. Luckily, there are a lot of great grills that cost less than $150. 

    Q: Why are Weber charcoal grills so expensive?

    Comparatively speaking, Weber charcoal grills are not expensive. The basic model is affordable and will do a fantastic job. You can find cheaper charcoal grills, but they tend to be smaller. The small portable grills are designed for camping and tailgating. Tabletop grills cost less, but they need a level surface to rest on. Weber makes deluxe models, and these offer gas-powered ignition for fast, easy cooking. Are they worth the money? Only if you want the extra features like instant fire and bonus storage space.

    Final thoughts on the best charcoal grills

    Charcoal grills are easy to use and affordable. For half the price of a gas grill, you can equip your backyard with a high-quality charcoal grill. Food tastes better when cooked with charcoal and with flavorful lump charcoal, you can experiment and give backyard food an extra special kick of charred goodness. While charcoal grills do take longer to cook, it’s not too much time. The fifteen minutes it takes to get it going is a thoughtful time for you to reflect on the cooking process or stir up some secret BBQ sauce. And it’s worth the wait. There’s no better way to grill meat and vegetables.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best charcoal grills of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best gas grills of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-gas-grill/ Fri, 13 Aug 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=388980
    A lineup of the best gas grills
    Amanda Reed

    Become the master of delicious outdoor cooking with the best gas grill.

    The post The best gas grills of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of the best gas grills
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best for first-time homeowners The Weber 44010001 Spirit II Liquid Propane Grill is the best gas grill for first-time homeowners. Weber 44010001 Spirit II E-210 2-Burner Liquid Propane Grill
    SEE IT

    Grill dinner for a housewarming party and beyond. 

    Best overall The Char-Broil 463377319 Performance 4-Burner is the best gas grill for everyday grillers. Char-Broil 463377319 Performance 4-Burner Gas Grill
    SEE IT

    Perfect for grilling dinner every night.

    Best natural gas The Weber 66015001 Genesis II is the best gas grill for natural-gas homes. Weber Genesis E-325S Natural Gas Grill
    SEE IT

    A unique natural option with high-quality features.

    Modern gas grills are the most efficient and useful addition to any backyard. Today’s are as effortless to use as your kitchen stove. They are designed to cook a lot of food quickly, and grill cleaning and maintenance have never been easier. Plus, they are highly controllable. From cooking burgers and chicken to making perfectly seared restaurant-quality steaks, an affordable and powerful appliance gives you a wide variety of grilling options. If it’s time to upgrade your current rig, or you’re new to the grilling game, the best gas grill may become the new centerpiece of your patio—and personal food pyramid. 

    How we chose the best gas grills

    When the weather gets warm, you’ll find the entire PopSci gear team heating up the grill and throwing on kebabs, corn, steak, and other foods that are tastier simply by being made on the grill. This is a pro-grill team. In fact, we like anything involving fire, including fire pits. With that said, we looked at reviews, recommendations, and performed our own testing to find an easy-to-use grill perfect for entertaining or steak slinging.

    The best gas grills: Reviews & Recommendations

    Ready to become a grill master? Shop for a gas grill that does what you need it to do. The grill should be big enough to handle your household, yet secure and safe too. Perhaps most importantly, it should fit your budget. Once you know what you’re looking for, you can easily find the best gas grill for your yard. 

    Best overall: Char-Broil 463377319 Performance 4-Burner Gas Grill

    Char-Broil

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With a large cooking surface, this versatile grill can help fuel a few friends, your family, and even the entire neighborhood.

    Specs

    • Weight: 85 pounds
    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Rust-resistant: Yes
    • Dimensions: 50.4 x 24.5 x 45 inches

    Pros

    • Just-right size
    • Easy-to-clean drip tray
    • Large cooking surface

    Cons

    • Not sturdy

    The Char-Broil gas grill is big enough for a large family, but it’s not an oversized backyard behemoth. The stainless steel gas grill is easy to control and it heats quickly. Four burners provide perfect heat across the 425-square-inch cooking surface, with clean-up made easy thanks to the porcelain-coated cast iron grates. The porcelain drip tray is also easy to remove and clean. And the design is compact and stylish, perfect for any suburban backyard. And, it features a push-to-start electric ignition—no more cursing at the wind while hunched over the grill with a lighter and some newspaper. It’s not as sturdy as other grills on the list, so if you live in an area with high winds or have small kids or a dog, make sure you add some extra support to prevent spills.

    Best natural gas: Weber Genesis E-325S Natural Gas Grill

    Weber

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Get the ease of propane with the taste of natural gas with this versatile grill from Weber.

    Specs

    • Weight: 188 pounds
    • Material: Alloy steel
    • Rust-resistant: Yes
    • Dimensions: 35.5 x 30.75 x 31 inches

    Pros

    • Sear zone
    • Large side table
    • Lots of customizability and add-ons

    Cons

    • Strictly natural gas

    Natural-gas grills are different from traditional propane grills. They are fueled by your natural gas utility line. Why use natural gas? Food tastes better when cooked with natural gas, and the grills are more efficient. Plus, you won’t need to lug heavy propane tanks for refills. The Weber natural gas option is the best cooker of its kind. You get all the features of a Weber Genesis grill, with the added convenience and flavor of natural gas. The sear zone lets you cook multiple steaks at the same time, and allows you to serve them at the same time—your “well-done” friend and their stomach will thank you. Replaceable grates let you roast, bake, and even stir fry by swapping the grate for separate Weber grillware. Prep dinner on the extra large side table, and get more cooking room with the expandable top cooking grate.

    That said, this only runs on natural gas. While there are propane grills that come with natural gas options and hookups, this is strictly natural gas. Weber also makes a propane model of the grill.

    Best dual-fuel: BLOSSOMZ Dual Fuel Combination Charcoal/Gas Grill

    BLOSSOMZ

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: If you’re an indecisive griller, this grill can handle both charcoal and propane for any of your grilling moods.

    Specs

    • Weight: 103 pounds
    • Material: Alloy steel and stainless steel
    • Rust-resistant: Yes
    • Dimensions: 64 x 28 x 49.75 inches

    Pros

    • Can cook with charcoal and propane at the same time
    • Easy to control and manage
    • Lots of cooking space

    Cons

    • Not great for big parties

    Can’t pick between gas and charcoal? With the BLOSSOMZ combination grill you get it all. A gas grill with three burners is on one side, and a charcoal grill is on the other. The gas side is slightly larger, with 295 square inches of space, compared to the 262 square inches of the charcoal side. That means this is a standard-sized charcoal grill with a smaller-sized gas grill (and not great gas grilling for big parties). Both sides are easy to control and manage simultaneously. If you want to experiment with flavor and dinner menu options, this fantastic food laboratory is a unique combination of gas and charcoal grill.

    Best for first-time homeowners: Weber Spirit II E-210 2-Burner Liquid Propane Grill

    Weber

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: Get great quality when getting into the world of backyard grilling thanks to the Weber Spirit II E-210.

    Specs

    • Weight: 103 pounds
    • Material: Porcelain enamel, cast iron
    • Rust-resistant: Yes
    • Dimensions: 48 x 26 x 57 inches

    Pros

    • Open cart design
    • Simple ignition
    • Quick heating

    Cons

    • Vents out of the back, so keep away from vinyl siding

    This Weber gas grill is ideal for families of four, with 450 square inches of grilling space. The Weber grill is well-built and feels strong even on windy days. If you have young children racing around the yard, the lightweight Weber grill is pretty good at staying upright even when slightly pushed. Ignition is simple and dependable, and the grill heats up quickly. Food tastes particularly great thanks to the Weber grill flavorizer bars that help turn drippings into smoky flavor. For new homes and new families, this is a fantastic entry-level gas grill from a high-quality brand. This grill vents heavily out of the back, so be careful when placing it near vinyl siding 

    Best portable: Char-Broil Portable 240 Liquid Propane Gas Grill

    Char-Broil

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: Gas grilling isn’t limited to your backyard with a portable grill—we’re partial to this one from Char-Boil.

    Specs

    • Weight: 21.3 pounds
    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Rust-resistant: Yes
    • Dimensions: 16.2 x 24.8 x 13.3 inches

    Pros

    • Portable
    • Carry handle
    • Sturdy

    Cons

    • Not lightweight

    You won’t find a better portable grill for less than $100. The Char-Broil grill is designed for camping and tailgating. This tabletop gas grill is sturdy and dependable. Hook it up to a one-pound propane tank and you’ll be making dogs and brats in no time. It can easily cook five burgers at a time. While not a super lightweight grill (it weighs slightly more than 20 pounds, not including fuel), it is easy to carry thanks to the thick, comfortable handle. And it’s faster and easier than portable charcoal grills. Even if you only use it on a backyard table, this is a handy and affordable grill for any occasion.

    Best budget: American Gourmet Char-Broil Classic 360 3-Burner Liquid Propane Gas Grill

    American Gourmet

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Get high heat across 360 square feet of grilling surface for less than $200.

    Specs

    • Weight: 48.5 pounds
    • Material: Stainless steel
    • Rust-resistant: Yes
    • Dimensions: 24.1 x 51.2 x 43.5 inches

    Pros

    • Porcelain-coated grates
    • Inline burners
    • Easy to assemble

    Cons

    • Some parts not as high-quality due to price

    This grill is made by American Gourmet, a subsidiary company of Char-Broil. This means you get high-quality features for a great price, like easy-to-clean, rust-resistant porcelain-coated grates and stainless steel burners. In fact, you get 30,000 British Thermal Units (BTUs) of heat across the grill’s 360-square-inch cooking surface. This means you won’t have to wait long for the grill to heat up for fast grilling. It even includes a 170-square-inch warming rack for hot buns or warming up sides. Piezo ignition gives you burner start-ups at the push of a button, and the metal side shelves give you ample prep space. However, you get what you pay for in some included parts. For example, the grill comes with plastic wheels, which will damage over time in the rain, versus solid wheels with rubber tracks in higher-priced models.

    What to consider when buying the best gas grills

    Nothing beats backyard burgers and hotdogs, but there is more to modern gas grills than a tank of fuel. Here’s what you’ll need to know and the feature you will need to control the heat and ensure your burgers don’t turn into bricks.

    Why use gas grills over charcoal, electric, and wood pellet grills?

    Of the main types of backyard grills—gas, charcoal, electric, and wood pellets—gas is the most popular, and with good reason. They are the easiest grill to start, control, and clean. Even if you’ve never grilled so much as a cheese sandwich, you can quickly become a gas-grilling master. 

    Another big benefit of a gas grill is the size. You can cook a whole chicken or rack of ribs easily and efficiently on most gas grills. You can find small grills for camping and tailgating, but most backyard grills will have a nice big surface that can handle two dozen burger patties or more. 

    Gas grills can be more expensive than charcoal grills, but you’re paying for convenience. Charcoal grills require more setup and monitoring, plus there’s the ash you have to deal with after cooking. Gas grills need a tank of fuel, but that’s about it. Touch the electric ignition and within a few minutes, the grill is ready to cook. 

    Find a gas grill with great grates

    Besides the temperature, grill grates are the most important part of any outdoor cooker. Grill grates can be stainless steel, cast iron, or enamel-coated. Cast-iron grates are better for searing and maintaining high temperatures, and they add iconic grill marks better than stainless steel. But cast iron can be a pain to maintain and clean. Stainless-steel grates will last longer, plus they’re lighter and they’re easier to clean. 

    Enamel-coated grill grates provide an excellent non-stick surface, but if that coating is chipped or damaged, the grate loses all of its magic and becomes difficult to clean. And don’t stick to just grilling grates. Add a griddle pan for easy outdoor frying.

    BTUs and temperature control

    Don’t get hung up on BTU (British Thermal Units) rating. While the BTU will tell you how much fuel the grill is guzzling, a higher BTU does not directly relate to higher heat. 

    Preheat time does matter. It can take some fifteen minutes or more to get up to the right cooking temperature, and every minute waiting to cook feels like an hour. 

    An infrared gas grill is designed to sear steak and chicken. It’s a popular feature of some of the best gas grills. But a lack of infrared burners shouldn’t be a total deal breaker as there are other ways to achieve similar searing effects. 

    The burners on any gas grill will be the part of the grill most often replaced. A burner can last between two and 10 years, and some offer a 10-year warranty for the burners. Replacing the burners is not a hard task; most grill burners can be replaced in less than 10 minutes.

    Can the grill hold up against a shake test?

    Gas grills need to be sturdy. A grill that tips over is a serious safety concern. If possible, give the grill a shake before buying. If you feel too much wobble and rattling, the grill could fall apart after one season of use. Welded stainless-steel grills tend to hold up better. If the grill is built with nuts and bolts, make sure everything is tight and all joints are as seamless as possible. The lid should lift easily yet feel secure when closed. If you assemble the grill yourself, read the instructions carefully. Many grill manufacturers also provide easy-to-follow online videos and tutorials to make sure you’re grilling safely. 

    The best gas grill should also have wheels or casters for easy mobility. Gas grills can be heavy, so if you plan on moving the grill make sure the wheels are up to the challenge and not cheap, hollow plastic. And always keep your gas grill covered when not in use. Rain is the obvious enemy of grills, but lawn chemicals and pesticides can also seep into the grill and cause damage. 

    How to avoid flare-ups

    No matter how careful you are, flare-ups will happen. When the fat hits the heat source, the result is a blast of flame. While this is most common with charcoal grills, it will happen with gas grills too. Most have a drip pan that channels and collects the grease away from the heat. These drip pans work well, and they are an improvement over older models. But the grease can still build up and collect, which can create a dangerous situation if it ignites. 

    If you experience a flare-up, keep calm. Move the food to another part of the grill. Most flare-ups only last a few seconds and you won’t need to do much to fight the flame. But if the fire continues past the flare-up phase, you may need to take action. Snuff out the fire by closing the grill, shutting off the fuel, and denying it oxygen. Do not use water. This is a grease fire and water only makes things worse. A fire extinguisher or box of baking soda should be standing by to prevent an annoyance from turning into a disaster. 

    FAQs

    Q: How long do gas grills last?

    A gas grill can last ten years or longer, depending on how you take care of it. The burners will be the first things to go and will need replacement, but they are easy to remove and install and aren’t too expensive. Keep the grill covered and protected from rain and lawn chemicals when not in use. Rust can sneak in just about anywhere, so the dryer your grill is, the longer it will last. Some so-called stainless-steel grills may show discoloration over time. This won’t affect the grilling process or the flavor, but it can be aesthetically unpleasing—especially when trying to impress the neighbors. And most importantly, always clean the grill grates after use. A good wooden scraper can get the job done without running the risk of adding metal bristles to your food. Check out our other must-have grill accessories.

    Q: Can gas grills use charcoal?

    No, gas grills cannot use charcoal. Propane and natural gas models are designed with specific burners to channel the fuel and heat. Putting charcoal into these boxes will result in a mess of ash since these are not made with ash bins. If you want the power of a grill and the flavor of a charcoal grill, consider buying a combination grill. While they’re not for every outdoor chef, a charcoal/gas combo can be a fun way to try new ways to cook. The two sides of these cookers have independent grilling surfaces and lids. It’s the safest and easiest way to bring charcoal to a gas grill party.

    Q: Are gas grills better than charcoal grills?

    Gas grills are better than charcoal grills with regard to prep time, heat control, and cleanup. While charcoal grills give food a distinct smoky, backyard flavor, they can be difficult to set up, and getting the coals to the right temperature takes a while. These grills have push-button operation, with easy knobs and dials to find the right temperature quickly. The grills will be more expensive. They are also larger and heavier. But the extra size means they can grill 30 or more burgers easily. Which is better? It depends on what you want. They are faster and easier. Charcoal grills make food taste better but need more care. The choice is yours. 

    Final thoughts on the best gas grills

    Gas grills might be the very best way to cook outside. They are fast and efficient, with easy temperature control. They also excel at cooking large amounts of food for parties and events. Find a gas grill big enough for the family, yet small enough so it won’t look out of place in the backyard. Trusted brands like Weber and Char-Broil have a proven track record of grills. And always make sure the grill is sturdy and won’t topple over when hit with a mild breeze. For backyard BBQs, it’s tough to beat the classic and convenient gas grill.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best gas grills of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best backyard games of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-backyard-games/ Wed, 05 May 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=362633
    best backyard games
    Spikeball, Unsplash

    When summer rolls around, and friends and family roll up, you’ll want only the best backyard games to occupy kids of all ages

    The post The best backyard games of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    best backyard games
    Spikeball, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best cornhole boards Wood cornhole set, 8 all-weather regulation bean bags, carrying case, and bean bag tote backyard set GoSports Solid Wood Cornhole Set
    SEE IT

    This well-constructed cornhole set is easy to transport and durable.

    Best beginner badminton set 4 steel badminton rackets, birdies, 6 stakes and ropes backyard game Franklin Sports Badminton Starter Set
    SEE IT

    This set provides all you need to play badminton in the backyard.

    Best budget Horseshoes, mats with pegs and dowels backyard game Champion Sports Indoor/Outdoor Horseshoe Set
    SEE IT

    Play horseshoes inside and outside with this wallet-friendly set.

    When the weather warms up and the sun starts shining, it’s time to find any excuse to take things outside. Your lonely lawn has waited all winter to play host to fun and games. From traditional cornhole boards to innovative, new outdoor party games, there are plenty of outdoor games for kids, outdoor games for teenagers, and abundant options for adults as well. Whether you want to spice up a BBQ, supplement a pool party, or just break up the monotony of a random weekday, we’ve got something that will fit the bill. And don’t worry if your outdoor space is limited: we’ve included the best backyard games that’ll work even if you only have a few square feet of space to work with.

    The best backyard games: Reviews & recommendations

    Best cornhole boards: GoSports Solid Wood Cornhole Set

    GoSports

    SEE IT

    Constructed of 100-percent solid wood, the GoSports set is durable, easy to set up, and built to last. These cornhole boards come with eight toss bags (four red, four blue), as well as carrying bags. The plain wood facade makes them ideal for customization as well; go nuts with some paint for a personalized look.

    Best croquet set: Juegoal Six Player Croquet Set

    Juegoal

    SEE IT

    The set includes 6 inches by 28 inches hardwood handles, 6 inches by 8 inches hardwood mallets, 2 inches by 18 inches hardwood ending stakes, 6 inches by 2.8 inches weather-resistant molded balls, and nine steel wickets with vinyl coating. Everything can fit in the handy drawstring carrying bag, and the equipment is meant for games with two to six players—making it a great family or party activity. 

    Best Spikeball set: Spikeball Standard 3-Ball Kit

    Spikeball

    SEE IT

    The original “beginner’s” set has everything you need to take up the Spikeball game. This Spikeball set is designed for a four-person game, and comes with an adjustable net with folding legs (for easy storage and travel) and three balls. The whole kit can be easily broken down and transported in the included drawstring bag. It’s great as a lawn game, but it also travels well to the park and beach.

    Best beginner badminton set: Franklin Sports Badminton Starter Set

    Franklin Sports

    SEE IT

    This Franklin badminton set has everything you need to get started if you’re a badminton newbie. The set comes with two birdies, an adjustable net, and four steel rackets. It’s designed for quick and easy set-up, and the entire package can be neatly stored in and transported via a handy carrying case. 

    Best budget: Champion Sports Indoor/Outdoor Horseshoe Set

    Champion Sports

    SEE IT

    Horseshoes is a backyard classic, and you don’t need much to get started. The Champion Sports set is under $20, and comes with two rubber mats with pegs, two plastic dowels, and four rubber horseshoes. Even if you don’t have a lot of space, you can set these up easily and play just about anywhere. 

    Where do the best backyard games come from?

    Outdoor yard games like lawn bowling date all the way back to Medieval England. Even state fair favorites like cornhole could be found in 14th century Germany, and Roman Centurions likely amused themselves with games of horseshoes. Some of these games remain the best backyard games out there; those Medieval Europeans really knew how to use a lawn.

    So-called “backyard games” have become so popular, in fact, that some have earned professional league status. The NHPA (National Horseshoe Pitchers Association) was formally organized nearly a century ago, in 1926. The World Wiffle Ball Association, a newer creation, dates its inception to 1980. They join activities like badminton, croquet, and even Ultimate Frisbee as games that owe their start to backyards and inventive players. From the tried and true to new twists on old games to entirely new activities, there exists a vast well of lawn and yard games for adults, kids, and the whole family. Here are our selections for the best backyard games. 

    Related: Is your favorite game televised? Watch it on the patio with the best outdoor TVs.

    Looking for a good cornhole game set-up?

    It’s been a staple of state fairs and playgrounds for as long as any of us can remember, but where did cornhole actually start? There’s no definitive history and there have been a lot of claims to its invention, but the most commonly cited theory is that cornhole was created by a 14th-century German cabinetmaker by the name of Matthias Kuepermann. Kuepermann was said to have watched some children toss rocks into a nearby groundhog’s hole and was concerned for their safety. So he utilized his carpentry skills and designed a safer game for them to play by fashioning wooden boards with holes for targets. So, where does the “corn” come into play? According to the theory, corn was used to fill the throwing backs. Kuepermann felt that a small sack of corn not only had the heft of a rock, but would be much, much safer for the kids. The whole system, presumably, was much safer for the groundhogs.

    How about some croquet? 

    Like a lot of backyard activities, croquet has a long and circuitous history, but has remained one of the best backyard games due to its ease of play. It may seem a little stuffy, but trust us—it’s fun. That is, as long as you have a proper croquet set. There have been games like croquet, in which a ball is struck along the ground with a stick, since antiquity. Games we’d recognize as croquet were likely first played in 1850 in Ireland, with hoops made of willow rods and mallets constructed from broomsticks, or possibly in France, where it was called “pall-mall.” A hybrid of the two took off in England, and by 1864 croquet equipment was manufactured and used en masse. The first known set rules for croquet were written by Isaac Spratt in November 1856 in London. Around the 1950s, croquet experienced a swell of popularity in the United States, but it remains most popular in England. It can be played anywhere there’s a flat stretch of grass, though.

    Want to try more modern, unique backyard games?

    Not every popular backyard activity has a storied history behind it. If you’re looking for something more modern and innovative, then you might want to consider a backyard game that’s only a few decades (rather than centuries) old. Spikeball was invented by Jeff Knurek in 1989, and originally manufactured and marketed through a Japanese toy company called Tomy. But the original game didn’t gain much traction at first, and eventually Knurek’s original trademark expired. In 2003, a man named Chris Ruder was vacationing in Hawaii when he saw a spikeball set in action, and decided to purchase the trademark, make some upgrades to the original design, and introduce the game to the judges (and viewers) of “Shark Tank.” It has since grown in popularity as a beach, backyard, or lawn game, with rules similar to volleyball or foursquare—you bounce a somewhat floaty ball off a trampoline, aiming to keep it from hitting the ground.

    Interested in hitting the birdie around in a game of badminton?

    The origins of badminton date back at least 2,000 years. Similar games called battledore and shuttlecock were played in ancient Greece and China, with the key being the unusual “ball,” which isn’t really a ball at all. The shuttlecock, or birdie, is the object hit back and forth, and with a conical shape, it’ll take aerodynamic flight no matter how hard it’s hit. The English name of badminton comes from the ancestral Gloucestershire home of the Duke of Beaufort, though it’s not clear exactly why that name was chosen. Gloucestershire, with an eye to history, is now the base for the International Badminton Federation.

    The IBF was formed in 1934 with nine members: Canada, Denmark, France, Netherlands, England, New Zealand, Ireland, Scotland, and Wales. The United States joined four years later. Badminton was played as a “demonstration game” at the 1972 Olympics in Munich, but it wouldn’t be until the Barcelona games in 1992 that badminton would become an official Olympic sport. If you’ve never seen professional badminton played, go to YouTube; it’s surprisingly intense. But it also makes for a mildly competitive and slightly more leisurely backyard game.

    Looking for inexpensive backyard games? 

    Not everyone has the space or inclination for a big setup like badminton or croquet. Luckily, there are plenty of less expensive and involved lawn games to choose from that’ll still provide plenty of outdoor fun. Outdoor games from horseshoes to darts and more make it easy to have fun without spending a lot of money.

    FAQs

    Q: What should I play in my backyard?

    Everyone has their own preferences as to what to play in the backyard. Cornhole is a classic yard game option for a reason: it takes minimal time and effort to set up, and provides a great combination of relaxation and competition. It’s a perfect standing-around, hanging-out game that can be played at a leisurely pace, and it even pairs well with barbecue (and beers, for the adult participants).

    Q: What are fun games you can play outside?

    There are lots of fun games you can play outside to take advantage of the warm months. In addition to games like cornhole or badminton, which require some equipment and set-up, you can also play simpler games like hopscotch (all you need is some chalk), double-dutch (just grab a jump rope), or tag (no equipment needed). There’s an endless amount of outdoor activities that just require a little imagination. 

    Q: How can I make my yard more fun?

     

    A good way to amp up the fun in your yard, beyond just yard games, is to make the whole yard a little more festive. This can be achieved in a lot of ways that don’t necessarily have to cost a lot of money. We’d recommend strings of lights, tiki torches, fire pits, and plenty of comfortable seating.

    Related: Take it to the next level with these giant backyard games.

    The final word on making summer fun with the best backyard games

    The key to finding the right backyard or outdoor games for you and your family is knowing what kind of outdoor space you have to work with, how many people you hope to entertain at one time, and what you and your friends and family enjoy doing. Do you like simple, relaxing activities, or do you like high-energy games? Are you intensely competitive, or do you just want something to help pass the time in a fun and healthy way? Answering these questions will ensure you pick the perfect game to keep you and yours amused, engaged, and, above all, outside enjoying some glorious weather. 

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best backyard games of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best solar generators for 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-solar-generators/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=421868
    Best Solar Generators
    Mike Epstein

    Tap the power of the sun to meet your power needs wherever you may roam.

    The post The best solar generators for 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best Solar Generators
    Mike Epstein

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Best Solar Generators Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro
    SEE IT

    This is a solid all-around mix of features and affordability.

    Best for camping Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core Portable Generator Review Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core
    SEE IT

    This powerful pack is easy to transport to a site.

    Best for homes EcoFlow Delta Pro portable generator review EcoFlow Delta Pro
    SEE IT

    This is the pick if you need lots of scalable capacity.

    If you’re camping and want to charge up your lantern, phone, or other devices, a solar generator sure would be convenient. Or perhaps you’re van-living your way across the country, and you need to work on the go and keep your conversion electrified—yet another solid case for a solar-powered generator. Whatever the case, few things are as useful in today’s tech-driven world as a source of reliable, renewable power. The best solar generators can reliably and sustainably meet various energy needs, and we’re here to help you find the right one for you.

    How we chose the best solar generators

    As an avid outdoorsman, I’ve had the opportunity to test an extremely wide range of outdoor gear, including mobile and off-grid electrification equipment like solar-powered generators, as well as inverter and dual-fuel generators. These became particularly essential when the pandemic forced my travels to become domestic rather than international, which prompted me to outfit a van for long-term road-tripping. 

    To bring my work along for the ride, I needed a constant power source to charge my laptop, a portable fridge, lighting, and a myriad of devices and tools … even ebikes. As a result, I’ve tried all the leading portable power stations (and plenty that aren’t leading, too), so I know precisely what separates the best from the blah. I’ve written all about it (and other outdoor tech) for publications, including the Daily Beast, Thrillist, the Manual, and more. There were cases when my own opinion resulted in a tie, and I, therefore, looked to reviews from actual customers to determine which solar generators delivered the most satisfaction to the most users.

    The best solar generators: Reviews & Recommendations

    The solar generators on this list span a wide range of budgets, from a few hundred dollars to a few thousand. They span several use cases, from camping to a backup for your home. Only you know all the factors that make one of these the best solar generator for you, but we think that one of these will get the job done.

    Best overall: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

    Nick Hilden

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: This Jackery solar generator delivers the best blend of capacity, input/output capability, portability, and durability.

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 2,160Wh
    • Input capacity: 1,200W
    • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,400W surge)
    • Dimensions: 15.1 x 10.5 x 12.1 inches
    • Weight: 43 lbs
    • Price: $2,498

    Pros

    • Fast charging and outstanding capacity
    • Durable and easy to use
    • Plenty of ports
    • Can connect to six 200W solar panels

    Cons

    • Heavy for its size

    The biggest portable power station from Jackery, a leading solar generator manufacturer, the Explorer 2000 Pro offers a tremendous 2,160 watt-hours of power, making it capable of charging a full camping setup for a few days. When plugged into six 200W solar panels, an upgrade over the four-panel setup available on the Jackery Explorer 1500, you can fully charge this portable power station in just 2-2.5 hours. That’s less than half the time of the smaller model.

    On top of all that, it’s extremely user-friendly. Numerous output ports ensure that you can plug in a wide range of devices and electrical equipment. Its functions are highly intuitive, and the digital display is easy to understand. Like other Jackery generators, it’s incredibly durable, too. The one potential downside is its weight: At 43 pounds, it’s a bit heavy for its size. Even so, for all the power you can store, and the rapid-charging time, the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro will keep the lights on wherever you need power.

    For more on the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, check out our full review.

    Best high-capacity: Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro

    Nick Hilden

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 3,024Wh
    • Output capacity: 3,000W
    • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.1 x 14.7 inches
    • Weight: 63.9 pounds
    • Price: $2,799

    Pros

    • Ample power storage for long trips or outages
    • Sturdy handles and wheels make it easy to move
    • Smooth design makes it easy to load and unload
    • High peak output for power-intensive tasks
    • Lots of ports for connectivity

    Cons

    • 200W solar panels can be klunky
    • Relatively pricey

    This is the big sibling to our best overall pick. Inside the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro, you’ll find 3,024Wh of power storage, which is enough to power even large devices for extended periods of time. It can charge a high-end smartphone more than 100 times on a single charge. It can also power full-on appliances in an RV or emergency situation.

    Despite its large capacity, we learned firsthand that the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro is relatively easy to move around. Sturdy handles molded into its case make it easy to pick up, while an extending handle and wheels make it easy to roll around at the campsite or any other location.

    It can charge in less than three hours from a standard outlet or, under optimal conditions with the 200W solar panels, it can fill up as quickly as eight hours. That full solar array can get large and unwieldy, but a smaller setup can still provide ample charging if you don’t need to max out the capacity daily.

    This portable power station offers the best of everything we loved about the Explorer 2000 Pro, there’s just more of it. When you’re living the van life, powering an RV, or trying to ride out a power outage, more is definitely better if you can justify the extra cost.

    Best for frequent use: Anker 767 Portable Power Station Solar Generator

    Stan Horaczek

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: High capacity and fast charging make this long-lasting battery a solid everyday driver.

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh
    • Output capacity: 2,400W
    • Dimensions: 20.67 x 9.84 x 15.55 inches
    • Weight: 67.3 pounds
    • Price: $1,999

    Pros

    • Charges up to 80% in less than two hours
    • Solid output and storage capacity
    • Optional battery pack doubles capacity
    • LiFePO4 batteries survive more charge cycles than traditional models
    • Plenty of ports
    • Built-in handle and wheels for transport

    Cons

    • Heavy for its capacity
    • No USB-C in for charging

    Anker has equipped its massive portable power station with LiFePO4 batteries, which stand up much better to repeat charging and discharging over the long term than common lithium-ion cells. Anker claims it can charge and discharge up to 3,000 times before it reaches 80% battery health compared to 500 in a similar lithium-ion setup. While I haven’t had the chance to run it through 3,000 cycles, LiFePO4 batteries have a well-earned reputation for longevity. 

    Regarding overall performance, the Anker 767 does everything you’d want a unit with these specs to do. The bad weather has given me [Executive Gear Editor Stan Horaczek] ample chances, unfortunately, to test it in real-world situations. 

    The built-in battery offers a 2048Wh capacity and pumps out up to 2,400W. It does so through four standard AC outlets, an RV outlet, two 120W car outlets, two 12W USB-A ports, and three 100W USB-C ports. 

    I used it during a blackout to keep our Wi-Fi running while charging my family’s devices. Filling a phone from zero barely makes a dent in the power station’s capacity, and it ran the router for several hours with plenty of juice left. 

    In another instance, it powered our small meat freezer for four hours before the power came back on with some juice still left in the tank. It does what it promises. 

    There are a few nice extra touches as well. Built-in wheels and an extendable handle allow it to roll like carry-on luggage. Unfortunately, those are necessary inclusions because it weighs a hefty 67.3 pounds. It’s manageable but definitely heavy compared to its competition. 

    The Anker 767 is compatible with the company’s 200W solar panels, which fold up for easy transportation. I mostly charged the unit through my home’s AC power, a surprisingly quick process. The 767 Portable Power Station can go from flat to more than 80% charge in less than a half hour with sufficient power. It takes about two hours to get it fully juiced. 

    Anker also offers a mobile app that connects to the power station via Bluetooth if you want to control it without actually going over and touching it.

    Best for camping: Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core

    Nick Hilden

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: Thanks to its outstanding portability, high storage capacity, and Yeti’s famous durability, the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core is great for packing along for camping or van-living. 

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 983Wh
    • Input capacity: 600W
    • Output capacity: 1,200W (2,400W surge)
    • Dimensions: 9.86 x 15.25 x 10.23 inches
    • Weight: 31.68 lbs
    • Price: $1,198.95

    Pros

    • Highly portable
    • Incredible durability
    • Rapid recharge rate
    • Plenty of plugs

    Cons

    • Expensive for its size/capacity

    Yeti is long-renowned for making some of the best outdoor gear money can buy, so when the company launched its Goal Zero line of solar generators, it was no surprise that they turned out to be awesome. While the whole line is great, the 1000 Core model’s balance between capacity and portability makes it perfect for taking on the road.

    While the 1000 Core has a third less capacity than our top pick, it charges up faster, making it a great option for rapid solar replenishment. That said, its capacity is no slouch, offering 82 phone charges, 20 for a laptop, or upwards of 15 hours for a portable fridge (depending on wattage). Suffice it to say, that it’s more than capable of powering your basic camping gear.

    Beyond its charging capabilities, the Goal Zero 1000 Core excels at camping thanks to its hearty build quality. Built super tough—like pretty much everything Yeti makes—its exterior shell provides solid protection.

    The biggest issue it presents is the cost. Like pretty much everything Yeti produces, its price tag isn’t small. While there are other 1000-level solar generators for less, this one offers a great balance of power storage and portability.

    For more on the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core, check out our full review.

    Best for off-grid living: Bluetti AC200 Max

    Bluetti

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: Thanks to its high solo capacity and ability to daisy-chain with additional batteries, the Bluetti AC200 Max is perfect for bringing power off the grid.

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh standalone, expandable up to 8,192Wh
    • Input capacity: 1,400W
    • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,800W surge)
    • Dimensions: 16.5 x 11 x 15.2 inches
    • Weight: 61.9 lbs
    • Price: $1,999

    Pros

    • Massive capacity
    • Daisy-chain capability
    • Lightning-fast input capacity
    • 30A RV plug and two wireless charging pads
    • Surprisingly affordable for what it offers

    Cons

    • Pretty heavy
    • Fan can get loud, especially in hot weather

    You’ll be hard-pressed to find a solar generator better suited for living off the grid for an extended period than the Bluetti AC200 Max. It boasts a substantial 2,048Wh capacity, allowing you to power your whole life off it longer than most portable generators. Even better, you can daisy-chain multiple Bluetti batteries, expanding its capacity to a massive 8.192Wh. That’s flat-out enormous and translates into the ability to power a full-sized fridge for over a day or several hours of air conditioning. For the more modest needs of people who are used to living off a generator, it will last for a very long time.

    At the same time, the AC200 Max has an outstanding input capacity of 1,400W. That means you can plug in a pretty hefty array of solar panels to replenish its stores quickly. This allows you to keep your off-grid setup going with little to no interruption. It also features some specialty charging options, including a 30A plug, which lets you plug it directly into an RV, and multiple wireless charging pads for smaller devices.

    Best for homes: EcoFlow Delta Pro

    Nick Hilden

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The EcoFlow Delta Pro delivers the standalone and expandable power capacity necessary to power your entire home.

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 3,600Wh standalone, expandable up to 25,000Wh
    • Input capacity: 6,500W
    • Output capacity: 3,600W (7,200W surge)
    • Dimensions: 25 x 11.2 x 16.4 inches
    • Weight: 99 lbs
    • Price: $3,699

    Pros

    • Enormous capacity
    • Daisy-chain capability
    • 30A RV plug
    • Lightning-fast input capacity
    • Wi-Fi and Smartphone connectivity

    Cons

    • Very heavy
    • Expensive

    If you’re looking for the best solar generator for home backup in the event of a power outage, the EcoFlow Delta Pro stands apart from the pack, thanks to an unrivaled power and output capacity. The Delta Pro alone packs a 3,600Wh wallop, and you can expand that to 25,000Wh by chaining it to extra EcoFlow batteries and generators. That’s a ton of power and it has the substantial output capacity necessary to power an entire house worth of electronics when you need it to.

    The Delta Pro also offers a companion app for iOS and Android that allows you to monitor energy usage, customize its operation, and monitor and manage a number of other elements.

    While it’s not overly large for what it does, the Delta Pro is a heavy piece of equipment. It has wheels, so it is technically portable, but this is meant to be put down in a home or other semi-permanent site. Given its size and power, it’s also a much more expensive device, especially if you’re springing for the add-ons. As the best solar power generator to provide backup power for your entire home, however, it’s worth every penny. 

    Best portable: Anker 545

    Anker

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it makes the cut: If you’re looking for highly portable power, the Anker 545 delivers.

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 778Wh
    • Input capacity: 240W
    • Output capacity: 770W
    • Dimensions: 11.81 x 8.03 x 7.28 inches
    • Weight: 18.2 lbs
    • Price: $559.99

    Pros

    • Lightweight and compact
    • Plenty of capacity
    • Built-in lights

    Cons

    • Slower input capacity

    When portability is a priority, the Anker 545 offers the compact size and reduced weight you’re looking for and packs fairly substantial power to boot. Roughly the size of a shoebox and lighter than a case of beer, it’s easy to pack along with camping gear and move around without too much effort.

    To get something so light, though, you have to compromise on power. The Anker 545 has a capacity of 778Wh and an output capacity of 770W, which is plenty of power for keeping your devices charged. Specifically, that should provide about 55 phone charges, 10 for a laptop, or 38 for a camera. Unfortunately, the outlets only output at up to 500W, so it cannot power more demanding devices like hair dryers or electric stoves.

    That said, the Anker 545 has some bells and whistles, including an integrated flashlight and ambient light. All told it’s a solid option if you need a highly mobile generator.

    Best budget: Jackery Explorer 300

    Stan Horaczek

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

    Why it made the cut: With its reasonable capacity, compact size, and solid build quality at a low price, the Jackery Explorer 300 is a great budget pick.

    Specs

    • Storage capacity: 293Wh
    • Input capacity: 90W
    • Output capacity: 300W (500W surge)
    • Dimensions: 9.1 x 5.2 x 7.8 in
    • Weight: 7.1 lbs
    • Price: $250

    Pros

    • Affordable
    • Durable
    • Portable
    • Reasonable capacity

    Cons

    • No flashlight
    • Slower input capacity

    Though it isn’t quite as impressive as our top picks for best overall and best high-capacity, Jackery’s smaller Explorer 300 solar generator is super compact and lightweight with a decent power capacity for its price. Less a mobile power station than an upscale power bank, the 7-pound Jackery Explorer 300 provides plenty of portable recharges for your devices when you’re camping, on a job site, driving, or just need some power and don’t have convenient access to an outlet. Its modest 293Wh capacity isn’t huge, but it’s enough to provide 31 phone charges, 15 for a camera, 6 for the average drone, 2.5 for a laptop, or a few hours of operation for a minifridge or TV. A built-in flashlight would have upped its camping game somewhat, but at $300 (and often considerably less if you catch it discounted), this highly portable little power station does a lot for a little.

    We tested this portable power station for several months, and it came in handy numerous times, especially during the winter when power outages abound. At one point, we had it powering two phones, a MacBook, and a small light.

    The built-in handle makes it very easy to lug around. It feels like carrying a lunch box. The screen is easy to read, and the whole package seems fairly durable. Our review unit hasn’t taken any dramatic tumbles yet, but it has gotten banged around in car trunks, duffle bags, and other less-than-luxurious accommodations with no issues. If you catch one of these on sale, get it and stick it in a cabinet. You’ll be extremely glad to have it around when the need arises.

    What to consider before buying the best solar generators

    Over the past few years, solar generators have exploded onto the market. There are now dozens of different brands that largely look more or less the same at a glance. The fact is there are only a few standouts amidst a sea of knockoffs. Here’s what to look for to ensure you’re getting a great one:

    How much power can it store?

    A portable solar generator comes in an extremely wide range of sizes, but a generator’s size doesn’t automatically make it capable of storing a lot of power. In fact, most are disappointingly limited and unable to store much more juice than a portable charger.

    To properly check a generator’s storage, you must look at its capacity, measured in watt-hours (Wh). One watt-hour is the equivalent of 1 watt flowing over the course of an hour. The best solar generators offer capacities of several hundred and sometimes several thousand watt-hours. That doesn’t mean, however, that it will provide power for several hundred or several thousand hours. Any generator will ultimately last a different amount of time, depending on what’s plugged into it.

    It’s easy to predict how long a generator will last when you use it to power one thing. For example, if you were to power a 100-watt bulb using a power station with a capacity of 500 watt-hours, it would stay lit for five continuous hours. Add a portable fridge that requires 50 watts per hour, your phone which uses 18, a mini-fan that uses three … you get the picture. The more capacity, the better.

    Charging capability

    No solar generator will hold a charge forever, so you want one capable of charging as quickly and easily as possible. This is where we put the “renewable” into “renewable energy.”

    All of the power stations included in this roundup can be charged by connecting them to solar panels (hence the designation “solar generators”). Still, you also want to look for the ability to charge via other sources like wall outlets and your vehicle’s 12-volt plug. This ensures that you can charge up whether you’re off-grid in the sun, plugged in while preparing at home, or using your dash socket on the go.

    You must also monitor a model’s charging input capacity, measured in watts (W). For example, a solar-powered generator with a max input of 100W can take in a continuous flow of up to 100 watts, which is about the minimum that you’ll reasonably want to look for. Most of the generators below have input capacities of at least a few hundred watts when charging via solar, so a few 50- to 200-watt solar panels will max them out.

    Output capability

    Solar generators need to keep the power coming in and going out. The best solar generators can simultaneously charge all your intended devices via whatever plugs are necessary.

    Any portable power station worth your money will have a high output capacity so you can charge many devices, even if they require a lot of juice. A generator’s maximum output should be much higher than its max input. While a particular model might only be capable of taking in a few hundred watts at any given moment, it will usually put out exponentially more. At a minimum, you’ll want a generator that can put out 300 watts at a time, though you’ll want at least 500 for larger tasks.

    The best solar generators should also offer a variety of output plugs, including AC outlets, USB-A, USB-C, and even 12-volt DC outlets like the one in your vehicle dash. This ensures you can charge several devices simultaneously regardless of their plug. The number of ports you’ll need will vary depending on how many devices you need to power, but it should have at least a couple of AC outlets and a few USB-A ports.

    Portability

    While portable battery sources have been around for a while now, over the past several decades, they’ve been pretty heavy, unwieldy things. One of the most exciting aspects of the latest generation of solar generators is that they’ve become much more physically compact. 

    Suppose you plan on taking a generator camping or working it into a van conversion where every square inch matters; well, size and weight become major considerations. All of the products we’ve recommended are about the size of one or two shoeboxes—three at the most. The lightest is about the weight of a 24-pack of soda, while the heaviest is 100 pounds. Most fall somewhere between 30-60 pounds.

    If you’re using your generator as a more or less stationary source of backup power at home, portability isn’t a huge issue. Still, we generally recommend keeping weight and size in mind; You never know when you’ll need it for something other than a backup. (Plus, who wants to lug around something heavy and awkward if they don’t have to?) 

    Another consideration regarding portability involves the necessity for accessories, which can impact how easy it is to move and use your generator. Some generators, for example, require a lot of removable battery packs, which can be a hassle when you’re on the go or packing a vehicle. All of the inclusions on our list require some accessories—you can’t get solar power without connecting cables and solar panels—but they work well with minimal add-ons.

    Durability

    As with any product you expect to last, durability and all-around quality craftsmanship are essential. This is especially true if you plan on lugging your generator around on camping and road trips. Many subpar power stations are made from cheap components and flimsy plastic that doesn’t feel like it will hold up under the rigors of the road.

    Durability isn’t something you can determine by reading a spec sheet off the internet. You’ve actually got to take the generator out, use it a bunch, and see how it holds up. I’ve verified the durability of these recommendations via a combination of my own actual field tests and reviews culled from countless real product owners.

    Related: Best electric generators

    FAQs

    Q: What size solar generator should I get?

    It’s easy to underestimate how much capacity you need. A 1,000 watt-hours might sound like a lot, but if you’re going to power a converted van with a portable fridge, lights, and occasional phone and laptop top-off, that 1,000 watt-hours will go faster than you expect. I used a setup like this and know from personal experience that you should always overestimate how much power you’ll need.

    A generator with a capacity under 1,000Wh can keep electronics charged. A larger one with 1000-1500Wh should be the minimum for road trips where you’ll need it to last multiple days between full charges. For a house or worksite where you expect to use some serious energy—like a full-sized refrigerator or power tools—you’re going to want to start looking at the biggest possible power stations that can be daisy-chained to external batteries.

    If you want to get precise, there is an equation:

    1. Estimate how many hours you’ll need to power various devices. For example, if you want to power two light bulbs for 2 hours: you need 4 hours of operation.

    2. Add up the total wattage necessary: the two bulbs are 60 watts each, so you need 120 watts.

    3. Multiply these together to find the total watt-hours needed: 4 x 120 = 480. So, in this case you’d need at least a 500Wh solar generator. 

    That might sound like a lot for two lightbulbs, but remember that, in most situations, you won’t really be powering 60-watt light bulbs for hours on end. You’ll be charging phones and laptops for an hour here or there, cooling a fridge that kicks on and off every once in a while, using power tools in short bursts, and whatnot.

    Q: How many years will a solar generator last?

    Most modern generators are rated to last upwards of 25 years. The best-designed power stations are pretty sturdy, with few to no moving parts, so they should likely keep kicking for a long time, provided that you care for them properly. I’ve been pretty rough with a few of mine, and they show no signs of stopping.

    Q: Can I run my house on solar power only?

    Yes and no. While it’s absolutely possible to power your house with solar power, you’re unlikely to do so with a portable solar generator unless you use several at once while limiting your power usage. The largest of our recommendations—the EcoFlow Delta Pro—will come fairly close when bolstered with extra batteries. If the power goes out, you’ll be able to keep your fridge cold and use basic electronics for a couple of days without recharging. With quality solar panels, good sunlight, and smart energy usage, your power should theoretically go uninterrupted.

    Final thoughts on the best solar generators

    We’re living in a “golden age” for portable solar generators. When I was a kid, and my family was playing around with solar gear while camping in the ‘90s, the technology couldn’t charge many devices, so it wasn’t all that practical. 

    By contrast, the solar generators we’ve recommended here are incredibly useful. I’ve relied on them to power my work and day-to-day needs while road-tripping nationwide. They’re also great when the power goes out. When a windstorm cut the power at my house for a couple of days, I was still working, watching my stories, and keeping the lights on. 

    We haven’t even scratched the surface in terms of the potential offered by portable, reliable, renewable, relatively affordable power. What we can do now is already incredible. The potential for what may come next, though, is truly mind-blowing.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best solar generators for 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro solar generator review: Bigger and better https://www.popsci.com/gear/jackery-explorer-3000-pro-solar-generator-review/ Wed, 26 Apr 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=536710
    Jackery Explorer 3000 solar generator with its solar panels sitting on pavement
    Despite all its power, the Jackery Explorer 3000 and its solar panels are relatively compact. Nick Hilden

    This powerful portable power station has enough juice to keep you comfortable off the grid.

    The post Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro solar generator review: Bigger and better appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Jackery Explorer 3000 solar generator with its solar panels sitting on pavement
    Despite all its power, the Jackery Explorer 3000 and its solar panels are relatively compact. Nick Hilden

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    The Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro takes the brand’s already outstanding portable power platform and expands it to offer greater capacity and more useful features. With one of the industry’s best capacity-to-mobility ratios, it makes its 3,024 watt-hours of juice supremely simple to lug around, meaning it is a perfect choice for your van-life conversion, RV, home emergency backup, or off-grid worksite. It certainly isn’t cheap—on its own, the base unit goes for a hefty $2,799, while the solar generator package that includes two of the company’s SolarSaga 200W panels brings the total up to $3,999. If you’re in the market for the utmost in portable power, however, it’s worth every penny.

    Nick Hilden

    SEE IT

    What is the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro?

    The Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro is a 3,024Wh portable power station with an output of 3,000W and a surge potential of 6,000W. Simply put, that’s huge—enough to keep a full-sized efficiency fridge operating for several days or to charge the average phone more than 100 times.

    Some brands gear their portable power stations toward home backup power while others lean more toward mobile uses like van conversions or RVs, but the Jackery 3000 Pro is well suited for both situations. At just shy of 64 pounds, it’s a bit heavy to pick up and lug, but wheels and an extending handle make it easy to move around. Plus, sturdy handles are integrated into the case to give a solid grip when lifting it.

    In terms of ports, it offers four AC 20A max outputs and one AC 25A max output, two USB-C and two USB-A outputs, and a 12V car plug. That’s plenty of plug options for any average user. It can be controlled and monitored via smartphone app, and its operation is whisper-quiet and safe thanks to its quiet canyon nine-sensor cooling system and upgraded Battery Management System with 12 forms of protection.

    I’ve extensively tested both the Jackery 1500 and Explorer 2000 Pro, having built two different van conversions around them, and I can tell you that the 3,000+ Wh capacity is a game-changer. I’m planning a summer of road trips now, and I know from experience that the 3000 Pro will power my setup—fridge, lights, laptop, and a few other devices—for a week between charges, likely with room left over to top off my ebike.

    Charging the Jackery 3000 Pro

    The Jackery 3000 Pro charges quickly, which is essential given its capacity. When plugged into the wall, it takes about 2.4 hours—the same speed as most power stations two-thirds its size—and with its full solar panel setup properly leveraged (more on that in a moment), it will take between 3-4 hours. Realistically, however, you’ll run a pared-down solar array in less-than-ideal sun conditions, meaning it can take more like 8-10+ hours.

    Solar charging

    The Jackery 200W panels take up considerable space and require some time to set up.
    The 200-watt panels take up space and require some setup time. Nick Hilden

    Getting the most out of the 3000 Pro’s solar charging capabilities requires three things: six of the company’s 200W panels, unobstructed sun, and the understanding of how to position the panels best to make use of the sun. You likely won’t have either of the first two, while the last part comes with tinkering and experience. Jackery’s 200W panels are prohibitively pricey, clocking in at $699 each. And while they work great once they’re in place, their four-panel foldout design can be a bit of a pain to get standing—and they love to fall down, especially in the wind. I wouldn’t want to mess around with trying to set up six of the things in any case.

    More likely you’ll be using one or two of the 200W panels or a smattering of 100W alternatives. While that doesn’t necessarily translate into rapid charging, leaving the Jackery in place all day will do the job. And if you’re van-lifing, you’ll be less concerned with charging it up all the way than continually charging up a bit as you go.

    That two-buck-fifty wall charging time is lightning fast by any standard. If you need to fill up on electro-juice while on the road, stop off for a long cup of coffee and plug in like you would a laptop.

    Is the Jackery 3000 Pro portable or not?

    Jackery Explorer 3000 with handle extended
    The extending handle and integrated wheels make this power station easy to lug around. Nick Hilden

    I suspect that the biggest question many potential buyers will be mulling involves portability. The Jackery 3000 Pro isn’t exactly lightweight, but its clever suitcase design makes it very portable. For how much capacity it offers, it’s not actually all that heavy—only about 30% heavier than the Jackery half its capacity. About the size of two stacked shoeboxes, it doesn’t eat up a lot of space. And as I mentioned above, its wheels, extending tow handle, and integrated handles make it easy to move around. On top of all that, its perfectly boxed design with no protruding parts makes it a snap to fit into any camper setup. Its lack of protrusions prevents it from getting caught up as you move it in and out of storage.

    Less convenient is the SolarSaga 200W, which is a bit unwieldy to deploy as it takes time to get them unfurled and free-standing. There’s not much getting around that, however. The only alternative is to use the smaller SolarSaga 100s, which are easier to set up but require more panels or time in the sun to collect the same amount of wattage. You’ll have to decide which of those slight inconveniences you prefer.

    All in all, the Jackery 3000 Pro is one of the best high-capacity solar generators available. I, for one, look forward to including it in my next van build.

    So, who should buy the Jackery 3000 Pro?

    All that capacity and its supreme portability make the Jackery 3000 Pro a great choice for virtually any mobile power needs. It might be more than a low-tech tent camper needs, but for vans or RVs, it’s an outstanding option by every metric. Its high capacity and wattage output also make it a solid choice for home backup power or anyone who frequently requires off-grid electrification for power tools or other equipment. If you need lots of power on the go, the Jackery 3000 Pro is arguably the most reliable, portable, and user-friendly station we’ve seen.

    The post Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro solar generator review: Bigger and better appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best electric lawn mowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-electric-lawn-mower/ Sun, 25 Jul 2021 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=382639
    A grey and blue lawn mower photographed from its tire corner, on a field of green grass.
    Skitterphoto/Pexels

    The best electric lawn mowers are a safe and eco-friendly way to tame your lawn.

    The post The best electric lawn mowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A grey and blue lawn mower photographed from its tire corner, on a field of green grass.
    Skitterphoto/Pexels

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best cordless The Worx WG779 Power Share Lawn Mower is the best electric lawn mower for the whole family. Worx WG779 Power Share Lawn Mower
    SEE IT

    With six height adjustment options and the ability to mow or mulch, this pick is perfect for the whole family.

    Best overall The Greenworks Corded Mower is the best electric lawn mower for busy homeowners. Greenworks 10A Corded Mower
    SEE IT

    This 10 Amp electric mower can cruise through any lawn for a pristine finish.

    Best premium The Husqvarna Automower Robotic Lawn Mower is the best electric lawn mower for gadget lovers. Husqvarna Automower Robotic Lawn Mower
    SEE IT

    Ready to ditch the hassle of mowing altogether? Then grab this automated mowing robot that can trim up to one half of an acre.

    The best electric lawn mowers are much more than just hair clippers with an attitude. Today’s electric mowers are energy-efficient and cost-effective lawn tools perfect for keeping the yard trim and proper. From push mowers that are always ready to chop to cordless mowers with quick-charging, long-lasting batteries, get all the power of a gas mower with none of the hassles. These mowers are easy to operate and nearly maintenance-free. Small and mid-sized lawns can be quickly tamed and managed with an Earth-friendly mower. Cheaper than some gas-powered mowers and more agile than riding mowers, the best electric mower makes yard maintenance less frustrating. Harness the power of electricity with one of these dependable lawn mowers designed for efficiency.

    How we chose the best electric lawn mowers

    We’ve searched far and wide for the best lawn mowers many times. There isn’t a lawn mower we haven’t looked at, from riding mowers for your new house or a zero-turn mower for an industrial job. To create this list of the best electric lawn mowers, we took from our previous lawn mower research (push mowers to cordless mowers to all manner of more serious machinery) and combined it with personal testing, research, recommendations, and user impressions.

    Best electric lawn mowers: Reviews & recommendations

    Looking for the best electric lawn mower? You have several choices to make. The two big differences between models: Cord or cordless, and push or self-propelled. Explore the options, have a budget in mind, and you’ll find the perfect electric lawn mower for your yard.

    Best overall: Greenworks 10A Corded Mower

    Greenworks

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Hills and tight corners are no match for this manual lawn mower.

    Specs

    • Weight: 37.5 lbs.
    • Cutting width: 16 inches
    • Operation: Manual

    Pros

    • Easy on hills and around tight corners
    • Maneuverable despite weight
    • No major maintenance

    Cons

    • Will need outdoor extension cord

    The 16-inch cutting deck of the Greenworks electric mower is great for mid-sized suburban yards smaller than a quarter-acre. While 37.5 pounds may sound like a lot, it’s a shockingly light and agile mower. This mower has no trouble being pushed up hills or around tight corners. It starts easily, and there’s no major maintenance to worry about. Make sure you have an outdoor extension cord to give you optimal mobility. If you only have a few free minutes during the work to get the lawn cut, the Greenworks electric lawn mower is the yard tool for the job.

    Best cordless: Worx WG779 Power Share Lawn Mower

    WORX

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Mowing the lawn is fun for the whole family with this lightweight electric lawn mower.

    Specs

    • Weight: 29.1 lbs.
    • Cutting width: 14 inches
    • Operation: Manual

    Pros

    • User-friendly
    • Lightweight
    • 6 height adjustments

    Cons

    • Small size means more walking to mow the lawn

    Electric lawn mowers are known for their simplicity, but the WORK WG779 is perhaps the most user-friendly electric push mower on the market. The lightweight body can be managed by even young teens. The dual batteries last long enough to chop an eighth of an acre when fully charged. You can use the batteries from other WORX power tools, or buy a few extras to keep the mower running across larger yards. It comes ready to bag or mulch. A simple turn of a knob offers more torque when you hit a patch of tall or tough grass, but the extra power boost will eat up battery life. This is a great mower for everyone in the family. 

    Best premium: Husqvarna Automower Robotic Lawn Mower

    Husqvarna

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Mowing the lawn is never a pain when a smart, powerful, small robot does it for you.

    Specs

    • Weight: 20.7 lbs.
    • Cutting width: 8.7 inches
    • Operation: Automatic

    Pros

    • Ran by an app
    • Works well on flat yards sans obstacles

    Cons

    • Only runs for an hour
    • Has trouble climbing inclines
    • Expensive

    The Husqvarna mower is not your typical electric lawn mower. It’s also not a cheap mower. This robotic mower can be programmed and easily controlled via a user-friendly 4G app. On a full charge, it’ll run for about 60 minutes and is recommended for yards smaller than a half-acre. It can’t do everything. For instance, it has trouble climbing inclines. And anyone with a dog or outdoor pets should avoid robot mowers altogether. Plus, it works best if your yard has a simple layout—a rectangle without many obstacles such as trees or gardens. So, why would you want to spend over $1,000 on a robot lawn mower? When it works, it’s pure futuristic magic. Sit back and relax as your new robot takes a chunk out of your weekend to-do list. For those who don’t want to be bothered with lawn work, a robot assistant is an amazing addition to the family. 

    Best self-propelled: Greenworks Self-Propelled Mower

    Greenworks

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This electric lawn mower provides the power of a gas mower minus the ecological effects.

    Specs

    • Weight: 83.8 pounds
    • Cutting width: 21 inches
    • Operation: Manual

    Pros

    • Eco-friendly
    • Easy to maneuver
    • Quiet

    Cons

    • Turbo button eats up power

    The Greenworks self-propelled lawn mower is one of the best electric lawn mowers for every type of yard. It’s designed to tame lawns a third of an acre or smaller, powerful enough for most suburban homes. The rear-wheel drive is strong enough for mild hills. And the self-propelled lawn mower runs on two, 24-volt batteries that provide 45 minutes of cutting time on a full charge. There is a turbo button, but using it will eat up battery power. The handle feels solid and is easy to maneuver around property lines and landscaping. This self-propelled mower is comparable to the best gas-powered mowers but has all the benefits of quiet, energy-efficient, Earth-friendly battery power.

    Best budget: Black + Decker Electric Lawn Mower/Trimmer

    BLACK+DECKER

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This budget-friendly electric lawn mower keeps your city lawn in tip-top shape.

    Specs

    • Weight: 9.9 lbs.
    • Cutting width: 12 inches
    • Operation: Automatic

    Pros

    • Lightweight
    • Mower, trimmer, and edger
    • Compact

    Cons

    • Not for larger yards

    Is an electric mower under $150 worth it? Yes. If you only need to mow a small area, the Black + Decker electric lawn mower is a fantastic tool. Sure, it’s more of a glorified weed whacker than a true lawn mower, but it works wonders in confined areas too small for typical mowers. The corded electric yard tool can be switched from lawn mower to trimmer by unclipping it from the wheeled base. The 12-inch cutting width is great for the minimalist lawns of city homes. Because this is a trimmer, it uses a cable to cut the grass instead of blades. The cutting cable is spun around an automatic feed spool, making it easy to adjust on the go. While not designed for big lawns, those living in townhouses will love this petite, cheap lawn mower.

    FAQs

    Q: Do electric lawn mowers really work?

    Yes, electric lawn mowers really work. Advances in technology and battery life have given these electrical yard tools enough juice and cutting power to stand side-by-side with gas-powered mowers. A gas-powered mower may last longer on a full tank of fuel compared to a battery-powered mower with a full charge. But these quiet, easy-to-handle electric mowers get the job done … if you have the right-sized yard. The best electric lawn mowers are designed for yards smaller than a half-acre, and most work best on yards that are less than a quarter-acre. They’re great for suburban homes and city townhouses. And while they may not hold up well against rain and mud, these electric mowers are easy to maintain. Electric mowers are a smart, economical, and ecological way to keep the lawn trim and proper. 

    Q: How do I choose an electric mower?

    To choose an electric mower, start with yard size. Tiny yards smaller than an eighth of an acre won’t need the same cutting machine as a lawn that’s a half-acre. Next, decide if you want a battery-powered electric mower or a mower that needs to be plugged in. Corded mowers are cheaper and will always be ready to work, but battery-powered mowers can go anywhere. Finally, do you want a self-propelled mower or a push mower? There will be a price difference between the two, but self-propelled models make lawn maintenance much easier. 

    Q: How long do electric mowers last?

    An electric lawn mower will last about five years. A gas-powered mower may last twice as long but will require three times the maintenance. If you don’t want to be bothered with season tuneups and oil changes, an electric mower is worth it even if it won’t last as long. Keep the mower stored properly, away from rain and snow, and you’ll get more than a couple of years worth of mowing out of it.

    Q: Are electric lawn mowers powerful enough?

    Yes. Although gas mowers are considered more powerful overall, electric mowers—in terms of oomph factor—are now catching up. They’re more than capable to mow and manicure a standard yard.

    Q: What is the life expectancy of an electric lawn mower?

    With a good level of care, an electric lawn mower can last 7-13 years. To extend the longevity of your electric lawn mower, make sure to clean the cutting deck before putting the mower away. Make sure to check the fuel pipes, wires, and mower body every year when taking it out of storage. Additionally, you should remove any dirt and rust, tighten nuts and bolts, and grease parts.

    What to consider when shopping for the best electric lawn mowers

    Power supply, special features, and price are the three main factors to examine when shopping for an electric lawn mower. Some electric mowers are better for smaller yard care, while others are better for hills and inclines. Think carefully about your lawn and how to make yard maintenance easier. The best electric lawn mower is out there—you just need to weed out the competition. 

    Battery-powered mowers vs. corded mowers

    The power source will be the first major decision when choosing an electric lawn mower. Obviously, battery-powered mowers are more versatile and can go wherever they need to go. The downside: The battery may not last longer than an hour. In fact, most will die after 45 minutes of use. Having a backup battery helps keep the yard maintenance machine rolling, but it will add to the overall price. Also, if the battery isn’t charged and ready, you won’t be mowing right away. Even the most efficient lawn mower battery needs at least 30 minutes to get a full charge. 

    Corded mowers are the simplest lawn mowers besides a fly-wheel push mower or sickle and are always ready to slice up some grass. You’ll need a hearty outdoor extension cord to give you room to work. And make sure an outdoor outlet is available or else you’ll be running cords through windows. But if you don’t mind the hassle of a cord, these tethered electric mowers are an inexpensive way to cut the grass quickly. Just watch where you’re mowing. Sling the cord over your shoulder so you’re always in control and reduce the risk of cord-cutting and you’ll be good to go and mow. 

    Self-propelled mower vs. push mower

    A self-propelled mower is a must-have piece of lawn equipment for larger yards (anything over half an acre), but they do cost more. Electric lawn mowers are much, much lighter than their gas-guzzling brothers, so a push mower may not be as strenuous to operate as you think. Even when cutting up hills and inclines, an electric push mower is comfortable to control. 

    Self-propelled mowers will eat up battery power quickly. Unless you have extra batteries handy, it can make mowing an average-sized yard take all day as you wait and wait for the battery to charge. 

    When choosing between a self-propelled electric mower and an electric push mower, the push mower has a clear advantage. But there’s no denying that letting the self-propelled mower do all the work is nice. If you don’t mind the higher price and the need for extra batteries, the self-propelled mower can be a back saver and your best weekend friend. 

    Yard size

    Electric lawn mowers are great for yards smaller than a half-acre. If you have a few acres to mow and still want an eco-friendly lawn tool, there are electric riding mowers on the market. An electric riding mower will be expensive (upwards of $4,000), and when you go that big, you may be better off with a more powerful gas mower.

    Robotic lawn mowers are becoming increasingly popular. These tiny electric lawn mowers are programmed via an app and can cover areas up to about three-quarters of an acre, depending on the make and model. However, robotic lawn mowers are easily defeated by hills and obstacles … and pets. Plus, they are still priced as a luxury-level product. 

    For lawns smaller than a quarter-acre, a corded electric mower may be ideal. And for the tiny yard of a townhouse, there’s no need for a big mower when an affordable trimmer/mower hybrid will do the job.

    Storage

    One of the benefits of an electric mower is that they are often smaller and easier to store than gas-powered mowers. That said, if storage space is limited, you’ll want an electric lawn mower with a handle that’s easy to fold. These mowers can slide into small spaces in a shed or garage. Some electric mowers are also more delicate, they cannot stand up to the elements the same way as a big, robust gas mower. Make sure you can store your electric mower without exposing it to the elements (rain, snow, extreme temperatures). Don’t leave it out on the porch all night.

    Additional features

    Most electric lawn mowers, even the cheap mowers, are 3-in-1 yard tools. They can send the grass clippings out to the side, mulch the grass clippings into small bits, or bag the grass clippings. Switching between these options is usually straightforward, but some models of electric mowers are easier to adjust and manage. And don’t assume the bag comes with the mower, it could be an add-on option. 

    Final thoughts on the best electric lawn mowers

    Today’s electric lawn mowers are energy-efficient and powerful, and they give gas-powered lawn mowers a run for their money. Corded mowers are fantastic for homes with available outlets. Battery-powered lawn mowers provide versatility and convenience, as long as you keep the batteries charged and ready. And if you want to live a life of luxury, opt for a robotic lawn mower to be your own electronic groundskeeper. Electric lawn mowers are eco-friendly yard tools that are as quiet as they are dependable. For anyone with a medium-sized yard, the best electric mower is the perfect power tool for lawn maintenance.  

    The post The best electric lawn mowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    NEMO unfurls its first recyclable sleeping bag https://www.popsci.com/gear/nemo-forte-recyclable-sleeping-bag-news/ Tue, 25 Apr 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=536525
    A person shakes out a sleeping bag in the mountains
    The updated NEMO Forte is highly packable and retains warmth even when wet. NEMO

    NEMO has updated its already popular Spoon-shaped Forte sleeping bag to be more environmentally friendly.

    The post NEMO unfurls its first recyclable sleeping bag appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A person shakes out a sleeping bag in the mountains
    The updated NEMO Forte is highly packable and retains warmth even when wet. NEMO

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Outdoor gear has historically not been very friendly to the environment that it encourages you to go and enjoy. But outdoor gear maker NEMO aims to change that and has announced its first-ever fully recyclable sleeping bag. The company wanted to get a more eco-friendly bag to consumers faster, so it opted to redesign its already popular three-season Spoon shaped bag instead of creating something entirely new. The bag also is the first in NEMO’s Endless Promise series, which Nemo says is a step toward its goal of cutting emissions intensity in half by 2030. We love to see companies making tangible moves to be more environmentally responsible and have high hopes for this bag.

    NEMO Forte

    NEMO

    SEE IT

    The redesigned Forte is now made using a single material family and is 100% recyclable. It is made up of a recycled liner, bluesign-approved shell fabric, and Zerofiber PCR insulation, which is made from 100% post-consumer recycled materials. As is typically the benefit of synthetic insulation, it maintains loft and warmth even when wet. And it packs down small to save space. 

    The new Forte gets NEMO’s Classic Spoon shape, providing extra room at the shoulders and knees for side sleepers. It also features upgraded Thermo Gill vents with a multistage zipper system to expand the usable temperature range of the bag and overall improve comfort. Hot sleepers and warm-weather campers can rejoice about better temperature control. When the weather is cold, the Blanket Fold draft collar will help to keep out cold air. An integrated pillow pocket will keep your pillow in the right place while you sleep. The full-length double slider YKK zipper makes it easy to get in and out. And it can be zipped together with a sleeping bag with a zipper on the opposite side to create a double sleeping bag.

    The Forte is available in men’s and women’s versions in two different lengths and either 20- or 35-degree temperature ratings. Pricing ranges from $179.95 to $239.95, depending on what length and temperature rating you go with. They are available now on NEMO’s website and will be available for purchase at retailers worldwide in June 2023. We suspect this will likely be our favorite sustainable sleeping bag, and we’re eager to test it as we refresh our coverage of camping essentials. 

    Endless Promise program details

    With the launch of the NEMO Forte, the company is also announcing its newest sustainability program. The Endless Promise product line aims to take “responsibility for the entire life cycle of each product.” That starts with reducing resource consumption and ends with keeping gear out of landfills. As a result, products in this series are specifically designed to be repairable, resellable, and recyclable. 

    And NEMO plans to incentivize people to take part in this program. When you are done with a new Forte sleeping bag, you can send it back to NEMO for either resale or recycling. If the bag is in good enough condition to be reused, you will receive a NEMO gift card for the resale value of the bag. If the bag instead needs to be recycled, a $20 NEMO gift card will be sent as a thank you for recycling. For bags that go the recycled route, NEMO partnered up with Unifi, a textile recycler, to turn Forte bags into Repreve polyester yarns so that they can live on.

    The post NEMO unfurls its first recyclable sleeping bag appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best kids’ ATVs in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-kids-atvs/ Fri, 10 Jun 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=448410
    Best Kids' ATVs sliced header
    Stan Horaczek

    Let your little ones grip it and rip it (safely) around the yard with these all-terrain vehicles.

    The post The best kids’ ATVs in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best Kids' ATVs sliced header
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best for toddlers Power Wheels Trail Racer ATV Power Wheels Trail Racer ATV
    SEE IT

    It has two speed settings to choose from.

    Best for beginners Best Choice Products 12V Ride On Electric ATV Best Choice Products 12V Ride On Electric ATV
    SEE IT

    Chunky wheels work on a variety of terrain.

    Best electric Razor Dirt Quad Razor Dirt Quad
    SEE IT

    Give older kids more freedom to ride.

    All-terrain vehicles, or ATVs, can be a great source of fun for kids. While they’re not ready for the gnarly, gas-powered vehicles just yet, there are safer models that meet the needs of smaller children. The best ATVs for kids come in a variety of sizes and capabilities. Kids as young as toddlers can ride and drive (even before they take their first steps), while older kids can ride fast laps for an age-appropriate and fulfilling thrill. No matter how you swing it, they can be a great way to learn driving skills and enjoy time outdoors. Some models are even appropriate for adult use, allowing the entire family to get in on the fun. Whether you’re a newbie to the world of ATVs or are looking to upgrade your current model, consider the options that are available for kids and how to choose the best one for their age, size, and driving capabilities. Before you make your next purchase, take a look at this comprehensive list to help you find the best kids’ ATVs.

    How we chose the best kids’ ATVs

    When searching for the best kids’ ATV, look at these models and research aspects in order to find your best fit. When looking at bang for buck, we recommend the Razor Dirt Quad for its ability to toe the line between a child’s toy and a real ATV. It’s pricier than smaller models but offers more power, capabilities, and storage options.

    We took several factors into account when researching the best electric ATVs for kids, including price, speed, battery life, reviews, safety features, terrain, size, and material. By looking at durability and how long (and fast) an ATV can move, we were able to decipher which ones are better suited for kids. 

    We also included a range of styles to cover kids of different ages, sizes, and driving capabilities. Take a look at the above factors when searching for your child’s ATV and which one is best suited for your family’s needs.

    Best kids’ ATVs: Reviews & Recommendations

    Best for beginners: Best Choice Products 12V Ride On Electric ATV

    Best Choice Products

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Best Choice Products 12V Ride On Electric ATV is a great first-time ATV for young grade-schoolers or young kids learning to maneuver. 

    Specs

    • Weight: 46.3 lbs.
    • Dimensions: 39.5x26x29.5 inches
    • Materials: Metal and plastic components

    Pros

    • Bluetooth capabilities
    • Includes LED headlight
    • Plush backrest

    Cons

    • Max speed of 3.7 mph
    • Max rider capacity of 66 lbs. 

    The Best Choice Products 12V ATV is ideal for kids learning to ride, including preschoolers and young grade-schoolers. With a more authentic feel than “kiddie” riders, this version will help them get their feet wet with its realistic rider design. It also hosts large trade wheels and a comfortable backrest so young riders can relax and take a break.

    With a LED headlight and real working horn, kids can also ride at night, or alert others they are coming through! Features like a foot pedal and a low speed help keep it safer for younger kids. Battery life is slated to last up to 90 minutes, allowing for plenty of ride time before it needs to recharge. 

    With this ATV, you can also hook up any Bluetooth device so kids can enjoy music as they cruise across surfaces like gravel, dirt, grass, concrete, and even light mud (avoid the sticky stuff). Though its tires are wide and made for many terrains, they’re plastic and won’t hold up to extreme terrain or weather conditions.

    Check this ATV out for riders ages 5-10, including first-time riders. 

    Best electric: Razor Dirt Quad

    Razor

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Razor Dirt Quad straddles the line between kids’ toys and real ATVs so closely that kids won’t know it’s not the real thing. 

    Specs

    • Weight: 75 lbs.
    • Dimensions: 43x24x31 inches
    • Materials: Alloy steel

    Pros

    • Made of steel, has real rubber tires
    • Speeds up to 8 mph
    • Max rider weight: 120 lbs.

    Cons

    • 40 minutes of ride time
    • No speed limiter 

    When it comes to a more advanced rider, the Razor Dirt Quad is where it’s at. Suitable for small kids who know how to ride, it toes the line right up to being a real gas-powered vehicle. The quad hauls at 8 mph and will carry riders up to 120 lbs. 

    Advanced features include lights and buttons that make revving noises and shatterproof plastic fenders. Meanwhile, the frame is made of real alloy steel that glides up and down even rough terrain. Knobby rubber tires help round out the rugged look and feel of this kid’s ATV. 

    With a 24-volt battery, parents can rest assured the vehicle has plenty of get-up-and-go (so much so that there’s no speed limiter). Ride for up to 40 minutes before needing a recharge. Hand-operated brakes rely on twisting grips, so it feels like the real thing. As an added bonus, metal hooks are provided for vertical storage, helping you save space in the off-season, or whenever you need to tuck it away. 

    Even experienced riders will need to ease into this model before parents can let them safely ride off on their own. Because this vehicle moves faster than the rest of the rides on this list, it makes safety equipment absolutely essential.

    Best small ATV: Blitzshark 24V Kids Ride on ATV

    Blitzshark

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This space-saving model offers plenty of ATV perks for kids without the storage commitment (or huge price tag). 

    Specs

    • Weight: 48.5 lbs.
    • Dimensions: 42.5×27.6×29.1 lbs.
    • Materials: Metal suspension

    Pros

    • Comes with protective gear
    • Metal suspension
    • Working lights and radio

    Cons

    • Additional shipping fee
    • 2-wheel drive

    When looking for a smaller model ATV, look no further than the Blitzshark 24V Kids Ride On. With metal suspension, you can get elements of a higher-level ATV, without the price tag that comes with them. At nearly half the price of rugged models, Blitzshark cuts down on weight with plastic framing and wheels. Its size also fits its lowered price, with a 12V model that hauls its smaller model to and fro with ease. 

    Its lighter weight also adds battery time, lasting up to three hours, based on speed, rider weight, and terrain. This model is suitable for grass, gravel, and light ground. Real lights and a working radio round out the big kid experience. 

    Suitable for riders up to 80 pounds, it comes complete with safety gear (be sure it fits properly, as a wide range of riders can use this ATV). The Blitzshark travels up to 6.5 mph and hosts soft-breaking technology to avoid jarring stops for riders. 

    If you’re looking for a mid-model ATV for younger kids that won’t break the bank, but is also suitable to store in a small area, this is your pick. The Blitzshark is ideal for kids under 10 or smaller kids up to 13. 

    Best for toddlers: Power Wheels Trail Racer ATV

    Power Wheels

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Power Wheels Trail Racer ATV is a great quad option for young drivers, whether or not they have steering experience.

    Specs

    • Weight: 25 lbs.
    • Dimensions: 45.75x30x31.58 inches
    • Two speed settings: 3 and 6 mph

    Pros

    • Drives on hard surfaces and wet grass
    • Parent-controlled, high-speed lockout
    • Power-lock brakes

    Cons

    • Short battery life
    • Max weight 65 lbs.

    This basic quad setup allows young toddlers (and kids up to 65 lbs.) to cruise a variety of surfaces, including wet grass. Choose from two speed settings (3 mph and 6 mph) depending on the child’s capabilities and preferences. You can also switch to parental controls to keep your ATV under control. Ideal for kids too young to drive, or for when they are getting too brave with the ATV. 

    With a low frame and plenty of buttons to push, this ATV is a great toy for kids who are learning to drive, steer, and avoid obstacles in the yard. It’s also complete with smooth steering to avoid jarring or jerking movements by novice riders who are prone to jerking the handlebars when they get overwhelmed. That can lead to epic wipeouts on some other models. 

    Overall, it’s a great starting ATV and ideal for young riders. 

    Things to consider when shopping for the best kids’ ATVs

    Before purchasing an ATV for kids, you should look into a few specific things. This will help you get the right style for your family, whether you have one child or multiple that will share the electric kids’ ATV. Use these factors to find your best fit.

    Gas vs. electric kids’ ATVs

    First, ask yourself this important question: do you want to run a gas engine or a model that’s battery-operated? It’s worth noting that for this article, we focused on battery-operated ATVs for kids, which are more environmentally friendly. 

    Gas ATVs have far more power and can be used for long trips and bigger thrills. This is usually what experienced riders and adults ride, simply due to their advanced options and ability to carry larger riders. However, it’s worth noting that gas models come with additional expenses than their battery-powered counterparts. Aside from the fuel itself, you’ll need to keep the engine running properly with oil, filters, and a clean carburetor. There is the upkeep of tires, wheels, etc., in addition to the battery. But if that’s the thrill you’re after, it’s likely worth the extra expense and maintenance.

    For this article, we’re focusing on electric ATVs, which are best for young, small, and inexperienced riders. They are more eco-friendly, more affordable, and still offer plenty of speed and movement for their size.

    Safety features of ATVs for kids

    Next, consider the safety features of each ATV. Obviously, helmets are essential, but depending on age and skill level (as well as the power of the vehicle), you may want to opt for extended safety capabilities. For instance, do you need a roll cage added? Do you want your child to drive on two wheels or four? The former is best for skilled or older riders. You should also look at potential speed and tire type. While toddlers will be great with plastic wheels, kids who will drive on rougher terrain will need real rubber tires of varying degrees of thickness. 

    In this article, we’re reviewing four-wheeled vehicles that sit higher up off the ground, most commonly referred to as four-wheelers. Usually, low-ground options, like go-carts, need a roll cage.

    Product dimensions of your kids’ ATV

    Now it’s time to consider the size of the ATV itself. Where will you store it? In most cases, you won’t want the ATV exposed to the elements, so you’ll need a shed or garage of some kind where it can be parked. Its weight and measurements can also come into play. For instance, a heavier ATV could be more dangerous, require more battery power to charge, and more. This is one more area to research before making your final ATV purchase.

    FAQs

    Q: Which is the best ATV for kids?

    There is much to consider when looking at the best ATV for the little ones in your life. Some of the most important factors include the child’s size, age, and skill level, as well as the safety features you are looking to be included. For instance, low models, like a four-wheeled go-cart may need an attached metal roll cage in order to be as safe as possible. However, quad ATVs, like traditional 4-wheelers, may need hand brakes so they can stop quickly. In any case, kids should wear helmets and perhaps shin/elbow pads, etc.

    Q: How much does a kid’s ATV cost?

    Gas-model ATVs for kids will run near $1,000 and often well over. Consider not only the initial cost of the ATV, but potential upkeep, such as oil, filters, and fuel to keep it running. Tires can also be an extra expense, especially when riding on rough terrain, which can cause more damage to even the toughest of tires. 

    In contrast, battery-operated models can be far more affordable. Toddler versions of kids’ ATVs start around $180 and can go up from there. Keep in mind that these budget models are likely to need replacement batteries after a few years. Frequent use can also lower the lifespan of a battery. Though easily replaceable, ATV batteries can be pricey when you have to make repeat purchases. 

    More sophisticated battery-operated kids’ ATVs go up in price accordingly with their abilities. Ranging from a few hundred up to $600-$700 for models that are metal, fast, and use real rubber tires. Again, keep potential expenses of upkeep in mind, such as replacement tires and batteries. However, 12V batteries, for example, have a longer shelf life than lesser-powered models.

    Q: What is a good size ATV for an 8-year-old? What size ATV is good for a 6-year-old?

    Based on your child’s age and driving skill level, you will likely want a larger ATV model for those aged 6 and up. Consider models like the Razor Dirt Quad for 8-year-olds or 6-year-olds. They also have a larger model that’s best for growing kids or those who want more of a challenge while driving. 

    The Blitzshark is also good for older kids, including 6-year-olds or 8-year-olds who are smaller. Kids who have grown quickly might not move as fast on the Blitzshark or become bored with its small size. 

    Does your child already know how to ride an ATV? If not, this may be a great example of outdoor skills you can teach your kids. If they aren’t already a skilled driver, the Blitzshark or Best Choice Products will be a great model on which they can learn. 

    Remember to keep your child’s size and skill level in mind when choosing the right ATV for them to maneuver.

    Final thoughts about the best kids’ ATVs

    While your little one may not be ready for full-fledged four-wheelers, there are fun, safe options out there if you’re looking for the best kids’ ATVs for children of almost any age.

    The post The best kids’ ATVs in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best inverter generators of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-inverter-generators/ Mon, 29 Aug 2022 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=465835
    Best inverter generators sliced header
    Tony Ware

    Get fuel-sipping performance that's portable.

    The post The best inverter generators of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best inverter generators sliced header
    Tony Ware

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The Generac GP3500iO delivers solid power and unrivaled reliability. Generac GP3500iO
    SEE IT

    This is a solid all-around option for just about any home.

    Most sustainable The Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro offers sustainable, best-in-class performance. Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro
    SEE IT

    Go solar if you want to save the environment and some money.

    Best for home backup The Briggs & Stratton Q6500 will keep your lights on, quietly. Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series
    SEE IT

    Don’t worry about blackouts with this powerful-but-quiet model.

    The issue with old-school generators is that they always operated at full bore, burning fuel and pumping out power at the highest possible capacity at all times, but inverter generators solve the problem. They offer a throttle that adjusts engine speed to meet actual electrical needs. This greatly improves fuel efficiency, reduces emissions, and decreases operating volume. Inverter generators also provide an extremely clean source of electricity that won’t harm sensitive devices with unpredictable and inconsistent power output. Whether you’ve got hurricane preparedness or just generally useful home appliances on your mind, the best inverter generators offer solid efficiency and runtime, rock-solid craftsmanship, and deliver the reliability you need when the lights go out.

    How we picked the best inverter generators

    As a tech enthusiast and camping addict, I’ve looked at a wide range of mobile power products for the likes of Popular Science, Scientific American, The Daily Beast, and more. I’ve researched each of these selections extensively via a combination of first-hand trials, input from experts, and reviews from real-world consumers. We focus on generators that offer solid build quality, powerful performance, and reliability. A generator isn’t worth much if you can’t be sure it will work when you really need it.

    The best inverter generators: Reviews & Recommendations

    Our top-rated inverter generators represent a range of uses and budgets. Some are designed to provide full-fledged backup power for an entire home. Others are more portable for camping, worksites, or other smaller-scale intentions. In any case, below you’ll find something that fits your circumstances.

    Best overall: Generac GP3500iO

    Generac

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Solid performance, superior reliability, and outstanding versatility make the Generac GP3500iO a great all-around inverter generator.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 3,000W
    • Peak output: 3,500W
    • Gas tank capacity: 2.37 gallons
    • Weight: 74.3 lbs
    • Runtime: 11 hours at 25 % rated load
    • Price: $839

    Pros

    • Outstanding reliability
    • Solid output
    • Quiet
    • Relatively light

    Cons

    • No wheels
    • Not enough output for a whole house

    When it comes to building an inverter generator that delivers a lifespan worthy of the investment, Generac is as good as they come. The GP3500iO is built to last and will provide many years of reliable power.

    Speaking of which, its power output is no slouch either. While its 3,000-3,500W operating range isn’t large enough to keep an entire house powered, it is more than enough to keep key appliances operating or to keep a campsite, RV, or off-grid worksite fully electrified. It’s also parallel-ready, so if you do need more power you can chain a second unit in to double the output. And at a surprisingly competitive price of just over $800, buying two isn’t all that much of a stretch.

    It’s 50% quieter than most comparably sized generators, making it perfect for hauling out into nature. That being said, it’s a bit lighter than many similar models, it isn’t exactly featherweight and it doesn’t come with wheels, so some may find it somewhat challenging to wrangle in and out of the RV.

    For all intents and purposes, however, we think the GP3500iO is the best inverter generator for the money thanks to its outstanding build quality, performance, and versatility.

    Most sustainable: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

    Jackery

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for plenty of sustainable, portable power, the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro delivers.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 2,200W
    • Peak output: 4,400W
    • Gas tank capacity: N/A
    • Weight: 43 lbs
    • Runtime: 2,160 Watt hours
    • Price: $2,099

    Pros

    • Super portable
    • Easy to use
    • Solid output
    • Super fast charging 

    Cons

    • Not enough output for a whole house
    • Can only be charged in the sun

    In its own offshoot class of inverter generators—that of the electric generators, meaning that it requires no gas at all—the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro offers substantial, sustainable, highly portable power. In fact, we like the 2000 Pro so much that we named it the top solar generator of the year.

    With output ranging between 2,200-4,400 watts, the 2000 Pro delivers more power than virtually any other solar power generator on the market. While the runtime of its 2,160 Wh capacity depends entirely upon how much you ask of it, it’s capable of powering a full-sized fridge for over three hours, a portable electric cooler for 15 hours, a hand drill for 60 hours, and can charge small devices like a smartphone or laptop dozens and dozens of times. It also recharges fast, going from empty to 100% in under two hours when plugged into a wall outlet or in just 2.5 hours when plugged into its solar array.

    The Jackery 2000 Pro is also super portable and super user-friendly, making it an ideal choice for camping or vanlifing. While it’s not powerful enough to keep an entire house juiced, it will serve as a solid source of backup power in the event that the lights go out, allowing you to keep a few key appliances and devices running.

    Best for home backup: Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series

    Briggs & Stratton

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: For emergency backup power at home, the Briggs & Stratton Q6500 delivers solid yet quiet performance.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 5,000W
    • Peak output: 6,500W
    • Gas tank capacity: 2.37 gallons
    • Weight: 128 lbs
    • Runtime: 14 hours at 25% load 
    • Price: $1,399

    Pros

    • Solid output
    • Quiet
    • Easy to move and store
    • Power usage meter

    Cons

    • Some buyers report customer service issues

    When you need an inverter generator to power your entire home, power output is your foremost concern. The Briggs & Stratton Q6500 QuietPower Series delivers more than enough output capacity and runtime to suit the average homeowner’s needs. What’s more, it’s also quieter than most other generators, making about as much noise as a dishwasher.

    All of that makes it ideal for at-home emergency backup power use, but the deal is sweetened thanks to its highly mobile, highly storable design. Its telescoping handle sets flush into its square shape, making it easy to store in the garage. When it’s time to deploy, the inclusion of sturdy wheels makes it easy to roll into place.

    Some users have reported issues when seeking customer service from the company, but their experience seems to be in the minority. Generally speaking, this is an outstanding generator to have on hand for when the lights go out.

    Best for RVs: Honda EU2200i

    Honda

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: If you need a tough, reliable source of power on the go, the Honda EU2200i is the best recreational inverter generator out there.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 1,800W
    • Peak output: 2,200W
    • Gas tank capacity: .95 gallons
    • Weight: 47.4 lbs
    • Runtime: 8.1 hours at 25 % rated load
    • Price: $1,199

    Pros

    • Outstanding portability
    • Outstanding reliability
    • Solid power output
    • Quiet

    Cons

    • Not powerful enough for a while house

    Fun fact: Honda actually released the first inverter generator ever back in 1987. That being the case, it should come as no surprise that they’ve had plenty of time to perfect the art.

    And perfect the Honda EU2200i is—at least for the purposes of RVing or camping. It weighs less than 50 pounds and can easily fit in most common car trunks, it’s as portable as generators come. At the same time, it offers a solid 1,800-2,200W of power, which is enough to run virtually any RV air conditioner with room left over to charge an array of devices.

    What’s more, the EU2200i is one of the most solidly built generators on the market. With a typical lifespan of somewhere between 1000-2000 operating hours, a properly maintained EU2200i should last some 10-20 years.

    Best dual-fuel: DuroMax XP13000HX

    DuroMax

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With its high output and solid construction, the DuroMax XP13000HX is as reliable as they come.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 10,500W
    • Peak output: 13,000W
    • Gas tank capacity: 8.3 gallons
    • Weight: 238 lbs
    • Runtime: 13 hours at 25 % rated load
    • Price: $1,499

    Pros

    • Dual-fuel versatility
    • Massive power output
    • Rock-solid construction
    • Wheel kit included

    Cons

    • Very heavy
    • Very expensive

    We like the DuroMax XP1300HX so much that we placed it at the top of our roundup of the best dual-fuel generators. Not only does it produce an enormous amount of power—more than enough to power an entire house—but its dual-fuel versatility allows it to run on both gas and propane. This makes it easier to find fuel sources in a pinch, and when fueled by propane means that it will be quieter and produce fewer emissions. It’s also as solidly built as any machine most humans will ever own.

    That solid build does translate into weight—a hefty 238 pounds of it. The wheels do make it easy to move around wheel-barrow-style, but you definitely won’t be bringing it camping. As far as emergency home backup power goes, however, the XXP1300HX is outstanding.

    Best budget: WEN 56203i Super Quiet

    WEN

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The WEN 56203i Super Quiet offers substantial quality at a low price.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 1,700W
    • Peak output: 2,000W
    • Gas tank capacity: 1 gallon
    • Weight: 38 lbs
    • Runtime: 10.8 25% rated load
    • Price: $429

    Pros

    • Rock-bottom price
    • Quiet
    • Great runtime
    • Super portable

    Cons

    • Relatively low power output

    At $340, the WEN 56203i Super Quiet is about as budget-friendly as generators get. What makes it stand out is that it offers significantly better performance than every other generator in its class.

    Capable of churning out a steady 1,700-2,000W, this generator isn’t going to power your house but it will serve as a decent source of emergency power in a pinch, and it serves as a great camping option. Its campability is accentuated by its quiet performance and outstanding portability. It also sips fuel efficiently, delivering a great runtime for its fuel capacity.

    What to consider when buying inverter generators

    There are a lot of inverter generators out there, but they tend to come with lofty price tags. It requires hardware to actually invert the current, which allows it to avoid voltage spikes that could harm devices plugged into it. Many subpar brands simply don’t offer the build quality that you would expect from such a high-value piece of equipment, while others fall short of delivering the performance you need for reliable power. To make a smart buy, here are a few important considerations to keep in mind so that you can be sure of getting the best inverter generator for the money:

    Power output

    If a generator doesn’t produce enough power to meet your needs, what good is it? Generators are rated by the number of watts they can produce in any given moment, which is often accompanied by a peak performance rating that represents the maximum power they can deliver in short bursts. To determine how much juice you need, add up the operating wattage for all the devices and appliances you expect to power, then find a generator that delivers accordingly. The average 5000-7500W generator, for example, will generally provide enough power for most of the key items in your home, including the fridge, TV, lighting, well pump, and a smattering of small devices.

    Runtime

    If you expect to be using your inverter generator for long periods at a time—if you live somewhere with frequent or prolonged power outages, for example, or if you’ll be needing off-grid power all day long—you don’t want to be refueling it again and again. Runtimes are determined by how large a generator’s fuel tank is combined with its operating efficiency. Most inverter generators have runtimes of roughly 5-6 hours, though a few highly efficient models can stretch that to nearly a full day.

    Fuel type

    While the majority of inverter generators run on gasoline, many also run on propane or natural gas, and a few can even be powered by the sun. Gas offers the most power output but it’s also the loudest and causes the most emissions. Propane and natural gas shave off a bit of the output in favor of quieter, cleaner operations. Solar generators are emission-free and just shy of silent, but they can only be recharged if the sun is out (or a wall/car socket is handy).

    Size and weight

    Inverter generators come in a variety of sizes and weights, resulting in varying degrees of portability. Some are large and essentially immobile, which means they’re designed to be set in place and forgotten about until the need arises. Others are more portable thanks to reduced size, weight, or the addition of handles and wheels.

    Reliability

    A generator doesn’t do much good if it breaks down when you need it. Reliable craftsmanship is essential, but it can be difficult to determine at a glance or by reading a spec sheet. We’ve verified the reliability of our picks via reviews from owners who have used specific models over time.

    FAQs

    Q: What is best, an inverter or a generator?

    An inverter is a component in an inverter generator that converts AC power into DC power and then “inverts” it back into cleaner AC power. That might sound technical but the important thing is that it results in power that is “safer” for sensitive devices like laptops or smartphones, and it throttles the engine to match your actual power demands, which improves a generator’s efficiency.

    Q: What is the highest-watt inverter generator?

    While industrial-grade inverter generators can get quite large, the highest wattage you’ll find at the consumer level is about 15,000-17,500. That’s wildly unnecessary for the typical user. The largest generator we’ve suggested is the DuroMax XP13000HX, which can produce up to 13,000 watts—more than enough for the average home.

    Q: What is the most reliable inverter generator?

    All of the generators we’ve recommended above offer outstanding reliability. In terms of lifespan, most will last upwards of 10 years with proper maintenance.

    Q: Is an inverter generator good for home use?

    Absolutely. The “clean” power produced by an inverter generator ensures that all your electronics can operate safely. As long as you buy a model that offers the appropriate level of power for your needs, it is perfectly suited for the task.

    Q: How big of an inverter generator do I need?

    That depends on how you intend to use it. To power the majority of your home—including a fridge, lights, TV, and a smattering of other small appliances and devices—you’ll want at least 4,000W. If you’ll be camping and powering an RV, shoot for at least 1,800 watts as most RV air conditions require around 1,500W and you’ll want a little leftover for lights and charging your phone.

    Final thoughts on the best inverter generators

    If you live in an area where power cuts are frequent, an inverter generator will be a game-changer. It will ensure that you have plenty of reliable power while everyone else on the block sits in the dark. And if you’re looking to power an RV, an inverter generator will keep you living in comfort while off the grid. While the best inverter generators are no small investment, one will pay for itself in the long run in terms of comfort and peace of mind.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best inverter generators of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best waterproof smartwatches of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-waterproof-smartwatch/ Wed, 09 Jun 2021 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=370944
    Hit the pool, rivers, and lakes with the best warerproof smartwatches.

    Waterproof smartwatches can look splashy and they’ll never leave you high and dry.

    The post The best waterproof smartwatches of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Hit the pool, rivers, and lakes with the best warerproof smartwatches.

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall A pair of grey SHOKZ bone conduction headphones on a blue and white background. Shokz OpenRun
    SEE IT

    Impressive battery life, water resistance, and reliable connectivity make these the best pair of bone-conduction headphones around.

    Best for kids A pair of pink bone conduction headphones with a unicorn pattern on a blue and white background N/0 Kids Bone Conduction Headphones
    SEE IT

    Give your kids a pair of headphones that will provide safe entertainment while they stay active.

    Best waterproof A pair of blue bone conduction headphones on a blue and white background Shokz OpenSwim
    SEE IT

    A pair of open-ear headphones that’s waterproof, the OpenSwim suit doing laps in the pool swimmingly.

    The best technology grants us the freedom to work and play whenever and wherever we want. Smartwatches embody this idea. They allow us to keep track of our activities and alerts pretty much anywhere—sometimes even underwater. Waterproofing technology allows top smartwatches to function through all types of weather, whether we’re caught in an unexpected downpour or jumping into the shower, swimming pool, or even the ocean. The best waterproof smartwatch operates safely and helps keep you connected no matter where the day takes you.

    How we picked the best waterproof smartwatches

    Waterproof smartwatches are a topic we really enjoy, well, diving into. With avid swimmers, cyclists, runners, hikers, and just general outdoors enthusiasts on the staff, we have a lot of experience with watches that can handle the elements. We combined these first-hand perspectives with peer recommendations and other real-world impressions, plus scoured critical reviews and specs sheets, to come up with the best waterproof smartwatches you can buy today.

    The best waterproof smartwatches: Reviews & Recommendations

    A great waterproof smartwatch will withstand the pressures of water and your level of activity. It won’t be daunted by rain, sleet, or snow, or by a spontaneous trip to splash in the ocean. On top of how much water it will resist, the best waterproof smartwatch can also help you track your own hydration and other levels that will keep you in optimal physical and mental health while out adventuring. The right timepiece for you will always keep pace. Here are some suggestions.

    Best overall: Apple Watch Series 8

    Apple

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The latest in the Apple Watch Series features crash detection, always-on display, sophisticated health tracking and more.

    Specs

    • Sizes: 41mm, 45mm
    • Battery life: Up to 18 hours
    • Swimproof? Yes

    Pros

    • Alerts first responders in case of emergency
    • Provides ECG testing and blood oxygen level testing
    • Water-, dust-, and crack-resistant

    Cons

    • Expensive

    Whether you jump into a project or a pool, the Apple Watch Series 8 can handle it. This waterproof smartwatch can sync seamlessly to your iPhone, use apps to measure your vitals, and keep you moving. This new model also helps keep you healthy: It comes with new crash and fall detection features that will alert emergency services in the case of an accident. It will also keep tabs on your blood oxygen level, and alert you to irregular heart rhythms. It also comes with built-in gyroscope and compass and up to 18 hours of battery life. If you’re spending extended periods in liquid, however, it’s best to opt for the sports band that is made from a soft, silicone rubber because it has a little stretch, making it comfortable to wear during activity. Or if you’re serious about endurance sports or off-the-grid adventures, take it up a notch with the Apple Watch Ultraread more here.

    Best tactical: Garmin fenix 7X Pro Solar

    Garmin

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Garmin fenix 7X Pro is designed with sophisticated map features, comes with GPS and a built-in LED flashlight and tracks health metrics, and is solar-powered.

    Specs

    • Sizes: 42,mm, 47mm, 51mm
    • Battery life: Up to 122 hours in direct sunlight
    • Swimproof? No

    Pros

    • Compass, altimeter, and sophisticated mapping built in
    • Water-resistant
    • Long-lasting solar charging power
    • Comes with features to optimize performance in a range of sports

    Cons

    • Pricey
    • Rugged looking for everyday use

    This fully-loaded Garmin tactical smartwatch is rated at 10ATM, meaning you could take it just about anywhere but diving (there are even surfing-specific features). It can survive drops and submersion, offers advanced health monitoring features to keep tabs on your blood oxygen saturation levels, altitude, sleep, and pace planning. Features to note include Multi-GNSS tracking, plus maps for at-a-glance navigation. While expensive, this solar tactical smartwatch extends the already long battery life by recharging while on your wrist for weeks of life (or days if GPS is constantly running). Garmin has numerous waterproof sports watches to choose from (including the Instinct 2 Solar we reviewed). However, if you covet the Apple Watch’s AMOLED screen and are willing to put up with “only” about two weeks of battery life at a time, the perfect choice is the epix Gen. 2, which puts all the features of the fenix 7 behind a vivid always-on display shielded by sapphire glass.

    Best for kids: Garmin vivofit jr. 3

    Garmin

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Kids are excited to wear this fun series of watches that helps them learn how to create healthy habits.  

    Specs

    • Sizes: One, with adjustable band
    • Battery life: Up to a year before requires replacement
    • Swimproof? Yes

    Pros

    • Models feature Marvel’’s Spider Man and Disney princesses 
    • Comes with built-in adventures for kids 
    • Tracks soccer games and provides step competitions

    Cons

    • Kids may quickly outgrow

    Get your kid excited about swimming with the Garmin vivofit jr. 3. This smartwatch comes with a bright display with multiple faces and a range of fun designs, including Marvel and Disney characters to make the tracking more fun. These smartwatches are waterproof and will help your kids learn healthy habits, and will also let you keep tabs on their steps and sleep.

    Best for Android: SAMSUNG Galaxy Watch Active 2

    Samsung

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This Android watch comes with pace coaching, monitors your heart rate, tracks your sleep, and you can choose from a range of bands and faces.

    Specs

    • Sizes: 40mm, 44mm
    • Battery life: Days on a single charge
    • Swimproof? Yes

    Pros

    • Also compatible with Apple
    • Comes with voice assistant, Bixby
    • Sleek design
    • Tracks workouts, heart health, and sleep

    Cons

    • Not super rugged
    • Yes

    This stylish smartwatch is also resilient, rated at 5ATM and IP68 (meaning it can withstand dust, dirt, and sand, and is resistant to submersion up to a maximum depth of 1.5m underwater for up to 30 minutes). So, whether you accidentally drop it in the pool or intentionally wear it while doing a pike and tuck, the SAMSUNG Galaxy Watch Active2 can survive and thrive. And its digital dial makes it easy to navigate menus full of options for activity tracking and smart assistants, as this smartwatch can connect to almost any phone and extend its connectivity and controls (though, it should be noted, iPhone users will have access to fewer features than Android users).

    Best fitness tracker: Fitbit Sense 2

    Fitbit

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Fitbit’s most advanced smartwatch goes deep on sleep and other health metrics and comes with stress management features.

    Specs

    • Sizes: Adjustable wristband
    • Battery life: Up to 6 days on a single charge
    • Swimproof? Yes

    Pros

    • Works with Apple and Android
    • Built-in GPS
    • Sophisticated sleep and stress tracking

    Cons

    • Doesn’t come with the fitness activities other smartwatches do

    Swimproof to 50 meters, so you can track laps or just splash around with your kid wearing the similarly equipped Fitbit Ace 3, this fully loaded watch takes fitness and wellness tracking to the next level—monitoring heart rate, skin temperature, oxygen saturation, workout intensity, and more to help you meet your goals. From electrodermal activity to an ECG app, it’s tracking your body’s rhythms and stress—useful information to help you and your doctor tweak your lifestyle. It’s packed with advice and enhancements, good on and off dry land.

    What to consider when looking for the best waterproof smartwatches

    With the unpredictability of life, everyone can benefit from the added protections found in waterproof smartwatches. While it’s easy to imagine the benefit for hiking and outdoor sports, waterproofing is a smart choice for added protection from far more typical activities like handwashing or gardening. Popular brands—including Apple, Samsung, Fitbit, and Garmin—all offer waterproofing features to boost their overall durability for their customers. Sport models offer even higher levels for outdoor lifestyle customers. LTE-enabled options can make calls and keep you connected without a phone, giving you even more freedom to dive headfirst into adventure. Consider your activities and choose your watch’s level of protection to match.

    Travel plans

    Whether your plans involve day-tripping into national parks or navigating much longer trips into the backcountry, there’s a level of preparedness that can match. If you’re only worried about getting caught in the rain, or maybe navigating a tricky creek crossing, you should look for a watch with a water rating of 5ATM (5 atmospheres), meaning it can withstand underwater pressures at a depth up to 50 meters. Accordingly, 10ATM and 20ATM correspond with 100 meters and 200 meters—appropriate if you plan to go from just hiking and fishing to sailing, surfing, or snorkeling. This waterproofing protects the full suite of sensors—including GPS, altimeters, barometers, and compasses—that can make a properly specced tactical smartwatch an integral part of an expedition.

    Options for kids

    If your electronics ended up near a pool, chances are you’d be conscious of whether to leave them safely in a car or locker. Your kid, however, just wants to jump right in. And if you tell them to take something off but look after it, chances are that something isn’t making it home. So a kid’s smartwatch needs to be inexpensive and durable. Luckily, brands have taken this into consideration and made their children’s smartwatches lower in price than their adult versions, but with some surprisingly handy features—like waterproofing. The best kids’ smartwatches are fun and encourage your child to keep moving. And they’re resilient enough to keep up with the child while tracking their health and whereabouts.

    Need a watch to go from the workday to weekend?

    If your work life is already deeply integrated with Apple’s ecosystem, it makes sense to opt for an Apple Watch to maintain and even increase your productivity. As with most Apple products, they are designed to seamlessly work together, intuitively handing off apps, alerts, and data. On top of that, they’re water-resistant and look as much at home with a sports jacket as they do sportswear…as good with a three-piece suit as a swimsuit. The point is, an Apple Watch balances functionality and finesse.

    Android v. Apple

    Android smartwatches are offered by a variety of different brands, including TicWatch, Samsung, Fossil, Fitbit, Misfit, and more. Unlike the Apple Watch, Android smartwatch technology is conveniently compatible with both Android smartphones and Apple iPhones. The price point for Android’s best smartwatches varies depending on the number of features you are looking for, but is typically between $150 and $300. Due to the variety of manufacturers, you have a wider range of styles and looks than you do when purchasing the Apple Watch, including plenty designed to withstand the rigors of the office and the outdoors. 

    Fitness tracking

    When you look at the ratings of waterproof watches, you’re usually considering extreme circumstances. But if your main focus is fitness, considering the water-resistance of a best smartwatch makes sense because of one simple factor: sweat. You want a watch that can stand up to the most intense workout, rain or shine, while also obtaining vital readings such as skin temperature, oxygen saturation, breathing rate, and heart rate. Beyond protecting those sensors, you want the watch to keep running so it can play the music and podcast you need to keep motivated. 

    FAQs

    Q: Which Samsung smartwatch is waterproof?

    Samsung models Galaxy Fit, Galaxy Fit2, Gear S3, Galaxy Watch, Galaxy Watch3, Galaxy Watch Active, and Galaxy Watch Active2 offer protection from water. Waterproof Samsung smartwatches can survive for up to 30 minutes in water 5 feet deep or shallower. Luckily, that will keep your watch safe during most common uses, including casual swimming. Samsung smartwatches, like most smartwatches, are not completely waterproof. Many smartwatches are marketed as waterproof, even though there are limitations to this waterproofing. According to Samsung’s website, if used in saltwater, you should rinse your watch off afterward with fresh water. Also, note that Samsung watches are not designed for scuba diving.

    Q: Which smartwatch is best for swimming?

    Water ratings let you know the amount of water resistance or waterproofing your watch has, therefore helping you select the appropriate watch for your lifestyle. Swimmers should look for a minimum 5ATM-rated watch, which can withstand pressures of up to 50 meters deep. A 10ATM watch can handle up to 100 meters of pressure, and is a great choice if your swimming also includes diving and high-speed water sports. Garmin makes a nice selection of top smartwatches for swimming with 5ATM and higher levels of water protection. Some watches, such as the Apple Watch also have swim-specific tracking modes if you typically work out in the pool. The highest level of protection will be found on Dive watches, which can be found for as little as $200, though the best are typically closer to $1,000 or more.

    Q: Are waterproof smartwatches worth it?

    Waterproof smartwatches are worth it for most people because their improved durability will likely extend the lifespan of your device. While top smartwatches are great for a host of features, like playing music, using apps, and checking email, most consumers enjoy some of the great fitness and active lifestyle features included with these devices. Having waterproofing allows you to keep your smartwatch on for swimming, showers, handwashing, rainstorms, or any other unexpected water encounters. 

    The final word on choosing the best waterproof smartwatches

    Smartwatches can feel empowering, adding technology that allows wearers to track their vitals, fitness goals, sleep, and stress. Rugged smartwatches can be taken off the grid and offer users trackback maps and GPS-aided navigation, while simpler models help keep us all connected and motivated for a healthier active lifestyle. And the best waterproof smartwatches make sure that this motivation doesn’t end at the shoreline or when it rains. 

    The post The best waterproof smartwatches of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    How to start mountain biking this summer https://www.popsci.com/diy/mountain-biking-for-beginners/ Sun, 23 Apr 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=535982
    Person rides a mountain bike on an outdoor trail.
    This is your sign you've been waiting for: it's never too late to get into mountain biking. Tobias Bjerknes / Unsplash

    Every mountain biker was a beginner once. This is how you start your journey.

    The post How to start mountain biking this summer appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Person rides a mountain bike on an outdoor trail.
    This is your sign you've been waiting for: it's never too late to get into mountain biking. Tobias Bjerknes / Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    There’s nothing like the adrenaline-pumping thrills and the sense of childlike joy that comes with mountain biking. For beginners, however, getting into the sport as an adult can be daunting. Aside from the physical demand and the inherent risk involved, collecting the necessary gear, procuring an appropriate bike, and locating suitable trails nearby is enough to deter many would-be enthusiasts.

    Fortunately, if you take it step by step and listen to the experts, you can start tearing up single track in no time.

    How to find a beginner mountain bike

    The one piece of gear you can’t go mountain biking without is—you guessed it—a bike. But before you order the coolest-looking one within your price range, it’s important that you take the time to find the right mountain bike for you.

    There are many types of mountain bikes, but you’ll mostly see one of two options. Hardtails feature suspension only on the front, so they won’t be able to fully absorb the impact when you’re riding on rough trails. On the flip side, hardtails come with the benefit of being easier to maintain and having a smaller price tag. But this doesn’t necessarily mean they’re cheap: You could find a used one in good condition for $500 or spend more than $2,000 for a new, high-end model.

    [Related: The best electric mountain bikes of 2023]

    If the thought of a hardtail doesn’t convince you, maybe you’ll want to go for a full-suspension one. As the name suggests, this type of bike has suspension in the front and the rear, which offers a cushier ride with less jostling and softer landings. But as you’d expect, comfort comes at a price, and a full-suspension bike could leave a hole in your wallet of anywhere between $1,500 and $8,000.

    Dwight Follien, president of Groveland Trail Heads, an organization that builds and maintains mountain bike trails in Groveland, California, implores beginners not to assume one type of bike is better than the other. Instead, he recommends considering what types of trails you’ll be riding and how often. For example, if you’ll only be riding occasionally and almost always on smooth or non-technical trails, you may not need to splurge on a pricey full suspension.

    On the other hand, if you’re sure mountain biking is going to become a full-time hobby and you hope to start conquering difficult trails sooner rather than later, it may make sense to invest in a nice full-suspension.

    Get the right size bike

    Don’t shell out for the first shiny metal steed that catches your eye. Bikes come in different sizes, typically ranging from extra small to extra large. Finding the right fit is important when choosing a road bike, but it’s crucial when it comes to mountain bikes, as you’ll be out of your seat and moving around a lot more.

    “You could have the nicest bike in the world but you’re not gonna have much fun if it’s not the bike for you or it doesn’t fit right,” says Tom Fure, owner of MQT Bike Rentals in Marquette, Michigan.

    If you have no idea what size bike you should ride, online size charts can be helpful. But to ensure you get the best fit, Follien says going to a local bike shop and getting sized by experienced staff members is a great idea. Whether you buy used or new, they’ll be able to help you dial in the perfect dimensions by measuring your height, and the length of your legs and torso. 

    Go for a lot of test rides

    Before you commit, Fure recommends test riding several bikes. Going for a spin around the parking lot or borrowing your friend’s for the weekend will help you find out what features you like, what size you’re most comfortable with, and if any particular brands stand out.

    Hitting the trails with a rental a couple of times will not only help you get a feel of what you like in a bike, but it’s also a great way to see if you enjoy the sport before making the investment. Just look for a reputable company that will help get you fitted and is on call in case you run into a problem or overestimate your abilities on your first time out.

    Pack the essentials

    In addition to a bike, there are a few other things you’ll need to bring on every ride, says Follien. These include a helmet, pads for knees and elbows, and a compact multi-tool for quick repairs. Complete your kit with a spare tube, tire levers, a patch kit for small punctures, and a portable bike pump.

    You’re more likely to get a flat if you’re mountain biking on rough trails, so having a way to perform repairs yourself is a must. Plus, getting stranded in a hard-to-access area is no joke, as friends and family won’t likely be able to swing by and pick you up in a car if something goes wrong.

    Plenty of snacks and water are also important, as is a small first aid kit for if (and when) you suffer scrapes or other injuries.

    The secret to mountain biking is starting small

    When you’re ready for your first ride, Follien recommends sticking to easy, flat trails until you gain confidence, build endurance, and get comfortable with your bike. Mountain bike trails are rated with colors and shapes, like ski slopes: Green circles are the easiest, followed by blue squares, black diamonds, and finally double black diamonds. You’ll also occasionally see white markers, which indicate extremely easy trails or adaptive trails for differently-abled riders. To find trials near you, ask around at bike shops or use apps like TrailForks (available for Android and iOS), AllTrails (available for Android and iOS), or MTB Project (available for Android and iOS).

    For safety reasons, you should always hit the trails with friends—ideally ones that have more experience than you but remember that you’re still learning. 

    “The worst thing that happens to beginners is going out with advanced friends,” Follien warns. You may not be able to keep up, tackle advanced features, or have the endurance for long climbs. Getting left behind can be frustrating, but trying out jumps and drops you’re not yet ready for could be dangerous.

    Taking a beginner-friendly mountain bike course and joining group rides can also help build both skills and confidence. To find one, look for local mountain biking groups that state if and when their rides or classes are appropriate for beginners. As a bonus, Fure says group rides often attract experienced riders, mechanics, and bike shop employees who may be able to answer questions or give you a hand.

    Follow the rules of the trail

    Once you’re ready to put tire to track, make sure you know the rules of the trail, which you’ll likely find posted at the trailhead. Typically, other than following leave-no-trace principles, the main thing bikers need to be aware of is the right-of-way.

    In general, riders should yield to hikers and horses on multi-use trails. If a hiker or trail runner steps out of their way for you, make sure to thank them and let them know how many riders are coming behind you if you’re riding in a group.

    [Related: Meet the mountain bikes built to survive a backflip off a cliff]

    Trail etiquette also dictates that riders headed downhill should yield to those riding uphill, explains Follien. Sure, racing downhill is fast and fun, but it’s a lot harder for a rider going against gravity to start again after they’ve stopped.

    Then all that’s left is to get out and have fun. “You don’t have to be an all-star or pro rider to enjoy the trails,” Fure says. “The more time on a bike you have the more comfortable you get and the more fun it becomes.”

    The post How to start mountain biking this summer appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best dual-fuel generators of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dual-fuel-generators/ Mon, 15 Aug 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461892
    Home photo
    Tony Ware

    When it comes to keeping a generator (and your devices) running, two fuels are better than one.

    The post The best dual-fuel generators of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Home photo
    Tony Ware

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall DuroMax XP12000EH is the best dual fuel generator overall. DuroMax XP12000EH
    SEE IT

    The DuroMax XP12000EH delivers plenty of power for any purpose.

    Best portable Westinghouse iGen4500DF is the best portable dual fuel generator. Westinghouse iGen4500DF
    SEE IT

    The Westinghouse iGen4500DF packs more power into a relatively portable package.

    Best electric start Wen DF1100X is the best electric start dual fuel generator. Wen DF1100X
    SEE IT

    For an easy startup and lots of safety features, check out the Wen DF1100X.

    Most people probably look for a gas generator as the easiest way to get backup power in a pinch, but a dual-fuel generator, which can run on gas or propane, is a more dynamic alternative. With two ways to power your generator, you have more options when fuel is in short supply (in conditions such as a hurricane). Dual-fuel generators also give you more control over secondary factors like noise and emissions: Gas is easy to get at any station, but propane burns cleaner and quieter. The best dual-fuel generators not only offer the best of both worlds but come equipped with a slew of slick features to make your user experience easy and safe.

    How we picked the best dual-fuel generators

    As a tech enthusiast and camping addict, I’ve looked at a wide range of portable power stations and related accessories—such as the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core portable generator and the best home wind turbines—for the likes of Popular Science, Scientific American, The Daily Beast, and more. (And if you’re looking for things to do with all that power, consider charging one of the best ebikes I’ve written about.) I’ve researched each of these dual-fuel generators extensively via a combination of first-hand trials, input from experts, and reviews from real-world consumers.

    The best dual-fuel generators: Reviews & Recommendations

    Our favorite dual-fuel inverter generators span a range of purposes. Some are designed as reliable backup power sources for an entire home. Others are small and portable, giving you just enough juice for a camping trip or short blackout. Our list features generators of all shapes and sizes, so you can find something that suits your needs and budget.

    Best overall: DuroMax XP12000EH

    DuroMax

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: With its high output and heavy-duty build quality, the DuroMax XP12000EH will keep the lights on and more.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 9,500W
    • Peak output: 12,000W
    • Gas tank capacity: 8.3 gallons
    • Weight: 238 lbs
    • Volume: 74 dB
    • Starter: Electric and pull

    Pros

    • Solid output
    • Outstanding build quality
    • Power Boost for bigger appliances and RVs
    • Wheel kit included

    Cons

    • Very heavy
    • Expensive
    • Some owners report limited customer service support

    The DuroMax XP12000EH is a true workhorse of a dual-fuel generator. With a steady output of 9,500W, it’s more than powerful enough to provide electricity to an entire home, and its 12,000W peak output allows it to provide extra power if there’s suddenly a much larger need. It also has a large 8.3-gallon gas tank, so it can run for a long time on petrol alone.

    What’s more, XP12000EH has a reputation for providing outstanding reliability. It was built for rugged uses, like on a work site, and its all-metal construction ensures that it can handle a bit of roughhousing. All that metal and gas capacity does mean that it’s very heavy, though. At 238 pounds, you’re not going to be moving this around a whole lot, and forget about taking it camping. But it does come with a wheel kit, so that may help ease the load over short distances. 

    Best small: A-iPower SUA2000iD

    A-iPower

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished here: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The A-iPower SUA2000iD makes dual-fuel power as portable as it can be.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 1,600W
    • Peak output: 2,000W
    • Gas tank capacity: 1.1 gallons
    • Weight: 55 lbs
    • Volume: 55 dB
    • Starter: Electric

    Pros

    • Highly portable
    • Quiet
    • Affordable
    • Solid construction

    Cons

    • Limited power
    • Limited gas capacity

    It’s not easy to find a genuinely portable dual-fuel generator, but this little guy from A-iPower manages to deliver solid output in a surprisingly small package. At roughly the size of two stacked shoeboxes, the A-iPower SUA2000iD will fit nicely into a van or RV. While 55 pounds isn’t light, per se, it is the lightest dual-fuel generator I’ve found to date. It’s also about as loud as an electric toothbrush, so … not very loud at all.

    You aren’t getting the same power as a full-sized generation—1,600-2,000 watts—but that’s more than enough to keep your small appliances going and your devices charged. Owners have reported that their generators are still running strong after more than 5 years, so the construction quality is clearly solid. Again, the gas tank is pretty small, but that’s actually an advantage in this case.

    Best portable: Westinghouse iGen4500DF

    Westinghouse Outdoor Power Equipment

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: If you need to take plenty of power camping or to the job site, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF is a great choice.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 3,700W
    • Peak output: 4,500W
    • Gas tank capacity: 3.4 gallons
    • Weight: 104.7 lbs
    • Volume: 52 dB
    • Starter: Electric

    Pros

    • Highly portable
    • Plenty of power output
    • Quiet
    • Solid construction

    Cons

    • Expensive
    • Heavy for a “portable” generator

    If you need lots of power and the ability to move your generator around, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF is the best semi-portable option we know of. It’s a little bit larger than our “best small” pick and almost twice as heavy. Still, it’s significantly more compact and portable than most dual-fuel generators, with a similar 3,700-4,500W output. That’s plenty of power for a large camping expedition, an RV, or a work site. 

    Best electric start: Wen DF1100X

    WEN

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: For an easy startup and lots of safety features, check out the Wen DF1100X.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 8,300W
    • Peak output: 11,000W
    • Gas tank capacity: 6.6 gallons
    • Weight: 213.8 lbs
    • Volume: 72 dB
    • Starter: Electric

    Pros

    • Plenty of power output
    • CO2 shutdown safety sensor
    • Relatively quiet

    Cons

    • Expensive
    • Heavy

    It isn’t all that uncommon for a dual-fuel generator to have an electric start switch—all of the recommendations on this list have them, either solely or alongside a pull cord. The Wen DF1100X sets itself apart with an automatic stop mechanism that can cut power in an emergency.

    The Wen DF1100X comes in several packages but we specifically recommend the model with a built-in CO2 shutdown sensor, which is important if you’ll be running the generator in a garage or otherwise poorly ventilated space.

    With a hefty 8,300-11,000W output, above-average gas capacity, and a relatively low operating volume, the Wen DF1100X is a powerhouse of a generator. It’s both expensive and heavy, but if you’re looking for an easy-on, safety-off option, it’s a solid investment.

    Best budget: DuroMax Duro Star DS5500EH

    DuroMax

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With its relatively high output, relatively low price, and solid construction, the Duro Star DS5500EH is a solid budget-conscious pick.

    Specs

    • Rated output: 4,500W
    • Peak output: 5,500W
    • Gas tank capacity: 3.9 gallons
    • Weight: 124 lbs
    • Volume: 69 dB
    • Starter: Electric and pull

    Pros

    • Solid output for price
    • Outstanding build quality
    • Relatively portable

    Cons

    • Not powerful enough for an entire home
    • Some owners report limited customer service support

    The DuroMax Duro Star DS5500EH is effectively a smaller, more affordable version of our best overall pick. At just under half the price of the DuroMax XP12000EH, the Duro Star DS5500EH delivers about half the power. A 4,500W generator gives you plenty of power if you’re charging up an RV, topping off power tools at a work site, or keeping key appliances on during a power outage.

    At just over 100 pounds, it’s not exactly light, but it’s also not so heavy that you can’t get it around. It wouldn’t take too much wrangling to bring it camping, especially thanks to the inclusion of wheels.

    What to consider when buying a dual-fuel generator

    While there are plenty of dual-fuel generators on the market, they aren’t cheap and many of them simply aren’t worth the investment. Some are poorly made and don’t last long. Others simply don’t deliver reliable performance, so they may not work when the lights go out. To make a wise purchase, there are a few things you should keep in mind so you can judge whether a generator is worth the cost.

    Power output

    Simply put, if a generator can’t give you enough power to meet your needs, it isn’t worth buying. Manufacturers usually provide two numbers, both measured in watts (W), which will help you understand how much power a generator produces. First, a generator’s “Rated” output tells you how much power it produces at any given moment. Second, many generators also have a “peak” output spec, which refers to the maximum amount of power that a particular unit can handle blasting out in a short burst. This comes in handy if you plan to turn appliances on and off, which can cause sudden surges of electrical draw.

    Ideally, you want a generator that delivers a rated output equal to your typical power needs. If you’re simply looking to power and recharge a handful of devices alongside a simple appliance or two, 1,500W-2,000W might be all you need. If you’ll be turning a lot of random power tools on and off, or powering an RV, look for something around 4,000W. If you’re looking to power a house, however, you’ll likely need at least 8,000W or more.

    Fuel capacity

    With petrol and propane, dual-fuel generators can keep the power going longer than most single-fuel power solutions. Of course, that depends on how much fuel you have in your tanks. Most dual-fuel generator gas tanks run between 2 and 10 gallons, which is pretty typical of single-fuel generators that run solely on gas. Propane is almost always stored in separate pressurized gas canisters that are attached via a hose, exactly like you would a propane grill. So the propane capacity depends on the size of your canister rather than the generator itself.

    In both cases, though, you should keep in mind that more storage means more weight. If you’re looking for a portable generator, you’ll want to balance those two factors. If you’re buying a generator to back up your home’s power and plan to leave the generator in one place, weigh it down as much as you like.

    Starting type

    Dual-fuel generators use one of two starting mechanisms: either a recoil cord or an electric starter. With a cord, you pull the handle hard and fast to produce the rotation necessary to fire the generator. It requires more physical effort but tends to be more reliable. An electric starter is a push-button solution—no exertion is required, but it only works when its internal battery is charged.

    Operating noise

    Generators are pretty loud, which can be a nuisance if you keep one (or more) in or near your home. Generators tend to get louder as they generate more power. (There are exceptions, though.) If you’re going to keep your generator around your house or run it while camping in a quiet spot, you’re going to want to keep the noise to a minimum. 

    Typically speaking (but not always), higher-quality generators manage to turn the volume down thanks to the use of thick shielding and other design elements. If your priority is pure power, though, you may simply have to put up with the noise or find another way to minimize it.

    Dual-fuel generators give you the advantage of running propane, which generators process more quietly than gas. Most dual-fuel generators produce between 50 dB (roughly the same as a refrigerator) and 90 dB (about the same as a small-engine motorcycle).

    Size, weight, and features

    There may be other logistical considerations you’ll want to keep in mind based on your specific needs and setup, such as the specific dimensions of the generator and how much it weighs. If your generator sits at home for backup power, size and weight might not be much of an issue. For mobile uses like camping or worksites, however, you’re going to want something you can move without too much strain.

    There are also a number of physical features for transportation that are common but not universal, like wheels or a lift hook bar to hook onto a crane. You may also find special safety features, such as CO2 safety shutoffs, over-speed shutoffs, or high-temperature alarms. For better or worse, none of these features are ubiquitous enough to be “must-have” features across the board, but you should absolutely look for generators with the specific features that feel important to you.

    FAQs

    Q: Are dual-fuel generators worth it?

    While dual-fuel generators tend to be slightly more expensive than traditional generators, they are more fuel-efficient, which lowers costs in the long run. They’re also significantly quieter when running on propane rather than gas, which is great if you’ll plan to keep it within earshot.

    Dual-fuel generators are also extremely valuable in a situation where fuel isn’t readily available. If you’re preparing for a natural disaster like a hurricane, for example, it’s better to be capable of using whatever fuel you can get your hands on.

    Q: What is the most powerful dual-fuel generator?

    Theoretically, the sky’s the limit in terms of power. In reality, though, the most powerful consumer-grade dual-fuel generators top out at around 12,000W.

    Q: Is it better to run a dual-fuel generator on gas or propane?

    Gas produces more power but the generator runs more quietly while using propane and it’s less damaging to the environment. Having a dual-fuel generator means you get to choose, or at least have access to both options.

    Q: How long will a dual-fuel generator run on propane?

    That depends entirely on the size of your propane tank, the generator’s engine, and the amount of power it’s generating. For example, our “best overall” pick can run for about seven hours at 25% power output capacity using a typical 20-pound propane tank.

    Q: What is the difference between an inverter and a generator?

    A generator produces the electricity, while a power inverter stores and reconverts the energy for use. Virtually all consumer-grade generators have inverters integrated into them.

    Q: Who makes the quietest dual-fuel generator?

    The quietest dual-fuel generator you’re going to find produces around 50 dB. At 52 dB, our “best portable” pick, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF, is about as quiet as they come.

    Final thoughts on the best dual-fuel generators

    A dual-fuel generator can really be an asset when you’re camping or when prepping for an emergency. That said, it is a major investment, so make sure you’re buying the right size generator for whatever you’re doing. To power a whole house, bigger is obviously better. But for powering an RV or a casual blackout backup, you might be better off with something more portable. Also, consider the possibility that a more environmentally friendly power solution, like a solar generator, might be able to give you the power you need with a smaller carbon footprint.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best dual-fuel generators of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    PopSci readers can get 33% off the BioLite FirePit+ with this exclusive deal https://www.popsci.com/gear/biolite-firepit-plus-deal/ Mon, 17 Apr 2023 16:25:46 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=534549
    Biolite FirePit+ with a fire in it and someone is poking the fire with a stick.
    Few pleasures in life can match the simple satisfaction that comes from poking a fire with a stick. BioLite

    A built-in battery and fan system make this one of the simplest and most versatile fire pits available.

    The post PopSci readers can get 33% off the BioLite FirePit+ with this exclusive deal appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Biolite FirePit+ with a fire in it and someone is poking the fire with a stick.
    Few pleasures in life can match the simple satisfaction that comes from poking a fire with a stick. BioLite

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Nothing levels up a home’s outdoor space as effectively as a fire pit. Right now, PopSci readers can save 33% off of BioLite’s FirePit+ by entering the code POPSCI33 at checkout. This deal runs from April 17 – 24, so don’t sleep on it.

    BioLite FirePit+ $199 (Was $299)

    BioLite

    SEE IT

    Most fire pits offer little more than a metal bucket in which you can burn sticks. BioLite’s FirePit+, however, offers tons of extra features to earn that plus in its name. A built-in 12,800 mAh battery powers a series of 51 air jets that pump a precise amount of oxygen into your fire. That makes starting it simpler and allows for a more consistent burn without billowing smoke. The dedicated app allows a smartphone to control the size of the flame via built-in Bluetooth connectivity. The battery can last up to 30 hours before you’ll need to pop it off and attach it to a USB cable to charge.

    All that technology is nice, but the fire is the real star—and the FirePit+ provides an excellent view of it. The long side of the pit employs an enamel-coated mesh material that lets you see the whole fire, not just the flames that creep out over the top edge. This design also helps heat radiate outward to provide extra warmth on crisp nights.

    Biolite FirePit+ with the included grill grate and a pan cooking eggs and bacon
    Don’t try this on a generic fire pit from a big box store. BioLite

    In addition to its fire pit duties, the BioLite can quickly and easily convert into a charcoal cooker. Chuck some charcoal into the burn chamber and add the included cooking grate to turn it into a full-fledged wood-and-charcoal grill. No more dangling your hot dogs over the open flame on an old stick.

    It’s a perfect blend of simplicity and sophistication that allows you and your friends to gather around the fire and tell stories or quietly watch TikTok on your respective phones in the great outdoors. And don’t forget to enter the code POPSCI33 at checkout to get it for its cheapest price ever.

    The post PopSci readers can get 33% off the BioLite FirePit+ with this exclusive deal appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Beautify your backyard with up to 47% off Greenworks power tools on Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/greenworks-power-tool-amazon-sale/ Wed, 12 Apr 2023 18:37:54 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=533637
    Two Greenworks push lawnmowers on a grass background
    Amanda Reed

    Grass and flowers are growing after a frosty winter hybernation, but this Greenworks deal on Amazon is in superbloom.

    The post Beautify your backyard with up to 47% off Greenworks power tools on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Two Greenworks push lawnmowers on a grass background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    April showers bring May flowers and, judging by the weather, April has certainly lived up to its wet reputation. That means yard work will abound this spring and you will need the right tools for the job. From getting rid of fallen winter leaves or getting around to pressure washing the deck, Greenworks has you covered with up to 47% off power tools on Amazon.

    Greenworks 16-Inch Reel Lawn Mower with Grass Catcher 25052, Black/Green $69.22 (Was $129.99)

    Greenworks

    SEE IT

    We know a good Greenworks deal when we see one. Their discounted snow blowers blew our minds in December, and the company’s 13 Amp 20-Inch Corded Snow Thrower remains our best budget snow blower pick. With all that in mind, we feel confident in the Greenworks 16-Inch Reel Lawn Mower with Grass Catcher, which is 47% off on Amazon. A 16-inch cutting path allows you to cover a larger area faster, and a built-in bag catches the grass you cut down. You can even use the mower to mulch your garden. The 10-inch front wheels and two-inch rear rollers make it easy to traverse thick grass and uneven ground, and it doesn’t use gas, making it quiet and easy to use. You can adjust the mower height from 1 1/8″-2 1/4″ to get perfectly cut grass that will make the neighbors envious.

    If you have a larger yard, the Greenworks Pro 80V 21″ Brushless Cordless Lawn Mower, with two included 2.0Ah batteries and 30-minute rapid charger, is on sale for $344.49, 31% off its $499 OG price. You get a 21-inch cutting path and a Trubrushless motor that gives you more torque, more power, a quieter operation, a longer runtime, and a longer motor life.

    Grass may regrow when you cut it, but deals like this don’t always resurface. Take advantage before someone else plucks them up.

    Here are more Greenworks deals that will be quick to grow on you:

    The post Beautify your backyard with up to 47% off Greenworks power tools on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Solo Stove makes our favorite fire pits and you can save up to $350 on one right now https://www.popsci.com/gear/solo-stove-fire-pit-deal-spring/ Fri, 07 Apr 2023 12:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=532482
    A bunch of Solo Stoves on a plain background. Some are upside down.
    Stan Horaczek

    Just imagine yourself sitting by a roaring fire this spring with a bunch of money left over for iced tea.

    The post Solo Stove makes our favorite fire pits and you can save up to $350 on one right now appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A bunch of Solo Stoves on a plain background. Some are upside down.
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    I love sitting by the fire, but I’m woefully untalented when it comes to getting one going. That’s a big part of what made me love the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 when I reviewed it last year. Even my lackluster incendiary skills had no issue turning tinder into a warming blaze. Know what else warms my heart? The fact that you can experience this same joy for less because Solo Stove is offering up to $350 off its fire pits across the entire line.

    Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 $259 (Was $399)

    Stan Horaczek

    SEE IT

    At 19.5 inches wide, this stainless steel pit will fit on just about any patio, even one on the skimpy side. But, despite its relatively compact nature, I had no problem loading it up with stock firewood I picked up from the gas station on the way home.

    Like all the Solo Stove fire pits, the Bonfire 2.0 relies on a set of meticulously cut holes that pull air through the burn chamber in such a way that it creates an almost totally smoke-free burn. That means no more having to get up and switch spots every time the wind changes, and you get a face full of smoke.

    It’s easy to start, weighs just 23.5 pounds, and even comes with a free carrying case. Perhaps the best feature, though, comes in the form of the removable ash pan. Let your fire burn down, then simply pull out the pan and ditch what’s left over once it’s cool. Just make sure you don’t drop a s’more in there and get marshmallow all over the shiny stainless surface.

    Burn through wood, not money with these Solo Stove fire pit deals

    While the Bonfire 2.0 represents an excellent middle ground that will suit most people, other sizes exist. Here’s a list of other on-sale Solo Stove fire pits in ascending size order. If you have the room, get the big one. Bigger is better. Everybody knows that.

    • Solo Stove Mesa $79 (Was $119): This table-top fire pit is just 5.1 inches across and works great as a centerpiece.
    • Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 $199 (Was $299): At 15 inches in diameter, this is the smallest full-sized Solo Stove fire pit.
    • Solo Stove Yukon 2.0 $459 (Was $749): Gather all your pals around this 27-inch pit and roast a whole pack of weenies at once.
    • Solo Stove Yukon 1.0 $399 (Was $749): This pit also measures 27 inches across, but it lacks the easy cleaning features of the 2.0. Still, it’s big and offers a huge discount if you don’t mind doing a little extra maintenance.

    The post Solo Stove makes our favorite fire pits and you can save up to $350 on one right now appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best twinkle lights of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-twinkle-lights/ Thu, 08 Jul 2021 18:19:58 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=378005
    A lineup of the best twinkle lights on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    Add instant ambiance and mood to any setting with these twinkle lights.

    The post The best twinkle lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of the best twinkle lights on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best traditional Yuletime, the best twinkle lights for holidays Yuletime Clear String Lights
    SEE IT

    Classic Christmas charm doesn’t have to only come around the holidays. These durable and bright lights are great for year-round decorating in both indoor and outdoor spaces.

    Best battery-powered Lightning Ever, the best twinkle lights that are battery operated Lighting Ever Globe String Lights
    SEE IT

    Add a customizable and warm light to your environment, no plug or extension cord needed.

    Best heavy duty Brightech, the best heavy duty twinkle lights Brightech Ambience Pro Outdoor String Lights
    SEE IT

    Twinkle lights are notoriously flimsy, but this pick will withstand the test of time in any condition—including weathered outdoor environments.

    If you’re looking to light up a tree, a patio, a garden, or the trim in your home in a unique way, there’s no better option than twinkle lights. Also known as fairy lights, Christmas lights, and hanging lights, these long strands of bulbs or LED lights add a subtle glow to rooms and provide moody accent lighting. Twinkle lights come with vastly different designs, so it can be tough to make the right choice without extensive research. We’ve selected the best twinkle lights and outlined all the key considerations so you can get straight to decorating.

    How we chose the best twinkle lights

    In case overhead lighting is your enemy, or you’re looking for some LED lights for your TV, fun lights can make your home look more inviting. In order to find the bright lights from the dull ones, we looked at reviews, recommendations, hung potential candidates in and out of our homes, and conducted heavy research.

    The best twinkle lights: Reviews & Recommendations

    Decor can be expensive, but adding twinkle lights is a fun way to brighten up your home without breaking the bank. Once you decide how you want to use them, there are lots of options to fulfill your needs.

    Best traditional: Yuletime Clear String Lights

    Specs

    • Feet per string: 66 feet
    • Bulb count: 200
    • Color options: 13
    • UL certified?: Yes

    Pros

    • UL-certified
    • low heat construction
    • Waterproof

    Cons

    • Colors darker in person

    These UL-certified lights come with male and female plugs for a long-distance extension on large objects and structures. Its durable 22 AWG wire features a pure copper core and low-heat construction as well as a green waterproof outer shield, making this a perfect fit for decorating greenery and foliage. Because of its traditional design, paired with its ability to easily daisy-chain, this set of lights is a cost-effective choice for adding timeless cheer and ambiance to any space.

    Best solar: Brizled Solar String Lights

    Specs

    • Feet per string: 39.37 feet
    • Bulb count: 120
    • Color options: 4
    • UL certified?: No

    Pros

    • Solar panels included
    • Waterproof and durable
    • Easy to affix

    Cons

    • Not UL certified

    This set of solar lights includes two solar panels and just under 80 feet of lights. The LEDs are fixed to a length of copper wire, which can be maneuvered around trees to add warm light to your yard. The solar panels attach to the lights and make it easy to add sparkle without any extension cords. All of the parts in this set are durable and waterproof, too, so feel free to go crazy with them on your patio, in your pool area, or in any other relatively exposed outdoor space.

    Best battery-powered: Lighting Ever Globe String Lights

    Specs

    • Feet per string: 16.4 feet
    • Bulb count: 50
    • Color options: N/A
    • UL certified?: No

    Pros

    • Battery-operated for ease of use
    • Adjustable brightness
    • Timer

    Cons

    • Shorter compared to other options on our list

    Not unlike our pick for solar twinkle lights, these battery-powered lights are perfect for subtle placement in hard-to-reach areas. Not only are these great for indoor spaces like bookshelves and cabinetry, but they’re also ideal for portable applications such as camper vans or tent lighting. This length of 50 LED globe lights is five meters long and is powered by three AA batteries. The unit also features adjustable brightness, a remote control, and a built-in timer that automatically turns on for six hours daily.

    Best smart: Twinkly Multicolor LED String Lights

    Specs

    • Feet per string: 157.5 feet
    • Bulb count: 600
    • Color options: N/A
    • UL certified?: No

    Pros

    • Plenty of length to work with
    • Smart home assistant-compatible
    • Easy to use

    Cons

    • Expensive

    These lights from the aptly-named brand Twinkly allow you to customize and automate your settings via the free app. Plus, they’re compatible with most popular smart home assistants like Alexa and Google Assistant. You can integrate them with your existing smart lights to create whole scenes that are remote or voice-controlled. This design uses cutting-edge LEDs with diffused lenses to provide brighter with a high level of granular control. If customization and ease of use are of concern to you, these are the twinkle lights to choose from. Got an entire wall that needs

    Best heavy-duty: Brightech Ambience Pro Outdoor String Lights

    Specs

    • Feet: 48 feet
    • Bulb count: 15
    • Color options: One
    • UL certified?: Core is UL listed

    Pros

    • Waterproof
    • Durable
    • Run cool and use little power

    Cons

    • Lights more spaced out compared to other options on our list

    If you’re looking for bright mood lighting for an outdoor area like a patio, check out these heavy-duty twinkle lights. They feature two-watt LED Edison bulbs spaced three feet apart, mounted on a sturdy industrial-grade waterproof cable. String together up to eight strands for large-scale lighting in dining areas and other large spaces. These LEDs run cool, use little power, and last relatively long, which makes them a fantastic long-term decorating option.

    Best budget: Twinkle Star LED String Lights

    Twinkle Star

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Feet per string: 33-99 feet
    • Bulb count: 1,000 max
    • Color options: 10
    • UL certified?: Yes

    Pros

    • Lots of color and light function options
    • UL certified
    • Can get 99 feet of lights for less than $20

    Cons

    • Reviews mention colors aren’t as true to product photos

    These warm string lights can be used indoors and out, and come in multiple lengths. Plus, there are eight light functions to choose from: Combination, Waves, Sequential, Slow Glow, Chasing/Flash, Slow fade, Twinkle/Flash, and Steady On). With 10 available color options, you get plenty of room to let your imagination run wild. Even better, they’re UL certified, meaning they’ve been tested for safety, meaning the backyard romantic moment you’ve painstakingly planned won’t go up in flames—literally. Plus, you can’t beat the price.

    What to consider when shopping for the best twinkle lights

    Finding the best twinkle lights for your space depends on the size of the environment you want to light. Certain designs of twinkle lights are better suited for accenting objects, while others can create mood lighting over large areas. Here are a few important questions to consider when shopping for the best lights for your home decor needs.

    Will you use them for ambiance?

    Longer lengths of twinkle lights are best for creating ambiance over bigger areas and are perfect for stretching across ceilings and underpasses to add mood lighting from above. Illuminating your space in this manner is a great alternative to spotlighting, which is often brighter and can create asymmetry and hard shadows in space. If you’re going this route, opt for lower-wattage lights in a high quantity so you can max out the vibe in every part of your space without making it so bright as to ruin the mood. If you want something with even more customization and colors, you can also look at our favorite LED strip lights, which offer a full RGB spectrum of ambient lighting.

    Do you need outdoor features like waterproofing?

    Twinkle lights have a reputation for falling short when it comes to durability, but that’s because people stretch them and place them outside, subjecting them to the elements. Choose a style that is specifically designed with waterproof features if you want year-round lighting in an outdoor space. The savings in maintenance and time alone more than make up for any difference in price.

    Do you want smart home integration or phone control?

    Smart home compatibility and remote control capability are features that were practically made for twinkle-light integration since this type of lighting is usually either hard to reach or in a strategically placed location. Pick lights that allow you to control them with an app, so you can integrate them with your existing home automation settings. This allows you to make scheduled or on-the-fly adjustments to your home’s ambiance with very little effort.

    Will you need battery-powered or solar-powered functionality?

    Twinkle lights consume quite a bit of power, and because they’re accent lights, they’re often in tucked-away spots where there isn’t access to electricity. For these cases, consider twinkle lights that operate with a battery pack, rechargeable batteries, or a solar panel to ensure that your out-of-reach areas never have to go without light.

    Are you using them for traditional tree lighting or exterior decoration?

    Sometimes, you only need a bunch of basic twinkle lights to serve traditional uses like tree decorating. In these cases, buying the simplest design of light strings is the more cost-effective to get the job done quickly. These designs are best suited for temporary installations you won’t keep up with all year.

    FAQs

    Q: How much do twinkle lights cost?

    Depending on features and how many lights you’re getting, twinkle lights can cost between $13-$200.

    Q: How long do twinkle lights last?

    While traditional twinkle lights that use incandescent bulbs may require maintenance and bulb replacement as often as twice a year, some types of LEDs can last upwards of 50,000 hours. If you’re looking for longevity, you can’t do much better than lights that use LEDs.

    Q: Do twinkle lights attract bugs?

    Light in the ultraviolet spectrum attracts bugs, and incandescent twinkle lights give off just as much of this light as do regular incandescent bulbs. LEDs, however, give off significantly less ultraviolet light. If you’re aiming to discourage the attention of flying insects and other creatures, choose a set of LED lights.

    Q: Are twinkle lights safe?

    Twinkle lights are usually very safe thanks to the spacing of the bulbs, which diminishes the likelihood of heat buildup. Some models even include inline fuses to prevent bulb blowouts. To ensure your lights operate safely, don’t allow the bulbs to touch, and don’t use them in tight areas.

    Final thoughts on the best twinkle lights

    Twinkle lights are a novel way to accent your decor and add soft ambient light to indoor and outdoor spaces. Battery- and solar-powered designs are ideal for lighting hard-to-reach areas, while waterproof designs are essential for year-round outdoor use. Twinkle lights ensure the environment stays adequately lit without drawing attention to the lighting itself. This makes them an excellent choice for activities like dining and entertaining.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best twinkle lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Power your home with 30% off a Westinghouse backup generator at Amazon today https://www.popsci.com/gear/storm-generator-amazon-deal/ Tue, 04 Apr 2023 17:16:43 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=525297
    A blue Westinghouse inverter generator on a pink and green background
    Amanda Reed

    From your WiFi to your microwave, this generator can keep you powered up while the rest of the neighborhood stays in darkness.

    The post Power your home with 30% off a Westinghouse backup generator at Amazon today appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A blue Westinghouse inverter generator on a pink and green background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    April showers bring May flowers but also severe weather and fallen trees that can take out power lines. Thankfully, you can get a generator lickety-split on Amazon—and this inverter generator from Westinghouse is 30% off. That means its price drops down from $1,049 to $765, and you stay up and running even if the power drops out.

    Westinghouse 4500 Peak Watt Super Quiet Portable Inverter Generator $765 (Was $1,049)

    Westinghouse

    SEE IT

    We love the Westinghouse iGen4500DF—our best portable dual-fuel generator (and it’s on sale)! So when it comes to recommendations for the best inverter generator, we feel comfortable supporting the same brand and suggesting the Westinghouse 4500 Peak Watt Super Quiet Portable Inverter Generator. It’s portable and super quiet—just like its name suggests—and a push-button remote start makes start-up a breeze. You can even start and stop the generator from up to 260 feet away. An LED data center lets you see run time, fuel level, and power output without feeling like you’re deciphering runes.

    EPA- and CARB-compliance gives you peace of mind that it’s better for the environment despite running on gas. If you need more power, fear not: this generator is parallel capable, meaning you can use an existing Westinghouse inverter generator and a parallel cord to bring even more juice to your home.

    You should always follow generator safety tips, but there’s a version with a CO sensor in case you want all your safety bases covered. You can also ditch gas and propane all together and stick with a solar generator. The Bluetti AC200 Max—our favorite solar generator for off-grid living—is on sale for $1,959, down from its $2,099 OG price, and there’s a $100 coupon you can click to bring this sale price down to $1,859.

    The best time to buy a generator is well before you need it. That’s especially true if you can get a great deal on one.

    Here are other on-sale tools that will help you with post-storm cleanup:

    The post Power your home with 30% off a Westinghouse backup generator at Amazon today appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best bike helmets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-bike-helmets/ Sat, 14 Aug 2021 20:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=388677
    Hit the road with the best bike helmets.
    Coen van de Broek, Unsplash

    Ride safely and in style while wearing the best bike helmets.

    The post The best bike helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Hit the road with the best bike helmets.
    Coen van de Broek, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best road-bike helmet The Giro Aether Spherical Adult Road-Bike Helmet is the best bike helmet. Giro Aether Spherical Adult Road-Bike Helmet
    SEE IT

    This lightweight, comfortable helmet is safety-certified.

    Best kids’ bike helmet The Giro Scamp is the best bike helmet for kids. Giro Scamp
    SEE IT

    Dependable and easy to use right out of the box.

    Best budget bike helmet The Giro Register MIPS is the best bike helmet on a budget. Giro Register MIPS
    SEE IT

    Affordable, comfortable, and safety-certified.

    More than just a form of exercise, biking is a lifestyle. Whether for pleasure, fitness, commuting or errands, bike riding is a great, sustainable way to get around. As more cities open up streets and widen bike lanes, biking culture has skyrocketed.  Plus, choosing to bike helps to cut down on carbon emissions and assists in saving the environment. With the increase in biking, you do need to be sure you are following local laws and taking precautions to keep yourself safe. According to a Cleveland Clinic report, wearing a bike helmet reduces the risk of head injuries by 85 percent. So it’s simply the right play, no matter who you are and especially if you have kids. We’ve rounded up some of the best bike helmets for adults and kids’ to keep you and yours riding with safety, in comfort and style.

    The best bike helmets: Reviews & Recommendations

    Best road: Giro Aether Spherical Adult Road-Bike Helmet

    Giro

    SEE IT

    The Giro Aether Spherical Adult Road-Bike Helmet is the best road-bike helmet. It’s a lightweight, comfortable road helmet with wind tunnel vents and internal channeling. Dual-density EPS foam liners with MIPS protection are integrated for added comfort and safety.

    Best mountain: Smith Optics Forefront 2 MIPS

    Smith

    SEE IT

    The Smith Optics Forefront 2 MIPS is a full-coverage helmet that offers MIPS protection with eyewear/goggle integration. AirEvac channels help ventilate without fogging up eyewear.

    Best kids: Giro Scamp

    Giro

    SEE IT

    A lightweight helmet with a dial-adjust system and optional MIPS technology, the Scamp is easy to fit and use right out of the box. It doesn’t boast exotic designs or too many bells and whistles, but it’s a solid option that delivers value and protection at a great price.

    Best budget: Giro Register MIPS

    Giro

    SEE IT

    The Giro Register MIPS helmet offers a MIPS design that helps reduce the risk of concussion. With a lighter weight design and plenty of ventilation, this helmet should be comfortable to wear for longer days on your bike.

    Things to consider when searching for the best bike helmet

    There are a few important considerations to make before shopping for cycling helmets. The best bike helmet will be the one that works for your lifestyle. There are subtle differences between road bike helmets, mountain bike helmets, dirt bike helmets, and those used for leisurely rides. With helmets ranging in price from around $50 to $300, it’s important to understand what features you need and want. 

    First and foremost, you must consider fit. In order for a helmet to perform, it needs to fit securely. Helmets should fit over the head snuggly and sit level on the head. The chin straps should be snug, allowing only enough room for one finger. You can measure the circumference of your head with a soft tape measure and then check with the bike-helmet manufacturer for guidance on the correct size helmet to order. It’s important not to assume you are the same size universally, as various brands size their helmets differently.

    All the top brands offering reputable helmets will provide data on their safety standards and testing. The U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) provides certification for helmets that pass the federal safety standard. In addition, independent safety testing is provided through the Snell Foundation, and helmets will be listed as Snell-certified. 

    Another safety feature to consider is a helmet equipped with MIPS (Multi-Directional Impact Protection System). This design incorporates a special liner that fits against the head. MIPS offers added protection from the most common type of ground crashes, which involve impact from an angle. 

    Related: Thinking of ditching your car? Check out the top 10 cities for biking in the world.

    Looking for the best bike helmet for your commute to work?

    When you use your bike for commuting, you’re typically in more controlled surroundings, like paved roads (ideally in designated bike lanes). Road-biking offers a few unique characteristics that make sense to address with the helmet designed for these situations. The heat-island effect (urban areas that experience higher temperatures) plays a role here, so look for helmets that offer superior ventilation—no one wants to show up to the office drenched in sweat.

    Another feature to look for in road helmets is a lightweight construction. A lighter helmet is going to be the most comfortable. Keep in mind, though, that sometimes high-quality, lighter-weight materials can add to the cost. But comfort is worth it, especially when you use a helmet frequently. 

    Finally, all the best road helmets must pass safety standards and be fully certified. Additional features to consider for road helmets are designs that address aerodynamics (get to work faster!), as well as the add-on feature of MIPS.

    Need the best bike helmet for hitting the trails off road?

    Trail riding, mountain biking, or off-road biking all require a few extra features that aren’t found on all bike helmets. When you are riding in nature on uneven terrain, you are facing dappled light from tree coverage, unpredictable surfaces like gravel, fallen branches, and mud, and the possibility of falling onto sharp objects. One could argue that road biking seems more dangerous because of the threat of high-speed impact or car crashes, but the obstacles encountered when mountain biking can be just as or potentially even more dangerous simply due to unpredictability. For that reason alone, mountain biking demands the best helmets designed with nature in mind.

    The biggest noticeable difference you will find is that helmets for mountain bikes are designed with a visor. The visor is essential on mountain bike helmets because it protects you from a myriad of obstacles. First, it offers shielding from sunlight and rain. Second, it provides added protection from unexpected low-lying branches. Seeing clearly is a priority for mountain biking. 

    Mountain bike helmets require even more vents than road helmets because the overall ride is slower, which means less airflow to keep you cool. You will find that mountain bike helmets are built up with extra padding to protect from sharp object impacts and falls over the handlebar. While road riders strive for speed and seek aerodynamic designs, mountain bike helmets eschew sleekness for extra padding. Finally, for some downhill-style mountain biking, you will find helmets with goggle integration or ones designed with full face shields.

    Looking for helmets for kids?

    Each year, an average of 26,000 children are admitted into emergency rooms for brain injuries related to bicycle riding. These are scary numbers, and they should drive home how important bike helmets are. 

    The use of bike helmets has been shown to reduce the risk of head injury by at least 45 percent. They can reduce brain injury by 33 percent, facial injury by 27 percent, and fatal injury by 29 percent. In California, there are laws stating that anyone under the age of 18 must wear a helmet while riding a bike, skateboard, or scooter and parents may be fined if they don’t. 

    Finding a helmet that fits properly is just as important as wearing a helmet in the first place. An ill-fitting helmet won’t do much to protect your child, so it’s vital to know what to look for. You should always have your child try a helmet on, as different manufacturers may size their helmets differently. Beyond that, check for certification from the CPSC, and get a helmet that fits your child at that moment. These are not the kinds of items that you want them to “grow into.” The helmet should fit snug all around their head. It shouldn’t move side to side or front to back;  it should sit level and low. There should be room for only one or two finger-widths above the eyebrows.

    What to look for if you need a bike helmet for cold weather

    Not unlike surfing, bike riding is usually considered a warm-weather activity. It’s something to get you out and about when the sun is shining and the skies are blue. But among the truly dedicated and hardcore, there exists bike gear that allows you to pursue your passion all year round, regardless of weather conditions. 

    Anyone who has tried to strap a stubborn helmet over a toque on a frigid day can appreciate the need for a cold-weather helmet. They will ensure that you don’t have to pick protection over comfort or vice versa when heading out into the wild. And while it might be tempting to simply, say, use a snowboarding helmet to pull double duty, it’s wiser to invest in a separate cold-weather bicycle helmet. Snowboarding helmets are typically too bulky and don’t provide enough ventilation for your head. Their extra padding and size can feel unwieldy when you’re biking. The ideal cold-weather bike helmet would provide some kind of lining, with ear flaps and vents that can be opened or closed while riding. They are usually much lighter weight, as well.

    How can I find a safe helmet on a budget?

    Safety is paramount when selecting a bicycle helmet. The best budget bicycle helmet will not skimp on safety ratings and testing standards. While you can find bicycle helmets online for under $20, we recommend avoiding the cheapest models and opting instead for a highly rated budget model. With an average price range between $20 and $300, you can find a safer budget helmet for between $50  to $100.

    FAQs

    Q: What should I look for when buying a bike helmet?

    The best bike helmets offer impact absorption, a sturdy retention system, and a comfortable, snug fit. Helmets that are designed with MIPS are important in keeping you safe in case of an accident. Lighter-weight helmets with ventilation systems make wearing your helmet a more comfortable and pleasant experience,  especially for long rides. Most importantly, be sure the helmet you choose fits properly in order to receive all the safety benefits.

    Q: Are cheap helmets safe?

    When shopping for a bike helmet on a budget, you might be wondering if cheap bike helmets offer the same protection as high-end models. The good news is less-expensive bike helmets can be safe. That said, it’s important to research whether the bike helmet comes with a U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission label. Safety standard testing will help you understand the level of protection provided. Keep in mind that very inexpensive or “cheap” helmets can be fakes and offer poor levels of protection. To avoid this possible issue, always buy bike helmets from reputable brands that guarantee safety standards. Expensive helmets can be more costly because they use lighter-weight materials and offer greater ventilation, which is more for comfort than safety.

    Q: Are mountain bike helmets safer?

    Mountain bike helmets are often safer than helmets designed for the road by virtue of having more padding. These helmets are designed with thicker materials and have more protection at the base of the skull and top of the neck area to protect bikers from uneven, rocky terrain. The biggest differences between the two types are that road helmets usually don’t have visors, are lighter in weight, and provide greater ventilation to account for the added heat from asphalt. If you are looking for one helmet for both mountain biking and road biking, it would be a safer bet to buy a mountain bike helmet. However, if you are mostly riding casually on the road, it might be most comfortable to purchase a lighter-weight road helmet with lots of ventilation.

    Related: Shopping for a new bike? Here’s how to choose whether a cheap or expensive bicycle is best for you.

    The final work on the best bike helmets

    There’s really no two ways about it—bike helmets are a necessity no matter your age, skill level, or bike-related activity of choice. Investing in comfortable protection just makes sense, and you have a broad range of options when it comes to price, design, and intended usage. Being aware of how you ride, where you ride, and the weather conditions around where you live will all help you narrow down your choices to find the right fit for you and your family of bike riders. Being as safe as you are comfortable is a very achievable (and worthwhile) goal.

    The post The best bike helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best party speakers in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-party-speakers/ Tue, 28 Mar 2023 21:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=522656
    The best party speakers sliced header
    Tony Ware

    Bring the funk, noise, and everything in between with party speakers that aren't a cheap trick (but are made to play some).

    The post The best party speakers in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best party speakers sliced header
    Tony Ware

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best Overall Boombox 3 JBL speaker comparison portable party speaker in black JBL Boombox 3
    SEE IT

    JBL’s Boombox 3 hits the sweet spot between portability, battery life, additional features, and cost.

    Best With Lights JBL PartyBox 110 Bluetooth party speaker with lights product image JBL PartyBox 110
    SEE IT

    JBL’s PartyBox 110 is a big, bass-thumping speaker with lights that impress as much as its sound.

    Best Budget: Tribit XSound Mega budget Bluetooth party speaker product image Tribit XSound Mega
    SEE IT

    The Tribit XSound Mega shares many of the features as some other picks but at a way lower cost.

    Party speakers may be the most misunderstood mainstream category in the audio world. Contrary to popular belief, party speakers aren’t limited to bass-heavy Bluetooth models. Of course, there’s nothing wrong with bassy Bluetooth speakers. Don’t worry, we’re going to recommend you some how-low-can-you-go options. However, a party speaker, to us at least, can be an all-in-one PA system, a practice amp that doubles as a speaker, a speaker that lights up the room just with dance music or that adds in equally kinetic LEDs. The best party speakers can be a concert for one or for everyone, and they can be found in selections for every type of celebration.

    How we chose the best party speakers

    This speaker category is extremely broad, so we took a fairly granular approach when choosing our recommendations. A mix of hands-on testing and research lead us to a list of speakers that range from pint-sized to powerful, covering common and niche needs. Special attention was paid to bass performance, connectivity options, durability, expandability, and portability. The right party speaker for you will depend on whether you’re throwing backyard cookouts or basement ragers, are looking for something that sits on a desk or a deck, need something to provide a solo gaming soundtrack or that might require guests to wear earplugs. We don’t judge. Well, we do judge some things, like audio quality and connectivity. But parties aren’t the time for critical listening, so what we recommend by the pool or for a DJ is very different than what we’d look for in our best powered or bookshelf speakers for music lovers. We’ve also been mindful of how much these speakers cost, with recommendations ranging from under $60 to $530.

    The best party speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

    We’ve cut through the noise to present speakers to suit everybody’s needs. You saw our overall methodology above and can find more information on our key considerations later in this story. Now, let’s get the party started.

    Best overall: JBL Boombox 3

    Tony Ware

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 8.6 inches
    • Power source: Battery power (up to 24 hours)
    • Expandable: Yes
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
    • IP rating: IP67

    Pros

    • Massive bass driver
    • Can be connected with up to 99 other JBL speakers
    • Excellent battery life

    Cons

    • Big and heavy for a portable speaker

    JBL’s Boombox 3 pushes the limits of what you can expect from a portable Bluetooth speaker. The subwoofer in its three-way speaker configuration is larger than the ones you’ll find on some desktop speakers or compact monitors, so you should expect loud, thunderous sound. You won’t just hear the drop on EDM tracks, you’ll literally feel it radiate down to 40Hz if the speaker’s 160 watts are cranked all the way up. In fact, the only way you’ll get a louder, bigger bass around the same size is by picking up something like JBL’s PartyBox 110, which we’ll introduce in more detail below.

    The Boombox 3’s large size comes with one big pro—beyond great sound, of course—and a necessary con. In the plus column, this speaker can last up to 24 hours on a single charge, easily enough time to get you through a proper rager. JBL says the amount of battery life you’ll get ultimately depends on your listening volume, which is true, but the Boombox 3 should still last all night (literally) even when it’s being maxed out. That said, a big battery and large drivers contribute to this speaker’s 22-inch width and nearly 15-pound weight. This speaker is portable, but it’ll need someone willing to lug it around—luckily, it’s equipped with a sturdy molded handle.

    JBL has gotten around this by designing the Boombox 3 with support for its PartyBoost feature, which allows you to link it with up to 99 other JBL speakers. Several JBL speakers support this feature, so you could use the Boombox 3 as your main party speaker, then spread a couple of smaller models around the periphery of your party space to blanket more ground (for example, you could put several lava-lamp-like JBL Pulse 5 speakers around to visualize the vibe). We can’t think of a room—or entire floor, frankly—that this speaker wouldn’t blanket in loud sound on its own, however.

    If your parties take place outdoors, the JBL Boombox 3 is a great choice thanks to its IP67 rating (for a detailed explanation of IP, check out our considerations at the bottom of this feature). This Boombox 3 can get splashed, rained on, spilled on, or even dunked underneath the water for several minutes without skipping a beat. And it can stand up to dust or sand. Durability is definitely not an issue. The speaker shown above has taken a licking and kept on kicking … or maybe that’s taken a kicking and kept on ticking, as it got hit by a soccer ball while providing the soundtrack to a high-intensity practice on the field pictured. If its size and weight (and $449 price) don’t intimidate you, the JBL Boombox 3’s bass performance, battery life, and durability are a pretty unbeatable combination.

    Best portable: Sony SRS-XG300

    Brandt Ranj

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 2.7 inches (2x)
    • Power source: Battery (up to 25 hours)
    • Expandable: Yes
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
    • IP rating: IP67

    Pros

    • Mega Bass button for even more low end
    • Exceptional audio quality
    • Best battery life for a portable party speaker

    Cons

    • Very few devices can take full advantage of this speaker’s audio potential

    Sony has been making party speakers for half a decade, but the SRS-XG300 is the first time it seems to take this category very seriously. It’s completely overhauled the look of its party speakers, with a mesh covering that screams sophistication, with LED rings that surround its pair of 2.7-inch bass drivers with a subtle glow rather than a garish one. And the unobtrusive handle conveniently slides in and out of the top, an aesthetically pleasing marriage of form and function. Put simply, the SRS-XG300 speaker looks sophisticated during the day but a little more fun at night. The LEDs can be turned off using Sony’s app or a button on the backside of this party speaker so you can ignore them entirely.

    That may be a good idea if you plan on stretching the SRS-XG300’s battery to its 25-hour maximum. Sony is so confident in this portable Bluetooth speaker’s battery capacity that it built a USB-A port into it, so it doubles as a power bank. In our tests, this speaker could put out a tremendous amount of bass, but it never distorted, even at high volumes. If you want a little more oomph, the speaker’s Mega Bass button boosts low-end frequencies, but never to the point that the midrange and treble get completely drowned out. If your playlist is full of bass-heavy music, turning on this setting to see how you like it won’t hurt.

    The SRS-XG300 supports a Sony feature called Party Connect, which allows you to pair up to 100 speakers to play music simultaneously. This was one of our favorite features of JBL’s Boombox 3, and it remains impressive here. We can’t see any reason you’d need more than one of these speakers to fuel your beach, backyard, or basement party, but it’s nice to have the option.

    You can connect any smartphone, tablet, or computer to the SRS-XG300 wirelessly over Bluetooth, but to get the most out of it, you’ll need a device that supports the LDAC codec, which allows you to stream music at a very high—nearly CD quality—bitrate. This isn’t necessarily important at a party unless you host audiophiles exclusively. Still, it’s worth pointing out since Sony’s speaker is one of the few Bluetooth models that support this feature. But it’s also worth pointing out that only select digital audio players and smartphones support this protocol (nothing Apple, which is why we lean toward this being the best portable Bluetooth speaker for Android users). You can use any Bluetooth-enabled device to connect via more traditional lossy codecs, and you also have the option to connect a device using a 3.5mm cable, thanks to its AUX input.

    If the most important part of your party is taking top-notch tunes conveniently from one place to another without hitting pause, Sony’s SRS-XG300 is the clear choice.

    Best with lights: JBL PartyBox 110

    Markkus Rovito

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 5.25-inches (2x)
    • Power source: Battery (up to 12 hours)
    • Expandable: Yes
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, AUX in, 1/4-inch inputs (2x)
    • IP rating: IPX4

    Pros

    • Massive
    • Doubles as a dual-input PA system
    • Can be used portably in a pinch

    Cons

    • Overkill in most cases

    There’s no getting around the fact that the JBL PartyBox 110 is a big party speaker, but if you have enough space and need to entertain a large crew with live music or a pre-made mix, it’s the ideal choice. You can read more about this large speaker in our full review, but it’s ultimately a treat for both the eyes and ears. The PartyBox 110 occupies an interesting place in JBL’s party speaker lineup, sitting between our approved entry-level PartyBox, the Encore Essential, and the much larger PartyBox 1000 (a behemoth of a speaker we’ve auditioned and enjoyed). It’s also much more than a typical Bluetooth speaker, party-friendly or otherwise.

    The big LEDs surrounding the PartyBox 110’s pair of bass drivers turn the front of this speaker into a big figure eight. These lights can be programmed to a handful of patterns—including synced to the beat—or turned off entirely to preserve battery life. Yes, despite the amount of air it’s pushing and the show it bestows, the PartyBox 110 can run for up to 12 hours without being plugged into an outlet. It’s also one of the only speakers in its size class to have an IP4X rating, which means it can be splashed with water without incident.

    It may not support JBL’s PartyBoost, but two of these speakers can be paired together wirelessly. This makes sense when you realize the PartyBox 110 has a pair of 1/4-inch audio inputs designed for a microphone and instrument. Connecting these speakers together will double the number of inputs, giving you greater flexibility when setting up come competitive karaoke.

    If you only plan on using this speaker with prerecorded music, you’ll be treated to loud, room-shaking sound at the highest volume levels. PA-style party speakers are known for their bass performance, but JBL built a Bass Boost button onto the top of the PartyBox 110 to really drive the point home for lovers of lower frequencies. Let’s face it, the PartyBox 110 isn’t necessary for the average cocktail party or even cookout, but having the extra power in your back pocket won’t hurt if it becomes necessary.

    Best for outdoor patio party: Rocksteady Stadium Travel Combo 

    Tony Ware

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 5.1-inches
    • Power source: Battery (Up to 16 hours)
    • Expandable: Yes
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, 2.5mm
    • IP rating: N/A

    Pros

    • Modular assignable-channel speaker system
    • Discrete dedicated subwoofer
    • Unlimited speakers can be connected
    • Portability

    Cons

    • You have to keep track of/charge multiple speakers

    By now, most people are familiar with a 2.1 speaker system in a home theater environment, which indicates Left and Right speakers paired with a dedicated subwoofer to push the lows higher. Now the Rocksteady Stadium Travel Combo lets you take it into the great outdoors. All three touch-controlled speakers connect to one another via a Bluetooth 5.0 mesh network, which means you can place them anywhere you’d like so long as they’re within 100 feet of one another. This will allow you to cover a larger area without turning the volume knob to 11. Pick up four 6-inch-tall multidriver rectangles and turn your patio into a quadraphonic quarter. There’s a mid-bass driver and passive radiator paired with the tweeter in each. Still, for the deepest bass experience, you’ll want to keep the discrete front-firing subwoofer (or subwoofers) near a wall so the sound gets reinforced by reverberations.

    Many party speakers we recommend can be chained to play simultaneously in mono, but Rocksteady designed its hardware exclusively to be immersive—letting you assign each as Left/Right/Dual channel. Because of that, you can pair an unlimited number of speakers in various multidirectional configurations, though hitting this theoretical limit—or lack thereof—probably won’t be necessary. We like the modularity of the Stadium Mode system, but it isn’t waterproof, which can be a problem if your outdoor area has a pool. If that’s the case, a cadre of UE’s WONDERBOOM 3 mini-speakers may be a better pick; these $99 floatable orbs produce surprisingly loud 360-degree sound, can be linked via PartyBoost and, being dustproof, are also one of the best speakers to take with you to the beach.

    The only real downside to getting a multispeaker system is that you’ll need to monitor multiple pieces of audio hardware at all times. Every speaker needs to be charged separately, which can require some juggling if your place doesn’t have too many outlets. Luckily, battery life is rated at 16 hours, and the speakers are USB-C Quick Charge equipped. If that isn’t an issue, we can recommend taking Rocksteady’s Stadium Travel Combo to any outdoor party you’re hosting or attending.

    Best for house party performances: JBL EON ONE Compact Personal PA

    Billy Cadden

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 8-inch woofer
    • Power source: Battery (Up to 12 hours)
    • Expandable: Yes
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, AUX in, 1/4-inch input, mic/line input (2x)
    • IP rating: N/A

    Pros

    • Simple setup
    • Easy-to-use controls
    • Portable
    • On-unit 4-channel mixer with EQ and effects
    • Built-in microphone preamps
    • Phantom power

    Cons

    • Can be too quiet for loud practices
    • Reverb effect is subtle for those looking for washed-out sound

    The JBL EON ONE Compact Personal PA offers musicians and DJs an easy-to-setup audio solution for smaller performance situations. Weighing just under 18 pounds, packing a 12-hour swappable rechargeable battery, the speaker is light enough to carry to and from smaller gigs and fits easily in the trunk or backseat of most cars. 

    The onboard 4-channel mixer offers two XLR/TRS combo jacks, one 1/4-inch guitar input, and a 1/8-inch aux input for dialing in the mix. If you’re using a condenser microphone, the unit also comes equipped with phantom power. The EON ONE Compact Personal PA’s four-channel configuration provides the flexibility to create a balanced mix of guitars, vocals, and backing tracks from the controls on the speaker itself or via the JBL app. Connect your phone via Bluetooth to access Lexicon and dbx-inspired 4-band EQ, reverb, chorus, and delay (with quick-recall presets), plus control the volume or stream music wirelessly. 

    The unit can sit vertically or horizontally and provides a built-in pole mount socket for elevated placements. This flexibility allows the system to thrive in various settings, as a monitor or for broadcast, even when space is tight. Two USB 3.0 ports let you high-speed charge tablets, phones, and bus-powered DJ devices—perfect if you mix digital formats. According to JBL, a 1/4-inch (6.3mm) passthrough lets you connect up to four speakers and extend your mix to larger crowds. [We only got one speaker, so we couldn’t try this out.] 

    The EON ONE Compact can reach 112 dB and the 8-inch bass driver hits 37.5 Hz, though it isn’t ideal for louder rock shows. However, it is a great option for solo and acoustic gigs and smaller gatherings where you want a bigger sound without a big hassle.

    Best for guitarists: Positive Grid Spark MINI

    Tony Ware

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 2-inches (2x)
    • Power source: Battery (Up to 8 hours)
    • Expandable: No
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth, AUX input, 1/4-inch input
    • IP rating: N/A

    Pros

    • Ultra-portable guitar amp
    • Ability to switch between 10,000 tones
    • Smart Jam Live mode

    Cons

    • Only worthwhile for musicians

    The Positive Grid Spark MINI was designed for musicians who don’t just want to attend a party; they want to amp up the entertainment at a party. However, its support for Bluetooth and the presence of an AUX input allow you to kick out other people’s jams too. As a 3.3-pound practice amp, the Spark MINI is surprisingly capable. Battery-powered and DSP-based, it has a single 1/4-inch input to plug in almost any electric instrument with a standard cable and get a far more robust tone than you might expect looking at the compact cube. You can add accompaniment (drums and bass) by pairing the speaker to your phone to play a backing track (or use your phone to learn with the Positive Grid app’s auto chords feature). Knobs on top of the Spark MINI let you independently adjust the volume of your music and that amazing new electric guitar you just picked up till you get the right mix (though the MINI plays nicely with acoustic guitar and bass, as well). You can even select your tone from an online library of over 10,000 sculpted through Positive Grid’s BIAS tone engine and shared through its app. It’s like carrying a Marshall stack or AMPEG cabinet … in a backpack.

    Suppose you’re a solo musician going to a small get-together. In that case, the Positive Grid Spark MINI is way more practical to lug around than the other PA-capable party speaker we recommend. And with its 8-hour battery life, it will satisfy all but the most out-there jam-band fans. With just two 2-inch drivers and a passive radiator, it won’t earn the party speaker seal of approval as just a Bluetooth speaker, but it’s nice to have a near-field option if you’re in a small space with a handful of friends. Just avoid water (or a spilled beer) with this one. However, none of these downsides are dealbreakers because the Spark MINI is capable of its main task. One of this party speaker’s underrated features is its Line Out, which allows you to connect the amp to a larger PA. If you like a specific guitar tone from Positive Grid’s library and show up to a party with a larger system, you can use your preferred effects with a lot of additional volume.

    When you’re not entertaining guests, you can connect this amp directly to your computer using its USB-C port and use it as an interface to record your instrument with your own custom guitar tone using the PreSonus Studio One digital audio workstation software that comes with it. Everybody likes going to a party with live music, but bringing all the equipment necessary for it at the last minute is not always practical. With the Positive Grid Spark MINI, it’s possible to fit everything you need for a “gig” in the back seat of a small car, making it a lot more reasonable.

    Willing to trade a little space for more physical tone controls and more room-filling sound? The “full-sized” 40W Positive Grid Spark is still plenty portable, whether you’re ascending a stairway to heaven, speeding down a highway to hell, or taking friends and family on any other number of musical detours.

    Best for gamers: GravaStar Mars Pro

    Tony Ware

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 2.76 inches (2x)
    • Power source: Battery (Up to 15 hours)
    • Expandable: Yes
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
    • IP rating: IPX7

    Pros

    • Intricate design
    • Stereo pairing support
    • Two subwoofers

    Cons

    • Limited connectivity options

    GravaStar’s Mars Pro proves there ain’t no party like a LAN party. OK, most of our competitive gaming is done remotely, but we like listening to big beats and bouncy bands with our big broadband. This 7.5-inch-tall wireless party speaker is relatively small but has multiple drivers, a big bass radiator, and 25W to deliver lots of low-end. Its distinctive, futuristic look will fit into a party hosted in a game room or bring an out-of-this-world vibe anywhere with a rechargeable battery that lasts 15-20 hours. That’s doubly true if you put a pair next to one another and connect them to listen in true stereo. Still, you must applaud the industrial engineering in this speaker’s zinc alloy body. There are multiple designs and colorways, a touch-responsive volume strip, and it even has LED accents all over it that would make it eye-catching on a livestream as you blast competitors and tunes.

    As far as features go, you can’t plug an instrument into it or connect it to dozens of speakers simultaneously (just the one other for true L/R channels). Still, none of those options are absolutely necessary. If anything, pairing them down allowed GravaStar to focus more on audio quality and aesthetics, including making the Mars Pro IPX7—or effectively waterproof. Our only disappointment is that the only way to connect devices to this speaker is over Bluetooth 5.0. To be fair, that’s the universal wireless connectivity standard for all of the best portable speakers. However, it would have been nice to see an AUX in jack as a backup, especially with something that sits nicely next to a computer.

    If that doesn’t bother you, the GravaStar Mars Pro is an excellent party speaker for smaller rooms. If anything, your guests may spend a few seconds searching around for the sound source when you start to play music from what they might have thought was an extremely detailed model. That party trick alone may make the Mars Pro worth the price of admission.

    Best Wi-Fi speaker: Sonos Move 

    Stan Horaczek

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 3.5-inches
    • Power source: Battery (Up to 10 hours)
    • Expandable: Yes
    • Connectivity options: Wi-Fi, AirPlay 2, Bluetooth
    • IP rating: IP65

    Pros

    • Sonos’ ecosystem is strong
    • Excellent range
    • Amazon Alexa compatible

    Cons

    • Price

    It took Sonos several years to make a party speaker, but the Move is well worth the wait if you’re already a fan of the company’s connected speakers. Its biggest selling point is the ability to stream music to it over Wi-Fi, either through Sonos’ app or AirPlay 2 if you’re on an Apple device. Wi-Fi has a significantly longer, stronger signal than Bluetooth, so the Move and your device will stay connected as long as they’re both on the same network. If a Wi-Fi network isn’t available, the Move can revert to Bluetooth, so you can play music without the internet.

    The Move isn’t Sonos’ only portable speaker, but the diminutive Roam is too small to be used as a party speaker—especially given its price. The Move is hefty, but the extra volume allowed Sonos to use better audio hardware. You should expect the same level of fidelity from this speaker as you would from Sonos’ home speakers—which is great because all of them can exist on a single network. The music playing on the inside speakers can also play on the Move, which is helpful if your party is taking place in two spaces at once.

    This is the only party speaker we recommend in this roundup that supports Amazon Alexa, allowing you to use it hands-free. Sonos allows you to link streaming services through its app, so you can call up playlists or make them up on-the-fly without touching your phone. This feature requires an active Wi-Fi connection, so consider that if you plan on bringing the Move to a beach. On a related note, this speaker has an IP56 rating, so it can get splashed with water without incident.

    The Sonos Move is an excellent portable wireless speaker for all occasions, but its bigger size and louder sound do make it especially useful for a party. Taking a Sonos speaker by the pool or beach is extremely appealing. Our only concern with recommending the Sonos Move is its $400 price, which is pretty high, considering you can only use this speaker to play music. If you’re happy with the way Sonos speakers sound, the Move is absolutely worthwhile, and it’s the best option if you’re looking for a party speaker with a Wi-Fi connection. Only planning to have people gather inside and want to fill an entire room with multidirectional music from one standalone speaker? The new Era 300 has an original acoustic design optimized for Dolby Atmos and the captivating gradients of spatial audio.

    Best budget: Tribit XSound Mega

    Carsen Joenk

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bass driver size: 1.5-inches (2x)
    • Power source: Battery: (Up to 20 hours)
    • Expandable: No
    • Connectivity options: Bluetooth
    • IP rating: IPX7

    Pros

    • Ultra-portable, with an included shoulder strap
    • Battery lasts a long time relative to its size
    • Price

    Cons

    • Smaller speakers make less sound

    If you’ve spent your party budget on a venue, food, and drinks, there’s still bound to be enough in the bank for Tribit’s XSound Mega. The beach-bag-friendly speaker has two 1.5-inch bass drivers, which will pump out a reasonable amount of sound, given their size. If you’re hosting a small gathering at home or outdoors, it’ll be sufficient but don’t expect miracles at a big backyard bash.

    We named this the top party pick in our guide to the best budget Bluetooth speakers because of its battery life, multiple listening modes, built-in LEDs, and carrying strap. The fact that Tribit equipped it with a USB-A port, which allows you to use it as a power bank, was a welcome feature. We found the speaker’s XBass mode added an appreciable amount of low-frequency response but found the XSound Mega distorted a little at high volumes. It never ruined the song, but the distortion was present. Alternatively, the speaker’s LEDs were surprisingly sophisticated, pulsing rhythmically as the music played.

    The Tribit XSound Mega is a little barebones compared to some of our other recommendations, but it also costs under $100. You’re getting a lot of value for your money with this party speaker, which has several of the same core features as our other recommendations in a smaller, less expensive package.

    What to consider when shopping for the party speakers

    Bass driver

    Party music is typically all about that bass—though midrange and treble shouldn’t be dismissed!—so it makes sense to focus on a party speaker’s woofer, the driver that determines how low (in the frequency range) you can go. The bigger the woofer, the more sound it can produce. The biggest impediment to bass performance is often size of the speaker itself, since a driver can only be as big as the case it’s in—though custom waveguides and well-implemented DSP can produce some surprising results. To ensure you get more bounce to the ounce, however, we’ve only chosen party speakers with larger bass drivers for this reason.

    Power source

    Some party speakers need to be connected to an outlet at all times because they consume too much power to run on a battery for a long period of time—if at all. The tradeoff between a smaller, less powerful party speaker and a large, high-powered one is real, but in many cases, the answer is clear. If you host large basement parties where there’s no chance of disturbing the neighbors, a plugged-in party speaker makes sense. For smaller get-togethers—especially those in the outdoors—a portable party speaker makes more sense.

    Expandability

    Some speaker makers allow you to daisy chain multiple speakers together, so you can play the same music in different places or listen in true stereo. In some cases, this feature is literally called PartyBoost mode. If the parties you throw take place indoors and outdoors, or you have to cover a lot of ground and don’t want a single huge speaker, expandability is key.

    Connectivity

    All of the party speakers we’re recommending support Bluetooth, the universal wireless standard that allows you to connect your phone, tablet, or computer to countless tech accessories. But even a universal standard has variants, so you’ll want to make sure the Bluetooth version of your source and speaker are in line (Bluetooth 5.3 devices are the most current, but there are plenty of 4.x devices floating around that still function perfectly well). Some have the option of connecting to your device over Wi-Fi, which offers a better range, a more stable signal, and higher-fidelity streaming. If you want to go old school, a 3.5mm AUX input will let you connect your source to the party speaker directly, which offers the highest level of fidelity—assuming you’re playing lossless music—but means your device is literally tethered to the speaker.

    IP rating

    A speaker’s IP (Ingress Protection) rating determines its durability against dust and water. Our recommendations range from having no IP rating to an IPX7 rating, which means they can be fully submerged underwater for up to 30 minutes without the risk of damage. This feature won’t matter if you keep your speaker indoors—so long as nobody spills a drink on it—but is extremely important if you host outdoor gatherings.

    FAQs

    Q: Are 500 watts of power enough for a party speaker?

    Yes. A 500-watt speaker is powerful enough to play music at a volume suitable for indoor and outdoor parties. In many cases, a 30-watt speaker will be sufficient if you’re hosting a party on a single floor of a house.

    Q: Which is better for parties, passive speakers or active speakers?

    Active—also known as powered—speakers are better for parties because they have an amplifier built into them. This design feature makes them more portable, which is helpful when hosting a party. Passive speakers are an okay choice if you’ve hooked up outdoor speakers connected to an amplifier in your home.

    Q: Do all party speakers come with a microphone?

    No. Some party speakers have a built-in microphone, but it’s not a requirement.

    Q: Are party speakers worth it?

    If you host many high-energy events or value features other than purely listening to music, a party speaker is worth it. If you’re just looking for a solo-session listening station, however, you can consider everything from traditional stereo speakers to the Sonos Era 300 smart speaker for spatial audio.

    Q: How much does a party speaker cost?

    This depends on the speaker’s size, audio components, and additional features. Our lowest-cost recommendation costs $60, but you can pay upwards of $600.

    Final thoughts on choosing the best party speakers

    Whether you throw a couple of casual get-togethers yearly or host the weekly event friends look forward to throughout the week, having a party speaker is key to everyone having a good time. No party is complete without music; you can be the hero by providing it. We’re especially pleased that companies have begun taking this speaker style seriously rather than chalking it up as a gimmick and slapping unnecessary features onto previously available models that just blurt farty bass. Any of our speaker recommendations will get the job done; now it’s your task to create the perfect playlist.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best party speakers in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Save 10 percent or more on Celestron telescopes and star-gazing gear https://www.popsci.com/gear/celestron-popsci-telescope-deal-amazon/ Fri, 31 Mar 2023 13:47:46 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=524501
    Celestron telescopes arranged in an alternating pattern
    Stan Horaczek

    The weather is warming up, which makes this a great time to get out and see the stars.

    The post Save 10 percent or more on Celestron telescopes and star-gazing gear appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Celestron telescopes arranged in an alternating pattern
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Did you catch the recent five-planet alignment in the night sky just a few days ago? It’s the kind of event that happens only once every 17 years and can cause real FOMO when it passes you by. But you can be prepared for the next celestial show (and save some money) thanks to Amazon’s current deals on Celestron telescopes, binoculars, and other gear.

    Popular Science StarSense Explorer DX 100AZ Smartphone App-Enabled Telescope $314 (Was $349)

    This is the official Popular Science-approved way to view the skies. This refractor-style scope works a lot like a telephoto camera lens in that light moves through a series of meticulously shaped glass elements inside to provide your eyeball with a clear view of the heavens.

    The DX 100AZ offers a 100mm front (4-inch) objective lens, which allows in tons of light for viewing even dim objects. The 660mm focal length pairs with the included 10mm or 25mm eyepieces to let you determine how far into the cosmos you want to look.

    All that high-quality glass isn’t worth much if you can’t find anything to look at, but Celestron’s StarSense Explorer tech provides an easy fix. Plop your smartphone into the cradle, take two minutes to calibrate the optics, and the companion app will give you a guided tour of the sky. It will point out objects currently visible in your field of view, and give you simple directions for moving the scope if you want to see other objects. It’s like telling Google Maps to plot a course to Venus.

    Best of all, this refractor-style scope is much easier to move around than many of its excellent (but rotund) Dobsonian siblings. The DX 100AZ weighs just over 13 pounds, including the aluminum tripod. Plus, the tube is just 32 inches long, so you can easily chuck it in the back of your Honda Civic and head out into the inky black darkness where the stars shine the brightest.

    Other Celestron deals

    The post Save 10 percent or more on Celestron telescopes and star-gazing gear appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Clean up on the best outdoor & patio deals at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/outdoor-patio-amazon-deals/ Tue, 28 Mar 2023 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=523480
    A variety of spring patio products on a raindrop background.
    Amanda Reed

    Refresh your deck, patio, and sidewalk with Amazon deals on power washers, outdoor furniture, and power tools.

    The post Clean up on the best outdoor & patio deals at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A variety of spring patio products on a raindrop background.
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Warmer weather is settling in, meaning winter detritus is revealing itself. Maybe you take the covers off your outdoor furniture and find that a furry friend decided to make a home there. Maybe your deck just looks nasty. Whatever needs a new beginning, zhuzh up your outdoor space with these outdoor and patio deals on Amazon.

    Karcher K1700 1700 PSI 1.2 GPM TruPressure Electric Pressure Washer $123.94 (Was $189.99)

    Karcher

    SEE IT

    Let’s talk about your crusty sidewalk and nasty deck: They’re crusty and nasty from salt and decomposing leaves, and you know it! De-nastify your outdoor space with this Karcher 1700 PSI (pounds per square inch) 1.2 GPM (gallons per minute) electric pressure washer that’s 35% off on Amazon. Use it to make your sidewalk, driveway, patio, deck, siding, and fencing look fresh and new—like they didn’t spend three months tortured by fluctuating temperatures and de-icer. A quick-connect bayonet spray wand and three spray nozzles let you get versatile with your cleaning. Use the 15-degree nozzle for all-around cleaning and the turbo nozzle for tough-to-clean surfaces. The 65-degree nozzle is perfect for detergent application. If none of these included nozzles float your boat, you’re in luck: The spray wand is compatible with most 1/4-inch quick-connect pressure washing accessories. Plus, a 20-inch kink-resistant hose lets you walk far without dragging the pressure washer around. You’ll be living out your own power washer before and after photoset dreams in no time.

    After your deck is spotless, it’s time to redecorate. Consider this 6-piece garden set from Flash Furniture that’s 85% off. An umbrella will keep you shady as you dine at its glass table and relax in one of four folding chairs. If the front patio needs a refresh, Flash Furniture’s Poly Resin Wood Adirondack Rocking Chair set is 52% off.

    Don’t wait to get a headstart on making your outdoor spaces ready for spring—like last season’s grime, these deals could be one purchase from being washed away.

    Here are more refreshing deals we’re springing for:

    The post Clean up on the best outdoor & patio deals at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best headlamps of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-headlamp/ Tue, 30 Mar 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=279441
    A lineup of the best headlamps on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    Get things done at night and squeeze every hour out of the day with headlamps designed for all the bright reasons.

    The post The best headlamps of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of the best headlamps on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall green biolite headlamp BioLite 750
    SEE IT

    Impressive brightness and comfort rolled into one.

    Best multipurpose blue and white headlamp PETZL, Tikka Outdoor Headlamp
    SEE IT

    Long-lasting battery means plenty of time for different adventures.

    Best for running red and black biolite headlamp BioLite 200
    SEE IT

    No more bouncy headlamps while running at night.

    When you need to work in the dark, a Bic lighter won’t cut it, and your smartphone can’t hover in place hands-free (yet)—making it the perfect time to consider a headlamp. You need a high-quality, dependable source of bright light, and headlamps give you all the luminescence you need while freeing up your hands and keeping you company in the dark, dark night. They should also be comfortable. An LED variety is perfect for running, hiking, and camping, but these headband powerhouses can do much more than shine a light on a trail. Use a headlamp for working around the house, doing DIY projects, finding the circuit breaker in the basement, or anything else that requires a helpful beam of light. With so many options on the market, how do you separate the good headlamps from the glorified sweatbands? Know what to look for in the best headlamps and finally see what you’ve missed.  

    How we chose the best headlamps

    We looked at reviews, gathered recommendations, performed heavy research, and conducted heavy user testing to find the best headlamps. We wouldn’t want to leave you in the dark—literally and metaphorically—when you make your important headlamp considerations.

    The best headlamps: Reviews & Recommendations

    Headlamps are not as complex as their product descriptions imply, but that doesn’t mean they’re all simple and the same. From nighttime treasure hunting to walking to the camping cooler to grab a drink when the fire is out, we’ve brought to light options offering all levels of lumens (abbreviated lm) to help you find the brightest buy for you.

    Best overall: BioLite 750

    Biolite

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Lumens: 750 lumens
    • Battery life: 7 hours on high; 150 on low
    • Rechargeable?: Yes
    • Waterproof rating: IPX4

    Pros

    • Bright
    • Comfortable
    • Lots of light modes

    Cons

    • Band prone to stretching

    This rechargeable headlamp boasts an impressive 750lm on its highest setting. For climbers and spelunkers, it’s a stellar example of too much being just enough. The Run Forever pass-through charging system lets users swap out battery packs without losing the light. And unlike other LED headlamps that blast past the 500lm mark, the BioLite allows you to use max brightness in constant mode instead of a short burst. At full power, the light lasts about two hours. On the lowest setting, you get more than six full days of light. Expect all the standard features, such as eight different light modes and dimmable options; it’s also surprisingly comfortable. It’s a great hunting headlamp, camping headlamp, and hiking headlamp—though it can be a bit much for your nightly dog walking

    Best lightweight: PETZL, IKO CORE Rechargeable LED Headlamp

    Petzl

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Lumens: 500 lumens
    • Battery life: 10 hours on medium
    • Rechargeable?: Yes, also compatible with 3 AAA batteries
    • Waterproof rating: IPX4

    Pros

    • Waterproof
    • Recharge time is fast
    • Wide range of light settings

    Cons

    • Throws glare if you wear glasses

    While there are lighter options with bands that look like a shoelace, this headlamp has a bit more rigidity and durability. The stretchable band of the IKO Core from PETZL is comfortable and won’t get saturated with sweat. Wipe it clean after a workout or hike, and it’ll be fresh and ready for your next mission. The 500lm on the brightest setting can be a helpful burst of light when needed, but even on the lowest 6lm setting, you have enough light for a midnight stroll. Recharge time via micro USB is about three hours, and you can also use standard AAA batteries (though we recommend rechargeables). On the medium setting of 100lm, expect about 10 hours of burn time. This piece of outdoor gear can also be worn around your neck, giving you more lighting options. The slim solution is perfect for outdoor exercising and adventure. 

    Best multipurpose: PETZL, Tikka Outdoor Headlamp

    Petzl

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Lumens: 300 lumens
    • Battery life: 120 hours on lowest setting
    • Rechargeable?: Yes, also compatible with 3 AAA batteries
    • Waterproof rating: IPX4

    Pros

    • Shock and vibration resistant
    • “Just right” amount of light
    • Comfortable

    Cons

    • Short battery life on max

    The PETZL Tikka headlamp is the Goldilocks of LED headlamps: Not too bright, not too dim … just right. Its maximum 300lm flood light brightens up any outdoor activity, and on its two lower settings (100lm and 6lm), it’s a great light source for indoor projects and group activities. The brightly colored reflective band makes it easy to spot in a closet or backpack, eliminating frustration in the dark. You can use the PETZL rechargeable battery (sold separately) or three AAA batteries. Battery life on the lowest setting is about 120 hours and two hours on max brightness. The Tikka is the best standard, no-nonsense headlamp for everyday indoor and outdoor use.   

    Best for running: BioLite 200

    Biolite

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Lumens: 200 lumens
    • Battery life: 40 hours on low
    • Rechargeable?: Yes
    • Waterproof rating: IPX4

    Pros

    • Waterproof
    • Lightweight
    • Can handle perspiration

    Cons

    • micro USB port location slightly obstructed by rubber cover

    The 200lm of the BioLite 200 may sound puny compared to the higher-lumen models on the list. But this was built for running, not signaling aliens. It provides exactly what runners need, so you’re not buying lumens you’ll never use. Most important, the BioLite feels great. The smooth headband doesn’t dig into your skin but stays in place. The 40 hours of burn time on the lowest setting is more than long enough for even long-distance runs. And the batteries are quickly and easily recharged with a micro USB port. For anyone looking for a nightly running partner, the BioLite is a helpful companion. If you’re looking for something brighter, we also love the BioLite 200’s brighter cousin, the BioLite 325, which maxes out at 325lm.

    Best budget: Energizer LED Headlamp

    Amazon

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Lumens: 100 lumens
    • Battery life: 9 hours
    • Rechargeable?: No, compatible with 2 AA batteries
    • Waterproof rating:

    Pros

    • 40 meters of beam length
    • Red setting for night vision
    • Compact

    Cons

    • Headlamp fixed in one position

    The Energizer LED Headlamp shines brightly enough with 100lm of light from two AA batteries. The downside is the lack of pivot. Unlike most models that can be aimed up or down, this headlamp is fixed in one position. If you want light shining in front of your feet, you’ll need to look down. It’s not ideal for runners, but it is great camping gear and kid-friendly. Keep one in your car for emergencies. Even if you use it to change a tire once, it will have paid for itself—ask anyone who has tried to use a smartphone flashlight with one hand and a tool with the other.  

    What to consider when buying the best headlamps

    The basics of all LED headlamps are lumens and run time: How bright is the lamp, and how long will it last? Answering those questions will help narrow down your options.

    Light is measured in lumens (abbreviated lm). The higher the lumen number, the brighter the light. Forget trying to measure light by watts; this isn’t 1990. Wattage has little to do with energy-efficient LED headlamps and lights. Generally speaking, 200-500lm is more than enough for most outdoor activities. It may even be too much if you use the headlamp in a group and don’t want to blind your fellow campers. Remember that a book light that shines 50lm is ideal for reading in bed at night, so anything above 200lm may be overkill depending on use.

    What’s also important is beam length and width. A flood light will coat the area in a diffuse layer of light. A focused spotlight beam creates a longer, brighter stream of light aimed at a specific area. Flood lights are great for camping and hanging out. Long-range spotlight beams of light are good for hiking, running, hunting, and other nightly activities. Many tactical headlamps feature zoom controls that create both wide and long beams. 

    Run time is the other key data point when choosing the best headlamp. You don’t want to be stranded in the middle of the woods when your light quits—that’s when all the cartoon animal eyes start popping up in the backgrounds—so keep an eye on the battery supply. If you’re going off the grid for a long period of time, ensure your light will last. 

    As for added features, what you need depends on how you plan to use the headlamp. Some lamps feature a red light, which won’t dilate your pupils and are great for working with others. Additional features may include strobing effects for emergencies and visibility, programmable light sensors for picking the perfect brightness, and dimmers for saving battery power when you don’t need Bat Signal–strength illumination. 

    Consider the following tips to find the most useful wearable nightlight on the market:

    A powerful rechargeable headlamp can rival the sun

    For some activities, all you need is a simple head flashlight. But for those who demand as much light as possible, there are feature-rich rechargeable headlamps that offer over 750lm of light, the same luminosity as security floodlights. 

    Headlamps with brighter lights and more features cost more, so ensure that all the bells and whistles are useful for your needs. If you’re looking for a long-lasting model to make a dark forest look like a brightly lit grocery store, expect to pay $100 or more. 

    The brighter the light, the more power it will eat up and the quicker it will die. To get the brightest of the bright, it’s best to use the max output in short bursts to conserve battery power. Hit the high beams to get a better look at the trail or find the right grip on a rock wall, then click back to a lower brightness. Do not use the max brightness to scare your friends during a ghost story. The bright light of a focused 750lm spotlight can damage your eyes if you are not careful—just ask a Gremlin.

    Ultra-bright headlamps have many features, from light sensors that select the optimal light output to extra battery packs to keep artificial sun going throughout the night. Strobe effects designed to get people’s attention can be a real lifesaver. If you’re spending a hundred dollars on a rechargeable headlamp, it should also be weather-resistant and hardy enough to last beyond one backyard campout. This is an investment, not a toy. 

    The best hiking equipment should be dry and practically weightless

    One downside of many headlamps is the thick fabric strap, which absorbs sweat and causes irritation. The last thing anyone wants when adventuring is a sopping-wet headband. You need lightweight hiking equipment; any added weight, even a few extra ounces, will affect your activity. Luckily, you can buy a thin headlamp dedicated to minimalism. 

    If you do, confirm that it’s made of quality material. Going small can mean the headlamp is easy to snap and crack. A well-made thin model should hold up against normal wear and tear and still be light as feather. For runners, walkers, hikers, and campers, these tiny headlamps feel airy and cool on a hot summer night. 

    Just because the headlamp lacks beefy battery packs and fist-sized bulbs doesn’t mean it’s not powerful. You can easily find a lightweight option that packs between 200-500lm of brightness. You may give up some adjustability and durability by going small, but for headlamps that shine bright for hours and hours, the little guys can go head(lamp) to head(lamp) against the larger models. 

    You may need an LED headlamp that does it all

    Don’t get overwhelmed with options. There are handy, fully-loaded models that shine a light on any nighttime activity. While specialized tactical headlamps for hunting, fishing, and mountain climbing serve specific purposes, a basic LED headlamp is a jack of all trades. It will be one of the most useful resources in your family garage. Grab your trusty, universal headlamp during power outages, use it for car repairs, or even wear it when assigned to late-night grill duty. 

    The key to an all-in-one ever-ready headlamp is brightness variance. You may need 200lm to hike uphill safely, but only 5lm for wiring a model railroad layout. Your go-to wearable flashlight must be easy to use and shift from bright to dim as quickly as possible. 

    Most modern headlamps are designed for quick brightness selection with a single button. Buttons vary from model to model, but generally, one click selects max light; two is medium; three is low. When you need a light immediately, a basic design is more useful than a flashlight and easier to handle than fumbling with your smartphone.

    What you don’t want in a family-friendly model are highly complicated, programmable dimming options that are great for specific activities but unnecessary for most household and backyard uses. Keep it simple, and keep it handy.

    The best running headlamp won’t bounce

    The bounce should be in your step, not your headlamp. The last thing a runner needs is to have their headlamp bounce down over their eyes and onto their necks. No matter how much you tighten the band, some so-called running headlamps will slip and come sliding down your head after a few strides. To alleviate the bounce problem, some runners tape up and modify their headbands and lamps. Instead, we suggest a running headlamp with bounce protection. 

    For running, you want a lightweight model with a strong supportive headband. You don’t want the headband to feel tight and cause headaches. Comfort and fit are more important than light output, but you will need enough lumens to show you the road ahead and alert drivers to your location. 

    Keeping all that in mind, you may be tempted to go for the most expensive option. If it costs so much, it must be great, right? Not always. That extra money is going toward extra lumens, which are often unnecessary for runners. 200lm is great for most road running. 300lm is more than bright enough for trail running. Anything higher and the running headlamp is overpowered and you probably overpaid. 

    The best on a budget: what can you get for less than $10

    The real advantage of inexpensive models is disposability, not dependability. You won’t be paralyzed with fear if you drop the budget headlamp or if your kid uses it to see where toilet water goes. When shopping for a low-priced headlamp, look for brands you know and trust. Many battery companies produce their line of flashlights and headlamps, which all work reasonably well for the price. Avoid anything suspicious (no packaging, no labels) because those lamps may be broken before you even turn them on. And find a headlamp with batteries that can be replaced without 17 specialized screwdrivers. 

    If you want a headlamp for running, mountain climbing, hunting, or other tactical activities, pay the extra money and buy a lamp made with high-quality materials. The high-end models are more dependable and will offer handy features for outdoor enthusiasts. They also won’t feel like you strapped a dollar-store Rubik’s Cube to your head.

    FAQs

    Q: How much does a headlamp cost?

    Don’t cry over broken headlamps … if they’re cheap. Outdoor equipment takes a beating, so you may want to save money and buy an inexpensive outdoor headlamp that’s easy to replace. You could buy a cheap new one before a camping trip and not worry if it gets lost, broken, or stolen by mischievous bears. Cheap headlamps won’t shine as bright, the battery won’t last as long, and the material may not win any awards for comfort or fashion. But if all you need is a flashlight on your head, try a budget-priced model before investing hundreds of dollars.

    Q: Are headlamps waterproof?

    The International Protection (IP) Marking code (sometimes called Ingress Protection) measures waterproof headlamps. You may notice the letters IP or IPX in the specifications. A headlamp with a rating of IPX4 can withstand rain, mist, and sweat. One labeled IPX7 or IPX8 can be submerged in water for 30 minutes and still operate. If there are no ratings, keep the headlamp dry. 

    Q: How many lumens are considered bright?

    Producing 300lm is considered bright for headlamps. For camping, walking, and average outdoor activities, anything over 100lm is bright enough. Some headlamps shine bright with 1,000lms, but these are specialized products for unique nighttime activities and tactical situations. For comparison, the light on an iPhone 12 maxes out at around 50lm. 

    Q: Do I need a headlamp with a red light setting?

    The red light on a headlamp gives you illumination without wrecking your natural night vision. Even better, you’re less likely to accidentally blind friends while using the red setting. If hiking in a group or stargazing, consider using the red light setting for the perfect amount of light.

    Final thoughts on the best headlamps

    When choosing the best LED headlamp, consider how you plan to use it. Running headlamps don’t need all the features of a tactical headlamp but do need to illuminate what’s ahead. Headlamps for rock climbing require more durability and stability than a SpongeBob-themed headlamp made for family camping. Find a rechargeable headlamp with at least 100lm and a burn time longer than 10 hours on the medium setting. And find one that feels good, doesn’t fall off your head, and doesn’t crush your skull. With the best headlamp as your guide, you can control the night and be your own ray of sunshine.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best headlamps of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Save $250 on the best 4-person inflatable hot tub at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/coleman-inflatable-hot-tub-amazon-deal/ Fri, 24 Mar 2023 19:23:57 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=522844
    Multiple Coleman SalusSpa inflatable hot tubs on a blue background.
    Stan Horaczek

    Grab this deeply discounted tub and three pals and chill out while things heat up.

    The post Save $250 on the best 4-person inflatable hot tub at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Multiple Coleman SalusSpa inflatable hot tubs on a blue background.
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    There are only a few possible methods if you want to get a hot tub for cheap. You can buy an old cast iron bathtub and light a fire under it like a wild west cowboy. You can look on Craigslist for some clapped-out tub that you’ll have to scrape a dead raccoon out of before trying to cram it into your 2005 Hyundai Santa Fe. Or, you can simply spend $399 on this Coleman SaluSpa 4-Person Inflatable Hot Tub, currently on sale for 25% off its regular price at Amazon right now. It even took top honors in our list of the best inflatable hot tubs.

    Coleman SaluSpa 4-Person Inflatable Hot Tub $399 w/ coupon (Was $650)

    Coleman

    SEE IT

    You won’t need any tools to set up this inflatable spa with room inside for four people. The PVC construction with sturdy internal bracing makes it durable enough to withstand the rigors of the outdoors. Once set up, it can heat water to a toasty 104 degrees Fahrenheit while blasting your beat-up body with an array of pressure jets. 

    Once you’re done soaking, the included cover protects the tub from leaves, debris, or empty Truly cans that might otherwise find their way into the water. It also comes equipped with a set of burly handles, so it’s simple to move as long as you have another semi-strong friend to come pull with you. Just make sure you click the coupon, which brings the already discounted price down from $484 to $399—now that’s a cool price on a hot item.

    More hot tub deals

    If you’re looking for something a little cheaper or even more elaborate, check out these deals on other inflatable hot tubs. You won’t have to scrape a possum or skunk from any of them. That’s a guarantee.

    The post Save $250 on the best 4-person inflatable hot tub at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best propane grills in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-propane-grills/ Thu, 23 Mar 2023 22:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=520981
    The best propane grills
    Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

    Enjoy the nicer weather with family and friends by cooking outdoors with one of these convenient grills.

    The post The best propane grills in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best propane grills
    Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Weber Genesis Smart EX-335 Weber Genesis Smart EX-335
    SEE IT

    This traditional at-home propane grill offers both power and sensible smart features to the home cook with outdoor space.

    Best for camping Coleman Gas Camping Grill/Stove Coleman Gas Camping Grill/Stove
    SEE IT

    This mini, two-burner grill is prepared to take you from breakfast to dinner.

    Best budget Coleman RoadTrip Party Basic Propane Grill Coleman RoadTrip Party Basic Propane Grill
    SEE IT

    Coleman packed a surpring amount of features into this inexpensive, ultra-lightweight grill.

    Propane grills offer a few advantages over their charcoal-powered counterparts. They heat up faster, don’t create leftover ashes, and offer the ability to heat specific areas of the grill precisely. They don’t require a learning curve to cook up a couple burgers. A propane grill is also a lot easier to reignite if you realize you need to cook more food, and there are no briquettes to discard once you’re done grilling. The best propane grills are easy to use, clean, maintain, and transport, which makes them friendly to both newer cooks and old pros.

    How we chose the best propane grills

    Everyone’s grilling needs differ (not everyone needs the glorious grilling overkill of a Traeger Ironwood XL), so we’ve made versatility the guiding light for our recommendations. Our evaluations are based on a thorough canvassing of all the best and latest gear from well-known companies to fit any grilling needs. Of course, there’s a recommendation for those who want a reliable way to grill at home while the weather’s nice, but we found portability particularly interesting to many readers, too.

    With the ability to use compact compressed gas canisters, a smaller propane grill can go camping or cook on balconies in some city apartments. Whether you have a sprawling backyard or a sliver of space, you’ll find a propane grill below that suits your environment. Naturally, smaller grills require less propane, so you can stretch out your supply longer by using them. Durability was paramount in our selection of propane grills because they’ll likely be left outside (covered) for some portion of the year. You’ll find a majority of our picks are made from stainless steel, which won’t rust quickly like lesser metals.

    Whether shopping for your first grill or jumping from charcoal or natural gas to propane, you’ll find what you’re looking for here.

    The best propane grills: Reviews & Recommendations

    The grilling scenario you find yourself most often will determine the best propane grill for you, and with that in mind, we’ve selected five options to cover all the major bases. Be mindful that some of the grills below may suit a scenario—home or camping, for example—in which case it may be worth prioritizing one or getting both.

    Best overall: Weber Genesis Smart EX-335

    Weber

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Burners: Four
    • Cooking area: 787 square inches
    • BTU per hour input: 39,000 BTU
    • Weight: 197.6 pounds
    • Material: Stainless steel

    Pros

    • Primary and side burners
    • Digital temperature gauge
    • Supports the Weber Connect app

    Cons

    • Not designed for portable use

    If you looked up the term “propane grill” in the dictionary, you could easily see a picture of Weber’s Genesis Smart EX-335, and for a good reason. The 200-pound four-burner grill has all the features any home cook would need to cook outdoors easily. The main chamber has three burners—plus a specific knob that raises the temperature between the second and third so you can get extra-high heat for a hard sear. A propane-powered side burner can cook side dishes. The side burner is especially helpful if you’d like to grill up vegetables or bacon, which require constant attention and have more telling visual indicators for doneness than a big hunk of meat.

    Equally useful is the Smart EX-335’s right-hand side panel, which features a digital temperature reading that’s easy to read when cooking in the dark, and a couple of slots for meat probes. If you elect to use the meat probes, you can sync your phone to the grill using Weber’s Connect app—available on iOS and Android—to get a notification when it’s done cooking. The app will even tell you when to flip your meat if necessary. We’re always skeptical about smart features making their way into product categories that have been fine for years, but Weber’s make sense.

    The Smart EX-335 is a full-sized grill, which means it’s big, heavy, and designed to be used exclusively in one place. Once it’s set up, you won’t easily transport it to another location. The grill’s wheels make it easy to move around a porch or patio with minimal effort, but you can’t put it in a car and go. If you’re looking for an at-home propane grill, you’re not going to find a better one than this.

    Best portable: Cuisinart CGG-306

    Cuisinart

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Burners: Two
    • Cooking area: 275 Square inches
    • BTU per hour input: 10,000 BTU
    • Weight: 28.66 pounds
    • Material: Stainless steel

    Pros

    • Hits the sweet spot between portability and cooking area
    • Two full-sized burners
    • Stainless steel grates

    Cons

    • A little heavy for a portable grill

    Cuisinart’s CGG-306 is fully capable of being the at-home grill for a four-person household, but it’s also small and light enough to be taken on the road. At 30 pounds, you’ll certainly feel its weight when taking it and out of your car, but that discomfort is temporary, and the pros far outweigh the cons.

    The biggest feature the CGG-306 has going for it the combination of is its relatively large cooking area and two full-sized burners. You can make a two-zone grilling space with enough room for plenty of protein and sides. If you walk the middle path and use both burners at the same temperature for a uniform heating surface, all the better. Most portable propane grills—including all of our other recommendations—either have two smaller burners or a single larger one. In this way, the CGG-306 is more of a shrunk-down full-sized grill than a souped-up portable one.

    One of the seemingly-small-but-surprisingly-important design choices Cuisinart made was outfitting the CGG-306 with stainless steel grates. This will allow you to keep the grill outdoors for extended periods of time without the risk of opening it up to find a rusty mess. Positioning its analog thermometer on top of its lid was another wise choice, as it’s easy to spot so long as you have enough light.

    If you want a portable propane grill with plenty of power, Cuisinart’s CGG-306 is the one to get.

    Best for camping: Coleman Gas Camping Grill/Stove

    Coleman

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Burners: Two
    • Cooking area: 130 Square inches
    • BTU per hour input: 20,000 BTU
    • Weight: 7.5 pounds
    • Material: Synthetic

    Pros

    • Two burners
    • Retractable drip tray
    • Fuel efficiency

    Cons

    • Synthetic materials

    Space is always at a premium when you go camping, and this grill’s penchant for portability makes it a very solid choice. It’s our lightest recommendation at well under 10 pounds, but it still has a two-burner cooking system—albeit one that’s a lot weaker than the one you’ll find in the Cuisinart model we mentioned earlier. Still, what this grill lacks in size, it more than makes up for in ease of use.

    For instance, the area beneath its main burner is open, which allows fat and other drippings to fall directly onto a tray, which can be pulled out and cleaned after every cook. You’ll still need to wipe down its non-stick grates, but this is far less hassle than cleaning other propane grills. This grill’s secondary burner has raised grates and is designed for a coffee pot or pan rather than allowing you to cook directly on top of it.

    Coleman bundles its grill with a griddle, which can be placed over its larger burner and is perfect for everything from pancakes, eggs, and bacon to smash burgers and stir-fried vegetables. It’s nice to see Coleman make the most of this grill’s small form factor. It even built windscreens on the right and left side to keep cooking consistent during inclement weather. Similarly, Coleman says the Perfectheat technology it invented makes this propane grill more fuel efficient.

    If you need a quick propane grill to throw into the back of your car for a camping trip, this is the one you want.

    Best countertop: Pit Boss Grills Single-Burner Tabletop Grill

    Pit Boss

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Burners: One
    • Cooking area: 322 Square inches.
    • BTU per hour input: 10,000 BTU
    • Weight: 20 pounds
    • Material: Stainless steel

    Pros

    • Surprisingly large cooking area
    • Two layers of grill grates
    • Stainless steel grill grates

    Cons

    • Single burner

    If you can get over the fact that it only has one burner, you’ll find much to like about Pit Boss Grill’s Single-Burner Tabletop Grill. This is especially true of its 322-square-inch cooking area, which is more space than our favorite portable grill, even though it’s roughly 10 pounds lighter. Part of the reason this grill has so much cooking space is that it has a top rack in addition to its main grate. This will allow you to toast hamburger buns while you’re cooking the patties or finish off a more delicate piece of meat off direct heat. In this sense, you can create a quasi-two-zone cooking area—but that comes with far less control.

    We were pleased that Pit Boss opted to make both of its grates out of stainless steel, which matches this grill’s exterior. Smart design choices, like having its legs contract when it’s not in use, serve to improve its portability. Similarly, this grill has an easily-accessible slip-out grill tray to clean out drippings before they become a fire hazard. Interestingly, Pit Boss designed this propane grill with a dedicated push-button starter rather than building that functionality into its temperature knob. This isn’t good or bad, but a feature we’d only expect to see in a full-sized grill.

    Suppose you want a tabletop-friendly propane grill with plenty of space and are confident enough in your cooking skills to work a single-burner grill with consistent results successfully. In that case, you’ll be very happy with Pit Boss Grill’s Single-Burner Tabletop Grill.

    Best budget: Coleman RoadTrip Party Basic Propane Grill

    Coleman

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Burners: One
    • Cooking area: 122 Square inches
    • BTU per hour input: 8,000 BTU
    • Weight: 6.65 pounds
    • Material: Alloy steel

    Pros

    • Compact design
    • Lightweight
    • Price

    Cons

    • Not as powerful

    The Coleman RoadTrip is an ultra-lightweight single-burner propane grill costing under $100. It’s the perfect tool for a cookout on the beach or in a park. Despite its space limitations, you can still cook four or five hamburgers or a full handful of hotdogs simultaneously. Coleman includes a grate, griddle, and wire rack, so you could just as easily cook breakfast foods, sauté vegetables, or use the grill with a pot or pan. This versatility is welcome from such a small grill. The Coleman RoadTrip might not be as powerful as our other recommendations, but it’s still a solid pick if your propane grill needs are relatively basic.

    What to consider when shopping for the best propane grills

    Number of burners

    The number of burners a propane grill has is important for several reasons. The first is that having more burners will allow the grill to heat up more quickly, which is helpful if you’re on a time crunch. Secondarily, having more burners gives you greater control over the hot and cold parts of your grill. Sometimes, you’ll want to create a two-zone grilling area to sear food in a hotter section and cook it through in the cooler one to avoid burning or overcooking.

    Cooking area

    A propane grill’s cooking area denotes how much space you have for your food. This unit of measurement is helpful because it’s different than the total width and length of a grill, which takes into account the gap between its grates and frame, plus the frame itself. If a grill has an upper grate—primarily used to keep food warm rather than directly heat it—this space is also counted.

    BTU (British Thermal Units)

    You’ll find this unit of measurement in the description of every grill, but it isn’t a measurement of heat—though the two are directly related. A propane grill’s maximum BTU denotes how much energy is required to heat the grill to a specific temperature. This is analogous to acceleration in the car world: It’s the time it takes to get a vehicle from 0 to 60 miles an hour rather than a measure of distance. In any event, most of our propane grill recommendations top out at 10,000BTU, which is standard for smaller grills.

    Weight

    If you’ve decided to get a portable propane grill, weight is the most important factor to consider. Most of our recommendations weigh less than 30 pounds, with some options weighing in at 10 or less. For comparison, our best overall pick, which was designed exclusively for home use, weighs nearly 200 pounds.

    Material

    A majority of the propane grills we’re recommending are made out of stainless steel, which means they’re not going to rust if they’re exposed to moisture—either directly from drizzling rain or humidity. Stainless steel will begin to get damaged if it comes in contact with liquid for extended periods of time, which is why you shouldn’t grill during rain storms with any frequency.

    FAQs

    Q: Can I use a propane grill inside?

    No. Using a propane grill inside is not safe, as even the slightest gas leak could be potentially hazardous. We do have a guide to the best indoor grills, which are suited to this use-case.

    Q: How do I connect a propane tank to a gas grill?

    This will vary from model to model, so we recommend reading the manufacturer’s instructions before assembling your propane grill for the first time.

    Q: Can I use a propane grill in the rain?

    You should not use your propane grill—or any grill—in the rain, as direct, extended exposure to water may damage one or more of its components.

    Q: How should I clean a propane grill?

    The grates of a propane grill should be cleaned using a brush. Once it’s cooled down, you can clean the outside of a propane grill with paper towels or a clean rag before covering it.

    Q: How long do propane grills last?

    If it’s cleaned, stored, and handled properly, a propane grill should last over 10 years without any issues.

    Final thoughts on choosing the best propane grills

    Propane grills are popular because of their versatility and ease of use, which is especially helpful for less experienced home cooks just getting the hang of cooking outdoors. You’ll need to be mindful of how much propane is left in your tank and to store it properly for safety reasons, but beyond that, they’re pretty plug-and-play. There’s no wrong fuel when it comes to grilling; we like them all, but propane is beginner friendly. Just make sure to have the right grilling tools before your outdoor cooking to avoid getting burned or losing your food between the grates.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best propane grills in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best rooftop tents of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-rooftop-tents/ Thu, 08 Sep 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=467857
    best rooftop tents sliced header
    Tony Ware

    Because why not sleep as close to the sky as you can manage.

    The post The best rooftop tents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    best rooftop tents sliced header
    Tony Ware

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The Thule Tepui Kukenam is a spacious tent that’s easy to set up and tough enough for any trip. Thule Tepui Kukenam 3
    SEE IT

    The Thule Tepui Kukenam is a spacious tent that’s easy to set up and tough enough for any trip.

    Best hard shell The Roofnest Sparrow Eye is one of the easiest rooftop tents to take down. Roofnest Sparrow Eye
    SEE IT

    The Roofnest Sparrow Eye is one of the easiest rooftop tents to take down.

    Best for overland The Yakima Skyrise is a thinner tent, but it’s very easy to install and remove from your car. Yakima Skyrise Medium
    SEE IT

    The Yakima Skyrise is a thinner tent, but it’s very easy to install and remove from your car.

    Sometimes sleeping in a rooftop tent on your car is the most comfortable way to get a good night’s sleep. On an especially steamy evening during a months-long cycling trip in the Uzbekistan desert, some of my traveling companions opted for sleeping atop their Sprinter van in lieu of trying to find a suitable place to pitch a tent near a sketchy land border crossing. They insisted it was the best night’s sleep they’d had in weeks. Rooftop tents, sometimes called “RTTs,” can make sleeping on top of your car or truck more appealing and comfortable than resting inside your car or pitching a tent nearby. They fold out from the roof, sometimes extending past it, and come equipped with mattresses built into the floor. No more trying to sleep on a narrow camp cot or noisy inflatable mat. If you’re going camping with a car or truck, don’t sleep on grabbing one of the best rooftop tents.

    How we picked the best rooftop tents

    I’ve tested and written about a variety of outdoor-related gear for many publications, including HuffPost, Hearst, Adventure Cycling Magazine, BBC Travel, Fodor’s, and many others. As a person who finds solace and inspiration in nature, I’ve camped in environments ranging from state parks with reserved spots to roadsides in Armenia and Georgia (the country) to rocky cliffs in Pakistan to the open plains of Mongolia.

    As a New Yorker whose primary mode of transportation is a bicycle, I do not drive. I do, however, have plenty of friends who have happily brought me along on camping adventures and weekend mountain biking trips, so long as I helped install and set up their rooftop tents. Over the years, I’ve used more than my fair share of rooftop tents and tried them on a wide array of vehicles.

    The best rooftop tents: Reviews & Recommendations

    Rooftop tents offer an innovative design that minimizes setup and maximizes comfort. When you pick one of the best, you’ll get a comfortable, cozy place to spend the night and stargaze. We’ve put together a lineup of rooftop tents that should fit any camper’s needs, including hard shells, soft shells, and options that specifically cater to a few popular SUVs.

    Best overall: Thule Tepui Kukenam 3

    Thule

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Thule Tepui Kukenam 3 is a versatile, well-made tent that fits on most cars and racks for a reasonable price.

    Specs

    • Design: Fold out
    • Capacity: 3 people
    • Seasons: 4
    • Floor area: 96 x 56 inches
    • Peak height: 52 inches
    • Windows: 3 side, 2 roof
    • Tent material: 600D ripstop nylon
    • Floor material: Aluminum w/insulated fiberglass sheet
    • Pole material: Aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 130 lbs
    • Packed size: 48 x 56 x 12 inches

    Pros

    • Versatile
    • Easy to set up

    Cons

    • No entrance awning

    The Thule Tepui Kukenam 3 is an excellent rooftop, no matter what you’re driving or where you’re going. Its spacious interior comfortably fits two adults, or even three if you leave your gear outside. It’s very quick and easy to set up, especially for a soft-shell tent. You simply unfold the hinged platform and the tent emerges almost fully formed, so you can be ready for bed in less than 10 minutes.

    It’s also incredibly tough, with 600D ripstop walls with taped seams and a 420D rainfly. Plus, it’s UV and mold-resistant. I’ve spent quite a few nights (and days) in a Kukenam waiting out torrential storms—the kind of storms that make you question why you wanted to sleep “out in the wilderness” to begin with—and have never experienced any damage or leakage. If you’re looking for something more breathable, it’s one of a handful of Thule Tepui tents that allows you to purchase alternate canopies at lighter weights for summer trips. No matter what’s going on outside, you’ll be cozy inside the Kukenam 3.

    Best hard shell: Roofnest Sparrow Eye

    roofnest

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Roofnest Sparrow Eye is perfect for anyone who likes to make a quick exit after a comfortable, good night’s sleep.

    Specs

    • Design: Clamshell
    • Capacity: 2 people
    • Seasons: 4
    • Floor area: 83 x 49 inches
    • Peak height: 44 inches
    • Windows: 2 side
    • Tent material: Polyurethane-coated polyester and cotton blend
    • Floor material: Fiberglass reinforced ASA/ABS
    • Pole material: Aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 130 lbs
    • Packed size: 50 x 88 x 6 inches

    Pros

    • Comfortable
    • Quick set up and take down
    • Easy to install on car 

    Cons

    • Expensive
    • Still large when packed

    Roofnest’s Sparrow tents were among the first hard-shell rooftop tents on the market, and they’re still some of the best. Made with exceptionally durable materials, the two-person Sparrow Eye’s waterproof rating is three times more than most other tents, and features a high-density foam mattress, which ensures you’ll get an exceptional night’s rest even in stormy weather.

    When set up, the tent has a triangle shape with the high end reaching a 44-inch peak height. The interior is plenty spacious for two people, with the low end still providing ample space to avoid any knee-knocking. The memory foam mattress provides ample cushioning so you won’t wake with sore shoulders from pressing into the metal platform underneath. There’s also tons of storage inside with a cargo net and two side pockets.

    The Sparrow Eye is incredibly easy to set up and take down quickly. I’m one of those people who believe that having the ability to launch a hasty exit is essential (not that I necessarily engage in nefarious activities, I’ve just never been a fan of the long goodbye). You can get the whole up or down in just two minutes. The initial installation is also very easy: The tent arrives pre-assembled and ready to install on your vehicle straight out of the box.

    Best environmental: Roofnest Falcon 2

    roofnest

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: At less than half the thickness of almost every other rooftop tent, the Roofnest Falcon 2 is an aerodynamic, streamlined option that minimizes drag.

    Specs

    • Design: Clamshell
    • Capacity: 2 people
    • Seasons: 3
    • Floor area: 86 x 48 inches
    • Peak height: 60 inches
    • Windows: 2 side
    • Tent material: 320g poly-cotton
    • Floor material: Honeycomb aluminum
    • Pole material: Aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 160 lbs
    • Packed size: 88 x 50 x 6.5 inches

    Pros

    • Comfortable
    • Easy setup
    • Aerodynamic size

    Cons

    • Expensive

    If you’re concerned about your tent slowing down and making your car less fuel-efficient, Roofnest also makes the Falcon 2, a tent designed with aerodynamics in mind. It opens up to a full 60 inches on the high side of its sloped roof, which is as tall as we’ve ever encountered. When collapsed, it packs down flat to minimize the impact of the tent on your ride.

    While the interior space is cozier than many of our other picks, the mattress is very comfortable for sleeping and gazing at the stars. The tent canopy, made from a polyester cotton blend, is more breathable than the ripstop found in many rooftop tents, though not quite as durable. It also offers a bunch of useful bells and whistles, including storage pockets, a cargo net, boot bags, and USB-powered LED lights.

    One thing to keep in mind: The thin packed size doesn’t allow you to store much else inside when in travel mode, though, including the ladder, so make sure you save some extra space in your car.

    Best for Tacoma: Thule Tepui Autana 3

    Thule

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: With an annex that drops down to ground level, this truck rooftop tent works well on the cab of a Tacoma (or a cab height bed rack).

    Specs

    • Design: Fold out
    • Capacity: 3 people
    • Seasons: 4
    • Floor area: 56 x 96 inches
    • Peak height: 52 inches
    • Windows: 3 side, 2 roof
    • tent material: 420D ripstop nylon
    • Floor material: Aluminum
    • Pole material: Aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 130 lbs
    • Packed size: 48 x 56 x 12 inches

    Pros

    • Includes an annex
    • Comfortable
    • Excellent weather protection

    Cons

    • Long conversion time
    • Expensive

    With a comfortable foam mattress, roomy interior, and two large sky windows, the Thule Tepui Autana 3 is one of the best bedroom hangouts you’ll get out of a soft-shell tent. The entrance awning protects the ladder from stormy weather and gives you some privacy from neighboring campers. If you open the two huge sky windows and remove the rain flap, you’ll sleep among the stars from inside your tent.

    The Autana 3 comes with an annex, which hangs off the side of the car from the tent floor, creating a whole other room to change, store gear, or relax. It has two doors so you can access the back of your vehicle from inside the annex, as well as windows on the remaining two sides. It doesn’t store inside the tent when packed up, though, so save some room for it.

    Best for 4runner: Thule Tepui Foothill

    Thule

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The low-profile Thule Tepui Foothill folds down in a long, narrow style, leaving room on your 4runner’s roof rack for other gear.

    Specs

    • Design: Fold out
    • Capacity: 2 people
    • Seasons: 3
    • Floor area: 84 x 47 inches
    • Peak height: 38 inches
    • Windows: 3 side, 2 roof
    • Tent material: 600D ripstop nylon
    • Floor material: welded aluminum
    • Pole material: aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 122 lbs
    • Packed size: 84 x 24 x 9.5 inches

    Pros

    • Quick installation
    • Compact
    • Durable

    Cons

    • Takes a long time to set up
    • Flimsy mattress

    The low-profile Thule Tepui Foothill is designed to break down into a smaller, more rectangular shape. In its compact form, it leaves plenty of room on your roof rack for other roof-rack-ready gear like a kayak.

    The A-frame-shaped Foothill provides amazing views with the roof panels open. They open lengthwise, so there’s only a single center support to potentially block your view. By opening the door and three walls, you can create a wonderful panoramic view to take in the scene as you settle in for the evening.

    Because of its slim travel size, the Foothill takes more time than other tents to convert into sleeping mode. That isn’t ideal, but a little extra setup time is a small price to pay for the size and capacity for killer views.

    Best for Jeep: iKamper Skycamp 3.0

    ikamper

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: A spacious, premium tent with tons of features that is the perfect companion for your all-season, all-weather jeep adventures.

    Specs

    • Design: Clamshell
    • Capacity: 4 people
    • Seasons: 4
    • Floor area: 83 x 77 inches
    • Peak height: 48 inches
    • Windows: 3 side, 1 roof
    • Tent material: Black-out 300 gsm poly-cotton canvas
    • Floor material: Honeycomb aluminum
    • Pole material: aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 165 lbs
    • Packed size: 85.5 x 55 x 13 inches

    Pros

    • Extremely durable
    • Comfortable mattress
    • Easy to convert

    Cons

    • Heavy
    • Expensive

    An expandable, hard-shell rooftop tent that sets up in 60 seconds, the Skycamp 3.0 offers ample sleeping space inside for three adults (or two adults and two children) on a very plush 2.5-inch insulated polyfoam mattress. It’s definitely one of the most comfortable mattresses we’ve tried in a rooftop tent. It almost feels like something you’d find in a hotel.

    At the same time, the Skycamp 3.0 was built with a durable, double-layered shell, thick poly-cotton canvas, and waterproof zippers on the doors and windows to withstand the elements, including snow and hail. With a jeep and your Skycamp, you can weather almost any kind of storm.

    Best for overland: Yakima Skyrise Medium

    BackCountry

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Yakima Skyrise Medium is a comfortable, reasonably priced tent that’s incredibly easy to put on and take off your vehicle.

    Specs

    • Design: Fold out
    • Capacity: 3 people
    • Seasons: 3
    • Floor area: 96 x 56 inches
    • Peak height: 48 inches
    • Windows: 3 side, 2 roof
    • Tent material: 210D nylon
    • Floor material: Aluminum
    • Pole material: Aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 115 lbs
    • Packed size: 58 x 48 x 16 inches

    Pros

    • Tool-free mounting
    • Medium price range
    • On the light side

    Cons

    • Mounting system limits width

    If you think you’ll need to install and remove your tent from the roof of your car, you should consider the Yakima Skyrise. It features a tool-free, quick-release mounting system, making that process very quick and easy. You can also position the Skyrise to fold out the back of your vehicle as opposed to the side if you’d rather, something no other tents we’ve found allow for without additional drilling and labor.

    At 48 inches, the Skyrise is on the short side as far as rooftop tents go, but I still found the interior adequately spacious. The awning is completely removable, so you can detach the rainfly and open the windows to achieve an almost completely open-air experience, comparable to sleeping on the top of a Sprinter van in the Uzbekistan desert near a sketchy land border crossing.

    That being said, it isn’t made from the most durable stock. Its 210D nylon is much thinner than most of our picks. The workmanship is stellar, but it’s just not made with materials as rugged as some other options.

    Best budget: Smittybilt Overlander

    Smittybilt

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Smittybilt Overlander offers many of the same features as high-end rooftop tents for less than half the price.

    Specs

    • Design: Fold out
    • Capacity: 2 people
    • Seasons: 3
    • Floor area: 56 x 96 inches
    • Peak height: 51 inches
    • Windows: 3 side, 2 roof
    • Main tent materials: 600D ripstop nylon
    • Floor material: Aluminum
    • Pole material: Aluminum/spring steel
    • Weight: 144 lbs
    • Packed size: 48 x 56 x 12 inches

    Pros

    Cons

    • Heavy
    • Velcro cover is awkward to take on and off

    Smittybilt, as a company, has a reputation for manufacturing durable, sturdy, no-nonsense products, and the Overlander tent makes it clear why. The polyurethane canopy made from 600D nylon stands up well to all kinds of weather including torrential downpours and the ladder, at 17 inches, is one of the widest in rooftop tents.

    Installing the Overlander on your vehicle is a more labor-intensive process than our other picks. It doesn’t come with all the tools you’d want for the installation—a ratchet set would be nice—and the ladder doesn’t offer enough adjustable height options, which has led many users to drill new holes to fit their cars. That said, once you have things set up, it’s straightforward to set up and take down.

    Despite this, the Overlander is an exceptional value. It’s one of only a handful of options that costs less than $1,500, so it’s worth considering based on price alone.

    What to consider when buying the best rooftop tents

    Picking a rooftop tent isn’t all that different from picking a standard camping tent, but there are a few extra things to think about and they are extremely important. Since you’re setting it up on a car and sleeping many feet off the ground, it’s important that you take extra care and make sure you’re buying something that’s made for your car or truck and will support the weight of everyone and everything that goes inside it.

    Once you’ve narrowed things down, the best rooftop tents will, like other kinds of tents, provide privacy protection from the elements and things that go bump or buzz in the night. They’ll also be easy to assemble, so you can spend more time enjoying the other aspects of camping, like slumbering under a star filled sky. Let’s walk through the process of picking a rooftop tent.

    Make sure it’s a good fit

    Rooftop tents are not one-size-fits-all, so you need to make sure that you’re buying one that will pair with your car.

    Rooftop tents connect to your car via a roof rack. If you don’t have one installed, the tent won’t be able to attach, so that’s a dealbreaker. Roof racks range in complexity from simple cross bars mounted on the factory-installed roof rails to permanently installed heavy-duty platforms or baskets. Third-party roof racks are generally a better option for carrying a tent, as they can generally handle more weight than their manufacturer-installed counterparts.

    If your car’s properly equipped, you’ll need to know the distance between the rack’s crossbars and the dimensions of your car’s roof. Each tent requires a certain minimum distance between the bars to fit on your roof, so compare the two numbers to see if the tent will fit. Likewise, the closed tent should fit on the roof so it doesn’t extend out past the front of your car or off the sides while you’re driving.

    You’ll also want to check your roof rack’s “dynamic weight capacity,” which tells you how much weight it can support. Most tents weigh more than 100 pounds and most roof racks are made to handle up to 160 pounds, so the tent may push your rack’s limits.

    Some tents also have additional requirements, so make sure to read the product description for the tent thoroughly before committing.

    Space and static weight

    Most companies describe tent size based on how many people can lie down and “sleep comfortably” at the same time. “Comfortably” in tent sizing is a relative term, though. If you are traveling with a platonic companion, you may find a 3-person rooftop tent more comfortable than a 2-person one. You should also look at the tent’s “static weight” capacity, which tells you how much weight the tent can support when set up in camping mode.

    Ultimately, we recommend going with the smallest size that feels comfortable for you. Just keep in mind that the bigger the tent, the heavier and more cumbersome it will be.

    Installation and setup

    When using a rooftop tent, there are two types of setup. Before your trip, you’ll need to install the tent on your car or truck’s roof rack so it’s ready to use when you need it. In most cases, you’ll leave the tent on top of your vehicle for the duration of your trip. When you need to make camp, you’ll need to pitch or “convert” your tent from its flattened travel mode into a usable shelter.

    Installing a rooftop tent on your car is almost always a two-person job as even the lightest options weigh over 100 pounds. Many tents will also feature additional assembly when using them for the first time.

    The length of time it takes to convert your tent can vary quite a bit, but they all take much less time to set up than your average tent. Depending on the design, you may need to bend a frame into place, but many take just a few minutes to set up and take down.

    Hard shell or soft shell?

    There are two general types of rooftop tents: hard shell or soft shell, which vary based on the materials used to make the tent and how they are constructed.

    Soft-shell tents are constructed with a hefty waterproof soft cover attached to the floor platform, and fold out beyond the edges of your vehicle’s roof. Poles and hinges hold it in place when in camping mode. Soft-shell tents usually have removable covers that protect the tent while in travel mode. These covers usually attach via velcro or straps and buckles. Some soft-shell covers can be cumbersome and awkward to stow between uses.

    Hard-shell tents feature a fiberglass, plastic, or aluminum shell that opens and closes, clamshell style. This shell also doubles as the cover when the tent is in travel mode. The tent canopy folds down inside when closed. Most hard-shell tents do not have a larger footprint than the roof they sit upon which doesn’t affect their compatibility—it just means that hard shell tents, in general, have a smaller inner area than soft-shell ones. 

    While soft shells cost and weigh less than hard shells, they are normally not quite as durable nor sturdy. They also tend to be less aerodynamic and take longer to set up than a hard-shell version. When deciding which to buy, consider what features are most important to you. If you want to spend less and carry lower weight, go with a soft shell. If you want a tent that sets up quickly (in some cases in less than a minute) while also helping to keep your gas mileage down, a hard shell may be the right fit for you.

    Tent durability and warmth

    Tent canopies, the fabric walls of the tent, are often constructed with ripstop nylon ranging in thickness from 400-600 denier (D), which indicates a fabric’s weight and durability. The higher the number, the heavier the material is. Both of the Roofnest tents on our list feature polyurethane-coated polyester and cotton blend fabric attached to a hard shell tent design. The polyurethane makes the material especially durable and water-repellent.

    Like all outdoor gear, RTTs are rated for a specific number of seasons (spring, summer, autumn, winter). Four-season tents feature heftier materials that will keep you warmer and can withstand being pelted with sleet or hail.

    Mattress comfort

    Many rooftop tents feature an integrated mattress, so the whole tent is your bed. The thickness—and, by extension, comfort—of these mattresses varies quite a bit, though. Less expensive tents like the Smitty Overlander, our budget pick, have a pretty thin and stiff mattress, while more expensive tents often stuff in more padding. Some companies, like Thule, offer a thicker sleeping pad as an optional upgrade. 

    Most tent mattresses come with a removable cover and an anti-moisture mat that goes underneath, so make sure the materials for the mattress are waterproof and breathable.

    What about an automatic tent?

    Some hard-shell options automatically pop up into shape with a push or nudge—sort of like an automatic sliding door on a car that closes after a soft push. As you might suspect, automatic opening tents cost more—they also have moving parts that could break, likely reducing their lifespan.

    FAQs

    Q: Can you put a rooftop tent on any car?

    Yes and no. Any car with a well-made roof rack should be able to handle a rooftop tent. That said, different tents have different size and weight requirements, so tents and cars are not universally interchangeable. If you aren’t using an SUV or a truck, you probably also want to measure the roof of your car to make sure that the packed tent doesn’t extend past the front of the car or hang off the sides.

    Q: Why are rooftop tents so expensive?

    Rooftop tents are far more complex than your average tent. Unlike standard camping tents, rooftop tents have a rigid floor and a built-in mattress to make sleep on your car comfortable. They also usually include sturdier walls and sky windows for what many consider a more comfortable experience. Effectively rooftop tents function more like a portable room than a traditional tent, and those extra features make the tents more expensive.

    If you’re currently not able to justify the expense of a rooftop tent, check out the best camping tents (linked in our “What to consider” section) for our thoughts on conventional models.

    Q: Do roof racks and rooftop tents affect gas mileage?

    Yes, the wind drag and extra weight of a rooftop tent will impact your car’s gas mileage. To minimize the effects of the tent on your car’s efficiency, consider its weight and the height of the tent in its packed form.

    Final thoughts on the best rooftop tents

    If you’re camping with your vehicle, the best rooftop tents are a wonderful way to spend the night in the great outdoors. One pretty much eliminates the need to search for an ideal, flat, section of ground to pitch a tent, and cuts down significantly on tent setup time. The integrated mattress also pretty much guarantees that you’ll be more comfortable than sleeping on the ground. It’s expensive, for sure, but a worthy investment for the right kind of camper.

    The post The best rooftop tents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best wood chippers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-wood-chipper/ Wed, 24 Mar 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278431
    A lineup of wood chippers on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    A wood chipper will leave your property looking immaculate year-round, while answering the eternal question how much wood could a wood chipper chip if a wood chipper could chip wood.

    The post The best wood chippers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of wood chippers on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best electric one of the best wood chippers on wheels Patriot Products CSV-2515
    SEE IT

    A quieter option perfect for shredding leaves and smaller branches (up to 2 1/2 inches in diameter).

    Best heavy-duty best heavy duty wood chipper All Power America APWC460E Heavy Duty Durable Chipper
    SEE IT

    Capable of chewing through wood up to 6 inches in diameter, with an adjustable expulsion chute so you can aim where the chips go.

    Best budget SunJoe makes one of the best wood chipper machines Sun Joe CJ602E-GRY
    SEE IT

    Easy to store and to move, and great for turning small debris into garden mulch on the spot.

    To keep your outdoor spaces tidy, it’s important to have the right equipment—like lawn mowers, wood chippers, and whatever else is required to stay on top of seasonal and weekly maintenance. A well-kept yard can make your home come alive, and serene outdoor areas not only bring joy but also add plenty of value to your home. While lawn mowing and garden equipment are always considered essentials, another useful piece of equipment for homeowners could be a wood chipper. The best wood chipper will make yard maintenance and cleanup easy, allowing you to use fallen leaves, branches, and garden waste from your property as mulch- or nutrient-rich compost. 

    How we chose the best wood chippers

    Some of us may be city slickers here on the PopSci gear team, but something raw and feral is unleashed when it’s time to write about lawn care machinery. Maybe it’s the inner prehistoric human in us—or maybe we’re all just a dad who looks for an excuse to go to Home Depot, explain to the salesperson what a Phillips head screwdriver is, and then go home and tinker in the shed. With that said, we tested, conducted researched, and might have consulted our own lawn-loving dads to compile our list of the best wood chippers.

    The best wood chippers: Reviews & Recommendations

    The best wood chipper for lawn maintenance will be easy to use, portable, and powerful enough to tackle all your yard waste. These come in different sizes and styles, but all are considered power tools that use either gas- or electric-powered engines to operate blades to chip, shred, or mulch.

    Best electric: Patriot Products CSV-2515

    Patriot Products

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This versatile machine can handle branches, shred leaves, offers a selection of sizes of chips, and operates quietly.

    Specs

    • Power source: Corded electric
    • Max cutting diameter: 2.5 inches
    • Motor: 2 HP
    • Chute: Yes

    Pros

    • Weighs less than 100 lbs.
    • Doubles as a leaf shredder
    • No gas or oil

    Cons

    • Reviews note that it clogs easily

    This easy-to-maintain electric wood chipper is as quiet as it is versatile. It plugs into any standard 110-volt outlet or can be used with a heavy-duty extension cord less than 100 ft., and its large wheels and lightweight make-up allow for easy transport around the yard. It can chip branches up to 2.5 inches in diameter, meaning it can tackle fallen branches from a large gust of wind. But it also doubles as a leaf shredder, too. Safety goggles and a collection bag are included, and the included two-year warranty is automatically extended one extra year. All in all, it’s a wood chipper that will make you the envy of the neighborhood.

    Best heavy-duty: All Power America APWC460E Heavy Duty Durable Chipper

    All Power America

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This heavy-duty wood chipper has enough power to cut up to a 6.2-inch diameter piece of wood, and the adjustable chute and wheels make the machine easier to use.

    Specs

    • Power source: Gas
    • Max cutting diameter: 6.2 inches
    • Motor: 15 HP motor
    • Chute: Yes, adjustable

    Pros

    • Adjustable chute
    • Powerful motor
    • High cutting speed

    Cons

    • Expensive

    If you’re a landscaper on the side or have a large yard with big trees, this wood chipper is for you. It has a 15 HP motor and a max cutting speed of 2,200 RPM to demolish wood up to 6.2 inches in diameter—that’s a thick branch! Dual reversible double-edge blades provide a longer blade life, with an adjustable expulsion shoot. All this power comes at a cost, though, because this machine is expensive.

    Best mulcher: Landworks Leaf Mulcher

    Landworks

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Durable and portable thanks to its 6-inch wheels and support stand, the Landworks Leaf Mulcher is electric-powered and user-friendly. It even has overload protection to avoid jamming or clogging. 

    Specs

    • Power source: Corded electric
    • Max cutting diameter: .5 inches
    • Motor: 2.4 HP motor
    • Chute: Yes

    Pros

    • Quiet
    • Overload protection
    • All-terrain wheels for easy transport

    Cons

    • Not suitable for larger branches

    Fall leaves are beautiful and fun to jump in, but at some point, it’s time for them to be incorporated into the compost bin. This leaf shredder has three 11-inch blades that move at 4,100 RPM to turn the crunchy leaves into earthy confetti. Overload protection prevents any clogs, and 6-inch wheels make for easy transport. It’s also lightweight at 54 lbs. Since it’s electric, it doesn’t produce smog or noise—making it eco-, user-, and neighbor-friendly.

    Best small: Landworks Wood Chipper Shredder

    Landworks

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: A great option for yard maintenance and green living, the electric-powered 120-volt AC motor on this wood chipper cuts branches up to 1.5 inches in diameter, as well as leaves and clippings, minus the smog that comes with gas models.

    Specs

    • Power source: Corded electric
    • Max cutting diameter: 1.79 inches
    • Motor: 15 HP
    • Chute: Yes

    Pros

    • Included push paddle to feed material into hopper
    • Instant start
    • Easy to use and set-up

    Cons

    • Not for larger jobs

    This small wood chipper packs a big punch. It’s durable thanks to its strong plastic body and cuts wood up to 1.57 inches with a 4,100 RPM motor. Its two dual-edge blades are reversible, allowing for longevity, and an overload protection switch stops clogs in their tracks. An included push paddle helps you safely feed material into the hopper, and an instant start switch means you can get to shreddin’. It’s also quiet and eco-friendly, and convenient wheels make storage easy. 

    Best budget: Sun Joe CJ602E-GRY

    Sun Joe

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: A high-quality wood chipper can be yours for less than $150.

    Specs

    • Power source: Corded electric
    • Max cutting diameter: 1.5 inches
    • Motor: 2.5 HP
    • Chute: Yes

    Pros

    • Portable and compact
    • Electric
    • Compact wheels for easy transport

    Cons

    • Better for lighter job

    Great for small-duty jobs, this affordable wood chipper can handle twigs up to 1.5 inches in diameter, as well as softer organic matter. The feed on this is on the smaller side, so again, it’s better suited for lighter jobs. 

    What to consider when buying the best wood chippers

    Wood chippers not only chip up dry and fresh wood but can also shred and mulch organic matter. Commercial-grade wood chippers are best for large properties with larger branches and heavy-duty jobs. Most typical homeowners will benefit from wood chippers that are a chipper/shredder combination, as these machines are less expensive and easier to store while still having the power to handle up to 3-inch diameter branches. Higher-end models will allow you to select sizes for output of chips. As with all power tools, safety measures must be followed when using and operating any type of chipper.

    For smaller jobs and gardens, homeowners can opt for a mulch or compost shredder, which looks like a small version of a wood chipper. Machines that focus on mulching operate with blades and can handle small branches. The smallest types of mulchers use nylon that is attached to a drum to break apart matter, and work similarly to a weed whacker. These smaller mulchers with nylon work only on softer organic matter and cannot be used with wood. Here’s what you should know before adding a wood chipper to your cart:

    Noise and power source

    If you’ve ever walked around a neighborhood with well-maintained yards hoping for a peaceful stroll, you know it’s easier said than done. Gasoline-fueled outdoor power equipment is not only incredibly loud but also produces smog-like pollution as exhaust. Luckily, battery-powered electric and corded yard equipment has come a long way. This gear competes with gasoline in terms of power and performance for shredding wood up to 2 inches in diameter. Electric-powered equipment is easier to maintain and much quieter to operate, and produces virtually no smells. Suddenly, you’re a pretty popular neighbor!

    The best electric wood chipper will operate quietly and be easier to maintain than a gas-powered model. Higher-end electric models will typically be able to handle larger jobs and offer a variety of chipping sizes. Smaller models will be more affordable and better for small jobs. For chipping jobs (unlike lawn mowing), the machine is set up in one stationary spot in your yard while you do the work, so a corded electric model is most convenient. With the machine plugged in, there are no concerns of batteries running out of power.

    Property size

    When you’ve got a large property to maintain and anticipate you will need to shred wood over 3 to 4 inches in diameter, it’s important to get a heavy-duty machine that can handle the job. The best heavy-duty wood chipper will be gasoline-powered because, despite the improvements in electric power tools, gasoline still tops the ranks in terms of strength. 

    While a commercial wood chipper can handle impressively large pieces of wood, they are also very big, expensive, and not generally necessary for homeowners. For residential purposes. a diameter of around 4 to 6 inches is considered a heavy-duty machine job. When you consider overall cost and size requirements for storage, it’s best to hire a service for commercial-grade jobs and opt instead for a heavy-duty model for home use.

    Job size

    Wood chippers have a maximum branch diameter, which indicates how successfully they can reduce wood to chips—in other words, you’ll want to get one that matches the size of the branches you plan to be processing. If you’re planning to grind up small fruit tree branches or even young sapling trees, a small wood chipper capable of grinding branches up to 3 inches in diameter might be more than you’ll ever need.

    Since most homeowners won’t be looking for heavy-duty stump grinders or felling mighty oaks, something designed for smaller jobs is likely perfect for everyday yard maintenance.

    Wood chippers vs. mulchers

    If you have a tree-filled yard, you know firsthand how much work clearing fallen leaves can be. While you can certainly spend hours raking and wrestling leaves into bags, there is another solution: mulching or composting. The best mulchers use specialized blades that can shred leaves, small twigs, and garden trimmings into small pieces. Mulchers look like smaller wood chippers, and because leaves and twigs are softer than wood, the machines are typically less powerful and also more affordable. 

    Mulch has many benefits; it’s great to place around your yard and in your planting beds as a way to add nutrients, as well as prevent weed growth. A mulcher will save you money in the long run and help you avoid trips to the plant nursery—plus homemade mulch tends to be healthier for your garden than store-bought.

    FAQs

    Q: How much do wood chippers cost?

    Wood chippers start at just over $110 for smaller, lighter jobs, and can go up to $3,000 for heavy-duty and commercial-grade wood chippers.

    Q: What is the difference between a wood chipper and mulcher?

    The main difference between a wood chipper and a mulcher is power. Wood chippers, especially heavy-duty machines, are designed to chip larger pieces of wood and branches. Mulchers, sometimes called shredders, are smaller and less powerful. They help turn small garden cleanup into mulch to repurpose around your yard.

    Q: How big of a wood chipper do I need?

    The size of your wood chipper depends on the number of loads you will be processing and the overall size of your property. Consider the maximum size of tree branches the chipper can handle, as you do not want to overload your machine. Most homeowners won’t need a professional-grade design and will benefit from a mini wood chipper that also functions as a shredder/mulcher. 

    Q: What should I look for when buying a wood chipper?

    When shopping for this outdoor power equipment, consider the size and type of wood and other debris you will be chipping. Look for a shredder with a vertically extended, adjustable chute for safer and easier chipping. Decide whether you prefer an electric or gasoline-powered wood chipper, and the noise level you can bear. Lightweight, portable machines with wheels will be the most practical for average homeowners.

    Final thoughts on the best wood chippers

    The best wood chipper for your yard will be durable, powerful, and allow you to clear small clippings and thicker branches. Remember, gasoline-fueled models are more powerful than their electric counterparts, so they’re best suited for large properties. However, if you’re worried about noise levels and environmental impact, electric is the way to go.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best wood chippers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Get your spring on with 52% off AeroGarden at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/aerogarden-spring-amazon-deal/ Wed, 22 Mar 2023 16:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=521896
    An AeroGarden hydorponic garden system on a bright green background with a sheer overlay of grass.
    Amanda Reed

    Get some green thumb garden cred without breaking a sweat by snagging an AeroGarden for cheap on Amazon.

    The post Get your spring on with 52% off AeroGarden at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    An AeroGarden hydorponic garden system on a bright green background with a sheer overlay of grass.
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Are you someone who has managed to bring a cactus to its untimely end? Does a pothos quiver in your wake? If you’re known as the Green Reaper amongst your friends and fauna, jump on this chance to get a deeply discounted AeroGarden—available at a whopping 52% off for a limited time—to do the watering work for you.

    AeroGarden Harvest Hydroponic Indoor Garden $79.95 (Was $164.95)

    AeroGarden

    SEE IT

    This hydroponic garden—which uses water instead of soil to house your plants—makes growing herbs easy. It includes six seed pods: Genovese basil, curly parsley, dill, thyme, Thai basil, and mint. You can also purchase pods that grow salad greens and red heirloom cherry tomatoes if you want to change up what’s in your garden. There’s practically no mess thanks to the distinct lack of soil, and the easy-to-read control panel lets you know when to add water and plant food. You don’t even need to worry about your little plant babies getting light—the unit turns the 20-watt LED lights on and off. You’ll have herbs, flowers, and even veggies in your home year-round in no time. Soon, you’ll dream of seedling starter trays and raised garden beds.

    So you’ve proven yourself a capable farmer, but what about your cooking skills? Turn those veggies and herbs into a delicious meal with a Blackstone 1984 Original 36-Inch Flat Top Griddle—which will only cost you $304.18, 39% off from its $499.99 regular price. Make a fire stir-fry with your AeroGarden peppers, or stick some of that basil in your meat mix for the best burgers in the neighborhood.

    However, these deals aren’t perennial; we don’t know if they will return next year or even tomorrow, so hurry and take advantage of the sale before it withers away.

    Here are other gardening and outdoor deals that are growing on us:

    The post Get your spring on with 52% off AeroGarden at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best waterproof speakers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-waterproof-speakers/ Mon, 11 Apr 2022 14:00:02 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=435887
    The best waterproof speakers composited
    Stan Horaczek

    Keep the tunes flowing even if your speaker gets drenched.

    The post The best waterproof speakers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best waterproof speakers composited
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall JBL Flip 6 is the best overall waterproof speaker. JBL Flip 6
    SEE IT

    A great midrange speaker with solid sound, portability, and full protection from the elements.

    Best indoor/outdoor Sonos Move is the best indoor/outdoor waterproof speaker. Sonos Move
    SEE IT

    An indoor/outdoor speaker with excellent sound that you can expand into a full system.

    Best budget Tribit Stormbox Tribit Stormbox Micro 2
    SEE IT

    Great battery life and sound in an ultra-portable package.

    Waterproof speakers can pump out your favorite music any time, rain or shine. If you want to rock out in, near, or under the water, a great speaker that can play a smash even if it takes a splash is a must. And you don’t need to make any sacrifices for sound quality, nor should you have to bend on battery life, portability, and connectivity. We’re here to help you find the best waterproof speakers, whether you’re looking to blast Anderson.Paak’s “Malibu” at a pool party or sit in your feels during a Phoebe Bridgers shower session. 

    How we chose the best waterproof speakers

    We selected our favorite waterproof speakers by considering personal experiences with powered and smart speakers of all sorts alongside other user impressions and then combining those with extensive research on top-performing models. We looked at Ingress Protection (IP) rating and other speaker specs—like frequency response and maximum sound pressure level—to ensure durability and sound quality. From there, we considered battery life, Bluetooth range, and special features to select the best from a fairly dense pool. 

    The best waterproof speakers: Reviews & Recommendations

    Our selection of waterproof speakers comes from some of the best-known audio companies, in addition to impressive newcomers disrupting this space. Each speaker has its own standout feature, but we’ve balanced our picks to make sure there’s something for everyone regardless of feature set or cost. Because these speakers connect to devices over Bluetooth, a widely used technical standard, you’ll be able to pair them with any smartphone, tablet, or computer.

    Best overall: JBL Flip 6 

    Erin Behan

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The JBL Flip 6 is a compact waterproof party speaker that sounds and looks great on the go or at home. 

    Specs 

    • Battery Life: 12 hours 
    • Bluetooth Range: approx 130 feet 
    • IP Rating: IP67

    Pros 

    • PartyBoost technology 
    • Bluetooth 5.1
    • GraphicEQ

    Cons 

    • No aux input 
    • Battery life is just okay 

    The JBL Flip 6 (which our reviewer loved) is a great portable Bluetooth speaker for any listening experience, dry or wet. With a durable build, rubberized onboard controls, and an IP67, this model is protected from more than just water; it’s protected against dust and drops, so you can feel confident taking it on any outdoor adventure. The Flip 6 has dual passive radiators, a separate tweeter, a purported frequency response range of 63 Hz – 20 kHz, and a max volume of around 87 dB, so you’ll be satisfied with the overall sound quality.

    Plus, you can customize your audio using the graphic EQ on the JBL Portable app, available for both iOS and Android systems. This app also lets you connect your Flip 6 to another compatible JBL speaker with PartyBoost mode, increasing volume, creating a stereo pair, and widening coverage during larger gatherings. This model can only connect wirelessly via Bluetooth 5.1, however; it doesn’t have an aux, USB, or any other wired input. It does feature a USB-C quick charging port, which will come in handy if you like to listen at loud volumes because while the Flip 6 has up to 12 hours of battery life, that number can diminish if you’re blasting music. 

    Need an even bigger bump in battery and listening levels? There’s the equally IP67 Charge 5 or Pulse 5 or any number of other JBL party speakers to choose from.

    Best portable: UE Wonderboom 3

    Brandt Ranj

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The UE Wonderboom 3 has continued to top our charts when it comes to portable, affordable, waterproof sound. 

    Specs 

    • Battery Life: 14 hours 
    • Bluetooth Range: 131 feet 
    • IP Rating: IP67

    Pros 

    • Durability 
    • Volume 
    • Portability 

    Cons 

    • No microphone 

    Thanks to its size, the Wonderboom 3 is one of our favorite shower speakers, and one of our favorite small speakers in general—a model we return to again and again when it’s time to recommend portable, waterproof audio. With its 360-degree sound coverage, a 75 Hz – 20 kHz frequency response, and volume that reaches up to 87 dB, the Wonderboom 3 allows you to hear the music over the sound of crashing waves, a high-pressure showerhead, or poolside splashing. It has an IP67 rating, which means it is waterproof and dust resistant, so you can take it with you just about anywhere you go.

    Onboard controls will let you play, pause, and skip tracks without touching your phone, plus it’s buoyant, so you can plunge it in the pool or plop it in the bathtub alongside your rubber ducks, aka your backup singers. This speaker weighs less than 1 pound and measures 4.3 by 3.8 inches with a flexible, looped handle to strap the speaker to a bike, bag, or belt loop for maximum portability. If you’re looking for a waterproof speaker that you can easily transport from the beach to the bath, the Wonderboom 3 (one of several excellent Ultimate Ears party speakers) is a great option. 

    Best indoor/outdoor: Sonos Move

    Stan Horaczek

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Sonos Move is a great speaker for mixed-use listening; it’s part of an expandable network that sounds excellent at home and transitions well for outdoor listening. 

    Specs 

    • Battery Life: 11 hours 
    • Bluetooth Range: 300 feet 
    • IP Rating: IP56

    Pros 

    • Voice Assistant
    • Sound quality 
    • Bluetooth range
    • Expandable

    Cons 

    • Pricey
    • Does not natively support Siri

    The Sonos Move has an IP56 rating, as opposed to an IPX7 rating, which means that it’s not fully submersible but is protected from high-pressure water jets spraying in any direction. This essentially means it can withstand rain, steam, splashes, and the accidental dunk here or there. We still consider the Move “waterproof” and while you don’t want to leave it floating in the pool, you can access impressive sound quality anywhere you go.

    It’s particularly great for those who want to purchase one outstanding speaker rather than separate indoor/outdoor models that may save money but not sound as solid. This speaker—easily transportable via its built-in handle—boasts two Class-D digital amplifiers, a downward-firing tweeter to take care of high frequencies, and a mid-woofer to carry midrange frequencies with low-end support.

    Plus, you can customize your sound using the Sonos app’s adjustable EQ, though Automatic Trueplay helps you avoid much tweaking by adjusting equalization based on the listening environment and content. Connect to the Move via Bluetooth 5.0, AirPlay 2, or Wi-Fi, which, when used, will let you stream higher-quality, well-balanced audio and pair with other Sonos speakers to create a more robust stereo and/or multiroom sound system.

    Wi-Fi also enables you to access voice assistants like Amazon Alexa or Google Assistant. If you love the richly musical Sonos sound ecosystem but want something compact that you can submerge, check out the Sonos Roam, the Move’s little brother with an IP67 rating. 

    Best premium shower speaker: Bang & Olufsen Beosound A1 (2nd Gen)

    Bang & Olufsen

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Beosound A1 is a well-constructed, portable, waterproof speaker from high-end brand Bang & Olufsen. It’s sleek and compact with a looped handle, perfect for hanging on a showerhead or resting atop a caddy. 

    Specs 

    • Battery Life: 18 hours 
    • Bluetooth Range: up to 800 feet 
    • IP Rating: IP67

    Pros 

    • Sound quality 
    • Bluetooth Range
    • Battery Life
    • Looped carrying strap

    Cons 

    • Volume is a bit limited

    While just about any of these speakers could support shower karaoke, the Beosound A1 (2nd Gen) has impeccable features and superb design; it measures approximately 5 x 5 inches with a flat bottom and features a looped candle so it can safely rest on a soap dish or hang from your showerhead.

    Bang & Olufsen produces high-end audiophile favorites, so while this speaker is pricey, you’re guaranteed to get great sound from your purchase. When tested, the 360-degree driver and aptX Adaptive codec produce a wide soundstage and improved performance with an accurate frequency response between 63 Hz and 13.5 kHz. Audio is adjustable using the Beosonic app’s sound customization feature and five EQ presets.

    Three omnidirectional microphones increase the clarity of phone calls, if you’re inclined to conference rather than just have a solo relaxation session. At the same time, built-in voice and onboard controls mean you can play, pause, skip, and more without reaching a sudsy hand out for your definitely not-waterproof phone. 

    If a compact speaker sounds like everything you need, but the Beosund’s price is prohibitive, check out the JBL Clip 4

    Best sustainable: House of Marley Get Together 2

    Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

    SEE IT

    Specs 

    • Battery Life: 20 hours 
    • Bluetooth Range: up to 98 feet 
    • IP Rating: IP65

    Pros 

    • Made from sustainable materials
    • Powerbank

    Cons 

    • Price
    • A little bass heavy 

    House of Marley’s Get Together 2 is a mid-sized waterproof Bluetooth speaker whose signature feature is that sustainable materials are used to make it. The speaker is made of bamboo, recycled plastic bottles, and recycled aluminum, and it comes in totally recyclable packaging. Not every material used for the Get Together 2 is environmentally friendly, but it’s far more sustainable than the other speakers we recommend. 

    As for its audio hardware, House of Marley designed the Get Together 2 with a four-driver system comprised of two woofers and a pair of tweeters, powered by a 40-watt amplifier. Its sound, while clear and loud, is a little bottom-heavy even on the Signature Sound EQ setting. It’s not that treble or midrange frequencies are squished—there are still a lot of details in vocals and drums—it’s just that bass is a lot more prominent. You can switch between three EQ modes (signature, bass boost, acoustic) by pressing a button on the back of the speaker, though we’d have liked to see more fine-grained controls available. 

    On the technical side, the Get Together 2 has many non-essential but nice-to-have features we’ve come to expect from a speaker in its size class, but not necessarily from waterproof models. Its USB-C port can charge other devices or quick-charge the speaker itself. The Get Together 2’s IP65 rating means it can be splashed or used in the sand without the risk of damage. Its 20-hour battery life may seem a little low compared to smaller speakers, but the Get Together Go 2 has more power-hungry audio hardware, so it’s in line with our expectations. If you care about both sustainability and sound, House of Marley’s Get Together 2 is a worthwhile portable speaker to pick up if you’ve got a $249 budget.

    The company also offers a smaller $170 version, aptly called the Get Together 2 Mini, with an even better IP67 rating, two drivers, and a battery that lasts 15 hours.

    Best for Android: Sony SRS-XG300

    Brandt Ranj

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Sony’s SRS-XG300 is the only waterproof Bluetooth speaker we’ve found that supports the high-resolution LDAC codec.

    Specs

    • Battery Life: 25 hours
    • Bluetooth Range: 98.4 feet
    • IP Rating: IP67

    Pros

    • Advanced-resolution codec support
    • Portability for its size
    • Loud sound

    Cons

    • Price

    Sony has never shied away from making high-end audio hardware, and the SRS-XG300 is its latest premium portable Bluetooth speaker—a waterproof one to boot. After years of refining internal components, Sony gave its portable speakers a much-needed top-to-bottom redesign. The SRS-XG300 is a lot sleeker, with a mesh covering pleasing to the eye and a handle that makes the relatively big speaker easier to carry. Indeed, carrying it from room to room or from the car to the beach never felt like a chore. Sony’s focus on building speakers with lights continues here, but they’re no longer a main focal point; LED rings surround the drivers on both sides of this speaker, but they never look garish, plus you can turn them off at the push of a button.

    The SRS-XG300 is larger than most of our Bluetooth speaker recommendations, but the extra space has many big benefits. This speaker lasts up to 25 hours per charge while delivering far better sound than smaller speakers. This was the best-sounding portable Bluetooth speaker I tested this year, with refined-sounding lows, mids, and treble without distortion at high volumes. Sibilance and other audio abnormalities were also absent, though this will always come down to how your music was recorded and mastered. There’s even an integrated microphone w/ echo-cancelling technology if you want to use the SRS-XG300 as a crisp, natural-sounding speakerphone.

    We can recommend the SRS-XG300 to anyone, especially Android users whose devices support the LDAC codec. Without getting too into the weeds, devices that support this technology can play advanced resolution audio at a bitrate of 990kbps (kilobytes per second), which is approaching 1,411kbps—what is considered full CD quality. For reference, aptX (a more commonly used audio codec) transmits audio at a maximum rate of 352kbps, and even the less compressed aptX HD is capped at 576kbps (though at an improved 48kHz). This difference doesn’t matter when you’re streaming music from Spotify, which streams at 320kkps. Still, it does if you’re using a compatible device that supports LDAC and listening to high-resolution audio files (or taking advantage of Apple Music, TIDAL, or Amazon Music’s higher tiers). TL;DR … LDAC audio sounds punchier and more precise, taking full advantage of the SRS-XG300’s X-Balanced driver technology.

    Sony has always focused on audio quality, but the company has upped its game in the durability department this time. The SRS-XG300’s IP67 rating means it can be fully submerged underwater for a half hour and come out unscathed. We’d expect this performance from companies like JBL, which have been ramping up the durability of speakers for years, but it’s refreshing to see Sony take this so seriously.

    All these features come with a steep price tag, however. Plus, the SRS-XG300’s most technically impressive feature is limited to folks with a handful of devices, so we couldn’t definitively label this the best portable Bluetooth speaker overall. If you care about audio quality, though, there’s no other portable Bluetooth speaker that deserves your consideration.

    Best budget: Tribit StormBox Micro 2

    Carsen Joenk

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Doubling as a portable charger, this compact speaker is a budget-friendly way to listen to your favorite tunes wherever the water takes you. 

    Specs 

    • Battery Life: 12 hours 
    • Bluetooth Range: up to 120 feet 
    • IP Rating: IP67

    Pros 

    • Price
    • Bluetooth 5.3
    • Powerbank
    • Integrated strap

    Cons 

    • Some distortion at loud volumes 
    • Limited onboard controls 

    The Tribit StormBox Micro 2 is a super-compact second-generation model that delivers solid sound at an affordable price. Similar in size and design to its predecessor, this speaker measures roughly 4 x 4 inches with a rubberized, grippy bottom and durable, textured grill. Currently available only in black, this speaker is pretty sleek and discrete. The power and pairing buttons are integrated onto the front-facing side along with five tiny LED battery life indicators. Three streamlined control buttons top the speaker, and the multifunction circle allows you to play, pause, skip, go back; access Siri or Google Assistant; as well as answer, reject, and switch calls. The plus and minus buttons raise and lower volume.  

    Released in February 2022, this new and improved model is ready to roam with you. The integrated strap is also made of rubber with just enough stretch to fit around bulkier straps, handles, and more. It takes about two seconds to clip onto a backpack or bike handle and won’t accidentally fall off when jostled. With an IP67 rating, it’s ready for just about any terrain you might be traversing, withstanding dust and liquids. The battery can last up to 12 hours to stay connected all day or night; plus, the SmartID USB-C port used to recharge the StormBox Micro 2 can also charge your phone, tablet, or other small accessories. It’s a great speaker to bring on a short camping trip, long hike, day at the beach, or rafting adventure. 

    Primed to use right out of the box, you can quickly pair to your smart device using Bluetooth 5.3 technology, which also extends battery life, lowers latency, and increases range. It’s truly one of the more impressive connections we’ve seen—maintaining a strong signal even through layers of extra-thick, pre-war New York City building walls—the downfall of many Bluetooth speakers that came before the StormBox Micro2.  With that same stable connection, you can add an additional StormBox Micro 2 to double volume and create a stereo pair. 

    The StormBox Micro 2 is tiny but surprisingly mighty, with 10 watts of output power, a 48mm NdFeB driver, passive radiators, and XBass technology making for a pretty solid listening experience. When tested, the volume reached 90 dB, which is plenty loud for outdoor listening. And while there was a bit of distortion at top volumes, the audio maintained overall clarity. There are about 16 level steps, leaving users feeling in control of their volume preferences. 

    When it comes to sound quality, this speaker delivers fairly solid sound. With a frequency response of 70 Hz – 20 kHz, you’ll notice that the bass is a little lacking. Desiigner’s “Timmy Turner” feels a bit lackluster when you can’t experience subbass vibrations; however, we’ve certainly heard worse low end from a compact speaker. Kanye West’s “808s & Heartbreak” feels satisfying with the speaker strapped to my backpack when I can get close to the thump of the passive radiator, though rattling drivers can occasionally distort midrange vocals. At the same time, Phoebe Bridger’s vocals on “Motion Sickness” sat nicely atop drums and guitar backing, and the harmonies on Queen’s “All Dead, All Dead” come through evenly. 

    The sound of the Tribit StormBox Micro 2 is more than adequate for a speaker that retails for under $100, and the extra features and fortifications up the value tremendously. If you’re looking for even more of a steal, though, you can try the Oontz Angle 3, which retails for under $40. 

    What to consider when buying a waterproof speaker

    IP rating 

    The most important thing to check before purchasing a waterproof speaker is its IP rating. IP stands for “Ingress Protection,” which tells you how fortified an electronic device is against dirt, dust, and water. The first digit describes particle protection (dust or sand), and the second liquid. For example, if a speaker has a rating of IP57, the “5” indicates it can keep out most dust and dirt particles. The “7” means you can submerge the device in up to 1 meter of water for 30 minutes before any damage occurs. If you see a rating that looks like IPX7, the “X” means no data is available for that substance. 

    Only speakers with an IPX7 rating or higher can actually claim full waterproof status, though we have made an exception and recommended one stellar IP56 speaker. For full submersion or in-shower use, stick with IPX7 and above; however, an IPX6 can withstand a strong stream of water for a short time, about 100 liters per minute, suitable for rain, strong splashes, and more. IPX5 can handle 12.5 liters of water per minute, more like a squirt gun. IPX5 is technically water-resistant, and we don’t recommend trying out anything less if you’re on the search for a waterproof speaker. 

    Battery life

    If you’re shopping for a waterproof speaker, chances are you’re preparing to take it on the go, which means you need a model with a long-lasting battery. Check out the specs and look for a model that can last between 10 and 20 hours so you don’t have to pause an outdoor adventure to charge your speaker inside. Generally speaking, larger speakers house longer-lasting batteries, but that’s not always the case. You should also note that most speakers drain their battery faster when playing music at loud volumes. So, if you know you’re about to host an all-day pool party, invest in something long-lasting because that speaker with 10 hours of battery might just drop to 5. 

    We should also note that while some speakers can still play music while they charge, you shouldn’t charge your speaker near the water. If it gets wet or falls, that open charging port and live connection will likely lead to speaker destruction and/or a nasty shock. 

    Sound quality 

    While it’s true that portable speakers can have trouble with handling subbass and high-volume demands, there are a few models out there that are a cut above the rest.

    Larger units are generally more equipped to maintain consistent audio even as you turn the volume up, plus they have more room for well-designed subwoofers. A speaker with more active woofers, or even passive “bass radiators,” will do a much better job navigating the rumble in the sonic roads (if you want to know about the physical components of a speaker, check out our primer). As for volume, check out the speaker’s specs and look for a maximum sound pressure level, notated in decibels (dB). Note, however, 100 dB is the loudest you’ll ever really want to go, and only really in an open space for limited periods; it’s akin to listening to a lawnmower at close range and can eventually cause hearing damage. We are satisfied with Bluetooth speakers that maintain good sound quality between 85 dB to 95 dB for larger gatherings. 

    You can also look at the frequency response range, measured in hertz (Hz) and kilohertz (kHz), letting you know the range of frequencies (lows, mids, and highs) the speaker will support. You will commonly see a 20 Hz – 20 kHz range, which is the limit of human hearing for both highs and lows. Just because a speaker lists this range on its specs doesn’t necessarily mean it can reproduce without any dips or shortcomings across the frequency spectrum, however. If you want to do more research before buying, look for a frequency response graph for the speaker in question, often created with audio testing by a third party. Keep in mind that it’s difficult for a portable Bluetooth speaker to support frequencies lower than 40 Hz to 50 Hz accurately without a dedicated subwoofer. Many models utilize enhanced digital signal processing technology to compensate for the lack of low-end. Still, when it comes to small speakers, sometimes we must accept their limitations—swapping subbass for waterproof protection and portability might be an even trade. 

    Connectivity and codecs 

    As Bluetooth technology continues to develop, you have more control than ever over which enhancements you’ll rely on. Common iterations are 4.2, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3 (announced in July 2021). Newer versions typically have higher data transfer speeds, maintain connection across greater distances, and reduce power consumption. Bluetooth can even pair two or more compatible units for stereo sound and increased volume. 

    Diving even deeper, Bluetooth codecs describe how your digital audio data is encoded and decoded from a source device to your speaker or headphones. To get the most from these high-speed transfers, both your receiver and transmitter must be equipped with the same codecs. The most common codec to see is SBC, which every Bluetooth speaker supports. While not the highest-quality codec, it’s a virtually universal, reliable way to transfer data. If you’re an iOS user looking for higher quality, consider a speaker supporting AAC, or Advanced Audio Coding. If you have an Android smart device, select a speaker with aptX/aptX HD/aptX Adaptive (or LDAC) to assure support for higher transfer rates that preserve more data. 

    Special features 

    Additional features come in all shapes and sizes, with some of the most popular related to connectivity and controls. Consider which might be the most beneficial for you: Wi-Fi-equipped speakers, like the Sonos Move and Roam, can pair waterproof speakers with a high-speed home network for high-fidelity audio or voice-activated commands. Voice assistant compatibility means you can control your music with Siri, Alexa, or Google Assistant. Some speakers, like the Tribit StormBox Micro 2, double as a power bank to charge your phone on the go, and many models come with specially designed apps to control your sound with graphic equalization, listening modes, and more. 

    FAQs

    Q: What is the loudest waterproof speaker?

    One of the loudest waterproof speakers is the $499 JBL Boombox 3. It has an IP67 rating and, when tested, reached over 92 dB and delivered copious amounts of deep, rumbling, low-distortion bass. While this speaker is far from compact, its top handle makes it easy to transport and its audio capabilities make it a great choice for outdoor parties. 

    Q: Are shower speakers safe?

    Yes, waterproof/shower speakers are safe and won’t endanger you. Remember, however, you can’t stick just any speaker in the shower; you need a model with an IPX7 rating to be truly waterproof. Along with IP rating, you should make sure to read all set-up instructions for safe use. For example, most speakers need to be completely dry before charging and some shouldn’t be exposed to water if the aux port is in use, etc. 

    Q: How waterproof are JBL speakers?

    Many JBL portable Bluetooth speakers are fully waterproof with an IPX7 rating, including the JBL Flip 5, Flip 6, Xtreme 2, Charge 5, Go 3, and Clip 4 (along with select earlier models). However, “many” does not mean “all,” so make sure you check the specs and IP rating on any model you’re eyeing. If the waterproof rating is between 2 to 5, you may still be able to use the speaker while you bathe, but we wouldn’t recommend taking it into the shower with you or subjecting it to a steady stream of water. 

    Q: Is a waterproof speaker worth it?

    If you spend a lot of time listening to music on the beach or by the pool, a waterproof speaker is well worth the investment. You don’t lose any sound quality, and you get an assurance that your speaker will be safe if it’s splashed or falls into the pool.

    Q: Can water damage a waterproof speaker?

    Yes. Prolonged exposure to water (i.e., leaving your waterproof speaker at the bottom of a pool for several hours) can damage it eventually.

    Q: What is the highest waterproof rating for a speaker?

    Currently, the highest waterproof rating for a speaker is IPX7, which means it can be fully submerged underwater for up to a half hour without damage. This will prevent damage from accidental exposure to water.

    Q: How much does a waterproof speaker cost?

    Depending on features, a waterproof speaker will cost you between $50-$400.

    Final thoughts on finding the best waterproof speakers 

    Getting wet and wild shouldn’t stop you from having your favorite sounds simultaneously rain down. The best waterproof speakers keep you connected on the road, on the go, or in the shower. Rain or shine, you’ll be able to keep the party going if you grab a speaker with a high IP rating, long battery life, and solid connectivity. From there, you can choose the special features important to you. Soon, you’ll be swimming laps to the tune of your favorite 120BPM song and holding a shower concert for your one-person Britney Spears cover band. 

    The post The best waterproof speakers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best hydration packs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-hydration-pack/ Wed, 23 Jun 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=371549
    A lineup of the best hydration packs on a white background.
    Amanda Reed

    We found water backpacks to stave off dehydration during your favorite outdoor activities, including cycling, biking, and running.

    The post The best hydration packs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of the best hydration packs on a white background.
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Backpack is overall the best hydration pack. Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Bike Backpack
    SEE IT

    This pick includes a 2.5-liter water bag that doubles as a comfortable day backpack with even weight distribution, hip belts, and a helmet lock attachment.

    Best for runners The TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack is the best hydration pack for runners. TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack
    SEE IT

    With straps and shoulder pads, this hydration pack secures against the body to prevent movement while running.

    Best on a budget The Water Buffalo Hydration Pack is the budget pick for best hydration pack. Water Buffalo Hydration Pack
    SEE IT

    Equipped with plenty of pockets for storage, adjustable straps, and ultra-light material, this pack doesn’t sacrifice quality for its affordable price.

    Staying hydrated is important for any outdoor enthusiast—which is why hydration packs are essential. In warm climates and the hot summer months, easy access to water is a must when you’re exerting yourself outdoors. Strenuous activity in the sun can quickly lead to dehydration, a surefire way to find yourself sitting out the next ride, run, or hike. But it isn’t easy to lug around jugs or bottles of water. Long-distance runners, hikers, cyclists, and other outdoor adventurers want to move around unencumbered, and that’s where the best hydration pack can come in. Hydration bags come in the form of backpacks or waist packs (like a fanny pack) that contain a reservoir for water storage, so you can strap your water supply to your body and get on the road or the trails. We tracked down five of the best hydration packs for outdoor athletes so if you thirst for options, read on. 

    How we chose the best hydration packs

    Many of us at PopSci are bonafide Sporty Spices. We bike, hike, maybe even ice skate. Some of us also use everything from treadmill desks to under-desk bikes to standing desks and walking pads to keep moving while working. And we’ve spent time with plenty of smart home gym equipment. With all that gear at hand, we personally tested hydration packs while also asking experts and looking at reviews and recommendations to separate the leaders of the (hydration) pack from their dry opponents.

    The best hydration packs: Reviews & Recommendations

    Hydration backpacks come in different styles tailored to running, hiking, or biking/cycling. One of our choices should help you stay hydrated on your next adventure—don’t be afraid to leave that insulated water bottle in the car.

    Best overall: Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Bike Backpack

    Osprey

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bladder size: 2.5 liters
    • Sport: Biking
    • Weight: 1.6 lbs.
    • Backpack size: 10 liters

    Pros

    • Lots of extra features like hip pockets and helmet attachment
    • Can also be used as a day pack
    • Large bladder size

    Cons

    • Bag is not waterproof and doesn’t include a rain cover

    Designed as a bike pack, the Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Backpack includes a 2.5-liter hydration bag and can also be used as a day hiking backpack. Even weight distribution, hip belts, the LidLock helmet attachment, and a sleek look make the Osprey Raptor our top pick for best hydration pack.

    Best for hikers: CamelBak Fourteener 26 Hydration Pack

    CamelBak

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bladder size: 3 liters
    • Sport: Hiking
    • Weight: 2.3 lbs.
    • Backpack size: 26 liters

    Pros

    • Large bladder and backpack capacity
    • Lots of back support
    • Overflow pocket to store an extra layer or other stashables

    Cons

    • Expensive

    The CamelBak Fourteener 26 Hydration Pack is designed for long hikes on hot days. Its reservoir holds 3 liters of water, and it’s designed with dual wing belts and an inner cargo belt to take the weight off your shoulders. More than a hydration backpack, the Fourteener also boasts 23 liters of cargo capacity for snacks and hiking gear.

    Best for bikers/cyclists: Thule Vital Hydration Pack

    Thule

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bladder size: 2.5 liters
    • Sport: Biking
    • Weight: 1.15 lbs.
    • Backpack size: 6 liters

    Pros

    • Retrakt magnetic hose system
    • Large enough to carry a bike pump and repair kit
    • Low center of gravity

    Cons

    • Chest strap sits high depending on body type

    The hands-free design of the Thule Vital 6 Hydration Pack is perfect for bikers and cyclists who need to hydrate mid-ride. Thule’s Retrakt magnetic hose system automatically returns the drinking hose to its place after each sip, so riders always know where to find it. Bikers and cyclists can carry up to 2.5 liters of water and 6 liters of additional storage for a pump and repair kit.

    Best for runners: TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack

    ETON Sports

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bladder size: 2 liters
    • Sport: Running
    • Weight: .9 lbs
    • Backpack size: 2liters

    Pros

    • Low-profile design
    • Lightweight and sturdy
    • External pocket for items that need to be within reach

    Cons

    • Can chafe parts of your body if not covered by clothing

    Runners love the lightweight TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack because of its secure fit. Straps and shoulder pads adjust to fit your body, preventing uncomfortable jostling during your run. The Trailrunner also comes with a free 2-liter bladder, and its intake hole is wide enough for ice cubes—perfect for keeping cool on a summer run.

    Best budget: Water Buffalo Hydration Pack

    Water Buffalo

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Bladder size: 2 liters
    • Sport: Hiking, running, cycling
    • Weight: 7 ounces
    • Backpack size: 12 liters

    Pros

    • Extremely lightweight
    • Splashproof nylon
    • Multi-purpose

    Cons

    • No seal between twist cap and bag on bladder

    The Water Buffalo Hydration Pack holds up to 2 liters of water and has several pockets for storing other essential items so that it can be used for a run, a bike ride, or even as a small hiking backpack. Its Oasis Hydration bladder is designed to keep water fresh and clean while also preventing pesky leaks. With fully adjustable straps, splashproof nylon, and ultralight material, the Water Buffalo will keep you hydrated even if you’re on a tight budget.

    What to consider when buying the best hydration packs

    There are plenty of designs available for different sports, so you can choose the best hydration pack depending on the type of activity in which you’re participating. Packs come in two main designs. The first is the waist pack, which belts around the waist and has slots for one or more water bottles. The other is the hydration backpack, which straps to your back and contains a reservoir, or water bladder. The bladder is connected to a long straw, so you can sip from the pack without taking it off your back.

    Hydration backpacks typically hold more than waist packs. A standard water bottle holds roughly 0.5 liters of water, so that’s about the capacity you can expect from a waist pack. Backpacks come in different capacities, ranging from 0.5 liters to 3 liters of water. Stocking up on as much water as possible might seem like a great idea for a long bike ride on a sweltering day, but don’t forget all that water comes with extra weight—one liter of water weighs over 2 pounds. Water weight is just one of the considerations when searching for the best hydration pack.

    Which activity will you be using the hydration bag for?

    The first thing to consider when shopping for a hydration bag is that most are tailored to a specific activity. Hiking hydration backpacks are usually bulkier and provide more space for storage. Biking/cycling hydration packs tend to offer features for hands-free drinking. Running hydration packs are thinner and lightweight and often come as a vest. While many hydration bags are adequate for cross-training, they tend to lean toward one sport or another, so bear that in mind.

    How much water do you want to carry in your hydration bladder?

    Water weight is an important consideration when choosing the best hydration pack for you. A seasoned hiker going for a day-long climb might do best with a larger, 3-liter hydration bladder. A marathon runner, on the other hand, might prefer a less cumbersome waist pack that holds a single bottle the runner can sip from between water stations (where they can also refill).

    What other features do you want in an outdoor backpack?

    Before making a purchase, consider what extra features the outdoor backpack offers. Some hydration backpacks come with similar features to daypacks, with extra pockets and loops for storage. This is optimal for carrying snacks on long treks when you’ll need to fuel up along the way. Other features of the outdoor gear may include shut-off bite valves to prevent leaks, disconnecting tubes to simplify refills, and multiple portals for easy straw placement.

    How comfortable is the day pack for you to carry?

    Finally, make sure you feel comfortable carrying the day pack. If possible, try it on to ensure the hydration backpack fits properly on your body. Give it a test run while you’re biking, running, or hiking—something comfortable while you’re standing still doesn’t always feel so great when it’s jostling around during a run. Check that the backpack has a hip belt (most do) to relieve pressure on your shoulders. 

    FAQs

    Q: How much does a hydration pack cost?

    Depending on size and features, a hydration pack can cost between $25-$200.

    Q: What hydration bag does the military use?

    Although there is no one official hydration pack that the military uses, CamelBak prides itself on being a favorite among the armed forces. CamelBak offers a line of gear suitable for military use to keep forces hydrated and has even worked with the military to research turning the CamelBak design into a backpack that could hold oxygen. If you’re looking for a military-grade hydration bag, a CamelBak backpack is a top choice.

    Q: How big of a hydration bladder do I need?

    How thirsty are you? In all seriousness, how big of a hydration bladder you need depends on the activity you’re doing, how long you’re active, and other factors (including the color of your urine). CamelBak provides a hydration calculator to analyze these factors and determine the water necessary to keep you at peak hydration. Remember to drink water throughout the day and use a hydration bladder to supplement the fluids lost during exertion.

    Q: Is a hydration pack worth it?

    Staying hydrated is one of the most important things you can do for your body, and it’s often the most overlooked. A hydration pack is absolutely worth it to keep a water source close by during physical activities. There’s no better way to stay hydrated and cool on a long run, hike, or bike ride. In addition, many hydration backpacks provide more than just hydration—most come with additional storage space where you can organize tools, repair kits, phone, credit cards, sunscreen, a packable rain jacket, and other essentials for easy access. If you’re unsure if you need a hydration bag, start with a budget option and see how it suits you. Then you can decide whether to invest in a higher-end hydration pack. 

    Final thoughts on the best hydration packs

    One of the best ways to keep your body going during strenuous activity is to keep it hydrated! Athletes who don’t pay attention to their water intake may begin to experience symptoms of dehydration, which include feeling fatigued, dizzy, and light-headed. Making hydration part of your fitness routine will help you run faster, bike farther, or enjoy a longer hike on a sunny day. There’s no excuse for being thirsty when you’ve got the best hydration pack, tailored for a specific sport, as part of your outdoor gear. Choose one that’s right for you and get out there on the trails, and don’t forget to drink up!

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best hydration packs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best above-ground pool vacuums of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-above-ground-pool-vacuum/ Tue, 06 Apr 2021 17:05:09 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=280997
    A happy man floating on water with his eyes closed.
    Dennis Irorere, Unsplash

    With the best above-ground pool vacuums, you’ll keep your cool as you prep your pool

    The post The best above-ground pool vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A happy man floating on water with his eyes closed.
    Dennis Irorere, Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best budget A sky color extreme power vacuum cleaner with a pool at the back. XtremepowerUS 75037 Climb Wall Pool Cleaner
    SEE IT

    You don’t have to spend a lot of money to get a high-quality above-ground pool vacuum.

    Best overall Nautilus CC Plus blue and black above ground pool vacuum cleaner Dolphin Nautilus CC Plus Robotic Pool Vacuum
    SEE IT

    Two scrub brushes demolish grime in your pool.

    Best battery-operated Blue Pool Blaster Max Cordless above ground vacuum cleaner. Pool Blaster Max
    SEE IT

    Clean small pools or hot tubs in a flash with this rechargeable pool vacuum.

    Above-ground pools are a popular and relatively affordable way to bring warm-weather fun to your yard, but they still require routine maintenance to ensure hygiene and longevity. Unlike inground pools, which feature integrated underground filtration system installation, above-ground pools rely solely on passive external filtration and removable electric pool vacuums to remove the debris that invariably, well, pools, in the water. The best above-ground pool vacuums are essential pieces of pool cleaning equipment designed to quickly and efficiently sweep or even scrub the inside of a pool without requiring draining, making them perfect for folks who want to automate their swimming pool maintenance and save money on cleaning services.

    How we chose the best above-ground pool vacuums

    We’re well-versed in aquatic accessories and have conducted past research on the best above-ground pools. Based on that, we know what an above-ground pool vacuum needs to meet the demands of above-ground pool ownership. We looked to critical reviews, peer recommendations, user impressions, and personal preferences to dive into our choices.

    The best above-ground pool vacuums: Reviews & Recommendations

    Like any outdoor accumulation of water, natural or otherwise, pools are subjected to a variety of elements—from temperature fluctuations to direct sunlight, as well as interactions with plants, wildlife, people, and a host of other environmental factors. Proper and frequent swimming pool maintenance is key to staving off buildups of algae and dirt in your above-ground pool that can stress your filtration system or develop into more stubborn muck that requires a harsher, more labor-intensive deep cleaning.

    When shopping for the best pool vacuum, environmental factors such as pool size and location are key considerations to keep in mind. A suction model that connects to your pool’s filtration system will require no extra electricity to operate but will move randomly and offer less scrubbing power, which can translate into longer cleaning times. If your home has ample power in proximity to your pool, an electric model is by far the most efficient and easy-to-use option and will offer fully automated cleaning with a simple one-plug operation.

    If your home has ample power in proximity to your pool, an electric model is by far the most efficient and easy-to-use option and will offer fully automated cleaning with a simple one-plug operation.

    Best overall: Dolphin Nautilus CC Plus Robotic Pool Vacuum

    DOLPHIN

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Schedule when you want the Dolphin Nautilus to run, and let the automatic pool vacuum do the rest.

    Specs

    • Weight: 19 lbs.
    • Item dimensions: 16 x 10 x 16 inches
    • Style: Automatic

    Pros

    • Automatic scheduling
    • 360-swiveling
    • Two hours of cleaning time

    Cons

    • Heavy
    • Expensive

    The Dolphin Nautilus is one of the best pool vacuums for above-ground and inground pools alike thanks to its easy one-cable operation and an automatic scheduling function that allows users to adopt a hands-off approach to pool cleaning. The Nautilus above-ground pool vacuum robot sports two scrubbing brushes for deep removal of grime, a large twin-cartridge filter to capture debris of every size, and a 60-foot tangle-free cable equipped with 360-degree swiveling for uninhibited travel. An onboard scanner reveals the most efficient path of travel in your specific pool to the Nautilus, allowing for thorough cleaning to take place during its two-hour cycle.

    Best automatic: Zodiac Ranger Suction Side Automatic Above-Ground Pool Cleaner

    Baracuda

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: A deflector prevents this pool vacuum from getting caught on steps, ladders, and corners

    Specs

    • Weight: 15 lbs.
    • Item dimensions: 16 x 9.5 x 40.5 inches
    • Style: Automatic

    Pros

    • Quiet
    • Deflector wheel
    • Side travel capabilities

    Cons

    • Can’t operate in pools deeper than 6 feet

    The Ranger from Zodiac is a skimmer-powered pool vacuum designed for safe and skid-free performance in above-ground pools, including designs with dished-out bottoms up to 72 inches in depth. The vacuum is equipped with a unique deflector wheel that’s designed to prevent the unit from getting stuck on steps, lights, and other features in the pool, and its base disc allows for smooth gliding along the bottom surface, as well as travel in tight areas and up the sides. Because it only operates with one moving part, it’s incredibly quiet and doesn’t suffer from the banging or flapping noises commonly associated with this design, making it one of the best automatic pool vacuums in its class.

    Best electric: Dolphin Escape Robotic Above-Ground Pool Cleaner

    DOLPHIN

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: There are no messy bags to worry about when operating this pool vac.

    Specs

    • Weight: 14 lbs.
    • Item dimensions: 22.44 x 17.8 x 13 inches
    • Style: Automatic

    Pros

    • Hypergrip tracks
    • High suction rate
    • Smart navigation

    Cons

    • Pops wheelies when it changes directions

    The Escape pool cleaner vacuum from Dolphin is one of the best electric pool vacuums on the market thanks to its feature-packed design and relatively affordable price point. Its wheels are equipped with hypergrip continuous tracks for unparalleled traction and easy maneuvering underwater, and it sports a lift-off top filter for easy cleaning access without the need for bags. Active scrubbing, smart navigation, and a 4000-gallon-per-hour suction rating round out this model to deliver an incredible level of above-ground pool cleaning in a form factor of no more than 14 pounds.

    Best battery-operated: Pool Blaster Max

    POOL BLASTER

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: A handheld mode lets you clean up debris while enjoying the fresh, crisp pool water.

    Specs

    • Weight: 5.5 lbs
    • Item dimensions: 15.5 x 6.5 x 7.5 inches
    • Style: Handheld; manual

    Pros

    • No need to connect power supplies or suction feeds
    • Easy maneuvering
    • The battery holds an hour of charge

    Cons

    • Harder to clean lower flow areas and rounded corners because of design

    The Pool Blaster Max features a removable vacuum head for whole-pool cleaning and a small nose cone for collecting the small, stray debris, making it one of the best battery-operated pool vacs available. Its lithium-ion battery provides up to one hour of continuous cleaning on a single charge and the entire unit attaches to any standard pool pole for easy maneuvering. The small stature of this unit also makes it ideal for cleaning smaller pools or hot tubs quickly without the hassle of connecting power supplies or suction feeds.

    Best budget: XtremepowerUS 75037 Climb Wall Pool Cleaner

    XtremepowerUS

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Get a clean pool hassle-free for under $100.

    Specs

    • Weight: 12 lbs.
    • Item dimensions: 40.5 x 5.5 x 17.5 inches
    • Style: Automatic

    Pros

    • Easy to use
    • No electricity required
    • Can clean a large surface area

    Cons

    • Takes a long time to completely clean your pool
    • Tricky to get the weight system balanced

    This wall-climbing automatic suction vacuum from Xtremepower is one of the best cheap above-ground pool vacuums thanks to its simple design and easy-to-use construction. No tools or electricity are required, as this pool-cleaning equipment is powered using your pool’s own pump and is designed to move about the pool at a rate of 8 to 12 feet per minute, delivering waste and debris to your pool’s filtration system without the need for extra wiring or power. This pool vacuum is ideal for basic cleaning of pool floors and lower walls, but it doesn’t scrub surfaces or plan its route, so you’ll have to leave it in the water for longer durations to achieve ideal results.

    What to consider when buying the best above-ground pool vacuums

    Efficient as it is, a passive pool cleaning filtration system is not an end-all-be-all solution to keeping water free of leaves, twigs, bug carcasses, etc. Continuous filtration systems are great for removing small objects and particulates from pools on an ongoing basis, but an automatic pool vacuum is much better suited to collecting larger waste, like leaves and trash, in a controlled and designated manner. This is particularly true in cases when foreign objects become submerged and stick to the bottom or sides of the pool, as traditional filter systems rely upon gentle water currents that may not be robust enough to dislodge stuck material.

    Some of the best above-ground pool vacuums also offer the unique ability to physically scrub the floors and the walls of your pool, which aids in the removal of small dirt and debris that, if neglected, could build up on those surfaces. Booking a thorough manual pool cleaning with a professional crew requires the water to be fully drained—an expensive, time-consuming—so an automatic pool vacuum can be a worthwhile swimming pool maintenance investment for any above-ground pool owner.

    In the pool vacuum world, the majority of designs are either propelled using the pool’s pump and suction system or by a low-voltage electrical current. Water-propelled designs tend to be more affordable, but since they require feeding the collected debris through the pool’s filtration system, more filter cleanings are required after use. Electric pool vacuum cleaners and pool robots tend to cost more upfront, but they operate independently of your pool’s water system and are able to actively scrub things away in addition to vacuuming.

    Automatic vs. manual

    Unlike manual sweepers, automatic pool cleaners operate on a set-it-and-forget-it basis, allowing pool owners to simply hook up the cleaner, drop it into the water, and come back later to collect it. Performed on a regular basis, this passive form of cleaning keeps pools free of buildup for longer stretches. When shopping for the best automatic pool cleaner for your above-ground pool, consider a suction-powered model if affordability and simplicity are high factors on your list of requirements.

    Suction-powered automatic pool cleaners and pool vacuums connect to your pool’s existing filtration system and are powered by low-speed pumps for a slow yet deliberate automated cleaning. The best automatic pool vacuum designs in this class feature tight suction against the pool’s surfaces to deliver maximum cleaning pressure, often using a flexible rubber disc or comparable design to ensure a snug fit. Look for a design that uses soft materials to ensure that your pool cleaner leaves the floors and walls of your pool free of scratches.

    Related: Waterproof gear for the pool

    Electric vs. battery-operated

    Electric pool vacuums are well-suited for larger above-ground pools, as well as long-term installations, as they offer predictable and consistent results thanks to features including active scrubbing and timed cleanings that are unavailable in purely water-powered designs. Although electric models usually cost more than suction-powered designs, their deep feature sets and the enhanced level of control they provide may be ideal for you depending on your needs and routine.

    When selecting the best electric pool vacuum for your above-ground pool, consider a model that offers a smart navigation feature to deliver active pool cleaning for the sake of efficiency. This feature utilizes onboard scanners to plot the best route for your electric pool cleaner and automatically detect walls and obstacles. Unlike water-powered cleaners, electric pool cleaners with this feature won’t amble at random, which translates to a shorter cleaning duration overall.

    Many electric pool vacuums also have the ability to actively climb and scrub the walls of your above-ground pool, resulting in a depth and level of cleaning unparalleled by non-electric models. Because walls are no less susceptible to harboring the growth of algae and other debris, choosing a wall-climbing pool vacuum can offer a much more comprehensive cleaning than that offered by water-powered models.

    Pool owners who prioritize ease of storage and portability may want to consider a battery-operated pool vacuum in lieu of, or in addition to, a traditional above-ground pool vacuum. These designs operate on suction and feature debris collection chambers. While there is a generous measure of manual steering required to operate these designs, they’re nearly unparalleled when it comes to spot-cleaning and super-quick cleanup of small areas because they don’t require any water or electric hookups to take place.
    When shopping for the best battery-operated pool vacuum, go with a design that features interchangeable heads for switching between cleaning wide swaths of the pool and accessing small hard-to-reach areas like corners and the bases of steps. Battery-operated pool vacuums are designed to perform easy user-controlled cleanings, so it’s important that the design be maneuverable and relatively lightweight. Choosing a model with a battery life of at least an hour ensures a continuous cycle without stopping to recharge.

    Budget

    Finding an effective above-ground pool vacuum on a budget can be somewhat difficult due to the niche nature of pool-cleaning equipment, but there are still some great options if you know what you’re getting into. Electric models are largely off the table when shopping for the best cheap above-ground pool vacuum due to their bulk, power, and automated nature, but a suction-powered design can make for a cost-effective alternative if you’re open to compromise.

    Hose length, as well as base materials, are the main considerations to keep in mind when shopping for the best cheap above-ground pool vacs for your needs. Hoses that are too short will prevent a cleaner from traveling the length of the pool, and hoses that are too long can easily become tangled and prevent proper movement. Softer base material will ensure proper contact and suction against the pool bottom, with some designs even allowing extra flexion to occur against the base of the pool walls for some small measure of wall cleaning to occur.

    FAQs

    Q: Should I vacuum my pool of waste or filter?

    Above-ground pools are best kept clean by using a combination of filtration and vacuuming. While filters are essential pieces of pool construction that passively maintain water quality, a vacuum supplements the filter by addressing submerged waste and static buildup that a filter cannot collect on its own.

    Q: How often should you run a pool vacuum?

    Pools should be vacuumed anywhere from daily to once every three days for optimal results. This number is flexible depending on the weather, time of year, and the frequency of pool use, but generally speaking, daily cleanings will all but guarantee that your pool requires fewer deep scrubs and stays sparkling clean longer.

    Q: How long do pool vacuums last?

    While basic suction units and less pricey pool vacuums are designed to last up to two seasons, more complex and expensive pool-cleaning equipment like robotic pool vacuums can last anywhere from three to five seasons before needing replacement.

    Final thoughts on the best above-ground pool vacuums

    Keeping a  pool clean on a continuous basis is no easy task, but the best above-ground pool vacuums on the market can get the job done in style and with relative ease. An automatic pool cleaner is an ideal choice for those who prefer to save their energy and come home to a clean pool, while a battery-operated pool vacuum may be better for folks who need a way to quickly spot-clean their smaller pool or hot tub on an as-needed basis. No matter the size or depth of your above-ground pool, choosing the best pool vacuum is key to keeping your water sparkling clean.

    Related: How to maintain a pool

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best above-ground pool vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best cooler bags of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-cooler-bag/ Wed, 10 Feb 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=369546
    The best cooler bags composited
    Stan Horaczek

    Find the insulated bags to keep your drinks cold as summer heats up.

    The post The best cooler bags of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best cooler bags composited
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The YETI Hopper Flip 18 is the best portable soft cooler. Yeti Hopper Flip 18
    SEE IT

    The coldcell insulation on this pick means your food and drink will stay chilled for hours, even on a hot summer day.

    Best for lunch A small square shape black lunch bag with a zipper at the bottom of it and full with items in it. Carhartt Deluxe Dual-compartment Insulated Lunch Cooler Bag
    SEE IT

    This compact pick is perfect for a solo beach day or keeping your lunch at a cool temperature all day.

    Best for the beach Igloo snapdown cooler bag Igloo 36-can snapdown
    SEE IT

    Designed with a waterproof shell and a puncture-resistant liner, this cooler will endure all your beach days to keep your food and drinks at a perfect temperature.

    You’ll be shocked how frequently a cooler bag comes in handy. They can keep drinks frosty on a hot day at the beach, keep lunch fresh during a long work day, or prevent your frozen groceries from thawing on the way home from the store. You’ll find every type of soft cooler out there, from heavy-duty waterproof versions to simple insulated vessels meant to take minimal abuse. We’ve researched dozens of the most popular models to develop this list of the best cooler bags for every type of user and outing.

    How we picked the best cooler bags

    Cooler bags are a hot commodity. There are dozens of popular models on the market vying to keep your cans and lunch containers cool. We started with a wide survey of the product space and narrowed it down based on personal experience, user feedback, editorial reviews, and general reputation.

    For our hands-on testing, we put several models through typical activities, including trips to the beach and toting lunches. The crew at PopSci has been testing, researching, and recommending products for years with decades of combined experience. Give us a product category to nerd out about and we won’t back down.

    The best cooler bags: Reviews & Recommendations

    From the boat and the beach to the jobsite or campsite, insulated bags keep your food and drinks at your desired temperature. Here are the best cooler bags for no matter where you plan to be this summer, whether it’s landscaping or playing backyard games.  

    Best overall: Yeti Hopper Flip 18

    Why it made the cut: With burly construction, superior insulation, and lots of carrying options, this is the champion of cooler bags.

    Specs

    • Capacity: 6.2 gallons
    • Handle type: Hand and shoulder
    • Waterproof: Yes
    • Price at time of writing: $300

    Pros

    • Built to last forever
    • Waterproof construction includes the zipper
    • Exceptional insulation
    • Easily stands up on its own for loading and unloading
    • Works with Yeti’s optional accessories like water bottles and other bags

    Cons

    • Very expensive

    While the hunt for the abominable snowman may be ongoing, the search for the leading name in cooler bags stops with Yeti. And the Yeti Hopper Flip 18 tops the brand’s offerings because of its versatility and durability. The wide-mouth, 16-inch by 10.75-inch by 13-inch cooler bag has room for 16 cans and weighs only 5.1 pounds when empty. To keep ice cold and beverages frosty, the insulated cooler bag features a leakproof magnetic closing system and closed-cell foam insulation inside. Some reviewers have had problems with the zipper, however. Meanwhile, the bag’s outer shell is waterproof, prevents mildew, and is UV-resistant.

    Best for lunch: Carhartt Deluxe Dual Compartment Insulated Lunch Cooler Bag

    Carhartt

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This basic lunch bag is built super-tough and keeps food cold long enough for really late lunches.

    Specs

    • Capacity: 0.5 gallons
    • Handle type: Shoulder strap and carry handle
    • Waterproof: Yes
    • Price at time of writing: $25

    Pros

    • Extremely durable outer
    • Shoulder and hand straps
    • Extra front pocket for more storage
    • Holds a 6-pack for when you’re off the clock

    Cons

    • Shoulder strap is sewn on so it’s not removable
    • Capacity may be small for some large lunches if you’re also adding an ice pack

    Made of 1,200-denier polyester, this durable lunch bag is built to resist water and protect your food. The bag’s thermal insulation will keep that helping of lasagne warm, or keep up to six beers cold, until you’re ready for a break. And, clocking in at 10 inches by 9 inches by 7 inches and weighing less than 1 pound, the bag can hold whatever you crave. The lunch cooler bag also has a second insulated top compartment, as well as a zippered front pocket for your dry goods or cutlery. And a carry handle and shoulder strap make this Carhartt lunch cooler bag easy to cart, no matter where the jobsite is.   

    Best for the beach: Igloo 36-Can Snapdown

    Stan Horaczek

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With lots of room for beverages and a very secure fold-down design, it’s an ideal way to pack for the coast.

    Specs

    • Capacity: 9.5 gallons
    • Handle type: Hand and shoulder straps
    • Waterproof: Yes
    • Price at time of writing: $65

    Pros

    • Very spacious
    • Front pocket provides extra storage for sunscreen or other essentials
    • Sturdy handles
    • Solid insulation
    • Fold down opening makes for easy loading

    Cons

    • Heavy when fully loaded
    • No dividers if you want to carry other items besides cans

    This rectangular bag unfolds at the top to create a large opening for easy loading. It weighs just 1.7 pounds when it’s empty. That’s crucial because it holds up to 36 cans and ice, which makes it hefty when loaded to capacity. The sturdy hand straps feel very secure, and the included shoulder strap is removable, so it won’t flop around when you’re not using it. The large, flat front pocket is roomy enough to hold silverware, sunscreen, a Kindle, or whatever other beach essentials you might want to lug along. I brought it along to an all-day fitness competition, and it kept my lunch, some protein shakes, and a few cans of energy drinks chilled nicely, even without adding ice. The fold-down opening does a good job of keeping out sand and other debris from the environment, but the lining can wrinkle, making it tricky to clean. This is ultimately a very solid replacement for those wasteful foam coolers they sell at the super market. It’s a lot sturdier, too.

    Best lunchbox upgrade: Yeti Daytrip Lunch Box

    YETI

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Yeti’s tough build quality and standard-setting insulation and cooling system make this the lunchbox to beat if you can get past the price.

    Specs

    • Capacity: 0.75 gallons
    • Handle type: Handle
    • Waterproof: Yes
    • Price at time of writing: $80

    Pros

    • Exceptional insulation
    • Integrates Yeti’s ice pack system
    • Roomier than some other lunch bags
    • Folds down flat for transport when empty

    Cons

    • No shoulder strap option
    • Pricey

    The best thermal bags are designed to stop heat transfer, whether that means stopping your meatball sub from dropping in temperature or preventing your Coors Light from reaching Rocky Mountain high heat levels. And Yeti’s packable Daytrip Lunch Box provides all the versatility you need in a business and pleasure cooler bag. The 8.75-inch by 5.75-inch by 8.75-inch foldable bag has a closing hook that allows you to change its shape—from a standup lunch sack down to nearly flat. The Daytrip is a thermal bag lined with lightweight closed-cell foam, and it snaps closed with magnets for a tight seal.

    Best budget: Coleman Soft Cooler Bag

    Coleman

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This roomy bag provides solid insulation and lots of space to cover various uses.

    Specs

    • Capacity: 9, 16, or 30 cans (depending on model)
    • Handle type: Shoulder strap
    • Waterproof: No
    • Price at time of writing: $25

    Pros

    • Choose the right size for your needs, from nine cans up to 30
    • Promises 24 hours of insulation
    • Flip-open top makes for easy access
    • Folds down when empty for easy transport

    Cons

    • Not waterproof or leak-proof, so best for packaged products
    • No handle for hand-carrying

    Even on 90-degree Fahrenheit days, this Coleman soft cooler bag can keep 30 cans cold for 24 hours because it has heat-welded leakproof seams and robust insulation. While hardly bulletproof, the nylon exterior has an antimicrobial lining designed to keep out odor, mold, mildew, and fungus. Plus, the ripstop fabric is made to prevent tears. That’s plenty of protection for a budget buy. The soft cooler bag also features side handles and an adjustable shoulder strap for easy transport, plus a front pocket to store your keys or bottle opener. 

    What to consider when shopping for the best cooler bags

    Whether you need them for play or work, the best cooler bags have one main job: maintaining your food’s temperature. Bags accomplish this through insulation, leakproof seams, and other features. Just in time for you to pack that picnic, we’ve unpacked what you need to look for in a cooler bag.

    How do cooler bags keep food cold, anyway? 

    Insulation is the primary way the best cooler bags keep food cold—or hot, for that matter. Most bags feature thermal insulation, which keeps food or drinks at the desired temperature by stopping heat transfer. Think about it: If you place a hot mug of coffee on the counter, the beverage will slowly cool to room temperature. But suppose you put it in a concealed environment. In that case, it’ll transfer its heat energy to the inside of that space while simultaneously pulling heat energy from the air around it until the temperature of both the coffee and that concealed space settles somewhere in between.

    A cooler bag’s insulation helps win the heat-transfer battle, and the best cooler bags use foam insulation. The gas bubbles in the foam, as well as the porous spaces between those bubbles, help slow heat transfer. But not all foam is the same. Open-cell foam is lighter and more flexible—making it an easier fit for soft-sided coolers. However, it doesn’t stop the transfer of heat as well as closed-cell foam, which does a better job of limiting the interaction between the gas bubbles. Brands such as Yeti have created foam insulation that’s light and soft enough for bags, bringing the best of thermal to soft-sided coolers. Of course, expect to pay higher prices for technology that so effectively keeps the temperature up (or down).  

    Are there more to the seams than it seems?

    Seams are critical in a soft cooler bag because they prevent leaks of all kinds. One type of leak is apparent—if the seams aren’t tight and your bag of marinating chicken spills, you’ll be cleaning your trunk, as well as your cooler. (Also, if you’re planning to dump ice into your insulated bag, weak seams could lead to a wet picnic blanket.)

    While not as messy, the other kind of leak could be just as problematic. Remember, they work by creating a perfectly concealed environment to prevent heat transfer. Leaky seams compromise that environment by allowing air to flow in and out.

    So what should you look for in a cooler’s seams? Rather than being stitched or glued together, the best cooler bags—the most airtight, that is—are welded together with heat and pressure. The seal on top of the bag also factors in. While zippers are most common—and perfectly suitable—Yeti has developed a magnetic seal that’s nearly as tight as a drybag. 

    Do you need an especially durable cooler bag?

    The outside of your cooler bag is important since that material determines waterproofing and other protections. A fabric’s deniability refers to the thickness of each thread, and anything above “1,000 denier” should provide ample resistance to water, mildew, and the sun. Many bags also feature breathable, elements-resistant linings—à la Gore-Tex.  

    What size suits you?

    Soft bags can have as much capacity as blocky hard coolers. But if you’re planning to use it as a lunch box rather than a camping refrigerator, you’d be foolish to opt for the 30-can model. Still, a bigger bag can accommodate more ice, giving you the option of keeping food chilled for longer. Plus, the advantage of the best soft cooler bags over hard coolers is that they are packable, often folding down or rolling up in a way that lets them take up just a fraction of the space when they’re empty.

    Would extra pockets or handles be handy? 

    When your cooler bag is loaded with a case of beer and a bag of ice, you may need an extra set of hands. Models with handles, as well as shoulder straps, offer more ways—and more places—to grab and lift. Extra pockets are useful, too. Some bags have two insulated pockets, allowing you to keep your leftovers warm on top and your beer cold down below. Front and side pockets provide the perfect places to stash your dry goods or your keys. 

    FAQs

    Q: Are soft coolers waterproof?

    Many soft coolers are waterproof. They feature protective shells or linings that also keep mold, mildew, and the sun’s rays at bay.

    Q: Can I put ice in an insulated bag?

    You can absolutely put ice in an insulated bag. The interior linings of the best options are completely leakproof, with seams that are welded together. Some even include pourable spouts, letting you easily drain water as the ice melts without requiring that you take out all of your food or drinks.

    Q: How long does food stay cold in an insulated bag?

    Depending on the cooler bag you choose, your food can stay cold for hours or days. As a reference point, Coleman’s budget bag boasts that it can keep 30 cans cold for 24 hours. Of course, the quality of the insulation technology is important—with Yeti’s closed-cell foam, such as in the Yeti Hopper M30, leading the way—but size also matters. The bigger the bag, the more ice it can hold and, therefore, the longer your bag will have ice to keep your food cold.  

    The final word on shopping for the best cooler bags

    Whether you’re looking for frosty beers or fresher produce, an insulated bag is like a portable refrigerator that packs up easily when it’s emptied. With thermal bags’ foam insulation systems and airtight seals, the best cooler bags can keep your hot food warm and your cold cuts cool. The size and style you need depend on what you want to eat and drink and where you want to consume it—maybe at a pier or a picnic table. But no matter if you’re looking to tip back a few cold ones on a boat deck or eat a hot sandwich while constructing a client’s back deck, there is an option that’s right for you.  

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best cooler bags of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best metal detectors for gold of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-metal-detectors-for-gold/ Wed, 22 Jun 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=450212
    Best metal detectors for gold composited
    Stan Horaczek

    Between every modern prospector and that little pocket of bullion, there’s a great metal detector.

    The post The best metal detectors for gold of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best metal detectors for gold composited
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Minelab Equinox is the best overall metal detector for gold. Minelab Equinox
    SEE IT

    Complete versatility meets exceptional tools for finding gold.

    Best for beginners Fisher Labs Gold Bug is the best beginner’s metal detector for gold. Fisher Labs Gold Bug
    SEE IT

    An easy-to-use detector specifically designed for gold.

    Best waterproof XP Deus 2 is the best waterproof metal detector for gold. XP Deus 2
    SEE IT

    Deep waterproofing meets good penetration and custom profiles.

    Glimmering in the soil, just a couple inches beneath the sandy upper strata is the nugget you’ve always dreamed of … and a few inches above that, a metal detector for gold. With the best metal detectors for gold, you’ll come to the field equipped with the tools needed to find that pocket, seize that seam, and sniff out the deposits that still dot the hills of the United States and beyond. 

    Metal detectors come in a few basic varieties, but all follow a general principle: an electric charge is used to create a magnetized wave that is directed at the ground; if this wave comes into contact with metal, the metal begins to vibrate in a specific manner, which can be detected by the device. When the sensor finds metal, it alerts the detectorist via a set of earphones or a moving dial.

    The best metal detectors are sensitive enough to distinguish between gold and ferrous metals, are often fully submersible, and can even find gold in difficult soils, such as mineralized black sand. Some detectors also come with special features, such as a gold-probability register that gives you a read on how likely a nugget might be gold or just a chunk of lead. Whatever your price point, sniff out a doubloon or three with the best metal detectors for gold.

    What to think about before buying the best metal detectors for gold

    Before you start prospecting, there are a few considerations to make: 

    Versatility

    Most metal detectors are tuned to a specific frequency. However, some metal detectors do a better job than others at versatility. If you’re looking for a great metal detector for gold that can also moonlight as a detector for silver, relics, and rare ores, then look around for a more versatile detector that has multiple frequencies or swappable heads.

    Price

    Metal detectors get expensive quickly. Before you commit to a metal detector, it’s usually a good idea to determine exactly what you want. While there are budget options out there, if you’re serious about looking for gold, an investment in a true prospector-grade detector could be worth it. Pricier detectors are usually better at piercing deep into the soil where worthwhile nuggets of gold remain, and won’t get thrown off by deposits of other minerals. Still, gold is hard to find. Many true prospector-grade devices leave most hobbyists priced out. For this reason, it’s a good idea to have a budget in mind before you begin to shop.

    Gold-producing environments

    While gold can certainly be found with the right time and know-how, you’re unlikely to find any in Central Park. Before you commit to investing in an expensive metal detector for gold, it’s a good idea to plan your prospecting strategy. When you’re starting out, it’s generally a good idea to search areas that have been known to produce gold in the past, even if larger hauls might come from remote areas, such as Alaska, Northern Canada, or Western Australia. 

    The best metal detectors for gold: Reviews & Recommendations

    With the wrong detector for the job, you may have strayed past a life-changing chunk of gold and never been the wiser. That’s why when we were compiling this list we wanted to make sure we could bring an authoritative selection of metal detectors to the table. Here are our picks for the best metal detectors for gold.

    Best overall: Minelab Equinox

    MINELAB

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With full waterproofing and multiple frequency modes, this excellent gold detector is ready for all valuables in all sorts of environments.

    Specs 

    • Operating frequency: Simultaneous 5, 10, 15, 20, 40 kHz
    • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
    • Detect modes: Gold, Park, Beach, Field
    • Weight: 2.96 pounds
    • Price: $899

    Pros

    • Multiple frequencies and detection modes
    • Solid waterproofing
    • Clear dig tones
    • Superior sensitivity

    Cons

    • Somewhat pricey

    Sometimes a company just hits on a slice of perfect and if you’re after a personal basset hound for the bullion, then the Minelab Equinox is a detector you can’t afford to ignore. Historically, when you bought a metal detector, you picked a frequency and worked within it, but not so here. The Equinox is one of the most versatile machines out there. With multiple simultaneous frequency responses from 5 – 40 kHz, this detector is as capable of nosing into a patch of gold as it is turning up ancient coins, spearheads, and jewelry—all without committing to a mode in advance. That picture is completed with solid target IDs that keep you from digging up nails when you’re looking for pieces of eight.

    The Equinox offers a great combination of automatic settings and options for manual tuning. With its four distinct detection modes, it’s as easy to set it for beach hunting, as it is for the mineralized mountain soils where gold is usually found. It also comes with 8 custom search profiles and allows you to save the settings you most frequently use. Advanced settings allow you to tweak how much target audio you hear. The LCD display sums it all up concisely with simple controls that let you instantaneously adjust detect modes and frequency. Special accessory coils for specific situations are also available to expand your range.  

    Best for beginners: Fisher Labs Gold Bug

    Fisher Labs

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This simple prospector’s detector is easy to use and provides great value in mountainous areas where gold is found. 

    Specs

    • Operating frequency: 19 kHz
    • Waterproofing: Search coil is waterproof
    • Detect modes: All metal, discriminate
    • Weight: 2.5 pounds
    • Price: $439

    Pros

    • Easy to get started
    • Solid auto ground balance
    • Lightweight
    • Viable for other targets beyond gold

    Cons

    • Not great for beach hunting
    • Not as much manual control as some would like
    • Doesn’t offer the same depth as more premium detectors

    Head for the hills without draining your savings with the Fisher Labs Gold Bug. Optimal for new prospectors, the Gold Bug is easy to use and tuned for gold. With simple controls, you won’t need to stay up late with the owner’s manual before you get out sweeping.

    The two-tone detector uses a fixed frequency of 19 kHz and offers an all-metal mode, as well as a discriminatory mode for when the search gets serious. It uses two tones to differentiate metals: a lower tone for ferrous metals like iron and a higher tone for gold. It also features simple, automatic grounding that’s easy to use for new prospectors without constant fiddling. The pro version, on the other hand, allows you to customize grounding and may have slightly better sensitivity. 

    Because of this instrument’s tight focus on gold, it works best in the rocky natural environments where gold is found and less well in some other types of environments. It’s not a great option for those who might be searching the beach and, for this reason, it might not be as appealing to budding detectorists who want more versatility. Its waterproofing is also only so-so, with a submersible head but no waterproofing above that. Still, for such a moderate price point, this is a good deal for those who’ve newly got the gold bug. 

    Best waterproof: XP Deus 2

    XP Metal Detectors

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: A multi-frequency high-end detector with up to 49 individual frequency settings, simultaneous-frequency mode, wireless headphones and pointer, and impressive waterproofing down to 60+ feet.

    Specs

    • Operating frequency: 4 kHz – 45 kHz, and simultaneous multi-frequency
    • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 66 feet
    • Detect modes: Wide discrimination, precise discrimination
    • Weight: 1.65 pounds
    • Price: $1,599

    Pros

    • Top-notch waterproofing
    • Generous frequency controls
    • Good wireless headphone and pointer functions
    • Multiple tones for different metals in pulse width modulation (PWM) and square wave

    Cons

    • Complex menu system and overall steep learning curve
    • Pricy

    Choose your adventure: Snorkel down to a lost shipwreck that’s potentially full of doubloons or scour the mouth of a Canadian basin while your friends sweep the forested banks. Either way, there’s one clear detector for the job. The XP Deus 2 is a formidable submersible detector for serious prospectors that can function up to 60 feet below the surface of the water. 

    The XP Deus isn’t just waterproof, however. This high-end multi-frequency detector is capable of 49 individual frequency settings, as well as an impressive simultaneous mode. The 4 – 45 kHz range offers more than enough room for gold. Wide and precise discrimination modes help you further narrow the field and the machine reports back on the findings with three different tones for ferrous, low conductor, and high conductor metals, in PWM or SQUARE wave. 

    The Deus also delivers some impressive modern touches. The system uses a wireless headset and can pair wirelessly with a pointer. The monitor is IP68 certified for water and dust resistance.

    The Deus II is not a beginner system (at least not without a lot of work); with so many features packed into one, the detector’s controls aren’t exactly intuitive. Still, the steep learning curve will pay off. With such a wide swath of frequencies available, and with such excellent waterproofing, this is one of the most versatile detectors around.

    Best professional: Garrett ATX 

    Garrett

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: With superior sensitivity even for deeply buried objects, saltwater immunity, and great resistance to interference, this is a PI detector that’s perfect for rugged environments and mineralized soils.

    Specs

    • Operating frequency: Unspecified
    • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
    • Detect modes: All metal mode, pinpoint, motion, non-motion
    • Weight: 6.9 pounds
    • Price: $2,380

    Pros

    • Pulse induction detects metals deeper
    • Very rugged build
    • Multi-frequency modes for multiple depths and metals
    • Wide sensitivity scale

    Cons

    • Expensive
    • Bulky and heavy

    A draft horse of the metal detection world, the pulse induction Garrett ATX is a powerful instrument built for deep discoveries in rough environments. Using PI tech, the ATX is built for going deeper and finding gold in rougher locales. 

    This is a stacked instrument with lots of modes and capabilities that will become second nature with time. The ATX leverages a multi-frequency mode to cut deeper into the ground and uncover more metal. It features 13 sensitivity modes, a capable ground-balance function that takes mere seconds to calibrate to the soil you’re working with, as well as ground tracking. Together, the ATX easily cuts through salty soil, seawater, and mineralized crusts. The iron check feature is another nice capability that audibly checks whether an item is iron, and the pinpoint feature helps you lock onto and find nuggets that you’d like to investigate.

    The ATX is indisputably rugged but it’s also heavy—three times as heavy as some of the other leading detectors we follow. However, it’s also sturdier than most. It’s submersible up to 10 feet and won’t be affected by salt water or dust. All in all, if you want a rugged detector that leads the pack in terms of detection depth, this PI detector is it. You’d have to spend considerably more on something like the ultra-premium Minelab GPZ series with its ZVT tech to exceed it.

    Best budget: Bounty Hunter 3410001

    Bounty Hunter

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: For a budget price, this easy detector can still find gold.

    Specs

    • Operating frequency: 6.6 kHz
    • Waterproofing: Waterproof coil
    • Detect modes: Discrimination, all-metal, tone
    • Weight: 3.7 pounds
    • Price: $119

    Pros

    • Budget price
    • Easy automatic ground presets
    • Two-tone audio discrimination
    • Easy interface for different modes and discrimination dial

    Cons

    • Frequency isn’t optimal for gold
    • Finicky in difficult soil and shallow

    It is possible to find gold without spending thousands. The Bounty Hunter 3410001 is an affordable metal detector that’s loved by many. While this VLF detector isn’t optimal for hunting gold in deep bush settings, deeply mineralized soils, or salt water, it’s still a great choice for scanning for gold lost near the surface or small gold nuggets in gravel pits or tailings ponds. 

    The Bounty Hunter might be inexpensive but it doesn’t lack features. Its control array is simple to use, whether you’re throwing a switch to cycle modes, adjusting sensitivity with a dial, or dialing in the disc/notch control to tune to gold. It features simple automatic grounding presets, three search modes, and a nice target strength meter that won’t make your brow furrow. Its frequency response is lower than optimal for gold but, with the right sensitivity setting and patience, that hasn’t stopped hundreds of users from finding lost wedding rings, gold jewelry, and undiscovered nuggets near the surface. 

    With a waterproof coil, this 4-pound detector is capable of following you into multiple environments—even while its build might not be the definition of rugged. Still, at such a great price, it’s one of the most affordable metal detectors out there and a great place to start. Its frequency might not be optimal and its grounding leaves a little to be desired, but you can still hit the jackpot with the Bounty Hunter by your side.

    How we chose the best metal detectors for gold

    The people who love metal detecting love it for the hunt. If you’ve ever swept sandy shores looking for a little pot of washed-up relics or scoured scree fields in Colorado searching for a glimmering something that’s freshly rolled off the mountain, you know the thrill of the hunt. However, a successful hunt can’t happen without two things: the right know-how and the right tools. We researched numerous models from lots of different leading brands, looking for the best of the best. We took into account metal detectors we’d used, ones that peers had recommended, and ones that users spoke favorably of. Along the way, we did a deep dive into the technology behind our picks.

    The methods used to detect metal falls into a few categories. The two most common technologies are very low frequency (VLF), and pulse induction (PI). These technologies both use electromagnetic waves to locate metal.

    VLF detectors use a sensor coil and transmitter coil. The transmitter coil emits constant electromagnetic energy at a tuned frequency. When this energy encounters metal underground, it creates an eddy current in the metal that results in a phase shift of the reflected frequency. The sensor coil is then able to read this phase-shifted frequency pattern. VLF detectors make up the majority of metal detectors out there and tend to be the most versatile. However, they don’t do as well in more mineralized soils without calibration. VLF detectors meant for finding gold will usually be tuned to a higher frequency. Some VLF detectors at higher price points are able to emit varying frequencies.

    PI detectors, on the other hand, emit rapid pulses of electromagnetic energy. These pulses quickly decay. When the pulses encounter a magnetic object they cause an eddy current to form in it. This magnetic eddy current then causes a measurable delay in the decay of subsequent pulse transmissions. PI detectors do a better job than VLF detectors at picking out gold in more mineralized soils and can generally be effective at ID’ing gold at greater depths. The newer technology is also generally quite expensive but can be worth it for veteran prospectors who want a device that will give them the edge in more difficult terrain. 

    Coil size is an important factor in VLF detectors. While smaller coils will generally be more sensitive for gold, larger coils will allow you to scour more ground quickly. Luckily some detectors allow you to swap out coils. These enable you to hone in on a gold-rich area, then switch coils for a more accurate search.

    Detection depth varies substantially. PI detectors usually do a better job at detecting gold that’s buried deeper, sometimes up to two feet. Only the higher-priced VLF detectors have the penetration required to find deep gold.

    Ground balance is used to tune a detector’s frequency to the mineral you’re after (in this case gold) and filter out everything else. A properly ground-balanced detector will filter out the frequencies of other minerals and mineralized earth you encounter, and dial you into gold, at deeper levels, and with better accuracy. Many detectors offer automatic ground balancing, while some allow you to fine-tune their balance manually. 

    Frequency describes the transmission of electromagnetic waves from your detector. Since gold is a very low conductivity metal, higher frequency transmitters with shorter wavelengths do a better job at spotting it. Most detectors will have one frequency that they are able to transmit, while some have a range. We looked for detectors that transmit at good frequencies for finding gold, generally 14kHz and above.

    FAQs

    Q: How much do the best metal detectors for gold cost?

    Metal detectors for gold vary substantially in price. The cheapest metal detector for gold that we think is worth your time will cost about $100, while the highest-end prospector’s detectors can cost close to $10,000. 

    Q: Will any metal detector find gold?

    Yes. Most metal detectors are capable of finding gold but some will do a much better job than others. Since gold has rather low conductivity, metal detectors that use higher frequencies will spot gold better than low-frequency detectors. For this reason, most metal detectors for gold have variable frequencies or are tuned for frequencies above 14 kHz. This isn’t an absolute requirement, however, and some lower-frequency models are still certainly capable of hitting that jackpot. 

    Q: How deep do metal detectors go?

    The depth that metal detectors go can vary substantially. Most cheaper metal detectors only find metal that’s a few inches beneath the dirt. Some of the most powerful detectors can find metal and gold that’s 2 feet underground. Larger nuggets are easier to find at greater depth.

    Q: How do I look for gold with a metal detector? 

    It can be quite hard to find gold. If you’re just starting out it’s a good idea to look for gold in places where gold is known to have been found before. Pick your spot and search systematically. When you find a grain of gold, extend your search in that area, traveling in a grid pattern to ensure you cover the entire area. If the gold is naturally occurring then there’s usually more in the area.

    Q: Can you make a metal detector for gold?

    For a good DIY engineer, a simple metal detector isn’t actually all that hard to make. There are lots of helpful YouTube videos like this one that will help you design your own metal detector with common household items. It should be noted, however, that metal detectors made specifically for finding gold may be considerably harder to make, as the best metal detectors for gold run at higher frequencies than regular metal detectors.

    Final thoughts on the best metal detectors for gold

    Maybe you lost an engagement ring in the backyard ivy and you need a simple detector to help you get it back. Or maybe you’re a dedicated prospector looking to hit the jackpot in the Canadian Northwest Territories. Whatever your motivation, the best metal detectors for gold give you the tool you need to find gold, whether it’s in the wild, or out on the lawn. Great metal detectors for gold use high frequencies that help you pinpoint low-conductivity metals embedded deep in the dirt, easily filter noise from mineralized dirt, and are rugged enough to work in lots of environments.

    For one of the deepest piercing detectors out there, consider the pulse induction Garrett ATX, which is rugged enough to rely on anywhere. If you’ve got an eye for tracking some shekels in the surf, the XP Deus 2 not only has some of the best waterproofing out there, it’ll do a great job in lots of different environments. If you’re just getting your feet wet detecting gold, the Bounty Hunter 3410001 is both affordable and easy to use; it’s a great instrument for those who want to learn the ropes or dig up jewelry from the yard. Finally, the Minelab Equinox is a metal detector that no one can afford to ignore. With superior tech, the Minelab’s completely customizable controls allow you to tune it to excel in any gold-bearing environment.

    The post The best metal detectors for gold of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-gravel-driveways/ Fri, 19 Aug 2022 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=463653
    Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
    Tony Ware

    Cut through the snow, not your driveway.

    The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
    Tony Ware

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best Overall Honda Power Equipment HSS928AATD is the best overall snow blower for gravel driveways. Honda Power Equipment HSS724AAWD
    SEE IT

    With an easy electric start and adjustable auger height, this beast of a blower will carve a path through frozen precipitation in no time.

    Best Electric EGO SNT2400 is the best electric snow blower for gravel driveways. EGO SNT2400
    SEE IT

    More eco-friendly, as well as noise pollution negligible, than gas-powered blowers, this electric option is still highly efficient.

    Best for Long Driveways Briggs & Stratton 1696619 is the best snow blower for gravel driveways for long driveways. Briggs & Stratton 1696619
    SEE IT

    A robust control panel, powerful engine, and highly flexible chute allow for a high level of precision, perfect for a long, winding driveway needing navigating.

    You might be avoiding snow blowers for gravel driveways because you’ve heard they’ll kick up rocks and damage your property. At the same time, shoveling out your entire driveway probably sounds like a horrid chore. The answer is a two-stage or three-stage snow blower, capable of skimming across the top of your driveway, removing the majority of snow while leaving your driveway intact. If you feel like picking the right machine for the job has you between a bunch of rocks and a hard place, we’ve made it easier with our list of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

    How we selected the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

    Selecting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is a bit different than choosing the best snow blowers to use in a general sense. The main issue is that you cannot safely use a 1-stage snow blower on gravel driveways. Wheels and treads are another worthwhile consideration. In any event, we had to go beyond the top-rated snow blowers and look at each machine to make sure it would remove your snow and not the ground, without having to resort to snow shovels. We considered critical reviews and user impressions to help us narrow down our list to the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

    The best snow blowers for gravel driveways: Reviews & Recommendations

    The following 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers are all adequate choices for gravel driveways. While the typical choice is going to be a gas-powered 2-stage snow blower, we’ve also got some variety for you. Within this list, you’ll be able to find anything you would want from the category, from heavy-duty snow blowers to the best electric snow blower. In the end, all of the following choices will make for a good snow blower for gravel driveway clearing.

    Best overall: Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower

    Honda

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This heavy-duty snow blower by Honda has the power to get big jobs done.

    Specs

    • Stages: 2-stage
    • Size: Fits in 60 x 44 x 30 inches pre-assembly
    • Weight: 220 pounds

    Pros

    • Easy electric start
    • Adjustable auger height
    • Clears 24-inches wide
    • Expert assembly available

    Cons

    • Very heavy
    • Expensive

    The top of our list belongs to Honda Power Equipment for its sheer power. This beast of a machine can handle 1,500 pounds of snow a minute, with a 24-inch wide clearing opening. Keeping on your gravel driveway should be relatively easy with the tank-like treads on the back two wheels. Be sure to install skid shoes on the bottom of the front section to give your snow blower some lift, but also be aware that the height of the Honda Power Equipment’s auger (the part that gets rid of the snow) is adjustable.

    You can also take advantage of the offered expert assembly, which will be especially useful since the Honda Power Equipment snow blower weighs over 220 pounds. I understand this weight, alongside the hefty cost, is going to turn some heads, but the overall efficacy of the Honda Power Equipment and advanced height adjustment earns it its slot at the top of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

    Best electric: EGO SNT2400

    EGO Power+

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The EGO SNT2400 is one of the few fully electric stage-2 snow blowers that can compete with a gas-powered snow blower.

    Specs

    • Stages: 2-stages
    • Size: 49 x 26 x 45 inches
    • Weight: 154.7 pounds

    Pros

    • Much quieter than gas-powered models
    • Headlights
    • Eco friendly
    • Expert assembly available

    Cons

    • No provided batteries/charger

    Our best electric snow blower for gravel driveways comes in the form of the EGO SNT2400. This product really outshines its gas-powered competitors in that it isn’t churning out noxious fumes into the air while also staying quiet in the mornings to not wake up the kids and neighbors.

    The EGO SNT2400 uses arc lithium batteries to deliver the power of gas without all of the environmental downsides. The batteries also give you the chance for a completely electric but also cordless snow blower-for-gravel-driveways experience.

    Unfortunately, the EGO SNT2400 does not come with the batteries and charger. This does, however, give you some choice and flexibility in what you’re getting, as well as save you some money if you’re an electric fan that already has the needed batteries for other EGO Outdoor Power Equipment. For this model, EGO recommends using two of the 56V ARC Lithium batteries, with the 7.5 Ah model being able to clear an 18-car driveway in a single charge.

    Best 3-stage: Cub Cadet 3X 28”

    CUB CADET

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Cub Cadet is the most accessible 3-stage snow blower on the market. 

    Specs

    • Stages: 3-stage
    • Size: 48.5 x 29.5 x 34 inches
    • Weight: 282 pounds

    Pros

    • Push-button start
    • 4-cycle engine
    • Heated grips
    • Headlights

    Cons

    • No expert assembly option

    When things get rough, such as when you get refrozen snow regularly, it becomes time for a 3-stage snow blower. These hardy snow blowers have an accelerator that pushes through into the heaviest and wettest of snows, giving you the power to get the job done. The Cub Cadet 3X 28” provides this power as one of the most accessible options to the general public.

    Cub Cadet also makes the experience quite comfortable. Heated grips make using the machine palatable even during damp and frigid snowy mornings. You also won’t have to become overly worried about sideswiping your vehicles in those dark Northern mornings due to the high-quality headlamps the Cub Cadet possesses.

    The Cub Cadet 3-stage doesn’t come with expert assembly, but you should be able to assemble it yourself in about 30 minutes. The main part of the machine will come pre-assembled in the box, leaving minimal work to you.

    Best for long driveways: Briggs & Stratton 1696619

    Briggs & Stratton

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: The Briggs & Stratton snow blower offers a lot of flexibility and ease in snow chute control.

    Specs

    • Stages: 2-stage
    • Size: 56 x 29 x 43 inches
    • Weight: 189 pounds

    Pros

    • Robust control panel
    • Highly flexible chute
    • Cold-start engine
    • Expert assembly available

    Cons

    • Difficult self-assembly

    The Briggs & Stratton 1696619 is yet another gas-powered snow blower operating on two stages. What sets the Briggs & Stratton apart from other snow blowers for gravel driveways is the high level of precision it gives in chute control via the control panel. It can rotate 200 degrees from left to right solely from dials at your fingertips. While more complex chute rotations might be viable on shorter driveways, you’ll be thankful for the flexibility along long driveways where different segments of the path will probably require different chute angles.

    Another perk of this model is the powerful Briggs & Stratton 1150 motor that is qualified to work all the way down to -20 degrees Fahrenheit. As part of the “Our Starting Promise” deal, Briggs & Stratton will fix your engine for free if your snow blower fails to start due to cold weather warmer than this point.

    Getting the expert assembly option for the Briggs & Stratton is totally recommended as the instructions, even for those used to assembling store-bought products, come across as a bit arcane and are overall somewhat difficult to parse. Still, take a moment and look through the manual yourself before making a decision.

    Best budget: PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc

    PowerSmart

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: PowerSmart has provided us with a fully powered 2-stage snow blower for under $800.

    Specs

    • Stages: 2-stage
    • Size: 32.3 x 24.8 x 22 inches
    • Weight: 143 pounds

    Pros

    • Great power for the price
    • Relatively lightweight
    • Expert assembly available

    Cons

    • Jiggly chute

    Finally, we have a 2-stage snow blower from PowerSmart. Despite being budget, the PowerSmart is tough enough to get through some pretty difficult snows thanks to a clearing height of up to 21 inches at full 2-foot width. It uses a 212cc standard gas engine with a corded electric start.

    What the PowerSmart lacks in premium features, such as headlights or heated handles, it makes up for by being a solid unit that won’t break the bank. You’ll also notice that sticking to the essentials gives makes the PowerSmart comparatively lightweight at only 143 pounds. Where most units are considerably heavier than me, there’s a lot of comfort in working with a machine in the slippery snow that is more comparable in weight.

    The PowerSmart features a 180-degree rotatable chute. While, in theory, this rotation should be under your control, consumer reports mention that the chute can have a mind of its own from time to time and change its aim. This is particularly noticeable in bumpy terrain. Still, you should be able to get it back under control quickly if you are attentive.

    Things to consider before buying snow blowers for gravel driveways

    While the number of stages is the most important thing to consider when buying a snow blower for gravel driveways compared to one for other use cases, there are other important things to consider before buying such a large, complicated piece of equipment:

    Stages

    At its most simple, we can describe the stage amount as the number of steps and parts used to chuck snow elsewhere. The most important distinction for users wanting to blow snow off the tops of gravel driveways is separating 1-stage and higher-stage snow blowers.

    A 1-stage snow blower, also known as a “snow thrower,” has a more open build and no shielding to protect the ground. The result is snow—and gravel—thrown everywhere! These 1-stage snow blowers are not suitable snow blowers for gravel driveways.

    The 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers, meanwhile, are made for gravel driveways. A large part of this is the addition in most models of skid shoes, which force the machine slightly off the ground. The result is a skimming-off-the-top effect, leaving just a thin layer of snow atop your undisturbed gravel. The main bonus of a 3-stage over a 2-stage is the addition of an accelerator that can help with harder, refrozen snow.

    Please note that other terminology works for these products, as well. For example, 2-stage, dual-stage, and two-stage all work interchangeably. When looking for the best snow blowers for gravel driveways avoid snow throwers, 1-stage snow blowers, single-stage snow blowers, and one-stage snow blowers.

    Expert assembly options

    Regardless of how handy you are, a bit of help putting together a several-hundred-pound machine can be quite useful. This assembly can also ensure that the skid shoes—the part of the snow blower that raises the machine up to not eat your gravel—are attached properly. As a bonus, the cost of getting expert assembly is typically quite cheap. For example, the EGO SNT2400 has an expert assembly option that adds less than 5% to the overall cost of the machine. That being said, be sure to discuss the details with the service provider, as there is usually a clause that allows for an updated estimate based on the complexity of the machine.

    Size & weight

    Picturing your heavy-duty snow blower tossing snow out of your path sounds great as the season approaches, but will you be happy with a large and ultra-heavy machine sitting in your garage all year? Be careful and imagine setting a box with the weight and dimensions of your new product in your shed for a full year. Are you going to be using it enough during the viable season to make it worth having it from spring to fall as well or is it going to be weighing you down more than the full utility that it provides?

    FAQs

    Q: How much does a snow blower for gravel driveways cost?

    A snow blower for gravel driveways can cost anywhere from below $800 to over $3,000. More complex models and, oftentimes, 3-stage snow blowers are likely to cost more than the rest. It is really important to evaluate how often you are really going to be using a snow blower when buying one for gravel driveways due to their high cost. Alternatively, consider budget models like the PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc, which can pay for themselves after just a dozen or so uses.

    Q: Can any snow blower be used on gravel driveways?

    Any snow blower that doesn’t lift the snow from the surface directly can be used on gravel driveways. One-stage snow blowers take the snow from the surface and, in one step (or “stage”) directly displace it. In the case of gravel driveways, 1-stage snow blowers will also remove gravel on the surface as well. As a result, 1-stage snow blowers should not be used for gravel driveways.

    Q: Two-stage vs three-stage snow blowers: what’s better for gravel?

    The 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blowers, unlike the 1-stage snow blowers discussed in the question above, are both suitable for gravel. Instead, the debate on getting a 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blower comes down to how much power you need. Typical consumers will be fine with a two-stage snow blower, but some might appreciate the third stage (acceleration) that can be found in 3-stage snow blowers such as the Cub Cadet 3X 28.”

    Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

    Getting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is easy once you’ve figured out the need to have a 2-stage or 3-stage snow blower at a minimum. The snow blowers presented on this list should appeal to anyone wishing to get something to make the winter more bearable, with the Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower being a particularly strong choice.

    The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-elderly/ Mon, 19 Sep 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=470538
    Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
    Tony Ware

    Don’t let the snow ruin your day.

    The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
    Tony Ware

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall The SnowMaster 824 QXE will power through rough snow with ease. Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE
    SEE IT

    Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

    Best single-stage Clear your driveway before breakfast. Toro Power Clear 721
    SEE IT

    The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

    Best two-stage The snow has got to go with the Storm 2420. Troy-Bilt Storm 2420
    SEE IT

    The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

    Snow blowers can make quick work of clearing snowy walkways and long driveways after a major snowstorm. They make snow removal easier for everyone, but can be especially helpful for older homeowners who may struggle with shoveling. Using one takes less time, strength, and stamina than using a shovel, which can be especially risky for anyone with joint and/or back problems. The best snow blowers for elderly people will ensure you can safely clear snow accumulation so you can quickly access your car and walkways.

    Snow removal is serious business

    Snow removal is a normal part of life for homeowners in large swaths of North America, so it’s easy to dismiss the fact that it’s a very taxing activity that can become quite dangerous for people with health issues. The combination of cold temperatures and intense physical exertion while shoveling a driveway can lead to an increased risk for a heart attack, according to the American Heart Association, particularly if you have high blood pressure or cholesterol. Your risk of a catastrophic health event is also higher for people with conditions like diabetes, smokers, and those of us who don’t get to the gym enough.

    Ideally, older adults diagnosed with heart or physical health issues should avoid snow removal entirely. If you can, hire someone to shovel your driveway and walkway. According to Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, clearing snow is always a risky move for older people with physical limitations.

    If that’s not an option, use a snow blower to remove as much snow from your walkways and/or driveway as possible. It minimizes the risk of muscle and back strain (or worse) and can clear a large area more efficiently while limiting your exposure to the elements. Best of all, it doesn’t require as much physical exertion as a shovel. Even then, Ankuda still advised caution:

    “It’s important to physically warm up with stretching, to wear appropriate boots to reduce the chance of slips, and to take frequent breaks,” She said. “The majority of injuries that are related to snow blowers have been due to hand or finger injuries, from people reaching in to clear blockages in the discharge chute. This can be avoided by using a tool or a stick to unclog the machine.”

    The best snow blowers for elderly people: Reviews & Recommendations

    It can be hard to balance picking a snow blower that’s powerful enough to handle any situation and one that will actually make clearing snow safer and easier. There are a lot of variables at play, from the size of your property to the amount of snowfall you get annually, so you’ll have to use your best judgment when choosing what works best for you. That said, we think our picks for the best snow blowers for elderly people will make it easier to clear snow no matter what.

    Best overall: Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE

    Homedepot

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 55.4 x 25.4 x 43 inches (DWH)
    • Weight: 131 pounds
    • Type: Single-stage
    • Clearing width: 24 inches
    • Power source: Gas

    Pros

    • Wide clearing width
    • Comparable to some two-stage models
    • Personal Pace system

    Cons

    • Expensive

    Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE is a single-stage gas-powered snow blower that features a clearing width of 24 inches and a push-to-start button. We like this model because of its “Personal Pace” system, which matches your walking speed with the speed of the blower’s wheels. It sounds unnecessary but it allows you to set the tempo of your snow blowing and keep your footing. Personal Pace also makes it easier to stop the snow blower instantly. 

    The SnowMaster 824 QXE is also relatively light at 131 pounds, making it easy to maneuver, and features a 252 cc engine for plenty of power. Meanwhile, Toro’s snow blower offers an adjustable chute and a unique auger design capable of throwing snow up to 40 feet.

    Best single-stage: Toro Power Clear 721

    Homedepot

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 48 x 21 x 42 inches (DWH)
    • Weight: 84 pounds
    • Type: Single-stage
    • Clearing width: 21 inches
    • Power source: Gas

    Pros

    • Simple, effective design
    • Push-button start
    • Adjustable chute

    Cons

    • Only works well on pavement

    Like our best overall pick, the Power Clear 721 gets high marks because of Toro’s Personal Pace system, an adjustable chute, and an electric start button. The gas-powered engine is a less powerful 212cc, but it also weighs slightly less at 125 pounds. Even with a little less power, it can still easily clear wet, heavy snow and toss it up to 40 feet. 

    Best two-stage: Troy-Bilt Storm 2420

    Homedepot

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 49 x 25 x 33 inches (DWH)
    • Weight: 191 pounds
    • Type: Two-stage
    • Clearing width: 24 inches
    • Power source: Gas

    Pros

    • More powerful two-stage design
    • Self-propelled drive
    • Larger tires

    Cons

    • Big and heavy

    The Troy-Bilt Storm 2420 combines a 12-inch serrated steel auger and a 12-inch impeller, enabling it to plow through deep, heavy snowfall. It has a clearing width of 24 inches, so users should be able to clear a driveway quickly. The machine also comes equipped with 13- by 4-inch X-Trac tires, giving it better traction and mobility over heavier, icier snow. Plus, of course, it has some of our favorite quality-of-life features, including an adjustable chute and an electric start button.

    Best electric: Ryobi Brushless 18-inch Single-Stage Snow Blower

    Homedepot

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: The cordless design, compact size, and additional features make the Ryobi Brushless Whisper an electrifying option. 

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 51.5 x 18.5 x 38.25 inches (DWH)
    • Weight: 46 pounds
    • Type: Single-stage
    • Clearing width: 18 inches
    • Power source: Battery

    Pros

    • Cordless operation
    • Folds up for compact storage
    • Adjustable chute

    Cons

    • Narrower clearing width

    Electric snow blowers aren’t as powerful as gas-powered models, but they require much less maintenance and run quietly. (It also means you don’t need to keep gas cans around in case it snows.)

    Ryobi’s compact electric single-stage blower features an 18-inch clearance width and 10-inch clearance depth, making it the perfect size for lighter snowfall. It’s cordless, powered by a 40-volt (V) battery, so it’s just as maneuverable as a gas-powered model. (There are, in fact, plug-in electric snow blowers.) It has an adjustable chute for controlled snow throwing, a push-button start, and an LED light for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. The Ryobi 18-inch snow blower can also throw snow about 25 feet and, as a bonus, its battery is compatible with other 40V products in Ryobi’s lineup.

    Best gas-powered: Toro Power Max HD 828

    Homedepot

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: With a 28-inch clearing width, adjustable chute, and two-stage design, the Power Max HD 828 was born to clear snow.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 58 x 29.5 x 31.5 inches (DWH)
    • Weight: 310 pounds
    • Type: Two-stage
    • Clearing width: 28 inches
    • Power source: Gas

    Pros

    • Anti-clogging system
    • 28-inch clearing width
    • LED headlights

    Cons

    • Very expensive

    With a wide 28-inch clearing width, gas-powered engine, and adjustable chute, the Toro Power Max HD 828 is a monster snow blower built for clearing large areas after big storms. The two-stage operation can toss snow up to 45 feet, and the machine is self-propelled, so all users need to do is guide the Power Max over the areas that need clearing. It also includes features that make it easier to use, including an electric start button and an LED headlight. As with all gas-powered models, the Power Max is loud. That said, its wide clearing width and self-propelled engine ensure you’ll get the job done quickly.

    Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

    Greenworks

    SEE IT

    Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

    Why it made the cut: This snow thrower from Greenworks will keep your walk clear and won’t cost a fortune.

    Specs

    • Dimensions: 31 x 21.6 x 37 inches (DWH)
    • Weight: 30 Pounds
    • Type: Single-stage
    • Width: 20 inches
    • Power source: Corded electric

    Pros

    • Corded electric design means unlimited runtime
    • Adjustable chute
    • Easy push-button start

    Cons

    • Cord could get in the way

    Snow blowers can be expensive, especially if you need something heavy-duty. If you live somewhere that only gets light snowfall, the GreenWorks 13 Amp is a more affordable snow blower with a clearing width of 20 inches that can throw snow up to 20 feet. For small walkways and driveways, it’s enough to keep things clear. It also includes a push-button start, an adjustable chute, and LED lights. Best of all, it’s only 32 pounds, so it’s very easy to move around. At around $200, it’s a solid deal.

    How we chose the best snow blowers for elderly people

    I’ve been writing about gear and gadgets for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best gallon water bottles to the best smoke detectors.

    To figure out how to specifically select snow blowers for elderly people, we contacted medical experts, including Dr. Ankuda, to understand what qualities, if any, might make a snowblower better or worse for older people. We found that snowblowers are easier to use than shovels when clearing large areas.

    From there, we drew on our past research for recommending the best snow blowers and best snow shovels in order to find the most reliable options from the best brands. We also drew on recent reviews from experts and impressions from users to make sure our recommendations are up to date before the coming winter season.

    What to look for when picking the best snow blowers for elderly people

    A good snow blower is fast, effective, and easy to use—but that’s just the baseline, the bare minimum. There are a few technical factors to keep in mind when picking out the gear that’s going to help you get through every winter storm for the foreseeable future. For starters, there are three kinds of snow blowers and you should know which one you want. From there, keep an eye on its size and weight to make sure you can easily move them around. You should also note its clearing dimensions, which describe the swatch of snow you can remove in a single pass.

    Types of snow blowers

    Snow blowers come in three categories, divided by the number of mechanisms they use while clearing snow. “Single-stage,” “two-stage,” and “three-stage” snow blowers each have their advantages and disadvantages.

    Single-stage snow blowers are compact, easy to maneuver, and feature simple controls, making them better suited for elderly people. They feature a spinning metal auger at the front of the machine that scoops up light-to-moderate snowfall and discharges it through a chute. Single-stage snow blowers are simple, which ultimately makes them the ideal option for people with physical limitations. That said, their auger blades may skim the ground during operation, which could pick up rocks and toss them out of the chute, possibly doing damage to nearby vehicles. You should definitely avoid single-stage mowers if you have a gravel driveway.

    Two-stage snow blowers have a fan-like mechanism called an impeller, which helps throw snow out of the chute, as well as the auger found in a single-stage blower. The combination amps up the power, making a two-stage blower capable of clearing up to 23 inches of snow and ice over all types of terrain (even gravel driveways). They also feature a self-propelled transmission with forward and reverse speeds, which assists with pushing the snow blower through thick, icy snow accumulation.

    A three-stage snow blower features an auger, an impeller, and adds an accelerator, which grinds chunks of ice into slush and spits it out with the snow. It’s the best choice for moving heavy, compacted snow and ice up to 23 inches deep. In addition to being more powerful than one- and two-stage models, a three-stage snow blower should work well over unpaved surfaces and/or steep inclines. While you can find them for sale at hardware stores, three-stage snow blowers are generally considered commercial machines. We’d consider them overkill in most situations.

    If you’re looking to minimize physical exertion, a single-stage snow blower is a logical choice. It’s the easiest to use and should be able to handle light-to-average snow. If your health is a concern, you should call a professional when you get heavy snow overnight, regardless of what gear is in your garage.

    Size and weight

    To ensure the snow blower is easy to use, we recommend taking a look at its size and weight. A heavier snow blower may be harder to set up and put away at the start and end of the season.

    Single-stage blowers are more compact, lightweight, and easier to handle, making them an excellent choice for elderly people. Likewise, electric snow blowers tend to be light, between 30 and 65 pounds. Gas-powered models can weigh a lot more—100-300 pounds. While these models are more capable of clearing large areas of snowfall and ice, they’re also some of the biggest, heaviest snow blowers on the market, so they’re not ideal for older adults.

    Clearing width and depth

    Clearing width and depth indicate how much snow a blower can clear in one pass. Clearing width describes how wide a path the snow blower will create, while clearing depth tells you how high a snow pile it can process. A typical single-stage blower can clear a path that’s 11-22 inches wide through up to 8 inches of snow. A two-stage snow blower can clear a patch up to 23 inches deep and 30 inches wide in a single pass, which is great for longer driveways. 

    We recommend most people use a single-stage blower for its more compact size, but a two-stage snow blower’s greater clearing width and depth might be necessary if you get a lot of snow each season. If you need to clear a larger area with denser and possibly icy snow, a two-stage snow blower makes sense. 

    Surface type

    The surface you’re clearing will affect the type of snow blower you need. A single-stage blower is excellent for clearing flat, paved walkways and driveways. However, as we mentioned, they’re not suited for clearing gravel surfaces because they tend to pick up and throw loose rocks. A two-stage snow blower can clear diverse terrain and generally feature larger, more durable wheels that can gain better traction on icy snow. Two-stage blowers may also feature engine-driven wheels capable of handling uneven and sloped surfaces, making them far easier to push in challenging conditions.

    Extra features

    Beyond the core mechanisms, snow blowers can come with lots of bells and whistles that can make your experience easier and/or safer. Some of them, like an automatic safety cutoff, can prevent injuries. Others, like an adjustable throw chute, may make it easier to move snow efficiently.

    Older adults may specifically want to look for a snow blower with features that make it easier to handle. Some snow blowers have power steering to reduce resistance when turning. Many electric snow blowers have a power button instead of the traditional ripcord found on gas-powered models. Some even have headlights for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. These features aren’t standard, so you’ll likely find them on more expensive models, but we think it’s worth the extra expense if they may make clearing snow easier.

    FAQs

    Q: How much do snow blowers cost?

    Snow blower prices vary quite a bit depending on what you’re looking for. A single-stage snow blower generally costs around $500, with prices going up or down depending on whether you get one that’s gas-powered, electric, corded, or cordless. Two-stage snow blower prices start at around $1,000. Keep in mind that snow blowers are heavy-duty appliances, on par with a lawn mower, which is mostly to say that they are expensive, but built to last.

    Q: Is an electric snow blower better than gas?

    Electric snow blowers are easier to maintain and generally lighter than gas-powered models. They’re also smaller and lighter, making them easier to handle. That said, you will either need to charge a battery before using them or possibly plug them into an outlet, which will limit their range. They’re also generally less powerful, so you may not be able to move as much snow.

    Q: What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

    There’s no difference! A “snow thrower” is another name for a single-stage snow blower.

    Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for elderly people

    Older adults with health issues should avoid clearing their own snow. If you have to do it yourself, however, using one of the best snow blowers for elderly people will make digging out much easier and safer. Besides, who wants to actually shovel snow, anyway?

    The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    These Pi Day deals are your chance to turn your home into a pizzeria https://www.popsci.com/gear/pi-day-pizza-oven-amazon-deal/ Tue, 14 Mar 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=519394
    A pizza oven on a chalkboard surrounded by the numbers of Pi
    Amanda Reed

    Pi may be an irrational mathematic constant, but we think this pizza oven deal on Amazon is deliciously a great idea.

    The post These Pi Day deals are your chance to turn your home into a pizzeria appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A pizza oven on a chalkboard surrounded by the numbers of Pi
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Every March 14, the geeky side of the internet convenes to celebrate Pi Day, a day honoring one of the most well-known constants in mathematics. Why March 14? If you remember anything from high school geometry, pi is approximated to 3.14 since it’s 100 trillion numbers long. The day is most often celebrated with pies and other round treats, but who says we can’t enjoy a nice savory circular delicacy today? Get major savings on Pi Day with deals on pizza ovens from Cuisinart, Presto, ooni, and more.

    Cuisinart 3-in-1 Pizza Oven Plus, Griddle, and Grill $197 (Was $299.99)

    Cuisinart

    SEE IT

    This Cuisinart 3-in-1 Pizza Oven—which does double duty as a griddle and grill—is down 34% to $197. That’s more than $100 of delicious, rational savings. It comes with a 13-inch cordierite pizza stone that gives your pizza a crispy crust and prevents an unevenly cooked pie. The cast iron griddle plate and grill give you plenty of cooking space when you’re in a burger mood. A dual-hinged lid flips up for griddling and grilling, and the front door flips down for easy pizza access and to check on food without losing heat.

    Air fryers also make an excellent pie—this Oyster Air Fryer Oven is 10% off, fits two large pizzas, and has 10 additional cooking presets like dehydrate, roast, and (most importantly) pizza.

    It may sound cheesy, but these deals potentially won’t be a-round tomorrow. Get a cut of these deals before they’re gone.

    Here are more hot pizza oven deals:

    The post These Pi Day deals are your chance to turn your home into a pizzeria appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best heated blankets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-blankets/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517407
    the best heated blankets composited
    Stan Horaczek

    The best heated blankets provide comfortable warmth without tons of maintenance.

    The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    the best heated blankets composited
    Stan Horaczek

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best wearable Beautyrest reversible heated blanket on a plain background as one of the best heated blankets Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap
    SEE IT

    Don’t pretend like you don’t want that wrapped around you.

    Best battery-powered Onnetila heated blanket on a plain backdrop The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket
    SEE IT

    A dedicated battery pack provides warmth without the grid.

    Best overall Sunbeam best overall heated blanket Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket
    SEE IT

    It’s comfortable, durable, and easy to use.

    On cold nights, there’s nothing more comforting than getting into a pre-warmed bed thanks to a heated blanket. Heated blankets, sometimes called electric blankets, are just like a regular soft blanket but with wires inside that provide heat when supplied with current. You can even get wireless battery-powered options that allow you to stay warm all night long without the hassle of tangling cords. Whether you opt for smaller single sizes, which are often better at dispersing heat, or share the experience with a large, heated blanket made for two, we have sourced the best heated blankets for you.

    How we chose the best heated blankets

    The writers and editors at Popular Science have decades of combined experience in writing about, reviewing, and recommending products across a wide variety of categories. For this list of the best heated blankets, we relied on spec comparisons, personal experience, editorial reviews, and user feedback. We prioritize reliability here at Popular Science, so we emphasized models that promise to last several years. While we haven’t tested them for years to guarantee durability, we prioritize brands with solid reputations and models built with long-lasting materials.

    The best heated blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

    Our picks for the best heated blankets promise to keep you toasty even when it’s cold outside and drafty in your home. Plus, they’re more convenient than sleeping in even the best, most comfortable heated gloves, socks, and vests. If you want to snuggle up for sound sleep, feel cozy without touching the thermostat, you can relax under the warmth of one of our top picks. 

    Best overall: Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket

    Sunbeam

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: Incredibly soft to the touch, this microfleece blanket was an overall winner for warmth, glowing customer reviews, and smart features, including easy machine washing. 

    Specs

    • Fabric type: Polyester Microfiber
    • Heat Settings: 12
    • Machine washable: Yes

    Pros 

    • Dual controllers
    • Easy to use
    • Soft, cozy fabric

    Cons 

    • Thin fabric means you can feel the wires inside

    Available in a range of colors—including beige, blue, red, and gray—this blanket scored top marks for comfort and durability. To machine wash, simply unplug the remote and toss the blanket in your washer and dryer. 

    The dual controllers and large Queen size make it a good choice for couples sharing a bed. You’ll both be able to adjust the temperature and turn it on or off if your partner falls asleep before you. The control remote is also bright and easy to use, even in the middle of the night. It evenly distributes heat to prevent overheating, and the blanket material, although warm, isn’t too heavy. It comes with a five-year limited warranty for peace of mind. The automatic 12-hour shutoff was the longest shut-off from the blankets tested and means you can fall asleep knowing it will turn off by itself. This is our top choice to help you get a restful (and warm) night’s sleep.

    Best budget: Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw

    Beautyrest

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This affordable, snuggly blanket with a furry feel and three heat settings offers a good mid-range heated blanket for a great price.

    Specs

    • Fabric type: 100% Polyester
    • Heat Settings: 3
    • Machine washable: Yes

    Pros 

    • Affordable price point 
    • Furry fabric offers extra warmth

    Cons 

    • Only one size (oversize throw) available 
    • Controller overheats if covered by the blanket

    The heating wires are laid throughout this throw in an “S” pattern, evenly distributing heat. Although only available in one size, the oversized 50 inches by 60 inches, it’s perfect for one person to keep warm. Expect heat ranges of 85 to 105 degrees Fahrenheit, although the long fur provides additional warmth as well. You’ll be limited to just three heat settings, but this heated blanket still offers good value for money at such a reasonable price. 

    The two-hour auto shut-off provides peace of mind, although if you like to snuggle up while you watch TV before bed, you might need to reset it to keep you warm as you sleep. Some reviewers complained that the lifespan was short, which you should remember when researching heated blankets to buy. As this blanket is on the smaller side, it could be a great option for keeping warm on the couch instead of at bedtime.

    Best battery-powered: The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket

    Onnetila

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This clever option allows you all the warmth and comfort of your bed at home wherever you go. Whether traveling, camping, or just because you prefer a wireless design in your heated blanket, this product is a top-rated choice.

    Specs

    • Fabric type: Polyester & Polyester Blend
    • Heat Settings: 5
    • Machine washable: Yes

    Pros 

    • Totally portable  
    • Wireless 
    • Modern design

    Cons 

    • Battery life is poor on high setting

    Instead of a bulky controller plugged into the wall, this portable heated blanket comes with a rechargeable large-capacity battery, not unlike a power brick you’d use to charge your phone. The blanket heats up in just five seconds, providing warmth when you need it most. It folds down to fit any 10 inches by 8 inches space, perfect for stowing in the car or a backpack on the road. 

    Once heated, expect 2-8 hours of use, plenty of time to fall asleep soundly. The material is lightweight, machine-washable, and soft to the touch. Although this blanket would work well in bed, it excels as a portable option to keep you warm at sporting events, when traveling, or especially camping or staying in an RV. In fact, it makes a great present for anyone who loves warm gear gifts. However, the five heat settings don’t offer too much variation, and it’s worth keeping in mind that the highest setting will drain the battery considerably. Lower price options are available if a wireless design is not your priority.

    Best for couples: Perfect Fit Ultra Soft Plush Electric Blanket

    SoftHeat

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This very large king-size heated blanket is big enough for two to share at 100 inches by 90 inches. Made from soft micro plush, it comes with two separate heating zones and individual controls to ensure you are both comfortable.

    Specs

    • Fabric type: Polyester Blend micro plush
    • Heat Settings: 10
    • Machine washable: Yes

    Pros 

    • Very large size  
    • Individual controls 
    • Small wires and even heat distribution

    Cons 

    • Expensive

    It’s a perfect solution for couples with different sleep styles and preferences. Not only does it feature separate heating zones and individualized controls, but you can change the temperature silently so as not to wake your sleeping partner. The separate controls mean you can both choose your ideal temperature and sleep soundly. You can also adjust this temperature throughout the night for individualized comfort.

    A large easy-to-grasp dial-style controller and a non-slip bottom make this a very accessible device. If you forget to turn it off, an automatic shut-off at 10 hours will keep you safe. This blanket doesn’t feel overly hot to the touch and doesn’t get hot zones as the heat is evenly distributed. It also features very small wires that cannot be felt through the blanket for ultimate comfort while you both sleep. Choose from three colors—sage green, red or beige—to complement your bedding.

    Best wearable: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

    Beautyrest

    SEE IT

    Why it made the cut: This affordable, wearable, and reversible heated blanket provides additional warmth around the house while you watch TV, work, or relax. Save money by slipping this poncho on instead of turning up the heat.

    Specs

    • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
    • Heat Settings: 3
    • Machine washable: Yes

    Pros 

    • Affordable  
    • Hands-free design 
    • Heats up quickly

    Cons 

    • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
    • Variations in heat

    As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

    The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. Because of the range of colors and styles, this blanket would suit teens in particular. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. 

    Things to consider before buying the best heated blankets 

    While we’re happy to recommend specific models, we also like to provide some insight into what we consider the essential features that come with your new heated blanket. Here are some features and specs to look for while you’re shopping.

    Safety

    You might prefer the reassuring heavy feel of a weighted blanket instead of a heated blanket; after all, they don’t suit everyone. If you prefer to sleep wrapped up in a ball or your temperature fluctuates dramatically during the night, a heated blanket might not suit your needs. It’s also important to keep a few safety precautions in mind:

    Damaged or frayed wires can make heated blankets unsafe. Get into the habit of checking them regularly and rolling rather than folding your blanket for storage. You should also choose a model with an automatic shut-off to prevent overheating. 

    Heat settings 

    The more heat settings your heated blanket has, the more you can customize it to your unique (and changing) needs. Depending on the weather, your other blankets and bedding, or the season, adjust the heat setting to suit your sleep habits best. You might also prefer to choose a heated throw blanket over one that you sleep with. 

    Pets 

    It’s not advised to use heated blankets with pets as they can become overheated and may chew or claw through the wires.

    FAQs

    Q: Is it safe to sleep with a heated blanket?

    If used correctly, heated blankets are perfectly safe to use while sleeping. When selecting your blanket, make sure you choose one with an automatic shutoff so that you can rest easy knowing that you won’t overheat during the night. It’s also important to look after your blanket to prevent wires from shorting and to buy a new one when your blanket gets too old. 

    Q: Do heated blankets use a lot of electricity?

    Heated blankets are very economical and use very little electricity to run, and certainly much less than a space heater or turning up the thermostat.

    Q: Can I wash my heated blanket?

    Not all heated blankets can be machine washed, so it’s very important to check the manufacturer details to make sure you’ll be able to clean your blanket properly. 

    Final thoughts on the best heated blankets

    Heated blankets can be a great way to stay warm on chilly nights, and save money on your heating bills, or just make your bed extra snuggly and cozy. 

    If you share a bed with someone else, it’s a good idea to buy an extra large heated blanket and ensure you both have access to the controls to individualize your sleep space to your comfort level. Even if you don’t like to fall asleep with your heated blanket on, you can still use it to warm up your sheets before bed or opt for a wearable blanket to keep warm around the house.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best tire chains of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-tire-chains/ Tue, 07 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517417
    The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

    Protect yourself from getting caught in a snow or ice storm.

    The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Peerless Auto Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Chains are the best tire chains overall. Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain
    SEE IT

    Peerless Auto-Trac chains offer excellent traction while being one of the easiest sets of tire chains to install.

    Best for trucks Security Chain Company Quik Grip are the best tire chains for trucks. Security Chain Company Quik Grip
    SEE IT

    These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy duty pickup trucks.

    Best budget The Security Chain Company SUper Z6 is the best tire chain at a budget-friendly price. Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain
    SEE IT

    These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy-duty pickup trucks.

    When driving on snowy and icy roads, often the one thing that can keep you from getting stuck is a good set of tire chains. These vehicle accessories consist of metal chains that install around the wheels of your vehicle to maximize traction in snowy and icy conditions, making them a necessity for those who live in regions that see extreme winter weather each year. In fact, some states even require snow chains if traveling in certain mountainous areas during extreme winter weather. Finding the right set can be challenging, as not all tire chains are identical. They come in different sizes, materials, and tread patterns to suit different types of vehicles and varying severities of winter weather. Many models are designed to be easy to install, reducing the time one has to spend out in the cold. Learn what features are vital to consider when shopping for these winter weather vehicle accessories and find out why the models below are some of the best tire chains on the market.

    How we chose the best tire chains

    In reviewing more than 25 sets of tire chains for this article, we considered what sets best suit vehicles ranging from smaller cars to large SUVs and heavy pickup trucks, keeping the following considerations in mind:

    Traction: Although traction isn’t the only thing, it’s clearly the most important factor in tire chains. We chose only models that provided ample traction.

    Durability: I only included chains made from steel alloys that could hold up to supporting the weight of a vehicle in difficult weather conditions. This included traditional tire chains and those that use steel rollers or coils.

    Installation: Tire chains are typically installed in extreme winter weather on the side of a road or in a snow-covered driveway. With this in mind, we only chose tire chains that one could capably install in these conditions. Tire chains with self-tightening features outranked those that required manual tightening.

    The best tire chains: Reviews & Recommendations

    Whatever kind of vehicle you drive, you don’t want to go out in the winter without the best tire chains, because even the best heated gloves, socks, and vests (even a battery-powered electric blanket) don’t keep you as comfortable as getting home and out of the storm safely. We’ve rounded up the best options on the market. from heavy-duty to budget-friendly picks.

    Best overall: Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain

    Peerless Auto Trac

    SEE IT

    Why they made the cut: This pick eliminates the major headache with tire chains—putting them on—with an innovative design that essentially automates the installation process, making them one of the most user-friendly options on the market.

    Specs

    • Material: Manganese alloy chain
    • Shape: Diamond
    • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

    Pros

    • Easy to install
    • Excellent traction with a diamond-shaped pattern
    • Durable steel alloy construction

    Cons

    • A little on the heavy side

    Tire chains generally aren’t user-friendly. Most require you to jack the car up to properly tighten them to the wheel, which often involves paying someone else to do the work. That’s not the case with Auto-Trac’s Peerless tire chains, which use a tensioning system that automatically tightens the chains to the wheel. To install, simply attach the internal cable to the tighteners that run around the outside sidewall of the tire and begin driving to activate the ratcheting system that tightens the chains.

    The diamond pattern of this set of chains not only facilitates the automatic ratcheting system, creating a tight grip around the tires, but it also makes for better performance by creating more surface area and improving traction.

    In addition to being easy to install, this set is durable, thanks to its manganese steel alloy construction and heavier gauge chain links. Of course, that gauge also makes these chains on the heavy side at 15 pounds for the set. With sizes ranging from 14 to 20 inches, this set of chains is one of the more versatile options on the market, capable of fitting light trucks, SUVs, and cars.

    Best heavy-duty: AutoChoice 6 Packs Car Snow Chains

    AutoChoice

    SEE IT

    Why they made the cut: The thickness and coverage of these chains take the traction one can get from a set of tire chains to another level. And while the installation may take longer, it’s less complicated.

    Specs

    • Material: Steel
    • Shape: Squares
    • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

    Pros

    • Heavy-gauge chains provide optimal traction
    • Separate pieces make them easier to install
    • Fits a wide variety of tire sizes

    Cons

    • Installation is more time-consuming
    • Expensive

    One look at this set of tire chains from AutoChoice, and one can see that they are much beefier than other models, thanks to sets of six thick chains for each tire. With their thicker gauge and square design, these chains dig into snow and ice to provide ample traction. The chains are divided into six separate pieces per wheel—a six-pack—which attach independently. The chains have thick straps that consist of tendon material that thread through the rims and tighten to the wheel in a similar fashion to ratcheting tie-down straps.

    This design has both positives and negatives. By having separate pieces, they’re easier to install, as there is no need to untangle and line up a single stretch of chain or jack up the wheel. Simply apply one set, then move on to the rest. On the flip side, attaching six separate sets of chains to each wheel is time-consuming.

    While this set of tire chains is on the pricier side—you’ll need to buy a set of six per wheel—it does include some useful extras, including two pairs of gloves, a long hook to help with mounting, and a fiber-absorbent towel.

    Best low-profile: Glacier Passenger Cable Tire Chain

    Glacier

    SEE IT


    Why they made the cut: Although there is a trade-off in traction, we love the low-profile design of this set of chains, which makes them suitable for most cars.

    Specs

    • Material: Steel rollers
    • Shape: Square
    • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

    Pros

    • Fits type S low-profile vehicles
    • Lighter weight makes them easier to install
    • Affordably priced

    Cons

    • Traction isn’t as good as standard tire chains

    Tire chains can be tricky with passenger vehicles with S clearance, which means there is limited space between the wheel well and the tire. Adding the additional thickness of snow chains can damage the car as the chains scrape against the wheel well when the suspension flexes. In fact, some car manufacturers will even void warranties if they find that a car has used chains that are too bulky for the wheel well.

    Glacier solves that problem by creating tire chains that aren’t really chains at all. Glacier’s tire chains actually consist of a set of hardened steel rollers that run perpendicular to the tire treads and secure to a thick gauge wire cable that runs the circumference of the tire’s outer sidewall.

    The result is a tire chain with a low enough profile that it can fit S-clearance passenger vehicles. And, at 6 pounds, these chains are also easier to install than heavier sets. Keep in mind that there is a trade-off. While these roller-style chains will improve vehicle traction for snowy weather, they don’t provide the same traction as a set of traditional tire chains.

    Best for trucks: Security Chain Company Quik Grip

    Security Chain

    SEE IT


    Why they made the cut: Though they may be tougher to install, you can’t argue with the fact that these chains offer the superior traction and durability that heavy-duty trucks driving on snow-covered roads require.

    Specs

    • Material: Alloy steel chain
    • Shape: Square
    • Size options: 15-20 inch

    Pros

    • Durable all-chain construction
    • CAM tightening system makes installation easier
    • Thicker gauge chains provide superior traction

    Cons

    • Harder to install than other types
    • Won’t work with low-clearance vehicles

    Larger trucks and SUVs require heavy chains that won’t break under intense weight or extreme conditions. Thanks to their durability, these thicker steel alloy manganese chains are one of the best options for full-size trucks. They’re even rated to work with farm equipment and dual-wheeled trucks.

    Security Chains’ tire chains have a square configuration design, which provides maximum start-up traction. We like this set in particular because of the integrated CAM tightening system that eliminates the need to use tensioners to tighten the chains. The Quik Grip chains that don’t have this feature are less expensive, but we think it’s worth the additional cost to save the hassle of purchasing tensioners separately.

    Even with the CAM tightening system, these chains are more difficult to install than other options, but the superior durability and traction they offer make them a must-have for heavy-duty trucks that face severe winter weather. Remember that these chains won’t fit trucks with S-class clearance requirements.

    Best budget: Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain

    Security Chain

    SEE IT

    Why they made the cut: These tire chains are inexpensive and versatile, capable of fitting most cars, trucks, and SUVs. We also like the design, which makes them easier to install than other tire chains by eliminating the need for manual tightening.

    Specs

    • Material: Alloy steel coils
    • Shape: Diagonal
    • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

    Pros

    • No need to manually tighten
    • Low profile makes them compatible with most vehicles
    • Affordably priced

    Cons

    • Steel coils do not provide as much traction

    This versatile set of tire chains from Security Chain is easy to install, affordably priced, and will fit vehicles with restricted clearance around the wheels. They consist of alloy steel traction coils thinner than standard chains, making them compatible with most cars. They only require a quarter-inch of sidewall clearance, so they’re suitable for most cars and SUVs as well as trucks.

    These tire chains are also easier to install than other models thanks to rubber connectors that hold the coils taught, eliminating the need to tighten the chains manually.

    This set of chains also preserves handling better than bulkier chains while preserving such important safety features as anti-lock brakes, traction control, and all-wheel drive. Keep in mind there is a trade-off. The low profile and limited coverage of the coils do provide less traction than larger sets of tire chains.

    Things to consider before buying tire chains

    Traction

    Perhaps the most important trait to consider is how well the chains will keep you from getting stuck. The rule of thumb is rather straightforward when it comes to traction. The thicker the chain and the more coverage on the tire tread, the better the traction. Chains with heavier gauge steel links will dig into snow better than coils or rollers, providing better traction. Keep shape in mind as well: Square-shaped chains may provide better traction for getting started but diamond-shaped chains provide better directional traction, which means better handling.

    Material

    Please pay attention to what the chains are made from, which will determine their durability. Generally speaking, a steel alloy with manganese is considered “high strength” steel, which can better withstand the pressures exerted on it when functioning as a tire chain. While chains may have superior strength, steel alloy rollers and coils are also quite strong. In addition to the chains, pay attention to other materials they use to hold them in place. While rubber and thick nylon straps may be durable enough for cars and light trucks, heavy-duty trucks require all-chain construction.

    Size

    Size is important because the tires must be compatible with the size of the tires on your vehicle. Tire chains are not one size fits all. Most models of tire chains come in a broad range of sizes to suit different tire sizes. Tire chain manufacturers include size charts that correspond to the model numbers of their products. Check the size of your tires (printed on the sidewall of each tire) and match that size to the right model tire chain.

    Installation

    Most likely, you’ll be installing tire chains in inclement weather, so it’s important to purchase chains that you can install as quickly as possible. If you have a car or small truck, consider purchasing a set of tire chains that are self-tensioning. Self-tensioning chains take a little more work to install initially, but they don’t require you to tighten (and retighten) the chains manually.

    FAQs

    Q: Do you need tire chains for all four tires?

    Legally, you only need to have one set of tire chains to travel in mountainous areas during the wintertime. However, if you have a 4×4 vehicle, it’s a good idea to have two sets. Even with a two-wheel-drive vehicle, two sets of chains can improve traction.

    Q: Do chains damage tires?

    When there is ice and snow, tire chains dig into them and don’t put pressure on your tires. However, driving on bare roads for long stretches can cause the chains to dig into your tires and damage them (as well as the road itself). Chains can also damage tires if they are not properly installed.

    Q: Is it hard to drive with snow chains?

    Although snow chains will improve traction and help prevent your car or truck from getting stuck, it is still hazardous to drive in snowy conditions. When driving with snow chains, you should never exceed 30 miles per hour.

    Final thoughts on the best tire chains

    Choosing the right tire chains requires finding a product balancing good traction and easy installation. The Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain excels on both fronts, making it one of the best all-around tire chains you can put on your car or truck. If you’re looking for a set of chains to outfit your heavy-duty pick-up truck, then consider going with Security Chain Company Quik Grip, which offers superior traction and durability.

    Why trust us

    Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

    Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

    The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Weather any storm with this portable generator deal on Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/storm-generator-deals-amazon/ Fri, 03 Mar 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=516793
    A lineup of storm generators on a background with lightning in the sky.
    Amanda Reed

    Supercharge your emergency backup without overcharging your credit card with these powerful deals on Jackery, Champion Power, and Anker generators.

    The post Weather any storm with this portable generator deal on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A lineup of storm generators on a background with lightning in the sky.
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Storms and high winds can knock out your power faster than you can say, “Is that graupel? What is graupel?!?” Keep some lights on—and power essentials like the refrigerator and heat—with these deals on Amazon from some of the best generator brands like Jackery, Champion Power, and Anker.

    Champion Power Equipment 200988 4500-Watt Dual Fuel Portable Inverter Generator $955.90 (Was $1,359)

    Champion Power Equipment

    SEE IT

    This generator is quiet and powerful, meaning you won’t go crazy trying to keep the freezer chest running. Its 14 hours of run time on 2.3 gallons of gasoline means your food will stay cold all night long—or until the power comes back on. This beast also has a plethora of power ports, including a 120V 30A RV outlet, two 120V 20A household outlets with clean power, a 12V automotive-style outlet, plus dual port USB adapters. It’s easy to monitor voltage, frequency, and operating hours with this generator—the EZ start dial makes start-up in Economy Mode even easier by monitoring power consumption in real time. And, a three-year warranty means your dual-fuel generator is covered during plenty of power outages, RV rides, and road trips.

    If you’re looking for a gas- and propane-free option, check out the Jackery Explorer 1000, which is $200 off of $1,099 with a digital coupon—all you have to do is click the “Apply $200 coupon” checkbox. Jackery is one of our favorite solar generator brands, and you’ll enjoy getting this much power for less than $1,000.

    The storm will pass, and these deals will, too—snag them before they do.

    Here are other generator deals we’re charged up for:

    The post Weather any storm with this portable generator deal on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Garmin’s latest running watches pair vivid visuals with your vitals https://www.popsci.com/gear/garmin-forerunner-265-965-news/ Thu, 02 Mar 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=516638
    Garmin new Forerunner 265 and Forerunner 965 models
    Garmin's two newest Forerunners are comprehensively colorful thanks to the AMOLED displays and the fun case and band combinations. Garmin

    The AMOLED displays will offer brighter and richer colors and better visibility in different lighting conditions.

    The post Garmin’s latest running watches pair vivid visuals with your vitals appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    Garmin new Forerunner 265 and Forerunner 965 models
    Garmin's two newest Forerunners are comprehensively colorful thanks to the AMOLED displays and the fun case and band combinations. Garmin

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Garmin already has an extensive lineup of advanced running watches in its Forerunner series, but it just got even larger. The wearable tech company has announced two new smartwatches: the Forerunner 265 and 965. The highlight of the release is their vibrant AMOLED displays, a first for Garmin GPS running smartwatches. Each will offer an optional always-on, full-color touchscreen (though you can lock the display during activity and rely on Garmin’s classic five-button navigation system). We loved the Garmin Forerunner 955, and its fundamentals form the basis of the new models, so we have high expectations for these new additions to the Forerunner family.

    Training features of the Garmin Forerunner 265 and 965

    Garmin’s watches traditionally offer an impressive suite of sensors and performance tracking/analyzing features. As a result, they make great Apple Watch alternatives, especially for athletes. And this all holds even more true with the two new offerings. Like existing Forerunners (and other Garmin watches), they will calculate VO2 max, performance condition, training effect, and more. And all of that data is used to calculate a training readiness score to help you plan your rest better.

    Sleep is a key component of performance, which Garmin clearly understands. Its watches can track your sleep, in part by evaluating heart rate variability, providing a more complete wellness and training picture. And, provided you sleep wearing the watch, a Morning Report summarizes your sleep, your day’s training outlook, and the environmental conditions you can expect. 

    These watches will also offer daily suggested workouts, which adapt after every run to help you improve your running performance and prevent overtraining. The race widget, along with Garmin Coach and PacePro, will provide training tips and predictions for race performance based on specific course details, weather, and performance. They can even measure running power and running dynamics without any additional accessories. Now, however, shall of these metrics will be more visible and vivid indoors and out, thanks to the upgrade from memory-in-pixel displays.

    Forerunner 965 AMOLED display lit up on a wrist at dusk
    The fancy new Forerunner AMOLED display is a beacon of metrics and motivation. Garmin

    Garmin Forerunner 265 details

    The Forerunner 265, priced at $449.99, sits right between the Forerunner 255 Music and 955. It gets the full set of sensors found in Garmin’s advanced fitness smartwatches, including the wrist-based Pulse Ox sensor. The 265 also offers Garmin’s safety features, such as incident detection and LiveTrack.

    As a smartwatch, it easily connects to your phone for smart notifications and allows you to download music from Spotify, Deezer, or Amazon Music to the watch for phone-free Bluetooth listening. And you can use Garmin Pay for contactless payments. 

    The Forerunner 265 will be available in two sizes, each offering different battery life. The 42mm Forerunner 265S promises 24 hours of battery life in GPS mode and up to 15 days in smartwatch mode. The larger Forerunner 265, with a 46mm case, should provide up to 20 hours of battery life in GPS mode and up to 13 days in smartwatch mode. 

    Garmin Forerunner 965 details

    Garmin designed the Forerunner 965 for seriously dedicated athletes. It’s at the top of the Forerunner lineup, priced at $599.99. As a result, it will feature all the same things mentioned above and more. Garmin says it adds “additional performance metrics, built-in mapping, and the ability to store more songs right on the watch” compared to the 265. 

    The 965 also offers a new feature, called load ratio, to “track short-term to mid-term load ratio” to stay healthy while training. Stamina insights will also help track exertion levels for a well-rounded picture of your training. And ClimbPro shows real-time information on climbs during a run, including gradient, distance, and elevation gain. There are also full-color built-in maps for route planning and navigation.

    The 965 will feature a 47mm case with a lightweight titanium bezel. The AMOLED display is Garmin’s largest yet at 1.4 inches (the epix Gen. 2), Garmin’s first AMOLED-equipped watch, has a 1.3-inch screen). Garmin says it will provide up to 31 hours of battery life in GPS mode and up to 23 days in smartwatch mode.

    Pricing & availability

    The Garmin Forerunner 265 will cost you $449.99 for either the 42mm or 46mm versions. It is available for purchase now. The Garmin Forerunner 965 will run you $599.99 and won’t ship until late March/early April, but can be pre-ordered now.

    The post Garmin’s latest running watches pair vivid visuals with your vitals appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    10 time-tested essentials that can help you survive your next hiking trip https://www.popsci.com/diy/hiking-essentials/ Thu, 02 Mar 2023 05:07:12 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=516477
    A black backpack on a weathered wooden bench in the forest, with a silver metal water bottle next to it.
    We hope you packed everything. Markus Spiske / Unsplash

    You don't want to leave these tools and supplies at home when you head outdoors.

    The post 10 time-tested essentials that can help you survive your next hiking trip appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A black backpack on a weathered wooden bench in the forest, with a silver metal water bottle next to it.
    We hope you packed everything. Markus Spiske / Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    A lot can go wrong when you’re hiking or backpacking far from civilization: you could get turned around, become dehydrated, suffer from hypothermia, or get stuck in inclement weather. Whether you’re prepared for those problems depends largely on what’s in your backpack, so you’d better be carrying the essentials. 

    We’re talking about the Ten Essentials, a list first published by outdoor organization The Mountaineers in 1974. This group of items was designed to answer two important questions:

    • Can you prevent emergencies and respond positively if one occurs?
    • Can you safely spend a night or more outside?

    According to Steve McClure, instructor at The Mountaineers and author of the updated 10 essentials in the most recent edition of the book Mountaineering: The Freedom of the Hills, whether you need all 10 will depend on your destination. For example, a short, easy day hike in the frontcountry where you’ll never be out of cell service or more than a short distance from a trailhead or road likely won’t require you to pack an emergency shelter or a firestarter. 

    But for longer hikes in the backcountry, don’t skip any of these important items—even if you’re familiar with the territory or consider yourself experienced. “Stuff happens,” McClure says. “It just does. Eventually it’s gonna happen to you or someone you’re with.” And it’s always best to be prepared. To make packing easy, keep the first seven items in your favorite hiking pack all the time and toss in the last three (plus a map) before you head out the door.

    1. Navigational tools

    “Today we carry five tools for navigation in the backcountry,” McClure says. “These key tools are a physical paper map, a compass, an altimeter app on your phone or a watch with an altimeter, a cell phone GPS app, downloaded digital maps, and a way to contact first responders with a device such as a Garmin inReach.” Just don’t forget extra batteries or a power bank, especially if you’ll be using your phone to help navigate.

    2. Headlamp

    Few hikers who have gotten lost in the woods or fell behind schedule were probably anticipating being in the woods or mountains after dark. So no matter the length of the hike, pack a headlamp or flashlight. Sure, we all have cell phones with built-in lights these days, but those tend to drain the battery quickly, making your phone unavailable for emergency calls or digital maps. Just make sure your headlamp batteries are charged and bring spares, just in case.

    3. Sun protection

    Sunscreen, sunglasses, and other sun protection like sun-protective clothing and wide-brimmed hats are vital, especially in the summer. Just don’t make the mistake of thinking you don’t need this stuff in the winter. No matter the season, you absolutely need to protect exposed skin, especially if you’re at high altitudes where there’s less atmosphere to filter out ultraviolet rays.

    4. First aid

    A first aid kit should never be missing from your pack. How comprehensive it is depends on the hike in question, but even short day hikes near home require at least a simple kit. You can buy a pre-made one or build your own with items like bandages, skin closures, gauze pads and dressings, a roller bandage or wrap, tape, antiseptic, blister prevention and treatment supplies, nitrile gloves, tweezers, a needle, non-prescription painkillers and anti-inflammatory drugs, antidiarrheal medicine, antihistamine tablets, a topical antibiotic, insect repellent, and blister prevention patches. Longer trips naturally require more supplies, and don’t forget personal medications like an EpiPen or insulin.

    [Related: How to remove cactus needles, even without tweezers]

    5. Knife (and other necessary tools)

    A knife or multi tool and repair patches are essential. Wrap a few layers of duct tape around your trekking pole or water bottle and carry a length of paracord and an adhesive patch or two on longer hikes in case your jacket or backpack springs a leak.

    6. Fire

    If the worst should happen, having a way to light a fire for warmth—or an emergency signal—can help you make it through an unexpected night outdoors. But items like matches and tinder are only helpful if you’re in an area with downed wood. Trails above the treeline or in the snow can be lacking in that department. So think more along the lines of whether you have the ability to heat water, McClure explains, suggesting items like a backpacking stove and lightweight pot.

    7. Shelter

    A shelter can mean many things depending on where you’re headed and how long you plan to be out there, but for a day hike, think less “tent” and more “tarp.” McClure brings an ultralight emergency bivy for warmer hikes and a warmer bivy for winter hikes. An emergency blanket or a tarp can also bring peace of mind and potentially save your life in inclement weather. Of course, if you’re backpacking, you’ve likely already packed a tent.

    8. Extra food

    No matter the length of your hike, always bring more food than you think you’ll need. Even on a day hike you might be surprised how quickly your stomach starts to grumble when you’re exerting yourself on a tough trail. So on day hikes, bring extra snacks like trail mix, cookies, or other high-calorie foods. And on multi-day hikes, pack an extra meal or two.

    [Related: What happens to the food you leave outdoors]

    9. Extra water

    Not enough water can quickly cause dehydration, especially in warmer months, and this can lead to a whole slew of additional health problems—it can even kill you. So pack at least half a liter per hour that you plan to be hiking and bring more than you think you need, especially on longer excursions.

    10. Extra clothes

    No matter the season or the length of the hike, always pack an extra layer. Even in the summer, temperatures can drop or wet weather can roll in, so bring an extra item of clothing or two. Depending on the forecast and where you’re hiking, that might be a cozy fleece, a rain jacket, or a lightweight puffer. Check the forecast before you go and bring that extra layer just in case.

    The bottom line

    Each of The Ten Essentials may look slightly different depending on the hike you’re planning, but your goal should be to leave home prepared for any eventuality. Just don’t skimp on important gear in the name of saving weight. Think of it this way, McClure says: “You almost never use your spare tire, but you never think of leaving it at home.” So make counting these 10 a habit, and explore confidently.

    The post 10 time-tested essentials that can help you survive your next hiking trip appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    Get ready for outdoor adventures with camping deals on Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/camping-season-amazon-deals/ Mon, 27 Feb 2023 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=515567
    A Coleman camping tent on a periwinkle background
    Amanda Reed

    Step up your sleeping-under-the-stars game when you spring for these Coleman, Osprey, and Marmot deals on tents, clothing, accessories, and more.

    The post Get ready for outdoor adventures with camping deals on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A Coleman camping tent on a periwinkle background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Although some parts of New England face more snow and are looking to Amazon for snowblowers or snow shovels, the luckier parts of the country are looking forward to spring. And, warmer spring weather brings more opportunities to enjoy the great outdoors. Replace that falling-apart sleeping bag or indulge in a new tent for the family with these outdoor deals on Amazon from popular outdoor brands like Coleman, Osprey, and Marmot.

    Coleman Camping Tent $68.47-$105 (Was $89.99-$129.99)

    Coleman

    SEE IT

    Whether you need a bigger tent to fit more family or friends, or you simply need to replace your current solo sleeper, this dome tent from Coleman—which is up to 30% off, depending on size and color—is easy on the wallet and easy to set-up in 10 minutes. A two-person tent can fit one queen-sized air mattress, while a six-person option can fit two. Its durable frame and Poly guard fabric make it last season after season. If rain is in the forecast, Coleman’s signature WeatherTec system will keep you dry thanks to a tub-like floor, welded corners, and inverted seams to help keep water from getting inside the tent. (No word on if it’s Cocaine Bear-proof, however).

    These camping deals will melt away like flurries on a 37-degree F day—snag them before everyone starts sniffing out tents when the weather gets nice.

    Here are other camping deals we’re scouting out:

    The post Get ready for outdoor adventures with camping deals on Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best ice picks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-ice-pick/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 19:10:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-ice-pick/
    A line-up of ice picks on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    From ice fishing to bartending, these useful tools are perfect for getting a leg up on blocks of ice and frozen surfaces.

    The post The best ice picks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    A line-up of ice picks on a white background
    Amanda Reed

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Cuda SS Ice Pick Cuda Stainless Steel Ice Pick
    SEE IT

    This no-frills pick powers through the most stubborn ice.

    Best for climbing Petzl Glacier Ice Pick PETZL Glacier Ice Axe
    SEE IT

    This lightweight and compact pick is perfect for any expedition.

    Best budget Norpro Ice Pick Norpro, Brown Wooden Handle Ice Pick
    SEE IT

    This affordable pick can power through solid ice in no time.

    Whether it’s floating in our beverages to keep them cool in summer or providing solid footing on top of a wintry lake, ice is something that requires a specific kind of tool: a pick. Finding the right pick to work with ice successfully means first considering the size of the job. The most basic form of ice pick is a small tool for single-handed use with one to three sharp prongs at the end. These are best for use in bars and kitchens, but if they’re large enough, they can work to break down chunks of ice in driveways, parking spots, and other low-stakes situations. For heavy-duty uses like fishing, hiking, camping, and climbing that involve extended time outdoors, a larger ice pick with a thick handle and blade should be used for maximum reliability and efficiency. Below, we’ve broken down a few of our favorite tools and key considerations to keep in mind when choosing the best ice pick for your next task.

    How we chose the best ice picks

    A dull ice pick makes climbing or cubing ice a hassle—and dangerous. To find the best ice picks, we looked at reviews and recommendations, tested them ourselves in our at-home bar areas and during other everyday tasks (we got a lot of old ice lining the sides of our freezers), and conducted heavy research.

    The best ice picks: Reviews & Recommendations

    From sharp ice picks that cut through ice cubes like a hot knife through butter to sporty tools that can help you clear the way for your next adventure, here is what we found in our quest for the best ice picks.

    Best overall: Cuda SS Ice Pick

    Cuda Sports

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Blade material: Stainless steel
    • Weight: .22 lbs.
    • Blade length: 5-½ inches
    • Handle material: Stainless steel

    Pros

    • Tip protector
    • Lanyard hole
    • Easy to hold

    Cons

    • Doesn’t float

    The SS option from Cuda sports a simple and sturdy construction with a durable stainless steel finish to prevent corrosion during use. It’s one of the best ice picks available for all-around use thanks to its 5-½-inch blade that runs through the length of the handle for superior control and strength. A scale pattern on the handle allows users to maneuver this pick to their liking, making it a flexible choice that excels outdoors. Be careful if using this near water—it will sink.

    Best for climbing: Petzl Glacier Ice Pick

    Petzl

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Blade material: Stainless steel
    • Weight: .77 lbs.
    • Blade length: 12 inches
    • Handle material: Aluminum

    Pros

    • Lightweight
    • Great mountaineering axe for price
    • Portable

    Cons

    • Extreme climbers might want something heftier

    The Glacier is a super lightweight ice pick from Petzl that’s designed for anchoring and cutting steps in hard ice and snow with ease. It weighs under a pound and has a length of just over 1.5 feet, so it’s incredibly portable and durable. The steel head and spike are connected in the center by a rust-resistant anodized aluminum handle. More extreme climbers may want a heftier pick, but for most outdoor winter excursions, the Glacier is equipped to punch way above its weight class.

    Best for backpacking trips: Rhino USA Folding Survival Shovel and Pick

    Rhino USA

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Blade material: Coated carbon steel
    • Weight: 2 lbs.
    • Blade length: 6 inches
    • Handle material: Coated carbon steel

    Pros

    • Foldable
    • Has multiple uses
    • Lightweight

    Cons

    • Locking mechanism hard to loosen, per reviews

    This multitool from Rhino USA is one of the best for backpacking trips thanks to its portable, lightweight form factor and the inclusion of a shovelhead as well as a cutting edge for dealing with wood and other debris. Because it’s foldable, this unit is perfect for stowing in a bag and pulling out to assist in clearing trails or preparing areas for camp. It’s made of powder-coated carbon steel and extends to around 23 inches long when fully opened.

    Best for bartenders: Barfame Wood Ice Pick

    Barfame

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Blade material: Stainless steel
    • Weight: .5 lbs.
    • Blade length: Around 3 inches
    • Handle material: Wood

    Pros

    • Food-safe
    • Combo pick hammer and spike

    Cons

    • Tool not dishwasher safe due to wood handle

    This wood-handled option from Barfame is a great choice for bartender and kitchen duties thanks to its simple shape and dual-prong construction. A pick hammer sits at the top of the handle to allow users to break ice with a tapping motion, while the spike at the bottom offers more traditional stabbing functionality. The food-safe steel ensures that the pick is easy to clean and stays free of rust, making this a good ice pick for bartenders facing high-volume tasks.

    Best for home: Fortune Candy Ice Chipper

    Fortune Candy

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Blade material: Stainless steel
    • Weight: Around one pound
    • Blade length: Around 1 inch
    • Handle material: Stainless steel and silicone

    Pros

    • Silicon grip for support and control
    • Made of food-grade materials
    • Sturdy

    Cons

    • Heavy compared to other food-grade items on our list

    This one from Fortune Candy is constructed from thick stainless steel and features three prongs for ice chipping and a durable food-grade silicone grip for added support and control. Extra weight and hefty construction assist users in maintaining a grip in the hand through even the most demanding motions.

    Best budget: Norpro Ice Pick

    Norpro

    SEE IT

    Specs

    • Blade material: Stainless steel
    • Weight: .21 lbs.
    • Blade length: 7 ¼ inches
    • Handle material: Wood

    Pros

    • Easy-to-grip handle
    • Included sheath for protection
    • Great value

    Cons

    • Only good for light use

    This basic ice pick from Norpro is one of the best cheap ice picks available, thanks to its sturdy stainless steel spike and easy-to-grip wooden handle. It measures 7 ¼ inches in length and includes a wooden sheath for easy storage and protection. For light use, this ice pick is an incredibly good value, but you may want to look elsewhere if durability and longevity are your main concerns. Still, the price point is accessible enough to make this a great choice for stocking up on backups.

    What to consider when buying the best ice picks

    The best ice pick for your needs depends on whether you want to use it in the kitchen or the great outdoors. There are some design overlaps between these varieties, but the most flexible ice picks are the ones that excel primarily as either a bar tool or as a climbing tool. Regardless of how you’ll use your pick, sturdy construction and thoughtful design are the key elements to keep an eye on.

    They can be great bar accessories or useful pieces of backpacking gear … or both

    Ice picks are not particularly cost-prohibitive or bulky, but if versatility is your main concern, choose an all-around model that can excel at breaking down the most common ice-related tasks. When selecting the best ice pick overall, choose a model that offers an easy-to-grip handle that can be maneuvered from both the top and the side. This construction will ensure that you can retain control of the pick during even the most forceful motions.

    Another key consideration to look for is a cutting element made of a hard, durable material that extends deep into the handle rather than being simply fastened to the end. This design ensures that torque and leverage are maintained while reinforcing the strength of the handle itself.

    For outdoor adventures, look for an ice axe and ice spikes

    Ice climbing is a popular and fun outdoor activity with many specific considerations and safety requirements to keep in mind. Because of the potentially severe and demanding nature of ice climbing, it’s crucial to select a pick specifically designed to withstand the rigors of the activity.

    When selecting the best pick for climbing, look for a design that offers an easy-to-grip handle and a durable head made of steel or other tough materials. Lightweight construction with included carabiner holes or other fastening design elements ensures that the ice pick is within reach at a moment’s notice without adding extra bulk, which is critical for maintaining mobility. If you’re looking to streamline your climbing gear setup even more, look for a pick that includes a spiked end to add stability on flat surfaces.

    A compact ice chisel should always be a part of your backpacking gear

    The best ice pick for backpacking trips should have a foldable, portable design or be part of a set of foldable tools that are both durable and lightweight. By integrating the design of the pick into a form factor that includes a shovel, spade, axe, or other related backpacking gear, you can cut down on the space used in your bag while maximizing your preparedness for encounters with environmental variables.

    Common backpacking circumstances warrant a dedicated pick, including the need to clear and traverse snowy trails in snow shoes, prepare backcountry campsites, and remove ice from hard surfaces, including wood, rock, and asphalt. As with other types of ice picks, it’s important to pick a harder material like steel to ensure effectiveness and prevent breakage. Because sturdier metals are likely to be heavy, a foldable and compact form factor are essential features to keep in mind when choosing the best ice pick for backpacking trips.

    There’s no fancier tool to add to your cocktail kit than a pick for breaking up ice blocks

    Any serious bartender knows that the quality of ice used in a cocktail directly affects the overall quality and taste of the drink itself. The best ice pick for bartender use allows professionals and amateurs alike to carve ice chips and shaped chunks from larger ice blocks, a technique that allows the formation of cocktail-friendly cube shapes. By having precise control over the shape and quality of ice, bartenders can use one to form chips for frothy drinks, sculpted cubes for serving liquor straight, and everything in between without having to rely on the cookie-cutter approach of an ice machine or freezer delivering uniform and generic ice cube shapes. Carving custom cubes and ice shapes from a dedicated larger block is a great way to ensure freshness, too, when ice is acquired for a specific event rather than stored over long periods of time. An ice pick is a key bartending accessory in your cocktail kit for its unparalleled flexibility, novelty, and class, and it can even break up cubes that have melted together in a pinch.

    They can add a lovely vintage feel to your home bar tools

    You don’t have to be a professional bartender to enjoy the benefits of a classy ice pick at home. Some of the best ice picks for home use are designed to add elegance and a unique flair to your personal bar—whether you’re staying in or entertaining guests. In a bar context, ice picks are perfect for shaving off small beverage-sized chunks of ice off of a larger main cube, which adds to the customizability of beverages and the overall freshness of the ice. Since larger blocks of ice take longer to melt, this system can safely be used over long periods during entertaining without added refrigeration. This mechanism applies equally to breaking up a mass of ice in the storage area of a home ice machine, which can melt and refreeze over time, fusing together.

    When looking for the best ice pick for home use, you can’t go wrong with a durable and understated model that matches the rest of your bar tools. Steering away from branded accessories and opting for a generic metal or silver pick that features food-grade materials is key to ensuring longevity and sustained enjoyment.

    FAQs

    Q: How much do ice picks cost?

    Ice picks dedicated to safety and stability in outdoor environments typically have a price tag corresponding to their critical application. In kitchen environments, however, you don’t need to spend much on an ice pick to get decent results. If you’re looking for the best cheap pick for low-impact applications, turn to a model under $10 with a spike longer than 5 inches to ensure adequate penetration of the ice block you’re breaking apart. It usually costs a little more to find a sturdy pick in this price category that has silicone grips, but wood is an adequate substitute.

    Q: What’s the most durable material for an ice pick?

    Steel is by far the most common material used for ice picks due to its sustained durability properties at a wide range of temperatures. In kitchen picks, food-safe stainless steel is the material of choice. Climbers’ picks and ice picks for backpacking often use aluminum in the handles to cut down on total weight and increase handleability.

    Q: What other uses are there for ice picks besides chipping ice?

    Ice picks have a few key uses besides chipping ice, most of which are within the realm of outdoor recreation. Climbers rely upon them to grant stability while moving across icy slopes, and ice fishers use them to cut holes through ice surfaces.

    Q: Should I purchase an ice pick with a retractable blade?

    A pick with a retractable blade can prevent accidental scratches and scrapes, but most smaller picks have their sheaths and covers for this purpose. In specific cases where you’re moving a lot or digging through a bag, a retractable pick can be beneficial, but in most kitchen and bar contexts, this isn’t necessary

    Final thoughts on the best ice picks

    Ice picks are unique tools that offer a variety of ways to harness the unique properties of ice both in the kitchen and out in the field. Fancy, compact picks are great for chipping away at ice blocks in bars and at home, while larger ice picks and foldable multi-tool picks are the way to go for hiking and backpacking. The best ice pick will allow users to gain control over, break apart, and distribute ice in any context, making it a welcome addition to any collection of kitchen or climbing gear.

    The post The best ice picks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>
    The best cordless lawn mowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-cordless-lawn-mower/ Mon, 29 Mar 2021 12:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=279069
    green grass field
    Fauzan Saari via Unsplash

    Tired of all the noise and fumes from cutting the grass?

    The post The best cordless lawn mowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    ]]>
    green grass field
    Fauzan Saari via Unsplash

    We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

    Best overall Snapper lawn mower that is cordless Snapper XD 82V MAX Cordless 21-inch Push Mower
    SEE IT

    This cordless electric mower has a sturdy steel mower deck with seven different cutting heights and 3-in-1 mulch-discharge-bag versatility.

    Best robotic WORX landroid robot lawn mower WORX WR147 Landroid
    SEE IT

    Mow your lawn without raising a finger.

    Best budget green sun joe lawn mower Sun Joe MJ401C-XR 14-inch 28V Cordless Push Mower
    SEE IT

    The 28-volt rechargeable lithium-ion battery gives you a quarter acre of continuous mowing per charge.

    The gas lawn mower has been the king of lawn maintenance equipment for many decades. It was a fantastic upgrade over mechanical reel mowers with their limited functionality on all but the cleanest, flattest grass. Gas mowers offered unparalleled power and functionality over their predecessors, but they came at the cost of noise and exhaust fumes. Although both of these negative elements have been mitigated over the years, they have by no means disappeared. But now there’s a better way. Electric mowers became popular in the 1970s in response to the desire for a powerful grass cutter that didn’t rely on fossil fuels. These plug-in models proved effective, although limited by access to an outlet, as well as the length of the extension cord. In recent years, improvements in battery technology have given rise to electric mowers that can go anywhere. If you’ve been searching for a lawn mower that is clean, powerful, and quiet, a cordless mower may be your best bet. Read on to find the best cordless lawn mowers to take care of your outdoors. 

    The best cordless lawn mowers will offer outstanding performance with clean, quiet operation

    The best cordless electric lawn mowers offer functionality that compares to traditional gas outdoor power equipment. What’s more, these machines feature emission-free operation, and noise levels similar to, or lower than, plug-in electric mowers. With a wide variety of rotary, reel, and robotic options, there are battery-powered mowers to fit the needs of virtually any residential landscape. If you are shopping for a small lawnmower, a cordless electric type could be an excellent fit. Rechargeable batteries make these mowers possible. Relatively inexpensive lead-acid batteries work reliably, but they rely on potentially hazardous lead and are 10 to 15 percent less efficient than lithium-ion. They also weigh about three times as much as lithium-ion, which makes a significant difference as you push them around the yard. Lithium-ion batteries are considered the premium choice due to their long life, easy-care, lightweight form, and high efficiency. 

    Clean, quiet, and powerful rotary or reel type cordless mowers compare favorably with their gas and plug-in electric counterparts, but are only the beginning of what is possible. Rechargeable battery power and state-of-the-art digital tech also make robotic mowers an intriguing option. You can free up your weekend by letting the self-propelled lawn mower cut the grass for you on a pre-programmed schedule. Still unsure on what the best cordless lawn mower for you will be? Keep reading. 

    Related: This is the Future…of Cutting the Grass

    The best cordless lawn mowers: Reviews & Recommendations

    Best overall: Snapper XD 82V MAX Cordless 21-inch Push Mower

    Amazon

    SEE IT

    Our best overall pick features a sturdy steel mower deck with seven different cutting heights and 3-in-1 mulch-discharge-bag versatility. The powerful battery of this Snapper lawn mower delivers up to 45 minutes of runtime per charge with the standard 2.0 Ah battery, with the option to upgrade to either a 4.0 or 5.0 battery for even longer runtime. Added convenience features include a padded, ergonomic handle, push-button starting, space-saving folding storage, and load-sensing operation that automatically increases power output for thick grass.

    Best for large properties: Greenworks Pro 80V 21-inch Cordless Push Mower

    Amazon

    SEE IT

    If your property is too big for extension cords, but you want the clean, quiet operation of electric mowing, this Greenworks mower could be your pick. The wide mowing deck, 10-inch rear wheels, and extended battery life combine for up to an hour of highly productive runtime. The powerful motor with load sensing technology cuts like a 160cc gas engine, minus the noise and exhaust.

    Best robotic: WORX WR147 Landroid

    Amazon

    SEE IT

    Take back your weekends and still enjoy a consistently fresh cut. After an easy installation and programming, WORX Landroid automatically cuts on the customized schedule that you create. You can control this mower via WiFi and mobile app, or directly on the housing, and onboard sensors automatically adjust for obstacles and rainy weather.

    Best reel mower: Scotts Outdoor Power Tools 2020-16S

    Amazon

    SEE IT

    Give your lawn the cleanest, quietest cut with the scissor-like action of a reel mower. This modern, hybrid Scotts reel mower works with or without the motor. It includes a convenient, removable grass catcher to collect yard debris and grass clippings for composting or disposal.

    Best budget: Sun Joe MJ401C-XR 14-inch 28V Cordless Push Mower

    Amazon

    SEE IT

    The narrow 14-inch cutting path of this Sun Joe lawn mower easily navigates narrow spaces, and takes up minimal storage space. Choose from side discharge, mulching, or bagging the clippings. This is a great choice for small to medium-sized lawns (up to a quarter acre).

    Things to consider when shopping for the best cordless lawn mowers

    If you’ve ever mowed a lawn with the wrong size mower, then you know how important it is to shop around for the best model before buying. One of the benefits of cordless mowers is that they are relatively lightweight. They weigh on average between 40 and 90 pounds, topping out at the lower end of most gas mowers. Mower weight is closely related to the power rating and cutting width.  Larger units require more power, so the beefier battery and motor increase weight. These heavier mowers may be fine for some users, but others may find them unwieldy. 

    Power is another important consideration. A cordless mower’s power is reflected in the combination of battery storage and current. Battery storage is measured in volts (V), while capacity to deliver the electricity, or current, is measured in amp hours (Ah). Multiply V times Ah to calculate the amount of available power for an apples-to-apples comparison. 

    Finally, consider the added features in your landscaping equipment. Self-propelled mowers offer convenience, but they use up a significant amount of power to drive their wheels. The ability to switch between side-discharge, mulching, and bagging offers flexibility for different lawn care needs. Variable blade heights are useful for varying terrains or different times of year. Up next, our reviews.

    FAQs

    Q: How good are battery-powered lawn mowers?

    Battery-powered lawn mowers offer a clean, quiet way to mow the lawn, without the maintenance or environmental damage associated with gas engines. They perform comparably to gas and corded electric mowers in terms of cutting grass. Those with higher power ratings also remove twigs, leaves, and other normal lawn debris, similarly to their gas-fueled counterparts. An electric motor can last for several decades, while the batteries must be replaced at approximately five-year intervals. 

    Q: Is 40V better than 20V?

    These voltage ratings reflect the battery’s power storage capacity, like the size of a fuel tank. They are based on the number of individual cells within the battery pack and how the cells are configured. So a 40V battery has twice the capacity of a 20V battery. Voltage multiplied by amp-hours (Ah) equals the runtime. If the Ah rating is the same as the voltage, the larger battery offers a longer runtime.

    Q: What should I use to clean my lawn mower?

    Avoid getting water on the motor, batteries, and other electrical parts when cleaning an electric mower. Remove the batteries before cleaning. Use a blower or compressed air to remove grass clippings and other loose debris from the engine area, undercarriage, and vents. If needed, scrape old built-up clippings off the deck with a thin, flat tool, such as a putty knife.

    Need to clean up your foliage too? This is the best way to deal with fall leaves.

    The bottom line on buying the best cordless lawn mowers

    With so many great choices, you may find it difficult to choose the best cordless lawn mower for you. The Snapper is a great all-around choice for its performance but also offers the nostalgic look of a gas lawn mower. If you find the tasks of yard maintenance totally unappealing, why not let a robot do it? In the Scotts mower, the superior cut of a reel model with the aid of a powerful electric motor may be the best of both worlds. Buy for performance as well as personal style and you won’t go wrong.

    The post The best cordless lawn mowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

    Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

    ]]>